CA08100005E Vol04 Ibook

Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 4 Circuit Protection

Volume 4:
Circuit
Protection
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
© 2010 Eaton Corporation

All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08100005E / MSC
December 2010
4 Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial 1
Volume 2—Commercial Distribution 2
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection 4
Tab 1—Miniature Circuit Breakers and
Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-1
Tab 2—Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-1
Tab 3—Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses . . . . . V4-T3-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . V4-A1-1
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . . V4-A2-1
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . V4-A3-1
Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection 5

Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control 6
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator
Interface and Connectivity Solutions 7
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions

All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications

This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright ©2019 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Introduction
Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
● Reliability—maintain the ● Efficiency—minimize ● Safety—identify and
appropriate level of power energy usage, operating mitigate electrical hazards
continuity without costs, equipment footprint to protect what you value
disruption or unexpected and environmental impact most
downtime
Using the Eaton Catalog Library

As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
● Volume 1—Residential ● Volume 7—Logic Control, ● Volume 12—Aftermarket,
and Light Commercial Operator Interface and Renewal Parts and Life
(CA08100002E) Connectivity Solutions Extension Solutions
● Volume 2—Commercial (CA08100008E) (CA08100014E)
Distribution (CA08100003E) ● Volume 8—Sensing ● Volume 13—Counters,
● Volume 3—Power Solutions (CA08100010E) Timers and Tachometers
Distribution and Control ● Volume 9—Original (CA08100015E)—Available
Assemblies (CA08100004E) Equipment Manufacturer in electronic format only
● Volume 4—Circuit (CA08100011E) ● Volume 14—Fuses
Protection (CA08100005E) ● Volume 10—Enclosed (CA08100016E)—Available
● Volume 5—Motor Control Control (CA08100012E) in electronic format only
and Protection ● Volume 11—Vehicle and ● Volume 15—Solar Inverters
(CA08100006E) Commercial Controls and Electrical Balance of
● Volume 6—Solid-State (CA08100013E) System (CA08100018E)
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
● The Consulting Application ● The Eaton Power Quality
Guide (CA08104001E) Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com i

Introduction
Icons
Green Leaf
Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton
benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our
promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering
exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers
and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are
designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to
protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation
further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”
Learn Online
When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for
the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,
podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.
Drawings Online
When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the
products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings
and illustrations.
Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.
ii Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and
Supplementary Protectors
Miniature Circuit Breakers and 1.1 Industrial Circuit Breakers
Supplementary Protectors
QUICKLAG® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2
1
QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-5 1
QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
Types QPHGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-8 1
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11
Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 1
Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-16 1
Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF,
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27
1
Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30
1
Solenoid Operator—Remote-Controlled Latching for
Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-33 1
International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-36
Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-39 1
1.2 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers 1
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-47
1
1.3 UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors
FAZ Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-74 1
1.4 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 1
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-94
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-100 1
1
Learn
1
Online
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-1

1.1 Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors
Industrial Circuit Breakers
Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Contents

1 Description
1 Quick Reference
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 QUICKLAG
1 Quick Reference
1 Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out

Continuous Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
1 Circuit
Breaker Circuit Breaker
Ampere
Rating
Number
of
Federal
Spec.
Vac Ratings Vdc Ratings 23
Page
Type Type Code at 40°C Poles Vac Vdc W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 24–48 62.5 80 Number
1 HQP P 10–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 4 — V4-T1-6
1 HQP P 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-6
HQP P 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — V4-T1-6
1 QPHW P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 14a — 22,000 — 5000 4
— V4-T1-6
QPHW P 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-6
1 QPHW P 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — V4-T1-6
4
QHPX P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 42,000 — 5000 — V4-T1-7
1 QHPX P 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-7
1 QHPX P 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — V4-T1-7

4
QHPW P 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 15a — 65,000 — 5000 — V4-T1-7
1 QHPW P 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-7
QHPW P 15–20 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — V4-T1-7
1 QPGFT P, GF 15–40 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-9
1 QPGFT P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-9
Notes
1 1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing.
2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL® listed.
3 Breakers at DC ratings are not UL listed.
1 4 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous.
Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
1 For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-30 to V4-T1-35.
1
1
1
1
V4-T1-2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors
1.1
Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out, continued
Continuous Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
1
Circuit Ampere Number Federal Vac Ratings Vdc Ratings 23
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
Rating
at 40°C
of
Poles Vac Vdc
Spec.
W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 24–48 62.5 80
Page
Number
1
QPHGFT P, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-9 1
QPHGFT P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-9
QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–40 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-9 1
QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-9
QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-9
1
BABRSP B 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-12
1
BABRSP B 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-12
BRRP P 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-31 1
BRRP P 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-31
CLRP P 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-31 1
CLRP P 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-31
BAB B 10–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 4 — V4-T1-12
1
BAB B 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-12 1
BAB B 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — V4-T1-12
BABRP B 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-31 1
BABRP B 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-31
QBAF B, AF 15–20 1, 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-15
1
QBCAF B, AF, GF 15–20 1, 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — —
4
— V4-T1-15
1
QBHW B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 14a — 22,000 — 5000 — V4-T1-12
QBHW B 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-12 1
QBHW B 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — V4-T1-12
HBAX B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 42,000 — 5000 4 — V4-T1-13 1
HBAX B 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-13
HBAX B 15–100 3 240 — — — 42,000 — — — V4-T1-13
1
HBAW B 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 15a — 65,000 — 5000 4
— V4-T1-13
1
HBAW B 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-13
HBAW B 15–20 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — V4-T1-13 1
QBGFT B, GF 15–40 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-17
QBGFT B, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-17 1
QBHGFT B, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-17
QBHGFT B, GF 15–30 1 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-17
1
QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–40 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-17 1
QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-17
QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-17 1
QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-17
QC C 10–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 4 — V4-T1-40
1
QC C 10–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-40
1
QC C 10–100 2, 3, 4 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — V4-T1-40
QCD C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — 10,000 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-22 1
QCD C 10–100 2, 3 240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-22
QCF C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — 10,000 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-41 1
Notes
1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing.
1
2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
3 Breakers at DC ratings are not UL listed. 1
4 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous.
Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. 1
For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-30 to V4-T1-35.
1

Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out, continued

1 Continuous Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
Circuit Circuit Ampere Number Federal Vac Ratings Vdc Ratings 2
1 Breaker
Type
Breaker
Type Code
Rating
at 40°C
of
Poles Vac Vdc
Spec.
W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 24–48 62.5 80
Page
Number
1 QCF C 15–20 1, 2 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — 22,000 — — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-26
QCF C 15–30 2, 3 240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-26
1 QCR C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — 10,000 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-26
QCR C 15–20 1, 2 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — 22,000 — — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-26
1 QCR C 15–30 2, 3 240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 10,000 — 3000 3000 — V4-T1-26
1 QCHW C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 14a — 22,000 — 5000 3

— V4-T1-21
QCHW C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-21
1 QCHW C 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — V4-T1-21
3
QHCX C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 — — 42,000 — 5000 — V4-T1-21
1 QHCX C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-21
QHCX C 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — V4-T1-21
1 QHCW C 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 15a — 65,000 — 5000 3
— V4-T1-21
1 QHCW C 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 V4-T1-21
QHCW C 15–20 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — V4-T1-21
1 QCGFT C, GF 15–40 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-28
QCGFT C, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-28
1 QCHGFT C, GF 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-28
1 QCHGFT C, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-28

QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–40 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — V4-T1-28
1 QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-28
QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — V4-T1-28
1 QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-28
Notes
1 1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing.
2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
1 3 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous.
Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
1 For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-30 to V4-T1-35.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
QUICKLAG Type HQP Single-Pole Contents
Description Page
1
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 1
QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T1-6
V4-T1-7
1
Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-8
1
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11
Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types 1
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, 1
Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-16
Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, 1
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-27 1
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30 1
Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for
Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-33 1
International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-36
Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-39
1
1
QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW 1
Product Description Standards and Certifications
● All products 15–100A are ● Built and listed to UL 489
1
HACR rated All products UL and
● Switching duty rated for
●
CSA® listed
1
120 Vac fluorescent light
applications 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
1 QUICKLAG Type HQP QUICKLAG Type: HQP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Single-Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1 Continuous
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 10 HQP1010 HQP2010 — HQP3010H 3
15 HQP1015 12 HQP2015 HQP2015H HQP3015H
1 20 HQP1020 12 HQP2020 HQP2020H HQP3020H
25 HQP1025 HQP2025 HQP2025H HQP3025H
1 30 HQP1030 HQP2030 HQP2030H HQP3030H
35 HQP1035 HQP2035 HQP2035H HQP3035H
1 40 HQP1040 HQP2040 HQP2040H HQP3040H
45 HQP1045 HQP2045 HQP2045H HQP3045H
1 50 HQP1050 HQP2050 HQP2050H HQP3050H
55 HQP1055 HQP2055 HQP2055H HQP3055H
1 60 HQP1060 HQP2060 HQP2060H HQP3060H
70 HQP1070 HQP2070 HQP2070H HQP3070H
1 80 — HQP2080 HQP2080H HQP3080H
90 — HQP2090 HQP2090H HQP3090H
1 100 HQP1100 HQP2100 HQP2100H HQP3100H
110 — HQP2110 — —
1 125 — HQP2125 — —
150 — HQP2150 — —
1
1 QUICKLAG Type: HQP Non-Automatic Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1 Continuous
1 50 HQP1050N — HQP2050N HQP3050N
60 HQP1060N — HQP2060N HQP3060N
1 100 HQP1100N — HQP2100N HQP3100N
1
QUICKLAG Type: QPHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Continuous
1 at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 QPHW1015 1 QPHW2015 QPHW2015H QPHW3015H
1 20 QPHW1020 1 QPHW2020 QPHW2020H QPHW3020H
25 QPHW1025 QPHW2025 QPHW2025H QPHW3025H
1 30 QPHW1030 QPHW2030 QPHW2030H QPHW3030H
1 80 — QPHW2080 QPHW2080H QPHW3080H
90 — QPHW2090 QPHW2090H QPHW3090H
1 100 — QPHW2100 QPHW2100H QPHW3100H
110 — QPHW2110 — —
1 125 — QPHW2125 — —
Notes
1 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications.
2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order HQP1015L1 or HQP1020L1.
1 3 Not UL listed.

1.1
QUICKLAG Type: QHPX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
Ampere Rating
1
15 QHPX1015 1 QHPX2015 — QHPX3015H
20 QHPX1020 1 QHPX2020 — QHPX3020H
1
25 QHPX1025 QHPX2025 — QHPX3025H
1
1
50 QHPX1050 QHPX2050 — QHPX3050H 1
60 QHPX1060 QHPX2060 — QHPX3060H 1
80 — QHPX2080 — QHPX3080H 1
90 — QHPX2090 — QHPX3090H
100 — QHPX2100 — QHPX3100H 1
1
QUICKLAG Type: QHPW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1
Continuous
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
15 QHPW1015 1 QHPW2015 — QHPW3015H
20 QHPW1020 1 QHPW2020 — QHPW3020H
1
25 QHPW1025 QHPW2025 — — 1
30 QHPW1030 QHPW2030 — —
1
Dimensions 1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Shipping Data
Number Carton Approximate 1
of Poles Quantity Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions
1 24 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0) 1
2 12 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
3 8 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1
Note
1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QUICKLAG Type QPGFT Single-Pole Contents

1 Ground Fault Circuit Breaker
Description Page
1 Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2
QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5
1 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-9
1 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-10
1 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11
Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types
1 QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
1 Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-16
Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
1 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF,
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-27
1 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30
1 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for
Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-33
1 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-39
1
1 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment
Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
1 Product Description Standards and Certifications
● Built and listed to UL 489
1 QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit
Breakers, Class A GFCI QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit
1 ● 5 mA trip sensitivity Breakers, Class A GFCI
● Built and tested to UL 943
1 QUICKLAG Ground Fault
Equipment Protectors QUICKLAG Ground Fault
30 mA trip sensitivity Equipment Protectors
1 ●
● Built and listed to UL 1053

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
Product Selection
1
QUICKLAG Type QPGFT Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: 1
Single-Pole QPGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Single-Pole Two-Pole 1
Continuous
Ampere Rating 120 Vac 120/240 Vac
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
15 QPGFT1015 QPGFT2015
1
25 QPGFT1025 QPGFT2025 1
40 QPGFT1040 QPGFT2040 1
50 — QPGFT2050
1
Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: 1
QPHGF 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QPHGF1015 QPHGF2015
1
25 QPHGF1025 QPHGF2025 1
1
Ground Fault Equipment Breakers—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: 1
QPGFEP 10,000 Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QPGFEP1015 QPGFEP2015
20 QPGFEP1020 QPGFEP2020 1
1
40 QPGFEP1040 QPGFEP2040 1
50 — QPGFEP2050
1
QPHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QPHGFEP1015 QPHGFEP2015
20 QPHGFEP1020 QPHGFEP2020 1
1
1
1
1
1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity

1 QUICKLAG Type: QPGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or
Auxiliary Switch (W2)
1 Continuous
Single-Pole Two-Pole
1 at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 QPGFT1015W1 QPGFT2015W1
1 20 QPGFT1020W1 QPGFT2020W1
25 QPGFT1025W1 QPGFT2025W1
1 30 QPGFT1030W1 QPGFT2030W1
40 — QPGFT2040W1
1 50 — QPGFT2050W1
15 QPGFT1015W2 —
1 20 QPGFT1020W2 —
1 25
30
QPGFT1025W2
QPGFT1030W2
—
—
1
Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity
1 QUICKLAG Type: QPGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or
1 Continuous
1 at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 QPGFEP1015W1 QPGFEP2015W1
1 20 QPGFEP1020W1 QPGFEP2020W1
25 QPGFEP1025W1 QPGFEP2025W1
1 30 QPGFEP1030W1 QPGFEP2030W1
40 — QPGFEP2040W1
1 50 — QPGFEP2050W1
15 QPGFEP1015W2 —
1 20 QPGFEP1020W2 —
1 25
30
QPGFEP1025W2
QPGFEP1030W2
—
—
1
1 Wiring Diagram
Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic
1
Blue
Blue Wire
1 Ground
Fault
NC
Black Wire
Breaker NO
1 Red
Red Wire
1 Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac.
Bell Alarm (W1)—contacts change state when breaker trips.
Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.
1 14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.
1 Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Shipping Data
1 Number Carton Approximate
1 1 24 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)
2 5 5.00 (2.3) 15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3)
1
Note
1 Shipped individually or in carton quantities.

1.1
QUICKLAG Type BAB Single-Pole Contents
Description Page
1
1
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-12
1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-13
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
1
1
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW 1
1
● Switching duty rated
●
CSA listed
1
for 120 Vac fluorescent
light applications 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
1 QUICKLAG Type BAB QUICKLAG Type: BA 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Single-Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1 Continuous
1 10 BAB1010 BAB2010 BAB2010H 3 BAB3010H 3
15 BAB1015 12 BAB2015 BAB2015H BAB3015H
1 20 BAB1020 12 BAB2020 BAB2020H BAB3020H
25 BAB1025 BAB2025 BAB2025H BAB3025H
1 30 BAB1030 BAB2030 BAB2030H BAB3030H
35 BAB1035 BAB2035 BAB2035H BAB3035H
1 40 BAB1040 BAB2040 BAB2040H BAB3040H
45 BAB1045 BAB2045 BAB2045H BAB3045H
1 50 BAB1050 BAB2050 BAB2050H BAB3050H
55 BAB1055 BAB2055 BAB2055H BAB3055H
1 60 BAB1060 BAB2060 BAB2060H BAB3060H
70 BAB1070 BAB2070 BAB2070H BAB3070H
1 80 — BAB2080 BAB2080H BAB3080H
90 — BAB2090 BAB2090H BAB3090H
1 100 BAB1100 BAB2100 BAB2100H BAB3100H
110 — BAB2110 — —
1 125 — BAB2125 — —
1
QUICKLAG Type: BA Non-Automatic Switches
1 Continuous
50 BAB1050N — BAB2050N BAB3050N
1 60 BAB1060N — BAB2060N BAB3060N
100 BAB1100N — BAB2100N BAB3100N
1
1 QUICKLAG Type: QBHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 Continuous
1 15 QBHW1015 1 QBHW2015 QBHW2015H QBHW3015H
20 QBHW1020 1 QBHW2020 QBHW2020H QBHW3020H
1 25 QBHW1025 QBHW2025 QBHW2025H QBHW3025H
30 QBHW1030 QBHW2030 QBHW2030H QBHW3030H
80 — QBHW2080 QBHW2080H QBHW3080H
1 90 — QBHW2090 QBHW2090H QBHW3090H
100 — QBHW2100 QBHW2100H QBHW3100H
1 110 — QBHW2110 — —
125 — QBHW2125 — —
1 Notes
1 2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order BAB1015L1 or BAB1020L1.

3 Not UL listed.

1.1
QUICKLAG Type: HBAX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
Ampere Rating
1
15 HBAX1015 1 HBAX2015 — HBAX3015H
1
20 HBAX1020 1 HBAX2020 — HBAX3020H
25 HBAX1025 HBAX2025 — HBAX3025H 1
30 HBAX1030 HBAX2030 — HBAX3030H
35 HBAX1035 HBAX2035 — HBAX3035H 1
1
50 HBAX1050 HBAX2050 — HBAX3050H 1
60 HBAX1060 HBAX2060 — HBAX3060H 1
80 — HBAX2080 — HBAX3080H 1
80 — HBAX2080 — HBAX3080H
90 — HBAX2090 — HBAX3090H
1
100 — HBAX2100 — HBAX3100H 1
1
QUICKLAG Type: HBAW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
15 HBAW1015 1 HBAW2015 — HBAW3015H
20 HBAW1020 1 HBAW2020 — HBAW3020H 1
25 HBAW1025 HBAW2025 — —
30 HBAW1030 HBAW2030 — —
1
1
Dimensions 1
1
Shipping Data
Number
of Poles
Carton
Quantity
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions
1
1 24 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0) 1
2 12 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
3 8 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0) 1
Note
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter QUICKLAG Types QBAF, QBCAF Contents
1 Description Page
1 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types
QBAF, QBCAF
1 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-15
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-15
1 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors,
1 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
1 QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1 Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-27
1 Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30
1 Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-33
1
1
1 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF
Product Description Features, Benefits and Standards and Certifications
1 ● All products HACR rated Functions ● Built and listed to UL 489
● 10 and 22 kAIC rating at UL File E7819 for QBAF
1 120V and 120/240V
●
● Single-pole AFCI
1 ● HID ratings for HID (High
Intensity Discharge) lighting
1 ● All models are HACR rated
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
Product Selection
1
QBCAF and QBAF Type AFCIs
Effective immediately, Eaton magnetic protection of Pow-R-Line 3a and Pow-R- 1
AFCIs are available for use in branch circuits. This product Line 4a panelboards. For
Sumter panels with a 22 kAIC will have the same form, fit series rated combinations, 1
rating. This higher rated and function of the current continue to use the less
breaker will allow us to bolt-on AFCI (QBCAF and expensive 10 kAIC QBCAF 1
win jobs where AFCIs are QBAF Type). Product scope is and QBAF offerings.
specified at higher than below. These breakers are in
10 kAIC. This breaker Bid Manager™ for Pow-R- Breakers can also be ordered 1
provides standard thermal- Line 1a, Pow-R-Line 1a-LX, from Vista.
1
QBHCAF 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Wide Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter 1
Poles
kAIC
Rating
Ampere
Rating Configuration Catalog Number
1
Type QBCAF Combination AFCI
1
Single-pole 10 kAIC 15 Combination AFCI QB1015CAF
20 Combination AFCI QB1020CAF 1
22 kAIC 15 Combination AFCI QBH1015CAF
20 Combination AFCI QBH1020CAF 1
1
Wiring Diagrams
1
Single-Pole 120V Load Application Single-Pole Shared Neutral with
Sourced by 120/240 Vac Multi-Duplex Receptacle Application 1
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac
Source Source 1
N A B N A B
Line B Line B 1
1
Neutral Neutral Two 120V 1
120V Duplex
Receptacles
Neutral Duplex
Receptacle
Neutral 1
Equipment Ground
1
Line A
Equipment Ground 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QUICKLAG Type QBGFT Single-Pole Contents

1 Ground Fault Circuit Breaker
Description Page
1 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5
1 Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . .
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . .
V4-T1-8
V4-T1-11
1 QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
1 Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
1 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-18
QHCX, QHCW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
1 QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
1
Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
1 QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit
Breakers, Class A GFCI QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit
1 ● 5 mA trip sensitivity Breakers, Class A GFCI
1 QUICKLAG Ground Fault
Equipment QUICKLAG Ground Fault
Protectors Equipment Protectors
1 ● 30 mA trip sensitivity ● Built and tested to UL 1053
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
Product Selection
1
QUICKLAG Type QBGFT Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: 1
Single-Pole QBGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QB1015GF QBGFT2015
1
25 QB1025GF QBGFT2025 1
40 QB1040GF QBGFT2040 1
50 — QBGFT2050
1
Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: 1
QBHGFT 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QBH1015GF QBHGF2015
1
25 QBH1025GF QBHGF2025 1
1
QBGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QB1015EP QBGFEP2015
20 QB1020EP QBGFEP2020 1
1
40 QB1040EP QBGFEP2040 1
50 — QBGFEP2050
1
QBHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous
15 QBH1015EP QBHGFEP2015
20 QBH1020EP QBHGFEP2020 1
1
1
1
1
1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type:

1 QBGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)
1 Continuous
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 15 QBGFT1015W1 QBGFT2015W1
20 QBGFT1020W1 QBGFT2020W1
1 25 QBGFT1025W1 QBGFT2025W1
30 QBGFT1030W1 QBGFT2030W1
1 40 — QBGFT2040W1
1 50 — QBGFT2050W1
15 QBGFT1015W2 —
1 20 QBGFT1020W2 —
25 QBGFT1025W2 —
1 30 QBGFT1030W2 —
1
Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type:
QBGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)
1
Continuous
1 Ampere Rating 120 Vac 120/240 Vac
1 15 QBGFEP1015W1 QBGFEP2015W1
20 QBGFEP1020W1 QBGFEP2020W1
1 25 QBGFEP1025W1 QBGFEP2025W1
30 QBGFEP1030W1 QBGFEP2030W1
1 40 — QBGFEP2040W1
50 — QBGFEP2050W1
1 15 QBGFEP1015W2 —
20 QBGFEP1020W2 —
1 25 QBGFEP1025W2 —
30 QBGFEP1030W2 —
1
1 Wiring Diagram
1 Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic
Blue
1 Ground
Blue Wire
NC
Fault Black Wire
1 Breaker
Red NO
Red Wire
1 Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac.
1 Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.
14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.
1
Dimensions
1 Shipping Data
Number of Poles Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions
1 1 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)
2 5.00 (2.3) 15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3)
1
Note
1 Shipped individually or in carton quantities.

1.1
QUICKLAG Type QC Single-Pole Contents
Description Page
1
1
1
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-22
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
1
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW 1
1
● Switching duty rated for
●
CSA listed
1
120 Vac fluorescent light
applications only 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
1 QUICKLAG QUICKLAG Type: QC 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Type QC Single-Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
1 Continuous
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 5 QC1005 1 QC2005 1 — — —
1 10 QC1010 QC2010 QC2010H 1 QC3010H 1 —

15 QC1015 2 QC2015 QC2015H QC3015H QC4015H
1 20 QC1020 2 QC2020 QC2020H QC3020H QC4020H
25 QC1025 QC2025 QC2025H QC3025H QC4025H
1 30 QC1030 QC2030 QC2030H QC3030H QC4030H
1 35 QC1035 QC2035 QC2035H QC3035H QC4035H

40 QC1040 QC2040 QC2040H QC3040H QC4040H
1 45 QC1045 QC2045 QC2045H QC3045H QC4045H
50 QC1050 QC2050 QC2050H QC3050H QC4050H
1 55 QC1055 QC2055 QC2055H QC3055H QC4055H
60 QC1060 QC2060 QC2060H QC3060H QC4060H
1 70 QC1070 QC2070 QC2070H QC3070H QC4070H
1 70 — QC2080 QC2080H QC3080H QC4080H

90 — QC2090 QC2090H QC3090H QC4090H
1 100 QC1100 QC2100 QC2100H QC3100H QC4100H
1
QUICKLAG Type: QC Non-Automatic Switches
1 Continuous
Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
1 at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
50 QC1050N — QC2050N QC3050N —
1 60 QC1060N — QC2060N QC3060N —
1 100 QC1100N — QC2100N QC3100N —
Notes
1 1 Not UL listed.
2 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
1 For special low-magnetic breaker, order QC1015L1 or QC1020L1.Non-automatic switches, see Page V4-T1-41.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
QUICKLAG Type: QCHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
Ampere Rating
1
15 QCHW1015 1 QCHW2015 QCHW2015H QCHW3015H QCHW4015H
1
20 QCHW1020 1 QCHW2020 QCHW2020H QCHW3020H QCHW4020H
25 QCHW1025 QCHW2025 QCHW2025H QCHW3025H QCHW4025H 1
30 QCHW1030 QCHW2030 QCHW2030H QCHW3030H QCHW4030H
1
70 — QCHW2080 QCHW2080H QCHW3080H QCHW4080H 1
90 — QCHW2090 QCHW2090H QCHW3090H QCHW4090H
100 — QCHW2100 QCHW2100H QCHW3100H QCHW4100H
1
1
QUICKLAG Type: QHCX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 1
Continuous
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 1
15 QHCX1015 1 QHCX2015 — QHCX3015H — 1
20 QHCX1020 1 QHCX2020 — QHCX3020H —
25 QHCX1025 QHCX2025 — QHCX3025H — 1
30 QHCX1030 QHCX2030 — QHCX3030H —
35 QHCX1035 QHCX2035 — QHCX3035H —
1
40 QHCX1040 QHCX2040 — QHCX3040H — 1
45 QHCX1045 QHCX2045 — QHCX3045H —
50 QHCX1050 QHCX2050 — QHCX3050H — 1
55 QHCX1055 QHCX2055 — QHCX3055H —
60 QHCX1060 QHCX2060 — QHCX3060H —
1
70 QHCX1070 QHCX2070 — QHCX3070H —
1
70 — QHCX2080 — QHCX3080H —
90 — QHCX2090 — QHCX3090H — 1
100 — QHCX2100 — QHCX3100H —
1
QUICKLAG Type: QHCW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 1
Continuous
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 1
15 QHCW1015 1 QHCW2015 — QHCW3015H —
1
1
20 QHCW1020 QHCW2020 — QHCW3020H —
1
25 QHCW1025 QHCW2025 — — —
30 QHCW1030 QHCW2030 — — — 1
Notes
1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only. 1
Non-automatic switches, see Page V4-T1-41.
1
1

QUICKLAG Type QCD Miniature Circuit Breakers

1 QCD breakers are used ● Flexible power feed
primarily in HVAC and connection:
1 industrial applications. wire size, position
● Single-, two- and ● Same breaker size for
1 three-pole options entire rating range
● Modular construction ● Field mountable
1 ● DIN mounted accessories:
(symmetrical rail 35 x finger shroud proof, quick
1 7.5 DIN/EN 50 022) connect terminals
● QCD same profile as ● Other accessories:
1 Type QCR jumper unit
1
QUICKLAG Type QCD QUICKLAG Type QCD 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 Miniature Circuit
Breaker Continuous
10 QCD1010 QCD2010 — —
1 15 QCD1015 QCD2015 QCD2015H QCD3015H
20 QCD1020 QCD2020 QCD2020H QCD3020H
1 25 QCD1025 QCD2025 QCD2025H QCD3025H
1 30 QCD1030 QCD2030 QCD2030H QCD3030H

35 QCD1035 QCD2035 QCD2035H QCD3035H
1 40 QCD1040 QCD2040 QCD2040H QCD3040H
45 QCD1045 QCD2045 QCD2045H QCD3045H
1 50 QCD1050 QCD2050 QCD2050H QCD3050H
55 QCD1055 QCD2055 QCD2055H QCD3055H
1
60 QCD1060 QCD2060 QCD2060H QCD3060H
1 70 — QCD2070 QCD2070H QCD3070H

80 — QCD2080 QCD2080H QCD3080H
1 90 — QCD2090 QCD2090H QCD3090H
100 — QCD2090 QCD2090H QCD3100H
1 — QCD2100 QCD2100H —
1
QUICKLAG Type QCD Non-Automatic Switches
1 Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Continuous
1 Ampere Rating
at 40°C
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
240 Vac
Catalog Number
240 Vac
Catalog Number
1 60 — — QCD2060NA —
100 — — — —
1
1 Dimensions
1
Shipping Data
1 Number Carton Approximate
1 1 24 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
2 12 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1 3 8 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1
1

1.1
Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH Contents
Description Page
1
1
1
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QCR (Rear-Mounted Breakers)
QCF (Front-Mounted Breakers)
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH
1
QCR and QCF Options and Accessories . . . . . . V4-T1-26
1
1
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH 1
Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits Standards and Certifications
Eaton Type QCR circuit QCR and QCF circuit breakers and Functions ● Built and listed to UL 489
1
breakers have as a standard are only 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) ● 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) wide UL File No. E7819
feature provisions for 35 mm wide per pole and are per pole
●
● CSA File No. LR48907

1
DIN rail rear mounting with excellent for general purpose ● Cable-in/cable-out
a spring-loaded release. industrial applications where ● Black cases with black
● Type QCR and QCF circuit
breakers are UL listed
1
Optional clips for individual space savings is required.
handles circuit breakers that are
mounting are available as a
● Three position handle: suitable for use as branch 1
separate accessory.
ON, Tripped (center), OFF circuit protectors
Type QCF have two threaded ● Thermal-magnetic ● All ratings 15–60A are 1
steel inserts to facilitate front protection HACR rated
mounting with #6–32 steel 1
screws. The clamp type
terminals are accessible from
the rear of the breaker so that
1
cables can be accessed
without removal of the 1
breaker from the front cover.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
1 Cable-In/Cable-Out, QCR Breaker Catalog Numbers 1234
1/2-Inch Wide Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1 Continuous
Ampere Rating 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 5
1 QCR Breaker 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings
1 10 QCR1010 QCR2010 — —
QCR1010T QCR2010T — —
1 — QCR2010P — —
15 QCR1015 6 QCR2015 QCR2015H QCR3015H
1 QCR1015T 6 QCR2015T QCR2015HT QCR3015HT
1 — QCR2015P — —
20 QCR1020 6 QCR2020 QCR2020H QCR3020H
1 QCR1020T 6 QCR2020T QCR2020HT QCR3020HT
— QCR2020P — —
1 25 QCR1025 QCR2025 QCR2025H QCR3025H
QCR1025T QCR2025T QCR2025HT QCR3025HT
1 — QCR2025P — —
1 30 QCR1030 QCR2030 QCR2030H QCR3030H

QCR1030T QCR2030T QCR2030HT QCR3030HT
1 — QCR2030P — —
35 QCR1035 QCR2035 — —
1 — QCR2035P — —
40 QCR1040 QCR2040 — —
1 — QCR2040P — —
1 45 QCR1045 QCR2045 — —
— QCR2045P — —
1 50 QCR1050 QCR2050 — —
— QCR2050P — —
1 55 QCR1055 QCR2055 — —
1 — QCR2055P — —
60 7 QCR1060 QCR2060 — —
1 — QCR2060P — —
QCR Breaker 22 kAIC Interrupting Ratings
1 15 QCRH1015 6 QCRH2015 — —
QCRH1015T 6 QCRH2015T — —
1 20 QCRH1020 6 QCRH2020 — —
1 QCRH1020T 6 QCRH2020T — —
Notes
1 1 Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs.
2 Breakers with T Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection
1 (#10–32 plus/minus terminal screw provided).

3 Breakers with P Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for terminating two 10 AWG Quick-Connect Type Terminals per
phase on breaker load side.

1 4 Breakers with Shunt Trip (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available on single-, two- and three-pole.
Contact the Customer Support Center at 1-800-356-1243.

1 5 Breakers with H Catalog Suffix have 240 Vac construction.
6 All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (Switching Duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications.
7 60/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor.
1
1
1

1.1
Cable-In/Cable-Out, QCF Breaker Catalog Numbers 123
1/2-Inch Wide Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 4
Ampere Rating
1
QCF Breaker 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings
1
10 QCF1010 QCF2010 — —
QCF1010T QCF2010T — — 1
15 QCF1015 5 QCF2015 QCF2015H QCF3015H
QCF1015T 5 QCF2015T QCF2015HT QCF3015HT 1
20 QCF1020 5 QCF2020 QCF2020H QCF3020H
QCF1020T 5 QCF2020T QCF2020HT QCF3020HT
1
25 QCF1025 QCF2025 QCF2025H QCF3025H 1
QCF1025T QCF2025T QCF2025HT QCF3025HT
30 QCF1030 QCF2030 QCF2030H QCF3030H 1
QCF1030T QCF2030T QCF2030HT QCF3030HT
35 QCF1035 QCF2035 — — 1
40 QCF1040 QCF2040 — —
45 QCF1045 QCF2045 — —
1
50 QCF1050 QCF2050 — — 1
55 QCF1055 QCF2055 — —
60 6 QCF1060 QCF2060 — — 1
QCF Breaker 22 kAIC Interrupting Ratings
15 QCFH1015 5 QCFH2015 — —
1
QCFH1015T 5 QCFH2015T — —
1
20 QCFH1020 5 QCFH2020 — —
QCFH1020T 5 QCFH2020T — — 1
Notes
1 Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs. 1
2 Breakers with T Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection
(#10–32 plus/minus terminal screw provided).

3 Breakers with Shunt Trip Attachment (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available.
1
Contact the Customer Support Center.
4 Breakers with H Catalog Suffix have 240 Vac construction. 1
5 All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (Switching Duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications.
6 60/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QCR and QCF Options and Accessories

1
QCR and QCF Standard Box QCR and QCF Ring or Spade Lug Available QCR and QCF
1 Terminals Terminals (10 to 30A Ratings
Only)
Breaker Accessories
Factory-installed line and load Catalog
1 side breaker terminal to Factory-installed line and load
side terminals each equipped
Description Number
accommodate14 AWG to Steel mounting clip QCRMTGFT
4 AWG wire. with a #10–32 screw suitable
1 for terminating one 10 AWG
mounts QCR breaker if
individual mounting is
Standard Box Terminals wire with insulated ring or required. Quantity two
1 spade type terminal as shown. required for single- and two-
pole and four required
Catalog Suffix “T” for three-pole breakers.
1 Removable padlock QCRFPL1P
device for single-pole
1 QCR or QCF breaker.
Removable padlock QCRFPLMP
1 QCR Quick-Connect Terminals
device for multi-pole
QCR or QCF breaker.
Factory-installed two-prong
1 quick-connect terminal on
Padlock bracket assem- QCRFLOFF
bly for QCR or QCF
breaker load side suitable for single- or multi-pole
1 terminating two 10 AWG wire breakers (OFF only).
with insulated slip-on Padlock bracket for QCRPLOFF
1 terminals as shown. Line side QCR, lock-off only.
terminal is the standard type.
1 Catalog Suffix “P”
1
1
1
1 Technical Data and Specifications
● Single-, two- and ● 3 kAIC at 62.5 Vdc
1 three-pole (single-pole)
● 10 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, ● 3 kAIC at 130 Vdc
1 10–60A (two poles in series)
● 22 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, ● Normal operating
1 15–20A environment:
● 10 kAIC at 240 Vac, 10–30A ● 0–40°C
1 ● 5–95% humidity
(noncondensing)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
QUICKLAG Type QCGFT Single-Pole Contents
Ground Fault Circuit Breaker
Description Page
1
1
1
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
1
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-29 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-29
Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching 1
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30
Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for 1
1
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment 1
Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
1
QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit 1
Breakers, Class A GFCI Breakers, Class A GFCI
● 5 mA trip sensitivity ● Built and tested to UL 943 1
QUICKLAG Ground Fault
Equipment Protectors
Equipment Protectors
1
30 mA trip sensitivity Built and tested to
● ●
UL 1053
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
Breaker Catalog Numbers
1 QUICKLAG Type QCGFT
Single-Pole Ground Single-Pole Two-Pole
Fault Circuit Breaker Continuous
120 Vac 120/240 Vac
1 Ampere Rating
1 Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QCGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
15 QCGFT1015 QCGFT2015
1 20 QCGFT1020 QCGFT2020
1 25
30
QCGFT1025
QCGFT1030
QCGFT2025
QCGFT2030
1 40 QCGFT1040 QCGFT2040
50 — QCGFT2050
1 QUICKLAG Type: QCHGFT 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

15 QCHGFT1015 QCHGFT2015
1 20 QCHGFT1020 QCHGFT2020
25 QCHGFT1025 QCHGFT2025
1 30 QCHGFT1030 QCHGFT2030
Ground Fault Equipment Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity
1 QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
15 QCGFEP1015 QCGFEP2015
1 20 QCGFEP1020 QCGFEP2020
25 QCGFEP1025 QCGFEP2025
50 — QCGFEP2050
1 QUICKLAG Type: QCHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
15 QCHGFEP1015 QCHGFEP2015
1 20 QCHGFEP1020 QCHGFEP2020
25 QCHGFEP1025 QCHGFEP2025
1 30 QCHGFEP1030 QCHGFEP2030
Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protector—5 mA Sensitivity
1 QUICKLAG Type: QCGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or
1 15 QCGFT1015W1 QCGFT2015W1
20 QCGFT1020W1 QCGFT2020W1
1 25 QCGFT1025W1 QCGFT2025W1
30 QCGFT1030W1 QCGFT2030W1
1 40 — QCGFT2040W1
50 — QCGFT2050W1
1 15 QCGFT1015W2 —
20 QCGFT1020W2 —
1 25 QCGFT1025W2 —
30 QCGFT1030W2 —
1 Special Application Ground Fault Equipment Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity
QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or
1 Auxiliary Switch (W2)
15 QCGFEP1015W1 QCGFEP2015W1
1 20 QCGFEP1020W1 QCGFEP2020W1
25 QCGFEP1025W1 QCGFEP2025W1
1 30 QCGFEP1030W1 QCGFEP2030W1
40 — QCGFEP2040W1
1 50 — QCGFEP2050W1
15 QCGFEP1015W2 —
1 20 QCGFEP1020W2 —
25 QCGFEP1025W2 —
1 30 QCGFEP1030W2 —

1.1
Wiring Diagram
1
Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic 1
Blue
Ground NC
Blue Wire 1
Fault Black Wire
Breaker
Red NO
Red Wire
1
Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac. 1
Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.
14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.
1
1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1
Shipping Data 1
Number Carton Approximate
of Poles Quantity Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions 1
1 20 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)
2 5 5.00 (2.3) 15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3) 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

BABRP and BABRSP Breakers— Contents

1 Single- and Two-Pole
Description Page
Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP. . . . . . V4-T1-8
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1 Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP
1 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-32
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-32
1 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for
1
1 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP
1 Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
The BABRP and BABRSP Eaton’s BABRP, BABRSP, ● Bolt-on line-side terminal ● Handle permits manual
1 are bolt-on branch circuit BRRP and CLRP breakers are (BABRP, BABRSP— switching when control
breakers designed for use in remotely operated molded Type BA) power is lost
1 panelboards. The BRRP is a case circuit breakers ideally ● Plug-on line-side terminal ● Mechanical trip indicator
plug-on branch circuit breaker suited for lighting control (BRRP—Type BR, CLRP— ● 15 and 20A breakers SWD
1 designed for use in load- applications or energy Type CL) (switching duty) rated
centers not manufactured management applications. ● Cable connected load-side ● HID ratings for HID (high
1 with breakers with a 1-inch
wide format and are listed on
terminal intensity discharge) lighting
the “Compatibility list for
● Four-position control ● All models HACR rated
1 Classified Applications”— terminal ● Status feedback of control
Pub. 26271. In addition to ● Bi-metal assembly for circuit (BABRSP)
1 providing conventional branch thermal overload ● Series rated (BABRP,
circuit protection, they include protection BABRSP only)
1 a unique solenoid-operated ● Fast-acting short-circuit ● BRRP series rated same
mechanism that provides for protection as BR breakers
efficient breaker pulse-on and
1 pulse-off operation when used
● Arc-chute assembly for ● BABRP, BABRSP same
fast-acting arc extinction as BA breakers
with a suitable controller like
1 Eaton’s Pow-R-Command™
● Three-position handle: OFF,
TRIP (Center), ON
lighting control system.
1 These breakers can also be
controlled by pushbutton or
1 a PLC unit.
1
1
1
1

1.1
Product Selection
1
QUICKLAG Type QCGFT BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting 1
Single-Pole Ground Ratings Ratings
Fault Circuit Breaker
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 1
Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz) Catalog Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz) Catalog
of Poles Rating 1 120 120/240 277/480 Number of Poles Rating 120 120/240 Number 1
1 15 10,000 — — BABRP1015 1 15 10,000 — BRRP115
20 10,000 — — BABRP1020 20 10,000 — BRRP120
1
25 10,000 — — BABRP1025 25 10,000 — BRRP125 1
30 10,000 — — BABRP1030 30 10,000 — BRRP130
2 15 — 10,000 — BABRP2015 2 15 — 10,000 BRRP215 1
20 — 10,000 — BABRP2020 20 — 10,000 BRRP220
25 — 10,000 — BABRP2025 25 — 10,000 BRRP225
1
30 — 10,000 — BABRP2030
30 — 10,000 BRRP230
1
BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting 1
Catalog Ratings
Description Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 1
This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides SLBKRPTL1 Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz) Catalog
a connection from a single BABRP’s control plug to of Poles Rating 120 120/240 Number 1
a customer’s pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box
1 15 10,000 — CLRP115
contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V.
Order in multiples of 12. 20 10,000 — CLRP120
1
25 10,000 — CLRP125 1
30 10,000 — CLRP130
BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting
Ratings 2 15 — 10,000 CLRP215 1
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 20 — 10,000 CLRP220
Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz) Catalog 25 — 10,000 CLRP225

1
of Poles Rating 1 120 120/240 277/480 Number 30 — 10,000 CLRP230
1 15 10,000 — — BABRSP1015
1
Note
20 10,000 — — BABRSP1020 1 Continuous current rating at 40°C.
1
25 10,000 — — BABRSP1025
30 10,000 — — BABRSP1030 1
2 15 — 10,000 — BABRSP2015
20 — 10,000 — BABRSP2020 1
25 — 10,000 — BABRSP2025
30 — 10,000 — BABRSP2030
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams

1
Solenoid Operating Data Operation
1 ● Power requirements: 24 ● Tripping system—the
Control Circuit for the BABRP and BABRSP
Vac/dc (20.4V minimum– BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP BABRP BABRSP
1 30V maximum) and CLRP circuit breakers
Remote Remote
● Controlled signal: have a permanent trip Contact Contact
1 +AC/DC 8 ms minimum unit that contains a factory
preset thermal (overload) Load Line Load Line
with zero cross, 300 ms Breaker Breaker
maximum trip element in each pole Contact
1 ● Operating mechanism—
Contact
● AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, RM RM RM RM BKR
18 cycles or 300 ms the BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP b a
1 maximum and CLRP circuit breakers
b a a
have an over-center toggle
Yellow
● DC: 8 ms minimum,
1
Yellow
Black
mechanism that provides
Blue
Black
Red
300 ms maximum
Blue
Red
quick-make, quick-break
● Maximum duty cycle of
1 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles
operation. The operating
mechanism is trip free. An
On Off Remote On Off Remote
Coil Coil Status
per minute internal cross-bar provides
Coil Coil Status
1 ● Current draw: open 1A, a common tripping of all
close 3/4A multi-pole circuit breakers
1 ● Blue wire: power input
(see power requirements) Operating/Application Data
1 ● Black wire: remote opening ● Ambient temperature:
● Red wire: remote closing 0 to 40°C
1 ● Yellow wire: feedback
● Nominal pulse magnitude:
status from power input, 24 Vac/dc
1 maximum 0.50A draw ● Frequency: 50/60 Hz
(BABRSP only) ● Maximum breaker cycling:
1 6 operations per minute
● Tolerance: +10% to –15%
1 of nominal voltage
● Humidity: 0 to 95%
1 noncondensing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
GHBS and GHQRSP Contents
Description Page
1
1
1
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
1
Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-35 1
1
1
Solenoid Operator—Remote-Controlled Latching 1
for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers
Product Description Features, Benefits
1
Eaton’s GHBS, GBHS and and Functions
GHQRSP circuit breakers ● Bolt-on line-side terminal ● Visual indication of the
1
are bolt-on branch circuit Cable-connected load-side remotely operated
breakers designed for use
●
terminal contact’s position (open, 1

in 277/480 Vac panelboards. closed or trip)
● Status switch—remote
In addition to providing
status and breaker status ● Remote override handle 1
conventional branch circuit permits manual switching
available from internal
protection, they include a
unique solenoid-operated
auxiliary switches when control power is lost 1
● Bi-metal assembly for ● 15 and 20A breakers SWD
mechanism that provides
for efficient breaker pulse-on thermal overload (switching duty) rated. 1
and pulse-off operation protection ● 15 and 20A breakers HID
when used with a suitable ● Fast-acting short-circuit rated for HID (High 1
controller like Eaton’s protection intensity discharge) lighting
Pow-R-Command lighting ● Arc-runner and arc-chute ● All models HACR rated 1
control system. assembly for fast-acting arc ● Series rated with various
extinction Eaton main circuit breakers 1
● Three-position breaker
handle: OFF, TRIP (Center),
ON
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
GHQ UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
1 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Vac (50/60 Hz)
1 Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating 1 120 120/240 277 480Y/277 Catalog Number
1 1 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000

1 20 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000
1 1 30 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000
2 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000
1 2 20 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000
2 30 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000
1
1 GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
GHBS—Single-Pole
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Number Ampere
1 of Poles Rating 1 120 240 277/480 Catalog Number
1 15 65,000 — 14,000 GHBS1015D
1 20 65,000 — 14,000 GHBS1020D
30 65,000 — 14,000 GHBS1030D
1 2 15 — 65,000 14,000 GHBS2015D
20 — 65,000 14,000 GHBS2020D
1 30 — 65,000 14,000 GHBS2030D
1
GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)
Vac (50/60 Hz)
1 Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating 1 347/600 Catalog Number
1 1 15 10,000 GBHS1015D
20 10,000 GBHS1020D
1 2 15 10,000 GBHS2015D
20 10,000 GBHS2020D
1
1 GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
1 Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz)
of Poles Rating 1 120 120/240 277 480Y/277 Catalog Number 2
1 1 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP1015
20 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP1020
1
30 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP1030
1 2 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP2015

20 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP2020
1 30 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 GHQRSP2030
1 Notes
1 Continuous current rating at 40°C.
2 All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.
1
1
1
1

1.1
Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams
1
Solenoid Operating Data ● Red wire: remote closing Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for
GHBS and GBHS Breakers 1
● Power requirements: 24 ● Yellow wire: feedback
Circuit Breaker
Vac/dc (20.4V minimum– status from power input,
30V maximum) maximum 0.50A draw 1
● Controlled signal: +AC/
Operation Solenoid
DC 8 ms minimum with
Mechanism manually
a 1
zero cross, 300 ms
maximum operated by external handle
● AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, allowing ON, OFF and RESET Common Solenoid Auxiliary 1
18 cycles or 300 ms operation. Handle assumes a AMP Inc.
maximum center TRIP position after Conductor
/ Cycle
1 2
Maximum
1
performing protective Plug 1 28 Vac
● DC: 8 ms minimum,
300 ms maximum
response. Pulse Source 1
● Maximum duty cycle of 28 Vac
Operating/Application Data 1
6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles Circuit Breaker
● Ambient temperature: Open/Closed
per minute
0–40°C
● Current draw: open 1A, ● Frequency: 48–62 Hz
Status 1
close 3/4A
● Blue wire: power input
● Humidity: 0–95%
noncondensing Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for 1
(see power requirements) GHQRSP Breakers
● Black wire: remote opening GHQRSP 1
Remote Breaker
Terminal Type Contact Contact 1
Load Line
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Screw Terminal
Type Amperes Head Type Type Range 1
GHQRSP 15–20 Slotted Clamp #14–#4 AWG
1
1
1
Yellow
Black
Blue
Red
1
Status On
Coil
Off
Coil
Power
Input
1
1
1
Dimensions
Dimensions per Pole
Circuit Breaker Type Width Height 2 Length 3
1
GHQRSP 1.00 (25.4) 4.63 (117.6) 2.81 (71.4) 1
Notes
1 Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3. 1
2 Excluding line terminal.
3 Excluding handle.
1
1
1
1
1
1

International Rated Contents

1 Description Page
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
QHCX, QHCW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23
International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-38
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-38
1
1 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC
1
QUICKLAG International Circuit QUICKLAG International Circuit
1 Breakers Breakers
● Bolt-on Type BA ● Built and test certified to
1 BS3871, Pt. 1
QUICKLAG International Ground ● 50/60 Hz, 40°C
Fault Circuit Breakers
1 ● Plug-on Type GFMB QUICKLAG International Ground
Fault Circuit Breakers
1 ● Cable-in/cable-out Type
GFXBC ● Built and test certified to
BS3871, Pt. 1; BS3871,
1 Section 31-C; BS4293
● 50/60 Hz, 40°C; 30 mA
1 sensitivity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
Product Selection
1
BAB
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
1
Continuous
240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac
Ampere Rating
at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
3000A Interrupting Capacity (M3) Bolt-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
1
10 BAB1010E BAB2010E BAB3010E
15 BAB1015E BAB2015E BAB3015E 1
16 — — —
20 BAB1020E BAB2020E BAB3020E 1
1
32 — — — 1
50 BAB1050E BAB2050E BAB3050E 1
1
90 — BAB2090E BAB3090E
1
100 — BAB2100E BAB3100E
6000A Interrupting Capacity (M6) Bolt-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 1
15 BAB1015HE BAB2015HE BAB3015HE
20 BAB1020HE BAB2020HE BAB3020HE 1
1
1
60 BAB1060HE BAB2060HE BAB3060HE 1
90 — BAB2090HE BAB3090HE 1
100 — BAB2100HE BAB3100HE
1
Breaker Catalog Numbers—Ground Fault Single-Pole 30 mA Sensitivity
1
Continuous
Ampere Rating 240/415 Vac 1
at 40°C Catalog Number
3000A Interrupting Capacity (M3) Plug-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
1
10 GFMB110B2
1
15 GFMB115B2
16 GFMB116B2 1
20 GFMB120B2
25 GFMB125B2 1
30 GFMB130B2
32 GFMB132B2
1
40 GFMB140B2
1
Note
For other 240/415V applications, please contact the Customer Support Center at 1-800-356-1243. 1
1
1
1

Technical Data and Specifications

1
Interrupting Ratings
1 Ratings Suffix E Suffix HE
1 International Circuit Breakers

NEMA® 10,000 AIC 10,000 AIC
1 120/240 Vac
BS3871 220/380, 3000 AIC 6000 AIC
1 240/415 Vac
International Ground Fault Circuit Breakers
1 BS3871 220/380,
240/415 Vac
3000 AIC
1
1 Dimensions
1
Shipping Data
1 Miniature
Circuit Breaker
Number
of Poles
Standard Carton
Quantity
Approximate Carton
Weight Lbs (kg)
Approximate
Standard Carton
1 QUICKLAG Type B 1 24 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
2 12 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1 3 8 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1 Type P—All 1 20 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)
1 Types B and C—All 1 20 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 7.00 x 5.50 (317.5 x 177.8 x 139.7)
Types P and B—All 2 5 5.00 (2.3) 12.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (317.5 x 152.4 x 114.3)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.1
QUICKLAG Type P Switching Neutral Contents
Description Page
1
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW
V4-T1-2
V4-T1-5
1
Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . . . V4-T1-8 1
Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11
QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14
Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . . V4-T1-16
1
Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19 1
QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23 1
Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP . . . . . .
V4-T1-27 1
Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30
Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for 1
Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . . V4-T1-33
International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-36 1
Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T1-40
V4-T1-42
1
Factory Modifications and Installed Terminals . . V4-T1-45
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46
1
Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC 1
● All products UL and
1
Breakers QUICKLAG HID (High Intensity Molded Case Switches—Non- CSA listed
● Plug-on Type HQP: Discharge) Breakers automatic QUICKLAG Molded 1
10–30A, single- and ● Plug-on Type HQP: Case Switch
two-pole, 10 kAIC 15–60A, single- and ● Plug-on Type HQP: 50, 1
● Bolt-on Type BA: 10–30A, two-pole, 10 kAIC 60,100A, single-, two- and
three-pole
single- and two-pole, ● Bolt-on Type BA: 15–60A,
● Bolt-on Type BA: 50,
1
10 kAIC single- and two-pole,
10 kAIC 60,100A, single-, two- and
● Cable-in Type QC: 10–30A,
● Cable-in Type QC: 15–60A, three-pole 1
single- and two-pole,
10 kAIC single- and two-pole, ● Cable-in Type QC: 50,
10 kAIC 60,100A, single-, two- and 1
Switching neutral QUICKLAG three-pole
breakers available in single- Breakers designed 1
and two-pole configurations, specifically for use with high
intensity discharge (HID)
plus neutral pole for
applications in accordance lighting applications. (UL
1
with NEC® 514.5, 240.22 and listed as standard lighting
380.2. A single-pole device breakers.) 1
takes two pole spaces, and a
two-pole device takes three 1
pole spaces.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
1 QUICKLAG Type P
Switching Neutral Single-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
1 Ampere Rating
1 QUICKLAG Type: HQP Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

10 HQP2010B HQP3010B — —
1 15 HQP2015B HQP3015B — —
20 HQP2020B HQP3020B — —
1 25 HQP2025B HQP3025B — —
30 HQP2030B HQP3030B — —
1
QUICKLAG Type: BA Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 10 BAB2010C BAB3010C — —
15 BAB2015C BAB3015C — —
1 20 BAB2020C BAB3020C — —
25 BAB2025C BAB3025C — —
1 30 BAB2030C BAB3030C — —
1 QUICKLAG Type: QC Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

10 QC2010B QC3010B — —
1 15 QC2015B QC3015B — —
20 QC2020B QC3020B — —
1 25 QC2025B QC3025B — —
30 QC2030B QC3030B — —
1 QUICKLAG Type: HQP HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 15 HQP1015D HQP2015D — —
20 HQP1020D HQP2020D — —
1 25 HQP1025D HQP2025D — —
30 HQP1030D HQP2030D — —
1 35 HQP1035D HQP2035D — —
40 HQP1040D HQP2040D — —
1
50 HQP1050D HQP2050D — —
1 60 HQP1060D HQP2060D — —
QUICKLAG Type: BA HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 15 BAB1015D BAB2015D — —
20 BAB1020D BAB2020D — —
1 25 BAB1025D BAB2025D — —
1 30 BAB1030D BAB2030D — —
35 BAB1035D BAB2035D — —
1 40 BAB1040D BAB2040D — —
50 BAB1050D BAB2050D — —
1 60 BAB1060D BAB2060D — —
QUICKLAG Type: QC HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
1 15 QC1015D QC2015D — —
1 20 QC1020D QC2020D — —
25 QC1025D QC2025D — —
1 30 QC1030D QC2030D — —
35 QC1035D QC2035D — —
1 40 QC1040D QC2040D — —
50 QC1050D QC2050D — —
1
60 QC1060D QC2060D — —

1.1
Breaker Catalog Numbers, continued
1
Continuous
120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
Ampere Rating
1
QUICKLAG Type: HQP Non-Automatic Switches
1
50 HQP1050N — HQP2050N HQP3050N
60 HQP1060N — HQP2060N HQP3060N 1
100 HQP1100N — HQP2100N HQP3100N
QUICKLAG Type: BA Non-Automatic Switches 1
50 BAB1050N — BAB2050N BAB3050N
60 BAB1060N — BAB2060N BAB3060N
1
100 BAB1100N — BAB2100N BAB3100N 1
QUICKLAG Type: QC Non-Automatic Switches
50 QC1050N — QC2050N QC3050N 1
60 QC1060N — QC2060N QC3060N
100 QC1100N — QC2100N QC3100N 1
QUICKLAG Type: QCD Non-Automatic Switches
60 — — QCD2060NA —
1
100 — — — — 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Accessories 1
1
1 Handle Locks: Non-Padlockable 2
Description Order in Multiples of Catalog Number
1 QL1NPL QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—single-pole 10 QL1NPL
1
1
1
1 QL23NPL QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—two- and three-pole 10 QL23NPL
1
1
1
1
1 Handle Locks: Padlockable 2
1 Description Order in Multiples of Catalog Number
QL1PL QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—single-pole 10 QL1PL
1
1
1
1
QL123PL QUICKLAG Type P, B and ground fault—single-, two- and three-pole 10 QL123PL
1
1
1
1
1 QC123PL QUICKLAG Type C —single-, two- and three-pole 10 QC123PL
1
1
1
1
QUICKLAG Type P, B—single-, two- and three-pole (off only) 10 QL123PLOFF
1 QUICKLAG Type C—single-, two- and three-pole (off only) 10 QC123PLOFF
Notes
1 1 See Page V4-T1-26 for QCR and QCF accessories.
2 Can lock in ON or OFF position.
1
1

1.1
Mounting Hardware
1
QCFCLIP QUICKLAG Type C face mounting clip 24 QCFCLIP
1
1
1
1
QC1FP QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—single-pole 10 QC1FP 1
1
1
1
1
QC2FP QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—two-pole 10 QC2FP
1
1
1
1
QC3FP QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—three-pole 10 QC3FP
1
1
1
1
QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—two-pole 1 10 QC2FPLOFF
1
QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—three-pole 10 QC3FPLOFF
1
QCBCLIP QUICKLAG Type C base mounting clamp 10 QCBCLIP
1
1
1
1
QC6BP QUICKLAG Type mounting plate—six poles total 10 QC6BP 1
1
1
1
Note
1 Suitable for ground fault breakers.
1
1

Mounting Hardware, continued

1 QUICKLAG Type C base mounting plate—six poles total—heavy-duty screw-secured 10 QC6BPS

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 2-way jumper unit with cover 10 QCDJ2
1 QCDJ4 QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 4-way jumper unit with cover 10 QCDJ4
1
1
1 QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 6-way jumper unit with cover 10 QCDJ6
QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 2-way jumper unit, no cover 10 QCDJ2T
1 QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 4-way jumper unit, no cover 10 QCDJ4T

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 6-way jumper unit, no cover 10 QCDJ6T
1 QUICKLAG Type QCD Finger protection attachment 10 QCDFP
QUICKLAG Type QCD 4-prong Quick Connect 10 QCDQUICK
1 QCDINADAPT QUICKLAG Type C DIN rail adapter 6 QCDINADAPT
1
1
1 QCDRING QUICKLAG Type QCD ring lug attachment 10 QCDRING
1
1
1
1 Dummy Breakers
1 QUICKLAG Type P 1 HQP1000
1 QUICKLAG Type B 1 BAB1000

QUICKLAG Type C 1 QC1000
1 QUICKLAG Type C clear choice breaker 4 QC30SAMPLE
1
QCRSPACER Miscellaneous
QUICKLAG Type C Spacer 1 QCRSPACER
1
1
1
1
Handle Tie
1 QL1HT
1 QUICKLAG handle tie—single-pole 100 QL1HT
1
1
1

1.1
Factory Modifications and Installed Terminals
1
Factory Modifications 1
Type of Modification Breaker Type Catalog Suffix

1
Shunt trip (requires one extra pole space on right side)
120, 208, 240 Vac
1
Draws 2.6A at 120V, draws 11A at 24 Vdc QUICKLAG Types P, B and C S
Shunt trip (requires one extra pole space on right side) 1
24, 48 Vac/dc
Draws 2.6A at 120V, draws 11A at 24 Vdc QUICKLAG Types P, B and C S1 1
Special calibration (50°C) (no UL) QUICKLAG Types P, B and C V
Shock testing QUICKLAG Types P, B and C L 1
Freeze testing QUICKLAG Types P, B and C Y
Moisture-fungus treatment QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and ground fault F
1
Marine duty QUICKLAG Types P, B, C H08
Naval duty QUICKLAG Types P, B, C H09
1
400 Hz calibration QUICKLAG Types P, B, C G 1
Specific DC ratings (breaker marked with a max. Vdc rating) QUICKLAG Types P, B, C Q thru Q9 2
1
Spare Terminal Hardware Screws (Lugs not Included) 1
Terminal Type Description Order in Multiples of Catalog Number
1 QUICKLAG terminal screw 10 QLLDTSA
1
2 QUICKLAG terminal screw 10 QLLDTSB
1
3 QUICKLAG terminal screw 10 QLLDTSC
5 QUICKLAG binding head terminal screw and clamp 10 QLBHTSE 1
6 and 7 QUICKLAG terminal screw 10 QLLNTSFG
Notes
1
1 Contact Eaton for factory modifications available for QCR and QCF breakers.
2 Q = 32 Vdc; Q1 = 32–40 Vdc; Q2 = 37.5 Vdc; Q3 = 45 Vdc; Q4 = 48 Vdc; Q5 = 50 Vdc; Q6 = 62.5 Vdc; Q7 = 75 Vdc (2P); Q8 = 80 Vdc (2P); Q9 = 125 Vdc (QCR 2P); Q10 = 62.5 Vdc (QCR 1P). 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1


1
Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals
1 Continuous Standard Line Terminal Standard Load Terminal Optional Terminals
Breaker Ampere Terminal Wire Wire Terminal Wire Wire
1 Type Rating Type Type Range (AWG) Type Type Range (AWG) Line Load
QUICKLAG Type P 10–30 Plug-on female clips that mate 1 Cu/Al 14–4 N/A 3
1 HQP, QPHW,
QHPX, QHPW 35–50
with the bus stabs
2 Cu/Al 14–4 N/A 3
55–125 3 Cu/Al 8–1/0 N/A —
1
QUICKLAG ground fault 10–40 Plug-on female clips that mate 1 (single-pole) Cu/Al 14–4 N/A 3
QPGFT, QPGFEP, with the bus stabs
1 QPHGFT, QPHGFEP 10–40 1 Cu/Al — N/A 3
10–30 1 Cu 14–8 N/A —
1 QUICKLAG Type B 10–40 Extended tangs that bolt 1 (single- and two-pole) Cu/Al 14–4 N/A 3
BAB, QBHW, directly to the bus
HBAX, HBAW 35–50 2 (three-pole) Cu/Al 14–4 N/A 3
1 55–125 3 Cu/Al 8–1/0 N/A —
1 QUICKLAG ground fault

QBGFT, QBGFEP,
10–40 Extended tangs that bolt
directly to the bus
1 (single-pole) Cu/Al 14–4 N/A N/A
QBHGFEP, QBHGFT 10–40 1 Cu/Al 14–8 N/A N/A

1 10–30 1 Cu 14–8 N/A N/A
QUICKLAG Type C 10–20 5 Cu/Al TBD 5 Cu/Al 14–10 6, 7 6, 7, 8
1 QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW 25–60 6 Cu/Al TBD 2 Cu/Al 14–4 5, 7 5, 6, 7, 8
70–100 7 Cu/Al TBD 3 Cu/Al 8–1/0 5 5, 7, 8
1 QUICKLAG 10–55 1 Cu/Al TBD 1 Cu/Al 14–4 N/A N/A
QCR, QCF
1 60 1 Cu TBD 1 Cu 14–4 N/A N/A
QUICKLAG ground fault 10–20 6 Cu/Al TBD 14–8 Cu/Al 14–4 6, 7 5
QCGFT, QCGFEP,
1 QCHGFT, QCHGFEP 25–50 6 Cu/Al TBD 1 Cu/Al 14–4 5, 7 5
10–30 6 — — — — — — —
1 QUICKLAG 10–60 9 Cu/Al 14–4 9 Cu/Al 14–4 See Accessories
QCD
70–100 10 Cu 4–1/0 10 Cu 4–1/0 See Accessories
1
1 2 3 5
1
1 1
1 Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Steel Ring Type
6 7 8 9 10
1
1
4-Prong Quick Connect QCD Terminal Assembly QCD Terminal Assembly
Aluminum Box Lug Aluminum Box Lug 10–60A 70–100A
1
1 Dimensions
1 Shipping Data
Standard Approximate
1 Miniature Number Carton Carton Weight Approximate Standard
Circuit Breaker of Poles Quantity Lbs (kg) Carton
1 QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all 1 24 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all 2 12 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1 QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all 3 8 9.00 (4.1) 12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)
1 QUICKLAG ground fault Type P–all 1 20 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)
Types B and C–all 1 20 11.00 (5.0) 12.50 x 7.00 x 5.50 (317.5 x 177.8 x 139.7)
1 Types P and B–all 2 5 5.00 (2.3) 12.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (317.5 x 152.4 x 114.3)
Note
1 1 Clamp on line side only.

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers
1.2
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L Circuit Breakers Contents
Description Page
1
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L Circuit Breakers 1
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-48
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-49 1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-62
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-72
1
1
Optimum and Efficient Protection for Every Application 1
1
1
1
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L Circuit Breakers 1
Product Overview Features 1
Optimum product quality, ● Complete range of UL 489 ● SWD (switching duty)— Device Printing on Front and Side
tested reliability and safety listed DIN rail mounted suitable for switching Installation options 1
stand for best protection of miniature circuit breakers fluorescent lighting loads
personnel, installations and up to 63A current rating (In ≤ 20A) These branch circuit breakers
plant. Eaton's FAZ-NA and are available in two terminal
1
● Two distinct UL 489 FAZ-NA ● Fulfill UL 489, CSA C22.2
FAZ-NA-L DIN rail mountable offerings available to No.5 and also IEC 60947-2 configurations: standard box
circuit breakers are designed provide the best solution Standard terminals that accept multiple 1
for use in branch service for the application— ● For use in applications for conductors and ring-tongue
applications. FAZ-NA at 277/480 Vac which UL 1077 or CSA terminals, ideally suited to 1
and FAZ-NA-L at 240 Vac C22.2 No.235 are also demanding requirements of
Powerful Offering for Machine
and System Builders
● Standard ratings of 10 kAIC allowed the semi-conductor industry.
All breakers mount on
1
available at both 240 Vac ● Field-installable shunt trip
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L are standard 35 mm DIN rail.
available with B, C and D
and 277/480 Vac and auxiliary switch Bus connectors and feeder
1
characteristics in accordance
● Select amperages available subsequent mounting terminal facilitate mounting
with UL® 489, CSA® C22.2 at 14 kAIC for both the ● Separate version for ring- and wiring of multiple 1
No.5; UL 1077, CSA C22.2 240 Vac and 277/480 Vac tongue connection (Type miniature circuit breaker
offerings and 10 kAIC up to
No.235 and IEC 60947-2.
125 Vdc per pole
FAZ-RT), terminal screws arrays in control panel 1
These devices are CE marked. can be removed (on assemblies. These circuit
● Current limiting design both sides)
Application Description provides fast short-circuit ● Module width of only
breakers can also be
reverse feed.
1
Feeder and branch circuit interruption that reduces 17.7 mm (per pole)
protection for: the let-through energy, ● Contact Position Indicator
1
which can damage the (red/green)
● Convenience receptacle
circuits (internal/external)
circuit
● Easy installation on DIN rail
1
● Suitable for branch circuit
● Possibility for sealing the
● Motor control circuits device protection
toggle in ON or OFF
1
● Load circuits leaving the ● Thermal-magnetic position
equipment (external) overcurrent protection
● Single-, two-, three- and 1
● HACR internal/external ● Three levels of short-
equipment (heating, air four-pole configurations
conditioning, refrigeration)
circuit protection, 1
categorized by B, C
● PLC I/O points and D curves
● Computers ● Trip-free design—breaker
1
can not be defeated by
● Power supplies
holding the handle in the 1
● Control instrumentation
ON position
● Relays ● Captive screws cannot 1
● UPS be lost
● Power conditioners 1

Standards and Certifications

1
FAZ-NA FAZ-NA-L
1 FAZ-NA complies with ● CSA C22.2 No.5 ● RoHS compliant FAZ-NA-L 0.5–63A at 240 Vac
the latest national and ● Standard for molded ● VDE compliant comply with the following
1 international standards. case circuit breakers ● ABS compliant standards.
● UL 489 (MCCB) for feeder and ● UL 489 listed
1 ● Standard for molded
branch circuit protection
● CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
(corresponds closely to
case circuit breakers UL 489 Standard) ● IEC rated
1 (MCCB) for feeder and ● RoHS compliant
● Products meet the
requirements of the CCC compliant
1 ● Products meet the Canadian Electrical Code
●
● OVE compliant
requirements of the (CEC)
1 National Electrical Code® ● EAC compliant
(NEC®) ● ABS compliant
1 ● VDE compliant
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
FAZ - C 6 / 1 - NA - SP
1
1 Breaker Family
Trip
Single Package 3
FAZ = FAZ UL SP = Single package for C and D curve
circuit breaker Characteristics 1 Ampere Rating 2 Number of Poles single-pole at 277 Vac only
1 B = 3–5X In 0.5 = 0.5A 13 = 13A 1 = Single-pole Blank = Standard packaging
C = 5–10X In 1 = 1A 15 = 15A 2 = Two-pole
1 D = 10–20X In 1.5 =
2 =
1.5A
2A
16 = 16A
20 = 20A
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
3 = 3A 25 = 25A
1 4 = 4A 30 = 30A
5 = 5A 32 = 32A Terminal
1 6 =
7 =
6A
7A
35 = 32A
40 = 40A
NA =
RT =
UL 489 branch circuit at 277/480 Vac with screw terminals
UL 489 branch circuit at 277/480 Vac with ring-tongue terminals
8 = 8A 50 = 50A DC = UL 489 branch circuit at 125 Vdc per pole
1 10 = 10A 63 = 63A NA-L = UL 489 branch circuit at 240 Vac with screw terminals
RT-L = UL 489 branch circuit at 240 Vac with ring-tongue terminals
1
Notes
1 1 I = Rated current for instantaneous trip characteristics.
n
2 B curve starts at 1 ampere.
1 3 Single package only available for 277 Vac offering—not an option for 240 Vac line.
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Product Selection
1
1.13
1.45
FAZ-NA B Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering 7200
● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) 3600 Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :
N
1
current t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
as branch circuit breakers t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)
INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h
● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2
1200
600
Specified tripping current
Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s
N
1
Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s
● Current limiting device 300 IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
● UL file number E235139 120

1
60 1
30 1
10
5 1
t [sec]
2
1
1
1
0.5
0.2 1
3
0.1
B
0.05
2
1
0.02
0.005
0.01
1
0.002
0.001
1
0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1
I / IN
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A) 1
Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 1
Amps Number Number Number Number
B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating) 1
1 FAZ-B1/1-NA FAZ-B1/2-NA FAZ-B1/3-NA FAZ-B1/4-NA
Two-Pole 1.5 FAZ-B1.5/1-NA FAZ-B1.5/2-NA FAZ-B1.5/3-NA FAZ-B1.5/4-NA 1
1
4 FAZ-B4/1-NA FAZ-B4/2-NA FAZ-B4/3-NA FAZ-B4/4-NA 1
Three-Pole
1
1
Four-Pole 16 FAZ-B16/1-NA FAZ-B16/2-NA FAZ-B16/3-NA FAZ-B16/4-NA
1
1
Note
1 Two-piece order. Quantities of two per box. 1
1
1
1

FAZ-NA B Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering
1.13
1.45
1 ● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) 7200
3600 Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :
as branch circuit breakers N
1 ● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2 1200

current
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)
Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s
● Current limiting device 600
N
1 ● UL file number E235139

300 IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s
N
120
1 60 1
30
1 10
5
t [sec]
1 2
1
1
1 0.5
0.2
1 0.1
0.05
2 B
3
1 0.02
0.01
1 0.005
0.002
0.001
1 0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1 I / IN
1
FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC,
1 Single-Pole
14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A)
1 Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole

Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
1
B Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (3–5X In Current Rating)
1 Two-Pole
1 FAZ-B1/1-RT FAZ-B1/2-RT FAZ-B1/3-RT FAZ-B1/4-RT
1.5 FAZ-B1.5/1-RT FAZ-B1.5/2-RT FAZ-B1.5/3-RT FAZ-B1.5/4-RT
1 2 FAZ-B2/1-RT FAZ-B2/2-RT FAZ-B2/3-RT FAZ-B2/4-RT

Three-Pole 6 FAZ-B6/1-RT FAZ-B6/2-RT FAZ-B6/3-RT FAZ-B6/4-RT
Four-Pole
1 Note
1 Two-piece order. Quantities of two per box.
1
1
1

1.2
FAZ-NA C Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering
1.13
1.45
● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) 7200
1
Specified non-tripping Type C: 5 x I : t > 0.1 s
as branch circuit breakers 3600 N
● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2 1200

current
Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s
N
1
● Current limiting device 600 Specified tripping current

IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h 1
120
60 1
30
10 1
5
t [sec]
2 1
1
0.5
0.2
1
2
0.1
0.05
1
C 1
0.02
0.01 1
0.005
0.002 1
0.001
0.0005
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
I / IN
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A) 1
Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 1
1
C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)
0.5 FAZ-C0.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-C0.5/2-NA FAZ-C0.5/3-NA FAZ-C0.5/4-NA 1
Two-Pole 1 FAZ-C1/1-NA-SP FAZ-C1/2-NA FAZ-C1/3-NA FAZ-C1/4-NA
1.5 FAZ-C1.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-C1.5/2-NA FAZ-C1.5/3-NA FAZ-C1.5/4-NA 1
2 FAZ-C2/1-NA-SP FAZ-C2/2-NA FAZ-C2/3-NA FAZ-C2/4-NA
1
1
Three-Pole
6 FAZ-C6/1-NA-SP FAZ-C6/2-NA FAZ-C6/3-NA FAZ-C6/4-NA 1
1
Four-Pole 15 FAZ-C15/1-NA-SP FAZ-C15/2-NA FAZ-C15/3-NA FAZ-C15/4-NA 1
1
1
Note
1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering.
1
1
1
1

FAZ-NA C Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering
1.13
1.45

current
Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s
N

1 ● UL file number E235139 300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
120
1 60
30
1 10
5
t [sec]
1 2
1
1 0.5
0.2
2
1 0.1
0.05
1
C
0.02
1 0.01
0.005
1 0.002
0.001
1 0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1 I / IN
1 Single-Pole FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC,
14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A)
1 Amps Number Number Number Number
C Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (5–10X In Current Rating)
1
0.5 FAZ-C0.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-C0.5/2-RT FAZ-C0.5/3-RT FAZ-C0.5/4-RT
Two-Pole
1 1 FAZ-C1/1-RT-SP FAZ-C1/2-RT FAZ-C1/3-RT FAZ-C1/4-RT
1.5 FAZ-C1.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-C1.5/2-RT FAZ-C1.5/3-RT FAZ-C1.5/4-RT
3 FAZ-C3/1-RT-SP FAZ-C3/2-RT FAZ-C3/3-RT FAZ-C3/4-RT
Three-Pole
1 Four-Pole

1 Note
1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C and D curves only.
1
1
1

1.2
FAZ-NA D Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering
1.13
1.45
1
Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
current
INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)
Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s
1
N
Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
1
120
60 1
1
30
10 1
5
t [sec]
2 1
1
1
0.5
0.2
1
3
0.1
0.05
2
D 1
0.02
0.01 1
0.005
0.002 1
0.001
0.0005
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
I / IN
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A) 1
Single-Pole 1
Catalog
Two-Pole
Catalog
Three-Pole
Catalog
Four-Pole
Catalog
1
D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
1
0.5 FAZ-D0.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-D0.5/2-NA FAZ-D0.5/3-NA FAZ-D0.5/4-NA 1
Two-Pole 1 FAZ-D1/1-NA-SP FAZ-D1/2-NA FAZ-D1/3-NA FAZ-D1/4-NA
1.5 FAZ-D1.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-D1.5/2-NA FAZ-D1.5/3-NA FAZ-D1.5/4-NA 1
2 FAZ-D2/1-NA-SP FAZ-D2/2-NA FAZ-D2/3-NA FAZ-D2/4-NA
1
1
Three-Pole
6 FAZ-D6/1-NA-SP FAZ-D6/2-NA FAZ-D6/3-NA FAZ-D6/4-NA 1
1
Four-Pole 15 FAZ-D15/1-NA-SP FAZ-D15/2-NA FAZ-D15/3-NA FAZ-D15/4-NA
1
1
Note
1
1
1
1

FAZ-NA D Curve 277/480 Vac Rated Offering
1.13
1.45
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
current
Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s
N
Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s
1 ● UL file number E235139 300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
120
1 60 1
30
1 10
5
t [sec]
1 2
1
1
1 0.5
0.2
3
1 0.1
0.05
2
D
0.02
1 0.01
0.005
1 0.002
0.001
1 0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1 I / IN
1 Single-Pole FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 277/480 Vac—10 kAIC,
14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A)
D Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (10–20X In Current Rating)
1 0.5 FAZ-D0.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-D0.5/2-RT FAZ-D0.5/3-RT FAZ-D0.5/4-RT
Two-Pole
1 1 FAZ-D1/1-RT-SP FAZ-D1/2-RT FAZ-D1/3-RT FAZ-D1/4-RT
1.5 FAZ-D1.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-D1.5/2-RT FAZ-D1.5/3-RT FAZ-D1.5/4-RT
3 FAZ-D3/1-RT-SP FAZ-D3/2-RT FAZ-D3/3-RT FAZ-D3/4-RT
Three-Pole
1 Four-Pole

1 Note
1
1
1

1.2
FAZ-NA-DC C Curve at 125 Vdc per Pole Offering
1
● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02)
as Branch Circuit Breakers
● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA at 125 Vdc UL/CSA, 10 kA
1
at 250 Vdc
● 125 Vdc for one-pole, 250 Vdc for two-pole in series
1
● Polarity (+/–) sensitive and not for use on photovoltaic
string application
● UL file number E235139
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FAZ-NA-DC UL 489 Circuit Breakers—
1
Single-Pole
10 kAIC at 125 Vdc Per Pole
1
Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole
Amps
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1
1
2 FAZ-C2/1-NA-DC-SP FAZ-C2/2-NA-DC
3 FAZ-C3/1-NA-DC-SP FAZ-C3/2-NA-DC 1
Two-Pole 4 FAZ-C4/1-NA-DC-SP FAZ-C4/2-NA-DC
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C curves only; add
suffix SP when ordering.

1
1
1

FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC B Curve
1.13
1.45
as branch circuit breakers 3600 Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :

N

current
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)
Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s
● 48 Vdc for single-pole 600 N
1 ● Current limiting device 300

IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s
N

1 60 1
30
1 10
5
t [sec]
1 2
1
1 0.5
1
0.2
1 0.1
2 B
3
0.05
1 0.02
0.01
1 0.005
0.002
1 0.001
0.0005
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A)
B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)
1 1 FAZ-B1/1-NA-L FAZ-B1/2-NA-L FAZ-B1/3-NA-L FAZ-B1/4-NA-L
1 Two-Pole 1.5 FAZ-B1.5/1-NA-L FAZ-B1.5/2-NA-L FAZ-B1.5/3-NA-L FAZ-B1.5/4-NA-L

2 FAZ-B2/1-NA-L FAZ-B2/2-NA-L FAZ-B2/3-NA-L FAZ-B2/4-NA-L
1 Three-Pole

Four-Pole
1 35 2 FAZ-B35/1-NA FAZ-B35/2-NA FAZ-B35/3-NA FAZ-B35/4-NA
40 2 FAZ-B40/1-NA FAZ-B40/2-NA FAZ-B40/3-NA FAZ-B40/4-NA
Notes
1 1 Two-piece order. Quantities of two per box.
2 35A and 40A at 240 Vac were available prior to the creation of the FAZ-NA-L offering so the catalog numbers at these amperages exclude the “L” suffix.

1.2
FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC B Curve
1.13
1.45
1
as branch circuit breakers 3600 Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :
N

current
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A) 1
Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s
● 48 Vdc for single-pole 600 N

IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s
N 1
60 1 1
30
10
1
5
t [sec]
2 1
1
0.5
1
1
0.2
0.1
2 B
3
1
0.05
0.02 1
0.01
0.005
0.002
1
0.001
0.0005
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
1
Single-Pole FAZ-RT-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 240 Vac—10 kAIC,
14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A) 1
Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 1
B Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (3–5X In Current Rating) 1
1 FAZ-B1/1-RT-L FAZ-B1/2-RT-L FAZ-B1/3-RT-L FAZ-B1/4-RT-L
Two-Pole
1.5 FAZ-B1.5/1-RT-L FAZ-B1.5/2-RT-L FAZ-B1.5/3-RT-L FAZ-B1.5/4-RT-L
1
1
4 FAZ-B4/1-RT-L FAZ-B4/2-RT-L FAZ-B4/3-RT-L FAZ-B4/4-RT-L 1
Three-Pole 6 FAZ-B6/1-RT-L FAZ-B6/2-RT-L FAZ-B6/3-RT-L FAZ-B6/4-RT-L 1
1
Four-Pole
1
1
40 2 FAZ-B40/1-RT FAZ-B40/2-RT FAZ-B40/3-RT FAZ-B40/4-RT 1
1
Notes 1
1

FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC C Curve
1.13
1.45
as branch circuit breakers 3600
current
N
Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s
N
600 Specified tripping current

● 48 Vdc for single-pole
1 ● Current limiting device
300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
120
1 60
30
1 10
5
t [sec]
2
1 1
0.5
1 0.2
0.1 2
1
0.05 C
1 0.02
0.01
1 0.005
0.002
1 0.001
0.0005
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A)
1 0.5 FAZ-C0.5/1-NA-L FAZ-C0.5/2-NA-L FAZ-C0.5/3-NA-L FAZ-C0.5/4-NA-L
1 Two-Pole 1 FAZ-C1/1-NA-L FAZ-C1/2-NA-L FAZ-C1/3-NA-L FAZ-C1/4-NA-L

1.5 FAZ-C1.5/1-NA-L FAZ-C1.5/2-NA-L FAZ-C1.5/3-NA-L FAZ-C1.5/4-NA-L
1 2 FAZ-C2/1-NA-L FAZ-C2/2-NA-L FAZ-C2/3-NA-L FAZ-C2/4-NA-L
3 FAZ-C3/1-NA-L FAZ-C3/2-NA-L FAZ-C3/3-NA-L FAZ-C3/4-NA-L
1 Three-Pole

1 Four-Pole 15 FAZ-C15/1-NA-L FAZ-C15/2-NA-L FAZ-C15/3-NA-L FAZ-C15/4-NA-L

35 2 FAZ-C35/1-NA-SP FAZ-C35/2-NA FAZ-C35/3-NA FAZ-C35/4-NA
1 40 2 FAZ-C40/1-NA-SP FAZ-C40/2-NA FAZ-C40/3-NA FAZ-C40/4-NA
1 50 FAZ-C50/1-NA FAZ-C50/2-NA FAZ-C50/3-NA FAZ-C50/4-NA

63 FAZ-C63/1-NA FAZ-C63/2-NA FAZ-C63/3-NA FAZ-C63/4-NA
1 Notes
1 2 35A and 40A at 240 Vac were available prior to the creation of the FAZ-NA-L offering so the catalog numbers at these amperages exclude the “L” suffix.

1.2
FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC C Curve
1.13
1.45
Type C: 5 x I : t > 0.1 s
1
Specified non-tripping
current
N
Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s
N
1
● 48 Vdc for single-pole
● Current limiting device
300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
1
120
30
1
10
5 1
t [sec]
2
1 1
0.5
0.2
0.1 2
1
1
0.05 C
0.02
1
0.01
0.005 1
0.002
0.001
0.0005
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
Single-Pole FAZ-RT-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 240 Vac—10 kAIC, 1
14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A)
Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 1
Amps Number Number Number Number 1
C Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (5–10X In Current Rating)
0.5 FAZ-C0.5/1-RT-L FAZ-C0.5/2-RT-L FAZ-C0.5/3-RT-L FAZ-C0.5/4-RT-L 1
Two-Pole
1 FAZ-C1/1-RT-L FAZ-C1/2-RT-L FAZ-C1/3-RT-L FAZ-C1/4-RT-L
1.5 FAZ-C1.5/1-RT-L FAZ-C1.5/2-RT-L FAZ-C1.5/3-RT-L FAZ-C1.5/4-RT-L
1
1
4 FAZ-C4/1-RT-L FAZ-C4/2-RT-L FAZ-C4/3-RT-L FAZ-C4/4-RT-L 1
Three-Pole 5 FAZ-C5/1-RT-L FAZ-C5/2-RT-L FAZ-C5/3-RT-L FAZ-C5/4-RT-L
1
1
Four-Pole 15 FAZ-C15/1-RT-L FAZ-C15/2-RT-L FAZ-C15/3-RT-L FAZ-C15/4-RT-L 1
1
1
50 FAZ-C50/1-RT FAZ-C50/2-RT FAZ-C50/3-RT FAZ-C50/4-RT
63 FAZ-C63/1-RT FAZ-C63/2-RT FAZ-C63/3-RT FAZ-C63/4-RT 1
Notes
1 Two-piece order. Quantities of two per box. 1
1
1

FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC D Curve
1.13
1.45
current
N
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s
N
● 48 Vdc for single-pole Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s
1 ● Current limiting device

300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
120
1 60
30
1
1 10
5
t [sec]
2
1 1
1
0.5
1 0.2
0.1
3
2
0.05 D
1 0.02
0.01
1 0.005
0.002
1 0.001
0.0005
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
Single-Pole FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A)
D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
1 0.5 FAZ-D0.5/1-NA-L FAZ-D0.5/2-NA-L FAZ-D0.5/3-NA-L FAZ-D0.5/4-NA-L
1 Two-Pole 1 FAZ-D1/1-NA-L FAZ-D1/2-NA-L FAZ-D1/3-NA-L FAZ-D1/4-NA-L

1.5 FAZ-D1.5/1-NA-L FAZ-D1.5/2-NA-L FAZ-D1.5/3-NA-L FAZ-D1.5/4-NA-L
1 2 FAZ-D2/1-NA-L FAZ-D2/2-NA-L FAZ-D2/3-NA-L FAZ-D2/4-NA-L
3 FAZ-D3/1-NA-L FAZ-D3/2-NA-L FAZ-D3/3-NA-L FAZ-D3/4-NA-L
1 Three-Pole
Four-Pole
35 2 FAZ-D35/1-NA-SP FAZ-D35/2-NA FAZ-D35/3-NA FAZ-D35/4-NA
1 40 2 FAZ-D40/1-NA-SP FAZ-D40/2-NA FAZ-D40/3-NA FAZ-D40/4-NA
1 Notes
1 2 35A and 40A at 240 Vac were available prior to the creation of the FAZ-NA-L offering so the catalog numbers at these amperages exclude the “L” suffix.
1
1

1.2
FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers at 240 Vac—10 kAIC D Curve
1.13
1.45
2.55 I :
1
Specified non-tripping
current
N
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s
N
1
● 48 Vdc for single-pole Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s
● Current limiting device

300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
1
120
60
30
1
10
5 1
t [sec]
2
1
1
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
3
1
2
0.05 D
0.02
1
0.01
0.005 1
0.002
0.001
0.0005
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / IN
15 20 30 40 50
1
Single-Pole FAZ-RT-L UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals at 240 Vac—10 kAIC, 1
14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A)
1
Amps Number Number Number Number 1
D Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (10–20X In Current Rating)
0.5 FAZ-D0.5/1-RT-L FAZ-D0.5/2-RT-L FAZ-D0.5/3-RT-L FAZ-D0.5/4-RT-L
1
Two-Pole
1 FAZ-D1/1-RT-L FAZ-D1/2-RT-L FAZ-D1/3-RT-L FAZ-D1/4-RT-L
1
1.5 FAZ-D1.5/1-RT-L FAZ-D1.5/2-RT-L FAZ-D1.5/3-RT-L FAZ-D1.5/4-RT-L
2 FAZ-D2/1-RT-L FAZ-D2/2-RT-L FAZ-D2/3-RT-L FAZ-D2/4-RT-L 1
Three-Pole 5 FAZ-D5/1-RT-L FAZ-D5/2-RT-L FAZ-D5/3-RT-L FAZ-D5/4-RT-L
1
1
Four-Pole 15 FAZ-D15/1-RT-L FAZ-D15/2-RT-L FAZ-D15/3-RT-L FAZ-D15/4-RT-L 1
1
1
Notes
1
1
1
1

Accessories
1
FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Breakers,
1 FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L UL 489 Breakers continued
Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number
1 Contact Two-pole contact or auxiliary Z-NHK 1 Busbar Busbar—single-pole, 6 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/6
contact/trip indicating contact
1 Busbar—single-pole, 12 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/12
Busbar—single-pole, 18 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/18
1 Busbar—two-pole, 6 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/6
Busbar—two-pole, 12 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/12
1 Busbar—two-pole, 18 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/18
1 Busbar—three-pole, 6 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/6

Busbar—three-pole, 12 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/12
Auxiliary Contact Auxiliary contact Z-IHK-NA
1 Busbar—three-pole, 18 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/18
Busbar Shroud Three-pole busbar shroud ZV-BS-UL
1
1
1
Extension Terminal Extension terminal— Z-EK/35/UL
1 Shunt Trip Shunt trip 110–415 Vac FAZ-XAA-NA110-415VAC 35 mm2 (10–1/0 AWG)
Shunt trip 12–110 Vac FAZ-XAA-NA12-110VAC
1
1
1
Padlock Hasp Padlock hasp Z-IS/SPE-1TE
1
Bus Connector Bus connector—conductors up to Z-EB/50/UL
1 50 mm2 (~1/0 AWG)
1
1
Lockoff Device UL lockoff device FAZPLOFF Notes
1 1 Voltage of FAZ-NA circuit breaker is limited to 300V with this auxiliary contact installed.
2 Do not cut commoning link.
3 A maximum of three commoning links may be used in conjunction. Each breaker connected to
1 the commoning link must have the same number of poles for proper use.
4 Not for use with ring-tongue circuit breakers.
1 5 Bus may be center fed for high current capacity.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Tripping Signal Switch Z-NHK, Z-IHK-NA Connection Diagram
● Design according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 62019 1
Z-NHK Z-IHK-NA
● Field installable
● The specified minimum voltages are per contact—take into 4.14/4.12 21 1
account particularly in case of series connection 4.12/4.14
● Self-cleaning contacts
13 1
4.11
● Contact material and design particularly suitable for extra
low voltage 1
● Z-NHK: the function of one of the two change-over
contacts can be switched from “auxiliary switch” to 1
“tripping signal switch”
● Tripping signal contact transmits message of electric tripping, 22
14 1
not mechanical switch-off 1.11
● Test key for contact function “electrical tripping” 1.14 Same Polarity 1
● Z-IHK-NA: will allow for > 480Y/277 Vac rating
1.12 1
Busbar Connection Example 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Z-NHK Contact and Auxiliary Contact

1 Description Z-NHK Z-IHK-NA
1 Electrical
Contact function 2CO 1NO + 1NC
1 Rated voltage 230V 250V
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
1 Rated current 2A 6A
Rated thermal current Ith 2A 6A
1 Utilization category AC13
Z-IHK-NA
Rated operational current Ie 3A/250 Vac 3A/250 Vac
1 Utilization category AC15
1 Utilization category DC12
Rated operational current Ie 0.5A/110 Vdc 0.5A/110 Vdc
1 0.25A/220 Vdc
Rated insulation voltage UI 250 Vac 250 Vac
1 Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin 5 Vdc 5 Vdc
Minimum operational current Imin 10 mA DC 10 mA AC/DC
1 Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ) 2.5 kV 4 kV
1 Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A 1 kA 1 kA

Max. backup fuse, overload and short circuit 6A gL —
1 Mechanical
Tripping indicator “electrical tripping” Blue/white —
1 Frame size 45 mm 45 mm
Device height 80 mm 80 mm
1 Device width 8.8 mm (0.5MU) 8.8 mm (0.5MU)
1 Mounting Onto switching device —

Degree of protection, built-in IP40 IP40
1 Terminal protection Finger and hand touch safe Finger and hand touch safe
According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6 According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6
1 Terminals Lift terminals Lift terminals
Terminal capacity 20–14 AWG 0.5–2.5 mm2
1 Terminal screws M3 (Posidrive Z0) M3 (Posidrive Z0)
Fastening torque of terminal screws 7 lb-in Max. 1.2 Nm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Shunt trip release FAZ-XAA-NA
● Remote release for subsequent mounting onto FAZ-NA/RT 1
● Additional installation of standard auxiliary switch is possible
● Position indicator red–green
1
Shunt Trip Release FAZ-XAA-NA
1
Connection Diagram
1 Description FAZ-XAA-NA12-110VAC FAZ-XAA-NA110-415VAC
1
Electrical
Can be FAZ-NA / FAZ-NA-DC / FAZ-NA / FAZ-NA-DC / 1
mounted onto FAZ-RT FAZ-RT
2
Operational
voltage range
12–110 Vac
12–60 Vdc
110–415 Vac
110–230 Vdc
1
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 1
Mechanical
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 1
Device width 17.5 mm 17.5 mm
1
Mounting Quick fastening with two lock-in positions on EN 50022
1
Terminal protection Finger and hand touch safe according to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6 1
Terminals Open mouthed/lift Open mouthed/lift
Terminal capacity 18–10 AWG 18–10 AWG 1
One and two wires
1
Busbar block UL 489 (pin)
● Tested according to UL 489
1
● Do not cut
● Extension terminal 35 mm2 Z-EK/35/UL for copper conductors
1
● Incoming terminal 50 mm2 Z-EB/50/UL 1
● For covering of not used pins, use busbar tag shrouds ZV-BS-UL
1
Connection Diagrams Busbar Block UL 489 (Pin)
Three-Pole Busbar
Description UL 489 IEC/EN 60947-2 1
Electrical
Rated operational voltage 480/277 Vac — 1
96 Vdc
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz — 1
Rated voltage 480 Vac 690 Vac
Two-Pole Busbar Overvoltage category — III
1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp — 9.5 kV
1
Rated current 80A at 40°C 80A at 30°C
Rated conditional short-circuit current AC with 350A gG — 15 kA 1
Short-circuit current 10 kA —
Single-Pole Busbar Mechanical 1
Busbar cross section — 16 mm2 Cu
Flame class according to UL 94 V0 —
1
Pollution degree — 2 1
Comparative tracking index — CTI 600
Minimum clearance (internal/external) — > 9.5/25.4 mm 1
Minimum creepage distance (internal/external) — > 12.7/50.8 mm
Resistance to climatic conditions — According to
1
DIN/EN 60068
1
1


1
Trip Curve Chart Tripping Characteristics
1 Eaton FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L D-curve devices are suitable
branch circuit breakers are for applications where high
1 available with “B,” “C” and levels of inrush current are
“D” tripping characteristics. expected. The high magnetic
1 B-curve devices are suitable
for applications where low
trip point prevents nuisance
tripping in high inductive
levels of inrush current applications such as motors,
1 are expected. transformers and power
supplies.
1 C-curve devices are suitable
for applications where Eaton FAZ-NA and FAZ-NA-L
medium levels of inrush devices are current limiting,
1 current are expected. which means they interrupt
Applications include small fault currents within one half
1 transformers, lighting, pilot cycle of the fault. Current
devices, control circuits and limiting devices offer superior
1 coils. C-curve devices provide protection by reducing peak
a medium magnetic trip point. let-through current and
1 energy.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Connection Diagrams UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers Technical Data
Description FAZ-NA FAZ-NA-DC FAZ-NA-L
1
Single-Pole
Electrical
1
Design according to UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5, IEC 60947-2 UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5, IEC 60947-2 UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5, IEC 60947-2
Rated voltage Single-pole: 277 Vac 125 Vdc per pole Single-pole: 240 Vac 1
2-, 3- or 4-pole: 277/480 Vac 250 Vdc with 2-poles in connected series 2-, 3- or 4-pole: 240 Vac
Single-pole: 48 Vdc per pole
2-pole in series: 96 Vdc
— Single-pole: 48 Vdc per pole
2-pole in series: 96 Vdc
1
Rated current B: 1–32 A
C & D: 0.5–32 A
C: 2–40 A B: 1–63 A
C: 0.5–63 A
1
D: 0.5–40 A
Characteristic B, C, D C B, C, D
1
Two-Pole Current interrupting rating B curve—10 kA: 1–13 A, 30–32 A
C curve—10 kA: 0.5–13 A, 30–32 A
10 kA B curve—10 kA: 1–13 A, 30–32 A
C curve—10 kA: 0.5–13 A, 30–32 A 1
B & C curve—14 kA: 15–25 A B & C curve—14 kA: 15–25 A
D curve—10 kA: 0.5–10 A, 25–32 A
D curve—14 kA: 13–20 A
D curve—10 kA: 0.5–10 A, 25–32 A
D curve—14 kA: 13–20 A
1
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 1
Endurance ≥ 20,000 operations ≥ 20,000 operations ≥ 20,000 operations
Line voltage connection Suitable for reverse feed Suitable for reverse feed Suitable for reverse feed 1
Mechanical
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 1
Device height 105 mm 105 mm 105 mm
Three-Pole
Device width 17.7 mm per pole 17.7 mm per pole 17.7 mm per pole
1
Terminal protection Finger and hand touch safe according to
BGV A3, OVE-EN 6
Finger and hand touch safe according to
BGV A3, OVE-EN 6
Finger and hand touch safe according to
BGV A3, OVE-EN 6
1
Mounting Quick fastening with two lock-in positions
on IEC/EN 60715
Quick fastening with two lock-in positions
on IEC/EN 60715
Quick fastening with two lock-in positions
on IEC/EN 60715
1
Upper and lower terminals Open mouth/lift terminals Open mouth/lift terminals Open mouth/lift terminals
1
Terminal capacity One wire: AWG 18–6 One wire: AWG 18–6 One wire: AWG 18–6
Two wires: AWG 18–10 Two wires: AWG 18–10 Two wires: AWG 18–10
1
Terminal fastening torque AWG 18–21: 21 lb-in AWG 18–21: 21 lb-in AWG 18–21: 21 lb-in
AWG 10–8: 25 lb-in AWG 10–8: 25 lb-in AWG 10–8: 25 lb-in
AWG 6: 36 lb-in AWG 6: 36 lb-in AWG 6: 36 lb-in 1
Mounting Independent of position Independent of position Independent of position
Calibration temperature
1
UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5 40°C 40°C 40°C
IEC 60947-2 30°C 30°C 30°C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Power Loss at ln
1 Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D
1 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole

In [A] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W] P [W]
1 0.5 — — — 1.6 3.2 4.7 1.6 3.2 4.8
1.0 1.1 2.2 3.4 1.1 2.2 3.4 0.8 1.5 2.3
1 1.5 2.2 4.4 6.6 1.3 2.6 3.9 1.0 2.1 3.1
1 2.0 1.4 2.8 4.3 1.4 2.8 4.3 1.0 2.1 3.1
3.0 2.1 4.2 6.4 1.2 2.4 3.6 1.2 2.4 3.6
1 4.0 1.4 2.9 4.3 1.4 2.9 4.3 1.4 2.9 4.3
5.0 1.8 3.7 5.5 1.9 3.7 5.6 1.5 2.9 4.4
1 6.0 1.7 3.5 5.2 1.2 2.3 3.5 1.2 2.3 3.5
1 7.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 1.4 2.8 4.3 1.4 2.8 4.3
8.0 2.0 3.9 5.9 1.4 2.8 4.2 1.2 2.4 3.7
1 10.0 1.8 3.6 5.3 1.8 3.6 5.3 1.5 3.0 4.5
13.0 2.4 4.7 7.1 2.4 4.7 7.1 2.0 4.1 6.1
1 15.0 1.9 3.8 5.6 1.9 3.8 5.6 1.5 3.1 4.6
1 16.0 2.1 4.3 6.4 2.1 4.3 6.4 1.7 3.5 5.2
20.0 2.9 5.8 8.7 2.9 5.8 8.7 1.8 3.7 5.5
1 25.0 3.1 6.2 9.3 3.1 6.2 9.3 2.6 5.1 7.7
30.0 3.0 6.0 9.0 3.0 6.0 9.0 2.7 5.4 8.1
1 32.0 3.4 6.8 10.2 3.4 6.8 10.2 3.1 6.2 9.3
1 35.0 4.0 8.1 12.1 3.7 7.4 11.0 3.8 7.6 11.3
40.0 4.0 8.1 12.1 4.0 8.1 12.1 3.9 7.8 11.6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Let-Through Energy
1
Characteristic B (1–32A), 277V Characteristic B (35–63A), 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Characteristic C (0.5–32A), 277V Characteristic C (35–63A), 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Characteristic D (0.5–32A), 277V Characteristic D (35–63A), 240V

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
Influence of Ambient Temperature T on Load Carrying Capacity
Device Market In (A) at Higher Ambient Temperature
1
Current Rating In
(A) at 40°C 15°C 20°C 25°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 1
0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.9 1
1.5 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.4
1
2.0 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.8
3.0 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.0 2.9 2.9 2.8 1
4.0 4.4 4.3 4.2 4.2 4.0 3.8 3.8 3.7
5.0 5.5 5.4 5.3 5.2 5.0 4.8 4.7 4.6 1
6.0 6.6 6.5 6.4 6.2 6.0 5.8 5.6 5.5
7.0 7.7 7.6 7.4 7.3 7.0 6.7 6.6 6.4
1
8.0 8.8 8.6 8.5 8.3 8.0 7.7 7.5 7.4 1
10.0 11.0 10.8 10.6 10.4 10.0 9.6 9.4 9.2
13.0 14.3 14.0 13.8 13.5 13.0 12.5 12.5 12.0 1
15.0 16.5 16.2 15.9 15.6 15.0 14.4 14.1 13.8
16.0 17.6 17.3 17.0 16.6 16.0 15.4 15.0 14.7
1
20.0 22.0 21.6 21.2 20.8 20.0 19.2 18.8 18.4
1
25.0 27.5 27.0 26.5 26.0 25.0 24.0 23.3 23.0
30.0 33.0 32.4 31.8 31.2 30.0 28.8 28.2 27.6 1
32.0 35.2 34.6 33.9 33.3 32.0 30.7 30.1 29.4
40.0 44.0 43.2 42.4 41.6 40.0 38.4 37.6 36.8
1
1
Load Carrying Capacity of Adjoining Miniature
Circuit Breakers
1
1.00
1
Rated Diversity Factor
1
Load Factor KT [I/IN]
0.90
1
0.80
1
1
0.70
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
Number of Circuit Breakers 1
1
Ambient Temperature T [°C]
Maximum Load IL at ambient temperature T: IL (T) = IN KT(T)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Dimensions
1 Miniature Circuit Breakers Lockout Attachment— UL Lockoff Device—

Z-IS/SPE-1TE FAZPLOFF
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
1
1
1 H H H H
1
1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1
MCB UL 489
W2 W3 W4
1 H W1 W2 W3 W4
1 4.13
(105.0)
0.70
(17.7)
1.39
(35.3)
2.09
(53.1)
2.79
(70.8)
1
Accessories
1 Z-SV/UL-16/6 Z-SV/UL-18...12 ZV-BS-UL
1
1
1
1
1
1
Z-SV/UL-16.../18 Z-EK/35/UL
1
1
1
1
1
1
Z-EK/35/UL Z-EB/50/UL
1 Description UL 489 IEC/EN 60947-2 Description UL 489 IEC/EN 60947-2
1 Ue 480 Vac/96 Vdc 240/415 Vac Ue 480 Vac/96 Vdc 240/415 Vac
f 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz f 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
1 Uimp — 9.5 kV Uimp — 9.5 kV
Ie 80A at 40°C 80A at 30°C Ie 115A at 40°C 160A at 30°C
1 10–1/0 AWG 60/75°C Cu 2.5–35 mm2 Cu #1–14 AWG 60/75°C Cu 1.5–50 mm2 Cu
1 0.56 in 14 mm 0.56 in 14 mm
1
1

1.2
Application Guidelines
1
Example of UL 489 and UL 1077 Application
1
1
UL 489
Breaker 1
1
1
UL 489
UL 1077 Branch 1
Internal Receptacle External
Receptacle 1
Electronics
1
UL 489
1
UL 1077
Branch External
Motor 1
Other
Sensitive M 1
Devices
UL 489
Branch 1
External
UL 489
Motor
1
Branch
M 1
Motor
1
HACR UL 1077 Controller
1
1
1
Example of UL 489 and UL 1077 Application
1
UL 489 circuit breakers 1
Used for branch circuit protection, internal/external receptacles, external motors and HACR equipment
(heating, air conditioning and refrigeration). 1
UL 1077 supplementary protectors 1
Used for overcurrent protection within appliances or electrical equipment, where branch circuit protection
is already provided or not required. 1
Note: UL 489 devices can be used in place of UL 1077; UL 1077 devices cannot be used in place of UL 489.
1
1
1
1
1
1

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors
FAZ Circuit Breakers Contents

1 Description Page
1 FAZ Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-74
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75
1 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75
1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-82
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-92
1 Optimum and Efficient Protection for Every Application
1
1
1
1
1 FAZ Circuit Breakers
1 Product Overview Features
Optimum product quality, ● Complete range of UL ● Trip-free design—breaker
1 tested reliability and safety 1077 recognized DIN can not be defeated by
stand for best protection of rail mounted miniature holding the handle in the
personnel, installations and circuit breakers up to ON position
1 plant. Eaton’s FAZ DIN rail 63A current rating
mountable circuit breaker is
● Captive screws cannot
1 designed for use in control
● Standard ratings of 10 kAIC be lost
panel applications. up to 277/480 Vac
● Fulfill UL 1077, CSA C22.2
1 ● Current limiting design No.235 and also IEC
Powerful offering for machine provides fast short-circuit 60947-2 Standard
1 and system builders interruption that reduces
The FAZ is available with B, the let-through energy,
● Field-installable shunt trip
C, D, K, S, and Z characteristics and auxiliary switch
1 in accordance with UL 1077,
which can damage
the circuit subsequent mounting
CSA C22.2 No.235 and IEC
1 60947-2. These devices are ● Suitable for supplementary
● Module width of only
17.7 mm (per pole)
CE marked. protection
1 Application Description ● Thermal-magnetic
● Contact position indicator
overcurrent protection (red/green)
1 ● Supplementary protection
● Easy installation on DIN rail
● Control circuits ● Six levels of short-circuit
protection, categorized
1 ● Lighting
by B, C, D, K, S, and
● Possibility for sealing
● Business equipment the toggle in ON or
Z curves OFF position
1 ● Appliances
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.3
Discover These Advanced Features FAZ complies with the latest ● RoHS compliant
1
national and international ● VDE compliant
standards. ● Devices with B, C,
1
UL 1077, CSA C22.2 and D curves are
Captive Posidrive
●
No. 235 VDE compliant 1

terminal screws with
Breakers install on ● CCC
finger and back-of- ● Apply to supplementary
standard DIN rail hand protection (IP20) protectors intended for ● Devices with B, C,
1
use as overcurrent, or and D curves are
Available in one-, two-, overvoltage or CCC compliant 1
Trip-free design;
three-, four-pole, 1+N breaker cannot be
undervoltage protection ● ABS compliant
and 3+N models defeated by holding within an appliance or 1
the handle in the other electrical
Color-coded indicator
ON position equipment where
1
provides breaker
is already provided, or is
status for easy
troubleshooting
Breaker information not required 1
printed on the front of
the device for quick
identification
1
1
1
1
FAZ C 6 / 1 SP
1
Breaker Family Single Package
FAZ = Supplementary Trip SP = Single packaging of single- 1
protector Characteristics 1 Ampere Rating Number of Poles pole curve B, C and D for
B = 3–5X In 0.5 = 0.5A 13 = 13A 1 = Single-pole 4 = Four-pole select amperes only
Blank = Standard packaging
1
C = 5–10X In 1 = 1A 15 = 15A 2 = Two-pole 1N = Single-pole +
2 = 2A 16 = 16A 3 = Three-pole neutral
D = 10–20X In
K = 8–12X In 3 = 3A 20 = 20A 3N = Three-pole + 1
4 = 4A 25 = 25A neutral
S = 13–17X In
Z = 2–3X In
5 =
6 =
5A
6A
30 = 30A
32 = 32A
1
7 = 7A 40 = 40A
8 =
10 =
8A
10A
50 = 50A
63 = 63A
1
Note
1
1 I = Rated current for instantaneous trip characteristics.
n
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
1
FAZ B curve (3–5X In current rating)
1.13
1.45
1 ● Designed for resistive or slightly inductive loads 7200
3600 Specified non-tripping 2.55 I :
N
● Response time of instantaneous trip: 3–5X In current rating current t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
1 ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors 1200 INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)
Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s
600 N
● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s
1 ● UL file number 177451
300
120
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
1
1 Suitable for applications where protection against low-level
60
30
short-circuit faults in control wiring is desired. Instantaneous trip
is 3–5X continuous rating of device (In). Applications include PLC
1 wiring, business equipment, lighting, appliances and some
10
5
t [sec]
motors. Low magnetic trip point.
1 2
1
1
0.5
1 0.2
3
0.1
B
1 0.05
2
0.02
1 0.005
0.01
1 0.002
0.001
0.0005
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
I / IN
1
Single-Pole B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)— Four-Pole B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)—
1 Designed for Resistive or Slightly Designed for Resistive or Slightly
Inductive Loads 1 Inductive Loads, continued 1
1 Single-Pole 2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Single-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog Catalog Catalog Four-Pole + Neutral + Neutral
1 Amperes Number Number Number Catalog

Amperes Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1 FAZ-B1/1-SP FAZ-B1/2 FAZ-B1/3
1 2 FAZ-B2/1-SP FAZ-B2/2 FAZ-B2/3 1 FAZ-B1/4 FAZ-B1/1N FAZ-B1/3N
3 FAZ-B3/1-SP FAZ-B3/2 FAZ-B3/3 2 FAZ-B2/4 FAZ-B2/1N FAZ-B2/3N

1 Two-Pole
4 FAZ-B4/1-SP FAZ-B4/2 FAZ-B4/3 Single-Pole + Neutral 3 FAZ-B3/4 FAZ-B3/1N FAZ-B3/3N

6 FAZ-B6/4 FAZ-B6/1N FAZ-B6/3N
1 7 FAZ-B7/1-SP FAZ-B7/2 FAZ-B7/3

1 Three-Pole 13 FAZ-B13/1-SP FAZ-B13/2 FAZ-B13/3 12 FAZ-B12/4 FAZ-B12/1N FAZ-B12/3N
Three-Pole + Neutral
1 15 FAZ-B15/4 FAZ-B15/1N FAZ-B15/3N

1 50 FAZ-B50/1-SP FAZ-B50/2 FAZ-B50/3
1 63 FAZ-B63/4 FAZ-B63/1N FAZ-B63/3N
Notes
1 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240,
and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to
provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required.
1 2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering.

1.3
FAZ C curve (5–10X In current rating)
1.13
1.45
● Designed for inductive loads 7200
Type C: 5 x I : t > 0.1 s
1
Specified non-tripping N
3600
● Response time of instantaneous trip: 5–10X In current rating current Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s
● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors 1200

N
1
● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2)
● UL file number 177451
300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h
1
120
Suitable for applications where medium levels of inrush current 60

30
1
are expected. Instantaneous trip is 5–10X rating of device (In).
Applications include small transformers, lighting, pilot devices,
control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point.
10
5
1
t [sec]
2
1
1
0.5
0.2
1
0.1 2
0.05
1
C 1
0.02
0.01 1
0.005
0.002
0.001
1
0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1
I / IN
1
1
Single-Pole C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)— Four-Pole C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)—
Designed Inductive Loads 1 Designed Inductive Loads, continued 1 1
Single-Pole 2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Single-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Amperes Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number Catalog
Four-Pole + Neutral
Catalog
+ Neutral
Catalog
1
Amperes Number Number Number
0.5 FAZ-C0.5/1-SP FAZ-C0.5/2 FAZ-C0.5/3
0.5 FAZ-C0.5/4 FAZ-C0.5/1N FAZ-C0.5/3N
1
1 FAZ-C1/1-SP FAZ-C1/2 FAZ-C1/3
1.6 FAZ-C1.6/1-SP FAZ-C1.6/2 FAZ-C1.6/3
1 FAZ-C1/4 FAZ-C1/1N FAZ-C1/3N 1
1.6 FAZ-C1.6/4 FAZ-C1.6/1N FAZ-C1.6/3N
Two-Pole
Single-Pole + Neutral 2 FAZ-C2/4 FAZ-C2/1N FAZ-C2/3N 1
3 FAZ-C3/4 FAZ-C3/1N FAZ-C3/3N
1
1
7 FAZ-C7/4 FAZ-C7/1N FAZ-C7/3N 1
Three-Pole 13 FAZ-C13/1-SP FAZ-C13/2 FAZ-C13/3 Three-Pole + Neutral 10 FAZ-C10/4 FAZ-C10/1N FAZ-C10/3N 1
1
1
25 FAZ-C25/4 FAZ-C25/1N FAZ-C25/3N 1
40 FAZ-C40/4 FAZ-C40/1N FAZ-C40/3N 1
1
Notes
1
1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240,
and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to 1
2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering.
1

FAZ D curve (10–20X In current rating)
1.13
1.45
1 ● Designed for highly inductive loads 7200
2.55 I :
Specified non-tripping N
3600
● Response time of instantaneous trip: 10–20X In current rating current t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
1 ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors 1200
Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s
N
Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s
300
IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h N
120
1 Suitable for applications where high levels of inrush current are 60

30
1
expected. Instantaneous trip is 10–20X rating of device (In). The

1 high magnetic trip point prevents nuisance tripping in high 10
inductive applications such as motors, transformers and 5
t [sec]
power supplies.
1 2
1
1
0.5
1 0.2
3
0.1
1 0.05
2
D
0.02
1 0.01
0.005
1 0.002
0.001
1 0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
I / IN
1
1
Single-Pole D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)— Four-Pole D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)—
1 Designed for Inductive Loads 1 Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 1
1 Catalog Catalog Catalog
Catalog
Four-Pole + Neutral
Catalog
+ Neutral
Catalog
1 0.5 FAZ-D0.5/1-SP FAZ-D0.5/2 FAZ-D0.5/3
0.5 FAZ-D0.5/4 FAZ-D0.5/1N FAZ-D0.5/3N
1 FAZ-D1/1-SP FAZ-D1/2 FAZ-D1/3
1 2 FAZ-D2/1-SP FAZ-D2/2 FAZ-D2/3
1 FAZ-D1/4 FAZ-D1/1N FAZ-D1/3N
1 Two-Pole
Single-Pole + Neutral 3 FAZ-D3/4 FAZ-D3/1N FAZ-D3/3N
1 10 FAZ-D10/1-SP FAZ-D10/2 FAZ-D10/3
1 Three-Pole Three-Pole + Neutral 13 FAZ-D13/4 FAZ-D13/1N FAZ-D13/3N
1 16 FAZ-D16/1-SP FAZ-D16/2 FAZ-D16/3
1 25 FAZ-D25/1-SP FAZ-D25/2 FAZ-D25/3
1 32 FAZ-D32/1-SP FAZ-D32/2 FAZ-D32/3
1 40 FAZ-D40/1-SP FAZ-D40/2 FAZ-D40/3
50 3 FAZ-D50/1-SP FAZ-D50/2 FAZ-D50/3
50 c FAZ-D50/4 FAZ-D50/1N FAZ-D50/3N
1 63 3 FAZ-D63/1-SP FAZ-D63/2 FAZ-D63/3
63 c FAZ-D63/4 FAZ-D63/1N FAZ-D63/3N
1 Notes
1 and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to
2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering.
1 3 IEC 60947-2 only.

1.3
FAZ K curve (8–12X In current rating)
1.13
1.45
● Designed for motors, transformers and upstream electronics 1
7200 Specified
● Response time of instantaneous trip: 8–12X In current rating
● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors
3600 non-tripping current
Int = 1.05 u In
1
1200 for t > 1 h
● UL file number 177451
600
300
Specified
tripping current
1
It = 1.30 u In
Suitable for applications where medium levels of inrush current
120
60
for t < 1 h 1
are expected. Instantaneous trip is 8–12X rating of device (In). 30
control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point. 10
1
5
1
t (sec)
2
1
0.5 K 1
0.2
0.1 1
0.05
0.02
0.01
1
0.005
0.002
1
0.001
0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1
U-rated Current 1
1
K Curve (8–12X In Current Rating)— Four-Pole K Curve (8–12X In Current Rating)—
Single-Pole
Designed for Inductive Loads 12 Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 12 1
Catalog Catalog Catalog
Four-Pole 3
Catalog
+ Neutral
Catalog
+ Neutral
Catalog
1
0.5 FAZ-K0.5/1 FAZ-K0.5/2 FAZ-K0.5/3
0.5 FAZ-K0.5/4 FAZ-K0.5/1N FAZ-K0.5/3N
1
1 FAZ-K1/1 FAZ-K1/2 FAZ-K1/3
1.6 FAZ-K1.6/1 FAZ-K1.6/2 FAZ-K1.6/3
1 FAZ-K1/4 FAZ-K1/1N FAZ-K1/3N 1
1.6 FAZ-K1.6/4 FAZ-K1.6/1N FAZ-K1.6/3N
Two-Pole
2 FAZ-K2/1 FAZ-K2/2 FAZ-K2/3 Single-Pole + Neutral 2 FAZ-K2/4 FAZ-K2/1N FAZ-K2/3N 1
3 FAZ-K3/4 FAZ-K3/1N FAZ-K3/3N
1
1
10 FAZ-K10/1 FAZ-K10/2 FAZ-K10/3
13 FAZ-K13/1 FAZ-K13/2 FAZ-K13/3
10 FAZ-K10/4 FAZ-K10/1N FAZ-K10/3N 1
16 FAZ-K16/1 FAZ-K16/2 FAZ-K16/3
Three-Pole + Neutral 16 FAZ-K16/4 FAZ-K16/1N FAZ-K16/3N 1
Three-Pole 20 FAZ-K20/1 FAZ-K20/2 FAZ-K20/3
25 FAZ-K25/1 FAZ-K25/2 FAZ-K25/3
1
32 FAZ-K32/1 FAZ-K32/2 FAZ-K32/3
40 FAZ-K40/1 FAZ-K40/2 FAZ-K40/3
1
50 FAZ-K50/1 FAZ-K50/2 FAZ-K50/3
50 FAZ-K50/4 FAZ-K50/1N FAZ-K50/3N 1
63 FAZ-K63/1 FAZ-K63/2 FAZ-K63/3
1
Notes
1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, 1
2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in additional delivery time. 1
3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.
1
1

FAZ S curve (13–17X In current rating)
1.05
1.30
1 ● Designed for control circuits with high inrush
7200 Specified
1 ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors
Int = 1.05 u In
1200 for t > 1 h
600
300
Specified
tripping current
It = 1.30 u In
1 Suitable for applications where high levels of inrush current are
120
60
for t < 1 h
expected. Instantaneous trip is 13–17X rating of device (In). The 30
1 high magnetic trip point prevents nuisance tripping in high
inductive applications such as motors, transformers and 10
power supplies. 5
1
t (sec)
2
1
1 0.5 S
0.2
1 0.1
0.05
1 0.02
0.01
0.005
1 0.002
0.001
1 0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1 U-rated Current
Single-Pole S Curve (13–17X In Current Rating)—

1 Designed for Inductive Loads 12
1 Catalog Catalog
Amperes Number Number
1 1 FAZ-S1/1 FAZ-S1/2
2 FAZ-S2/1 FAZ-S2/2
1 3 FAZ-S3/1 FAZ-S3/2
1 Two-Pole
4 FAZ-S4/1 FAZ-S4/2
6 FAZ-S6/1 FAZ-S6/2
1 10 FAZ-S10/1 FAZ-S10/2
16 FAZ-S16/1 FAZ-S16/2
1 20 FAZ-S20/1 FAZ-S20/2
25 FAZ-S25/1 FAZ-S25/2
1 32 FAZ-S32/1 FAZ-S32/2
1 40 FAZ-S40/1 FAZ-S40/2
Notes
1 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA
Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of

1 NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian
Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be
used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device.
1 They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an
appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit
overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required.
1 2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in
additional delivery time.

1 3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.
1
1
1
1

1.3
FAZ Z curve (2–3X In current rating)
1.05
1.30
● Designed for protection of electronic devices 1
7200 Specified
● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors
Int = 1.05 u In
1
1200 for t > 1 h
● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) 600
300
Specified
tripping current
1
Suitable for applications where low levels of inrush current
It = 1.30 u In
are expected. Instantaneous trip is 2–3X rating of device (In). 120
60
for t < 1 h 1
control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point. 30
10
1
5
1
t (sec)
2
1
0.5
Z
1
0.2
0.1 1
0.05
0.02
0.01
1
0.005
0.002
1
0.001
0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50
1
U-rated Current 1
Single-Pole Z Curve (2–3X In Current Rating)— 1
Designed for Inductive Loads 12 Three-Pole Z Curve (2–3X In Current Rating)—
Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 12 1
Catalog Catalog Three-Pole Four-Pole
Amperes Number Number
Amperes
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1
0.5 FAZ-Z0.5/1 FAZ-Z0.5/2
1 FAZ-Z1/1 FAZ-Z1/2
0.5 FAZ-Z0.5/3 FAZ-Z0.5/4 1
1 FAZ-Z1/3 FAZ-Z1/4
1.6 FAZ-Z1.6/1 FAZ-Z1.6/2
2 FAZ-Z2/1 FAZ-Z2/2
1.6 FAZ-Z1.6/3 FAZ-Z1.6/4 1
Two-Pole
2 FAZ-Z2/3 FAZ-Z2/4
3 FAZ-Z3/1 FAZ-Z3/2 Four-Pole
3 FAZ-Z3/3 FAZ-Z3/4
1
4 FAZ-Z4/1 FAZ-Z4/2
6 FAZ-Z6/1 FAZ-Z6/2
4 FAZ-Z4/3 FAZ-Z4/4
1
6 FAZ-Z6/3 FAZ-Z6/4
8 FAZ-Z8/1 FAZ-Z8/2
10 FAZ-Z10/1 FAZ-Z10/2
8 FAZ-Z8/3 FAZ-Z8/4 1
10 FAZ-Z10/3 FAZ-Z10/4
13 FAZ-Z13/1 FAZ-Z13/2
13 FAZ-Z13/3 FAZ-Z13/4 1
16 FAZ-Z16/1 FAZ-Z16/2
16 FAZ-Z16/3 FAZ-Z16/4
20 FAZ-Z20/1 FAZ-Z20/2
20 FAZ-Z20/3 FAZ-Z20/4
1
25 FAZ-Z25/1 FAZ-Z25/2
32 FAZ-Z32/1 FAZ-Z32/2
25 FAZ-Z25/3 FAZ-Z25/4 1
32 FAZ-Z32/3 FAZ-Z32/4
40 FAZ-Z40/1 FAZ-Z40/2
50 FAZ-Z50/1 FAZ-Z50/2
40 FAZ-Z40/3 FAZ-Z40/4 1
50 FAZ-Z50/3 FAZ-Z50/4
63 FAZ-Z63/1 FAZ-Z63/2
63 FAZ-Z63/3 FAZ-Z63/4
1
1
Notes
1
2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in additional delivery time. 1
3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.
1
1

Accessories
1
FAZ Auxiliary Contacts and Voltage Trips
1 Rated Operational Catalog
Circuit Diagram Description Voltage Number
1 Standard Auxiliary Contacts
■ 1NO/1NC 230 Vac FAZ-XHIN11
1 ■ Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip
■ Max. one per FAZ (1077) device
1 ■ Switches when FAZ is tripped
electrically or manually
1
■ 1 changeover contact 230 Vac FAZ-XHINW1
1 12 14 ■
■
Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip
Max. one per FAZ (1077) device
■ Switches when FAZ is tripped
1 electrically or manually
1 11
Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contact

1 ■ Small selector screw changes mode 230 Vac FAZ-XAM002
■ Two Form C (changeover) contacts
1 ■ Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip
■ Auxiliary contacts switch when FAZ is
1 tripped electrically or manually
■ Trip indicating contact switches only
when FAZ is tripped electrically
1 Two-pole auxiliary mode
1
1
1 Trip indicating mode
1 Undervoltage Trip
■ Prevents FAZ from operating unless 115 Vac FAZ-XUA(115VAC)
D1 voltage is present
1 U ■ Installs on left side of FAZ
230 Vac FAZ-XUA(230VAC)
■ Includes test button 400 Vac FAZ-XUA(400VAC)
D2
1
1
1
Shunt Trip
1 ■ Allows remote trip of FAZ 12–110 Vac FAZ-XAA-C-12-110VAC
C1 ■ Installs on left side of FAZ 12–60 Vdc
1 110–415 Vac FAZ-XAA-C-110-
C2 110–230 Vdc 415VAC
1
1
1
Allowable Combinations of Accessories
1
1 AUX AUX
TRIP
FAZ AUX AUX
TRIP
FAZ FAZ
1 or
Circuit
or
Shunt Circuit UnderV Circuit
Breaker Trip Breaker Trip Breaker

1.3
Busbar System
Number of Poles Number of Catalog
1
Description Rated Operational Current per Device Terminals Number 1
Without Auxiliary Contacts
1
For connecting FAZ supplementary protectors without auxiliary
contacts. May be fed from line or load side.
80A 1 57 BB-UL-18/1P-1M/57
1
1
2 56 BB-UL-18/2P-2M/56
1
3 57 BB-UL-18/3P-3M/57 1
FAZ FAZ FAZ
1
100A 1 57 BB-UL-25/1P-1M/57
1
2 56 BB-UL-25/2P-2M/56 1
1
3 57 BB-UL-25/3P-3M/57
1
Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contacts
1
For connecting FAZ supplementary protectors with auxiliary
contacts. May be fed from line or load side.
80A 1 37 BB-UL-18/1P-1,5M/37
1
1
2 46 BB-UL-18/2P+AS-2,5M/46
1
3 48 BB-UL-18/3P+AS-3,5M/48 1
FAZ FAZ
1
100A 1 37 BB-UL-25/1P-1,5M/37
1
2 46 BB-UL-25/2P+AS-2,5M/46 1
1
3 48 BB-UL-25/3P+AS-3,5M/48
1
1
Note
1 Bus may be center fed for high current capacity.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Incoming Terminal Pin Type Incoming Supply Terminals Incoming Terminal Bus Incoming Supply Terminals
1 Catalog Catalog
Description Number Description Number
1 ■ Accommodates conductors BB-UL-TEP/35 ■ 50 mm2 BB-UL-TE/50
from 6–35 mm2/#10–2 AWG ■ #14–1 AWG
1 ■ 4–5.5 Nm/35–50 lb-in ■ 75 Deg wire
■ Two- and three-pole ■ 115 A/Y, 480V UL
1 ■ 160 A/Y 690V IEC
1
Fork Connector Busbar End Cap
1 Incoming Terminal Pin Type Incoming Supply Terminals— Catalog
Single-Phase Only Description Poles Number
1 Description
Catalog
Number
■ Install after cutting busbar 2 and 3 BB-EV-EC/3
■ Protects end of busbar
1 BB-UL-EC/1
1 ■ Accommodates conductors
from 6–35 mm2/#10–2 AWG
BB-UL-TEPA/35
■ 4–5.5 Nm/35–50 lb-in

1
1 Protective Accessories
1 Description
Catalog
Number
1 Busbar Terminal Cover For covering

unused terminals
BB-IP/5
1
1
1
1 Lockoff Device UL lockoff device FAZPLOFF
1
1
1
1
Padlock Hasp ■ Prevents reactivation of the device Z-IS/SPE-1TE
1 during maintenance
■ Holds one padlock
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.3
1
Trip Curves Chart Tripping Characteristics
Eaton FAZ supplementary Even though not required by 1
1.05
1.30
protectors are available with NEC or CEC for supplementary
1
1.13
1.45
six different tripping protectors, Eaton’s FAZ
characteristics, including devices are current limiting, 7200 Time-current characteristic acc. to UL 1077
Type B, C, D, K, S and Z. which means that they 3600 Conventional 2.55 I : 1
Definitions for each trip curve interrupt fault currents non-tripping current
N
t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A)
are contained on the ordering within one half cycle. Current 1200 Int = 1.13 IN: t > 1 h t = 1–120 s (IN < 32A)
pages and can be used to limiting devices offer superior 600 Conventional tripping Type B: 3 I : t > 0.1 s
N
1
determine the optimal protection by reducing current Type B: 5 I : t < 0.1 s
300
characteristic for your peak let-through current
120
It = 1.45 IN: t < 1 h N
Type C: 5 I : t > 0.1 s
N
1
application. For example, and energy. Type C: 10 I : t < 0.1 s
60 N
low-level short-circuit faults in
30
Type D: 10 I : t > 0.1 s
N 1
control wiring, such as PLCs,
Type D: 20 I : t < 0.1 s
N
are best protected by devices
with Type B trip characteristics
10 1
5
(3–5X continuous rating of the
1
t (sec)
device (In). 2
1 D
0.5 1
0.2
0.1 Z B C K S 1
0.05
0.02 1
0.01
0.005 1
0.002
0.001 1
0.0005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 1
I/In
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

FAZ Miniature Circuit Breakers Technical Data

1 Description B Curve C Curve D Curve
1 Electrical
Approvals UR (UL 1077), CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 235), CE
1 Standards IEC/EN 60947-2
Short-circuit trip response 3–5 In 5–10 In 10–20 In
1 Supplementary Protectors—UL/CSA
Current range 1–63A 0.5–63A 0.5–40A
1 Maximum voltage ratings—UL/CSA
Single-pole, single-pole + neutral 277 Vac 277 Vac 277 Vac
1 48 Vdc 48 Vdc 48 Vdc
Two-, three-pole, four-pole and
1 three-pole + neutral
Two poles in series
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc
Thermal tripping characteristics
1 Single-pole 1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.35 x In @ 40°C
Multi-pole 1.45 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C
1 Short-circuit ratings (at max. voltage)
Single-pole 10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 5 kA
1 Two-, three-pole
Single-pole
10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device)
10 kA @ 48 Vdc
10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device)
10 kA @ 48 Vdc
5 kA
10 kA @ 48 Vdc
Two poles in series 10 kA @ 96 Vdc 10 kA @ 96 Vdc 10 kA @ 96 Vdc
1 Miniature Circuit Breaker—IEC
Current range 1–63A 0.5–63A 0.5–63A
1 Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 68898-1
Single-pole 230 Vac 230 Vac 230 Vac
1 Two-, three-pole 230/400 Vac 230/400 Vac 230/400 Vac
Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 60947-2
1 Single-pole 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac
48 Vdc 48 Vdc 48 Vdc
Two-, three-pole 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac
1 Two poles in series 96 Vdc 96 Vdc 96 Vdc
1 Single-pole > 1 hour @ 1.05 x In > 1 hour @ 1.05 x In > 1 hour @ 1.05 x In
Multi-pole < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In
1 Interrupt ratings (at max. voltage)
IEC 60947-2 15 kA 15 kA 15 kA (10 kA for 50 and 63A)
IEC 60898 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA (50 and 63A not available)
1 Operational switching capacity 7.5 kA 7.5 kA 7.5 kA
Max. backup fuse [gL/gG] 125A 125A 125A
1 Rated impulse withstand—Uimp
Rated insulation voltage—Ui
4000 Vac
440 Vac
4000 Vac
440 Vac
4000 Vac
440 Vac
1 Environmental/General
Selectivity class 3 3 3
Lifespan (operations) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF)
1 Shock (IEC 68-2-22) 10g–120 ms 10g–120 ms 10g–120 ms
Operating temperature range –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C)
1 Shipment and short-term storage
Housing material
–40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
Nylon
–40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
Nylon
–40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
Nylon
1 Mechanical
Standard front dimension
1 Terminal protection Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536
Mounting width per pole 17.5 mm 17.5 mm 17.5 mm
1 Mounting IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
1 Terminals top and bottom
Supply connection
Twin-purpose terminals
Line or load side
Line or load side
Line or load side
Terminal capacity [mm2] 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18)
1 Torque 2.4 Nm 2.4 Nm 2.4 Nm
Imperial torque 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in
1 Thickness of busbar material
(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm
(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm
(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm
Mounting position As required As required As required
1
1

1.3
FAZ Miniature Circuit Breakers Technical Data, continued
Description K Curve S Curve Z Curve
1
Electrical
1
Approvals UR (UL 1077), CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 235), CE
Standards IEC/EN 60947-2, E177451, 204453 1
Short-circuit trip response 8–12 In 13–17 In 2–3 In
Supplementary Protectors—UL/CSA 1
Current range 0.5–63A 0.5–40A 1–63A
Maximum voltage ratings—UL/CSA
1
48 Vdc 48 Vdc 48 Vdc 1
Two-, three-, four-pole and
three-pole + neutral
Two poles in series
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc
480Y/277 Vac
96 Vdc 1
Single-pole 1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.35 x In @ 40°C 1
Multi-pole 1.45 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C
Short-circuit ratings (at max. voltage) 1
Single-pole 5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 277 Vac
Single-pole + neutral
Two-, three-, four-pole
5 kA @ 277 Vac
5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac
5 kA @ 277 Vac
5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac
5 kA @ 277 Vac
5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac 1
Two poles in series — — —
Miniature Circuit Breaker—IEC 1
Current range 0.5–63A 0.5–40A 1–63A
Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 60947-2
1
Two-, three-, four-pole, 1
three-pole + neutral 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac
Single-pole > 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In > 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In > 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In
1
Multi-pole < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In
Interrupt ratings (at max. voltage)
1
IEC 60947-2 15 kA 10 kA 10 kA
Operational switching capacity 7.5 kA 7.5 kA 7.5 kA 1
Max. backup fuse [gL/gG] 125A 125A 125A
Rated impulse withstand—Uimp 4000 Vac 4000 Vac 4000 Vac
Rated insulation voltage—Ui 440 Vac 440 Vac 440 Vac 1
Environmental/General
Selectivity class 3 3 3
1
Lifespan (operations) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF)
Shock (IEC 68-2-22) 10g–120 ms 10g–120 ms 10g–120 ms 1
Operating temperature range –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C)
Shipment and short-term storage –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
Housing material Nylon Nylon Nylon 1
Mechanical
Standard front dimension
1
Terminal protection Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 1
Mounting width per pole 17.7 mm 17.7 mm 17.7 mm
Mounting IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail 1
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Terminals top and bottom Twin-purpose terminals Twin-purpose terminals Twin-purpose terminals
Supply connection Line or load side Line or load side Line or load side 1
Terminal capacity [mm2] 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18)
Torque 2.4 Nm 2.4 Nm 2.4 Nm 1
Imperial torque 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in
Thickness of busbar material

(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm
(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm
(AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4)
0.8–2 mm 1
Mounting position As required As required As required
1
1
1
1

Let-Through Energy I2t Let-Through Energy ID

1
Characteristic B and C Characteristic B and C
1 ∫i2dt 105 lD 104
63 A 9
[A2s] 8 [A] 8
1 6
50 A
40 A 7
63 A
40 A
50 A
32 A 32 A
25 A 6 25 A
1 4 20 A
16 A
13 A 5
16 A20 A
13 A
10 A 10 A
1 4
6A
4A
2
3A
6A
1 1.5 4A
3
1 104
8
3A
2
2A
1 6
2A 1.5
4
1 103
1 2 1A
1.5 0.5 A
1 10 3
1 A
0.5 A 5
1 8
6
1 4
3
1 2
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 15 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 15
1 Icc rms [kA] Icc rms [kA]
1
Characteristic D Characteristic D
1 ∫i dt 10
2 5
lD 104
40 A
[A2s] 8 32 A [A] 8
9
1 6
25 A
20 A 7
40 A
25 A
32 A
16 A 20 A
13 A
1 4
10 A
6 16 A
13 A
10 A
5
6A
1 6A 4
2
1 1.5 3
4
10
1 8 2
6
1 1.5
4
1 103
1 2
1.5
1 103
5
8
1 6
1 4
1 2
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 15 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 15
1 Icc rms [kA] Icc rms [kA]

1.3
Let-Through Energy I2t
1
Characteristic K Characteristic S
lD 104 lD 104 1
[A] [A]
8
8 1
6 63 A
40 A
50 A
32 A 25 A 6 40 A
32 A
1
20 A 25 A
13 A 16 A
4 20 A
16 A 1
10 A 10 A
6A
3 4A
3A
4
1
6A
2 2A 3
4A
3A
2A
1
1.6 A
1.5 1
1A
2
103 1A
1
1.5
1
1
5 103
0.5 A 1
1
5
1
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Icc rms [kA] 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1

Icc rms [kA]
1
Characteristic Z
lD 104 1
[A]
8
1
6 63 A
40 A
50 A
32 A 25 A
1
20 A
16 A
4
10 A
1
8A
3 6A
1
2
4A
1
3A
1.5 1
2A
103
1
1
1
5
1.6 A
1A
1
0.5 A
1
1
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Icc rms [kA] 1

Influence of the Ambient Temperature on the Thermal Tripping Behavior

1 Corrected values of the rated current dependent on the ambient temperature
1 Ambient Temperature T
In (A) –40°C –30°C –20°C –10°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C 75°C
1 0.16 0.20 0.20 0.19 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.17 0.16 0.16 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.13
0.25 0.32 0.31 0.30 0.29 0.28 0.27 0.26 0.25 0.25 0.24 0.24 0.23 0.23 0.22 0.22 0.21 0.21
1 0.50 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41
0.75 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.87 0.84 0.81 0.78 0.75 0.74 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.62
1 1.00 1.30 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.10 1.10 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.83
1.50 1.90 1.90 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.60 1.60 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.20
1 1.60 2.00 2.00 1.90 1.90 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.60 1.60 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.30
2.00 2.60 2.50 2.40 2.30 2.20 2.20 2.10 2.00 2.00 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.80 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.70
1 2.50 3.20 3.10 3.00 2.90 2.80 2.70 2.60 2.50 2.50 2.40 2.40 2.30 2.30 2.20 2.20 2.10 2.10
3.00 3.80 3.70 3.60 3.50 3.40 3.30 3.10 3.00 3.00 2.90 2.80 2.80 2.70 2.70 2.60 2.50 2.50
1 3.50 4.50 4.40 4.20 4.10 3.90 3.80 3.70 3.50 3.40 3.40 3.30 3.20 3.20 3.10 3.00 3.00 2.90
4.00 5.10 5.00 4.80 4.70 4.50 4.30 4.20 4.00 3.90 3.90 3.80 3.70 3.60 3.50 3.50 3.40 3.30
1 5.00 6.40 6.20 6.00 5.80 5.60 5.40 5.20 5.00 4.90 4.80 4.70 4.60 4.50 4.40 4.30 4.20 4.10
1 6.00
7.00
7.70
9.00
7.50
8.70
7.20
8.40
7.00
8.20
6.70
7.80
6.50
7.60
6.30
7.40
6.00
7.00
5.90
6.90
5.80
6.80
5.70
6.70
5.60
6.50
5.40
6.30
5.30
6.20
5.20
6.10
5.10
6.00
5.00
5.80
1 8.00 10.20 9.90 9.60 9.30 9.00 8.70 8.40 8.00 7.90 7.70 7.60 7.40 7.20 7.10 6.90 6.80 6.60
10.00 13.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 11.00 11.00 10.00 10.00 9.90 9.70 9.50 9.30 9.00 8.90 8.70 8.50 8.30
1 12.00 15.00 15.00 14.00 14.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
13.00 17.00 16.00 16.00 15.00 15.00 14.00 14.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 11.00 11.00 11.00
1 15.00 19.00 19.00 18.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 16.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 12.00
16.00 20.00 20.00 19.00 19.00 18.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 16.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 13.00
1 20.00 26.00 25.00 24.00 23.00 22.00 22.00 21.00 20.00 20.00 19.00 19.00 19.00 18.00 18.00 17.00 17.00 17.00
25.00 32.00 31.00 30.00 29.00 28.00 27.00 26.00 25.00 25.00 24.00 24.00 23.00 23.00 22.00 22.00 21.00 21.00
1 32.00 41.00 40.00 38.00 37.00 36.00 35.00 33.00 32.00 32.00 31.00 30.00 30.00 29.00 28.00 28.00 27.00 26.00
35.00 45.00 43.00 41.00 41.00 38.00 38.00 36.00 35.00 35.00 34.00 33.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 30.00 29.00 29.00
1 40.00 51.00 50.00 48.00 47.00 45.00 43.00 42.00 40.00 39.00 39.00 38.00 37.00 36.00 35.00 35.00 34.00 33.00
50.00 64.00 62.00 60.00 58.00 56.00 54.00 52.00 50.00 49.00 48.00 47.00 46.00 45.00 44.00 43.00 42.00 41.00
1 63.00 81.00 78.00 76.00 73.00 71.00 68.00 66.00 63.00 62.00 61.00 60.00 58.00 57.00 56.00 55.00 53.00 52.00
1 Influence of the Mains Frequency

Influence of the mains frequency on the tripping behavior IMA
1 of the instantaneous release
1 Mains Frequency f [Hz]

16 2/3 50 60 100 200 300 400
1 IMA(f)IMA (50 Hz) [%] 91 100 101 106 115 134 141
1 Load Carrying Capacity of Adjoining Miniature Circuit Breakers

1 1.00
1
Rated Diversity Factor
1 0.90
1
0.80
1
1 0.70
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
Number of Circuit Breakers
1

1.3
Accessories Technical Data
FAZ-XHIN
1
Description FAZ-XAM002 FAZ-XAA-C FAZ-XUA
Electrical
1
Contact function 1A + 1B
2 C/O
—
—
—
— 1
Rated operational voltage Un 250 Vac — 115 Vac
230 Vac 1
400 Vac
Voltage range — 12–110 Vac — 1
12–60 Vdc
Voltage range — 110–415 Vac — 1
110–230 Vdc
Closing threshold [x Un] — — 0.8 1
Tripping threshold [x Un] — — 0.5
Rated frequency ƒ 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 1
General use (UL/CSA)
AC—230/240 Vac 2/2A — — 1
DC—110/120 Vdc 0.5/0.5A — —
Pilot duty A600/Q600 — — 1
Conventional free air thermal current Ith 4A — —
Rated operational current 1
AC-13 Ie 3A (250 Vac) — —
AC-15 Ie
DC-13 Ie
2A (250 Vac)
0.5A (110 Vdc)
—
—
—
—
1
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 Vac — —
1
Minimum operating voltage per contract Umin 5 Vdc — —
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50μ) Uimp 2.5 kV — — 1
Rated conditional short-circuit current with 6A backup fuse ISC 1 kA — —
Max. admissible backup fuse 4A gL — — 1
Mechanical
Standard front dimension 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm
1
Device height 80 mm 80 mm 80 mm 1
Mounting width 8.8 mm 17.6 mm 17.8 mm
Mounting On MCB IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail 1
Degree of protection enclosed
IP40 IP40 IP40 1
Terminal protection Protection against Protection against Protection against
electric shock to IEC 536 electric shock to IEC 536 electric shock to IEC 536 1
Terminals Lift terminals Twin-purpose terminals Twin-purpose terminals
Terminal capacity 1
Solid 0.5–2.5 mm2 1–2.5 mm2 2 x (1–2.5) mm2
Flexible 0.5–2.5 mm2 1–2.5 mm2 2 x (1–2.5) mm2 1
Tightening torque of terminal screws 0.8–1.0 Nm (7–9 lb-in) 2.4 Nm (21 lb-in) 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Dimensions
1 Miniature Circuit Breakers

FAZ
1
0.74
1 (9.4)
1 3.15 1.77
(80.0) (45.0)
1
1
1 1.73
0.22 (44.0)
1.40 2.09 2.79 (5.5)
1 0.70
(35.4) (53.1) (70.8) 2.36
(60.0)
(17.8)
1
Auxiliary Contacts
1
FAZ-XHI11 and FAZ-XH1NW1 FAZ-XAM002
1
1
1 3.15 1.77 3.15 1.77
(80.0) (45.0) (80.0) (45.0)
1
1
1 0.35 0.22 1.73 0.35 0.22 1.73
(8.8) (5.5) (44.0) (8.8) (5.5) (44.0)
2.36 2.36
1 (60.0) (60.0)
1 Shunt Releases Undervoltage Releases
1 FAZ-XAA FAZ-XUA
1
1 3.15 1.77 3.15 1.77
(80.0) (45.0) (80.0)
1 (45.0)
1
0.70
1 (17.8)
0.22
1.20
0.39
0.70
(30.5) (17.8) 0.22 1.73
(5.5) (10.0)
1 1.03
(26.2)
1.73
(44.0)
(5.5) (44.0)
2.36
2.36 (60.0)
1 (60.0)
1
1
1

1.3
1
Busbar and Accessory Weights and Dimensions 1
Catalog
Unit Weight (kg) Length Width Height Number 1
0.29 39.72 (1009.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) BB-UL-18/1P-1M/57
0.64 39.02 (991.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-18/2P-2M/56
1
0.83 39.72 (1009.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-18/3P-3M/57
1
0.26 38.78 (985.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) BB-UL-18/1P-1.5M/37
0.63 39.72 (1009.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-18/2P+AS-2.5M/46 1
0.79 38.66 (982.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-18/3P+AS-3.5M/48
0.36 39.72 (1009.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) BB-UL-25/1P-1M/57 1
0.79 39.02 (991.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-25/2P-2M/56
1.04 39.72 (1009.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-25/3P-3M/57
1
0.31 38.78 (985.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) BB-UL-25/1P-1.5M/37 1
0.73 39.72 (1009.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-25/2P+AS-2.5M/46
0.97 38.66 (982.0) 0.87 (22.0) 1.46 (37.0) BB-UL-25/3P+AS-3.5M/48 1
0.03 2.36 (60.0) 0.67 (17.0) 1.14 (29.0) BB-UL-TEP/35
0.03 1.42 (36.0) 0.67 (17.0) 1.14 (29.0) BB-UL-TEPA/35
1
0.03 1.57 (40.0) 0.71 (18.0) 1.18 (30.0) BB-UL-TE/50
1
0.003 3.35 (85.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.94 (24.0) BB-IP/5
0.001 0.55 (14.0) 0.20 (5.0) 0.39 (10.0) BB-EV-EC/3 1
0.001 0.94 (24.0) 0.87 (22.0) 0.39 (10.0) BB-UL-EC/1
1
1
L W
1
1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Contents

1 Description Page
1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95
1 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-96
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-97
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-98
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac
1 Product Overview Features Standards and Certifications
Optimum product quality, ● Wide range of compact ● UL 1053
1 tested reliability and safety RCCB types serving as ● IEC/EN 61008
stand for best protection of fault-current and additional ● CSA
installations and plant. protection according to
1 Eaton’s UL 1053 Residual UL 1053 and IEC/EN 61008
● ÖVE
Current Circuit Breaker standards, suitable for ● CE Marked
1 (RCCB) is designed for use in worldwide use
residual current applications. ● Type A or Type G/A (with
1 Application Description delay) protection available
● Comprehensive range of
1 ● Motor control circuits
accessories
● HVAC internal/external ● Real contact position
1 equipment
indicator
● PLCs ● Fault current tripping
1 ● HMIs indicator
● Equipment protection ● Transparent designation
1 ● European housing plate
● Trip-free design—RCCB
1 can not be defeated by
holding the handle in the
1 ON position
● Captive screws cannot
1 be lost
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
Product Selection
1
UL 1053 RCCB 480Y/277V Type A
1
Two-Pole Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A
Two-Pole 1
GF Sensitivity Catalog
Amperes (mA) Number 1 Designation 1
25 30 167113 FRCmM-25/2/003-A-NA
300 167116 FRCmM-25/2/03-A-NA 1
40 30 167114 FRCmM-40/2/003-A-NA
300 167117 FRCmM-40/2/03-A-NA
1
63 30 167115 FRCmM-63/2/003-A-NA 1
300 167118 FRCmM-63/2/03-A-NA
1
Four-Pole Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A
Four-Pole 1
25 30 167125 FRCmM-25/4/003-A-NA
300 167104 FRCmM-25/4/03-A-NA
1
40 30 167102 FRCmM-40/4/003-A-NA
1
300 167105 FRCmM-40/4/03-A-NA
63 30 167103 FRCmM-63/4/003-A-NA 1
300 167106 FRCmM-63/4/03-A-NA
1
UL 1053 RCCB 480Y/277V Type G/A 1
Type G/A has a 10 ms delay.
1
Two-Pole Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601)
Two-Pole 1
25 30 167119 FRCmM-25/2/003-G/A-NA
300 167122 FRCmM-25/2/03-G/A-NA
1
40 30 167120 FRCmM-40/2/003-G/A-NA
1
300 167123 FRCmM-40/2/03-G/A-NA
63 30 167121 FRCmM-63/2/003-G/A-NA 1
300 167124 FRCmM-63/2/03-G/A-NA
1
Four-Pole
Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601)
Four-Pole 1
25 30 167107 FRCmM-25/4/003-G/A-NA
300 167110 FRCmM-25/4/03-G/A-NA
1
40 30 167108 FRCmM-40/4/003-G/A-NA
1
300 167111 FRCmM-40/4/03-G/A-NA
63 30 167109 FRCmM-63/4/003-G/A-NA 1
300 167112 FRCmM-63/4/03-G/A-NA
Note
1
1 Has no thermal element; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application.
1
1

Accessories
1
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac
1 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number
1 Contact Two-pole contact or auxiliary

contact / trip indicating contact
Z-NHK 1 Padlock Hasp Padlock hasp Z-IS/SPE-1TE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
● Residual current devices UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data, continued 1
● Has no thermal protection; must be paired with FAZ-NA
or FAZ per application
Description Specification
1
Electrical According to UL 1053
● Captive screw terminals
● Universal tripping signal switch, also suitable for Z-A; can be
Design according to UL 1053 1
mounted subsequently Current test marks as printed onto the device
● Auxiliary switch Z-HK can be mounted subsequently Tripping Type G 8 ms delay 1
● Red-green contact position indicator Rated voltage Un 480Y/277V, 60 Hz
● White-blue tripping indicator Pickup current 22, 200 mA 1
● Delayed types recommended for use with standard Sensitivity AC and pulsating DC
fluorescent tubes with or without electronical ballast Overvoltage tested 530V 1
(30mA-RCD: 30 units per phase conductor, Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
100mA-RCD: 90 units per phase conductor) Rated short-circuit capacity Inc 5 kA according to CSA 1
● The device functions irrespective of the position of installation Maximum backup fuse Overload protection Short-circuit protection
● Tripping is line voltage-independent. Consequently, the RCD is In = 25–40A 25A gG/gL 63A gG/gL
1
suitable for “fault current/residual current protection” and
In = 63A 40A gG/gL 63A gG/gL
“additional protection” within the meaning of the applicable
Rated breaking capacity Im or
1
installation rules
Rated fault breaking capacity I m
● Reverse-feed permitted
In = 25–40A 500A 1
● The four-pole device can also be used for two-pole
In = 63A 630A
connection. For this purpose, use terminals 5-6 and N-N 1
● The test key “T” must be pressed every month. The system Voltage range of test button Two-pole 184–305V~
operator must be informed of this obligation and responsibility Four-pole 184–528V~
in a way that can be proven (self-adhesive RCD-label enclosed) Endurance Electrical >4000 operating cycles
1
● Pressing the test key “T” serves the only purpose of function Mechanical >20,000 operating cycles
testing the residual current device (RCD). This test does not Mechanical
1
make earthing resistance measurement (RE) or proper
checking of the earth conductor condition redundant, which Frame size 45.0 mm
1
must be performed separately Device height 80.0 mm
● Type -A: Protects against special forms of residual pulsating Device width 35 mm (2TE), 70 mm (4TE) 1
DC that have not been smoothed Device width Quick fastening with two
● Type -G/A: Additionally protects against special forms of lock-in positions on DIN
rail IEC/EN 60715 1
residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed
Degree of protection, built-in IP40
Degree of protection in moisture-proof IP54
1
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data enclosure
Description Specification Upper and lower terminals Lift terminals 1
Electrical According to IEC/EN 61008 Terminal protection Finger and hand touch
Design according to IEC/EN 61008 safe BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6 1
ÖVE E 8601 Terminal capacity 1.5–35 mm2 single-wire
Current test marks as printed onto the device 2 x 16 mm2 multi-wire 1

Tripping Type G 10 ms delay Busbar material thickness 0.8–2 mm
Rated voltage Un 230/400V, 50 Hz Tripping temperature –25°C to +60°C 1

Rated tripping current I n 30, 300 mA Resistance to climatic conditions According to IEC 61008
Sensitivity AC and pulsating DC Humidity 5–95% 1

Rated insulation voltage Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
440V
4 kV
1
Rated short-circuit capacity Inc 10 kA 1
Maximum backup fuse Overload protection Short-circuit protection
In = 25–40A 25A gG/gL 63A gG/gL 1
In = 63A 40A gG/gL 63A gG/gL
Rated breaking capacity Im bzw.
Rated fault breaking capacity I m
1
In = 25–40A 500A
1
In = 63A 630A
Voltage range of test button Two-pole 184–250V~ 1
Four-pole 184–440V~
Endurance Electrical >4000 operating cycles 1
Mechanical >20,000 operating cycles
Overvoltage category III 1

Connection Diagram Impact of Ambient Temperature on the Maximum

1 Permanent Current Allowed (A)
1 N 1 3 5 N 16A 25A 40A 63A
1 Tripping Two- Four- Two- Four- Two- Four- Two- Four-
Temperature Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole
1 T T
40°C 16 16 25 25 40 40 63 63
45°C 14 14 21 22 37 37 59 59
1 50°C 11 11 18 19 33 34 55 55
2 N 2 4 6 N
1 Two-Pole Four-Pole 55°C 9 9 14 16 30 31 50 50
60°C 1 — — — 26 27 45 45
1 Notes
1 Do not use.
1 Please make sure that these values are not exceeded and that any upstream overload protection
switches off in time.
1
Correct Connection
1
1
1
1
1
1 3+N
(230/400V) IEC
Three-phase load without N
(184–254 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC
(400 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC
1+N
(230V) IEC
(277/480V) UL (184–277 Vac Phase-Phase) UL (480 Vac Phase-Phase) UL (277V) UL
1
1 Dimensions
1
1 0.22 0.18
(5.5) (4.5)
1.20
1 (30.5)
1
1
3.15 1.77
1 (80.0) (45.0)
1
1 0.41
2.76 1.73 (10.5)
1 (70.0) (44.0)
2.36
Four-Pole (60.0)
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
Description Z-NHK
1
Electrical
Contact function 2CO
1
Rated voltage 230V
1
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Rated current 2A 1
Rated thermal current Ith 2A
Utilization category AC13
Rated operational current Ie 3A/250 Vac
1
Rated operational current Ie 2A/250 Vac
1
Utilization category DC12
Rated operational current Ie 0.5A/110 Vdc 1
Rated insulation voltage UI 250 Vac
Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin 5 Vdc 1
Minimum operational current Imin 10 mA DC
Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ) 2.5 kV
1
Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A 1 kA
Maximum backup fuse, overload and short circuit 6A gL
1
Mechanical
Tripping indicator “electrical tripping” Blue/white
1
Frame size
Device height
45 mm
80 mm
1
Device width 8.8 mm (0.5MU) 1
Mounting Onto switching device
Degree of protection, built-in IP40 1
Terminal protection Finger and hand touch safe
Terminals
According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6
Lift terminals
1
Terminal capacity 20–14 AWG
1
Terminal screws M3 (Posidrive Z0)
Fastening torque of terminal screws 7 lb-in maximum 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Contents

1 Description Page
1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-94
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-102
1 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-103
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-104
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac
1 Product Overview Features Standards and Certifications
Optimum product quality, ● Wide range of compact ● UL 1053
1 tested reliability and safety RCD type serving as fault- ● IEC/EN 61008
stand for best protection of current and additional
installations and plant. protection according to
1 Eaton’s UL 1053 Residual UL 1053 and IEC/EN 61008
Current Circuit Breaker standards, suitable for
1 (RCCB) is designed for use in worldwide use in the 110V
residual current applications. range of applications
1 Application Description
● Type A or Type G/A (with
delay) protection available
1 ● Motor control circuits ● Comprehensive range of
● HVAC internal/external accessories
1 equipment ● Real contact position
● PLCs indicator
1 ● HMIs ● Fault current tripping
● Equipment protection indicator
1 ● Transparent designation
plate
1 ● Trip-free design—RCCB
can not be defeated by
1 holding the handle in the
ON position
1 ● Captive screws cannot
be lost
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
Product Selection
1
UL 1053 RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Type A
1
Four-Pole Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A
Four-Pole 1
25 30 167699 FRCmM-25/4/003-A-NA-110
300 167702 FRCmM-25/4/03-A-NA-110 1
40 30 167700 FRCmM-40/4/003-A-NA-110
300 167703 FRCmM-40/4/03-A-NA-110
1
63 30 167701 FRCmM-63/4/003-A-NA-110 1
300 167704 FRCmM-63/4/03-A-NA-110
1
UL 1053 RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Type G/A 1
Type G/A has a 10 ms delay.
1
Two-Pole Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601)
Two-Pole 1
25 30 167693 FRCmM-25/2/003-G/A-NA-110
300 167696 FRCmM-25/2/03-G/A-NA-110 1
40 30 167694 FRCmM-40/2/003-G/A-NA-110
300 167697 FRCmM-40/2/03-G/A-NA-110
1
63 30 167695 FRCmM-63/2/003-G/A-NA-110
1
300 167698 FRCmM-63/2/03-G/A-NA-110
1
Four-Pole
Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601) 1
Four-Pole
GF Sensitivity Catalog 1
Amperes (mA) Number 1 Designation
25 30 167705 FRCmM-25/4/003-G/A-NA-110 1
300 167708 FRCmM-25/4/03-G/A-NA-110
40 30 167706 FRCmM-40/4/003-G/A-NA-110 1
300 167709 FRCmM-40/4/03-G/A-NA-110
63 30 167707 FRCmM-63/4/003-G/A-NA-110
1
300 167710 FRCmM-63/4/03-G/A-NA-110 1
Note
1 Has no thermal element; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Accessories
1
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac
1 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number
1 Contact Two-pole contact or auxiliary

contact / trip indicating contact
Z-NHK 1 Padlock Hasp Padlock hasp Z-IS/SPE-1TE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
● Residual current devices UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data, continued 1
● Has no thermal protection; must be paired with FAZ-NA
or FAZ per application
1
Electrical According to UL1053
● Captive screw terminals
● Universal tripping signal switch, also suitable for Z-A; can be
Design according to UL 1053 1
Current test marks as printed onto the device
mounted subsequently
● Auxiliary switch Z-HK can be mounted subsequently
Tripping Type G 8 ms delay 1
Rated voltage Un 208Y/120V, 60 Hz
● Red-green contact position indicator
● White-blue tripping indicator
Pickup current 22, 200 mA 1
Sensitivity AC and pulsating DC
● Delayed types recommended for use with standard
fluorescent tubes with or without electronical ballast
Overvoltage tested 530V 1
(30mA-RCD: 30 units per phase conductor, Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
100mA-RCD: 90 units per phase conductor) Rated short-circuit capacity Inc 5 kA according to CSA 1
● The device functions irrespective of the position of installation Maximum backup fuse Overload protection Short-circuit protection
● Tripping is line voltage-independent. Consequently, the RCD is In = 25–40A 25A gG/gL 63A gG/gL 1
suitable for “fault current/residual current protection” and In = 63A 40A gG/gL 63A gG/gL
“additional protection” within the meaning of the applicable Rated breaking capacity Im or 1
installation rules Rated fault breaking capacity I m
● Reverse-feed permitted In = 25–40A
In = 63A
500A
630A
1
● The four-pole device can also be used for two-pole
connection. For this purpose, use terminals 5-6 and N-N Voltage range of test button Two-pole 100–121V~
1
● The test key “T” must be pressed every month. The system Four-pole 100–210V~
operator must be informed of this obligation and responsibility
in a way that can be proven (self-adhesive RCD-label enclosed)
Endurance Electrical
Mechanical
>4000 operating cycles
>20,000 operating cycles
1
● Pressing the test key “T” serves the only purpose of function
testing the residual current device (RCD). This test does not
Mechanical 1
Frame size 45.0 mm
make earthing resistance measurement (RE) or proper
checking of the earth conductor condition redundant, which Device height 80.0 mm 1
must be performed separately Device width 35 mm (2TE), 70 mm (4TE)
● Type -A: Protects against special forms of residual pulsating Device width Quick fastening with two 1
DC that have not been smoothed lock-in positions on DIN
rail IEC/EN 60715
● Type -G/A: Additionally protects against special forms of
Degree of protection, built-in IP40
1
residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed
Degree of protection in moisture-proof
enclosure
IP54
1
UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data
Upper and lower terminals Lift terminals
Terminal protection Finger and hand touch
1
Electrical According to IEC/EN 61008 safe BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6
Design according to IEC/EN 61008 Terminal capacity 1.5–35 mm2 single-wire 1
ÖVE E 8601 2 x 16 mm2 multi-wire
Current test marks as printed onto the device Busbar material thickness 0.8–2 mm 1
Tripping Type G 10 ms delay Tripping temperature –25°C to +60°C
Rated voltage Un 230/400V, 50 Hz Resistance to climatic conditions According to IEC 61008
1
Rated tripping current I n 30, 300 mA Humidity 5–95%
Sensitivity AC and pulsating DC 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui 440V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV 1
Rated short-circuit capacity Inc 10 kA
Maximum backup fuse Overload protection Short-circuit protection 1
In = 25–40A 25A gG/gL 63A gG/gL
In = 63A 40A gG/gL 63A gG/gL 1
Rated breaking capacity Im bzw.
Rated fault breaking capacity I m 1
In = 25–40A 500A
In = 63A 630A 1
Voltage range of test button Two-pole 100–132V~
Four-pole 100–230V~ 1
Endurance Electrical >4000 operating cycles
Mechanical >20,000 operating cycles 1
Overvoltage category III
1

Connection Diagram Impact of Ambient Temperature on the Maximum

1 Permanent Current Allowed (A)
1 N 1 3 5 N 16A 25A 40A 63A
1 Tripping Two- Four- Two- Four- Two- Four- Two- Four-
Temperature Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole Pole
1 T T
40°C 16 16 25 25 40 40 63 63
45°C 14 14 21 22 37 37 59 59
1 50°C 11 11 18 19 33 34 55 55
2 N 2 4 6 N
1 Two-Pole Four-Pole 55°C 9 9 14 16 30 31 50 50
60°C 1 — — — 26 27 45 45
1 Notes
1 Do not use.
1 Please make sure that these values are not exceeded and that any upstream overload protection
switches off in time.
1
Correct Connection
1
1
1
1
1
1 3+N
(230/400V) IEC
(184–254 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC
(400 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC
1+N
(230V) IEC
(277/480V) UL (184–277 Vac Phase-Phase) UL (480 Vac Phase-Phase) UL (277V) UL
1
1 Dimensions
1
1 0.22 0.18
(5.5) (4.5)
1 1.20
(30.5)
1
1
3.15 1.77
1 (80.0) (45.0)
1
1 0.41
2.76 1.73 (10.5)
1 (70.0) (44.0)
2.36
Four-Pole (60.0)
1
1
1
1
1

1.4
Description Z-NHK Z-IHK-NA
1
Electrical
Contact function 2CO 1NO + 1NC
1
Rated voltage 230V 250V
1
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated current 2A 6A 1
Rated thermal current Ith 2A 6A
1
1
Utilization category DC12
Rated operational current Ie 0.5A/110 Vdc 0.5A/110 Vdc 1
0.25A/220 Vdc
Rated insulation voltage UI 250 Vac 250 Vac 1
Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin 5 Vdc 5 Vdc
Minimum operational current Imin 10 mA DC 10 mA AC/DC 1
Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ) 2.5 kV 4 kV
Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A 1 kA 1 kA 1
Maximum backup fuse, overload and short circuit 6A gL —
Mechanical 1
Tripping indicator “electrical tripping” Blue/white —
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm
1
Device width 8.8 mm (0.5MU) 8.8 mm (0.5MU)
1
Mounting Onto switching device —
1
Terminal protection Finger and hand touch safe
According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6
Finger and hand touch safe
According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6 1
Terminals Lift terminals Lift terminals
Terminal capacity 20–14 AWG 0.5–2.5 mm2
1
Terminal screws M3 (Posidrive Z0) M3 (Posidrive Z0)
Fastening torque of terminal screws 7 lb-in maximum 1.2 Nm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case 2.1 Introduction
Circuit Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-2
2.2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Power Defense Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4
Power Defense Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-12 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29 2
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57 2
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79 2
Series G Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-98 2
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106 2
2.3 Series G ® Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-108
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-119
2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-133
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151 2
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-169
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-178 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-189
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-193 2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-196
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-200 2
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . V4-T2-205
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208 2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
2
2.4 Series C ® Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220 2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-225
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239 2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265 2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-289
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315 2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-360
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-371 2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-373
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-374 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-377
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410 2
2.5 Specialty Breakers 2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-443 2
PVGard™ Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-457
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-470 2
2.6 Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-508
2
Learn Drawings
Online Online 2

2.1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents

2 Description Page
2 Introduction
Power Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4
2 Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-108
Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
2 Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Learn Drawings
2 Online Online
2
2
2
2
2
2 Product Overview Application Description
Eaton’s Electrical Sector, The Series G line features an Eaton molded case circuit
2 under the Eaton brand, offers average 35% size reduction, breakers cover the widest
the widest variety of molded common field-installable range of applications in the
2 case circuit breakers available internal accessories and industry:
today. Designed for electrical advanced trip unit
Electrical OEMs
2 and machinery OEMs serving functionality that eliminates
●
a range of industries and the need for rating plugs. ● Machinery OEMs
2 applications, these proven
designs incorporate the
These breakers meet the
requirements of UL, CSA,
● Navy breakers:
● UL 489 Supplement SB
latest in innovation with IEC, CCC and CE, allowing
2 the high reliability that has the OEM to standardize on a
● MIL-C-17588
been our hallmark since the design that meets the needs
● MIL-C-17361
2 advent of the circuit breaker of their global customer base. ● ABS/NVR
in the 1920s.
The Series C family ranges ● Mining breakers up to
2 The Power Defense family from 15 to 2500 amperes and 1100 Vac
is Eaton’s premier MCCB includes thermal-magnetic ● Earth leakage
2 globally rated line, breakers, electronic trip ● DC breakers 125–750 Vdc
incorporating Power Xpert breakers, molded case ● Engine generator breakers
2 Release electronic trip units switches, motor circuit
15–1200 amperes
with best-in-class safety protectors and specially
● Current limiting breakers
2 and protection features.
It includes ratings from
designed breakers for
engine generator, DC and
15 to 12,500 amperes, mining applications.
2 thermal-magnetic and
electronic breakers, and
2 modular field-installable
accessories. Power Defense
2 breakers meet the requirements
of UL, CSA, CE and CCC.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Introduction
2.1
Typical Applications
2
Machine Tool Control Panels Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs Typical Eaton Applications
and Motor Control Centers In busbar trunking tap-offs to 2
Designed for these provide circuit protection.
equipment requirements,
including new world-class
2
Individual Enclosures
accessories. Completely assembled in
enclosures to meet specific
2
Panelboards customer requirements.
As both main and branch 2
circuit protection devices. Additional Applications
Feeder Pillars Special versions of each Eaton 2
frame are available to provide
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
safe equipment control and Panelboard
2
protection in mining and other
circuit protection. applications. Contact your 2
Eaton agent or distributor for
Switchgear Individual Circuit
additional information.
In distribution systems to Breaker Enclosure 2
provide main and branch Busbar Trunking
Tap-Off
circuit protection up to 2500 2
amperes (RG-Frame).
Machine Tool
Control Panel 2
Switchboard
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents

2 Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2 Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
Communications and Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
2 Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106
2
2
2
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits
2 Eaton’s globally accepted Power Xpert Release Trip Unit Configurations
Power Defense™ molded Electronic Trip Units
case circuit breaker (MCCB) Thermal-Magnetic PXR 20
2 can: Simpler communications. ● Available with adjustable ● A fully adjustable trip unit
Better protection. magnetic settings, and for with LSI and LSIG protection
● Connect to your network or Easier energy metering
2 the cloud with built-in IEC markets, adjustable capabilities. This trip unit
communication capability Embedded in the Power thermal settings. For NEMA offers more advanced
2 ● Generate the data to help
Defense portfolio, Power
Xpert® Release (PXR)
markets, fixed magnetic
and fixed thermal settings
features than ever before
at this level, including
optimize your facility’s
electronic trip units for global are options. Four-pole current metering,
2 performance
low-voltage commercial and options with 0%, 60% and programmable relays,
● Mitigate arc flash to keep industrial applications are 100% protection are available and optional embedded
2 your employees, customers
and end users safe
Eaton’s latest innovation in communications to enable
circuit protection technology. PXR 10 seamless integration into
2 The Power Defense MCCB They are designed to help ● All of the advantages of control and communication
portfolio is globally adaptive you simplify your an electronic trip unit in systems
communications, enhance a simpler interface, which
2 to your footprint no matter
your protection and support leads to easy setup. This
● The PXR 20 also offers
the application or project cutting-edge safety
requirement. All frames have your energy metering. trip unit is available with features like the Arcflash
2 the availability of global LSI protection and includes Reduction Maintenance
● Unique Eaton trip unit programmable settings so
certifications including IEC, platform enables you to System™ and zone
2 CCC, UL® and CSA®. Eaton’s easily change set points,
that it can be tailored for selective interlocking with
best-in-class support enables the specific application new testing and status
test and configure circuit
2 you to order readily available breakers, and meter indication features, and
product for on-time delivery, energy and power cause of trip indication
2 across the globe. information
● Enhanced, easy-to-use
2 interface allows you to
view and adjust the trip
2 unit settings
● Intuitive interface provides
2 simple scroll-through
visibility for critical
performance metrics such
2 as metering, battery life,
zone selective interlock
2 settings and circuit breaker
health
2
2

2.2
PXR 20D Trip Unit Features
● Offers the same level of 2
Breaker Health Feature and Arcflash Reduction Power Xpert Protection
functionality as the PXR 20, Programmable Alarms Maintenance System Manager
but with a programmable 2
interface that allows for Less Costly Downtime Better Safety and Productivity Simpler Operation,
Reduced Maintenance
additional flexibility in By enabling you to perform
predictive and preventive
For added protection, the
Power Defense portfolio Once installed, your Power
2
protection parameters
maintenance on your power offers Eaton’s patented Xpert Release trip unit
and integration into inter-
connected power distribution distribution system prior to Arcflash Reduction continues to provide cost
2
systems. The protection component failure, the Maintenance System to savings and advanced
and safety functions can breaker health feature and reduce arc flash incident functionality through the 2
be programmed not only programmable alarms will energy. This innovative safety Power Xpert Protection
from the onboard LCD help you avoid costly feature can help you: Manager (PXPM) interface. 2
screen, but also through downtime. ● Decrease personal This intuitive user interface
communications, making ● Communicates circuit protection equipment allows for simple trip unit set
up and programming, real-
2
your system setup and breaker status at customer (PPE) requirements to
commissioning easier and time reporting of power and
future-proofed
determined levels to
prompt for breaker
enhance productivity
energy metering, as well as 2
● Enhance the safety of your
maintenance or inspection the ability to check critical
PXR 25
● Provides real-time
personnel
performance metrics, to 2
● Offers more functionality meet your application needs
evaluation of breaker Enhanced Ground Fault
than ever before in a condition by tracking and Protection and Coordination while decreasing 2
molded case circuit maintenance and in-field
analyzing diagnostic details Easier Phase or Ground Fault testing time. The testing
breaker trip unit. 1%
accuracy for energy
including breaker Detection and Warning features and functionality,
2
operations, short-circuit Expanded protection of
readings, coupled with which can be run through a
the option for multiple
fault levels, operational ground fault increases personal computer, offers 2
time, internal temperature coordination capabilities
communication protocols savings through labor hour
and overloads
and embedded and provides ability to turn reduction and avoiding the 2
programmable relays, protection off. need for expensive
Zone Selective Interlocking
making this the ultimate
Reduction in Arc Flash Energy
● ON/OFF feature simplifies proprietary testing kits. 2
example of an intelligent system testing
The zone selective
● Ultimate control and data
node in a power ● Ground fault trip units 2
interlocking (ZSI) feature are at your fingertips:
distribution system combine trip, alarm, and
communicates when a phase ● Set point Configuration:
● Leverage the capabilities or ground fault is present.
OFF in every unit, with
programmable relays for
Allows direct-to-trip unit 2
of this product to eliminate or offline set up,
The breaker closest to the alarm or pre-alarm
meters and other
components from the
●
fault will override any functionality

including duplication of
settings between units
2
system, making the power customer-defined delay ● Expanded time profile Control Mode: Capture
distribution system cost- setting and open selections include I2t and
●
waveforms, reset TU or
2
effective and smaller, with instantaneously to clear flat response profiles for set the date/time
increased intelligence the fault, allowing line-side more coordination options ● Test Mode: Run 2
and connectivity breakers to remain closed secondary injection and
Each breaker frame section
and online Industry Standard
Communication create test reports 2
● The PXR trip unit displays ● Real-Time Data:
indicates the full range of trip Energy monitoring and
units available for the frame.
when the ZSI system is
engaged, communicating, system status with onboard
Provides information 2
The wide range of trip unit regarding all status and
and helping to keep you serial and industrial network
options, coupled with field-
and your employees safe— communications available
metered data direction 2
replaceable trip units, enables from the trip unit
so you no longer have to through CAM modules in the
compatibility with global
requirements and allows
just trust that the ZSI is PXR 20, 20D and 25 will offer
● Event Summaries:
Stores up to 200 events,
2
operational, unlike with a greater view and control
upgrade from the most basic detailed information on
protective device to a high-
other MCCB offerings into the machine or power
distribution system. the most recent (10) trip 2
end, intelligent node in a
● ZSI is also a proven and (10) alarm events,
power system. solution for reducing arc Available features can offer: and time adjustments to 2
flash incident energy when the real-time clock
a fault is present ● Easy connection to PLC
building management
● Reports: Allows for the 2
systems, SCADA and formatting and printing
cloud-based systems of real time data and of
performed secondary
2
● Remote monitoring and injection tests
option control of breaker 2
● Metering and health data
2
2

Breaker Frame Overview

2 Power Defense molded case PD-3—Covers a range of 45 A Interrupting Ratings Some of the most common
circuit breakers include six through 600 A with field- accessories and their function
2 frames, PD-1 through PD-6, installable trip units, including
The Power Defense molded
case circuit breaker line is a are described below.
providing flexibility to meet fixed thermal/adjustable global product, with
2 protection needs up to magnetic and all PXR interrupting ratings across a Internal Accessories
2500 A. electronic trip unit options in broad range of voltages. Auxiliary Switches—Provide
2 PD-1—Compact frame
two frame options: 400 A and These interrupting ratings circuit breaker primary
600 A. PD-3 also has 100% are optimized for power contact status information.
covering range of 15 A UL ratings and current
2 through 125 A with fixed limiting options. Additionally,
distribution and meet the The auxiliary switch is used
for remote indication and
thermal-magnetic trip unit, broadest range of application
motor protection circuit needs. See each frame for the interlock system verification.
2 and with current limiting breakers ranging from 45 A specific interrupting levels. These switches mount
options. Additionally, motor through 600 A with PXR internal to the breaker in the
2 circuit protectors covering a
range from 3 A through 100 A
electronic trip units, as well Modular Accessories right side accessory cavity.
as motor circuit protectors
with adjustable magnetic The Power Defense molded Alarm Switches—Used for
2 settings of 3x to 11x.
ranging from 70 A through
600 A with adjustable case circuit breakers feature remote indication of
magnetic settings from new, modular accessories automatic trip operation. The
2 PD-2—Standard frame
covering a range of 15 A 5x to 10x. that are designed to make switch automatically resets
customization of the breaker when the circuit breaker is
through 225 A with trip unit
2 options, from a fixed thermal-
PD-4—Covers a range of for the unique requirements reset. These switches mount
300 A through 800 A with of the application easier than internal to the breaker in the
magnetic to the most field-installable trip units,
2 advanced Power Xpert™ including fixed thermal/
ever before. A common line
of auxiliary switch and bell
right side accessory cavity.
Release (PXR) electronic adjustable magnetic, and all alarms allow for inter- Shunt Trip—Provides
2 units. PD-2 also has current PXR electronic trip unit changeability between the capability to trip the breaker
limiting options available. options (PXR 10, PXR 20, different Power Defense by remote control. Shunt trips
2 Additionally, motor protection
circuit breakers ranging from
PXR 20D and PXR 25), and breaker frames, enabling the are designed to be applied at
100% UL rating options. final configuration of the specific AC or DC voltages.
15 A through 200 A with These devices are installed
2 PXR electronic trip units, PD-5—Covers a range of
breaker at the point of use
internal to the breaker in the
and minimizing the amount of
as well as motor circuit 320 A through 1200 A with inventory required. Compact, left side accessory cavity.
2 protectors ranging from 3 A field-installable PXR modular shunt trips and under
through 150 A with adjustable electronic trip units, PXR 20, Undervoltage Release
voltage releases have been
2 magnetic settings from PXR 20D and PXR 25, as well designed to be easily installed
(UVR)—Monitors a voltage,
typically of a line voltage, and
3x to 10x. as 100% UL rating options. and removed as the project or trips the circuit breaker when
2 PD-6—Covers a range of application dictates. the voltage falls below 70%
700 A through 2500 A with of the nominal voltage
2 field-installable PXR designated for the UVR.
electronic trip units, PXR 20, These devices are installed
2 PXR 20D and PXR 25, as well
as 100% UL rating options.
internal to the breaker in the
left side accessory cavity.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
External Accessories Standards and
Terminals—Multiple cable Locking Devices—Offer the Certifications 2
terminal options are available capability to lock the breaker Power Defense circuit
for each frame, providing handle in the OFF or ON breakers meet applicable:
2
alternatives to connect position (trip-free operation
● UL 489
primary power and loads to allows the breaker to trip
● CSA, C22.2 No. 5-02
2
the circuit breaker. when locked in the ON
Additionally, control wire position). Power Defense ● IEC 60947-2
terminals provide a means to offers three primary types, ● GB 14048.2-2008
2
tap off control power. Multi- including handle blocks,
wire terminals on the load padlockable hasps, and 2
side of the breaker can also provisions for Kirk trapped
be used to distribute the load key locks (Kirk lock must be 2
from the circuit breaker to purchased separately).
multiple devices without the
use of separate distribution Walking Beam Interlock— 2
terminal blocks. Provides a mechanical
interlock between two 2
Terminal Shields—Provide adjacent circuit breakers of
protection against accidental the same frame size and pole 2
contact with live configuration, preventing
terminations, as well as both breakers from being
clearance between circuit switched ON at the same
2
breaker poles or adjacent time. To install a walking
circuit breakers, and are beam interlock, the circuit 2
required for some terminal breakers must be ordered
applications. with the factory modification 2
to accept the interlock.
Interphase Barriers—Offer
additional electrical clearance Plug-In Adapters—Provide a 2
between circuit breaker poles rear connection and mounting
for special termination base to simplify installation 2
applications. and front removal of circuit
Operating Mechanisms—
breakers. Plug-in adapters are 2
available for frames PD-1,
Manually operated PD-2 and PD-3.
mechanisms designed to 2
open, close and reset circuit Drawout Configurations—
breakers. These are available Provide a robust system to 2
in three basic configurations— remove or exchange breakers
flange mounted, through-the- and is typically used in critical 2
door and direct (close- power operations. It provides
coupled)—to provide a variety a rear connection and cell,
of options for different and provides indication of 2
applications. the circuit breaker position.
Remote/Electrical
Drawout configurations are 2
available for frames PD-3,
Operators—A motor driven,
stored energy operator that
PD-4 and PD-5. 2
enables a user to locally or
remotely switch the breaker 2
between the OFF, ON and
TRIP positions, including 2
reset switching. These
operators mount on the front 2
cover of the circuit breaker,
within the trim line of the
circuit breaker, and are 2
designed to be applied at
specific AC or DC voltages. 2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Numbering System Overview

2
Breakers
2 Power Defense breakers are Product may be ordered Note that most of the A configured breaker (20 digits)
configured using a 20-digit using the base breaker accessories for Power catalog number should only
2 catalog number that can be
divided into two sections:
catalog number (14 digits)
only. However, if factory
Defense molded case circuit
breakers are field installable.
be used when it is necessary
to have a factory modification
modifications are required, When field installing of the circuit breaker.
2 ● Base breaker catalog including installation of accessories, the best practice
number = digits 1–14 accessories, the full breaker to follow is to order a base
2 ● Factory modifications = catalog number plus factory breaker with the 14-digit
digits 15–20 modifications (20 digits) for catalog number, and order
2 a configured breaker must the accessories separate for
be used. field installation.
2
Base Breaker Catalog Number (14 digits)
2 The catalog number has fixed positions for each breaker characteristic. The fixed format allows a
customer to determine the performance characteristics of the product by parsing the catalog
2 number. The format of the Power Defense breaker catalog number is as follows:
Catalog Number PD G 3 3 F 0400 TFA J
2 Digits (1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–10) (11–13) (14)
Meaning Power Certifications Frame size Poles Interrupting Continuous Trip unit type Terminals
2 Defense and standards rating current rating
2 Certifications and Standards (Digit 3)

The certifications and standards selection (digit 3) denotes the global standards and certifications
2 met by the product, and, as such, indicates the respective markings found on the product. Defined
values and their meaning are as follows:
2 Value Meaning Marks on Product
G Global ratings UL, CSA, CE, CCC
2 F Global ratings with 100% UL rating UL, CSA, CE, CCC
2 D Rated to 240 V UL, CSA

J UL and CSA UL, CSA
2 C IEC and GB CE, CCC
E IEC only CE
2
Poles (Digit 5) Configured Breaker Catalog Factory modifications on
2 The poles selection (digit 5) is Number (20 digits) Power Defense catalog
mostly self-explanatory, with For breakers with factory numbers are also based on
2 the exception of 4-pole modifications, product must fixed positions within digits
breakers, which may use the be ordered using the 15–20 of the catalog number.
2 values 4 (100% protected
neutral pole), 0 (no protection
complete 20-digit configured
breaker catalog number.
Digits 15–16 are always used
for indicating accessories,
on neutral pole), or 6 (60% This 20-digit number includes 17–18 for tripping accessories
2 protected neutral pole). the base breaker catalog and 19–20 for other
number plus an additional accessories or modifications.
2 Other selections are self- 6 digits to denote the factory When not used, the
explanatory, and further modifications. modification code digits
defined in each frame-
2 specific section relative to
default to the letter N.
the specific frame or
2 product type.
2 Example
An example of a full catalog number with modification codes would be as follows:
2 Catalog Number PDG33F0400TFAJ CC SP WB
2 Digits (1–14) (15, 16) (17, 18) (19, 20)

Meaning Base breaker catalog Indicating accessories (auxiliary Tripping accessories (shunt trip Other accessories or
2 number and/or alarm switches) or UVR) modifications

2.2
Indicating Accessories (Digits 15, 16) Other Accessories (Digits 19, 20)
The two digits used for Digit 16 determines the Other factory-installed accessories and factory modifications 2
indicating accessories (digits configuration of the switches, available (digits 19, 20) are detailed on a frame-by-frame basis
15, 16) denote the type of such as Form A (normally in the respective section of the catalog. 2
accessory(-ies) installed, the open or NO), Form B
type of termination of those
accessories, and the
(normally closed or NC), or
Form C (change-over or CO,
2
Trip Units and Accessories for Field Installation
configuration. or NO/NC). or Replacement 2
Digit 15 specifically Power Defense circuit Breaker frames are
breakers are designed to configured using the base
designates the accessory
have field-installable breaker catalog number
2
type and termination, as
shown below (note that accessories, and for frame (14 digits), as detailed in
not all frames offer all the sizes 3, 4, 5 and 6, field each section. 2
options shown). installable and replaceable
trip units. As such, breaker In general, when ordering
accessory or trip unit field
2
Type Accessory Terminations Digit 15 Selection frames, trip units and
installation kits, the format
Auxiliary switch only Pigtail (30-inch) A
accessories may be
purchased separately for field of the catalog number begins 2
Pigtail (3-meter) D configuration. Trip units and with a description of the
Screw terminal X accessories also have frame or frames for which 2
designated catalog numbers it is applicable (e.g., PDG3),
Spring cage clamp U
for identification and ordering followed by a separator 2
Alarm switch only Pigtail (30-inch) B purposes. digit (X), and ending with a
descriptive section, as
Pigtail (3-meter) E
follows:
2
Screw terminal Y
Spring cage clamp V
Trip Units and Accessories 2
Catalog
Auxiliary and alarm Pigtail (30-inch) C
Pigtail (3-meter) F
Number
Example PDG3 X Descriptive Section
2
Screw terminal Z Meaning Power Defense
Global Standards
Separator
digit
May include voltage, functionality or other
description of accessory or trip unit.
2
Spring cage clamp W
Frame 3
2
Tripping Accessories (Digits 17, 18)
Trip Units Thermal-Magnetic Trip 2
The two digits used for Digit 18 designates the
Trip units may be ordered Units (TMTU)
tripping accessories (digits 17,
18) denote the type of
nominal voltage rating of the
shunt trip or UVR, for which installed as part of a base or Power Defense TMTUs
2
accessory installed, the type options available vary by configured breaker, with are available in frame sizes 1
of termination, and the frame and are detailed in (digits 11–13) denoting the through 4, covering a 2
nominal voltage rating of the each frame section of the functionality and features continuous current range
accessory. Digit 17 catalog. included. Additionally, trip of 15 A through 800 A. 2
specifically designates the units may be ordered
Thermal (overload)
type of accessory and type of separately, using the trip unit
designated catalog numbers. settings—Functionality and 2
termination, as shown below.
Below, it is explained how configurations are available
Type Accessory Terminations Digit 17 Selection separate trip unit catalog based on the standard to 2
numbers are set up, as well which the breaker is certified,
Shunt trip Pigtail (30-inch) S
as their relationship with their with all trip units carrying UL 2
Pigtail (3-meter) R designation in digits 11–13 of and CSA certifications (PDG,
PDF, etc) having a fixed
Screw terminal T the breaker catalog number
thermal setting.
2
Under voltage release Pigtail (30-inch) U
for the same trip unit.
Pigtail (3-meter) W Magnetic (short circuit) 2
settings—For frame sizes 1
Screw terminal V and 2 that include UL and
CSA certifications, magnetic
2
settings are fixed. For frame
sizes 3 and 4, the trip unit 2
includes an adjustment for
the short circuit protection 2
setting of the trip unit, with
the range dependent on the 2
frame.
2
2

When ordered individually, The information in the

2 thermal-magnetic trip unit description, TFA30400, is
catalog numbers include a also used in the base breaker
2 Descriptive Section to denote catalog number.
the tripping characteristics of
2 the unit, the pole configuration
and continuous current rating.
2 Example
An individual TMTU catalog number takes the form of:
2 Catalog Number PDG3 X TFA 3 0400
Description Power Defense Separator Trip unit tripping Poles Continuous
2 Frame Size digit characteristics current rating
2 Specific to TMTUs, the trip Thermal-magnetic trip units

unit characteristics used in (or breakers) may also be
2 the base breaker catalog ordered calibrated to 50 °C
number denote the thermal ambient temperature by
2 and magnetic tripping
characteristics of the unit.
using a V in the trip unit
type designator. Breakers
with 50 °C calibrated trip units
2 do not carry a UL Listing.
2 TM trip unit tripping characteristics options:

Configured Separate TM
2 Breaker Digit Trip Unit Digit Designator Option Meaning
11 6 Trip unit type T Thermal-magnetic trip unit
2 V 50 °C thermal-magnetic trip unit
12 7 Thermal type F Fixed
2 A Adjustable
2 13 8 Magnetic type F Fixed

A Adjustable
2 Note: IEC rated circuit thermal-magnetic trip units that are included with PDC or PDE breakers are typically
fully adjustable (thermal and magnetic). Please consult with the product line for additional details.
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETUs)
2 PXR ETUs are available in When ordered individually, Sections of the PXR ETU
frame sizes 2 through 6, PXR trip unit catalog numbers catalog number are also used
2 covering a continuous also include a Descriptive in the Base Breaker that is
current range of 15 A through Section denoting the outfitted with the same trip
2 2500 A. functionality and unit.
configuration of the trip unit.
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETUs)
2 Catalog Number PDG3 X PXR 3 0400 P2M
Description Power Defense Separator digit PXR ETU Poles Maximum continuous current rating Trip unit functionality
2 Frame Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
The three digit code at the end of the trip unit catalog number, or digits 11–13 for a base catalog
number, denote the trip unit type, protection features and options included with the trip unit. 2
Example
Trip unit features and options:
2
Configured
Breaker Digit
Separate PXR
Trip Unit Digit Designator Option Meaning
2
11 14 Trip unit type B PXR 10 Basic ETU
2
E PXR 20
D PXR 20D 2
P PXR 25
12 15 Protection type 2 LSI 2
3 LSIG
4 LSI with ARMS (ALSI)
2
5 LSIG with ARMS (ALSIG) 2
8 LSI Motor (MLSI)
9 LSIG Motor (MLSIG) 2
13 16 Options included N None
R Programmable relays
2
M Modbus and relays
2
Z ZSI and relays
C CAM Link and relays 2
W Modbus, ZSI, and relays
X CAM Link, ZSI, and relays 2
D Modbus, CAM Link, and relays
Y Modbus, CAM Link, ZSI and relays
2
Each frame section provides details on which options are available for the frame and includes a
2
table similar to the one below, denoting the options that may be combined by following horizontal
lines and selecting one item per section, such as E2Z or P3W below. 2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options 2
Trip Unit Type Protection Type Available Configured Options
(Character 11) (Character 12) (Character 13) 2
— Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays
LSI with LSIG with

—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2
PXR ETU LSI LSIG ARMS ARMS — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 10 B 2 — — — N — — — — — — — — 2
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
2
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
2
Accessories 2
Power Defense accessory catalog numbers also follow a format with a frame description,
separator digit (X) and descriptive section, similar to trip units.
2
Accessory catalog numbering format:
Catalog Number 2
Example PDG3 X ST130ACDCS
Meaning Power Defense Global Separator digit Descriptive section. May include voltage, functionality, 2
Standards Frame 3 or other description of accessory.
In cases where an accessory is used on multiple frames, multiple frames may be listed in the
2
Frame Description, such as “PDG34” for some rotary handles. Accessory catalog numbers are
listed with descriptions in each frame section. 2
2

Technical Data
2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 1 and 2
2
2
2
2 Description Unit
Frame Size 1—125 A,
1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
Frame Size 2—225 A,
1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Interrupting rating /
breaking capacity
50–60 Hz kA C F G K M N1 P1 F G K M N P
2 NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100 150 200 35 65 85 100 150 200
480 Vac (277 Vac 18 25 35 50 65 85 100 25 35 50 65 85 100
for 1 pole)
2 600 Vac (347 Vac 10 14 18 22 25 30 35 14 18 22 25 30/25 35/25
for 1 pole) 23
2 125 Vdc 4 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10
250 Vdc 4 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 22 22 22
2 IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 25 35 55 85 100 150 200 35 55 85 100 150 200
2 Ics 25 35 55 85 100 100 150 35 55 85 100 100 150

380–415 Vac Icu 20 25 36 50 70 70 100 25 36 50 70 70 100
2 Ics 20 25 36 50 50 70 100 25 36 50 53 70 70
440 Vac Icu — — — — — — — 25 30 35 50 70 100
2 Ics — — — — — — — 20 22.5 35 40 50 65
480 Vac Icu — — — — — — — 20 25 35 50 65 65
2 Ics — — — — — — — 20 20 22.5 30 40 40
525 Vac 2 Icu — — — — — — — 18 20 30/25 30/25 30/25 35/25
2 Ics — — — — — — — 15/13 15/13 15/13 15/13 15/13 18/13
2 660–690 Vac Icu — — — — — — — — 8 10 10 10 10

Ics — — — — — — — — 4 5 5 5 5
2 125 Vdc 4 Icu 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10
Ics 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 250 Vdc 4 Icu 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 22 22 22
Ics 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 22 22 22
2 Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 52.5 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 73.5 121 187 220 330 440
making capacity (Icm)
380–415 Vac 42 53 76 105 154 154 220 52.5 75.6 105 154 154 220
2 440 Vac — — — — — — — 52.5 63 73.5 105 154 220
2 480 Vac — — — — — — — 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 143

525 Vac — — — — — — — 37.8 42 63/52.5 63/52.5 73.5 73.5
2 660–690 Vac — — — — — — — — 16.8 21 21 21 21
Withstand/threshold Icw kA — 1.8
2 of the frame
Trip unit
2 Interchangeable No No
Thermal-magnetic (T) Fixed-Fixed Fixed-Fixed
2 Motor circuit protector (M) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole)
Electronics
2 Basic—PXR 10 (B) LSI, MLSI
Standard—PXR 20 (E) LSI, LSIG
2 Ammeter—PXR 20D (D) LSI, LSIG
2 Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, MLSI, MLSIG
Note
2 1 N and P ratings not available for 1 pole breakers.
2 First listed interrupting rating applies to thermal-magnetic breakers; the second rating applies to electronic breakers.
2 3 PDG1 breakers are rated for use in 347Y/600 Vac systems.

4 125 Vdc ratings are for single-pole breakers. 250 Vdc require two poles in series.

2.2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 1 and 2, continued
2
2
2
Frame Size 1—125 A, Frame Size 2—225 A, 2
Description Unit 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
UL File Number E7819 E7819 2
UL 100% rated breaker — —
Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A 15–125 15–225 (1 pole: 15–150;
2
15–30 for 1-pole N and P ratings
Electronics — 15–225
2
Selectivity category A A
2
Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Rated insulation voltage Main conducting V 500 800 (TMTU) 690 (ETU) 2
U, according to IEC paths
60947–2
Auxiliary circuits V 500 690 2
Rated impulse Main conducting kV 6 8 (TMTU) 6 (ETU)
withstand voltage Uimp paths 2
Auxiliary circuits 4 4
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vac 415 690 2
voltage Ue (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600/347 600
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vdc 250 250
2
voltage Ue (DC)
UL/CSA Vdc 250 250
2
Permissible ambient temperature range °C –20 to +70 –20 to +70
(for storage and operation)
Product complies with Shock Yes Yes
2
IEC 60–068
Permissible load for various ambient
2
temperatures close to the circuit breaker,
related to the rated current of the circuit 2
breaker
Thermal Magnetic
Breakers
40 °C 100% 100% 2
45 °C 98% 100%
50 °C 96% 100% 2
55 °C 93% 98%
60 °C 91% 95%
2
70 °C 86% 90%
2
PXR Electronic Breakers 40 °C — 100%
(including motor
protection circuit
45 °C — 100% 2
breakers) 50 °C — 100%
55 °C — 98% 2
60 °C — 92%
70 °C — 80%
2
Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section 2
400 Hz derating factor — See Special Applications Section
Endurance (operating cycles) no-load 10,000 20,000 2
(mechanical endurance)
Endurance (operating cycles) with load 125 A: 4000;100 A: 6000 8,000 2
(electrical endurance) at 415 V
Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 125 A: 5; 100 A: 6 2 2
2
2


2
2
2
2 Frame Size 1—125 A, Frame Size 2—225 A,
Description Unit 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Dimensions (H x W x D) 1-pole inch 5.5 x 1.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 1.4 x 3.5
(mm) (139.7 x 25.4 x 76.2) (152.4 x 35.1 x 88.9)
2 2-pole 5.5 x 2.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 2.8 x 3.5
(139.7 x 50.8 x 76.2) (152.4 x 71.1 x 88.9)
2 3-pole 5.5 x 3.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 4.1 x 3.5
(139.7 x 76.2 x 76.2) (152.4 x 104.6 x 88.9)
2 4-pole 5.5 x 4.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 5.5 x 3.5
(139.7 x 101.6 x 76.2) (152.4 x 139.5 x 88.9)
2 Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
1.000
(24.40)
1.375
(34.93)
2 Approximate weight lb (kg)

Breaker 3-pole / 4-pole 2.29 (1.04) / 2.84 (1.29) 4.21 (1.82) / 5.69 (2.46)
2 Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 4-pole — 6.00 (2.72) / 8.09 (3.67)
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum W 31 48 (TMTU); 38 (ETU)
2 rated current ln fixed breaker (3P)—for plant
protection
2 Suitable for reverse-
feed applications
Yes (except MCP) Yes (except MCP)
2 Blow out dimension Inch

(mm)
3.75
(95.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2 Required spacing
between circuit
Inch
(mm)
0 0
breakers
2 Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes
Plug-in Yes Yes
2 Drawout — —
2 DIN rail Yes Yes 1

IP Protection With accessories IP30 IP2X with finger protection
2 Pollution degree III III
Overvoltage category III III
2 Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes
2 Permissible mounting
positions
90
90
90
90
2
2
Note
2 1 Consult with product line for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
2
2
Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A, 2
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
Interrupting rating / 50–60 Hz kA F G K M N P F G K M N P G K M 2
breaking capacity
NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200 35 65 85 100 150 200 65 85 100 2
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100 25 35 50 65 85 100 35 50 65
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65 14 18 25 35 50 65 18 25 35
2
125 Vdc — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
2
250 Vdc 1 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 35 55 85 100 150 200 35 55 85 100 150 200 55 85 100 2
Ics 35 55 85 100 100 150 35 55 85 100 100 150 55 85 100
380–415 Vac Icu 25 36 50 70 70 100 25 36 50 70 70 100 36 50 70 2
Ics 25 36 50 53 70 70 25 36 50 53 70 70 36 50 53
440 Vac Icu 25 30 35 50 70 100 25 30 35 50 70 100 30 35 50
2
Ics 20 22.5 35 40 50 50 20 22.5 35 40 50 50 22.5 35 40 2
480 Vac Icu 20 25 35 50 65 85 20 25 35 50 65 85 25 35 50
Ics 20 20 22.5 30 40 40 20 20 22.5 30 40 40 20 22.5 30 2
525 Vac Icu 18 20 25 30 35 40 18 20 25 30 35 40 20 25 30
Ics 5 7.5 10 15 25 25 5 7.5 10 15 25 25 16.5 20 25
2
660–690 Vac Icu — 8 10 15 20 20 — 8 10 15 20 20 8 10 15
2
Ics — 4 5 7.5 10 10 — 4 5 7.5 10 10 4 5 7.5
125 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 2
Ics — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
250 Vdc 1 Icu 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25 2
Ics 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25
Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 121 187 220
2
380–415 Vac 52.5 75.6 105 154 154 220 52.5 75.6 105 154 154 220 75.6 105 154
2
440 Vac 52.5 63 73.5 105 154 220 52.5 63 73.5 105 154 220 63 73.5 105
480 Vac 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 187 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 187 52.5 73.5 105 2
525 Vac 37.8 42 52.5 63 73.5 84 37.8 42 52.5 63 73.5 84 42 52.5 63
660–690 Vac — 16.8 21 31.5 42 42 — 16.8 21 31.5 42 42 16.8 21 31.5 2
Withstand/threshold Icw kA 4 4 6
of the frame 2
Trip unit
Interchangeable Yes Yes Yes 2
Thermal-magnetic (T) Fixed-Adjustable Fixed-Adjustable Fixed-Adjustable
Motor circuit protector (M) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole) —
2
Adjustable Magnetic
only (3-pole)—PXR 10 (B)
LSI, MLSI LSI, MLSI LSI 2
Standard—PXR 20 (E) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2
Ammeter—PXR 20D (D) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG, MLSI, MLSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG, MLSI, MLSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 2
Note
1 2P in series. 2
2
2


2
2
2
2 Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A,
2 UL File Number E7819 E7819 E7819
UL 100% rated breaker Yes (ETU) Yes (TMTU and ETU) Yes (ETU)
2 Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A 100–400 250–600 300–800
2 Electronics 45–400 90–600 320–800

Selectivity category A A A
2 Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Rated insulation voltage U, Main conducting V 800 800 (TMTU); 690 (ETU) 800 (TMTU);690 (ETU)
2 according to IEC 60947–2 paths
Auxiliary circuits V 690 690 690
2 Rated impulse withstand Main conducting kV 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU) 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU) 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU)
voltage Uimp paths
2 Auxiliary circuits 4 4 4
Rated operational voltage Ue IEC/CCC Vac 690 690 690
2 (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600 600 600
2 Rated operational voltage Ue IEC/CCC

(DC)
Vdc 250 250 250
UL/CSA Vdc 250 250 250
2 Permissible ambient temperature range °C –20 to +70 –20 to +70 –20 to +70
2 Product complies with IEC 60– Shock
068
Yes Yes Yes
2 Permissible load for various ambient temperatures

close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated
current of the circuit breaker
2 Thermal Magnetic Breakers 40 °C 100% 100% 100%
2 45 °C 95.5% 95.5% 97%

50 °C 91% 91% 94%
2 55 °C 86% 86% 91%
60 °C 82% 82% 88%
2 70 °C 70% 70% 80%
PXR Electronic Breakers 40 °C 100% 100% 100%
2 (including motor protection
45 °C 100% 100% 100%
circuit breakers)
2 50 °C 100% 100% 100%
55 °C 86% 86% 91%
2 60 °C 82% 82% 88%
70 °C 70% 70% 80%
2 Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section See Special
Applications Section
2 400 Hz derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section See Special
Applications Section
2 Endurance (operating cycles) no-load (mechanical 15,000 15,000 10,000
endurance)
2 Endurance (operating cycles) with load (electrical 5000 5000 3000
endurance) at 415 V
2 Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 1 1 1
2
2

2.2
2
2
2
Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A, 2
Dimensions (H x W x 1-pole inch — — — 2
D) (mm)
2-pole 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 16.0 x 8.3 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 209.6 x 111.2)
3-pole 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 16.0 x 8.3 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 209.6 x 111.2)
4-pole 10.1 x 7.2 x 4.3 10.1 x 7.2 x 4.3 16.0 x 11.0 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 182.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 182.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 279.4 x 111.2)
Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
1.719
(43.66)
1.719
(43.66)
2.750
(69.85)
2
Approximate weight lb (kg) 2
Breaker 3-pole / 11.02 (5.00) 12.79 (5.80) 30.00 (13.60)
4-pole 13.77 (6.25) 17.42 (7.90) 39.90 (18.08)
2
Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 18.07 (8.20) 19.84 (9.01) —
4-pole 20.82 (9.44) 26.87 (12.19)
2
Power loss per circuit breaker at W 70 (TMTU); 64 (ETU) 130 (TMTU); 110 (ETU) 291 (TMTU); 270 (ETU)
maximum rated current ln fixed
breaker (3P)—for plant protection 2
Suitable for reverse- Yes Yes Yes
feed applications 2
Blow out dimension Inch 1.00 1.00 2.36
(mm) (25.4) (25.4) (60.0) 2
Required spacing between Inch 0 0 0
circuit breakers (mm) 2
Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes Yes
Plug-in Yes Yes — 2
Drawout Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1
DIN rail — — —
2
IP Protection With
accessories
IP2X with Finger Protection IP2X with Finger Protection IP2X Protection
2
Pollution degree III III III
2
Overvoltage category III III III
Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes Yes 2
Permissible mounting
positions 2
90
90
90
90
2
2
Note
1 Consult with product line for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2
2
2 Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Interrupting rating / 50–60 Hz kA K M N P T1 M N P
breaking capacity
2 NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 85 100 150 200 200 125 150 200
480 Vac (277 Vac 50 65 85 100 150 65 85 100
2 for 1 pole)
600 Vac (347 Vac 25 35 50 65 65 35 50 65
2 for 1 pole)
125 Vdc — — — — — — — —
2 250 Vdc — — — — — — — —
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 85 100 150 200 — 135 150 200
2 Ics 85 100 100 150 — 100 100 100
2 380–415 Vac Icu 50 70 70 100 — 70 70 100

Ics 50 53 50 50 — 50 50 50
2 440 Vac Icu 35 50 70 100 — 50 70 100
Ics 35 40 50 50 — 40 50 50
2 480 Vac Icu 35 50 65 85 — 50 65 85
2 Ics 22.5 30 40 40 — 30 40 40
525 Vac Icu 25 30 35 40 — 30 35 40
2 Ics 20 25 25 25 — 25 25 25
660–690 Vac Icu 10 15 20 35 — 15 20 35
2 Ics 5 7.5 10 18 — 7.5 13 18
125 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — —
2 Ics — — — — — — — —
2 250 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — —

Ics — — — — — — — —
2 Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 187 220 330 440 — 297 330 440
380–415 Vac 105 154 154 220 — 154 154 220
2 440 Vac 73.5 105 154 220 — 105 154 220
480 Vac 73.5 105 143 187 — 105 143 187
2 525 Vac 52.5 63 73.5 84 — 63 73.5 84
2 660–690 Vac 21 31.5 42 73.5 — 31.5 42 73.5

Withstand/threshold Icw kA 14 20
2 of the frame
Trip unit
2 Interchangeable Yes Yes
Thermal-magnetic (T) — —
2 Motor circuit protector (M) — —
Electronics
2 Basic—PXR 10 (B) — —
Standard—PXR 20 (E) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2 Ammeter—PXR 20D (D) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2 Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Note
2 1 PDJ (UL/CSA only), 3-pole only; 800 A.

2.2
2
2
2
Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500 2
UL File Number E7819 E7819 2
UL 100% rated breaker Yes Yes (up to 2000 A)
Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A — —
2
Electronics 320–1200 (1600 IEC) 700–2500 2
Selectivity category A A
Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2
Rated insulation voltage Main conducting V 690 (ETU) 690 (ETU)
U, according to IEC paths 2
60947–2
Auxiliary circuits V 690 690
Rated impulse withstand Main conducting kV 6 (ETU) 6 (ETU) 2
voltage Uimp paths
Auxiliary circuits 4 4 2
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vac 690 690
voltage Ue (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600 600
2
Rated operational
voltage Ue (DC)
IEC/CCC Vdc — —
2
UL/CSA Vdc — —
Permissible ambient temperature range °C –20 to +70 –20 to +70 2
Product complies with
IEC 60–068
Shock Yes Yes 2
Permissible load for various ambient
temperatures close to the circuit breaker,
2
related to the rated current of the circuit
breaker 2
Thermal Magnetic 40 °C — —
Breakers
45 °C — — 2
50 °C — —
55 °C — —
2
60 °C — — 2
70 °C — —
PXR Electronic Breakers 40 °C 100% 100% 2
(including motor
45 °C 95.5% 95.5%
protection circuit
breakers) 50 °C 91% 91%
2
55 °C 85% 85%
2
60 °C 81% 81%
70 °C 70% 70% 2
Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section
400 Hz derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section 2
Endurance (operating cycles) no-load 3000 3000
(mechanical endurance) 2
Endurance (operating cycles) with load 500 500
(electrical endurance) at 415 V 2
Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 1 1
2
2
2


2
2
2
2 Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500
2 Dimensions (H x W x D) 1-pole inch — —
(mm)
2 2-pole 16.0 x 8.3 x 5.5 16.0 x 15.5 x 9.8
(406.4 x 209.5 x 139.7) (406.4 x 393.7 x 247.65)
2 3-pole 16.0 x 8.3 x 5.5 16.0 x 15.5 x 9.8
(406.4 x 209.5 x 139.7) (406.4 x 393.7 x 247.65)
2 4-pole 16.0 x 11.1 x 5.5 16.0 x 20.0 x 9.8
(406.4 x 282.7 x 139.7) (406.4 x 508 x 247.65)
2 Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
2.750
(69.85)
4.500
(114.30)
2 Approximate weight lb (kg)

Breaker 3-pole / 4-pole 46.80 (21.30) / 58.00 (26.31) 135.00 (61.23) / 182.00 (82.55)
2 Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 4-pole — —
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum W 87 (800 A) 220 (1600 A); 270 (2000 A);
2 rated current ln fixed breaker (3P)—for plant 195 (1200 A and 1600 A) 400 (2500 A)
protection
2 Suitable for reverse-feed
applications
Yes Yes
2 Blow out dimension Inch

(mm)
13.125
(333.38)
2.625
(66.68)
2 Required spacing
between circuit breakers
Inch
(mm)
0 0
2 Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes

Plug-in — —
2 Drawout Yes 1 —
DIN rail — —
2 IP Protection With accessories IP2X Protection IP2X Protection
Pollution degree III III
2 Overvoltage category III III
2 Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes

Permissible mounting
2 positions
90
90
90
90
2
2
Note
2 1 Consult with product line for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Power Defense Accessories
PDG1 PDG2 PDG3 PDG4 PDG5 PDG6
2
Auxiliary switches
2
Rated thermal current Ith 5A 4A 4A 4A 6A 6A
Rated operational voltage (AC) 125 V / 250 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 600 V 600 V 2
Rated operational current (AC) 5A/5A/2A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 6A 6A
Rated operational voltage (DC) 125 V 220 V 220 V 220 V 125 V / 250 V 125 V / 250 V 2
Rated operational current (DC) 1A 0.3 A 0.3 A 0.3 A 0.5 A / 0.25 A 0.5 A / 0.25 A
Backup fuse 1 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
2
Undervoltage releases 2
Response voltage
Drop (breaker tripped) Us 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 2
Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1
Power consumption in continuous operation:
2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
2
50/60 Hz 110–130 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W 2
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
50/60 Hz 480–525 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W 2
50/60 Hz 600 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
12 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
2
24 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
2
48 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
60 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W 2
125 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
250 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W 2
Maximum opening time (ms) ≤ 50 ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 46 ≤ 77
Shunt trips
2
Shunt trips (“f” releases) response voltage 2
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1
Power consumption in (short time) at: 2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac/24 Vdc 41 / 120 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 475/610 612/396
50/60 Hz 110–130 Vac/125 Vdc 572 / 121 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 100/150 1896/475
2
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac/250 Vdc 2280 / N/A ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 432/55 1896/475
2
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac 572 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 110 2156
50/60 Hz 480–525 Vac 840 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 32 289 2
50/60 Hz 600 Vac 1080 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 42 384
12 Vdc 201 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 145 — 2
48 Vdc 475 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 67 403
60 Vdc 720 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 102 666
2
Maximum load duration
2
Maximum opening time (ms) ≤ 50 <20 <20 <20 <30 <62
Note 2
1 Proper system design should size the backup fuse to the rated current going through the auxiliary switch.
2
2
2
2
2

Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 1 Contents

2 Description Page
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)
2 Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-23
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-26
2 Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-28
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
2 Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 1
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
Frame Size 1 covers a range Frame Size 1 can be used to Frame Size 1 breakers are Power Defense breakers are
2 of 15 A through 125 A with meet a wide range of circuit available in multiple ratings designed and tested to meet
fixed-fixed thermal-magnetic protection and power from 15 A through 125 A. stringent requirements for:
trip units. PD-1 is available distribution needs, including They are of a modular design
2 in 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-pole current limiting applications. with field installable
● UL
● CSA
configurations, with the PD-1 is a cable-in / cable-out accessories and terminals,
2 4-pole configuration available MCCB. which may also be factory ● IEC (CE)
with no protection on the installed. ● CB (CCC)
2 neutral pole, or fully protected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Catalog Number / Product Selection
2
Power Defense—Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)
Frame Size 1 covers a range of 15 A through 125 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. 2
It is available in configurations of single-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole.
2
Interrupting Ratings (2-, 3- and 4-Pole)
Catalog Designator C F G K M1 N 12 P 12 2
ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100 150 200 2
480 Vac 18 25 35 50 65 85 100
347/600 Vac 10 14 18 22 25 30 35
2
250 Vdc 3 10 22 22 35 35 42 42 2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
240 Vac 25 25 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 150 200 200 2
380–415 Vac 20 20 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 50 70 70 100 100
250 Vdc 3 10 10 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 35 42 42 42 42
2
Interrupting Ratings (Single-Pole) 2
C F G K M1
ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
2
120 Vac 35 — 100 — 200 2
240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100
277 Vac 18 25 35 50 65 2
347 Vac 10 14 18 22 25
125 Vdc 10 22 22 35 35
2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2
240 Vac 25 25 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100
125 Vdc 10 10 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 35 2
Notes
1 UL current limiting. 2
2 Available in 3- and 4-pole configurations only.
3 Must use 2 poles in series for 250 Vdc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Single- and Two-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G 1 3 M 0125 TFF J
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 Standards Size Options Ratings 1 Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 1 =1 1 = 1-pole C = 18 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed Thermal / N = No terminals
2 = 2-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0020 = 20 A Fixed Magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 G = 35 kA at 480 V 0025 = 25 A VFF = 50 °C Fixed K = Line only terminals
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Thermal / Fixed L = Load only terminals
0035 = 35 A Magnetic
2 M= 65 kA at 480 V
0040 = 40 A (non UL)
0045 = 45 A
2 0050
0060
= 50 A
= 60 A
0070 = 70 A
2 0080
0090
= 80 A
= 90 A
0100 = 100 A
2 0110
0125
= 110 A
= 125 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three- and Four-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 1 =1 3 = 3-pole C = 18 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed Thermal / N = No terminals
2 4 = 4-pole (100% N)
0 = 4-pole (0% N)
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0020
0025
= 20 A
= 25 A
Fixed Magnetic
VFF = 50 °C Fixed
J = Line and load terminals
K = Line only terminals
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Thermal / Fixed L = Load only terminals
2 M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
0035
0040
= 35 A
= 40 A
Magnetic
(non UL)
P = 100 kA at 480 V 0045 = 45 A
2 0050
0060
= 50 A
= 60 A
0070 = 70 A
2 0080
0090
= 80 A
= 90 A
0100 = 100 A
2 0110 = 110 A
0125 = 125 A
2
Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 2
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 1 =1 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A KNS = Molded Case N = No terminals
2 4 = 4-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V Switch J = Line and load terminals
L = Load only terminals
2
2 Notes
1 Ratings at 277 Vac for single-pole.
2 Molded case switch may open above 1250 A.
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 1
Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a 3-pole breaker.
2
For 2- and 4-pole options, replace the X3 with X2 or X4, respectively.
Example: PDG1X3T125 becomes PDG1X2T125 for two-pole. 2
Terminal Types 2
2
2
2
2
2
PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125 PDG1X3TA1256W PDG1X3TA1253W PDG1X3TS125 GCWTK
2
Note: Pictures are for reference only. 2
Terminals 2
Maximum Number of AWG Metric (mm2) Digit 14 Designation
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors
per Phase
Range per
Conductor
Range per
Conductor
3-Pole
Catalog Number
Included
Accessories
Line and
Load
Line
Only
Load
Only
Standard
on Amperes
2
Standard Terminals 2
125 Steel Al or Cu B, C 1 14-3/0 2.08–85 PDG1X3T125 — J K L 15–125
Alternate Terminals 2
125 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14-1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG1X3TA125 — T U V 15–125
Multi-wire Terminals
2
125 Aluminum Cu B, C 6 14-2 2.08–33.6 PDG1X3TA1256W Terminal shield — — G 15–125
2
125 Aluminum Cu B, C 3 14-6 2.08–13.3 PDG1X3TA1253W Terminal shield — — H 15–125
End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals 2
— — — — — — — PDG1X3TS125 — S D E 15–125
Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
2
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.
2
Control Wire Tabs
Package Catalog 2
Use Quantity Number
15–125 A 12 GCWTK 2
Note: Control wire tabs can be installed with terminals listed above.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 1 1
2 3- and 4-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
Tripping Indicating
2 Accessory Options Accessory Options
None None
2 1 Make/1 Break Alarm Switch
2 Make/2 Break Alarm Switch
2 1A/1B Auxiliary Switch
2 Qty: 1 2A/2B Auxiliary Switch

1A/1B Alarm,1A/1B Auxiliary Combination
2
2 Qty: 1
2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches
2 Alarm and auxiliary switches Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 15 denotes the type
are plug-and-play accessories with alarm and auxiliary of accessory(-ies) installed
2 designed to be field switch combinations require and the terminal types
installable. However, Eaton a complete 20-digit catalog ● Digit 16 denotes number of
2 also offers the service of field
installation in our factories.
number, adding the alarm and
auxiliary switch functionality
switches installed
● If no other accessories are
in digits 15–16 and adhering
2 to the following conditions
selected, use NNNN for
the final 4 digits of the
and tables: catalog number
2
2 Alarm and Auxiliary Switch—Field Installation Kits 2
Auxiliary Switch Catalog Number
2 Three-Pole None 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) 2NO/2NC (2 Form C)
Alarm Switch None — AUX1A1BPK AUX2A2BPK
2 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) ALM1M1BEPK AUXALRMEPK —
2 2NO/2NC (2 Form C) ALM2M2BEPK — —
2 Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Factory Installation (Digits 15–16) 2

Auxiliary Switch Breaker Catalog Number (Digit 15–16 Suffix)
2 Three-Pole None 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) 2NO/2NC (2 Form C)
Alarm Switch None NN AC A1
2 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) BC CC —
2 2NO/2NC (2 Form C) B1 — —
Notes
2 1 2-pole PD-1 breakers have an accessory pocket compatible with indicating accessory options only.
2 All options come with pigtail terminations.
2
2
2
2

2.2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 1
2
Shunt Trips Undervoltage Releases
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Breaker Catalog Number Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Breaker Catalog Number 2
Voltage Digit 17-18 Suffix Catalog Number Voltage Digit 17-18 Suffix Catalog Number
12 Vdc SH SNT012CPK 24 Vdc UG UVR024DPK 2
24 Vac/Vdc SN SNT024CPK 48 Vdc UJ UVR048DPK
48–60 Vdc — SNT4860CPK 60 Vdc UK UVR048DPK
2
110–125 Vdc — SNT125DPK 125 Vdc — UVR125DPK 2
250 Vdc — SNT250DPK 250 Vdc UM UVR250DPK
48–60 Vac — SNT4860CPK 24 Vac UF UVR024APK 2
110–240 Vac — SNT120CPK 48 Vac — UVR048APK
380–600 Vac — SNT480CPK 60 Vac — UVR048APK
2
125 Vac — UVR120APK
240 Vac UB UVR240APK
2
480 Vac — UVR480APK 2
525 Vac UD UVR600APK
600 Vac UE UVR600APK 2
2
Handle Mechanisms—Frame Size 1
2
Universal Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism
NEMA 1/12
Black Handle
NEMA 1/12
Red Handle
Description Catalog Number 2
Description Catalog Number Catalog Number Standard lockable handle with mechanism PDG1XHMDS
With interlock EHMCCBI EHMCCRI

(black and gray) NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X 2
Emergency lockable handle with mechanism PDG1XHMDE
Without interlock EHMCCB EHMCCR (red and yellow) NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X 2
Mechanism only EHMVDB
12-in (307 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS307 2
20-in (507 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS507
Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle (black and gray) PDG12XHM79S
2
Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle (red and yellow) PDG12XHM79E
2
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism
Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
2
NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4/4X
Cable Length (ft) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
2 PDG1XFS02 PDG1XFS02HP PDG1XFS02X PDG1XFS02HPX
2
2
6 PDG1XFS06 PDG1XFS06HP PDG1XFS06X PDG1XFS06HPX 2
2
Flex Shaft Handle Auxiliary Switch
2
Description Catalog Number 2
1A/1B, Early Break AUX1EBFSEG
2
2
2

Accessories—Frame Size 1 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 1

2
External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Description Fit Type Catalog Number Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
Padlockable handle lock, Snap-on Center PDG1XPLKSNAP
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp Top PDG1XPLKT
1 1.0 (25.4) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
2 2.0 (50.8) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp, OFF only Top PDG1XPLKTOFF
3 3.0 (76.2) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
Right PDG1XPLKROFF
4 4.0 (101.6) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
2 Padlockable handle block On handle PDG1XPHB
Padlockable handle block, OFF only On handle PDG1XPHBOFF
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
2 Walking beam interlock Three-pole PDG1XWBI3P
Breaker Type 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Four-pole PDG1XWBI4P
2 Slide bar interlock Field EFSBI
PDG1 125 A 0.85 (0.39) 1.57 (0.71) 2.3 (1.04) 2.84 (1.29)
2 Electrical operator 110–240 Vac/Vdc MOPEG240C

24/48 Vdc MOPEG48D
2 Plug-in adapter, breaker and base Three-pole PAD3E
Four-pole PAD4E
2 Plug-in block interlock replacement kit Field PIILEG
Wohner bus bar adapter Field top EG-BUS-T
2 Field bottom EG-BUS-B
2 Terminal covers Three-pole PDG1XTC3P

Four-pole PDG1XTC4P
2 Interphase barriers 12 units PDG1XIB12
2 DIN Rail Mounting

2 Description Catalog Number
DIN rail adapter; single-pole PDG1XDIN1P
2 Din rail adapter; two-, three- or four-pole PDG1XDIN234P
DIN rail adapter; three- or four-pole PDG1XDIN34P
2 Metal DIN rail adapter, three-pole PDG1XDINM3P
2 Base Mounting Hardware

2 Description Catalog Number
Single-pole metric 8703C80G11
2 Two-, three-, four-pole metric 8703C80G08
Single-pole English 8703C80G12
2 Two-, three-, four-pole English BMHE
2 Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or

molded case switch.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Description Page
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) 2
Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-30
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-35 2
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-41
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42 2
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A). . . V4-T2-98 2
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106 2
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 2 2
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 2
Frame Size 2 covers a range Frame Size 2 can be used Frame Size 2 breakers are Power Defense breakers are
of 15 A through 225 A with a to meet a wide range of available in multiple ratings designed and tested to meet 2
complete offering of trip units, circuit protection and power from 15 A through 225 A. stringent requirements for:
including PXR electronic trip distribution needs, including They are configured with a
units and fixed-fixed thermal- ground fault protection and trip unit from the factory.
● UL 2
● CSA
magnetic trip units. current limiting options. PXR Accessories are modular in
trip units in PD-2 provide all design to allow for field ● IEC (CE) 2
levels of protection, including installation or factory ● CB (CCC)
energy metering with configuration. PXR trip units 2
multiple communication are available with advanced
schemes, breaker health
indication, and zone selective
features to provide
customers unparalleled
2
interlocking with visual situational awareness of
indication. their electrical system.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2 Frame Size 2 covers a range of 15 A through 225 A using electronic trip units or thermal-magnetic
trip units. It is available in configurations of single-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole.
2
Interrupting Ratings (2-, 3- and 4-Pole)
2 Catalog Designator F G1 K1 M1 N1 P1
ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
2 240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
2 600 Vac 14 18 22 25 30 / 25 3 35 / 25 3
2 250 Vdc 2 10 10 10 22 22 22
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2 240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
2 440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 65
2 480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 65 40

525 Vac 18 15 / 13 3 20 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 35 / 25 3 18 / 13 3
2 660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
250 Vdc 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22
2
Interrupting Ratings (Single-Pole)
2 Catalog Designator F G1 K1 M1 N1 P1
2 ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms

277 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
2 347 Vac 14 18 22 25 30 35
125 Vdc 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2 240 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 70 85 70 100 70

125 Vdc 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 Notes
1 UL current limiting.
2 2 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using 2-poles in series.
3 First rating listed is for thermal-magnetic breakers, second rating is for breakers with PXR electronic trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers 2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Single-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated
2
PD G 2 1 M 0150 TFF J
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense 2
2
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 1 = 1-pole F = 25 kA at 277 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2
G = 35 kA at 277 V 0020 = 20 A Fixed magnetic J = Line and load terminals
K = 50 kA at 277 V
M= 65 kA at 277 V
0025
0030
= 25 A
= 30 A
VFF = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
Fixed magnetic
2
N = 85 kA at 0035 = 35 A (non UL)
277 V 1
P = 100 kA at
0040
0045
= 40 A
= 45 A
2
277 V 1 0050 = 50 A
0060
0070
= 60 A
= 70 A
2
0080 = 80 A
0090 = 90 A 2
0100 = 100 A
0110 = 110 A
0125 = 125 A 2
0150 = 150 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Two-, Three- and Four-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 2 = 2-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
3
4
= 3-pole
= 4-pole (100% N)
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0020
0025
= 20 A
= 25 A
Fixed magnetic
2
0 = 4-pole (0% N) M= 65 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Fixed magnetic L = Load only terminals
6 = 4-pole (60% N) N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V
0035
0040
= 35 A
= 40 A
(non UL) 2
0045 = 45 A
0050 = 50 A 2
0060 = 60 A
0070 = 70 A
0080 = 80 A 2
0090 = 90 A
0100 = 100 A
0110 = 110 A 2
0125 = 125 A
0150 = 150 A
0175 = 175 A 2
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
2
Note
1 N and P ratings available for 15–30 A on single-pole breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—UL/CSA Rated to 240 Vac
2
PD D 2 3 M 0225 TFF J
2
Product Series
2
2 D = UL/CSA 2 =2 2 = 2-pole F = 35 kA at 240 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole G = 65 kA at 240 V 0020 = 20 A Fixed magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 K = 85 kA at 240 V
M= 100 kA at 240 V
0025
0030
= 25 A
= 30 A
Fixed magnetic
N = 150 kA at 240 V 0035 = 35 A (non UL)
2 P = 200 kA at 240 V 0040
0045
= 40 A
= 45 A
0050 = 50 A
2 0060 = 60 A
0070 = 70 A
0080 = 80 A
2 0090 = 90 A
0100 = 100 A
0110 = 110 A
2 0125 = 125 A
0150 = 150 A
0175 = 175 A
2 0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
2
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals
2 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
M= 65 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A
0225 = 225 A
2
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release Electronic Trip Units (ETU)—Globally Rated
2 PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0060
0100
= 60 A
= 100 A
B2N = PXR 10 LSI
E## 2=PXR 20
N = No terminals
(programmable N) K = 50 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A D## 2=PXR 20D K = Line only terminals
2 M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
0225 = 225 A P## 2=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals
P = 100 kA at 480 V
2
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release Electronic Trip Units (ETU)—100% UL Rated
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI J = Line and load terminals
2 (100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A E## 2=PXR 20 W= Optional line and load
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A D## 2=PXR 20D terminals
2 M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
0225 = 225 A P## 2=PXR 25
P = 100 kA at 480 V
2
Notes
2 1 Molded case switch may open above 1800 A.
2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-33 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)
2
2
2
2

2.2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options—Frame Size 2
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
#(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options 2
—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2
PXR ETU LSI LSIG — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 10 B 2 — N — — — — — — — — 2
PXR 20 E 2 — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 — R M Z C W X — —
2
PXR 20D D 2 3 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 — — M — — W — D Y
2
2
Description of PXR Configured Options
Relays 1—Form A contacts Modbus 1—Modbus RTU CAM—CAM Link Connection Auxiliary Power 2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) directly from breaker (requires a CAM module per ● Connection included with
● 2 available if Modbus RTU ● Interface: 3 wires breaker) all PXR 20, 20D and 25 trip
2
is not used; 1 available (MODBA, MODBB, ● Interface: 5 wires (refer to units
when used in conjunction MODBG) CAM IL for details) ● Required for 2
with Modbus RTU ● No additional modules ● Communications Adapter communications, relays
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, required Modules available for and metering accuracy 2
ALM2, ALM Common) ● Available as field-installable Modbus TCP and ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
● Programmable to indicate option if not pre-configured PROFIBUS ● Interface: 2 wires 2
breaker conditions (catalog number (Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
● Available as field-installable PDG2XMODRTUREL) 2 2
option if not pre-configured
ZSI—Zone Selective
(catalog number
Interlocking
2
PDG2XRELAYS) 2
Includes ability to turn ON
●
and OFF
2
● Interface: 3 wires (Zin,
Zout, Zcomm)
2
● No additional modules
required 2
2
Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units
Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln) 2
0060 0100 0150 0225
Option Setting 60 A 100 A 150 A 225 A
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 15 A 32 A 50 A 80 A
2
2 16 A 35 A 60 A 90 A
2
3 20 A 40 A 63 A 100 A
4 25 A 50 A 70 A 110 A 2
5 30 A 60 A 80 A 125 A
6 35 A 63 A 90 A 150 A 2
7 40 A 70 A 100 A 160 A
8 45 A 80 A 110 A 175 A 2
9 50 A 90 A 125 A 200 A
10 = ln 60 A 100 A 150 A 225 A 2
PXR 20D, PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 1 A increments.
2
Notes
1 Relays and/or Modbus RTU in PD-2 uses accessory pocket, therefore UVR and shunt trip use is not possible.
2 PD-2 can only be equipped with one field-installable communication option (PDG2XMODRTUREL or PDG2XRELAYS).
2
2
2
2

2 Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a 3-pole breaker.
2 Example: PDG2X3T100 becomes PDG2X2T100 for 2-pole
2 Terminal Types
2
2 Collar
Nut
Collar Collar
Screw
Conductor
Clip Collar
2 Conductor
Washer
Conductor
Conductor
Washer Washer
Screw
Conductor
Screw Extrusion Screw Wire Clamp
2 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA225 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3TA100 PDG2X3TA226 PDG2X3TA2256W PDG2X3TA150RF PDG2X3T20 PDG2X3TS225

PDG2X3T150 PDG2X3TA150 PDG2X3TA2253W PDG2X3TA225RF
2 PDG2X3T225
Note: Pictures are for reference only.

2
Terminals
2 Maximum Number of AWG/kcmil Metric (mm2) Digit 14 Designation
Breaker Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Standard
2 Amperes Frame 1 Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only on Amperes
Standard Terminals
2 100 15–100 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3T100 2 J K L 15–100
225 60–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3TA225 J K L 110–225
2 Alternate Terminals
50 15–50 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–4 2.08–21.2 PDG2X3TA50 T U V 15–50
2 100 60–100 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3TA100 T U V 60–100
2 150 60–150 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–4/0 2.08–107 PDG2X3TA150 T U V 110–150

225 175–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 6–300 13.3–152 PDG2X3TA225K Terminal shield T U V 175–225
2 Non-standard Terminals
100 15–100 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3T100 2 W Y Z 15–100
2 150 60–150 Stainless Cu B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3T150 W Y Z 110–150
Steel
2 225 60–225 Copper Cu B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3T225 W Y Z 175–225
2 225 150–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–6 2.08–13.3 PDG2X3TA2256W Terminal shield — — G 15–225
2 225 150–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 14–2 2.08–33.6 PDG2X3TA2253W Terminal shield — — H 15–225
Rear Fed Terminals 3
2 150 60–150 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–4/0 2.08–107 PDG2X3TA150RF Terminal shield — — — 15–150
225 60–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 6–300 13.3–152 PDG2X3TA225RF Terminal shield — — — 175–225
2 Box Terminal
2 20 15–20 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–10 2.08–5.26 PDG2X3T20 — — — 15–20

Rear Connectors 3
2 225 — — — — — — — PDG2X3TA225RC R — — 15–25
End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals
2 225 — — — — — — — PDG2X3TS225 S D E 15–25
2 Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
Control Wire Tabs
Package Catalog
2 Notes
Use Qty. Number
1 The “Breaker Frame” column provides information on the ampere ratings for which the terminal may be used (field installation); 15–150 A 12 FCWTK
2 in some cases the range is limited by proper fit of the terminal onto the breaker conductor.
The column “Standard on Amperes” provides information on what terminal is used during factory configuration
175–225 A 12 FCWTK225
per Digit 14 of the breaker catalog number. The two may not match.
2 2 Factory standard terminals and non-aluminum terminals for 100 A and below are the same terminals.
3 Breaker loses UL when fitted with rear-fed terminals or rear connectors.

2.2
Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 2
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 12 2
3-Pole Circuit Breakers 4-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
Tripping Tripping
2
Accessory Alarm (2 Spaces) Aux (2 Spaces) Accessory Alarm (2 Spaces) Aux (4 Spaces)
Options Options Options Options Options Options 2
None None None None None None
Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space)
2
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space)
2
1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2
UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
2CO (4 spaces) 2
4NO (4 spaces)
4NC (4 spaces)
2
2
Electronic Circuit Breakers 2
2
2
Tripping Tripping 2
Accessory Alarm Aux Accessory Alarm Aux (2 Spaces)
Options Options Options Options Options Options
2
None None 1NO/1NC 3 None None 1NO/1NC 3
Shunt Trip Shunt Trip 1NO/1NC 3 + 1NO (1 space) 2
1NO/1NC 3 + 1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC 3 + 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
2
1NO/1NC 3 + 2NO (2 spaces)
2
UVR UVR 1NO/1NC 3 + 2NC (2 spaces)
2
2
Bell alarm Bell alarm
(1NO/1NC–Form C) (1NO/1NC–Form C) 2
Qty: 1 Programmable relay Qty: 1 Programmable relay
with Modbus RTU with Modbus RTU 2
Qty: 2 Programmable relays Qty: 2 Programmable relays
Notes
2
1 2-pole PD-2 breakers have an accessory pocket compatible with indicating accessory options only.
2 Single-pole PD-2 breakers may be equipped with a Form C bell alarm as a factory installation only. Use “BC” as a suffix code in digits 15–16. 2
3 Qty: 1 1NO/1NC (Form C) auxiliary contact is automatically factory installed for all Frame 2 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units.
2
2
2
2

Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Blocks—Frame Size 2

2 Power Defense breakers Power Defense breakers Power Defense alarm and Frame 2 breakers with
have designated positions for have secondary covers for auxiliary switches are electronic trip units are
2 alarm and auxiliary switches ease of field installation of available in contact blocks, in automatically configured with
in the right-pole accessory accessories, including alarm Form A (NO), Form B (NC) a factory-installed Form C
2 cavity. For Frame 2, the two and auxiliary switches. and Form C (NO-NC) types. auxiliary contact block
left-most positions are used Form A and Form B contacts because the right-pole
for alarm switches, and the take one position in the accessory cavity is not
2 two right-most locations are breaker accessory cavity, and available for field
used for auxiliary switches. Form C contacts take two modification. Trip position can
2 positions in the cavity. also be communicated via
Identical contact blocks are communications and the PXR
2 used for the alarm and programmable relays.
auxiliary switch functions.
2
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC
2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB
Type Form A / NO Form B / NC For NO-NC, use two separate
2 contact blocks
2
Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC
Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
2 Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC

2
2 Alarm Switch for Use with PXR Electronic Trip Units 1
Catalog Number PDG2XALMBC PDG2XALMEC
2 Type Form C / NO-NC Form C / NO-NC
2 Termination 0.75 m pigtail 3.0 m pigtail
Note
2 1 Frame 2 breakers with electronic trip units do not allow access to the right accessory pocket
but are automatically configured with a factory installed Form C / NO-NC auxiliary switch.
These alarm switches can be field or factory installed in the left accessory pocket in place of a shunt trip or UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 2
Alarm and auxiliary switches ● Switches may be ● If no other accessories are Note: Though factory 2
are plug-and-play accessories requested for alarm only, selected, use NNNN for configuration options are limited,
designed to be field auxiliary only or a the final 4 digits of the combinations of auxiliary
switches and alarms using
2
installable. However, Eaton combination of the two catalog number
differing terminals and contact
also offers installation service ● Digit 16 denotes the ● Frame 2 breakers with block styles are still available 2
in our factories. number and type (NO, NC) electronic trip units do not through field installation. Please
Breaker catalog numbers of switches installed allow access to the right
accessory pocket but are
see full auxiliary switch and alarm
catalog numbers to order.
2
with alarm and auxiliary ● For Eaton factory
switch combinations require automatically configured
a complete 20-digit catalog
installation, the same type
of terminals (i.e. all pigtail with a factory installed
2
number, adding the alarm and 0.75 m, all screw, etc.) and 1NO/1NC auxiliary switch.
auxiliary switch functionality same style of contact block A bell alarm accessory is 2
in digits 15–16 and adhering (i.e., all 1NO/1NC, all 2NC, available for separate
to the following conditions etc.) must be used in a installation in the left 2
and tables: factory configuration accessory pocket.
● Digit 15 denotes the type 2
of accessory(-ies) installed
and the terminal types 2
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3 2
1NO BA CA — — — — — — —
1NC BB — CB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC 1 BC — — CC — — C1 — —
2NO BD — — — CD — — C2 — 2
2NC BE — — — — CE — — C3
2
Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3 2
1NO YA ZA — — — — — — —
1NC YB — ZB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — —
2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 — 2
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3
2
Push-In Clamps (U, V, W)
2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN UA UB UC UD UE U1 U2 U3
2
1NO VA WA — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — —
2NO VD — — — WD — — W2 — 2
2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3
Note
2
1 Single-pole breakers can be equipped with a 1NO/1NC alarm switch that must be factory installed; use suffix BC in digits 15–16.
No other internal accessories are available for single-pole breakers. 2

2
2

Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)

2 Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN DA DB DC DD DE D1 D2 D3
2 1NO EA FA — — — — — — —
1NC EB — FB — — — — — —
2 1NO/1NC EC — — FC — — F1 — —
2 2NO ED — — — FD — — F2 —
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3
2
2 Factory Installation of Alarm Switch for Use with PXR Electronic Trip Units
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m
2 Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Three-Pole
2 None 1NO/1NC None 1NO/1NC
Auxiliary switch None NN 1 AC 1 Alarm switch None NN 1 DC
2 1NO/1NC — CC 1NO/1NC — FC
2
2 Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only.
2 Power Defense breaker have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.
2 Shunt Trips
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2 12 Vdc PDG2XST12DCT PDG2XST12DCS PDG2XST12DCR
48 Vdc PDG2XST48DCT PDG2XST48DCS PDG2XST48DCR
2
2 24 Vac/Vdc PDG2XST24ACDCT PDG2XST24ACDCS PDG2XST24ACDCR

110-130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG2XST130ACDCT PDG2XST130ACDCS PDG2XST130ACDCR
2 200-240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG2XST250ACDCT PDG2XST250ACDCS PDG2XST250ACDCR
380-440 Vac PDG2XST440ACT PDG2XST440ACS PDG2XST440ACR
2 480-525 Vac PDG2XST525ACT PDG2XST525ACS PDG2XST525ACR
2 600 Vac PDG2XST600ACT PDG2XST600ACS PDG2XST600ACR
2 Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)

2 12 Vdc PDG2XUV12DCV PDG2XUV12DCU PDG2XUV12DCW
24 Vdc PDG2XUV24DCV PDG2XUV24DCU PDG2XUV24DCW

24 Vac PDG2XUV24ACV PDG2XUV24ACU PDG2XUV24ACW
2 130 Vac PDG2XUV130ACV PDG2XUV130ACU PDG2XUV130ACW

2 Note
1 1NO/1NC (AC) is always included in breakers with PXR trip units;
2 no selection or selection of NN in Digits 15–16 will result in AC.

2.2
Factory Installed Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 2
Shunt trips and under voltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● Each breaker has space for 2
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and one shunt trip or UVR
play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type tripping accessory only 2
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding ● Digit 18 denotes the
Eaton also offers the service the tripping accessory voltage of the accessory 2
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and ● If no accessories are
18 and adhering to the
following conditions and
selected, use NNNN for
the final 4 digits of the
2
tables. catalog number
2
Shunt Trips
2
12 Vdc TH SH RH 2
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
60 Vdc TK SK RK 2
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP
2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR
2
380–440 Vac TC SC RC
480–525 Vac TD SD RD 2
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs) 2
12 Vdc VH UH WH
2
24 Vdc VG UG WG 2
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
60 Vdc VK UK WK 2
125 Vdc VL UL WL
250 Vdc VM UM WM
2
24 Vac VF UF WF
130 Vac VA UA WA
2
240 Vac VB UB WB 2
440 Vac VC UC WC
525 Vac VD UD WD 2
600 Vac VE UE WE
2
Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle PDG2XHMCS HA
Standard handle with door interlock PDG2XHMCSN HB
2 Standard handle with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCSP HC
2 Standard handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCSNP HE

Emergency lockable handle PDG2XHMCE H1
2 Emergency handle with door interlock PDG2XHMCEN H2
Emergency handle with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCEP H3
2 Emergency handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCENP H5
2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X Factory Installed
2 Standard lockable handle PDG2XHMDS DA
Standard handle with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMDSP DC
2 Emergency lockable handle PDG2XHMDE D1
Emergency handle with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMDEP D3
2 12 in (307 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS307 —

Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79S —
2 Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79E —
2 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism

2 Metal Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12
High Performance Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12
Metal Handle,
NEMA 4/4X
NEMA 4/4X
Cable Length (ft) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 2 PDG2XFS02 PDG2XFS02HP PDG2XFS02X PDG2XFS02HPX

Note
2 1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Accessories—Frame Size 2 Base Mounting Hardware
Description Catalog Number
2
External Accessories
Factory
Single-pole metric 4218B80G09
2
Installed Two-pole metric 4218B80G11
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20
Three-, four-pole metric BMH1M 2
Padlockable hasp Top PDG2XPLKT L4
Single-pole English 624B375G01
Left side PDG2XPLKL L5
Two-pole English 4218B80G01 2
Right side PDG2XPLKR L6
Three-, four-pole English BMH1
Snap on PDG2XPLKSNAP L0 2
Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
Padlockable hasp OFF only Top PDG2XPLKTOFF L1
Left side PDG2XPLKLOFF L2
molded case switch. 2
Right side PDG2XPLKROFF L3
Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 2
2
Padlockable handle block On handle PDG2XPHB —
Kirk lock provision 1 Top PDG2XKLKPTFF L7 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Walking beam interlock Two-, three-, and PDG2XWBI234P — Number
23 four-pole of Poles Width Height Depth 2
Electrical operator 24 Vdc PDG2XROP24DC RG 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
48–60 Vdc PDG2XROP60DC RJ or RK 2 2.75 (69.9) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
2
125 Vdc PDG2XROP125DC RL
250 Vdc PDG2XROP250DC RM
3 4.12 (104.6) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
2
4 5.49 (139.5) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
110–130 Vac PDG2XROP130AC RA 2
200–240 Vac PDG2XROP240AC RB Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
380–440 Vac PDG2XROP440AC RC Breaker Type 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 2
Plug-in breaker base only Three-pole PDG2XPIBB3P225A — PDG2 225 A 2.00 (0.91) 3.00 (1.36) 4.21 (1.82) 5.69 (2.46)
Four-pole PDG2XPIBB4P225A —
Notes
2
Plug-in breaker parts kit Three-pole PDG2XPIBK3P225A — 1 Provision only. For use with Type FF Kirk keylock (sold separately).
Four-pole PDG2XPIBK4P225A —
2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant 2
(factory suffix WB).
Terminal covers Two-pole PDG2XTC2P — 3 Requires two breakers. 2
Three-pole PDG2XTC3P —
Four-pole PDG2XTC4P — 2
Interphase barriers Single-pole PDG2XIB —
Three-pole PDG2XIB3P —
2
Four-pole PDG2XIB4P —
2
Finger protection Three-pole PDG2XFP3P —
Four-pole PDG2XFP4P — 2
60A–100 A residual current Cable type PDG2XNCTD0100 —
neutral sensor 2
150A–225 A residual Cable type PDG2XNCTD0225 —
current neutral sensor 2
60A–100 A residual current Bus bar type PDG2XNCTB0100 —
neutral sensor
2
150A–225 A residual Bus bar type PDG2XNCTB0225 —
current neutral sensor
Service entrance Three-pole PRLSEBPD2 —
2
barrier kit
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 Description Page
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-50
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2
2 of 45 A through 600 A with a meet a wide range of circuit modular and available as designed and tested to meet
complete offering of trip protection and power complete breakers from the stringent requirements for:
units, including PXR distribution needs, including factory, or as modular
2 electronic trip units and fixed- ground fault protection, components, including
● UL
● CSA
adjustable thermal-magnetic current limiting, 100% UL frames, trip units,
2 trip units. PD-3 is available in ratings, and high accessories and terminals to ● IEC (CE)
two versions, with 400 A and instantaneous settings for provide flexibility for ● CB (CCC)
2 600 A constructions to selective coordination. PXR customers. PXR trip units are
optimize performance in trip units in PD-3 provide all available with advanced
2 multiple applications. levels of protection, including
energy metering with
features to provide
multiple communication situational awareness of their
2 schemes, breaker health electrical system.
indication, and arc flash
2 reduction options.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
Frame Size 3 covers a range of 45 A through 600 A using electronic trip units, and 100 A through 2
600 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. It is available in configurations of 2-pole, 3-pole and
4-pole, with the 2-pole being in the same physical size of a 3-pole variant. Frame 3 has two unique 2
constructions: one for 400 A and a second one for 600 A. The 600 A construction provides a unique
capability to be used at 400 A and below in critical coordination applications where a high level fixed 2
instantaneous is required. This is accomplished by using a letter H in the 7th digit of the catalog
number, as shown below.
2
Catalog Designator F G K M1 N1 P1 2
2
240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100 2
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65
125/250 Vdc 2 22 22 22 42 42 42 2
240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
2
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
2
440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50
480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40 2
525 Vac 18 5 20 7.5 25 10 30 15 35 25 40 25
660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 15 7.5 20 10 20 10 2
125/250 Vdc 2 22 10 / 22 3 22 10 / 22 3 22 10 / 22 3 42 22 / 42 3 42 22 / 42 3 42 22 / 42 3
2
Notes
1 UL current limiting.
2 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using two poles in series.
2
3 First rating listed is for 400 A frame, second rating is for 600 A frame.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

2
Molded Case Circuit Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated
2
PD G 3 3 M 0400 TFA J
2
Product Series
2
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 25 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A 2 TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A 2 Adjustable magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 4
0
= 4-pole (100% N)
= 4-pole (0% N)
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V
0150 = 150 A
0175 = 175 A
VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
Adjustable magnetic
6 = 4-pole (60% N) N = 85 kA at 480 V 0200 = 200 A (non UL)
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V 0225 = 225 A
0250 = 250 A
H250 = 250 A 3
2 0300 = 300 A
H300 = 300 A 3
0350 = 350 A
2 H350 = 350 A 3
0400 = 400 A
H400 = 400 A 3
2 0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A 3 TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2 (100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole (100% N) G = 35 kA at 480 V H300 = 300 A 3 Adjustable magnetic J = Line and load terminals
0 = 4-pole (0% N) K = 50 kA at 480 V H350 = 350 A 3 K = Line only terminals
6 = 4-pole (60% N) M= 65 kA at 480 V H400 = 400 A 3 L = Load only terminals
2 0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—UL/CSA Rated to 240 Vac
2
PD D = UL/CSA 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 35 kA at 240 V 0100 = 100 A TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2 3 = 3-pole G = 65 kA at 240 V
K = 85 kA at 240 V
0125
0150
= 125 A
= 150 A
Adjustable magnetic
VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
M= 100 kA at 240 V 0175 = 175 A Adjustable magnetic L = Load only terminals
2 N = 150 kA at 240 V
P = 200 kA at 240 V
0200
0225
= 200 A
= 225 A
(non UL)
0250 = 250 A
2 0300 = 300 A
0350 = 350 A
0400 = 400 A
2 0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2
Molded Case Switches 4—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A KNS = Molded case switch N = No terminals
2 4 = 4-pole (100% N) M= 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A J = Line and load terminals
2
2 Notes
1 All PD-3 2-pole breakers are physically the same size as a 3-pole frame with the outer poles used for electrical connections.
2 2 Not available in 4-pole 60% neutral protection.

3 High override (600 A frame).
4 Molded case switches may open above 4000 A for the 400 A frame, and above 6300 A for the 600 A frame.
2
2

2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2
PD G 3 3 M 0400 P2M J
2
Product Series
2
Standards
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Size
3 =3
Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options 2
2 = 2-pole 1 F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0250 = 250 A E## 2=PXR 20 J = Line and load terminals
4 = 4-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A D## 2=PXR 20D K = Line only terminals 2
(programmable N) M= 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A P## 2=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals
N = 85 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A High Override
P = 100 kA at 480 V (600 A Frame) 2
H400 = 400 A High Override
(600 A Frame)
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated) 2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
(100% UL Rated)
3 =3 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0125
0250
= 125 A
= 250 A
B2N = PXR 10 LSI
E## 2=PXR 20
N = No terminals
2
(programmable N) K = 50 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A D## 2=PXR 20D K = Line only terminals
M= 65 kA at 480 V 0600
H250
= 600 A
= 250 A High Override
P## 2=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals 2
(600 A Frame)
(600 A Frame)
2
2
Globally Rated Frame Only
PD-3 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip
2
units, terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device
is marked with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous current rating; each trip unit is also 2
marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not exceed that of the frame.
Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device. 2
Frame Only—Globally Rated
2
PD G 3 3 M 0400 FNN N
2
Product Series
2
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 25 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A FNN = Frame only N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0600 = 600 A
2
M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated) 2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A FNN = Frame only N = No terminals 2
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V 2
Notes 2
1 All PD-3 2-pole breakers are physically the same size as a 3-pole frame with the outer poles used for electrical connections.
2 See PXR Trip Unit Options table on Page V4-T2-47 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2) 2

Trip Units
2 PD-3 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units,
terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. The 400 A frame must use trip units
2 of ratings 0100–0400, while the 600 A frame must use trip units of ratings 0500, 0600 or designated
by H, such as H250. Additionally, for 2-pole breakers using electronic trip units, 3-pole trip units are
2 used. PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 100% rating for
PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.
2 Trip Units Only
2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units
2 PD G 3 X TFA 3 0600
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous
Standards Size Digit Type Options Options Current Ratings
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 X = Accessory TFA = Fixed Thermal /
Adjustable Magnetic
2
3
= 2-pole
= 3-pole
0100
0125
= 100 A 1
= 125 A 1
VFA = 50 °C Fixed Thermal / 4 = 4-pole (100% N) 0150 = 150 A
2 Adjustable Magnetic
(non UL)
0
6
= 4-pole (0% N)
= 4-pole (60% N)
0175
0200
= 175 A
= 200 A
0225 = 225 A
2 0250 = 250 A
0300 = 300 A
0350 = 350 A
2 0400 = 400 A
0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2 H250 = 250 A High Override
(600 A Frame)
(600 A Frame)
2 H400
(600 A Frame)
(600 A Frame)
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units
2
2
PD G 3 X PXR 3 0600 E2N
2
Product Series
2 Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit

Standards Size Digit Type Designator Options Current Ratings Type and Options
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release 3 = 3-pole 0125 = 125 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI
Trip Unit 4 = 4-pole 0250 = 250 A E## 2=PXR 20
(programmable N) 0400 = 400 A D## 2=PXR 20D
2 0600 = 600 A P## 2=PXR 25
2 H400
(for use in 600 A Frame)
(for use in 600 A Frame)
2 Notes
1 Not available in 4-pole 60% neutral protection.
2 2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-47 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)
2
2

2.2
2
LSI with LSIG with

—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2
PXR 10 B 2 — — — N — — — — — — — — 2
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
2
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
2
Descriptions of PXR Configured Options
Relays—2 Form A contacts ZSI—Zone Selective ARMS—Arcflash Reduction Auxiliary Power

2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, or
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, ● Interface: 3 wires Maintenance Mode
● Connection included with
all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2
ALM2, ALM Common) (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units
● Programmable to indicate ● Includes ability to turn Protection Type 4 or 5 ● Required for
2
breaker conditions ON and OFF, and communications, relays,
indicate signals
● Interface: Switch and LED
and metering accuracy 2
Modbus—Modbus RTU on face of trip unit (self-
powered) and two wires
directly from breaker CAM—CAM Link connection
(requires a CAM module per for remote switch enable
● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A 2
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA, ● Interface: 2 wires
breaker) option (24 Vdc required)
MODBB, MODBG) Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V) 2
● No additional modules ● Interface: 5 wires (refer to ● A programmable relay will
CAM IL for details)
required
● Communications Adapter
be factory defaulted to
remote indication of ARMS
2
Modules available for
Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS 2
2
0125 0250/H250 0400/H400 0600
Option Setting 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 45 A 90 A 160 A 250 A
2
2 50 A 100 A 175 A 275 A
2
3 60 A 110 A 200 A 300 A
4 63 A 125 A 225 A 320 A 2
5 70 A 150 A 250 A 350 A
6 80 A 160 A 275 A 400 A 2
7 90 A 175 A 300 A 450 A
8 100 A 200 A 320 A 500 A 2
9 110 A 225 A 350 A 550 A
10 = ln 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2 Example: PDG3X3TA300 becomes PDG3X2TA300 for two-pole.
2 Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3TA630 PDG3X3TA4003W PDG3X3TA400RF
2 PDG3X3TA350 PDG3X3TA400SW PDG3X3T402 PDG3X3T400H PDG3X3T630 PDG3X3TA4006W PDG3X3TA400HRF
PDG3X3T300 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA401H PDG3X3TA630SW PDG3X3TA6006W PDG3X3TA630RF
PDG3X3T350 PDG3X3TA400CW PDG3X3T401H PDG3X3TA630CW PDG3X3TA6006WSW
2 PDG3X3TA350SW PDG3X3T400CW PDG3X3TA401HCW PDG3X3T630CW
PDG3X3TA401CW PDG3X3T401HCW
2 PDG3X3TA401

2
Terminals
2 Digit 14 Designation Factory
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2) Config.
2 Breaker Breaker
Amperes Frame
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors Range per
per Phase Conductor
Range per
Conductor
3-Pole
Catalog Number
Included
Accessories
Line and
Load
Line
Only
Load
Only
Ampere
Range
2 Standard Terminals
300 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–350 26.7–177 PDG3X3TA300 — J K L 100–225
2 350 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA350 — J K L 250–350
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400 Terminal shield J K L 400
2 400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3TA401H Terminal shield J K L H250–H400
630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630 Terminal shield J K L 450–600
2 Optional Aluminum Terminals
2 400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3TA402 Terminal shield T U V 100–400
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2/0–250 (2) and 67.4–127 (2) and PDG3X3TA401 Terminal shield — — — —
2 2/0–500 (1) 67.4–253 (1)
400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–500 26.7–253 PDG3X3TA400H — T U V H250–H400
2 Optional Copper Terminals
300 400 Copper Cu B, C 1 3–350 26.7–177 PDG3X3T300 — W Y Z 100–225
2 350 400 Copper Cu B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3T350 — W Y Z 250–350
400 400 Copper Cu B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3T400 Terminal shield W Y Z 400
2 400 400 Copper Cu/Al B, C 1 Al: 500–750 — PDG3X3T402 Terminal shield — — — —
Cu: 500 Only
2 400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 3–500 26.7–253 PDG3X3T400H — — — — —
2 400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3T401H Terminal shield W Y Z H250–H400

630 600 Copper Cu B, C 2 2–500 33.6 –253 PDG3X3T630 Terminal shield W Y Z 450–600
2 StrandAble Terminals
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400SW — A B C 100–400
2 D, G, H, 3/0–4/0 85–107
I, K, M
2 350 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA350SW — — — — —
D, G, H, 250–350 127–177
2 I, K, M
630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630SW — A B C H250–600
2 D, G, H, 2–350 33.6–177
I, K, M
2

2.2
Terminals, continued
2
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)
Digit 14 Designation Factory
Config.
2
Breaker Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Ampere
Amperes Frame Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only Range 2
Control Wire Aluminum Terminals
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400CW Terminal shield 1 2 3 100–400
2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2/0–250 (2) or 67.4–127 (2) or PDG3X3TA401CW Terminal shield 4 5 6 100–400
2/0–500 (1) 67.4–253 (1) 2
400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3TA401HCW Terminal shield 1 2 3 H250–H400
630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630CW Terminal shield 1 2 3 450–600
2
Control Wire Copper Terminals 2
400 400 Copper Cu B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3T400CW Terminal shield 7 8 9 100–400
400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3T401HCW Terminal shield 7 8 9 H250–H400 2
630 600 Copper Cu B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3T630CW Terminal shield 7 8 9 450–600
2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 12–2/0 3.31–67.4 PDG3X3TA4003W Terminal shield — — H 100–400
2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–3 2.08–26.7 PDG3X3TA4006W Terminal shield — — G 100–400
600 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG3X3TA6006W Terminal shield — — G H250–600 2
StrandAble Multi-wire Terminals
600 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 12–2/0 — PDG3X3TA6006WSW Terminal shield — — — — 2
D, G, H, 8–1/0
I, K, M 2
Rear-fed Terminals
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA400RF 1 Interphase — — — —
2
barriers
400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA400HRF 1 Interphase — — — — 2
barriers
630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630RF 1 Interphase — — — — 2
barriers
Rear Connectors 2
400 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TA400RC — R — — 100–400
630 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TA630RC — R — — 250–600
2
End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals
2
400 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TS400 — S D E 100–400
600 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TS600 — S D E 250–600 2
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes. 2
Control Wire Tabs 2
Package Catalog
Use Qty. Number 2
100–400 A 12 KCWTK
Note
2
1 Terminals not UL Listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Accessories
2
2
2
2
2
2
Tripping Alarm Options Aux Options Tripping Alarm Options Aux Options
2 Accessory Options (2 Spaces) 1 (2 Spaces) Accessory Options (2 Spaces) 1 (4 Spaces) 2
Shunt Trip None None Shunt Trip None None
2 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space)
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space)
2 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
UVR 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) UVR 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces)
2
2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
2 2NO/2NC (4 spaces)
4NO (4 spaces)
2 4NC (4 spaces)
2 Notes
1 Frame 3 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units AND communication only have
access to one alarm space. Breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units or electronic trip units
2 without communication have access to two alarm spaces.
2 Neutral pole includes two additional auxiliary spaces.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Power Defense breakers Power Defense alarm and 2
have designated positions for auxiliary switches are
alarm and auxiliary switches available in contact blocks, in 2
in the right pole accessory Form A (NO), Form B (NC),
cavity. For Frame 3, the two and Form C (NO-NC) types. 2
left-most positions are used Form A and Form B contacts
for alarm switches, and the take one position in the
two right-most locations are breaker accessory cavity, and
2
used for auxiliary switches. Form C contacts take two
positions in the cavity. 2
Power Defense breakers Identical contact blocks are
have secondary covers for
ease of field installation of
used for the alarm and 2
accessories, including alarm
and auxiliary switches. Electronic breakers with 2
communications options
(Modbus RTU or CAM Link) 2
lose one alarm switch
position, but are also able to 2
provide trip position via
communications and the PXR
programmable relays.
2
2
Contact Blocks
2
Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC 2
2
Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2
Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB
2
contact blocks
2
Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2
Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC 2
2
Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality 2
Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 Alarm and auxiliary switches auxiliary switch functionality ● For Eaton factory ● If no other accessories are
are plug-and-play accessories in digits 15–16 and adhering installation, the same type selected, use NNNN for
2 designed to be field to the following conditions of terminals (i.e., all pigtail the final 4 digits of the
installable. However, Eaton and tables: 0.75 m, all screw, etc.) catalog number
2 also offers installation service
● Digit 15 denotes the type
must be used. If a ● Electronic breakers with
in our factories. combination of alarm and communications lose one
of accessory(-ies) installed auxiliary switches is
2 Breaker catalog numbers and the terminal types selected, they must be the
alarm switch position in
with alarm and auxiliary order to provide trip status
● Switches may be same type (i.e., all 1NC, all via communications. They
2 switch combinations require requested for alarm only, 1NO/1NC, etc.) do not lose an auxiliary
a complete 20-digit catalog auxiliary only or a ● Digit 16 denotes number position for this purpose.
2 number, adding the alarm and combination of the two and type (NO, NC) of
switches installed
2
2 Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C)
Auxiliary Switch
2 Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3
1NO BA CA — — — — — — —
2 1NC BB — CB — — — — — —
2 1NO/1NC
2NO
BC
BD
—
—
—
—
CC
—
—
CD
—
—
C1
—
—
C2
—
—
2 2NC BE — — — — CE — — C3
2 Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z)

Auxiliary Switch
2 Three-Pole
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2 Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3

1NO YA ZA — — — — — — —
2 1NC YB — ZB — — — — — —
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — —
2 2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 —
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3
2
2 Auxiliary Switch
2 None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN UA UB UC UD UE U1 U2 U3
2 1NO VA WA — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — —
2 1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — —
2NO VD — — — WD — — W2 —
2 2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)
2
Auxiliary Switch
2
Alarm Switch None NN DA DB DC DD DE D1 D2 D3
2
1NO EA FA — — — — — — —
2
1NC EB — FB — — — — — —
1NO/1NC EC — — FC — — F1 — — 2
2NO ED — — — FD — — F2 —
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3 2
For PXR Trip Units with Communication 1 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3
2
1NO BA CA — CF CG — CP CQ —
1NC BB — CB CH — CI CR — CS 2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 3 2
Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only. 2
Power Defense breakers have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.
2
Shunt Trips
2
12 Vdc PDG3XST12DCT PDG3XST12DCS PDG3XST12DCR 2
60 Vdc PDG3XST60DCT PDG3XST60DCS PDG3XST60DCR 2
24 Vac/Vdc PDG3XST24ACDCT PDG3XST24ACDCS PDG3XST24ACDCR
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG3XST130ACDCT PDG3XST130ACDCS PDG3XST130ACDCR
2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG3XST250ACDCT PDG3XST250ACDCS PDG3XST250ACDCR
380–440 Vac PDG3XST440ACT PDG3XST440ACS PDG3XST440ACR
2
480–525 Vac PDG3XST525ACT PDG3XST525ACS PDG3XST525ACR 2
600 Vac PDG3XST600ACT PDG3XST600ACS PDG3XST600ACR
2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) 2
2
48 Vdc PDG3XUV48DCV PDG3XUV48DCU PDG3XUV48DCW 2
125 Vdc PDG3XUV125DCV PDG3XUV125DCU PDG3XUV125DCW 2
2
2
440 Vac PDG3XUV440ACV PDG3XUV440ACU PDG3XUV440ACW 2
600 Vac PDG3XUV600ACV PDG3XUV600ACU PDG3XUV600ACW 2
Note: Use PDG3XUV18DCW when using Time Delay UVR.
2
Note
1 All options shown have 29 in/0.75 m pigtail termination. For alternate termination options, contact the product line. 2


2 Shunt trips and undervoltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● If no additional accessories
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and are selected, use NN for
2 play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type digits 15-16 and 19-20 of
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding the ● Digit 18 denotes the the catalog number
2 Eaton also offers the service tripping accessory voltage of the accessory ● Each breaker has space for
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and one shunt trip or UVR
2 following conditions and
tripping accessory only
tables.
2
Shunt Trips
2 Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2 12 Vdc TH SH RH
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
2 60 Vdc TK SK RK
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
2 110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP
2 200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR

2 480–525 Vac TD SD RD
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
2 12 Vdc VH UH WH
2 24 Vdc VG UG WG
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
2 60 Vdc VK UK WK
125 Vdc VL UL WL
2 250 Vdc VM UM WM
24 Vac VF UF WF
2 130 Vac VA UA WA
2 240 Vac VB UB WB
440 Vac VC UC WC
2 525 Vac VD UD WD
600 Vac VE UE WE
2 Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed 2
Standard lockable handle PDG3XHMCS HA 2
Standard handle with mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCSP HC 2
Standard handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCSNP HE
2
Emergency handle with door interlock PDG3XHMCEN H2 2
Emergency handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCENP H5 2
2
Description
NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Catalog Number
Factory Installed
Digits 19–20
2
Standard lockable handle PDG3XHMDS DA 2
Emergency lockable handle PDG3XHMDE D1 2
9 in (245 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG34XHMS245 —
2
17 in (445 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG34XHMS445 —
2
Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG34XHM79E — 2
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism 2
Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4/4X 2
2
2
2
Note
1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Factory
Installed
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20 2 5.47 (138.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)
2 Padlockable hasp Top PDG3XPLKT L4 3 5.47 (138.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)
4 7.22 (182.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)
2 Padlockable hasp,
OFF only
Top PDG3XPLKTOFF L1
Padlockable handle On handle PDG3XPHB — Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)

2 block
Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Kirk lock provision— Left side PDG3XKLKPSF L8
2 left side, Type F 1 PDG3 400 A 8.05 (3.65) 11.02 (5.0) 13.77 (6.25)
Kirk lock provision— Right side L9 PDG3 600 A 10.43 (4.73) 12.36 (5.61) 16.27 (7.39)
2 right side, Type F 1
Notes
Kirk lock provision— Left/right side PDG3XKLKPSFF —
1 Provision only. Kirk keylock sold separately.
2 left/right side, Type FF 1
2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant (factory
Walking beam 400 A frame, two-, PDG3XWBI234P — suffix WB in digits 19-20).
interlock 23
2 three- and four-pole
600 A frame, two- and PDG3XWBI23P —
3 Requires two breakers.
4 PDG3 with 0400 or below rating ship from the factory with the 400 A frame terminal cover,
three-pole but can be fitted with either in the field. 600 A frames, including H250, H400, etc ship with
2 600 A frame, four-pole PDG3XWBI4P — the standard terminal cover.
2 Electrical operator 24 Vdc PDG3XROP24DC RG

48–60 Vdc PDG3XROP60DC RJ or RK
2 125 Vdc PDG3XROP125DC RL
2 110–130 Vac PDG3XROP130AC RA
200–240 Vac PDG3XROP240AC RB
2 380–440 Vac PDG3XROP440AC RC
Plug-in breaker Three-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBB3P400A —
2 base only
Three-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBB3P600A —
2 Four-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBB4P400A

Four-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBB4P600A
2 Plug-in breaker
parts kit
Three-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBK3P400A —
Three-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBK3P600A —
2 Four-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBK4P400A
Four-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBK4P600A
2 Terminal covers 4 Three-pole (400 A frame) PDG3XTC3P0400 —
Three-pole PDG3XTC3P —
2 Four-pole PDG3XTC4P —
2 Interphase barriers Single-pole PDG3XIB —

2 Four-pole PDG3XIB4P —
Finger protection Three-pole PDG3XFP3P —
2 Four-pole PDG3XFP4P —
Neutral CTs for Bus bar type PDG3XNCTB0600 —
2 ground fault (PXR)
2 barrier kit

2 Two-, three-, four-pole metric (400 A) BMH3M
Two-, three-, four-pole English (400 A) BMH3
2 Two-, three-, four-pole metric (600 A) 66A4560G03
2 Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or

molded case switch.
2

2.2
Description Page
2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29 2
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-63 2
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2
2
of 300 A through 800 A with meet a wide range of circuit modular and available as designed and tested to meet 2
a complete offering of trip protection and power complete breakers from the stringent requirements for:
units, including PXR distribution needs, including factory or as modular
electronic trip units and fixed- ground fault protection and components, including
● UL 2
● CSA
adjustable thermal-magnetic 100% UL ratings. PXR trip frames, trip units,
trip units. PD-4 is available in units in PD-4 provide all levels accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE) 2
a single 800 A frame. of protection, including to provide flexibility for ● CB (CCC)
energy metering with customers. PXR trip units 2
indication and arc flash
features to provide
2
reduction options. situational awareness of
their electrical system.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2 Frame Size 4 covers a range of 320 A through 800 A using electronic trip units, and 300 A through
800 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. It is available in configurations of 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole,
2 with the 2-pole being in the same physical size of a 3-pole variant.
2
G K M
2 ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 65 85 100
2 480 Vac 35 50 65
600 Vac 18 25 35
2 125/250 Vdc 1 22 22 25
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs

240 Vac 55 55 85 85 100 100
2 380–415 Vac 36 36 50 50 70 53
440 Vac 30 22.5 35 35 50 40
2 480 Vac 25 20 35 22.5 50 30
2 525 Vac 20 16.5 25 20 30 25

660–690 Vac 8 4 10 5 15 7.5
2 125/250 Vdc 1 22 22 22 22 25 25
2 Power Defense—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)

This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
2 for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated
2
2 PD G 4 3 M 0800 TFA J
Product Series
2
2 Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0300 = 300 A 2 TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V Adjustable magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 4 = 4-pole (100% N) M= 65 kA at 480 V
0350
0400
= 350 A 2
= 400 A 2 VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal / K = Line only terminals
0 = 4-pole (0% N) 0450 = 450 A 2 Adjustable magnetic L = Load only terminals
2 6 = 4-pole (60% N) 0500
0600
= 500 A
= 600 A
(non UL)
0700 = 700 A
2 0800 = 800 A
2 Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 3

2 PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V J = Line and load terminals
2 4 = 4-pole K = Line only terminals
2 Notes
1 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using 2 poles in series.
2 2 Not available in 4-pole 60% neutral protection.
3 Molded case switch may open above 6000 A.
2
2
2

2.2
2
2
PD G 4 3 M 0800 P2M J
2
Product Series
2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
2
3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V E## 1=PXR 20 J = Line and load terminals
4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
M= 65 kA at 480 V D## 1=PXR 20D
P## 1=PXR 25
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
2
P## 1=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals
2
Globally Rated Frame Only 2
PD-4 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate
frames, trip units, terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. 2
Each Frame Only device is marked with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous
current rating; each trip unit is also marked with a maximum continuous current rating, 2
which must not exceed that of the frame. Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are
marked as such on the Frame Only device.
2
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units. 2
Frame Only—Globally Rated
2
PD G 4 3 M 0800 FNN J 2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V 2
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals

2
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V 2
Note
2
(1) (2)
2
2
2

Trip Units
2 PD-4 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate
frames, trip units, terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker.
2 For two-pole breakers using electronic trip units, three-pole trip units are used.
PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 100%
2 rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.
2 Trip Units Only

2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units
2 PD G 4 X TFA 3 0800
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Separator
Digit
Trip Unit
Type Options
Pole
Options
Continuous
Current Ratings
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 X = Accessory TFA = Fixed Thermal / 2 = 2-pole 0300 = 300 A 1
2 Adjustable Magnetic 3 = 3-pole 0350 = 350 A 1
VFA = 50 °C Fixed Thermal / 4 = 4-pole (100% N) 0400 = 400 A 1
2 Adjustable Magnetic
(non UL)
0
6
= 4-pole (0% N)
= 4-pole (60% N)
0450
0500
= 450 A 1
= 500 A 1
0600 = 600 A 1
2 0700
0800
= 700 A 1
= 800 A 1
2
2 Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units
2 PD G 4 X PXR 3 0800 E2N

2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release
Trip Unit
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI
E## 2=PXR 20
(programmable N) D## 2=PXR 20D
2 P## 2=PXR 25
2 Notes
1 Not available in 4-pole 60% neutral protection.
2 (1) (2)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
LSI with LSIG with

—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2
PXR 10 B 2 — — — N — — — — — — — —
2
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
2
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y 2
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
Descriptions of PXR Configured Options
2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, or
Maintenance Mode
● Connection included with 2
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, ● Interface: 3 wires all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
ALM2, ALM Common) (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit
Protection Type 4 or 5
trip units 2
● Programmable to indicate ● Includes ability to turn ● Required for
breaker conditions ON and OFF, and
indicate signals
● Interface: Switch and LED communications, relays,
and metering accuracy
2
Modbus—Modbus RTU on face of trip unit and two
directly from breaker CAM—CAM Link connection wires for remote switch ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A 2
(requires a CAM module per enable option
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA, ● Interface: 2 wires
(24 Vdc required)
MODBB, MODBG) breaker)
(Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V) 2
● No additional modules ● Interface: 5 wires (refer to ● A programmable relay will
required CAM IL for details) be factory defaulted to 2
● Communications Adapter remote indication of ARMS
Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2
2
Option Setting 800 A
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 320 A 2
2 350 A
3 400 A 2
4 450 A
5 500 A
2
6 550 A
7 600 A
2
8 630 A
2
9 700 A
10 = ln 800 A 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

For Frame Size 4, terminals are also available in single-pole kits; these are not
2 available in 2-pole or 4-pole configurations, unless otherwise noted.
For single terminals, replace X3 with X1 on the catalog number.
2 Example: PDG4X3TA800 becomes PDG4X1TA800 for a single unit.
2 Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
2
PDG4X3TA700 PDG4X3TA800 PDG4X3TA801 PDG4X3TA800RF
2 PDG4X3T600
PDG4X3TA700CW
PDG4X3TA800SW
PDG4X3TA800CW
PDG4X3T800
PDG4X3TA801CW
2 Note: Pictures are for reference only.
2 Terminals
2 Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)

Digit 14 Designation Factory
Config.
Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Ampere
2 Amperes Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only Range
Standard Terminals
2 700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG4X3TA700 — J K L 300–700
800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG4X3TA800 — J K L 800
2 Alternate Terminals
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 500–750 253–380 PDG4X3TA801 — T U V 300–800

Non-Aluminum Terminals
2 600 Aluminum Cu B, C 2 2/0–500 67.4–238 PDG4X3T600 — W Y Z 300–600
800 Aluminum Cu B, C 3 3/0–300 85–152 PDG4X3T800 — W Y Z 700–800
2 StrandAble Terminals
800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG4X3TA800SW — A B C 300–800
2 D, G, H, I, 3/0–300 85–152
K, M
2 Control Wire Terminals
2 700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG4X3TA700CW — 1 2 3 300–700

800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG4X3TA800CW — 1 2 3 800
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 500–750 253–380 PDG4X3TA801CW — 4 5 6 300–800
Rear Fed Terminals
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–300 85–152 PDG4X3TA800RF Interphase — — — 300–800
barriers
2 Rear Connectors
800 — — — — — — PDG4X3TA800RC — R — — 300–800
2 End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals
2 800 — — — — — — PDG4X3TS800 1 — S D E 300–800
Notes
2 Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table are a direct
conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.
2 1 End cap kits are available in 3-pole and 4-pole configurations only.
For 4-pole, use catalog number PDG4X4TS800.

2.2
Accessories
2
2
2
2
2
Tripping Tripping
Accessory
Options
Alarm Options
(1–2 spaces) 1
Aux Options
(4 spaces)
Accessory
Options
Alarm Options
(1–2 spaces) 1
Aux Options
(6 spaces)
2
None None None None None None 2
Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space)
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 2
1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces)
2
UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
2
2CO (4 spaces) 2CO (4 spaces)
4NO (4 spaces) 4NO (4 spaces) 2
4NC (4 spaces) 4NC (4 spaces)
3CO (6 spaces) 2
6NO (6 spaces)
6NC (6 spaces)
2
Note 2
1 Frame 4 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units and communication only have
access to one alarm space. Breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units or electronic trip units
without communication, have access to two alarm spaces.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 Power Defense breakers Power Defense alarm and
have designated positions for auxiliary switches are
2 alarm and auxiliary switches available in contact blocks, in
in the right pole accessory Form A (NO), Form B (NC),
2 cavity. For Frame 4, the two and Form C (NO-NC) types.
left-most positions are used Form A and Form B contacts
for alarm switches, and the take one position in the
2 two right-most locations are breaker accessory cavity, and
used for auxiliary switches. Form C contacts take two
2 positions in the cavity.
Power Defense breakers Identical contact blocks are
2 have secondary covers for
ease of field installation of
used for the alarm and
accessories, including alarm
2 and auxiliary switches. Electronic breakers with
communications options
2 (Modbus RTU or CAM Link)
lose one alarm switch
2 position, but are also able to
provide trip position via
communications and the PXR
2 programmable relays.
2
Contact Blocks
2
2 Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC
2
2 Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB
2 contact blocks
2 Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC
2
2 Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC
2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Alarm and auxiliary switches auxiliary switch functionality ● For Eaton factory ● If no other accessories are 2
are plug-and-play accessories in digits 15–16 and adhering installation, the same type selected, use NNNN for
designed to be field to the following conditions of terminals (i.e., all pigtail the final 4 digits of the 2
installable. However, Eaton and tables: 0.75 m, all screw, etc.) catalog number
also offers installation service
● Digit 15 denotes the type
must be used. If a ● Electronic breakers with 2
in our factories. combination of alarm and communications lose one
of accessory(-ies) installed auxiliary switches is
Breaker catalog numbers and the terminal types selected, they must be the
alarm switch position in
order to provide trip status
2
with alarm and auxiliary ● Switches may be same type (i.e., all 1NC, all via communications. They
switch combinations require requested for alarm only, 1NO/1NC, etc.) do not lose an auxiliary
2
a complete 20-digit catalog auxiliary only or a ● Digit 16 denotes number position for this purpose.
number, adding the alarm and combination of the two and type (NO, NC) of 2
switches installed
2
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C) 2
Auxiliary Switch
2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC 3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 2
1NO BA CA — — — — — — — — — —
1NC BB — CB — — — — — — — — —
2
1NO/1NC BC — — CC — — C1 — — C4 — —
2NO BD — — — CD — — C2 — — C5 —
2
2NC BE — — — — CE — — C3 — — C6
2
Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
2
1NO YA ZA — — — — — — — — — —
1NC YB — ZB — — — — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — — Z4 — —
2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 — — Z5 — 2
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3 — — Z6
2
Auxiliary Switch 2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC 3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC 2
Alarm Switch None NN DA DB DC DD DE D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
1NO EA FA — — — — — — — — — — 2
1NC EB — FB — — — — — — — — —
1NO/1NC EC — — FC — — F1 — — F4 — — 2
2NO ED — — — FD — — F2 — — F5 —
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3 — — F6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)
2 Auxiliary Switch
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC 3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
2 Alarm Switch None NN UA UB UC UD UE U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6
2 1NO VA WA — — — — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — — — — —
2 1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — — W4 — —
2NO VD — — — WD — — W2 — — W5 —
2 2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3 — — W6
2 Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C)

Auxiliary Switch
2 Three-Pole
Four-Pole
3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
2 Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

1NO BA CA — CF CG — CP CQ — CT CU —
2 1NC BB — CB CH — CJ CR — CS CV — CW
2
2 Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only.
2 Power Defense breakers have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.
Shunt Trips
2
24 Vac/Vdc PDG4XST24ACDCT PDG4XST24ACDCS PDG4XST24ACDCR
2 110–130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG4XST130ACDCT PDG4XST130ACDCS PDG4XST130ACDCR
2 200–240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG4XST250ACDCT PDG4XST250ACDCS PDG4XST250ACDCR

380–440 Vac PDG4XST440ACT PDG4XST440ACS PDG4XST440ACR
2 480–525 Vac PDG4XST525ACT PDG4XST525ACS PDG4XST525ACR
600 Vac PDG4XST600ACT PDG4XST600ACS PDG4XST600ACR
2
2


2
Note: Use PDG4XUV18DCW when using Time Delay UVR.
2

2.2
Shunt trips and undervoltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● If no additional accessories 2
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and are selected, use NN for
play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type digits 15-16 and 19-20 of 2
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding the ● Digit 18 denotes the the catalog number
Eaton also offers the service tripping accessory voltage of the accessory ● Each breaker has space for 2
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and one shunt trip or UVR
following conditions and
tripping accessory only 2
tables.
2
Shunt Trips
2
12 Vdc TH SH RH 2
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
60 Vdc TK SK RK 2
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP
2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR
2
480–525 Vac TD SD RD 2
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs) 2
12 Vdc VH UH WH
2
24 Vdc VG UG WG
2
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
60 Vdc VK UK WK 2
125 Vdc VL UL WL
250 Vdc VM UM WM 2
24 Vac VF UF WF
130 Vac VA UA WA
2
240 Vac VB UB WB
2
440 Vac VC UC WC
525 Vac VD UD WD 2
600 Vac VE UE WE
Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2 NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed
2 Standard lockable handle PDG4XHMCS HA
2 Standard handle with mechanical padlock PDG4XHMCSP HC
2 Standard handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG4XHMCSNP HE

2 Emergency handle with door interlock PDG4XHMCEN H2
2 Emergency handle with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG4XHMCENP H5
2
2 Standard lockable handle PDG4XHMDS DA
2 Emergency lockable handle PDG4XHMDE D1

2 Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG34XHM79E —
2 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism

2 Metal Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12
NEMA 1/3R/12
Metal Handle,
NEMA 4/4X
NEMA 4/4X

Note
2 1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
Factory
Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2
Installed 2 8.25 (209.6) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2)
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20
3 8.25 (209.6) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2)
2
4 11.0 (279.4) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2)
Padlockable hasp, Top PDG4XPLKTOFF L1 2
OFF only
Padlockable handle On handle PDG4XPHB — 2
block Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Kirk lock provision— Left side PDG4XKLKPSF L8 PDG4 800 A 30 (13.6) 30 (13.6) 39.9 (18.08) 2
left side1
Notes
Kirk lock provision—
right side 1
Right side L9 1 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately). 2
2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant (factory
Walking beam
interlock 23
Two-, three-, and four-pole PDG4XWBI234P — suffix WB).
2
Electrical operator 24 Vdc PDG4XROP24DC RG
2
48–60 Vdc PDG4XROP60DC RJ or RK
125 Vdc PDG4XROP125DC RL 2
110–130 Vac PDG4XROP130AC RA 2
200–240 Vac PDG4XROP240AC RB
380–440 Vac PDG4XROP440AC RC
2
Interphase barriers Single-pole PDG4XIB — 2
Four-pole PDG4XIB4P — 2
Neutral CTs for Bus bar Type PDG4XNCTB0800 —
ground fault (PXR) 2
barrier kit 2
Base Mounting Hardware 2
Two-, three-, four-pole metric BMH4M
2
Two-, three-, four-pole English BMH4
2
molded case switch. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2 Description Page
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-76
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2
Frame Size 5 covers a global Frame Size 5 can be used to Frame Size 5 breakers are Power Defense breakers are
2 range of 320 A through meet a wide range of circuit modular and available as designed and tested to meet
1200 A with a complete protection and power complete breakers from the stringent requirements for:
offering of advanced PXR distribution needs, including factory or as modular
2 electronic trip units. It ground fault protection, components, including
● UL
● CSA
includes two frame sizes 100% UL ratings, high frames, trip units,
2 of 800 A and 1200 A. interrupting capacity and high accessories and terminals to ● IEC (CE)
Additionally, PD-5 has a instantaneous settings for provide flexibility for ● CB (CCC)
2 1600 A IEC (CE) and GB selective coordination. PXR customers. PXR trip units are
(CCC) frame that covers trip units in PD-5 provide all available with advanced
2 800 A through 1600 A. levels of protection, including
energy metering with
features to provide
multiple communication situational awareness of their
2 schemes, breaker health electrical system.
2 reduction options.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
Power Defense—Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) for UL/CSA and 320–1600 A for IEC/CCC)
Frame Size 5 covers a range of 320 A through 1200 A using electronic trip units. It is available in 2
configurations of 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole, with the 2-pole being in the same physical size of a
3-pole variant. Additionally, an IEC / CCC option is available for 1600 A, with selectable ratings 2
from 800 A through 1600 A.
2
K M N P T
2
ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 85 100 150 200 200 2
480 Vac 50 65 85 100 150
600 Vac 25 35 50 65 65
2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
240 Vac 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150 — —
2
380–415 Vac 50 50 70 53 70 50 100 50 — — 2
440 Vac 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50 — —
480 Vac 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40 — — 2
525 Vac 25 20 30 25 35 25 40 25 — —
660–690 Vac 10 5 15 7.5 20 10 35 18 — —
2
2
2
2
2
PD G 5 3 M 1200 P2M N
2
Product Series
2
Standards
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Size
5 =5
Options
2 = 2-pole
Ratings
K = 50 kA at 480 V
Current Ratings
0800 = 800 A
Type Options
E## 1=PXR 20
Options
N = No terminals (imperial
2
3 = 3-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V
P## 1=PXR 25 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
1200 = 1200 A D## 1=PXR 20D
P## 1=PXR 25
tapped conductors)
M= No terminals (metric
2
P = 100 kA at 480 V tapped conductors)
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU (150 kA at 480 V)—UL/CSA Rated 2
PD J = UL/CSA 5 =5 3 = 3-pole T = 150 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
tapped conductors) 2
P## 1=PXR 25 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors) 2
Note
(1) (2)
2
2
2

2
2
PD G 5 3 M 1200 P2M N
2
Product Series
2
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals (imperial
4 = 4-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A tapped conductors)
2 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers—IEC/CCC Rated (only available as a complete breaker)
2 PD C = IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A E## 2=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial

4 = 4-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V D## 2=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
2 P## 2=PXR 25 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
2 PD-5 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals,
and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked
2 with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous current rating; each trip unit is also
marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not exceed that of the
2 frame. Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device.
2 Frame Only—Globally Rated
2 PD G 5 3 M 1200 FNN N
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 2 = 2-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
2 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
1200 = 1200 A tapped conductors)
M= No terminals (metric
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
2 (100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A tapped conductors)
N = 85 kA at 480 V M= No terminals (metric
2
Notes
2 1 Molded case switch may open above 14,000 A.
(1) (2)
2
2
2

2.2
Trip Units
PD-5 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, 2
terminals, and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each frame
rating (800 A, 1200 A, and 1600 A—IEC only) must use trip units of the same 2
rating. Additionally, for two-pole breakers, three-pole trip units are used.
PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 2
100% rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.
2
Trip Units Only
2

2
PD G 5 X PXR 3 1200 E2N 2
Product Series
2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release
Trip Unit
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
0800 = 800 A
1200 = 1200 A
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
2
(programmable N) P## 1=PXR 25
2
Note
(1) (2)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2 #(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
2 LSI with LSIG with
—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2 PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
2 PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
2 Descriptions of PXR Configured Options

2 (rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, or ● Connection included with
Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, Interface: 3 wires Maintenance Mode all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2 ●
ALM2, ALM Common)

●
(Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units

2 breaker conditions ON and OFF, and communications, relays,
● Available as field-installable indicate signals and metering accuracy
2 option if not pre-configured
on face of trip unit and two
wires for remote switch
CAM—CAM Link connection ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
(catalog number (requires a CAM module per enable option
2 PDG56XRELAYS) breaker) (24 Vdc required) ● Interface: 2 wires
(Aux + 24 V, Aux 0 V)
Modbus—Modbus RTU Interface: 5 wires (refer to
2 directly from breaker
●
CAM IL for details)

● A programmable relay will
Interface: 3 wires (MODBA, Communications Adapter remote indication of ARMS
2 ●
MODBB, MODBG)
●

● No additional modules Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2 required
● Available as field-installable
(catalog number
2 PDG56XMODRTU)
2 Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units

Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
2 1600
0800 1200 1600 A
2 Option Setting 800 A 1200 A (IEC only)
PXR 20 1 320 A 500 A 800 A
2 2 350 A 550 A 900 A
3 400 A 600 A 1000 A
2 4 450 A 630 A 1100 A
5 500 A 700 A 1200 A
2 6 550 A 800 A 1250 A
7 600 A 900 A 1300 A
2 8 630 A 1000 A 1400 A
2 9 700 A 1100 A 1500 A

10 = ln 800 A 1200 A 1600 A
2 PXR 20D, PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 10 A increments.
2
2
2
2

2.2
Terminals for Frame 5 are available as single terminals only, unless otherwise specified.
2
To configure both line and load of a 3-pole breaker, order quantity 6 terminals.
2
Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
PDG5X1T700 PDG5X1TA700
PDG5X1TA700CW
PDG5X1TA1000
PDG5X1TA1000CW
PDG5X1T1000 PDG5X1TA1200
PDG5X1TA1200CW
PDG5X1TA1201
PDG5X1TA1201CW
2
PDG5X1TA1200SW
PDG5X1T1200 2
2
Terminals 2
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors
per Phase
Range per
Conductor
Range per
Conductor
3-Pole
Catalog Number 1 Hardware Included
2
Aluminum Terminal Options 2
700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG5X1TA700 Imperial
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1TA1000 Imperial 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 PDG5X1TA1200 Imperial
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 500–750 253–380 PDG5X1TA1201 Imperial
2
Copper Terminal Options
2
700 Copper Cu B, C 2 2/0–500 67.4–253 PDG5X1T700 Imperial
1000 Copper Cu B, C 3 3/0–500 85–253 PDG5X1T1000 Imperial 2
1200 Copper Cu B, C 4 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1T1200 Imperial
StrandAble Terminal Options 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 PDG5X1TA1200SW Imperial
D, G, H, I, K, M 4/0–350 107–177
2
Control Wire Terminal Options
2
700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG5X1TA700CW Imperial
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1TA1000CW Imperial 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 PDG5X1TA1200CW Imperial
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 500–750 253–380 PDG5X1TA1201CW Imperial 2
Conductor Extensions 23
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G01 Imperial 2-pole

2
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G02 Imperial 3-pole 2
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G05 Imperial 4-pole
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G03 Metric 2-pole 2
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G04 Metric 3-pole
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G06 Metric 4-pole
2
2
Notes 2
1 Add M at end for metric hardware.
2 Included with 100% rated breaker.
3 Kits include conductors for both sides of the breaker (e.g., 6 conductors for a 3-pole breaker). Order quantity 1 per breaker.
2
2
2

Accessories
2
2 3- and 4-Pole Circuit Breakers
2 Tripping Accessory
Options Left Pole Right Pole
Bell Alarm Options 1
2 None None
Shunt Trip Bell Alarm Options 1 Auxiliary Switch Options 1
2 Auxiliary Switch Options 1 Bell and Auxiliary
Combination Options 1
Alarm and Auxiliary
2 Combination Options 1
UVR
2
2
2
2 Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 5
Alarms and Auxiliary Switches
2 Auxiliary Switch
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C 3 Form C
2 Alarm Switch None Left — PDG5X1AC PDG5X2AC PDG5XL3AC
Right — PDG5X1AC PDG5X2AC PDG5XR3AC
2 1 Form C Left PDG5XL1BC PDG5XL1AC1BC PDG5XL2AC1BC —
Right PDG5XR1BC PDG5XR1AC1BC PDG5XR2AC1BC —
2 2 Form C Left PDG5XL2BC PDG5XL1AC2BC — —
2 Right PDG5XR2BC PDG5XR1AC2BC — —
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches for Breakers with Communicating Trip Units 2
2
Auxiliary Switch
2 None None 1 Form C 2 Form C
Alarm Switch None Left — — —
2 Right PDG5XRCBSM PDG5XRC1AC PDG5XRC2AC

1 Form C Left — — —
2 Right PDG5XRC1BC PDG5XRC1AC1BC —
2 Right PDG5XRC2BC — —
Notes
2 1 See Indicating Accessories tables for options.
2 All electronic trip units configured with communication will automatically include a communication indicator in the right pole.
2 Up to two additional Form C contacts are available for external indication in the right pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Factory Installed Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 5 1
Alarms and Auxiliary Switches
2
Auxiliary Switch
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C 3 Form C
2
Alarm Switch None Left — — — A4
2
Right NN AC A1 —
1 Form C Left — — — — 2
Right BC CC C1 —
2 Form C Left — — — — 2
Right B1 CX — —
2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches for Breakers with Communicating Trip Units 2
Auxiliary Switch 2
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C
Alarm Switch None Left — — — 2
Right NN AC A1
1 Form C Left — — — 2
Right BC CC —
2
Right B1 — —
2
2
Shunt Trips 2
Factory Installed
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Catalog Number (Digit 17–18) 2
48–60 Vdc PDG5XST60DCS SK
110–125 Vdc PDG5XST125DCS SL 2
220–250 Vdc PDG5XST250DCS SM
24 Vac/Vdc PDG5XST24ACDCS SN
2
48–60 Vac PDG5XST60ACS ST
2
110–240 Vac PDG5XST240ACS SA or SB
380–440 Vac PDG5XST440ACS SC 2
480–600 Vac PDG5XST600ACS SD or SE
2
Factory Installed 2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
12 Vdc PDG5XUV12DCU UH 2
24 Vdc PDG5XUV24DCU UG
48–60 Vdc PDG5XUV60DCU UJ or UK
2
125 Vdc PDG5XUV125DCU UL 2
250 Vdc PDG5XUV250DCU UM
12 Vac PDG5XUV12ACU UU 2
24 Vac PDG5XUV24ACU UF
48–60 Vac PDG5XUV60ACU UT
2
110–127 Vac PDG5XUV120ACU UA
2
208–240 Vac PDG5XUV240ACU UB
380–500 Vac PDG5XUV480ACU UC or UV 2
Note: Use PDG5XUV18DCU (Suffix US) when using Time Delay UVR.
2
Notes
1 Factory installation of indicating accessories available for the right pole only. Left pole accessories may be field installed.
2 All electronic trip units configured with communication will automatically include a Communication Indicator
2
in the right pole. Up to two additional Form C contacts are available for external indication in the right pole.
2

Handle Mechanisms—Size 5
2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 Standard lockable handle (black and gray) PDG5XHMDS DA
Emergency lockable handle (red and yellow) PDG5XHMDE D1
2
2 Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
2
4 ft PDG5XFS04 PDG5XFS04HP PDG5XFS04X PDG5XFS04HPX
2 5 ft PDG5XFS05 PDG5XFS05HP PDG5XFS05X PDG5XFS05HPX

2
External Accessories—Frame Size 5 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 5
2 External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Factory
Installed
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20 2 8.25 (209.5) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
2 Padlockable hasp Left-side PDG5XPLKS L5 3 8.25 (209.5) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
Right-side L6 4 11.13 (282.7) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

2
2 Padlockable hasp,
OFF only
Top PDG5XPLKTOFF L1
2 Non-padlockable
handle block
Field PDG5XHB — PDG5 800, 1200
and 1600 A
46.8 (21.30) 46.8 (21.30) 58 (26.31)
2 Kirk key interlock kit 1 Left-side PDG5XKLKPSF L8

Notes
Right-side L9 1 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately).
2 Walking beam Three- or four-pole PDG5XWBI34P WB 4 2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant
(factory suffix “WB”).

interlock 23
2 Electrical operator 24 Vdc EOP5T21 MG 4 Modification code for walking beam denotes modification to the breaker; accessory must be
48 Vdc EOP5T22 MJ ordered separate.

2 125 Vdc EOP5T26 ML
120 Vac EOP5T07 MA
2 208 Vac EOP5T09 MY
2 240 Vac EOP5T11 MB

480 Vac EOP5T15 MD
2 Neutral CTs for Bus bar type PDG5XNCTB1200 —
ground fault (PXR)
2 Interphase barriers Three-pole PDG5XIB3P —

Four-pole PDG5XIB4P —
2 Terminal covers Three-pole PDG5XTC3P —
2 barrier kit

2 Two-, three-, four-pole metric BMH5M
2 Two-, three-, four-pole English BMH5

2 molded case switch.

2.2
Description Page
2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29 2
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57 2
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-84
2
2
2
of 700 A through 2500 A with meet a wide range of circuit modular and available as designed and tested to meet 2
a complete offering of protection and power complete breakers from stringent requirements for:
advanced PXR electronic trip distribution needs, including the factory or as modular
units. It includes three frame ground fault protection and components, including
● UL 2
● CSA
sizes of 1600 A, 2000 A and 100% UL ratings. PXR trip frames, trip units,
2500 A. units in PD-6 provide all levels accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE) 2
of protection, including to provide flexibility for ● CB (CCC)
energy metering with customers. PXR trip units 2
features to provide
2
reduction options. situational awareness of
their electrical system.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2


2
2 Frame Size 6 covers a range of 700 A through 2500 A using electronic trip units. It is available
in configurations of 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole, with the 2-pole being in the same physical size
2 of a 3-pole variant.
2
M N P
2 ANSI (UL/CSA) kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 125 150 200
2 480 Vac 65 85 100
600 Vac 35 50 65
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2 240 Vac 135 100 150 100 200 100

380–415 Vac 70 53 70 53 100 53
2 440 Vac 50 40 70 50 100 50
480 Vac 50 30 65 40 85 40
2 525 Vac 30 25 35 25 40 25
2 660–690 Vac 15 7.5 20 13 35 18
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2 PD G 6 3 M 2500 P2M N
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 2 = 2-pole
3 = 3-pole
M= 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
tapped conductors)
4 = 4-pole P = 100 kA at 480 V 2500 = 2500 A P## 1=PXR 25 M= No terminals (metric
2 (programmable N) tapped conductors)
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2 PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial

(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
2 (programmable N) P = 100 kA at 480 V P## 1=PXR 25 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals (imperial
4 = 4-pole 2000 = 2000 A tapped conductors)
2 M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
Notes
2 1 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-82 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)
2 Molded case switch may open above 17,500 A.
2
2

2.2
PD-6 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals, 2
and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked
with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous current rating; each trip unit is also 2
marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not exceed that of the
frame. Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device. 2
Frame Only—Globally Rated 2
PD G 6 3 M 2500 FNN N 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options
2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 2 = 2-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
3 = 3-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A tapped conductors) 2
4 = 4-pole P = 100 kA at 480 V 2500 = 2500 A M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated) 2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M= 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A tapped conductors) 2
P = 100 kA at 480 V M= No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
Trip Units 2
PD-6 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units,
terminals, and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each frame 2
rating (1600 A, 2000 A, and 2500 A) must use trip units of the same rating.
Additionally, for two-pole breakers, three-pole trip units are used. 2
PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The
100% rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit. 2
Trip Units Only 2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units 2
2
PD G 6 X PXR 3 2500 E2N
2
Product Series
2
Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit
Standards
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Size
6 =6
Digit
X = Accessory
Type Designator
PXR = Power Xpert Release
Options
3 = 3-pole
Current Ratings
1600 = 1600 A
Type and Options 2
E## 1=PXR 20
Trip Unit 4 = 4-pole 2000 = 2000 A D## 1=PXR 20D
(programmable N) 2500 = 2500 A P## 1=PXR 25 2
2
Note
1 See PXR Trip Unit Options table on Page V4-T2-82 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2) 2
2


2
2 #(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
2 LSI with LSIG with
—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2 PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
2 PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
2 Descriptions of PXR Configured Options

2 (rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, or ● Connection included with
Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, Interface: 3 wires Maintenance Mode all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2 ●
ALM2, ALM Common)

●
(Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units

2 breaker conditions ON and OFF, and communications, relays,
● Available as field-installable indicate signals and metering accuracy
on face of trip unit and two
wires for remote switch ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
CAM—CAM Link connection
(catalog number (requires a CAM module per enable option ● Interface: 2 wires
2 PDG56XRELAYS) breaker) (24 Vdc required) (Aux + 24 V, Aux 0 V)
Modbus—Modbus RTU Interface: 5 wires (refer to
2 directly from breaker
●
CAM IL for details)

● A programmable relay will
Interface: 3 wires (MODBA, Communications Adapter remote indication of ARMS
2 ●
MODBB, MODBG)
●

● No additional modules Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2 required
● Available as field-installable
(catalog number
2 PDG56XMODRTU)
2 Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units

Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
2 1600 2000 2500
Option Setting 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
2 PXR 20 1 700 A 1000 A 1600 A
2 800 A 1100 A 1700 A
2 3 900 A 1200 A 1800 A
2 4
5
1000 A
1100 A
1250 A
1400 A
1900 A
2000 A
2 6 1200 A 1600 A 2100 A

7 1250 A 1700 A 2200 A
2 8 1400 A 1800 A 2300 A
9 1500 A 1900 A 2400 A
2 10 = ln 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Terminals for Frame 6 are available as single terminals only, unless otherwise specified.
2
To configure both line and load of a 3-pole breaker, order quantity 6 terminals.
2
Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
2
2
PDG6X1TA1600 PDG6X3TA2000 PDG6X1T1600 PDG6X1T2000RC
PDG6X1T2500RC
2
PDF6X1T2000RC
2
2
Terminals
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2) 2
Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole
Amperes Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number 1 Hardware Included
2
Aluminum Terminal Options
1600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 500–1000 253–507 PDG6X1TA1600 Imperial 2
2000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 2–600 33.6 –304 PDG6X3TA2000 2 Imperial bus connection
Copper Terminal Options
2
1600 Copper Cu B, C 4 1–600 42.4–304 PDG6X1T1600 Imperial
2
Rear Connectors 3
2000 Copper PDG6X1T2000RC Imperial 2
2000 Copper PDF6X1T2000RC 4 Imperial
2500 Copper PDG6X1T2500RC Imperial 2
2
Notes 2
1 Add M at end for metric hardware.
2 Only available for 3-pole breaker; order quantity 1 per breaker side, or quantity 2 per breaker.
3 Kit includes one conductor and hardware; order quantity 6 for both sides of a 3-pole breaker.
2
4 Included with 100% rated breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Accessories
2 Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 6
All Frame 6 accessories are installed in an internal pocket to the right of the breaker handle.
2
Internal Accessory
2 Accessory Accessory
Slot 1 Options Slot 2 Options
2 None None
2 2 Form C 2 Form C
2 Lower Accessory Lower Accessory Lower Accessory

Slot 1 Options Slot 2 Options Slot 3 Options
2 None None None
Shunt trip Shunt trip UVR
2 Alarm switch UVR Alarm switch
2 — Alarm switch —
2
Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 6
2 Indicating Accessories 12
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch
2
1 Form C PDG6X1BC —
2 2 Form C PDG6X2BC PDG6X2AC

4 Form C — PDG6X4AC
2
Factory Installed Indicating Accessories
2 Auxiliary
2 None 2 Form C 4 Form C

Alarm switch None NN A1 A7
2 1 Form C BC C1 C9
2 Form C B1 CY CZ
2 Notes
1 All PDG6 indicating accessories come with 29 in/0.75 m pigtails.
2 2 All PDG6 indicating accessories are installed in the accessory pocket to the right of the breaker handle.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
Shunt Trips
Factory Installed 2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
48–60 Vdc PDG6XST60DCS SK 2
110–125 Vdc PDG6XST125DCS SL
220–250 Vdc PDG6XST250DCS SM 2
24 Vac/ Vdc PDG6XST24ACDCS SN
48–60 Vac PDG6XST60ACS ST
2
110–240 Vac PDG6XST240ACS SA or SB 2
380–440 Vac PDG6XST440ACS SC
480–600 Vac PDG6XST600ACS SD or SE 2
2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m)
Factory Installed
Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
2
12 Vdc PDG6XUV12DCU UH 2
24 Vdc PDG6XUV24DCU UG
48–60 Vdc PDG6XUV60DCU UJ or UK 2
125 Vdc PDG6XUV125DCU UL
250 Vdc PDG6XUV250DCU UM
2
12 Vac PDG6XUV12ACU UU
24 Vac PDG6XUV24ACU UF
2
48–60 Vac PDG6XUV60ACU UT 2
110–127 Vac PDG6XUV120ACU UA
208–240 Vac PDG6XUV240ACU UB 2
380–500 Vac PDG6XUV480ACU UC or UV
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms—Size 6
2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 Standard lockable handle (black and gray) PDG6XHMDS DA
Emergency lockable handle (red and yellow) PDG6XHMDE D1
2
2 Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
2

2
2 External Accessories—Frame Size 6 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 6
2 Factory Number of Poles Width Height Depth
Installed
2 Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20 2 15.5 (393.7) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
Padlockable hasp Right PDG6XPLKR L6 3 15.5 (393.7) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)

2 Padlockable hasp, OFF only Right PDG6XPLKROFF L3 4 20 (508.0) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
Kirk key interlock kit 1 Right PDG6XKLKPRF L9

2 Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
Walking beam interlock 23 Three-pole PDG6XWBI3P WB 4
2 Electrical operator 48 Vdc EOP6T21K MJ
120 Vac EOP6T08K MA PDG6 1600 and 2000 A 102 (46.3) 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2 240 Vac EOP6T11K MB PDG6 2500 A 135 (61.2) 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
Neutral CTs for Bus bar type PDG6XNCTB2500 — Notes

2 ground fault (PXR) 1 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately).
2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant
2 (factory suffix “WB”).

4 Modification code for Walking Beam denotes modification to the breaker; accessory must be
2 ordered separate.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A)
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Motor Circuit Protectors
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
2
Motor circuit protectors (MCPs)
are instantaneous-only
MCPs are designed to be
used in combination with
Power Defense MCPs are of
a modular design, with field-
MCPs are UL Recognized
Components (UL File E7819)
2
devices available in ratings motor starters. Power installable accessories and and comply with the
from 3 A to 600 A. Power Defense MCPs are typically terminals. Accessories and applicable requirements of 2
Defense MCPs are available used in combination with terminals for MCPs are the UL 489 standard. Eaton
in Frame Sizes 1, 2 and 3, and motor starters, usually NEMA common with the accessories MCPs are also UL Listed in 2
are designated by the trip unit sizes 0 through 6. Each MCP used for the equivalent frame combination with Eaton
digits in the catalog number device is calibrated at a size molded case circuit motor starters under various 2
(Digits 11–13), always use minimum for six trip settings breaker. Accessories may be UL file number; reference
M as Digit 11. Digit 12 to provide flexibility in its field or factory installed. For UL’s website for additional
designates the calibration application. Typical motor full factory installation, follow the information.
2
(S = Standard, H = High, load currents and NEMA same catalog numbering
L = Low), and always use starter sizes are provided for guidelines provided for the MCPs are also designed to 2
A as Digit 13 to indicate an each device and setting, only respective equivalent circuit comply with CSA Standard
adjustable instantaneous as a guide for selecting breaker frame. C22.2 No. 5, IEC 60947-2
(Annex O), and GB 14048.2.
2
setting. MCPs; actual motor
As such, they carry the
characteristics and design
parameters must be used following markings: 2
to determine the adequate
device and setting to be
● UL 2
● CSA
used in the application.
● IEC (CE) 2
● CB (CCC)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Frame Size 1 Product Selection

2 PDG1 MCPs cover a Where a 13x setting is All catalog numbers shown Ratings
continuous current range required for an intermediate include standard line and load Maximum Application Voltage
2 of 3 A through 100 A, with FLA value, alternate CAM steel terminals (Digit 14 = J). (UL and CSA)
trip calibration settings from settings and/or MCP ratings For aluminum terminals, use ● 600Y/347 Vac
2 9 A through 1100 A. All should be used. T in Digit 14 of the catalog
● 480 Vac
devices are a 3-pole number.
configuration and have a A High Calibration MCP for ● 250 Vdc
2 single interrupting capacity the 100 A device is also Terminal catalog numbers
Note: For DC applications, actual
as an IEC 60947-2 (Annex O) available for special listed in the table are for one
trip levels are approximately 40%
2 instantaneous trip circuit applications where the side of the MCP; order 2 sets higher than values shown.
breaker. ampere rating of the for line and load if ordering
2 disconnecting means cannot separate. IEC Instantaneous Circuit
PDG1 MCPs include six trip be less than 115% of the Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
settings, corresponding to motor full load ampere rating, Capacity (kA)
2 3x through 11x of the and includes settings Icu Ics
continuous amperage rating corresponding to 5x to 15x of 240 Vac 5 5
2 of the device, and each the continuous ampere rating
415 Vac 5 5
corresponding to 13x the of the device.
2 minimum FLA value shown in 690 Vac 3 1.5
the table below.
2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration
2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Typical Motor Included Optional
2 MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Full Load Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T)
PDG13M0003MSAJ 3 A 3x 9 0 0.69–0.91 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
2 B 5x 15 1.1–1.3
(Steel) (Aluminum)
C 7x 21 1.6–1.7
2 D 9x 27 2.0–2.2
2 E 10x 30 2.3–2.5
F 11x 33 2.6–2.8
2 PDG13M0007MSAJ 7 A 3x 21 0 1.5–2.0 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 35 2.6–3.1
2 C 7x 49 3.7–3.9
2 D 9x 63 4.8–5.2
E 10x 70 5.3–5.7
2 F 11x 77 5.8–6.1
2 B 5x 75 5.7–6.8
(Steel) (Aluminum)
C 7x 105 8.0–9.1
2 D 9x 135 10.4–11.4
2 E 10x 150 11.5–12.6

F 11x 165 12.7–13.0
2 PDG13M0030MSAJ 30 A 3x 90 1 3.9–9.1 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 150 11.5–13.7
2 C 7x 210 16.1–18.3
D 9x 270 20.7–22.9
2 E 10x 300 23.0–25.2
2 F 11x 330 25.3–26.1

2 B 5x 250 19.2–22.9
(Steel) (Aluminum)
C 7x 350 26.9–30.6
2 D 9x 450 34.6–38.3
2 E 10x 500 38.4–42.1

F 11x 550 42.2–43.5
2

2.2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Full Load Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) 2
B 5x 350 26.9–32.2
(Steel) (Aluminum) 2
C 7x 490 37.6–42.9
2
D 9x 630 48.4–53.7
E 10x 700 53.8–59.1 2
F 11x 770 59.2–60.9
PDG13M0100MSAJ 100 A 3x 300 3 23–30.6 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125 2
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 500 38.4–46.0
C 7x 700 53.8–61.4
2
D 9x 900 69.2–76.8 2
E 10x 1000 76.9–84.5
F 11x 1100 84.6–87.0 2
2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration
MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers 2
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Full Load Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) 2
PDG13M0100MHAJ 100 A 5x 500 3 38.4–46.0 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
B 7.5x 750 57.6–65.2
(Steel) (Aluminum) 2
C 10x 1000 76.9–84.5
1
2
D 12.5x 1250
E 13.75x 1375 1
2
F 15x 1500 1
Note
2
1 Settings above 85 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating
of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Frame Size 2 Product Selection

2 PDG2 MCPs cover a Where a 13x setting is Additionally, four Low Ratings
continuous current range of required for an intermediate Calibration devices are Maximum Application Voltage
2 3 A through 150 A, with trip FLA value, alternate dial available for low magnetic (UL and CSA)
calibration settings from 9 A settings and/or MCP ratings protection special ● 600 Vac
2 through 2500 A. All devices should be used. applications.
● 250 Vdc
are a 3-pole configuration and
have a single interrupting A High Calibration MCP for All catalog numbers shown
2 capacity as an IEC 60947-2 the 150 A device is also include standard line and load
Note: For DC applications, actual
trip levels are approximately 40%
(Annex O) instantaneous available for special terminals (Digit 14 = J). For higher than values shown.
2 circuit breaker. applications where the optional terminals, use T, W
IEC Instantaneous Circuit
ampere rating of the or other options in Digit 14 as
Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
2 PDG2 MCPs include eight trip
settings, corresponding to
disconnecting means cannot
be less than 115% of the
described in the Frame Size 2
circuit breaker section of the Capacity (kA)
3x through 10x of the motor full load ampere rating. catalog. Icu Ics
2 continuous amperage rating 240 Vac 5 5
of the device, and each Terminal catalog numbers
415 Vac 5 5
2 corresponding to 13x the listed in the table are for one
side of the MCP; order 2 sets 690 Vac 3 1.5
minimum FLA value shown
for line and load if ordering
2 in the table below.
separate.
2 PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration

Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2 Continuous CAM
MCP Trip
Setting
MCP Trip
Setting Typical NEMA
Typical Motor
Full Load Included Optional Optional
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
2 PDG23M0003MSAJ 3 A 3.0 9 0 0.69–0.91 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
2 B 4.0 12 0.92–1.0
(Same as J)
C 5.0 15 1.1–1.2
2 D 6.0 18 1.3–1.5
E 7.0 21 1.6–1.7
2 F 8.0 24 1.8–1.9
G 9.0 27 2.0–2.2
2 H 10.0 30 2.3–2.5
2 PDG23M0007MSAJ 7 A 3.0 21 0 1.50–2 PDG2X3T100

(Steel)
PDG2X3TA50
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
B 4.0 28 2.10–2.5
(Same as J)
2 C 5.0 35 2.6–3.1
D 6.0 42 3.2–3.6
2 E 7.0 49 3.7–3.9
F 8.0 56 4.3–4.7
2 G 9.0 63 4.8–5.2
2 H 10.0 70 5.3–5.7
PDG23M0015MSAJ 15 A 3.0 45 0 3.40–4.5 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
2 B 4.0 60 4.60–5.6
(Same as J)
C 5.0 75 5.7–6.8
2 D 6.0 90 6.9–7.9
2 E 7.0 105 8.0–9.1

F 8.0 120 9.2–10.3
2 G 9.0 135 10.4–11.4
H 10.0 150 11.5–12.6
2 PDG23M0030MSAJ 30 A 3.0 90 1 6.90–9.1 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
B 4.0 120 9.20–11.4
2 C 5.0 150 11.5–13.7
(Same as J)
2 D 6.0 180 13.8–16.0

E 7.0 210 16.1–18.3
2 F 8.0 240 18.4–20.6
G 9.0 270 20.7–22.9
2 H 10.0 300 23.0–25.2

2.2
PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Full Load Included Optional Optional
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W) 2
B 4.0 200 15.30–19.1
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel) 2
(Same as J)
C 5.0 250 19.2–22.9
2
D 6.0 300 23.0–26.8
E 7.0 350 26.9–30.6 2
F 8.0 400 30.7–34.5
G 9.0 450 34.6–38.3 2
H 10.0 500 38.4–42.1
2
B 4.0 280 21.50–26.8
(Same as J) 2
C 5.0 350 26.9–32.2
D 6.0 420 32.3–37.5 2
E 7.0 490 37.6–42.9
F 8.0 560 43.0–48.3
2
G 9.0 630 48.4–53.7
2
H 10.0 700 53.8–59.1
PDG23M0100MSAJ 100 A 3.0 300 3 23.00–30.6 PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
PDG2X3TA100
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
2
B 4.0 400 30.70–38.3 (Same as J)
C 5.0 500 38.4–46.0 2
D 6.0 600 46.1–53.7
E 7.0 700 53.8–61.4
2
F 8.0 800 61.5–69.1
2
G 9.0 900 69.2–76.8
H 10.0 1000 76.9–84.5 2
PDG23M0150MSAJ 150 A 3.0 450 4 34.60–46 PDG2X3TA225 PDG2X3TA150 PDG2X3T150
B 4.0 600 46.10–57.5
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (St. Steel) 2
C 5.0 750 57.6–69.1
D 6.0 900 69.2–80.6
2
E 7.0 1050 80.7–92.2 2
F 8.0 1200 92.3–103.7
G 9.0 1350 103.8–115.2 2
H 10.0 1500 115.3–126.7
2
PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration 2
MCP Catalog Number

Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W)
2
PDG23M0150MHAJ 150 A 5.0 750 4 57.0–75.0 PDG2X3TA225
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3TA150
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T150
(St. Steel)
2
B 6.7 1000 76.0–95.0
C 8.3 1250 96.0–114.0 2
D 10.0 1500 115.0–130.7
E 11.7 1750 1
2
F 13.3 2000 1
1
2
G 15.0 2250
H 16.7 2500 1
2
Note
1 Settings above 130 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating 2
of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating
2

PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Special Low Calibration

2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Included Optional Optional
2 MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
PDG23M0025MLAJ 25 A 1.6 40 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
2 B 1.7 43
(Same as J)
2 C 1.8 46
D 2.0 49
2 E 2.1 52
F 2.2 55
2 G 2.3 58
H 2.4 60
2 PDG23M0050MLAJ 50 A 1.6 80 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
2 B 1.7 87 (Same as J)
C 1.9 93
2 D 2.0 98
E 2.1 103
2 F 2.2 109
2 G 2.3 115
H 2.4 120
2 PDG23M0070MLAJ 70 A 1.6 115 PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
PDG2X3TA100
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
B 1.7 122 (Same as J)
2 C 1.9 130
D 2.0 139
2 E 2.1 145
2 F 2.2 153
G 2.3 160
2 H 2.4 170
PDG23M0100MLAJ 100 A 1.6 160 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA100 PDG2X3T100
2 B 1.7 174
(Same as J)
C 1.9 185
2 D 2.0 196
2 E 2.1 207
F 2.2 218
2 G 2.3 229
H 2.4 240
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
400 A Frame Size 3 Product Selection
PDG3 400 A Frame MCPs Where a 13x setting is All catalog numbers shown Ratings 2
cover a continuous current required for an intermediate include standard aluminum Maximum Application Voltage
range of 70 A through 400 A, FLA value, alternate dial line and load terminals (UL and CSA) 2
with trip calibration settings settings and/or MCP ratings (Digit 14 = J). For optional ● 600 Vac
from 350 A through 4500 A. should be used. terminals, use T (aluminum),
● 250 Vdc 2
All devices are a W (copper) or other options in
3-pole configuration in a 400 A A High Calibration MCP Digit 14 as described in the Note: For DC applications, actual
frame and have a single for the 400 A frame device Frame Size 3 circuit breaker trip levels are approximately 40% 2
interrupting capacity as an is also available for special section of the catalog. higher than values shown.
IEC 60947-2 (Annex O) applications where the
IEC Instantaneous Circuit
2
instantaneous circuit breaker. ampere rating of the Terminal catalog numbers
Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
PDG3 MCPs include nine trip
disconnecting means cannot
be less than 115% of the
listed in the table are for one
side of the MCP; order 2 sets Capacity (kA) 2
settings, corresponding to motor full load ampere rating. for line and load if ordering Icu Ics
5x through 10x of the separate. 240 Vac 100 100
2
continuous amperage rating 415 Vac 70 53
of the device and each
690 Vac 15 7.5
2
corresponding to 13x the
250 Vdc 22 22
minimum FLA value shown 2
in the table below.
2
PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration
Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor
PDG33M0070MSAJ 70 A 5.0 350 4 27.0–30.7 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300
B 5.7 400 30.8–33.8
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper) 2
C 6.3 440 33.9–36.9 2
D 6.9 480 5 37.0–40.3
E 7.5 525 40.4–43.8 2
F 8.1 570 43.9–46.9
G 8.7 610 47.0–50.7
2
H 9.4 660 50.8–53.8
2
I 10.0 700 53.9–57.2
PDG33M0100MSAJ 100 A 5.0 500 5 38.5–43.4 PDG3X3TA300
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper)
2
B 5.7 565 43.5–48.0
C 6.3 626 48.1–53.0 2
D 6.9 690 53.1–57.6
E 7.5 750 57.7–62.3
2
F 8.1 810 62.4–67.3
2
G 8.8 875 67.4–71.9
H 9.4 935 72.0–76.9 2
I 10.0 1000 77.0–81.6
PDG33M0125MSAJ 125 A 5.0 625 5 48.1–53.8 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300 2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 700 53.9–59.9
C 6.2 780 60.0–66.1
2
D 6.9 860 66.2–72.3 2
E 7.5 940 72.4–78.4
F 8.2 1020 78.5–83.8 2
G 8.7 1090 83.9–89.9
H 9.4 1170 90.0–96.1
2
I 10.0 1250 96.2–102.0
2
2
2

PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued

2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2 MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
2 B 5.6 840 64.7–71.9
2 C 6.2 935 72.0–79.2

D 6.9 1030 79.3–86.5
2 E 7.5 1125 86.6–93.8
F 8.1 1220 93.9–101.1
2 G 8.8 1315 101.2–108.4
H 9.4 1410 108.5–115.3
2 I 10.0 1500 115.4–122.4
2 PDG33M0175MSAJ 175 A 5.0 875 5 67.4–75.3 PDG3X3TA300

(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper)
B 5.6 980 75.4–83.8
2 C 6.2 1090 83.9–92.3
D 6.9 1200 92.4–100.7
2 E 7.5 1310 100.8–109.2
2 F 8.1 1420 109.3–117.6

G 8.7 1530 117.7–126.1
2 H 9.4 1640 126.2–134.6
I 10.0 1750 134.7–142.8
2 PDG33M0200MSAJ 200 A 5.0 1000 5 77.0–86.5 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300
B 5.6 1125 86.6–96.1
2 C 6.3 1250 96.2–105.7
2 D 6.9 1375 105.8–115.3

E 7.5 1500 115.4–124.9
2 F 8.1 1625 125.0–134.6
G 8.8 1750 134.7–144.2
2 H 9.4 1875 144.3–153.8
I 10.0 2000 153.9–163.3
2 PDG33M0225MSAJ 225 A 5.0 1125 5 86.6–97.3 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300
2 B 5.6 1265 97.4–108.4
C 6.3 1410 108.5–118.8
2 D 6.9 1545 118.9–129.9
E 7.5 1690 130.0–140.7
2 F 8.1 1830 140.8–151.5
2 G 8.8 1970 151.6–162.3

H 9.4 2110 162.4–173.0
2 I 10.0 2250 173.1–183.6
2 B 5.6 1405 108.1–119.9
C 6.2 1560 120.0–132.3

2 D 6.9 1720 132.4–144.2
2 E 7.5 1875 144.3–156.1

F 8.1 2030 156.2–168.0
2 G 8.7 2185 168.1–179.9
H 9.4 2340 180.0–192.3
2 I 10.0 2500 192.4–204.0
2
2

2.2
2
B 5.6 1690 130.0–144.2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper) 2
C 6.3 1875 144.3–158.4
2
D 6.9 2060 158.5–173.0
E 7.5 2250 173.1–187.6 2
F 8.1 2440 187.7–201.9
G 8.8 2625 202.0–216.1 2
H 9.4 2810 216.2–230.7
I 10.0 3000 230.8–244.9
2
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T350
(Copper)
2
B 5.6 1970 151.6–168.4
C 6.3 2190 168.5–185.3 2
D 6.9 2410 185.4–201.9
E 7.5 2625 202.0–218.8
2
F 8.1 2845 218.9–235.7
2
G 8.8 3065 235.8–252.6
H 9.4 3285 252.7–269.2 2
I 10.0 3500 269.3–285.7
PDG33M0400MSAJ 400 A 5.0 2000 5 153.9–173.0 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T400 2
B 5.6 2250 173.1–192.3
C 6.3 2500 192.4–211.5
2
D 6.9 2750 211.6–230.7
2
E 7.5 3000 230.8–249.9
F 8.1 3250 250.0–269.2 2
G 8.8 3500 269.3–288.4
H 9.4 3750 288.5–307.6 2
I 10.0 4000 307.7–326.9
2
PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration 2
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Full Load Included Optional Optional 2
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
PDG33M0400MHAJ 400 A 5.6 2250 5 173.1–194.5 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T400 2
B 6.3 2530 194.6–216.1
C 7.0 2810 216.2–237.6
2
D 7.7 3090 237.7–259.5
2
E 8.4 3375 259.6–281.1
F 9.1 3655 281.2–302.6 2
G 9.8 3935 302.7–324.1
H 10.5 4215 324.2–346.1 2
I 11.3 4500 346.2–368.1
2
2
2
2
2

600 A Frame Size 3 Product Selection

2 PDG3 600 A MCPs cover a continuous amperage rating other options in Digit 14 as Note: For DC applications, actual
continuous current range of of the device, and each described in the Frame Size 3 trip levels are approximately 40%
2 250 A through 600 A, with corresponding to 13x the circuit breaker section of the higher than values shown.
trip calibration settings from minimum FLA value shown in catalog. IEC Instantaneous Circuit
2 1250 A through 6000 A. All the table below. Where a 13x
Terminal catalog numbers Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
devices are a 3-pole setting is required for an Capacity (kA)
configuration in a 600 A frame intermediate FLA value listed in the table are for one
2 and have a single interrupting alternate dial settings and/or side of the MCP; order 2 sets Icu Ics
capacity as an IEC 60947-2 MCP ratings should be used. for line and load if ordering 240 Vac 100 100
2 (Annex O) instantaneous separate. 415 Vac 70 53
circuit breaker. All catalog numbers shown 690 Vac 25 13
2 include standard line and load Ratings
250 Vdc 42 42
PDG3 MCPs include nine trip terminals (Digit 14 = J). For Maximum Application Voltage
settings, corresponding to optional terminals, use T (UL and CSA)
2 5x through 10x of the (aluminum) W (copper) or ● 600 Vac
2 ● 250 Vdc
2 PDG3 600 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration

2 MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W)
2 PDG33MH250MSAJ 250 A 5.0 1250 6 96.2–108.0 PDG3X3TA401H

(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA400H
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T401H
(Copper)
B 5.6 1405 108.1–119.9
2 C 6.2 1560 120.0–132.2

D 6.9 1720 132.3–144.1
2 E 7.5 1875 144.2–156.1
F 8.1 2030 156.2–168.0
2 G 8.7 2185 168.1–179.9
H 9.4 2340 180.0–192.2
2 I 10.0 2500 192.3–204.0
PDG33MH300MSAJ 300 A 5.0 1500 6 115.4–129.9 PDG3X3TA401H PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3T401H
2 B 5.6 1690 130.0–144.1
2 C
D
6.3
6.9
1875
2060
144.2–158.4
158.5–173.0
2 E 7.5 2250 173.1–187.6

F 8.1 2440 187.7–201.8
2 G 8.8 2625 201.9–216.1
H 9.4 2810 216.2–230.7
2 I 10.0 3000 230.8–244.9
2 B 5.6 1970 151.5–168.4
C 6.3 2190 168.5–185.3

2 D 6.9 2410 185.4–201.8
E 7.5 2625 201.9–218.7
2 F 8.1 2845 218.8–235.7
2 G 8.8 3065 235.8–252.6

H 9.4 3285 252.7–269.1
2 I 10.0 3500 269.2–285.7

2 B 5.6 2250 173.1–192.2
C 6.3 2500 192.3–211.4

2 D 6.9 2750 211.5–230.7
E 7.5 3000 230.8–249.9
2 F 8.1 3250 250.0–269.1
G 8.8 3500 269.2–288.4
2 H 9.4 3750 288.5–307.6
2 I 10.0 4000 307.7–326.9

2.2
2
PDG33M0450MSAJ 450 A 5.0 2250 6 173.1–194.5 PDG3X3TA630 — PDG3X3T630
B 5.6 2530 194.6–216.1
(Aluminum) (Copper) 2
C 6.2 2810 216.2–237.6
2
D 6.9 3090 237.7–259.5
E 7.5 3375 259.6–281.4 2
F 8.1 3660 281.5–303.0
G 8.8 3940 303.1–324.5 2
H 9.4 4220 324.6–346.1
I 10.0 4500 346.2–368.1
2
(Aluminum)
— PDG3X3T630
(Copper)
2
B 5.6 2810 216.2–240.3
C 6.3 3125 240.4–264.5 2
D 6.9 3440 264.6–288.4
E 7.5 3750 288.5–313.7
2
F 8.2 4080 313.8–336.4
2
G 8.8 4375 336.5–359.1
H 9.3 4670 359.2–384.5 2
I 10.0 5000 384.6–408.2
PDG33M0600MSAJ 600 A 5.0 3000 6 230.8–259.5 PDG3X3TA630 — PDG3X3T630 2
(Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 3375 259.6–289.1
C 6.3 3760 289.2–316.8
2
D 6.9 4120 316.9–346.1
2
E 7.5 4500 346.2–375.3
F 8.1 4880 375.4–403.7 2
G 8.8 5250 403.8–433.0
H 9.4 5630 433.1–461.4 2
I 10.0 6000 461.5–507.7
2
Note: 800 and 1200 A, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.
Additional Information
2
Terminals Accessories Weights and Dimensions 2
Available terminal MCPs and MCCBs for each MCPs have the same
configuration for MCPs follow frame use a common set of dimensions and weight as the
3-pole version of the
2
the same guidelines as accessories. Available
presented for each circuit accessories are presented in respective circuit breaker,
breaker frame. Additional each corresponding Power shown in each frame section. 2
terminals, including control Defense circuit breaker frame
wire, StrandAble and other section (i.e., PDG1 2
options are presented in each accessories are found in the
Power Defense circuit Frame Size 1 section, PDG2 2
breaker frame size section. accessories in the Frame Size
2 section and PDG3 in the
Frame Size 3 section).
2
2
2
2
2
2

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A)

2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
2 Power Defense motor
protection circuit breakers
MPCBs meet requirements
for motor branch protection,
PXR motor protection
electronic trip units provide
MPCBs provide:
● UL 489 branch circuit
(MPCBs) use Power Xpert including disconnecting motor protection basic and
2 Release (PXR) electronic trip means, branch circuit short- advanced functionality in PXR
protection
● UL 508 and CSA C22.2
units to provide branch circuit protection and 10 and PXR 25, respectively. No. 14 motor protection,
2 protection and motor overload protection. MPCBs Features include phase and meet IEC 60947-2 and
protection in a combined can be used with a contactor unbalance protection, phase 50947-4 requirements
2 device, eliminating the need to eliminate the need for loss protection, over/under
for a separate overload relay. overload relay and still create voltage protection, cold/hot Power Defense MPCBs
2 Motor protection PXR units manual motor control. Typical start (thermal memory) meet:
build upon the features branch motor starter protection, programmable ● UL 489
available in standard PXR trip applications are protected by high load alarms,
2 units and add motor three components consisting programmable relays for
● CSA
protection application specific of: breaker, contactor and multiple functions to include
● C22.2 No. 5-02
2 functionality and features. overload relay, or fuse, pre-detection trip relay, Class ● IEC 60947-2
MPCBs are available in Power contactor and overload relay. 5/10/15/20/30 protection, ● GB 14048.2-2008
2 Defense Frame Sizes 2 and 3, The MPCB application- energy metering,
and share accessories and specific protection eliminates communications, cause-of-
catalog numbering the need for motor overload trip indication, events logging,
2 convention with the relay and reduces the breaker health monitoring,
respective molded case traditional three-component harmonics, ground fault alarm
2 circuit breaker frames. starter assembly down to and protection, and more.
two elements—the MPCB
2 and the contactor. ZSI allows the MPCB to
interface with upstream
feeder or branch circuit
2 breakers for coordination
and reduction of arc flash
2 for some applications.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
2
Power Defense MPCB—Frame Size 2 (15–200 A)
Frame Size 2 covers a range of 15 A through 200 A using PXR 10 and PXR 25 2
electronic trip units. In is available in 3-pole configurations.
2
Catalog Designator F G K M N P
2
ANSI kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200 2
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
600 Vac 14 18 22 25 25 25 2
250 Vdc — — — — — —
2
240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150 2
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 65 2
480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 65 40
525 Vac 18 13 20 13 25 13 25 13 25 13 25 13
2
660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
2
250 Vdc — — — — — — — — — — — —
2
Power Defense MPCB—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) 2
Frame Size 3 covers a range of 45 A through 600 A using PXR 10 and PXR 25 electronic trip units.
In is available in 3-pole configurations. Frame 3 has two specific constructions, one each for 400 A and 600 A.
The 600 A construction provides a unique capability to be used at 400A and below in applications requiring
2
higher fixed instantaneous levels. This is accomplished by using a letter H in the 7th digit of the catalog number.
2
Catalog Designator F G K M N P 2
240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200
2
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100 2
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65
125/250 Vdc — — — — — — 2
240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
2
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
2
440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50
480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40 2
525 Vac 18 5 20 7.5 25 10 30 15 35 25 40 25
660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 15 7.5 20 10 20 10 2
125/250 Vdc — — — — — — — — — — — —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

MPCB with Power Xpert (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)

2
Frame Size 2 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2
PD G 2 3 M 0200 P8M J
2
Product Series
2
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1 J = Line and load terminals
2 K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V
0150
0200
= 150 A
= 200 A
P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1 K = Line only terminals
N = 85 kA at 480 V
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V
2 Frame Size 2 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2 F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI J = Line and load terminals
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1 W= Optional line and load
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A terminals
2 M= 65 kA at 480 V 0200 = 200 A
P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1
N = 85 kA at 480 V
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V
2 Frame Size 3 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2 PD G 3 3 M 0200 P8M J
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
2 G = 35 kA at 480 V 0250 = 250 A P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1 J = Line and load terminals
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1 K = Line only terminals
M= 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A L = Load only terminals
2 N = 85 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A High Override
P = 100 kA at 480 V (600 A Frame)
(600 A Frame)
2 Frame Size 3 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)

2 F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
(100% UL Rated) G = 35 kA at 480 V 0250 = 250 A P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1 J = Line and load terminals
2 K = 50 kA at 480 V
M= 65 kA at 480 V
0400
0600
= 400 A
= 600 A
P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1 K = Line only terminals
2 (600 A Frame)
(600 A Frame)
2
2 Note
1 See “Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options” table on the next page for # (Available Configured Options).
2
2
2

2.2
#(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
2
— Relays Relays Relays Relays
— Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus 2
— — ZSI — ZSI
PXR ETU LSI LSIG — — — CAM CAM
PXR 10 B 8 — N — — — —
2
PXR 25 P 8 9 — M W D Y 2
Descriptions of PXR Configured Options 2
Relays—2 Form A contacts
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A)
ZSI—Zone Selective
Interlocking output
Auxiliary Power 2
● Connection included with
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1,
ALM2, ALM Common)
● Interface: 2 wires
(Zout, Zcomm)
all PXR 25 trip units 2
● Required for
● Programmable to indicate
breaker conditions
● Includes ability to turn
ON and OFF, and
communications, relays,
and metering accuracy
2
indicate signals
● Field installable for PD-2 ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A 2
Note: PD-2 includes 1 relay CAM—CAM Link connection ● Interface: 2 wires
Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
when used in conjunction with (requires a CAM module per 2
Modbus RTU. breaker)
Modbus—Modbus RTU
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to 2
CAM IL for details)
directly from the breaker
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA,
● Communications Adapter
2
MODBB, MODBG) Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
● No additional modules 2
required
● Field installable for PD-2 2
Available Settings and Features on PXR Motor Protection Electronic Trip Units
2
Full Load Amperes (le) Current Settings
PD-2
Full Load Amperes (le) Current Settings
PD-3
2
0060 0100 0150 0200 0125 0250/H250 0400/H400 0600
Option Setting 60 A 100 A 150 A 200 A 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 2
PXR 10 1 15 A 32 A 50 A 70 A 45 A 90 A 160 A 250 A
2 16 A 35 A 60 A 80 A 50 A 100 A 175 A 275 A
2
3 20 A 40 A 63 A 90 A 60 A 110 A 200 A 300 A
4 25 A 50 A 70 A 100 A 63 A 125 A 225 A 320 A
2
5 30 A 60 A 80 A 110 A 70 A 150 A 250 A 350 A
2
6 35 A 63 A 90 A 125 A 80 A 160 A 275 A 400 A
7 40 A 70 A 100 A 150 A 90 A 175 A 300 A 450 A 2
8 45 A 80 A 110 A 160 A 100 A 200 A 320 A 500 A
9 50 A 90 A 125 A 175 A 110 A 225 A 350 A 550 A 2
10 60 A 100 A 150 A 200 A 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 1 A increments. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Trip Profile (Trip Class and Short Delay / Ground Fault Advanced Motor
2 Phase Unbalance) Instantaneous Settings Protection Settings Protection Settings
2 PXR 10—Dial 2 MPCBs with PXR 10 include

a combined Short Delay and
MPCBs with PXR 25 include
an option to add ground fault
MPCBs with PXR 25 trip units
also include additional
Dial Trip Phase
Instantaneous trip dial. The protection. Ground fault application specific motor
2 Setting Label Class Unbalance
short delay time may be protection includes the protection features. These
1 A 5 OFF programmed to trip ability to trip and/or alarm features may be set to trip
2 2 B 10 OFF instantaneously or with a on a determined ground the breaker, alarm (indication
3 C 15 OFF
delay for coordination or to fault condition. via programmable relays),
2 4 D 20 OFF
avoid nuisance tripping.
Phase Unbalance
or disabled.
Breakers with PXR 25 trip
● Pickup Level: Over Voltage
2 5 E 30 OFF units include independent
adjustments for short delay 5 to 35% of load ● Pickup Level:
6 F 5 ON
and instantaneous settings. ● Trip Time: 180 to 720 V
2 7 G 10 ON
1 to 300 seconds ● Trip Time:
8 H 15 ON PXR 10—Dial 3 Programmable ● Action taken: May be set to 1 to 300 seconds
2 9 J 20 ON Isd trip or alarm Under Voltage
10 K 30 ON Setting (x Ie) tsd (sec)
2 1 3 Default to INST;
Phase Loss ● Pickup Level:
60 to 670 V
PXR 10—Phase Unbalance programmable via ● Pickup Level:
2 Settings Programmable by PXPM
2 4
USB and PXPM to Fixed at 75% of load
● Trip Time:
1 to 300 seconds
3 5 INST, 0.150 or 0.300.
● Pickup Level: INST / 0.150 / 0.300
● Trip Time:
2 5 to 35% of load 4 6 1 to 240 seconds Voltage Unbalance (between
● Trip Time: 5 7 ● Action taken: May be set to phase-to-phase readings)
2 1 to 300 seconds 6 8 trip or alarm ● Pickup Level:
● Action taken: MPCB will 5% to 25% difference
7 10
2 trip at selected protection
8 11 1
Metering and ● Trip Time:
settings Communications Capabilities 1 to 300 seconds
2 PXR 25—Programmable
9 12 1
PXR 25 motor protection Phase Rotation
10 13 1
Trip Class trip units include the same ● Configuration:
2 ● Trip Class: Note advanced metering functions ABC or CBA sequence
5–30 in increments of 0.1
1 If setting value exceeds the fixed as the MCCB PXR 25, including: ● Time: Fixed at 200 ms
2 magnetic override of the device, the
setting defaults to the magnetic override ● Energy metering to 1% Reverse Power
Phase Unbalance
value (please verify these values in the accuracy
2 ● Pickup Level: time current curves or PXR user manual. ● Current metering to 0.5%
● Pickup Level:
1–65,500 kW
5 to 35% of load
accuracy
2 ● Trip Time: PXR 25—Programmable
● Multiple communications
● Trip Time:
1 to 300 seconds
1 to 300 seconds Short delay pickup—Isd (x Ie)
options, including standard
2 ● Action taken: MPCB will ● 3x–13x: Programmable in Modbus RTU Total Harmonic Distortion
trip at selected protection increments of 0.1x ● Line-to-line and line-to-
settings
● Load alarm at two
2 Short delay time—tsd (sec) programmable levels neutral voltage
Phase Loss ● 0.05–0.50: Programmable between 50% to 120% ● Each phase and neutral
2 ● Pickup Level: in increments of 0.01 sec ● Programmable relays for current
Fixed at 75% of load ● Fixed (flat) response remote indication ● 1st through 29th at 60 Hz/
2 ● Trip Time: 1st through 35th at 50 Hz
1 to 240 seconds Instantaneous pickup—Ii (x In)
2 ● Action taken: May be set to ● 3x–Maximum:
Programmable in
trip or alarm
increments of 0.1x
2 ● Maximum is determined
by frame fixed magnetic
2 override level
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Additional Information
Terminals Accessories Weights and Dimensions 2
Available terminal MPCBs and MCCBs for each MPCBs have the same
configuration for MPCBs frame use a common set of dimensions and weight as the 2
follow the same guidelines as accessories. Available 3-pole version of the
presented for each circuit accessories are presented in respective circuit breaker, 2
breaker frame. Additional each corresponding Power shown in each frame section.
terminals, including control Defense circuit breaker frame 2
wire, StrandAble and other section (i.e., PDG2
options are presented in each
Power Defense circuit
accessories are found in the
Frame Size 2 section and
2
breaker frame size section. PDG3 in the Frame Size 3
section). All Frame Size 2 2
MPCBs are automatically
configured with 1 Form C 2
auxiliary switch.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Communications and Software Contents

2 Description Page
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2 Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2 Communication Adapter Modules
2 Modbus RTU RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-105
Power Xpert Protection Manager. . . . . . . . . V4-T2-105
2
2 Communications and Software
2 Communication Adapter Modules
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Supported Protocols

Designed for Power Defense ● Improve safety with ● Compact, DIN rail mounted ● Modbus TCP/IP CAM
circuit breakers, the Power remote breaker control via design with removable for PXR 20, 20D, 25
2 Xpert Release (PXR) programmable discrete I/O terminal blocks offers space Catalog number:
communications adapter ● Perform at-a-glance savings, fast installation PXR-ECAM-MTCP
2 module (CAM) expands the troubleshooting with and accessibility for
communication capabilities of maintenance
● PROFIBUS DP CAM
front-facing LEDs that for PXR 20, 20D, 25
2 the PXR 20, PXR 20D and communicate status ● Dimensions: Catalog number:
PXR 25 electronic trip units. and alarms 4.30 in (110 mm) H PXR-PCAM
2 When used in conjunction
with an IoT-based system,
● Simplify configuration and 1.20 in (30 mm) W
monitoring with intuitive 4.30 in (110 mm) D
the PXR-CAMs allow for
2 greater visibility into the
HTML5 web interface
(ECAM only)
facility, process or machine,
2 thus adhering to the design
principles of Industry 4.0.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.2
Modbus RTU RS-485
2
Product Description Application Description Field Installation
Power Xpert Release (PXR) With this industry standard Field-installable options are 2
trip units have optional protocol, the PXR trip units available on the PXR 20
integral Modbus RTU can supply real-time data for Power Defense frames 2
communication on the such as voltage, current, 2, 5 and 6. See catalog
PXR 20. Modbus RTU power, health and status numbers below: 2
comes standard on the to any Modbus RTU client
PXR 20D and 25. without any additional
● Field installable Modbus
external device. RTU with Relay for PD-2: 2
PDG2XMODRTUREL
● Field installable Modbus 2
RTU for PD-5 and 6:
PDG56XMODRTU 2
2
Power Xpert Protection Manager 2
Product Description Features and Benefits 2
Eaton’s Power Xpert ● Set point configuration: Secondary Injection Testing Trip/Alarm Waveform
Protection Manager (PXPM) allows direct-to-trip unit or
software provides a clean, offline setup, including
The secondary injection test PXPM’s trip/alarm waveform 2
function utilizes a separate feature allows PXR trip units
intuitive user interface duplication of settings circuit that injects a signal in to capture and display the
enabling unmatched control, between units parallel with and representative breaker state leading up to
2
testing and troubleshooting. ● Control mode: capture of the output of the current the last trip or alarm event,
The software is free to waveforms, reset trip unit sensor. All the built-in provided that auxiliary power 2
download and can run all or set the date/time protection circuitry and is connected.
standard features on any PC. ● Real-time data: provides routines respond per the
Available waveform data
2
Licenses can be purchased to information regarding all settings in the breaker. The
includes minimum and
unlock premium features: status and metered data PXPM software can initiate
testing of long delay trip, maximum phase current, 2
secondary injection testing direction from the trip unit voltage and frequency. Using
short delay trip, instantaneous
and trip/alarm waveform. ● Event summaries: stores
trip, maintenance mode and this information increases 2
up to 200 events, detailed uptime by identifying issues
Communication between information on the most ground (earth) fault trip via
PXPM and PXR trip units is recent (10 trip and 10 the USB communication. causing an event and 2
made via USB or through minimized breaker wear
alarm) events, and time The current sensor test by identifying potential
connected networks. adjustments to the real- utilizes a separate circuit to tripping issues faster,
2
time clock create a signal that is directed without the need for
● Reports: allows for the though the Rogowski coil. expensive standalone 2
formatting and printing of This signal will verify testing equipment.
real-time data of performed continuity and functionality
Feature license catalog
2
secondary injection tests of the Rogowski coil.
number: PXPM-SW-WAVE
Feature license catalog 2
number: PXPM-SW-TEST
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Special Applications
2
Extreme Temperature In addition to ambient 50 °C Calibrated Breakers All Eaton circuit breaker cases
2 Applications temperature, other factors
must be taken into account in
Special non-UL listed are molded from a glass-
polyester material, which
The Technical Data section of calibrations are available for
the application of circuit does not support the growth
2 this catalog (Pages V4-T2-12
breakers in system designs.
50 °C ambient temperatures
for breakers equipped with of fungus. Any parts that are
–V4-T2-20) presents
permissible loads for each These include altitude, power thermal-magnetic trip units, susceptible to the growth of
2 breaker type at ambient factor, cable size and type, and for separate thermal- fungus will require special
temperatures ranging from load types, and others. magnetic trip units. Breakers treatment for application in
2 40 °C through 70 °C. The Additional details on these equipped with electronic trip these types of conditions.
tables are presented as an can be found in Eaton’s units can operate reliably For this application, add suffix
2 aid in selecting breakers Consulting Application Guide. in ambient temperatures of J1 to digits 19–20 on a Power
appropriate for the application. 100% Rated Breakers 50 °C, and do not require Defense catalog number to
2 Per industry standards, Molded case circuit breakers
specific calibration. order.
breakers are calibrated to are designed to carry rated For this application on High Altitude Applications
2 perform at an ambient current in open air at the thermal-magnetic breakers,
Low-voltage circuit breakers
temperature of 40 °C. calibrated temperature for the trip unit digits (11–13) of
must be progressively de-
2 Thermal-magnetic breakers an indefinite period of time
without tripping. Molded case
the Power Defense circuit
breaker catalog number are rated for voltage and current
are temperature sensitive,
circuit breakers are typically changed, from TFF and TFA carrying capacity at altitudes
and at temperatures above
2 40 °C will carry less current applied in an enclosure, there- to VFF and VFA, respectively. above approximately 6000 ft.
fore the National Electrical Details for these are provided The thinner air at higher
than their continuous current
2 rating.This high temperature Code (Article 220.10b) within each frame section. altitudes reduces cooling and
requires that all overcurrent dielectric characteristics
condition promotes nuisance
2 tripping and can create protection devices be loaded Freeze-Tested Circuit compared to denser air found
to a maximum of 80% of their Breakers at lower altitudes.
unacceptable temperature
2 conditions inside the breaker
and at the terminals. To
continuous current rating,
unless specifically listed for
Power Defense circuit
breakers may be ordered with
Please consult the product
line, Technical Resources
prevent these issues, the 100% applications. Breakers freeze testing for applications
2 ambient temperature load listed for 100% applications in extreme cold conditions.
Center, or Eaton’s Consulting
Application Guide for specific
derating values presented in specifically outline, on the This option uses special de-rating details.
2 the technical data section nameplates, a minimum size lubrication and mechanical
must be followed. Additionally, enclosure, the minimum operation is verified at –40 °C.
2 special 50 °C calibrated ventilation (if needed), and
For this application, add suffix
breakers are available— the minimum conductor size
for application at 100% rating. J2 to digits 19–20 on a Power
2 note that these do not
carry a UL Listing. Defense catalog number to
Power Defense circuit order.
2 Electronic breakers are breakers are available in
Fungus/Moisture Treated
insensitive to ambient 100% rated configurations,
Breakers
2 temperature within a certain
range and are not likely to
as presented in each section
of the catalog. Power Molded case circuit breakers
nuisance trip. However, if Defense breakers rated for are suited for operation in 0%
2 the ambient temperature 100% use the designator to 95% noncondensing
significantly exceeds 40 °C PDF in Digits 1–3 of the humidity environments. As is
2 the electronic circuitry or catalog number. the case with all electrical
other internal components equipment, application in a
It is important to understand
2 could become damaged.
that using 100% rated
condition or environment
Power Defense electronic above this humidity level
breakers is not always the
2 breakers are designed with
circuitry to initiate a tripping
best choice for every system
should be avoided. Breakers
applied in these environments
design. Consideration should
operation to provide self- should be protected by the
2 protection to the electronic
be given to any present or
proper NEMA rated enclosure
future factors that could
components in the event the (or of appropriate IP rating),
2 internal temperature reaches
affect the overall system
design, and an understanding
and maintained dry. If such
to an unsafe level. operating conditions cannot
of NEC Article 210.20a in
2 application of these products.
be met, special treatment
of the circuit breaker should
be considered to minimize
2 the possibility of operational
problems.
2
2
2

2.2
400 Hz Applications Reverse Fed Applications
Some specialty equipment All Power Defense molded An Eaton facility authorized to
2
requires 400–415 Hz power case circuit breakers shipped modify MCCBs under UL File
systems. Due to the complete from Eaton’s E7819 may convert a standard 2
increased resistance in these factory are capable of being circuit breaker of this type to
systems, circuit breakers reverse fed, with the power a reverse-feed capable device 2
typically require de-rating. source feeding the lower side per UL parameters following
Additionally, cable and bus
sizes used at 400–415 Hz are
(typically considered the load
side) of the circuit breaker.
specific procedures. 2
not based on standard UL specifies parameters for Frame Sizes 1 and 2 always
National Electrical Code circuit breakers to be applied ship complete from the 2
tables for 60 Hz applications, in reverse-feed applications, factory and are always
and larger cross sections are which are met by Power reverse-feed capable. Frame
Sizes 3, 4, 5 and 6 may ship
2
necessary. Defense circuit breakers. This
as complete circuit breakers,
Eaton’s Power Defense
typically includes a factory
or as separate frames and trip 2
seal and no “Line” or “Load”
molded case circuit breakers markings. All Frame Sizes 1 units if ordered separately.
may be used for overcurrent and 2 (PDG1 and PDG2)
2
protection on these systems. Motor Circuit Protector
circuit breakers are always devices are not capable of
Please consult with the shipped in this configuration. being reverse fed.
2
product line or Technical
Resources Center for specific
information to order breakers
Breakers that ship as frames
only (available in Frame Sizes
2
and terminals for use on 3–6), for field installation of
400–415 Hz systems. trip units, are marked for 2
standard application, with
Breakers labeled for use in
400 Hz systems are not
the line side marked at the 2
top and the load side at the
recognized by UL, therefore
do not carry a UL Listing.
bottom, and meet UL 2
requirement for standard
applications.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Contents
2 Description Page
2 Series G
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109
2 Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-110
V4-T2-111
2 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-118
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-119
2 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-133
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
2 NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-169
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-178
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-189
V4-T2-193
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-196
2 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-200
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
2 Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-205
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
Learn Drawings
Online Online
2
2
2 Product Overview
2 Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for

UL, CSA and IEC Applications
The EG, JG and LG frames are
designed around space-saving
The Most Logically Designed Thorough In-Plant Testing
Contact Assembly The quality, dependability and
Eaton Series G molded case footprints. The NG and RG
2 circuit breakers provide use the proven Eaton Series C
The flexibility and outstanding
performance characteristics
reliability of every Eaton
Circuit Breaker is ensured by
increased performance in ND and RD designs. of Eaton circuit breakers are a thorough program of in-
2 considerably less space than
The Series G family includes made possible by the best plant testing. Two calibration
standard circuit breakers or contact designs in circuit tests are conducted on every
five frame sizes in ratings
2 comparable fusible devices.
from 15 to 2500 amperes. breaker history. Our pole of every circuit breaker
The “G” signifies global Series G offers a choice of technology creates a high- to verify the trip mechanism,
2 applications: Series G circuit several interrupting capacities speed “blow-open” action operating mechanism,
breakers are marked with UL, up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC using the electromechanical continuity and accuracy.
2 CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA (200 kA at 240 volts AC). forces produced by high-level
fault currents. Current Limiting
KEUR listings. Other Characteristics
Series G molded case circuit
2 advantages include:
breakers are also available in Eaton circuit breakers are Circuit breakers are current
● Field-fit accessories direct current options. Please operated by a toggle-type limiting because of their
2 ● Common accessories see Specialty Breakers mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free from
high repulsion contact
through 630 amperes Section 2.6 for more details. arrangement and use of
the handle so that the
2 ● Electronic trip units from Standard calibration is 40 °C. contacts cannot be held
state-of-the-art arc
20 to 2500 amperes extinguishing technology.
For applications in high closed against short circuit
2 ● UL-listed and IEC-rated, ambient temperature currents. Tripping due to Eaton offers one of the most
30 mA ground fault/earth conditions, 50 °C factory overload or short circuits is complete lines of current
2 leakage modules calibration is available on clearly indicated by the limiting breakers in the
● Built-in ground fault thermal-magnetic breakers position on the handle. This industry. The industrial
(not UL).
2 protection down to remarkably fast and
dependable contact action is
breakers are available in
current limiting versions with
20 amperes
designed to enhance safety. interrupting capacities up to
2 200 kA at 480 V without
fuses in the same physical
2 size as standard and high
interrupting capacity
2 breakers.

Series G
2.3
Operating Mechanisms
Eaton circuit breakers have The toggle handle snaps into As an additional switching Positions of the Toggle
2
a toggle handle operating the TRIPPED position if the position indicator for EG- to Handle Drive
mechanism, which also breaker is tripped by one of RG-Frame circuit breakers, 2
serves as a switching position its overcurrent, short circuit, there are two windows on
indicator. The indicator shows shunt or undervoltage the right and on the left of the 2
the positions of: ON, OFF and releases. Before the circuit toggle handle, in which the OFF ON Tripped
Reset
TRIPPED. breaker can be reclosed
following a trip-out, the toggle
switching state is indicated
by means of the colors
2
handle must be brought red, green and white
beyond the OFF position corresponding to the ON, 2
(RESET). The circuit breaker OFF and TRIPPED positions
can then be reclosed. respectively. 2
2
Eaton Series G circuit Global Third-Party
2
breakers meet applicable UL Certification
489 and IEC 60947-2 2
Certification marks ensure
standards. product compliance with the
Molded case circuit breakers total standard via the third
2
from Eaton are designed to party witnessing of tests
conform with the following by globally recognized 2
international standards: independent certification
organizations. 2
● Australian Standard AS ● National Electrical ● Union Technique de
2184 and AS 3947-2 Manufacturers Association l’Electricite Standard NF C KEMA is a highly recognized,
molded case circuit Standards Publication No. 63-120, low voltage independent international 2
breakers AB1-1993 molded case switchgear and control organization that offers
● British Standards circuit breakers gear circuit breaker certification and inspection 2
Institution Standard ● South African Bureau of requirements facilities for equipment in
EN60947.2 Standards, Standard SANS ● Verband Deutscher many industries. The KEMA- 2
156, Standard Specification Elektrotechnike KEUR mark is the highest
● International certification an electrical
Electromechanical for molded case circuit (Association of German
product can receive from
2
Commission breakers Electrical Engineers)
KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2
Recommendations IEC ● Swiss Electro-Technical Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and molded case circuit breakers 2
60947.2 circuit breakers Association Standard SEV are KEMA tested and
947.2, Safety Regulations control gear, circuit
for circuit breakers breakers certified. These breakers are 2
also listed in accordance with
● Japanese T-Mark standard
molded case circuit
UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2
No. 5-02.
2
breakers
KEMA, UL and CSA provide 2
ongoing follow-up testing and
inspections to ensure that 2
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers continue to meet
their exacting standards.
2
ISO Certification 2
Eaton circuit breakers are
manufactured in ISO® 2
certified facilities.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Product Selection Overview

2
Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications
2 True rms Sensing
2 Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing,
permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to
nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present.
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
2 Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic The optional Digitrip RMS Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
trip units are available with 310+ LSI and LSIG provide units are available with Eaton can also provide the user with
2 Eaton Series G circuit additional flat response short R-Frame circuit breakers 800 power and energy monitoring
breakers JG, LG, NG and RG, time delay adjustments and through 2500 amperes. capability. Peak power
2 as well as Series C FD, KD,
LD and MDL circuit breakers.
an instantaneous setting to
provide LSI curve shaping
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
provide unparalleled system
demand, present power
demand, and total energy, as
capability. protection with the added well as forward and reverse
2 Digitrip 310+ trip units are convenience of a local energy can be monitored with
equipped with an integrated Ir Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and display. this unit.
2 switch that allows users to LSIG units are available with
modify the continuous ground fault pickup and flat Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
current rating of the breaker
2 without having to replace a
response ground fault delay.
Ground fault alarm options Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line
rating plug. This provides are available with trip and no units are available with up to voltage, as well as system
2 further flexibility for trip functionality as a means nine curve shaping choices power factor. Both
coordination in systems. to notify users of a ground achieved by adjusting up to parameters are displayed in
2 The trip units may be used fault condition with the option seven switches on the front
of the unit for optimum
the digital display window
in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications. to maintain the breaker and are supported by LEDs to
system coordination.
2 The Digitrip 310+ offers true
rms sensing, is front
online.
Maximum curve shaping
indicate which parameter is
being displayed.
adjustable and has an optional Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units flexibility is provided by
2 local display of current and can effectively coordinate dependent long and short Harmonics Monitoring
cause of trip. with both sophisticated delay adjustments that are
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
2 upstream power breakers as long delay pickup (Ir) based,
are capable of displaying
Curve Shaping well as downstream thermal- depicted on the front of the
unit by the blue portion of the values of current harmonics
2 When selectively coordinated
magnetic breakers, making
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units time-current curve. in the digital display window.
systems are called for, the cost-effective reliable Percentage of harmonic
2 Digitrip RMS 310+ will choice for selectively Additional coordination content can be monitored for
provide a cost-effective coordinated systems. capability can be provided by each phase, up to the 27th
2 solution for a variety of
applications.
utilizing the short delay and
ground fault zone selective
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion value can
Thermal Memory
interlocking features available be calculated and displayed.
2 The standard Digitrip RMS All Digitrip RMS trip units on these trip units.
310+ includes an adjustable incorporate a long delay. Communications
2 short time pickup setting
encompassing an I2t ramp
Thermal memory prevents the System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 910 units have
system from cumulative
function that provides the overheating due to repeated Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 built-in communications
2 basic LS curve shaping overcurrent events that may models of trip units provide options to allow all protection,
function. occur in quick succession. long delay, short delay, monitoring, and control
2 instantaneous, and ground information to be transmitted
Digitrip 310+ trip units also Field Testing fault cause of trip LEDs on back to a central location via
include selectable long time the front of the unit. Their
2 delay (tLD) and pickup A field test kit is available for display shows a magnitude of
the Eaton PowerNet™
system.
settings (Ir). A rating plug is Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units. trip information, as well as
2 not required. remote signal contacts, for Field Testing
Arcflash Reduction improved system alarming. Integral field testing capability
2 Maintenance Mode (ARMS)
is provided on all 610 and 910
ARMS is an available feature System Monitoring trip units. No additional test
2 on KD, LG, LD, MDL, NG and
RG frames with 310+
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units set is needed to perform both
have the capability to monitor trip and no trip field testing.
electronic trip units. This
2 feature increases worker
phase currents, as well as
neutral or ground currents.
safety by providing an This information is displayed
2 accelerated instantaneous trip on a large digital display
unit to reduce arc flash. mounted on the unit.
2 Additionally, LG, NG and RG
frames with the ARMS feature
include a fully adjustable
2 instantaneous setting.

Series G
2.3
Product Selection Guide
2
Electronic Trip Units
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910
2
RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910 2
JG 2
2
2
RG LG/NG
Breaker Type
2
Series G frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame 2
Ampere rating 20–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
Interrupting rating at 415 V 35, 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 2
Trip Unit Sensing
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes
2
Protection and Coordination 1
2
Protection Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG
Fixed rating plug (In) 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long delay Adjustable lr switch Yes Yes No No 2
Long delay setting VAR/frame VAR/frame 0.5–1.0 x (ln) 0.5–1.0 x (ln)
Long delay time I2t at 6x 10 seconds 3 10 seconds 3 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
High load alarm 1.05 lr 1.05 lr 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir
Short delay Short delay setting VAR/frame 4 VAR/frame 4 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 2
Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms
Short delay time flat No I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2
Short delay time ZSI No Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Independent adjustable Inst. setting No Yes 5 Yes Yes
2
Instantaneous setting No VAR/frame 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) 2
Discriminator No No Yes 6 Yes 6
Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Ground fault Ground fault setting VAR/frame 7 VAR/frame 7 25–100% x (ln) 7 25–100% x (ln) 7
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x No No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms
2
Ground fault delay flat I–300 ms I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Ground fault ZSI No Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault thermal memory No No Yes Yes 2
Notes
In = Rating plug rating. 2
Ir = Long delay setting.
1
2
310+ details are included by frame in Pages V4-T2-148 (JG), V4-T2-166 (LG), V4-T2-176 (NG), and V4-T2-187 (RG).
310+ trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug.
2
3 310+ trip units have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 2–14 seconds.
4 JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–9X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 2X–6X% x (In). 2
5 LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting.
6
7
LS, LSG only. 2
Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
2
2
2

Series G
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued

2 RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910
2
JG
2
2
RG LG/NG
2
LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A) LSI (A), LSIG
2 System Diagnostics
2 Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 2 Yes 1 2 Yes Yes

Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes
2 Remote signal contacts No No Yes Yes
System Monitoring
2 Digital display Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Yes
Current Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Yes
2 Voltage No No No Yes
2 Power and energy No No No Yes

Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes
2 Power factor No No No Yes
System Communications
2 PowerNet No No No Yes
Field Testing
2
Testing method Test set 4 Test set 4 Integral Integral
2 Notes
1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED).
2 2 RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs.

3 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06).
4 Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST230V).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
Ratings
Frames EG, JG and LG 2
EG JG LG
2
2
2
2
Maximum rated current (amperes) 125, 160 1 250 400, 630 2 2
Breaker type 3 B B E S S H H C E S H C U X E S H C U X
Number of poles 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 2
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz
NEMA®, 240 Vac 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
2
UL, CSA
480 Vac — 18 25 — 35 — 65 100 25 35 65 100 150 200 35 50 65 100 150 200 2
600 Vac 4 — — 18 — 22 — 25 35 18 18 25 35 50 50 18 25 35 50 65 65
125/250 Vdc 5 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50 2
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
Ics 25 25 35 43 43 50 50 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
2
380–415 Vac Icu — 18 25 — 40 — 70 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 70 100 150 200
Ics
2
— 18 25 — 30 — 35 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 53 100 150 200
660–690 Vac Icu — — — — — — — — 12 12 14 16 18 18 12 20 25 30 35 35 2
Ics — — — — — — — — 6 6 7 12 14 14 6 10 13 15 18 18
125/250 Vdc 5 Icu 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50 2
Ics 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
Ampere range 15–160 A 1 20–250 A 100–630 A 2
2
Trip Units
F = Fixed
FT-FM
AT-FM
FT-AM
AT-AM
FT-AM
AT-AM
2
A = Adjustable Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
T = Thermal
M = Magnetic
2
Interchangeable — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2
Built-in ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Thermal Fixed thermal ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2

magnetic
Adjustable ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
thermal 2
Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable
Electronic LS — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
RMS 7
LSI — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
LSG — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2
LSIG — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2
ALSI — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ALSIG — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Notes
2
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 2
3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489.
4 EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac. 2
5 Two poles in series.
6 125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers.
7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
2
2

Series G
Frames NG and RG
2 NG RG
2
2
2
2
Maximum rated current (amperes) 800, 1200 800, 1200 800, 1200 1600 1 800 1600, 2000, 2500 1600, 2000, 2500
2 Breaker type S H C 2 S U H C2
Number of poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 3 3, 4 3, 4
2 Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
2 NEMA,
UL, CSA
240 Vac 85 100 200 — 200 125 200
480 Vac 50 65 100 — 150 65 100
2 600 Vac 25 35 65 — 65 50 65
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 85 100 200 85 — 135 200
2 Ics 85 100 100 85 — 100 100
380–415 Vac Icu 50 70 100 50 — 70 100
2 Ics 50 50 50 50 — 50 50
2 660–690 Vac Icu 20 3 25 3 35 20 3 — 25 3 35 3

Ics 10 13 18 10 — 13 18
2 250 Vdc Icu — — — — — — —
Ics — — — — — — —
2 Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 1600 A 800 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
2 Trip units Electronic

(Digitrip RMS 310+)
Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910)
Interchangeable — — — — — ■5 ■5
2 Built-in ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Electronic 4 LI — — — — — ■6 ■6
LS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2 LSI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
LIG — — — — — ■6 ■6
2 LSG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2 LSIG
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ALSI —
2 ALSIG ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■
Utilization category A A A A A A A
2 Notes
1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed.
2 2 Not KEMA-KEUR listed.
3 IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested.
2 4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.

5 RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped
6 Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
General Specifications
2
All Series G Frames
EG JG LG NG RG 2
Maximum rated current In depending on the version 160 A 1 250 A 400, 630 A 2 800, 1200, 1600 A 3 1600, 2000, 2500 A
Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2
2
Main conducting paths 500 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 2
Auxiliary circuits 500 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2
Main conducting paths 6 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
2
Rated operational voltage Ue
2
IEC 415 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
NEMA 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 2
UL and CSA listed Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes
Permissible ambient temperature –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C 2
Permissible load for various ambient temperatures 4 5 4 5 4 5 — —
close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current 2
of the circuit breaker
Circuit breakers for plant protection 2
At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
At 50 °C 96% 92% 96% 94% 96% 91% 91% 91% 2
At 55 °C 93% 87% 94% 90% 93% 86% 85% 85%
At 60 °C 91% 83% 92% 87% 90% 82% 81% 81%
2
At 70 °C 86% 73% 88% 80% 84% 70% 70% 70% 2
Circuit breakers for motor protection
At 40 °C — 100% 100% — — 2
At 50 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 55 °C — 100% 100% — —
2
At 60 °C — 100% 100% — —
2
At 70 °C — 90% 90% — —
Circuit breakers for starter combinations and
isolating circuit breakers
2
At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 2
At 50 °C 100% 100% 100% 91% 91%
At 55 °C 96% 96% 95% 85% 85% 2
At 60 °C 91% 82% 90% 81% 81%
At 70 °C 86% 88% 84% — —
2
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit
breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms) 2
Two conducting paths in series 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 6 6
For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc 2

NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms) 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 6 6
Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc 2

Notes
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG. 2
4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value.
5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value.
6 Not suitable for DC switching.
2
2
2
2

Series G
All Series G Frames, continued

2 EG JG LG NG RG
2 Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2

in combination with lockable rotary drives
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to

IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz)
For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-113.
Endurance (operating cycles) 10,000 10,000 8,000 3,000 3,000

2 Maximum switching frequency 300 1/h 240 1/h 240 1/h 60 1/h 60 1/h
2 Conductor cross sections and terminal types for

main conductors
Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals
2 Solid or stranded 2.5 to 95 mm2 50 to 150 mm2 95 to 240 mm2 — — —

Finely stranded with end sleeve 2.5 to 50/70 mm2 35 to 120 mm2 70 to 150 mm2 — — —
2 Busbar — — — 600 A Optional Optional
Tightening torque for box terminals 5.6 Nm 20 Nm 42 Nm 31 Nm 31 Nm —
2 Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces 5.6 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm 6 Nm 50 Nm 20 Nm
Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with
2 terminal connection or terminal strip
Solid 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2
2 Finely stranded with end sleeve 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2
2 With brought-out cable ends — 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
Tightening torque for fitting screws — 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm
2 Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated
current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage
releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary)
2 at three-phase symmetrical load) 400 A: 600 A:
For plant protection 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
2 As isolating circuit breaker 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
2 For starter combinations 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W — —

For motor protection — 45 W 65 W 120 W — —
2 Permissible mounting position
90
90
2
90
90
2
2 Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes (except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Auxiliary Switches
2 Rated thermal current lth 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A
Rated making capacity 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A
2 AC-14 AC-14 AC-14 AC-15 AC-15
Rated operational voltage 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 600 V 600 V
2
Rated operational current 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6A 6A
2 DC-13 DC-13
Rated operational voltage 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V
2 Rated operational current 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.25 A 0.5/0.25 A
Backup fuse 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A
2 Miniature circuit breaker 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
All Series G Frames, continued
EG JG LG NG RG
2
Releases
2
Undervoltage releases (“r” releases)
Response voltage: 2
Drop (breaker tripped) Us 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70%
Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 2
Power consumption in continuous operation at:
50/60 Hz 12 Vac — — — 1.9 VA 2.9 VA
2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac 0.72 VA 3.9 VA 3.9 VA 2.4 VA 3.1 VA 2
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 1.15–1.78 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.3–4.1 VA 3.4–6.0 VA
50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac 0.96–1.25 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 3.4–4.2 VA 3.3–3.8 VA 2
2
50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA — —
2
12 Vdc — — — 2.6W 3.4W
24 Vdc 0.70 W 3.1W 3.1W 3.6W 4.3W 2
48–60 Vdc 1.12–1.76W 2.0–3.1W 2.0–3.1W 3.5–5.5W 4.8–7.2W
110–125 Vdc 0.94–1.21W 1.6–2.2W 1.6–2.2W 2.9–3.6W 3.3–3.8W 2
220–250 Vdc 1.45–1.86W 3.1–4W 3.1–4W 4.8–6.3W 6.6–7.5W
Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms
2
Shunt Trips
2
Shunt trips (“f” releases)
Response voltage: 2
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110%
Power consumption in (short time) at: 2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac 10–41 VA 87–405 VA 87–405 VA 98–475 VA 612 VA
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 139–210 VA 710–1105 VA 710–1105 VA 24–50 VA 403–666 VA
2
50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac — — — — — 2
50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac 83–360 VA 66–432 VA 66–432 VA 67–432 VA 396–1896 VA
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac — 127–188 VA 127–188 VA 76–110 VA 1596–2156 VA 2
50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac 418–1080 VA — — — —
50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac — 34–60 VA 34–60 VA 19–42 VA 230–384 VA
2
12–24 Vdc 29–120 W 164–631 W 164–631 W 145–610 W 396 W
2
48–60 Vdc 475–720 W 830–1580 W 830–1580 W 67–102 W 341–528 W
110–125 Vdc 99–121 W 112–150 W 112–150 W 121–150 W 264–350 W 2
220–250 Vdc — 40–58W 40–58 W 46–55 W 374–475 W
Maximum load duration Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically 2
Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms
Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip)
2
Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70)
2
Self-protected, will trip above 1250 for EG125; 2500 4000/6300 12,500 20,000
1600 for EG160
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Dimensions and Weights

2 Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
EG JG LG
2 H W D H W D H W D
2 Single-pole 5.50 (139.7) 1.00 (25.4) 2.99 (76.0) — — — — — —

Two-pole 5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) — — —
2 Three-pole 5.50 (139.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 5.48 (140.0) 4.09 (104.0)
Four-pole 5.50 (139.7) 4.00 (101.6) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 5.34 (135.6) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 7.22 (183.0) 4.09 (104.0)
2
Series G—Frame NG and RG
2
NG RG
2 H W D H W D
Single-pole — — — — — —
2 Two-pole — — — — — —
Three-pole 16.00 (406.0) 8.25 (210.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 15.50 (394.0) 9.75 (229.0)
2 Four-pole 16.00 (406.0) 11.13 (280.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 20.00 (508.0) 9.75 (229.0)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
2 EG JG LG NG RG
Single-pole 0.85 (0.39) — — — —
2
Two-pole 1.57 (0.71) 11.3 (5.13) — — —
2 Three-pole 2.28 (1.04) 5.06 (2.30) T/M

5.31 (2.41) ETU
12.36 (5.61) T/M
13.04 (5.92) ETU
46.8 (21.3) 103.0 (47.0)
2 Four-pole 2.85 (1.29) 6.76 (3.07) T/M

7.12 (3.23) ETU
16.27 (7.39) T/M
16.92 (7.68) ETU
62.0 (28.3) 118.4 (54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) Contents
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-130
2
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-131 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-133
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151 2
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-169
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-178 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-189
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . .
V4-T2-193
V4-T2-196
2
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-200
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-205
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208 2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
2
2
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) 2
Product Description
EG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
2 E G H 3 015 FF G
2
Frame Terminations/Hardware
2 E
Amperes
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps Metric
Number of Poles
2 Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 1 = One
016 1
015
E = Imperial end caps
G = Line/load standard
Imperial
Metric
2 = Two 020 B = Bolt-on —
2 Performance
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
025
030 Trip Unit
600Y/347 480 415 240 7 = Four—neutral 100% protected 032 1
2 B — 18 18 25 035
FF = Fixed fixed
AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic
E 18 25 25 35 040
KS = Molded case switch
2 S 22 35 40 85
045
050
H 25 65 70 100 060
2 C 35 100 100 200 063 1
070
K Molded case switch 2
080
2 090
100
2 110
125
160 1
2
Notes
2 1 Cannot be UL rated.
2 Available only as 125 and 160 A sizes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
2
EG-Frame EG-Frame—18/18
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3 2
Adjustable 2 Adjustable 2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, 2
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15 EGB1015FFG EGB2015FFG EGB3015FFG — EGB4015FFG —
2
20 EGB1020FFG EGB2020FFG EGB3020FFG — EGB4020FFG EGB4020AFG 2
25 EGB1025FFG EGB2025FFG EGB3025FFG EGB3025AFG EGB4025FFG EGB4025AFG
30 EGB1030FFG EGB2030FFG EGB3030FFG — EGB4030FFG — 2
35 EGB1035FFG EGB2035FFG EGB3035FFG — EGB4035FFG — 2
2
2
63 EGB1063FFG EGB2063FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3063AFG EGB4063FFG EGB4063AFG 2
2
160 — — EGB3160FFG EGB3160AFG EGB4160FFG EGB4160AFG
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
2
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable

2
EG-Frame—25/25
2 EG-Frame
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
2 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic
2 Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 15 EGE2015FFG EGE3015FFG — EGE4015FFG —

16 EGE2016FFG EGE3016FFG — EGE4016FFG —
2 20 EGE2020FFG EGE3020FFG — EGE4020FFG EGE4020AFG
25 EGE2025FFG EGE3025FFG EGE3025AFG EGE4025FFG EGE4025AFG
2 32 EGE2032FFG EGE3032FFG EGE3032AFG EGE4032FFG EGE4032AFG

45 EGE2045FFG EGE3045FFG EGE3050AFG EGE4045FFG —
2 50 EGE2050FFG EGE3050FFG — EGE4050FFG EGE4050AFG

160 — EGE3160FFG EGE3160AFG EGE4160FFG EGE4160AFG
2
Notes
2 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
EG-Frame EG-Frame—40/35
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
2
Adjustable2 Adjustable 2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed 2
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15 EGS1015FFG EGS2015FFG EGS3015FFG — EGS4015FFG — 2
16 EGS1016FFG EGS2016FFG EGS3016FFG — EGS4016FFG —
20 EGS1020FFG EGS2020FFG EGS3020FFG — EGS4020FFG EGS4020AFG 2
25 EGS1025FFG EGS2025FFG EGS3025FFG EGS3025AFG EGS4025FFG EGS4025AFG
2
2
40 EGS1040FFG EGS2040FFG EGS3040FFG EGS3040AFG EGS4040FFG EGS4040AFG 2
50 EGS1050FFG EGS2050FFG EGS3050FFG EGS3050AFG EGS4050FFG EGS4050AFG 2
2
2
160 — — EGS3160FFG EGS3160AFG EGS4160FFG EGS4160AFG
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
EG-Frame—70/65
2 EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
2 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic
2 Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 15 EGH1015FFG EGH2015FFG EGH3015FFG — EGH4015FFG —

16 EGH1016FFG EGH2016FFG EGH3016FFG — EGH4016FFG —
2 20 EGH1020FFG EGH2020FFG EGH3020FFG EGH3020AFG EGH4020FFG EGH4020AFG
25 EGH1025FFG EGH2025FFG EGH3025FFG EGH3025AFG EGH4025FFG EGH4025AFG

45 EGH1045FFG EGH2045FFG EGH3045FFG — EGH4045FFG EGH4050AFG
2 50 EGH1050FFG EGH2050FFG EGH3050FFG EGH3050AFG EGH4050FFG —

2 Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable)
2
EG-Frame—100/100
EG-Frame 2
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
2
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amps at 40 °C 1 Number Number Number Number 2
15 EGC3015FFG — EGC7015FFG —
2
20 EGC3020FFG EGC3020AFG EGC7020FFG EGC7020AFG 2
25 EGC3025FFG EGC3025AFG EGC7025FFG EGC7025AFG
30 EGC3030FFG — EGC7030FFG — 2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Switches 4
Catalog 2
Number
EGK3125KSG 2
EGK7125KSG
EGK3160KSG 2
EGK7160KSG
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed.
2
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100%
neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 2

4 Molded case switches may open above 1250 A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware)
2
EG-Frame EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
2 Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amps at 40 °C Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
2 15 EGB1015FFB EGB2015FFB EGB3015FFB
20 EGB1020FFB EGB2020FFB EGB3020FFB

2

2
EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 EG-Frame
2 Maximum
Continuous
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Catalog
Catalog
2 15 EGS1015FFB EGS2015FFB EGS3015FFB

25 EGS1025FFB EGS2025FFB EGS3025FFB
2


2 Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
EG-Frame EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Maximum
Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
2
15 EGH1015FFB EGH2015FFB EGH3015FFB
2
2
30 EGH1030FFB EGH2030FFB EGH3030FFB 2
2
2
2
2
Load Terminals
2
Terminal, (Package of Three Terminals)
Maximum Breaker Body Metric Wire Catalog
Amps Material Wire Type Range mm2 AWG Wire Range Number 2
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
15–50 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14–1/0 3TA125EF
2
60–125 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6–3/0 3TA150EF 2
Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
EG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
3T125EF 3TA125EF 3TA150EF 3TA160EFK EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric Control Wire Multiwire
2 EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric
EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric
Terminal Kit
GCWTK
Connectors
EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial
2 EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial
EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial
2
Line and Load Terminals
2
(Package of
Maximum Terminal Three Terminals)
2 Breaker Body Metric Wire AWG Wire Catalog
Amps Material Wire Type Range mm2 Range Number
2 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
125 Steel Al 4–6 #14-3/0 3T125EF 1
2 125 Steel Cu 2.5–95 #14-3/0 3T125EF 1
2 125 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14-1/0 3TA125EF

160 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6-3/0 3TA150EF
2 160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 3TA160EFK
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 4TA160EFK 2
2
EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals
as standard equipment.
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely
2 with screw and washer.
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer.
2 Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical
connections. Includes hardware.
2
Notes
2 1 Standard line and load terminals.
2 Four-pole kit with four terminals.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Control Wire Terminal Kit Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier)
Catalog The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers 2
Number only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
Control wire terminal kit 5652B38G01 (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. 2
Package of 12—priced individually
Terminal End Covers 2
For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load Conductor Opening Diameter Catalog
terminals only. Inches (mm) Number 2
6.35 (0.25) EEC3K
Interphase Barriers
10.41 (0.41) EEC4K
2
Catalog
Number
Multiwire Connectors 2
Interphase barriers EIPBK Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
Package includes 2 barriers terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit 2
breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate
The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation
between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering.
distribution terminal blocks. 2
Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield
Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three 2
mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side
Catalog
Number
(OFF) end. 2
DIN rail adapter—single-pole EF1DIN EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3) 1
2
DIN rail adapter—two-pole EGDIN
DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole EF34DIN
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
2
Metal DIN rail adapter—three-pole EGGDDIN
125 3 14–2 3TA125E3K
2
Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker 125 6 14–6 3TA125E6K
or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order S/N 8703C80G08. Note 2
1 For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.”
Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog 2

number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Single-
pole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware
8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100. 2
Terminal Shields 2
The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in three-
and four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also 2
available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is
mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by
pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced
2
per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged
individually. 2
Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection 2
Number Catalog
of Poles Number 2
3 EFTS3K
4 EFTS4K
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2 EG-Frame Accessories
2 Reference
Single-
Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2 Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-213 — — — ■ — — ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-214 — — — ■ — — ■ — — —
2 External Accessories
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 End cap kit V4-T2-129 —
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-129 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-129 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Base mounting hardware V4-T2-129 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Terminal shields V4-T2-129 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal end covers V4-T2-129 — — — ● ● ● — — — —
2 Interphase barriers V4-T2-129 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-211 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — —

Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — —
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-211 — — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-211 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical operator V4-T2-211 — — — ● ● ● — — — —
2 ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-496 — — — — — — —
2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-209 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 SA and SB
Legend
2 ■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
2 ● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 2
Circuit 2 34
Breaker Number 220–240 380–415 690 125 250
Type of Poles 120 Icu Ics 277 347 Icu Ics 480 600Y/ 347 Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics 2
EGB125 1 35 25 25 18 — — — — — — — 10 10 — —
2, 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10
2
EGE125 2, 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10
EGS125 1 100 85 43 35 22 — — — — — — 35 35 — —
2
2, 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35
EGH125 1 200 100 50 65 25 — — — — — — 42 42 — —
2
2, 3, 4
EGC125 5 3, 4
—
—
100
200
50
200
—
—
—
—
70
100
35
100
65
100
25
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
42
42
42
42
2
EGB160 2 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10
2
EGE160 2 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10
EGS160 2 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35 2
UL 489 Current Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S) 2
EGC 240 V/200 kA 24.5 0.6310
EGC 480 V/100 kA 24.5 0.6310
2
EGC 600 Y/35 kA 20.0 1.392
2
Dimensions and Weights 2
EG-Frame
2
Number
2
1 1.00 (25.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2
3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
4 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2
EG-Frame 2
Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View 2
CL
Breaker
0.14 (3.6) R 1.85
(47.0)
2
0.90 3.03 5.50
(22.9) CL
Handle
(77.0) (139.7)
2
1.30 Dia.
(33.0)
0.47 (11.9)
0.94 (23.9)
3.00 2.77 2
(76.2) (70.4)
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2

EG-Frame 2
Number of Poles
EG Breaker Type
EGB125
1
1.5 (0.68)
2
2.0 (0.91)
3
3.0 (1.36)
4
4.9 (1.82)
2
Notes 2
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 IEC only.
3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
2
4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
5 Current limiting per UL 489. 2
2
2

Series G
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2
10.26
2 (260.6)
4.75
0.55 (14.0)
(120.6)
2
1.49
2 0.50
(12.7)
1.00 (37.8)
(25.4)
3.98
(101.1)
2 1.00
3-Pole
2.98
(25.4) (75.7)
2 1.50 0.50
2.00
(50.8)
(38.1) (12.7)
2
2 4.78
(121.4) 0.70 (17.8)
8.59
2 (218.2)
0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
2
2
3.01
0.09 (76.5)
2 (2.29) 3.17
2.75 (80.5)
2 (69.9)
0.78
(19.8)
2
2 EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
9.66
2 4.17 (245.4)
0.56 (105.9)
2 (14.2) 3.61
(91.7)
2
2 1.00
(25.4) 0.50
2 3.00 1.00 (12.7)
(76.2) (25.4)
2 1.00
(25.4)
2
2 3.20
(81.3)
4.17
2 (105.9)
2
2
2.75 0.09
2 (69.9) (2.3)
2
0.78
2 (19.8)
0.41
2 (10.4)

Series G
2.3
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) Contents
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-119 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-134
V4-T2-135
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-146
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-149
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151 2
V4-T2-193
V4-T2-196
2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
2
2
2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) 2
Product Description
JG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
2 J G S 3 250 FA G C
2
Frame Rating
2 J Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
Amperes F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC)
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Number of Poles 050 F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC)
2 = Two 070
2 Performance
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
080
090
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
600 480 415 240 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected 100
2 E 18 25 25 65 125 M = Metric end caps
E = Imperial end caps
Metric
Imperial
150
S 18 35 40 85 G = Line/load standard Metric
160
2 H 25 65 70 100 175 W = Without terminals
C 35 100 100 200 200
2 U 50 150 150 200 225
250 AA = Adj. adj.
Trip Unit
X 50 200 200 200
FA = Fixed adj.
2 K Molded case switch
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
2 32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
2 NN = Frame only (250 A only; no trip unit)
2 Trip Unit
2 JT 4 100 FA B20
2
Trip Features (ETU Only) 12
2 JT
2 = Two
Number of Poles
Amperes
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
Blank= No feature
B20= High load alarm
3 = Three T/M ETU FA = Fixed adj. B21= Ground fault alarm, with trip
2 4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected 080 050 KS = Molded case switch B22= Ground fault alarm, no trip
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected 090 100 33 = 310+ electronic LS ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2 100
110
160
250
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
125 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
2 150
160
175
2 200
225
2 250
Notes
2 1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts 2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 2
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
2
Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic 1 Magnetic Magnetic 1
Maximum
Continuous Magnetic Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number Number
70 350–700 JGE2070FAG JGE3070FAG — JGE4070FAG — 2
90 450–900 JGE2090FAG JGE3090FAG — JGE4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGE2100FAG JGE3100FAG JGE3100AAG JGE4100FAG JGE4100AAG
2
125 625–1250 JGE2125FAG JGE3125FAG JGE3125AAG JGE4125FAG JGE4125AAG 2
160 800–1600 — — JGE3160AAG — JGE4160AAG 2
2
2
2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole 2
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
2
Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic 1 Magnetic Magnetic 1
Maximum
Continuous Magnetic Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number Number
70 350–700 JGS2070FAG JGS3070FAG — JGS4070FAG — 2
90 450–900 JGS2090FAG JGS3090FAG — JGS4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGS2100FAG JGS3100FAG JGS3100AAG JGS4100FAG JGS4100AAG
2
125 625–1250 JGS2125FAG JGS3125FAG JGS3125AAG JGS4125FAG JGS4125AAG 2
160 800–1600 — — JGS3160AAG — JGS4160AAG 2
2
2
Notes 2
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal,
2 Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Adjustable Thermal,
Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic 1 Magnetic Fixed Magnetic 1
Maximum
2 Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 70 350–700 JGH2070FAG JGH3070FAG — JGH4070FAG —

90 450–900 JGH2090FAG JGH3090FAG — JGH4090FAG —
2 100 500–1000 JGH2100FAG JGH3100FAG JGH3100AAG JGH4100FAG JGH4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGH2125FAG JGH3125FAG JGH3125AAG JGH4125FAG JGH4125AAG
2 150 750–1550 JGH2150FAG JGH3150FAG — JGH4150FAG —
2 160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAG — JGH4160AAG

2 Notes
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150
2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2
2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Maximum Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1 2
Continuous Magnetic Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number 2
70 350–700 JGC3070FAG — JGC4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGC3080AAG — JGC4080AAG 2
90 450–900 JGC3090FAG — JGC4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGC3100FAG JGC3100AAG JGC4100FAG JGC4100AAG
2
125 625–1250 JGC3125FAG JGC3125AAG JGC4125FAG JGC4125AAG 2
150 750–1550 JGC3150FAG — JGC4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGC3160AAG — JGC4160AAG 2
175 875–1750 JGC3175FAG — JGC4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGC3200FAG JGC3200AAG JGC4200FAG JGC4200AAG 2
225 1125–2250 JGC3225FAG — JGC4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGC3250FAG JGC3250AAG JGC4250FAG JGC4250AAG
2
2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting 2
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
2
Maximum
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number 2
70 350–700 JGU3070FAG — JGU4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGU3080AAG — JGU4080AAG
2
90 450–900 JGU3090FAG — JGU4090FAG — 2
100 500–1000 JGU3100FAG JGU3100AAG JGU4100FAG JGU4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGU3125FAG JGU3125AAG JGU4125FAG JGU4125AAG 2
150 750–1550 JGU3150FAG — JGU4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGU3160AAG — JGU4160AAG
2
175 875–1750 JGU3175FAG — JGU4175FAG —
2
225 1125–2250 JGU3225FAG — JGU4225FAG — 2
Notes
2
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200

2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting
2 Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
2 Maximum Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1
2 Amperes Range Number Number Number Number
70 350–700 JGX3070FAG — JGX4070FAG —
2 80 400–800 — JGX3080AAG — JGX4080AAG
90 450–900 JGX3090FAG — JGX4090FAG —
2 100 500–1000 JGX3100FAG JGX3100AAG JGX4100FAG JGX4100AAG

150 750–1550 JGX3150FAG — JGX4150FAG —
2 160 800–1600 — JGX3160AAG — JGX4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGX3175FAG — JGX4175FAG —
225 1125–2250 JGX3225FAG — JGX4225FAG —
2
250 1250–2500 JGX3250FAG JGX3250AAG JGX4250FAG JGX4250AAG
2
2 Molded Case Switches 3
Catalog
2 Number
JGK3250KSG
2 JGK7250KSG
Notes
2 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is
0.8 and 1.0.

2 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
3 Molded case switches will trip above
2500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%
2
Maximum Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amperes Number Number Number 2
25/25
250 JGE2250NN JGE3250NN JGE4250NN
2
40/35
2
250 JGS2250NN JGS3250NN JGS4250NN
70/65 2
250 JGH2250NN JGH3250NN JGH4250NN
100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489 2
250 — JGC3250NN JGC4250NN
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
2
250 — JGU3250NN JGU4250NN 2
250 — JGX3250NN JGX4250NN 2
25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489 1
250 — JGE3250NNC —
2
1
40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489
2
250 — JGS3250NNC —
70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 1 2
250 — JGH3250NNC —
2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog
Rating Range Number Range Number 2
70 350–700 JT2070FA JT3070FA — — JT4070FA —
80 400–800 — JT3080FA JT3080AA 2 64–100 — JT4080AA 2
2
90 450–900 JT2090FA JT3090FA — — JT4090FA —
2
100 500–1000 JT2100FA JT3100FA JT3100AA 2 80–100 JT4100FA JT4100AA 2
125 625–1250 JT2125FA JT3125FA JT3125AA 2 100–125 JT4125FA JT4125AA 2 2
150 750–1550 JT2150FA JT3150FA — — JT4150FA —
160 800–1600 — — JT3160AA 2 128–160 — JT4160AA 2 2
175 875–1750 JT2175FA JT3175FA — — JT4175FA —
2
225 1125–2250 JT2225FA JT3225FA — — JT4225FA —
2
Notes 2
1 Components—100% rated frame.
2 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
310+ Electronic Trip Units

2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-148.
2 JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units

Neutral CT for LSG
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole
2 50 JT305033 JT305032 JT305035 JT305036 JGFCT050
100 JT310033 JT310032 JT310035 JT310036 JGFCT100
2 160 JT316033 JT316032 JT316035 JT316036 JGFCT160
250 JT325033 JT325032 JT325035 JT325036 JGFCT250
2
Four-Pole 23
2 50 JT405033 JT405032 JT405035 JT405036 —

100 JT410033 JT410032 JT410035 JT410036 —
2 160 JT416033 JT416032 JT416035 JT416036 —
250 JT425033 JT425032 JT425035 JT425036 —
2
2 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Catalog
2 Description Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
2 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
2 External neutral sensor (250 A) JGFCT250

External neutral sensor (160 A) JGFCT160
2 External neutral sensor (100 A) JGFCT100
External neutral sensor (80 A) JGFCT050
2 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
2 Notes
1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the
2 neutral is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is
not adjustable.
2 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-148. 2
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25 2
Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1 2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
2
Three-Pole
50 JGE305033G JGE305032G JGE305035G JGE305036G JGFCT050 2
100 JGE310033G JGE310032G JGE310035G JGE310036G JGFCT100
2
2
Four-Pole 2
50 JGE405033G JGE405032G JGE405035G JGE405036G — 2
100 JGE410033G JGE410032G JGE410035G JGE410036G —
160 JGE416033G JGE416032G JGE416035G JGE416036G — 2
250 JGE425033G JGE425032G JGE425035G JGE425036G —
2
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35 2
Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1 2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number 2
Three-Pole
50 JGS305033G JGS305032G JGS305035G JGS305036G JGFCT050 2
100 JGS310033G JGS310032G JGS310035G JGS310036G JGFCT100
160 JGS316033G JGS316032G JGS316035G JGS316036G JGFCT160
2
250 JGS325033G JGS325032G JGS325035G JGS325036G JGFCT250 2
Four-Pole 23
50 JGS405033G JGS405032G JGS405035G JGS405036G — 2

100 JGS410033G JGS410032G JGS410035G JGS410036G —
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
2
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Three-Pole
50 JGH305033G JGH305032G JGH305035G JGH305036G JGFCT050
2
100 JGH310033G JGH310032G JGH310035G JGH310036G JGFCT100 2
160 JGH316033G JGH316032G JGH316035G JGH316036G JGFCT160
250 JGH325033G JGH325032G JGH325035G JGH325036G JGFCT250 2
Four-Pole 2
50 JGH405033G JGH405032G JGH405035G JGH405036G —
2
2
250 JGH425033G JGH425032G JGH425035G JGH425036G — 2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2

Series G
IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489

2 Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
2 Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Three-Pole
50 JGC305033G JGC305032G JGC305035G JGC305036G JGFCT050
2 100 JGC310033G JGC310032G JGC310035G JGC310036G JGFCT100
2 160 JGC316033G JGC316032G JGC316035G JGC316036G JGFCT160

250 JGC335033G JGC325032G JGC325035G JGC325036G JGFCT250
2 Four-Pole 2
50 JGC405033G JGC405032G JGC405035G JGC405036G —
2 100 JGC410033G JGC410032G JGC410035G JGC410036G —
160 JGC416033G JGC416032G JGC416035G JGC416036G —
2 250 JGC435033G JGC425032G JGC425035G JGC425036G —
2
IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489
2
Neutral CT for
2 Three-Pole
2 50 JGU305033G JGU305032G JGU305035G JGU305036G JGFCT050

100 JGU310033G JGU310032G JGU310035G JGU310036G JGFCT100
2 160 JGU316033G JGU316032G JGU316035G JGU316036G JGFCT160
250 JGU335033G JGU325032G JGU325035G JGU325036G JGFCT250
2 Four-Pole 23
50 JGU405033G JGU405032G JGU405035G JGU405036G —
2 100 JGU410033G JGU410032G JGU410035G JGU410036G —
2 160 JGU416033G JGU416032G JGU416035G JGU416036G —

250 JGU435033G JGU425032G JGU425035G JGU425036G —
2
2 IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Neutral CT for
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
2
Three-Pole
2 50 JGX305033G JGX305032G JGX305035G JGX305036G JGFCT050

100 JGX310033G JGX310032G JGX310035G JGX310036G JGFCT100
2 160 JGX316033G JGX316032G JGX316035G JGX316036G JGFCT160
250 JGX325033G JGX325032G JGX325035G JGX325036G JGFCT250
2 Four-Pole 2
2 50 JGX405033G JGX405032G JGX405035G JGX405036G —

100 JGX410033G JGX410032G JGX410035G JGX410036G —
2 160 JGX416033G JGX416032G JGX416035G JGX416036G —
250 JGX425033G JGX425032G JGX425035G JGX425036G —
2 Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
2

Series G
2.3
JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
Three-Pole Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal,
Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
2
Amperes Range Number Amperes Range Number
70 350–700 JGE3070FAGC 70 350–700 JGH3070FAGC
2
90 450–900 JGE3090FAGC 90 450–900 JGH3090FAGC 2
100 500–1000 JGE3100FAGC 100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGC
125 625–1250 JGE3125FAGC 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGC 2
150 750–1550 JGE3150FAGC 150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGC
160 800–1600 — 160 800–1600 —
2
175 875–1750 JGE3175FAGC 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGC
2
200 1000–2000 JGE3200FAGC 200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGC
225 1125–2250 JGE3225FAGC 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGC 2
250 1250–2500 JGE3250FAGC 250 1250–2500 JGH3250FAGC
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35 2
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal, 2
Maximum Adjustable Magnetic
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
2
70 350–700 JGS3070FAGC 2
90 450–900 JGS3090FAGC
100 500–1000 JGS3100FAGC 2
125 625–1250 JGS3125FAGC
150 750–1550 JGS3150FAGC
2
160 800–1600 —
2
175 875–1750 JGS3175FAGC
200 1000–2000 JGS3200FAGC 2
225 1125–2250 JGS3225FAGC
250 1250–2500 JGS3250FAGC 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker

2 IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
Neutral CT for
50 JGE305033GC JGE305032GC JGE305035GC JGE305036GC JGFCT050
2 100 JGE310033GC JGE310032GC JGE310035GC JGE310036GC JGFCT100
160 JGE316033GC JGE316032GC JGE316035GC JGE316036GC JGFCT160
2 250 JGE325033GC JGE325032GC JGE325035GC JGE325036GC JGFCT250
2
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
2 Neutral CT for
2 50 JGS305033GC JGS305032GC JGS305035GC JGS305036GC JGFCT050
100 JGS310033GC JGS310032GC JGS310035GC JGS310036GC JGFCT100
2
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 50 JGH305033GC JGH305032GC JGH305035GC JGH305036GC JGFCT050

100 JGH310033GC JGH310032GC JGH310035GC JGH310036GC JGFCT100
2 160 JGH316033GC JGH316032GC JGH316035GC JGH316036GC JGFCT160
250 JGH325033GC JGH325032GC JGH325035GC JGH325036GC JGFCT250
2 Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
JG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
T250FJ TA250FJ Endcap Kit Control Wire Rear Fed Terminals Multiwire Connectors
Terminal Kit 2
Load and Line Terminals Base Mounting Hardware 2
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
Breaker Body Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required 2
Amperes Material Wire Type Range mm2 of Conductors Number separately, order 66A2546G02.
Standard Pressure Type Terminals 2
250 Stainless steel Cu 25–185 #4–350 (1) T250FJ 1 Terminal Shields IP30
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 12 Location Number of Poles Catalog Number 2
Line or Load 2, 3 FJTS3K
JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ
4 FJTS4K
2
as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are
required, order by catalog number. 2
Interphase Barriers
Endcap Kits Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
Catalog Number
Number of Poles Metric Imperial 3 FJIPBK 3 2
3 FJ3RTWK FJ3RTDK 4 FJIPBK4 3
4 FJ4RTWK FJ4RTDK
2
Multiwire Connectors
Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end 2
or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
2
Control Wire Terminal Kit
Catalog
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, 2
Description Number insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
Package of 14 (priced individually) FJCWTK
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
2
For use with aluminum or copper terminals only.
JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
2
(Package of 3)
Rear Fed Terminals
Maximum Wires per Wire Size Kit Catalog
2
Maximum Wire Size Catalog Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number
Amperes Range AWG Cu Number
250 3 14–2 3TA250FJ3
2
250 #4–350 kcmil TA250JGRF
3TA250JGRF
250 6 14–6 3TA250FJ6 2
Notes
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker 1 Individually packed. 2
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase 2 Standard line and load.
barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
3 Individually priced.
2
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal. 2
2
2

Series G
Accessories
2
2 JG-Frame Accessories
2 Description
Reference
Page
Two- and Three-Pole
Left Center Right
Four-Pole
Left Center Right Neutral
2 Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
■ ■
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-213 — — — — —
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-213 — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-213 ■ — — ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-214 ■ — — ■ — — —
2 End cap kit V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Rear fed terminals V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-145 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 ■ ■
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-211 — — — — —
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —

Key interlock kit V4-T2-211 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-211 ● ● ● — — — —
Electrical operator V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-496 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-196 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Drawout cassette V4-T2-219 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-140 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-209 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
Note
2 1 Contact Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
Circuit
220–240 380–415 690 2
Breaker Number
Type of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics 250 23 2
JGE250 2, 3, 4 65 65 25 25 25 18 12 6 10
JGS250 2, 3, 4 85 85 40 40 35 18 12 6 22
2
JGH250 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22 2
JGC250 4 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 35 16 12 42
JGU250 4 3, 4 200 200 150 150 150 50 18 14 50 2
JGX250 4 3, 4 200 200 200 200 200 50 18 14 50
2
UL 489 Current Limiting Data 2
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
JGC 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820 2
JGC 480 V/100 kA 45.1 1.820
JGC 600 V/35 kA 32.8 2.140
2
JGU 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820 2
JGU 480 V/150 kA 45.1 1.820
JGU 600 V/50 kA 32.8 2.140 2
JGX 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820
JGX 480 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820
2
JGX 600 V/50 kA 32.8 2.140
2
JG 310+ Specifications 2
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
2
Breaker Type 2
Frame designation JG
Frames available 50 A, 100 A, 160 A 250 A 2
Continuous current range (A) 20–250A
Ground fault pickup (A) 10–250A 2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated Yes
2
Protection 2
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) No 2
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 5 Yes
2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5 Yes
2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5 Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG 2
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories Yes 2
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 2
4 Current limiting per UL 489.
5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
2

Series G
JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 JG Frame
310+ Settings 50 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
2 Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
(All 310+)
2 A 20 40 63 100
B 20 45 80 125
2 C 25 50 90 150
D 30 63 100 160
2 E 32 70 110 175
2 F 40 80 125 200
G 45 90 150 225
2 H (= In) 50 100 160 250
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2 2
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7 7
2 Position 4 10 10 10 10
2 Position 5 12 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15 15
2 Position 7 20 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24 24
2 Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2x
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x 3x 3x 3x
2 Position 3 4x 4x 4x 4x

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
2 tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
(LSI, LSIG)
2 Position 2 120 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300 300
2 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 10 20 32 50
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 15 30 48 75
2 Position 3 20 40 64 100
2 Position 4 30 60 96 150
Position 5 40 80 128 200
2 Position 6 50 100 160 250
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
2 (LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300 300
2 Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1 N/A
2 Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2 N/A
Notes
2 1 Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG.
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
JG-Frame
2
Number
2
2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
2
4 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
2
JG-Frame
2
Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View
CL
Breaker
2
1.25 (31.8)
0.63 (16.0)
0.28 (7.1) 0.19 (4.8) R 3.95
(100.3)
2
3.06 2.05 (52.1) 7.00
(77.7) CL (177.8) 2
Handle
0.50
(12.7) 4.00
1.06 (27.0) 2
(101.6)
4.13 3.44
(104.9) (87.4) 2
2
2
JG-Frame
Number of Poles 2
Breaker Type 2, 3 4
JGC 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) 2
JGE 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGH 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
2
JGS 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
2
JGU 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGX 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2 4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
2 3-Pole
4.13 (104.9) 5.50
2.05
2 0.69 (139.7)
(52.1)
1.38 (17.5) 2.06 3.57 1.25
(35.1) (52.3) (90.7) (31.8) 0.63
2 (16.0)
1.88
2 R 0.19 (47.8) 6.97
3.92 5.50 3.92 (4.8) (177.0)
(99.6)
2 (139.7) (99.6) 4.93
(125.2)
0.28
7.00 11.25
(7.1)
2 (177.8) (285.8)
2 11.25
(285.8)
0.50
(139.7)
1.06
(26.9)
2
2 RESET
4.25
3.37
(85.6)
TEST
(108.0)
2
2
2.05
2 3.31
(84.1) 3.69
3.57
(90.7) 4.09
(52.1)
(93.7) 3.81 (103.9)

2 4.78 (96.8)
(121.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-164 2
V4-T2-193
V4-T2-196
2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
2
2
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) 2
Product Description
LG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
2 L G S 3 600 FA G C
2
Frame Rating
2 L Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only)
Number of Poles
Amperes
250 Terminations/Hardware
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
3 = Three 300 Terminals Mounting Hardware
2 Performance
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected 350
M = Metric end caps Metric
600 480 415 240 E = Imperial end caps Imperial
2 E 18 35 35 65 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected 600
G = Line/load standard
W = Without terminals
Metric
S 25 50 50 85 9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected 630

2 H 35 65 70 100 Trip Unit
C 50 100 100 200 AA = Adj. adj.
2 U 65 150 150 200 FA = Fixed adj.
X 65 200 200 200 KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
2 K Molded case switch
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
2 NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit)
2 Trip Unit
2 LT 3 600 FA B20
2
Trip Features (ETU Only) 12
2 LT Number of Poles Trip Unit Blank= No feature
B20= High load alarm
3 = Three Amperes AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected B21= Ground fault alarm, with trip
2 8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected
250
300
FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic
KS = Molded case switch B22= Ground fault alarm, no trip
9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected 350 33 = 310+ electronic LS ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2 400
500
2 630 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
2 Notes
1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, 2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250 LGE3250FAG LGE3250AAG LGE4250FAG LGE4250AAG 2
300 LGE3300FAG — LGE4300FAG —
320 — LGE3320AAG — LGE4320AAG 2
400 LGE3400FAG LGE3400AAG LGE4400FAG LGE4400AAG
2
500 LGE3500FAG LGE3500AAG LGE4500FAG LGE4500AAG
2
630 4 — LGE3630AAG — LGE4630AAG 2
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250 LGS3250FAG LGS3250AAG LGS4250FAG LGS4250AAG
2
300 LGS3300FAG — LGS4300FAG —
320 — LGS3320AAG — LGS4320AAG 2
400 LGS3400FAG LGS3400AAG LGS4400FAG LGS4400AAG 2
500 LGS3500FAG LGS3500AAG LGS4500FAG LGS4500AAG
2
630 4 — LGS3630AAG — LGS4630AAG 2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) 2
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number
2
250 LGH3250FAG LGH3250AAG LGH4250FAG LGH4250AAG
300 LGH3300FAG — LGH4300FAG — 2
320 — LGH3320AAG — LGH4320AAG
350 LGH3350FAG — LGH4350FAG — 2
2
600 LGH3600FAG — LGH4600FAG —
2
630 4 — LGH3630AAG — LGH4630AAG
Notes 2
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
2
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
2

Series G
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
2 IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
2 Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 250 LGC3250FAG LGC3250AAG LGC4250FAG LGC4250AAG
300 LGC3300FAG — LGC4300FAG —
2 320 — LGC3320AAG — LGC4320AAG

2 630 4 — LGC3630AAG — LGC4630AAG
2
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 250 LGU3250FAG LGU3250AAG LGU4250FAG LGU4250AAG

300 LGU3300FAG — LGU4300FAG —
2 320 — LGU3320AAG — LGU4320AAG

2 630 4 — LGU3630AAG — LGU4630AAG
2
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 250 LGX3250FAG LGX3250AAG LGX4250FAG LGX4250AAG

300 LGX3300FAG — LGX4300FAG —
2 320 — LGX3320AAG — LGX4320AAG

2 630 4 — LGX3630AAG — LGX4630AAG
Notes
2 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
2 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.

Series G
2.3
Ampere Number Catalog
2
Rating of Poles Number
400 32 LGK3400KSG
2
4 LGK4400KSG
2
630 3 32 LGK3630KSG
4 LGK4630KSG 2
2
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole 0% 2
Maximum Catalog Catalog
Amperes 3 Number Number 2
35/35
630 3 LGE3630NN LGE4630NN 2
LGE3630NNWC 4 —
50/50
2
630 3 LGS3630NN LGS4630NN
2
LGS3630NNWC 4 —
70/53 2
630 3 LGH3630NN LGH4630NN
LGH3630NNWC 4 — 2
630 LGC3630NN LGC4630NN
2
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489 2
630 LGU3630NN LGU4630NN
200/200 Current Limiting 2
630 LGX3630NN LGX4630NN
2
2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
250 LT3250FA LT3250AA LT4250FA LT4250AA 2
300 LT3300FA — LT4300FA —
320 — LT3320AA — LT4320AA
2
350 LT3350FA — LT4350FA —
2
400 LT3400FA LT3400AA LT4400FA LT4400AA
500 LT3500FA LT3500AA LT4500FA LT4500AA 2
600 LT3600FA — LT4600FA —
630 — LT3630AA — LT4630AA 2
Notes
1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes.
2
3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 2
4 100% rated frame.
5 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
6 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%.
2
2
2
2

Series G
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units

2 LS LSI LSG LSIG

Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 Three-Pole
250 LT325033 LT325032 LT325035 LT325036 LGFCT250
2 400 LT340033 LT340032 LT340035 LT340036 LGFCT400
600 LT360033 LT360032 LT360035 LT360036 LGFCT600
2 630 2 LT363033 LT363032 LT363035 LT363036 LGFCT600
Four-Pole 34
2 250 LT425033 LT425032 LT425035 LT425036 —
2 400 LT440033 LT440032 LT440035 LT440036 —

600 LT460033 LT460032 LT460035 LT460036 —
2 630 2 LT463033 LT463032 LT463035 LT463036 —
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2 Catalog
Description Number
2 Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
2 External neutral sensor (630 A) LGFCT630

External neutral sensor (400 A) LGFCT400
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
2
Notes
2 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
2 4 Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and 2
Mounting Hardware) 1
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2
Neutral CT
Ampere
LS
Catalog
LSI
Catalog
LSG
Catalog
LSIG
Catalog
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
2
Three-Pole 3
2
250 LGE325033G LGE325032G LGE325035G LGE325036G LGFCT250
2
400 LGE340033G LGE340032G LGE340035G LGE340036G LGFCT400
600 LGE360033G LGE360032G LGE360035G LGE360036G LGFCT600 2
630 4 LGE363033G LGE363032G LGE363035G LGE363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5 2
250 LGE425033G LGE425032G LGE425035G LGE425036G —
400 LGE440033G LGE440032G LGE440035G LGE440036G — 2
600 LGE460033G LGE460032G LGE460035G LGE460036G —
630 4 LGE463033G LGE463032G LGE463035G LGE463036G —
2
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2
Neutral CT
LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2 2
Three-Pole 3
250 LGS325033G LGS325032G LGS325035G LGS325036G LGFCT250 2
400 LGS340033G LGS340032G LGS340035G LGS340036G LGFCT400
600 LGS360033G LGS360032G LGS360035G LGS360036G LGFCT600
2
630 4
Four-Pole 56
LGS363033G LGS363032G LGS363035G LGS363036G LGFCT600
2
250 LGS425033G LGS425032G LGS425035G LGS425036G — 2
400 LGS440033G LGS440032G LGS440035G LGS440036G —
600 LGS460033G LGS460032G LGS460035G LGS460036G — 2
630 4 LGS463033G LGS463032G LGS463035G LGS463036G —
2
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Neutral CT 2
LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Three-Pole 3 2
250 LGH325033G LGH325032G LGH325035G LGH325036G LGFCT250
400 LGH340033G LGH340032G LGH340035G LGH340036G LGFCT400 2
600 LGH360033G LGH360032G LGH360035G LGH360036G LGFCT600
630 4 LGH363033G LGH363032G LGH363035G LGH363036G LGFCT600 2
Four-Pole 56
250 LGH425033G LGH425032G LGH425035G LGH425036G —

2
2
630 4 LGH463033G LGH463032G LGH463035G LGH463036G —
2
Notes
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2
2
6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. 2

Series G
IC Rating at 415/480 V
2 Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
2 IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Neutral CT
2 Ampere
LS
Catalog
LSI
Catalog
LSG
Catalog
LSIG
Catalog
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
2 Three-Pole 3
2 250 LGC325033G LGC325032G LGC325035G LGC325036G LGFCT250

400 LGC340033G LGC340032G LGC340035G LGC340036G LGFCT400
2 Four-Pole 56
250 LGC425033G LGC425032G LGC425035G LGC425036G —
2 400 LGC440033G LGC440032G LGC440035G LGC440036G —
600 LGC460033G LGC460032G LGC460035G LGC460036G —
2 630 4 LGC463033G LGC463032G LGC463035G LGC463036G —
2 IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Neutral CT
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2
Three-Pole 3
2 250 LGU325033G LGU325032G LGU325035G LGU325036G LGFCT250
400 LGU340033G LGU340032G LGU340035G LGU340036G LGFCT400
2 600 LGU360033G LGU360032G LGU360035G LGU360036G LGFCT600
630 4
2 LGU363033G LGU363032G LGU363035G LGU363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5
2 250 LGU425033G LGU425032G LGU425035G LGU425036G —

400 LGU440033G LGU440032G LGU440035G LGU440036G —
2
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
2 Neutral CT
LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 Three-Pole 3
250 LGX325033G LGX325032G LGX325035G LGX325036G LGFCT250
2 400 LGX340033G LGX340032G LGX340035G LGX340036G LGFCT400
600 LGX360033G LGX360032G LGX360035G LGX360036G LGFCT600
2 630 4 LGX363033G LGX363032G LGX363035G LGX363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5
2 250 LGX425033G LGX425032G LGX425035G LGX425036G —
400 LGX440033G LGX440032G LGX440035G LGX440036G —
2 600 LGX460033G LGX460032G LGX460035G LGX460036G —
2 630 4 LGX463033G LGX463032G LGX463035G LGX463036G —
Notes
2 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.

2 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

Series G
2.3
LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
2
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65
480 Vac 1 kAIC at 480 Vac 1
2
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2
250 LGE3250FAGC 250 LGH3250FAGC
2
320 — 320 — 2
400 LGE3400FAGC 400 LGH3400FAGC 2
2
630 4 — 630 4 —
2
Notes
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes

2
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1 2
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
2
Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2
250 LGS3250FAGC
300 LGS3300FAGC
2
320 — 2
350 LGS3350FAGC
400 LGS3400FAGC 2
500 LGS3500FAGC
600 LGS3600FAGC
2
630 4 —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489

2 IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

Neutral CT for
250 LGE325033GC LGE325032GC LGE325035GC LGE325036GC LGFCT250
2 400 LGE340033GC LGE340032GC LGE340035GC LGE340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGE360033GC LGE360032GC LGE360035GC LGE360036GC LGFCT600
2 630 2 LGE363033GC LGE363032GC LGE363035GC LGE363036GC LGFCT600
2
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2 Neutral CT for
2 250 LGS325033GC LGS325032GC LGS325035GC LGS325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGS340033GC LGS340032GC LGS340035GC LGS340036GC LGFCT400
2
2 IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
Neutral CT for
250 LGH325033GC LGH325032GC LGH325035GC LGH325036GC LGFCT250
2 400 LGH340033GC LGH340032GC LGH340035GC LGH340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGH360033GC LGH360032GC LGH360035GC LGH360036GC LGFCT600
2 630 2 LGH363033GC LGH363032GC LGH363035GC LGH363036GC LGFCT600
2 Notes
2 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Series G LG circuit breakers
are available with the Arcflash
simple and reliable method to
reduce fault clearing time.
interruption times than the
standard (digital)
Maintenance System unit can
have a significantly lower
2
Reduction Maintenance The Arcflash Reduction “instantaneous” protection. incident energy level,
System™ integrated into the Maintenance System unit Work locations downstream reducing arc flash potential to 2
electronic trip units helping to utilizes a separate analog trip of a circuit breaker with an the system.
improve safety by providing a circuit that provides faster Arcflash Reduction 2
LG with LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System 2
Arcflash Reduction Neutral CT for
Maintenance System
ALSI ALSIG LSG and LSIG 1 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number 2
250 LGE325038G LGE365039G LGFCT250 2
400 LGE340038G LGE340039G LGFCT400
600 LGE360038G LGE360039G LGFCT600 2
630 LGE363038G LGE363039G LGFCT600
2
250 LGS325038G LGS365039G LGFCT250
400 LGS340038G LGS340039G LGFCT400
2
600 LGS360038G LGS360039G LGFCT600 2
630 LGS363038G LGS363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2
250 LGH325038G LGH365039G LGFCT250
400 LGH340038G LGH340039G LGFCT400 2
600 LGH360038G LGH360039G LGFCT600
630 LGH363038G LGH363039G LGFCT600
2
IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 LGC325038G LGC365039G LGFCT250
2
400 LGC340038G LGC340039G LGFCT400
2
600 LGC360038G LGC360039G LGFCT600
630 LGC363038G LGC363039G LGFCT600 2
250 LGU325038G LGU365039G LGFCT250 2
400 LGU340038G LGU340039G LGFCT400
600 LGU360038G LGU360039G LGFCT600 2
630 LGU363038G LGU363039G LGFCT600
2
250 LGX325038G LGX365039G LGFCT250
2
400 LGX340038G LGX340039G LGFCT400
600 LGX360038G LGX360039G LGFCT600 2
630 LGX363038G LGX363039G LGFCT600
2
LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Neutral CT for
2
ALSI ALSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog
2
Rating Number Number Number
250 LT325038 LT325039 LGFCT250 2
400 LT340038 LT340039 LGFCT400
600 LT360038 LT360039 LGFCT600
2
630 LT363038 LT363039 LGFCT600
2
Note
2

Series G

2
2 AWG
Maximum Terminal Wire Range/ Metric Number of
2 Breaker
Amperes
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Number of
Conductors
Wire Range
(mm2)
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number
2 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3TA631LK 1

400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4TA631LK 1
2 400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3T631LK 1
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4T631LK 1
2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 12
2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK 12
630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3T632LK 1
2 630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK 1
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2
2 400 Copper Cu 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK
2 Base Mounting Hardware Interphase Barrier

Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or Catalog
2 molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required Package of 2 Number
separately, order 66A4560G03. Interphase barrier IPB3
2
Terminal Covers Rear Fed Terminals
2 Description
Catalog
Number Maximum Wire Size Catalog
Amperes Range AWG Cu Number
2 Three-pole terminal cover 3 LTS3K
400 2–500 kcmil TA350LKRF
Four-pole terminal cover 3 LTS4K
400 2–500 kcmil 3TA350LKRF
2 End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) 630 2–500 (2) kcmil TA632LKRF
630 2–500 (2) kcmil 3TA632LKRF
2 Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
2 3 L3RTWK from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase
4 L4RTWK barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
2 Control Wire Terminal Kit a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal.
2 Description
Terminal
Body Type
Catalog
Number
Multiwire Connectors
2 Three-pole kit
Four-pole kit
Aluminum
Aluminum
3TA632LKW
4TA632LKW Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
2 Three-pole kit Copper 3T632LKW
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
Four-pole kit Copper 4T632LKW
terminal blocks.
2 Terminal Spreaders Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
2 Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
3 LGTEW3
2 4 LGTEW4 LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
2 Terminal Extensions
(Package of 3)
2 Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number
600 6 14–1/0 3TA600L6K
2 3
4
LGTES3
LGTES4
Notes
1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.
2 Handle Extension
2 Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above.
2 Description
Catalog
Number
Handle extension HEXLG
2

Series G
2.3
StrandAble Multiwire Terminals
Field-installed multiwire Used on the load side of StrandAble multiwire
2
terminals are UL listed for circuit breaker to distribute terminals are available in
nearly any class of rigid or the load to multiple devices three-pole kits that include 2
fine strand wire without the without the use of a power the necessary hardware and
use of additional fittings. distribution block. shielding. 2
3TA600L6SWK_ LG Frame StrandAble Multiwire Terminals (Three-Pole Kits) 2
Maximum
Amperage Wire Class Wire Range Shield Included Catalog Number 2
600 B and C (6) 12–2/0 Interphase barrier 3TA600L6SWKI
600 D, G, H, I, K, M (6) 8–1/0 Interphase barrier 2
600 B and C (6) 12–2/0 Terminal shield 3TA600L6SWKS
600 D, G, H, I, K, M (6) 8–1/0 Terminal shield
2
2
Terminals and Terminal Cover 2
Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers
2
Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Accessories
2
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch.
2 (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03.
2 Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
2 in the circuit breaker.
2 LG-Frame Accessories
Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-213 ■ ■
2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-213 ■ ■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-213 ■ ■
2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-213 ■ ■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-213 ■ ■
2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-214 ■ ■
End cap kit V4-T2-162 ● ●
2 Handle extension V4-T2-162 ● ●
Terminal cover V4-T2-162 ● ●
2 Rear fed terminals V4-T2-162 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-162 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Padlockable handle block V4-T2-211 ■ ■
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-211 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Electrical operator V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Plug-in adapters V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-496 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-196 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Legend
Note
2 1 Contact Eaton.
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Circuit
Breaker Number 240–240 380–415 480 600 690 250 23
Type of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics 2
LGE630 3, 4 65 65 35 35 35 18 12 6 22 22
LGS630 3, 4 85 85 50 50 50 25 20 10 22 22
2
LGH630 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 35 25 13 42 42
2
LGC630 4 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 50 30 15 42 42
LGU630 4 3, 4 200 200 150 150 150 65 35 18 50 50 2
LGX630 4 3, 4 200 5 200 200 200 200 65 35 18 50 50
2
LGC 240 V/200 kA 56.4 5.873 2
LGC 480 V/100 kA 56.4 5.873
LGC 600 V/50 kA 56.4 6.690
2
LGU 240 V/200 kA 77.7 7.320
LGU 480 V/150 kA 77.7 7.320
2
LGU 600 V/65 kA 50.6 6.690 2
LGX 240 V/200 kA 77.7 7.320
LGX 480 V/200 kA 77.7 7.320 2
LGX 600 V/65 kA 50.6 6.690
2
LG 310+ Specifications 2
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ 2
Breaker Type
Frame designation LG
2
Frames available 250 A, 400 A, 600 A
2
Continuous current range (A) 100–600 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 50–600 A 2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated Yes 2
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
2
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 6 Yes 2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 6 Yes 2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2
Thru-cover accessories Yes
2
Notes
1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
2
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4 Current limiting per UL 489. 2
5 IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.
6 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes. 2

Series G
LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 LG Frame
310+ Settings 250 A 400 A 600 A
(All 310+)
2 A 100 160 250
B 125 200 300
2 C 150 225 315
D 160 250 350
2 E 175 300 400
2 F 200 315 450

G 225 350 500
2 H (= In) 250 400 600
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7
2 Position 4 10 10 10
2 Position 5 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15
2 Position 7 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24
2 Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x 3x 3x
2 Position 3 4x 4x 4x
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
Position 7 8x 8x 8x

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
2 tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1 Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
2 Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
2 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 50 80 120
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 75 120 180
2 Position 3 100 160 240
2 Position 4 150 240 360

Position 5 200 320 480
2 Position 6 250 400 600
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
2 (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
2 Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
(ALSI, ALSIG) 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x,
2 12x 12x 12x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) 2 Fixed 2.5x
2 (ALSI, ALSIG)
Notes
2 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
2
2

Series G
2.3
LG-Frame 2
2, 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) 2
4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
2
LG-Frame 2
Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or
LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG. 2
2.43 (61.7)
CL Breaker
4.06
(103.1)
2
R 0.25 2
(6.4) 3.16 1.92
(80.3) (48.8) 5.58
(141.7) 2
2.00
(50.8)
10.13
(257.3)
2
2
2
2.69
5.48
(139.2)
2
5.38
(68.3) (136.7) Three-Pole 2
LG-Frame
2
Breaker Type Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX 16 (7.3) 20 (9.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2
5.16 4.31 3.44
2 (131.1) (109.5)
4.06
(87.4)
1.72
3.44
(87.4) (103.1) (43.7)
2 1.72 3.98 0.86
(43.7) (101.1) (21.8)
2
2 5.58
5.58
4.73 (141.7) 4.73
(141.7) (120.1)
2 (120.1)
2
8.44
2 8.44
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
(214.4)
2 15.38
(390.7)
2 13.69
13.68
(347.5)
15.38
(347.7) (390.7)
2
2
4-Pole 3.97 4-Pole
2 2.75 (69.9) (100.8) 2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole 3-Pole 4.30 4-Pole 3-Pole
2 5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
2.74 (69.6) (109.2)
4.55
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
7.22 (183.4) (115.6) 5.48 (139.2)

2 5.43
(137.9)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
NG-Frame (1200 Ampere) Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
V4-T2-151 2
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-170
Product Selection Guide and Ordering 2
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-171
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-174 2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-178
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-189
V4-T2-193
2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-196
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-200 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-205 2
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216 2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2
2
2
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All Eaton NG-Frame circuit
2
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use 2
● All NG-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2 NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C
2
Frame Rating
2 NG Blank=80% rated
C = 100% rated
2 Performance
Amperes
080= 800 Trip Unit Terminations 3
at 480 Vac
120 = 1200 33 =310+ Electronic LS
2 S = 50 kAIC
H = 65 kAIC 32 =310+ Electronic LSI
M =Metric tapped line/load
conductors
C = 100 kAIC Poles 35 =310+ Electronic LSG E =Imperial tapped line/load
2 U = 150 kAIC 1
K = Molded
2 = Two
36 =310+ Electronic LSIG
38 =310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode
conductors
3 = Three
case switch 39 =310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode
2 4 = Four; neutral 2
0% protected
KS =Molded case switch Feature
Blank=No feature
7 = Four; neutral 2
B20=High load alarm
2 100% protected
9 = Four; neutral 2
B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
0/60/100% adjustable
2 protection
ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2 Notes
1 800 A only.
2 2 Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG.

3 Breakers do not ship with lugs.
2 Trip units are factory installable only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors 2
Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT 2
at 40 °C 12 of Poles LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 3
800 2 NGS208033E NGS208032E NGS208035E NGS208036E — — — 2
3 NGS308033E NGS308032E NGS308035E NGS308036E NGS308038E NGS308039E NGFCT120
4 NGS408033E NGS408032E NGS408035E 4 NGS408036E 4 NGS408038E NGS408039E 4 —
2
45 NGS708033E NGS708032E — — NGS708038E — —
2
46 NGS908033E NGS908032E — — NGS908038E — —
1200 6 2 NGS212033E NGS212032E NGS212035E NGS212036E — — — 2
3 NGS312033E NGS312032E NGS312035E NGS312036E NGS312038E NGS312039E NGFCT120
4 NGS412033E NGS412032E NGS412035E 4 NGS412036E 4 — NGS412039E 4 — 2
4 5
NGS712033E NGS712032E — — NGS712038E — —
46 NGS912033E NGS912032E — — NGS912038E — —
2
2
Molded Case Switches 789j
2
Ue Maximum 690 Vac
Ampere
Rating Three-Pole
Catalog
Number Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
2
800 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3080KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4080KSE
2
1200 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3120KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4120KSE
1250 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3125KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK43125KSE 2
Notes
1 For AC use only. 2
2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.
2
5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
2
7 Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available.
8 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. 2
9 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch.
j Add “M” to above catalog numbers for metric tapped line/load conductors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
Ampere
2 Rating Number Neutral CT
2 800 2 NGH208033E NGH208032E NGH208035E NGH208036E — — —
3 NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
2 4 NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E 4 NGH408036E 4 NGH408038E NGH408039E 4 —
45 NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — —
2 46 NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — —
2 1200 2 NGH212033E NGH212032E NGH212035E NGH212036E — — —

3 NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
2 4 NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E 4 NGH412036E 4 — NGH412039E 4 —
45 NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
2 46 NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —
2
Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
2 Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
Continuous
Ampere
2 Rating Number Neutral CT
2 800 2 NGC208033E NGC208032E NGC208035E NGC208036E — — —
3 NGC308033E NGC308032E NGC308035E NGC308036E NGC308038E NGC308039E NGFCT120
2 4 NGC408033E NGC408032E NGC408035E 4 NGC408036E 4 NGC408038E NGC408039E 4 —
2 45 NGC708033E NGC708032E — — NGC708038E — —

46 NGC908033E NGC908032E — — NGC908038E — —
2 1200 2 NGC212033E NGC212032E NGC212035E NGC212036E — — —
3 NGC312033E NGC312032E NGC312035E NGC312036E NGC312038E NGC312039E NGFCT120
2 4 NGC412033E NGC412032E NGC412035E 4 NGC412036E 4 — NGC412039E 4 —
4 5 NGC712033E NGC712032E — — NGC712038E — —
2 46 NGC912033E NGC912032E — — NGC912038E — —
2
2 Type NGU Ultra High Capacity—Ue Max. 600 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-176.
2 Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
Continuous
2 Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT
2 800 3 NGU308033E NGU308032E NGU308035E NGU308036E NGU308038E NGU308039E NGFCT120
2 Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.
2 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number. 2
Line and Load Terminals 2
AWG Wire AWG Wire Metric
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
(Number of
Conductors)
Catalog
Number 1
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number 1
2
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 2
700 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 (2) TA700NB1 50–240 TA700NB1M
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 (3) TA1000NB1 95–185 TA1000NB1M 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 (4) TA1200NB1 120–240 TA1200NB1M
2
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
2
700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1 70–240 T700NB1M
1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 95–240 T1000NB1M 2
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3 95–185 T1200NB3M
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Conductor Extension Kit 2
Catalog Conductor Extension Kit 4
Description Number
Catalog
2
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V Description Number
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 Three-pole both ends Metric 5104A24G04
2
External neutral sensor (1200 A) 2 NGFCT120 Three-pole both ends English 5104A24G02 2
External neutral sensor (800 A) 2 NGFCT120
Keeper Nut
Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded.
2
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 2
Handle Extension
Base Mounting Hardware

Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are 2
available.
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. Handle Extension 2
Catalog
Base Mounting Hardware 3 Description Number 2
Number Catalog Single handle extension HEX5
of Poles Description Number
2
Three- and four-pole Imperial hardware: BMH5
0.3125–18 x 1.25 Interphase Barriers
pan-head steel screws and lock washers
The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance
2
Three- and four-pole Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws BMH5M between circuit breaker poles for special termination
and lock washers
applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that 2
are installed in the molded slots between the terminals.
Terminal Shield (Field installation only.) 2
Terminal Shield
Interphase Barriers 2
Catalog
Description Number Catalog
Three-pole terminal shield NTS3K

Description Number 2
Interphase barriers 4 IPB5
Notes
2
1 Single terminals individually packed.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 2
3 Metric hardware included with breaker.
4 Included as standard on 100% rated 1200 A breakers only. 2
2
2

Series G
Accessories
2
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
NG-Frame Accessories
2 Three-Pole Four-Pole
Reference
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
2
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-213 ● ■ ● ■

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-213 ● ■ ● ■
2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-213 ● ■ ● ■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-213 ● ■ ● ■
2
2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-214 ■ ■
2 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-211 ■ ■
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-211 ● ● ●
Electrical operator V4-T2-211 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Handle extension V4-T2-173 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-210 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-209 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
2 Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Legend
Note
2 1 Contact Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Circuit 220–240 380–415 690
2
Breaker Number
Type of Poles 240 (UL) Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics 2
NGS 1 2, 3, 4 65 85 85 50 50 50 25 20 10
NGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 100 70 50 65 35 25 13 2
NGC 2, 3, 4 200 200 100 100 50 100 65 35 18
NGU 3, 4 200 — — — — 150 65 — —
2
2
NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications
2
NG 310+ Specifications 2
2
Breaker Type
2
Frame designation NG
Frames available 800 A, 1200 A 2
Continuous current range (A) 320–1200A
Ground fault pickup (A) 160–1200A 2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150
100% rated Yes
2
Protection 2
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes 2
Interchangeable trip unit No
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2 Yes
2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2 Yes
2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 2
Thru-cover accessories No 2
Notes
1 1600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 NG Frame
310+ Settings 800 A 1200 A
(All 310+)
2 A 320 500
B 400 600
2 C 450 630
D 500 700
2 E 600 800
2 F 630 900
G 700 1000
2 H (= In) 800 1200
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4
Position 3 6 7
2 Position 4 8 10
2 Position 5 10 12
Position 6 12 15
2 Position 7 14 20
Position 8 14 24
2 Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x 3x
2 Position 3 4x 4x
2 Position 4 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x
2 Position 6 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x
2 Position 8 9x 9x
2 Position 9 9x 9x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
2 tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
2 Position 2 120 120
Position 3 300 300
2 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 160 240
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 240 360

Position 5 640 960
2 Position 6 800 1200
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120
Position 3 300 300
2 Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
(ALSI, ALSIG) 8x, 10x, 18x 8x, 10x, 12x
2 Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) Fixed 2.5x 2.5x
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
2 Notes
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
2
2

Series G
2.3
NG-Frame 2
2
3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2
NG-Frame
2
Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View 2
3.44
(87.4) 2
BREAKER
R .25
9.25
(235.0)
2
(6.4)
2
1.91
(48.5) 16.00
(406.4) 2
3.68
1.50 (93.5)
(38.1) 2
2
3.19
(81.0)
6.38 8.25 5.50
2
(162.1) (209.6) (139.7)
2
2
NG-Frame
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
NGS, NGH, NGC 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Contents

2 Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-119
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-133
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-179
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-185
2 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-188
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-189
2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
V4-T2-193
V4-T2-196
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-200
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-205
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
2
2
2
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Product Description
2 ● Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
2 frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
2 terminals
● All R-Frame circuit breakers
2 are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2
RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C
2
Rating
Frame
RG Blank=80% rated
2
C = 100% rated (except 2500 A)
Performance
Amperes 2
at 480 Vac 160 = 1600 Trip Unit Terminations
H = 65 kAIC
200 = 2000
250 = 2500
33 =310+ Electronic LS M =Metric tapped line/load 2
C = 100 kAIC 32 =310+ Electronic LSI conductors
35 =310+ Electronic LSG
K = Molded
case switch Poles 36 =310+ Electronic LSIG
E =Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
2
38 =310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode W =No terminals
3 = Three
4 = Four
39 =310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode
KS =Molded case switch
2
Feature
Blank=No feature 2
B20=High load alarm
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
2
RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit 2
RT 3 250 39 ZG 2
Type Feature
2
RT Trip Unit Blank=No feature
Amperes
33 =310+ Electronic LS B20=High load alarm 2
160 = 1600 32 =310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
200 = 2000
Poles
3 = Three
250 = 2500
35
36
=310+ Electronic LSG
=310+ Electronic LSIG
2
38 =310+ Electronic LSI
w/ Maintenance Mode 2
39 =310+ Electronic LSIG
w/ Maintenance Mode
2
RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit 2
RGH 3 16 T92 W 2
Type Modification Suffix
2
RGH 65K Trip Function R = Ground fault remote
RGC 100K Amperes Digitrip 610 RES trip 2
16 = 1600 T61 = LI E = 100% protection
Poles 20 = 2000
25 = 2500
T62 = LSI (new design 310)
RES trip unit
2
3 = Three T63 = LS
T64 = LIG P = 100% prot. neut.
4 = Four
T65 = LSG
V3 =
4P RES trip unit
Electronic trip without
2
T66 = LSIG
ambient temperature
Digitrip 910 marked on trip unit 2
T91 = LI W = w/o terms
T92 = LSI
T93 = LS
K = Molded case switch
2
T94 = LIG
T95 = LSG
T96 = LSIG
2
2

Series G
Product Selection
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
2 Continuous Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Ampere
2 Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 4
2 1600 1 3 RGH316033E RGH316032E RGH316035E RGH316036E RGH316038E RGH316039E RGFCT160A

2000 3 RGH320033E RGH320032E RGH320035E RGH320036E RGH320038E RGH320039E RGFCT200A
2 2500 3 RGH325033E RGH325032E RGH325035E RGH325036E RGH325038E RGH325039E RGFCT250A
2
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Ampere
2 Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG 35
2 1600 1 4 6 RGH416033E RGH416032E — — RGH416038E —

2000 46 RGH420033E RGH420032E — — RGH420038E —
2 2500 46 RGH425033E RGH425032E — — RGH425038E —
2 Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
2 5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
2 RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
Maximum
Continuous
2
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 4
2
1600 1 3 RGC316033E RGC316032E RGC316035E RGC316036E RGC316038E RGC316039E RGFCT160A 2
2000 3 RGC320033E RGC320032E RGC320035E RGC320036E RGC320038E RGC320039E RGFCT200A
2500 3 RGC325033E RGC325032E RGC325035E RGC325036E RGC325038E RGC325039E RGFCT250A 2
2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued
Maximum
Continuous
2
Ampere
Rating Number 2
at 40 °C 1 of Poles LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG 35
1600 1 46 RGC416033E RGC416032E — — RGC416038E — 2
2000 46 RGC420033E RGC420032E — — RGC420038E —
2500 46 RGC425033E RGC425032E — — RGC425038E —
2
2

2
1600 3 RGK3160KSE
2
2000 3 RGK3200KSE
2
1600 4 RGK4160KSE
2000 4 RGK4200KSE 2
Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame. 2
3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
2
5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.” 2
7 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes.
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910

2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Digitrip RMS
2 Maximum L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time Interchangeable
Continuous S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) Rating Plug
2 Ampere
Rating Number
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
(Order as Individual
Component)
at 40 °C of Poles LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
2 Long Delay Pickup 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–I.0n 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In
Long Delay Time 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds
2 Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
Instantaneous 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2
2 Ground Fault Pickup — — — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 Ampere Catalog
Ground Fault Delay — — — 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Rating Number
2 Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGH316T61WP44 RGH316T63WP44 RGH316T62WP44 RGH316T64WP44 RGH316T65WP44 RGH316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2 1250 RP6R16A125
2 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
2 1600 RP6R20A160

2 2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
2 Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGC316T61WP44 RGC316T63WP44 RGC316T62WP44 RGC316T64WP44 RGC316T65WP44 RGC316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
2 1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
2 1600 RP6R20A160

2 2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
2 Notes
2 2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
2
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Digitrip RMS
Maximum L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time Interchangeable 2
Continuous S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating Number
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
(Order as Individual
Component)
2
at 40 °C of Poles LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
Long Delay Pickup 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–I.0n 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 2
Long Delay Time 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2
Instantaneous 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2
Ground Fault Pickup — — — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 Ampere Catalog 2
Ground Fault Delay — — — 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Rating Number
Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
2
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160 2
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
2
2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1200 RP6R16A120
2
1250 RP6R16A125
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
Notes
2
2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup. 2
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
Line and Load Terminals Base Mounting Hardware
2 R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and Supplied by customer.
copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation
2 is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze Handle Extension
testing requirements. Included with breaker.
2 Additional handle extensions
Line and Load Terminals are available.
2 Maximum Terminal AWG/kcmil
Breaker Body Wire Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog Handle Extension
Amperes Material Type Hardware Number of Conductors Range mm2 Number
2 Wire Terminals Description
Catalog
Number
2 1600
1600
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/Al
Cu
Metric
Metric
500–1000 (4)
1–600 (4)
300–500
50–300
TA1600RDM 1
T1600RDM 1
Single handle
extension
HEX6
2000 Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RDM 2

2 Rear Connectors Wire Seal
2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDM 1 The wire seal can be used to
2 2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDLM 1 secure the cover on the trip
2500 Copper — Metric — — B2500RDM 1 unit to prevent adjustments
2 after settings are confirmed.
2 RG Rear Connector Exploded View Wire Seal

Conductor Securing Catalog
Conductor
2 (Viewed from Rear (Viewed from Front Hardware Description Number
of Circuit Breaker and Cut of Circuit Breaker)
Wire seal 5108A03H01
2 Away for Clarity) Cu Only
Terminal Notes
Catalog Number 1 Order one per pole—single terminals
2 T1600RDM 3 individually packed.
(For 1600 A 2 Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles.
2 Frame Only) Catalog number includes bus connection,

terminals and hardware for either line
side or load side of three-pole breaker.
2 OR 3 For use with 2500 A Frame. Do not order
separately unless for replacement

2 Al/Cu
Terminal
purposes. Included in breaker carton
when 2500 A frame is ordered.
Catalog
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line
2 Number
TA1600RDM 3
and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if
imperial threading is required.
(For 1600 A
2 Frame Only)
Rear Connector (Cu)
B2016RDM
2 B2016RDLM (For 100% Application) Securing Hardware
(For 1600 A and 2000 A Frames)
2 B2500RDM for 2500 A
2 TA2000RD Wire Terminal

Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number
includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or
2 load side of three-pole breaker.
2 Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles 2
2
RG-Frame Accessories
Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2
■ ■
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-213
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-213 ■ ■ 2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-213 ■ ■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-213 ● ●
2
● ●
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-214
2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-211 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical operator V4-T2-211
2
Handle extension V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
2
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position 2
● Accessory available/modification available 2

2
Description
Catalog
Number
2
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 2
External neutral sensor (2500 A) 2 RGFCT250A 2
External neutral sensor (2000 A) 2 RGFCT200A
External neutral sensor (1600 A) 2 RGFCT160A
2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 3 —
2
Notes
1 Contact Eaton. 2
3 Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units.
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 277 480 600
2 RGH 3, 4 125 — 65 50
RGC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
2
2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit
2 Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Type of Poles 240 415 690
2 RGH 3, 4
Icu 135 70 25
2 Ics 100 50 13
2 RGC 3, 4
Icu 200 100 35
2 Ics 100 50 18
2
RG 310+ Specifications
2 Description Specification
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+

Breaker Type
2 Frame designation RG
Frames available 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A
2 Continuous current range (A) 800–2500 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 200–1200 A
2 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 65, 100
2 100% rated Yes

Protection
2 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
2 Interchangeable trip unit Yes
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 2 Yes

2 Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2 Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2 Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories No
2
Notes
2 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 See Page V4-T2-178 for trip unit specifications.
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
RG Frame
2
310+ Settings 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
2
(All 310+)
A 800 1000 1600 2
B 900 1200 1700
C 1000 1400 1800 2
D 1100 1600 2000
E 1200 1700 2100
2
F 1400 1800 2200
2
G 1500 1900 2400
H (= In) 1600 2000 2500 2
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
(All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4 2
Position 3 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10
2
Position 5 12 12 12
2
Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20 2
Position 8 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x 3x 2x
Position 3 4x 4x 2x
2
Position 4 5x 5x 3x 2
Position 5 6x 6x 4x
Position 7 8x 8x 6x
Position 8 8x 8x 6x
2
Position 9 9x 9x 6x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
2
Position 2 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 200 200 200 2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 400 400 400
Position 3 600 600 600
2
Position 4 800 800 800
2
Position 5 1000 1000 1000
Position 6 1200 1200 1200 2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
2
(ALSI, ALSIG) 7x, 8x, 11x 7x, 8x, 9x 7x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) Fixed 2.5x 2.5x 2.5x
2
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
Notes
2
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit. 2
2
2

Series G

2 RG-Frame
Number
2 of Poles Width Height Depth
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
2 4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
2 Front Cover Cutout Front View 3-Pole Side View

CL 2.25 (57.2)
2 14.50
(368.3)
Breaker
7.25
0.16 R
2 (4.1)
(184.2)
8.25
2 7.75
(196.9)
(209.6) .44 R
(11.2)
5.10
(129.5)
2 9.70 CL 16.00 13.00
(406.4) Tee (330.2)
(246.4) Handle
2 15.00
(381.0)
Connectors
May Be
Rotated 90
2
6.57
2 4 Holes
0.44 Dia.
(166.9)
13.13
(11.2)
(333.5) 15.50
2 (393.7)
9.00
(228.6)
6.75
(171.5)
2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

RG-Frame
2
Complete Breaker
2 Breaker Number of Poles
Type Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 1600 Amperes
RGH, RGC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2 2000 Amperes
RGH, RGC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2 2500 Amperes
2 RGH, RGC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) 2
Product Selection Guide and Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-190 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-193
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-196 2
2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219 2
2
Motor Circuit Protectors 2
(MCP)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1
2 Motor
Full Load MCP MCP
2 Continuous Cam Current Trip Catalog
Amperes Setting Amperes 2 Setting 3 Number
2 3 A 0.69 –0.91 9 HMCPE003A0C
B 1.1–1.3 15
2 C 1.6–1.7 21
D 2.0–2.2 27
2 E 2.3–2.5 30
2 F 2.6– 2.8 33
7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPE007C0C
2 B 2.6–3.1 35
C 3.7–3.9 49
2 D 4.8–5.2 63
2 E 5.3–5.7 70
F 5.8–6.1 77
2 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPE015E0C
B 5.7–6.8 75
2 C 8.0–9.1 105
D 10.4–11.4 135
2 E 11.5–12.6 150
2 F 12.7–13.0 165
30 A 3.9–9.1 90 HMCPE030H1C
2 B 11.5–13.7 150
C 16.1–18.3 210
2 D 20.7–22.9 270
E 23.0–25.2 300
2 F 25.3–26.1 330
2 Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1
Motor
2
Full Load MCP MCP
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Current
Amperes 2
Trip
Setting 3
Catalog
Number
2
50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPE050K2C 2
B 19.2–22.9 250
C 26.9–30.6 350 2
D 34.6–38.3 450
E 38.4–42.1 500
2
F 42.2–43.5 550
2
70 A 16.1–30.6 210 HMCPE070M2C
B 26.9–32.2 350 2
C 37.6–42.9 490
D 48.4–53.7 630 2
E 53.8–59.1 700
F 59.2–60.9 770
2
100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPE100R3C 2
B 38.4–46.0 500
C 53.8–61.4 700 2
D 69.2–76.8 900
E 76.9–84.5 1000
2
F 84.6–87.0 1100
2
100 A 38.4–46.0 500 HMCPE100T3C
B 57.6–65.2 750 2
C 76.9–84.5 1000
D 4 1250 2
E 4 1375
F 4 1500
2
2
JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
MCP MCP
2
Continuous Trip Range Catalog
Amperes (Amperes) Number 2
250 500–1000 HMCPJ250D5L
625–1250 HMCPJ250F5L
2
750–1500 HMCPJ250G5L 2
875–1750 HMCPJ250J5L
1000–2000 HMCPJ250K5L 2
1125–2250 HMCPJ250L5L
1250–2500 HMCPJ250W5L
2
Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2
4 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be
n 2
less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.
2
2
2
2

Series G
LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1

2 MCP MCP
Continuous Trip Range Catalog
2 Amperes (Amperes) Number
600 1250–2500 HMCPL600L6G
2 1500–3000 HMCPL600N6G
1750–3500 HMCPL600R6G
2 2000–4000 HMCPL600X6G
2 2250–4500 HMCPL600Y6G
2500–5000 HMCPL600P6G
2 3000–6000 HMCPL600M6G
Notes
2 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-189 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219 2
2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) 2
● Eliminates need for ● Can be used with ● Phase unbalance ● IEC 60947-2
separate overload relay contactor to eliminate need protection ● UL 489 100% rated 2
for overload relay and still ● Phase loss protection ● UL 508
create manual motor
control
● Hot trip/cold trip ● CSA C22.2 2
● High load alarm
● Meets requirement for
motor branch protection,
● Pre-detection trip relay 2
including: option
● Disconnecting means
● Class 10, 15, 20, 30 2
protection
● Branch circuit short
circuit protection 2
● Overload protection
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Product Selection
2
JGMP Catalog Numbers
2 35 kAIC 65 kAIC
Catalog Catalog
2 Continuous Amperes Number Number
50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G
2 100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G
2 160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G

250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G
2
2 JGMP FLA le Dial Setting
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
2 50 20 20 25 30 32 40 45 50
100 40 45 50 63 70 80 90 100
2
160 63 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
2 250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250
2
LGMP Catalog Numbers
2 50 kAIC 65 kAIC
Catalog Catalog
2 Continuous Amperes Number Number
250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G
2 400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G
600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G
2 630 1 LGMPS630G LGMPH630G
2
LGMP FLA le Dial Setting
2 Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
2 250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250

400 160 200 225 250 300 315 350 400
2 600 250 300 315 350 400 450 500 600
630 1 250 300 315 350 400 500 600 630
2
Notes
2 1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
2 For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-371.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
2
JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Maximum Rated Current—250 A
2
Breaker Type
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz JGMPS JGMPH
2
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu 85 100
2
I cs 85 100
380–415 Vac I cu 40 70 2
I cs 40 70
660–690 Vac I cu 12 14 2
I cs 6 7
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
2
480 Vac 35 65 2
600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 3 3 2
Ampere range 50–250 50 –250
2
LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range 2
Maximum Rated Current—630 A 1
Breaker Type
2
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz LGMPS LGMPH
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu 85 100
2
I cs 85 100 2
380–415 Vac I cu 50 70
I cs 50 53 2
660–690 Vac I cu 20 25
I cs 10 13
2
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
2
480 Vac 50 65
600 Vac 25 35 2
Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 250–630 1 250 –630 1 2
Notes
1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
2
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Contents

2 Description Page
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-189
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-193
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-198
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
Clockwise from Left: Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2 JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2 Product Description
Eaton offers three- and four- The module is completely self UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
2 pole 30 mA ground fault contained, including a current
(earth leakage) protection sensor, relay and power
modules for Series G E-, J- supply inside the device.
2 and L-frame molded case Current pickup settings are
circuit breakers (MCCBs). selectable from 0.03 to 10
2 Separate UL listed and IEC amperes for all devices,
rated devices are available for except for the UL listed
2 each frame. module, for which settings
are selectable from 0.03 to 30
The modules are bottom amperes. Time delays are
2 mounted and are available for also selectable from
each frame circuits up to: Instantaneous to 1.0 second
2 ● EG: 125 amperes for pickup settings of 0.10
amperes and above. The
● JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC)
2 or 250 amperes
current pickup setting of
0.03 amperes defaults to an
● LG: 400, 600 (UL) Instantaneous time setting
2 or 630 (IEC) amperes regardless of the time dial’s
IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
position.
2
Two alarm contacts are
included with each device,
2 which can be wired externally
for remote indication. Both of
2 these are also indicated by an
LED on the front of the
2 device:
1. 50% pre-trip: alarms
2 when the earth leakage
current reaches 50% of
2 the set pickup setting
value.
2 2. 100% after trip: alarms
when the breaker
2 reaches the set pickup
setting value and the
2 breaker trips.

Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
EG-Frame
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
LG-Frame
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 2
50/60 Hz) 1 50/60 Hz)
Ampere Number Catalog Ampere Number Catalog 2
Rating of Poles Number Rating of Poles Number
125 3 ELEBN3125G 400 3 ELLBN3400W 2
125 4 ELEBN4125G 400 4 ELLBN4400W
600 3 ELLBN3600W
2
600 4 ELLBN4600W
2
EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, 2
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 2
Ampere Number Catalog Ampere Number Catalog
Rating of Poles Number Rating of Poles Number
2
125 3 ELEBE3125G 400 3 ELLBE3400W
125 4 ELEBE4125G 400 4 ELLBE4400W 2
630 3 ELLBE3630W
JG-Frame JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, 630 4 ELLBE4630W

2
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz) 2
Rating of Poles Number 2
150 3 ELJBN3150W
150 4 ELJBN4150W 2
250 3 ELJBN3250W
250 4 ELJBN4250W
2
2
JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 2
50/60 Hz)
Ampere Number Catalog 2
160 3 ELJBE3160W 2
160 4 ELJBE4160W
250 3 ELJBE3250W 2
250 4 ELJBE4250W
2
Note
1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG
breaker connected to an earth leakage module.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Dimensions
2 Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module

Frame Height Width Depth
2 Three-Pole
2 EG 10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8)

JG 11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)
2 LG 15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
2 EG 10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8)
2 JG 11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7)

LG 15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)
2
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
10.26
(260.6)
2 4.75
(120.6)
0.55 (14.0)
2 1.49
0.50 1.00 (37.8) 3.98
2 (12.7) (25.4) (101.1)
3-Pole
2 1.00
(25.4)
2.98
(75.7)
2 1.50 0.50
2.00
(50.8)
(38.1) (12.7)
2
2 4.78
(121.4)
8.59 0.70 (17.8)
(218.2)
2 0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
2
2 3.01
0.09 (76.5)
2 (2.29)
2.75
3.17
(80.5)
(69.9)
2 0.78
(19.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
2
4.13 (104.9) 5.50
0.69 (139.7) 2.05
(52.1)
2
1.38 (17.5) 2.06 3.57 1.25
(35.1) (52.3) (90.7) (31.8) 0.63
(16.0)
2
R 0.19
1.88
(47.8) 6.97 2
3.92 5.50 3.92 (4.8) (177.0)
(99.6) (139.7) (99.6) 4.93 2
0.28 (125.2)
7.00
(177.8)
(7.1) 11.25
(285.8) 2
11.25
(285.8)
0.50
(139.7)
1.06
(26.9)
2
2
4.25
3.37
(85.6)
2
RESET
(108.0)
2
TEST
2
2.05
3.31
(84.1)
3.57
3.69 (90.7)
(52.1)
4.09
2
(93.7) 3.81 (103.9)
4.78 (96.8) 2
(121.4)
2
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
5.16 4.31 3.44
(131.1) (109.5)
4.06
(87.4)
1.72
2
3.44
(87.4) (103.1) (43.7)
1.72 3.98 0.86 2
(43.7) (101.1) (21.8)
2
5.58
5.58
4.73
2
4.73 (141.7)
(141.7) (120.1)
(120.1)
2
2
8.44
8.44 (214.4)
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3) 2
15.38
(390.7) 2
13.69 15.38
13.68
(347.5) 2
(347.7) (390.7)
2
2
4-Pole 3.97 4-Pole
3-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
(100.8)
4.30 4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
2
5.48 (139.2) 2.74 (69.6) (109.2) 7.22 (183.4) 2.74 (69.6)
4-Pole 4.55 3-Pole 2
7.22 (183.4) (115.6) 5.48 (139.2)
5.43
(137.9) 2

Series G
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules Contents

2 Description Page
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-196
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
2 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-202

2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2
2 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
2 Product Overview Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
Power demand continues The current limiting breaker Superior system protection: ● IEC 60947-2
2 to grow in new and existing modules use a unique contact
● Auto reset improves
● UL 489
facilities. To meet increased design to enhance the ● CSA C22.2
demand, larger utility system protection similar to system uptime and
2 supplies, spot networks and that of the circuit breaker. eliminates the need for
large facility transformers When high short-circuit finding replacement parts
2 are installed. The increased current is flowing through the ● No fuses to replace,
capacity of the electrical contacts of these modules, reducing the overall cost of
2 source results in increased the design results in very high ownership and the waste
fault currents in excess interrupting capacities and created by fuses
2 of 100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
improved current limiting
characteristics.
● Overloads, by using inverse
time current tripping
manufactures non-fused characteristics of the
2 current limiting modules with Application Description molded-case circuit
interrupting capacities up to High-performance breakers breaker
2 200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at are most commonly applied ● Low-level short circuits, by
690 Vac. Unlike fused current when very high fault levels using instantaneous and/or
2 limiters with a one-time use, are available and with short-time delay tripping
a current limiter module applications where the characteristics of the
2 provides an automatic reset
of the module after a short-
current limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
molded-case circuit
breaker
circuit event. Resetting the load to limit current. Typical
2 molded-case circuit breaker is loads include lighting, power
● High-level short circuits, by
using ultra-high-speed,
the only action required to distribution, and motor
2 blow-apart contacts of the
restore critical power to the control applications.
current limiting module in
system; there is no time
series with the circuit
2 wasted with sourcing the
breaker contacts
correct replacement fuses
or module to bring system
● Let-through currents, by
2 back online. improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
2 rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
2 the system
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
Series G High Performance Family Offering 2
480 Vac 600 Vac
415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC) 2
Type Product Amperes (UL) (UL) Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–125 100 35 1 100 100 — — 2
With limiter 15–100 150 100 1 150 150 — —
JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 70–250 200 50 200 200 18 14
2
With limiter 70–225 200 200 200 150 70 18
2
JG 3P electronic Breaker only 20–250 200 50 200 200 18 14
With limiter 100–250 200 200 200 150 70 18 2
LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 250–600 200 65 200 200 35 18
LG3P electronic Breaker only 100–600 200 65 200 200 35 18 2
2
EG-Frame EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
UL Listed
2
(NEMA/IEC Rated) Breaker with Breaker with
Base Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations Included 2
Interphase Barrier
Included for Limiter
2
EGC3015FFG EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3015FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2
EGC3016FFG EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 600Y/347V.
2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker
2
(2) load end of limiter.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
2 Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2 EGC…Q 240 V/150 kA 21.80 0.277

EGC…Q 480 V/150 kA 21.80 0.277
2 EGC…Q 600 V/100 kA 22.60 0.387
2
2 Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module

Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg)
2 EG 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 2.91 (1.32)
2 HMCP 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 4.18 (1.90)
2 EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2 4.17
9.66
(245.4)
(105.9)
2 0.56
(14.2) 3.61
(91.7)
2
2
1.00
(25.4)
2 3.00
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
(76.2) (25.4)
2 1.00
(25.4)
2
2 3.20
(81.3)
2 4.17
(105.9)
2
2
2 2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
2
0.78
2 (19.8)
0.41
2 (10.4)
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
JG Frame JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac
UL Listed, IEC Rated UL Listed, IEC Rated IEC Rated Breaker IEC Rated Breaker
2
Ampere Magnetic Breaker With Line Side Breaker With Load Side With Line Side Mounted With Load Side Mounted
Rating Range Mounted Current Limiter 1 Mounted Current Limiter 2 Current Limiter 1 Current Limiter 2 2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
70 350–700 JGH3070FAGQ01 JGH3070FAGQ02 — —
2
90 450–900 JGH3090FAGQ01 JGH3090FAGQ02 — — 2
100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGQ01 JGH3100FAGQ02 JGH3100AAGQ01 JGH3100AAGQ02
125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGQ01 JGH3125FAGQ02 JGH3125AAGQ01 JGH3125AAGQ02 2
150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGQ01 JGH3150FAGQ02 — —
160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAGQ01 JGH3160AAGQ02 2
175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGQ01 JGH3175FAGQ02 — —
200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGQ01 JGH3200FAGQ02 JGH3200AAGQ01 JGH3200AAGQ02
2
225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGQ01 JGH3225FAGQ02 — — 2
Electronic Trip LS
250 — JGH325033GQ01 JGH325033GQ02 — — 2
Electronic Trip LSI
250 — JGH325032GQ01 JGH325032GQ02 — —
2
Electronic Trip LSG
2
250 — JGH325035GQ01 JGH325035GQ02 — —
Electronic Trip LSIG 2
250 — JGH325036GQ01 JGH325036GQ02 — —
2
Series G HMCP
Ampere Motor Circuit Protector with Breaker with Load Side 2
Rating Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Mounted Current Limiter
250 HMCPJ250D5LQ01 HMCPJ250D5LQ02 2
250 HMCPJ250F5LQ01 HMCPJ250F5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250G5LQ01 HMCPJ250G5LQ02
2
250 HMCPJ250J5LQ01 HMCPJ250J5LQ02 2
250 HMCPJ250K5LQ01 HMCPJ250K5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250L5LQ01 HMCPJ250L5LQ02 2
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire
Breaker Body Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog 2
Amperes Material Wire Type Range mm2 of Conductors Number
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 3
Notes
2
1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK.
2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 2
3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G

2
2 JGH…Q 240 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47

JGH…Q 480 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47
2 JGH…Q 600 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47
2

2 JG + limiter 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48)
HMCP 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48)
2
2 JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
4.12 4.13
2 (104.6) (104.9)
2
2
2
13.06
2 (331.7)
2
2
4.41
(112.0)
2 3.44
(87.4)
2 3.34
(84.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2
Selective Coordination
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-206
V4-T2-207
2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-207
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
2
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination 2
Product Description Features, Benefits and 2
Eaton’s Electrical Sector Functions
introduces new high-magnetic Eaton’s new LHH and NHH
circuit breaker will open, All other overcurrent
2
withstand molded case circuit molded case circuit breakers
breakers, specifically designed while the line-side LHH and/ protective devices within
for critical operations and
are furnished with a higher
level of magnetic pickup or
or NHH circuit breakers these systems shall remain 2
selective coordination remain closed, thus providing closed. Similarly, backup
electronic instantaneous
requirements. The high- settings as indicated in
continuity of power to the power system designs of 2
magnetic withstand LHH other critical loads supplied a critical nature that are not
table on Page V4-T2-207.
and NHH frames continue These higher levels of
by the LHH or NHH circuit
breakers.
code mandated may also
require overcurrent protective
2
the legacy of circuit breaker magnetic pickup and
devices to be selectively
innovation for which Eaton
is recognized throughout the
electronic instantaneous
Benefits of Using the LHH coordinated as much as 2
values in turn allow the and NHH Molded Case
world. The LHH and NHH practicable to provide a higher
system designer to obtain Circuit Breakers 2
breakers are equipped with level of uptime.
selective coordination at fault
125 to 400 ampere trip units Customer expectations and
current levels up to these
with high-magnetic capability. higher ratings. Greater values
codes are driving product 2
This design enables the development to protect
of selective coordination are
customers’ critical
breakers to withstand up available based on
operations. NEC® 2005 and
2
to 90 times rated current manufacturer tested
2008 requires circuits with
before opening under short-
circuit conditions.
combinations using the LHH
elevators, emergency 2
and NHH as line-side
systems, legally required
breakers and standard
The LHH and NHH circuit
breakers as load-side devices.
standby systems, health care 2
breakers incorporate a higher essential systems and critical
Refer to IA01200002E to
level of instantaneous pickup,
thus allowing for higher
determine the maximum
operation power systems to
be selectively coordinated.
2
fault values that selective
current levels of selective Simply stated, only the
coordination. Standard
coordination achieves. When
closest protective device 2
the line-side and load-side
molded case circuit breakers directly protecting the
typically are furnished with a
molded case circuit breaker
trip ratings are chosen to
circuit having an overcurrent 2
magnetic pickup or electronic (overload or fault) condition
coordinate in the overload
instantaneous adjustment or
range, they also can be
should open. 2
instantaneous override set at
selectively coordinated in
10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.
the fault range up to the 2
values listed in the table on
Page V4-T2-207 or 2
IA01200002E. For
overcurrents protected
by circuit breakers on the
2
load-side of the LHH or NHH,
only the effected load-side 2

Series G
Product Selection
2
Proven Technology
2 and Performance
LHH LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers
The LHH is based on the
Thermal-Magnetic LSI Electronic
2 Series G L-Frame circuit Trip Unit Trip Unit
breaker, sharing the same
Ampere
small footprint and field-fit
2 accessories as the L-Frame
Rating LHH Frame NHH Frame
breaker. The NHH is based 125 LHH3125FFG —

2 on the Series G N-Frame 150 LHH3150FFG NHH3150T52X15
circuit breaker and shares 175 LHH3175FFG NHH3175T52X15
2 the same footprint and
200 LHH3200FFG NHH3200T52X15
accessories as the N-Frame
2 breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
225 LHH3225FFG NHH3225T52X15
250 LHH3250FFG NHH3250T52X15
2 The LHH incorporates a 300 LHH3300FFG NHH3300T52X15
thermal-magnetic trip unit 350 LHH3350FFG NHH3350T52X15
2 with fixed thermal and
400 LHH3400FFG —
fixed magnetic settings.
The NHH has an OPTIM™
2 electronic trip unit with
LSI adjustment capabilities.
2 The instantaneous setting is
adjustable from 1000–4000 A
2 or may be turned off to
default to the frame override
2 of 14,000 A. A hand-held
OPTIMizer must be used
with the NHH to adjust
2 short-time delay and
instantaneous, however,
2 the long delay pickup is fixed
and cannot be adjusted.
2 The LHH and NHH
breakers are available in
2 Eaton’s panelboards and
switchboards.
2 Standards and Certifications
2 ● UL
● CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions
● Three-pole Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
● 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
● 125–400 ampere LHH Dimensions 2
150–350 ampere NHH
●
● Trip units: Description Height Width Depth

Weight in
Lbs (kg) 2
LHH 10.13 (257.3) 5.48 (139.2) 4.09 (103.9) 12.36 (5.6)
● LHH—thermal-magnetic 2
● NHH—LSI electronic trip unit NHH 16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.5) 5.50 (139.7) 46.80 (21.2)
● No rating plugs required 2
● Factory-sealed breakers L-Frame
● LHH uses same internal and external accessories
2.43 (61.7)
2
as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker 4.06
● NHH uses same internal and external accessories R 0.25
(6.4)
CL Breaker
3.16
(103.1) 2
as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker (80.3) 5.58
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics

2.00 (141.7)
10.13 2
(50.8) (257.3)
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz

1.92
(48.8)
2
Breaker Type 2.69
(68.3) 5.38
5.48
(139.2)
2
Description LHH NHH (136.7) Three-Pole
Max. rated current (amperes) 400 350 2
NEMA UL 489 N-Frame
240 Vac 100 100 Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View
2
3.44
480 Vac 65 65
(87.4) 2
600 Vac 35 35 R 0.25 C
L
Breaker
(6.4)
250 Vac 42 — 1.91
(48.5)
9.25
(235.0)
2
IEC 60947-2 1.50
(38.1) 16.00
220 Vac 100 100 (406.4) 2
415 Vac 70 70
690 Vac 25 25 3.68 2
(93.5)
125/250 Vdc 22 — 6.38
(162.1)
3.19
(81.0)
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
2
Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 125–400 A 150–350 A 2
Continuous Current Ratings
2
Continuous
Current Magnetic
Continuous
Current Instantaneous
Continuous
Current Short Delay 2
Rating (Ir) Trip Point Multiplier Trip Point Multiplier Pickup
125 A 2500 A 20x — — — 2
150 A 2500 A 16x 14,000 A 93x 225–1200 A
175 A 4000 A 22x 14,000 A 80x 260–1400 A
2
200 A 4000 A 20x 14,000 A 70x 300–1600 A 2
225 A 6000 A 26x 14,000 A 62x 338–1800 A
250 A 6000 A 24x 14,000 A 56x 375–2000 A 2
300 A 6000 A 20x 14,000 A 47x 450–2400 A
350 A 6000 A 17x 14,000 A 40x 525–2800 A
2
400 A 6000 A 15x — — —
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Contents
2 Description Page
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2 Special Features and Accessories
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-210
External Accessories and Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-211
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-213
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2
2 Special Features and Accessories
Eaton’s molded case circuit In low voltage distribution Special Calibration Calibrations and Treatment
2 breakers are designed to systems, there are many Special non-UL listed Frame
provide circuit protection for varied applications of molded calibrations are available for
2 low voltage distribution case circuit breakers. certain ambient temperatures
Description EG JG LG NG RG
systems. They are described Eaton offers the most Special ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

other than 40 °C and for
2 by NEMA as, “... a device for comprehensive family of frequencies other than
calibration
closing and interrupting a molded case circuit breakers 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced Moisture- ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2 circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
in the industry. interrupting ratings will apply fungus
treatment
This section of circuit for 400 Hz applications.
and abnormal conditions,”
2 and furthermore as, “... a breakers includes: ● Add suffix H01 to
breaker assembled as an ● Thermal-magnetic trip breaker catalog number
2 integral unit in a supporting breakers for 400 Hz rating
and enclosing housing of ● Electronic rms trip 50 ºC Calibration
2 insulating material.” The
breakers Note: Breakers equipped with
National Electrical Code
(NEC) describes them as, “A
● Molded case switches electronic trip units can operate
2 device designed to open and ● Motor circuit protectors reliably in ambient temperatures
of 50 °C. Add suffix “V3” to NG
close a circuit by non- ● Current limiting breakers
2 automatic means, and to ● Special application
MCCBs to remove standard
40 °C labeling.
open the circuit automatically breakers
2 on a predetermined overload Add suffix “V” to catalog
of current, without injury to Modified Breakers number for complete thermal
2 itself when properly applied
Eaton breakers can be ordered magnetic breaker when
within its rating.” ordering listed ampere ratings
with internal accessories
2 installed. These modified for breakers to be used in
So designed, Eaton circuit
breakers will be subject to an 50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC
breakers protect conductors
ambient MCCBs are not
2 against overloads and addition charge.
UL listed.
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
2 and motor starters, against
Contact Eaton for availability.
short circuits.
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Moisture-Fungus Treatment UL 489 Supplement SA Molded case circuit breakers Conformance with these
2
applies to vessels over 65 feet are designed to conform with standards satisfies most local
All Eaton circuit breaker cases
are molded from glass- (19.8m) in length. the following standards: and international codes, 2
polyester, which does not assuming user acceptability
support the growth of fungus.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
● Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
and simplified application. 2
Any parts that are susceptible labeling, and no use of molded case circuit Molded case circuit breakers
to the growth of fungus will aluminum conductors or breakers and circuit equal or exceed Federal
2
require special treatment. terminals. (No 50 °C.) breaker enclosures Specification Classification
Order by description. ● National Electrical W-C-375b requirements for 2
● Add suffix H08 the particular class associated
Manufacturers Association
● Add suffix J01 to breaker Or you can choose to add (NEMA) Standards with the circuit breaker frame 2
catalog number 50ºC ambient but then there Publication No. AB1-1993, being considered.
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers

is no “UL” mark. molded case circuit Open breakers do not have 2
breakers service entrance ratings.
The circuit breakers may be ● Add suffix VH08
ordered with freeze testing.
● Australian Standard AS Service entrance rating is part 2
UL 489 Supplement SB 2184, molded case circuit of the enclosure.
This option uses special requires partial 50 °C ambient breakers
lubrication and mechanical calibration, vibration testing, ● British Standards Institution
2
operation is verified at –40 °C. special nameplating and no Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
● Add suffix F01 to catalog use of aluminum conductors switchgear and control 2
number –57 °F, F02 –30 °F or terminals. Eaton chooses gear Part 1: circuit breakers
to always fully calibrate to 50 ● Canadian Standards 2
Marine Applications °C ambient. (“Naval” labeled Association (CSA) Standard
E- to R-Framed circuit per UL but no “UL” mark due C22.2 No. 5, service 2
breakers can be supplied to to 50 °C label.) entrance and branch circuit
meet the following marine ● Add suffix VH09 breakers 2
specifications: ● International
● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; Certified Test Reports Electrotechnical 2
ABS—American Bureau of Eaton breakers can be Commission
Recommendations IEC
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; ordered with certified test
reports at the time of order 60947-2, circuit breakers
2
and Lloyds
entry. Test report documents ● Japanese T-Mark Standard
These specifications the thermal and magnetic or molded case circuit 2
generally require molded electronic tripping breakers
case circuit breakers to be characteristics of the ● South African Bureau of 2
supplied with 50 °C ambient, individual breaker. Breaker Standards, Standard SABS
and plug-in adapter kits. and test report must be 156, Standard Specification 2
When plug-in adapter kits are ordered together. Add suffix for molded case circuit
used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
breakers 2
● Swiss Electro-Technical
applications). on order for certified test
report.
Association Standard SEV 2
Circuit breakers can also be 157-1, safety regulations
supplied to meet UL 489 for circuit breakers
Supplement SA (Marine use) ● Union Technique de
2
and UL 489 Supplement SB l’Electricite Standard NF C
(Naval Use). 63-120, low voltage 2
switchgear and control gear
circuit breaker 2
requirements
● Verband Deutscher 2
Elektrotechniker
(Association of German 2
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
2
control gear, circuit
breakers 2
2
2
2

Series G
Internal Accessories Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2
Alarm Lockout Shunt Trips Cause of Trip Display/Remote Electronic Portable Test Kit
2 The alarm switches operate The shunt trip is used for Mount Cause of Trip Display The electronic portable test
when the circuit breaker is remote tripping. The Cause of Trip Display kit provides a means to
2 tripped by a short circuit or
The coil of the shunt trip is
can be field-installed on any complete field tests using
overcurrent, but also when it Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. secondary injection on all
rated only for short-time The device provides breaker
2 is tripped by a shunt trip or
undervoltage release. operation. information through an LCD
310+ trip units. The same
test kit is also capable of
screen, such as cause of secondary injection testing on
2 Auxiliary Switches
It is not permissible with
the circuit breaker open to trip, phrase current, ground Magnum and Series NRX low
Auxiliary switches are used apply a continuous opening current and low loads. voltage power circuit
2 for signaling and control command to the shunt trip in The display is ideal for breakers' 520 and 1150
purposes. The various order to prevent the breaker troubleshooting common trip units.
2 functions of the auxiliary from closing. This means trips such as ground
fault, long delay, and
switches (changeover) are that interlocking circuits with Electronic Portable Test Kit
instantaneous/short delay.
2 shown on Page V4-T2-212. continuous commands
The DIGIVIEW version will Catalog
may not be set up with Number
shunt trips. provide a local display at the
2 breaker without additional MTST230V
Undervoltage Releases wiring by connecting directly
2 The circuit breaker cannot be
onto the trip unit. The Wire Seal
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a The wire seal can be used to
closed until the undervoltage
2 release is energized. If the
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
secure the cover of the trip
release is not energized, the unit to prevent adjustments
outside of an enclosure door after settings are confirmed.
2 circuit breaker can only
and connect to the trip unit
perform an idle switching
that is contained inside the
operation. Wire Seal
2 enclosure.
Catalog
Frequent idle switching
The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA Number
2 actions should be avoided as
3R rated.
they shorten the endurance 5108A03H01
2 of the circuit breaker.
Cause of Trip Display/
Remote Mount Cause of
2 Trip Display
Catalog
2 Number
DIGIVIEW
2 DIGIVIEWR06
2 Cause of Trip LED Module

The Cause of Trip LED
2 Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
2 unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
2 Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
2 breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
2 (long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground)
2 via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
2
Cause of Trip LED Module
2 Catalog
Number
2 TRIP-LED
2
2

Series G
2.3
External Accessories and Test Kit
2
Frame
2
Fit
Description Type EG JG LG NG RG
2
Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB — — LKD4 —
Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB — — — — 2
Padlockable handle block Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF — —
off-only
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPLK FJPHL LPHL PLK5 HLK6
Padlockable handle lock hasp
off-only
Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLK55OFF HLK6OFF 2
Kirk key interlock kit 12 Field — KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6
2
Castell key interlock kit 23 Field — CTKJG CTKLG CTK4 CTK6
Slide bar interlock 4 Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK5 — 2
Walking beam interlock 4 Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI WBL5 WBL6
Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL5 — 2
Electrical operator 5 120 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T07 EOP6T08K
240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C EOP5T11 EOP6T11K 2
24 Vdc MOPEG48D MOPJG24D MOPLG24D EOP5T21 —
48 Vdc MOPEG48D — — EOP5T22 EOP6T21K
2
125 Vdc MOPEG120C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T26 —
2
220 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — —
250 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — — 2
Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L PAD53 —
Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L — — 2
Wohner busbar adapter Field top EG-BUS-T JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB — —
Field bottom EG-BUS-B JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB — — 2
2
Series G MCCB Frames EG, JG, and LG to mount to the SASY 60 mm Wohner Classic System
● UL file # E197132 ● No line side wiring required 2
● Compact design ● Up to 630 A MCCB
● UL508 tested and certified ● Reverse feed possible 2
using Wohner system with
Eaton breakers 2
2
Wohner Busbar Wohner Busbar Adapters
Adapter Breaker Frame Busbar Adapter Connection Point 2
EG EG-BUS-T Top
2
EG EG-BUS-B Bottom
JG JG-BUS-TB Top or bottom 2
LG LG-BUS-TB Top or bottom
Notes
2
1 Provision only.
2 See Page V4-T2-422 for bolt projection dimensions. 2
3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm.
5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004.
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers

2
Internal Accessory Configurations
2
2
2
2
2 ¬
2 ¬
¨ ¨
2 ¨ ¨
2 ¨ ¨
¡ ¡
2 ¡ ¡
2
2
2
¨
2 ≠
¬ = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only
2
2 Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a
Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers
Alarm Lockout 2
Frame
Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
2
Make/Break Left
Right
—
ALM1M1BEPK 2
A1L5LPK
A1L5RPK
—
A1L6RPK
2
2 Make/2 Break Left — A2L5LPK —
2
Right ALM2M2BEPK 3 A2L5RPK A2L6RPK
2
Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number
Make/Break Right EG Silver ALM1M1BEPK
2
2 Make/ 2 Break Right EG Silver ALM2M2BEPK
Make/Break Right JG and LG Silver ALM1M1BJPK
2
2 Make/ 2 Break Right JG and LG Silver ALM2M2BJPK
Make/Break Right EG Gold ALM1M1BEEPK
2
2 Make/ 2 Break Right EG Gold ALM2M2BEEPK
Make/Break Right JG and LG Gold ALM1M1BEJPK
2
2 Make/ 2 Break Right JG and LG Gold ALM2M2BEJPK
2
Auxiliary Switch
2
Frame
Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 2
1A, 1B Left — A1X5PK —
Right AUX1A1BPK A1X5PK — 2
2A, 2B Left — A2X5PK —
Right AUX2A2BPK A2X5PK A2X6RPK 2
3A, 3B Left — A3X5LPK —
Right — A3X5RPK — 2
4A, 4B Left — — —
Right — — A4X6RPK 2
Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number
2
1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUX1A1BPK 2
2A, 2B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUX2A2BPK
1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUX1E1BPK 2
2A, 2B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUX2E2BPK
2
Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout
Frame 2
Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
— Left — AA115LPK — 2
Right AUXALRMEPK 4 AA115RPK —
2
Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number 2
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Silver AUXALRMEPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Silver AUXALRMJPK 2
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Gold AUXALRMEEPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Gold AUXALRMEJPK 2
Notes
1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2
2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK.
3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK.
4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.
2
2

Series G
Shunt Trip—Standard
2 Shunt Trip—Standard
Frame
Pole
Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG 2
2 ST
48–60 Vac Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP05K —
a Right — — SNT6P05K
2 110–240 Vac Left SNT120CPK SNT5LP11K —
Right — — SNT6P11K
2 380–600 Vac Left SNT480CPK 3 — —
Right — — —
2 220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac — SNT5LP14K SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac — SNT5LP18K SNT6P18K
2 12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK — —
Right — — —
2 24 Vac/dc Left SNT024CPK SNT5LP03K —
2 48–60 Vdc Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP23K —
2 110–125 Vdc Left SNT125DPK SNT5LP26K —
2 250 Vdc Left SNT250DPK — —
Right — — —
2
Shunt Trip—Low Energy
2 Frame
Pole
Description Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 2
2 — Left — LST5LPK —
Right — — LST6RPK
2
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
Frame
Pole
2 Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG 2
110–127 Vac Left UVR120APK UVH5LP08K —
2 Right — — UVH6RP08K
24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK UVH5LP21K 4 —
2 Right — — UVH6RP21K 4
24 Vac Left UVR024APK UVH5LP21K 4 —
2 Right — — UVH6RP21K 4
48–60 Vdc Left UVR048DPK UVH5LP23K —
120 Vdc Left UVR125DPK UVH5LP26K —
2 220–250 Vdc
Right
Left
—
UVR250DPK
—
UVH5LP28K
UVH6RP26K
—
2 380–500 Vac
Right
Left
—
UVR480APK
—
UVH5LP29K
UVH6RP28K
—
Right — — UVH6RP29K
2 525–600 Vac Left UVR600APK — —
Right — — —
2 12 Vdc Left — UVH5LP20K —
2 12 Vac Left — UVH5LP02K —
2 Notes
1 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module.
2 2 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
3 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
2 4 24 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac.

Series G
2.3
Note: Gold-plated contacts are 2
well suited for switching low
voltages and currents. Lead wires 2
on accessories containing gold-
plated contacts are marked with a
yellow stripe. 2
2
Series G Gold Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings
Dielectric Withstand 2
Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (ln) Voltage (Ul)
125 V 50/60 Hz 0.1 A 2200 V 2
30 V DC 0.25 A 2200 V
5V DC 5 mA 2200 V
2
2
Series G Silver Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings 2
Dielectric Withstand
Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (ln) Voltage (Ul)
2
600 V 50/60 Hz 2A 2200 V
125/250 V 50/60 Hz 5A 2200 V 2
125 V DC 1A 2200 V
2
Series GJ Frame: Terminal Extension Kits 2
Extension Orientation
Edgewise Right Angle Spreader Straight 2
Three-pole FJTEE3 FJTER3 FJTEW3 FJTES3
Four-pole FJTEE4 FJTER4 FJTEW4 FJTES4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
Series G Motor Operators Contents

2 Description Page
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators
V4-T2-208
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217

2 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
2
2 Motor Operators
Eaton’s motor operator The robust motor operators
2 mechanism enables local and offer various voltages to
remote ON, OFF and reset maximize customer flexibility.
switching of a circuit breaker. Standard load transfer
2 The motor operator is switching can be
mounted on the circuit accomplished through the
2 breaker cover within use of two circuit breakers
the dimensions of the fitted with motor operators
2 circuit breaker. and a mechanical interlock.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Features, Benefits and Functions Product Selection
The motor operator provides ● A key is provided to 2
special features for ease of manually operate the Motor Operators
customer use and status circuit breaker
Frame Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Catalog Number
2
indication. ● A special pull-out locking
● The motor operator allows mechanism provides a Series G E-Frame 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPEG240C 2
the circuit breaker to be method for padlocking the 100–220 Vdc DC 1A MOPEG240C
opened, closed or reset circuit breaker handle in 24/48 Vdc DC 3A MOPEG48D 2
remotely the OFF position
Series C F-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD240C
● The motor operator
● The locking device will
110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD120C
2
contains a motor accept three padlock
shackles with a maximum
connected to a cam drive
diameter of 1/4-inch
220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD240C 2
mechanism. The cam 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD120C
(6.4 mm) each
drives a slide mechanism
to operate the circuit ● The cover provides visual 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPFD24D 2
breaker handle status of the circuit Series G J-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG240C
● Internal limit switches and breaker: ON, OFF or 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG120C
2
relays are used to control TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP
motor operation to prevent button allows the user to 220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG240C
2
overdriving the circuit manually trip the breaker 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG120C
breaker handle and motor 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPJG24D 2
overload conditions Series G L-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG240C
110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG120C
2
220–250 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG240C
Manual Operating Key
Turn the Key 2
(clockwise only) 110–125 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG120C
24 Vdc DC 6A MOPLG24D 2
2
Circuit Breaker
Status Indication
Window 2
2
2
PUSH-TO-TRIP Button 2
2
2
2
The motor operators are UL 2
and CSA listed, and CE
marked. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
LG Breaker with Plug-In Block Contents

2 Description Page
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-208
V4-T2-216
Plug-In Blocks
2 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
2
2
2 Plug-In Blocks
2 Product Description Product Selection
Plug-in adapters simplify
2 installation and front removal Plug-In Blocks
of circuit breakers. Plug-ins Breaker Number Catalog
are available for rear
2 connection applications on
Frame of Poles Number
EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks
three- and four-pole circuit
2 breakers. Trip on drawout EG 3 PAD3E
interlock kits are included. EG 4 PAD4E
2 Stabs for EG, JG and LG plug-
JG 3 PAD3J
ins rotate 90 ° for flexible
2 installation. Use terminal
shields for IP30 protection.
JG 4 PAD4J
LG 4 PAD4L
2 Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1
EG 3, 4 PIILEG
2 JG 3, 4 PIILJG
LG 3, 4 PIILLG
2 Terminal Shields IP30
2 EG 3 EFTS3K
EG 4 EFTS4K
2 JG 3 FJTS3K
JG 4 FJTS4K
2 LG 3 LTS3K
2 LG 4 LTS4K
Note
2 1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block.
2
2
2
2
2

Series G
2.3
Drawout Cassettes Contents
Description Page
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-151
V4-T2-169
2
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-208
V4-T2-216
2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218
Drawout Cassette 2
2
2
Drawout Cassette 2
Product Description Features Product Selection 2
The drawout cassette is Features of the drawout
available for use with JG, LG cassettes for the JG, LG and
JG Drawout Cassette JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes 2
and NG, three- and four-pole NG include:
Number Catalog
breakers. The cassettes
consist of two separate
● Trip on drawout—breaker Breaker Frame of Poles Number 2
components: the movable will trip if it is in the ON JG 3 JG3DOM
mechanism, which attaches position when withdrawn 2
to the breaker, and the from the cassette
4 JG4DOM
stationary mechanism, which ● Secondary terminal block— 2
houses in the cassette. For the drawout cassettes
LG Drawout Cassette LG 3 LG3DOM
the JG, LG and NG drawout include a secondary 2
cassettes, all necessary parts terminal block for easier
for installation are included in access when wiring low
the one catalog number. voltage accessories, 2
including shunts and 4 LG4DOM
undervoltage releases 2
The drawout mechanism has
three primary positions: NG 3 NG3DOM
2
● Connected—the breaker is 4 NG4DOM 2
fully connected to the
primary stabs and
secondary contacts
2
● Disconnected—both the
primary stabs and the 2
secondary contacts are
disconnected 2
● Withdraw—the breaker
can be removed from the 2
cassette
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Contents

2 Description Page
2 Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-221
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222
2 G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-225
V4-T2-239
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-289
2 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
V4-T2-371
V4-T2-373
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-374
2 Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-377
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
2 Learn Drawings
Online Online
2
2 Product Overview
Eaton’s molded case circuit Eaton offers the most 50 °C Calibration These specifications
2 breakers are designed to comprehensive family of Add suffix V to catalog generally require molded
provide circuit protection for molded case circuit breakers Number for complete case circuit breakers to be
2 low voltage distribution in the industry. breaker, listed above, when supplied with 50 °C ambient,
systems. They are described ordering listed ampere ratings and plug-in adapter kits.
2 by NEMA as, “... a device for This section of circuit breakers When plug-in adapter kits are
includes: for breakers to be used in
closing and interrupting a 50 °C ambients. (No UL label.) used, no terminals need be
2 circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
● Thermal-magnetic trip
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
supplied (switchboard
applications).
breakers
and abnormal conditions,” All circuit breaker cases are
2 and furthermore as, “... a
● Electronic rms trip
molded from glass-polyester
Circuit breakers can also be
breakers supplied to meet UL 489
breaker assembled as an which does not support the
2 integral unit in a supporting
● Molded case switches
growth of fungus. Any parts
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
and enclosing housing of ● Motor circuit protectors which are susceptible to the
(Naval Use).
2 insulating material.” The ● Current limiting breakers growth of fungus will require
National Electrical Code ● Special application special treatment. UL 489 Supplement SA
(NEC) describes them as, “A
2 device designed to open and
breakers
Freeze-Tested Circuit
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8 m) in length.
close a circuit by non- Modified Breakers Breakers Requirements include 40 °C
2 automatic means, and to Eaton breakers can be ordered The circuit breakers may be ambient calibration, special
open the circuit automatically with internal accessories ordered with freeze testing. labeling, and no use of
2 on a predetermined overload installed. These modified This option uses special aluminum conductors or
of current, without injury to breakers will be subject to an lubrication and mechanical terminals. (No 50 °C.)
2 itself when properly applied addition charge. operation is verified at –40 °C.
● Suffix H08
within its rating.”
Special Calibration Marine Applications
2 So designed, Eaton circuit
Special non-UL-listed E- to R-Framed circuit
Or you can choose to add 50
breakers protect conductors °C ambient but then there is
calibrations are available for breakers can be supplied to
2 against overloads and
certain ambient temperatures meet the following marine
no “UL” mark.
conductors and connected
other than 40 °C and for specifications: ● Suffix VH08
apparatus, such as motors
2 and motor starters, against frequencies other than 50/60 ● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; UL 489 Supplement SB
short circuits. Hz or DC. Reduced
ABS—American Bureau of requires partial 50 °C ambient
2 interrupting ratings will apply
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; calibration, vibration testing,
In low voltage distribution for 400 Hz applications.
Lloyds; and ABS/NVR special nameplating and no
2 systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
use of aluminum conductors
or terminals. Eaton chooses
case circuit breakers.
2 to always fully calibrate to 50
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
2 per UL, and UL now allows
50 °C label here.)
2 ● Suffix VH09

Series C
2.4
Certified Test Reports Standards and Certifications
Eaton breakers can be Molded case circuit breakers ● Japanese T-Mark Standard Conformance with these
2
ordered with certified test are designed to conform with molded case circuit standards satisfies most local
reports at the time of order the following standards: breakers and international codes, 2
entry. Test report documents ● South African Bureau of assuming user acceptability
the thermal and magnetic or ● Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489, Standards, Standard SABS and simplified application. 2
electronic tripping 156, Standard Specification
molded case circuit Molded case circuit breakers
characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker breakers and circuit for molded case circuit equal or exceed Federal 2
breaker enclosures breakers Specification Classification
and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix ● National Electrical
● Swiss Electro-Technical W-C-375b requirements for 2
12 to breaker catalog number Manufacturers Association Association Standard SEV the particular class associated
and enter separate line item (NEMA) Standards 157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
with the circuit breaker frame 2
on order for certified test Publication No. AB1-1993, being considered.
report. molded case circuit ● Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C Open breakers do not have 2
breakers service entrance ratings.
63-120, low voltage
● Australian Standard AS
2184, molded case circuit switchgear and control gear Service entrance rating is part 2
circuit breaker of the enclosure.
breakers
● British Standards Institution
requirements 2
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
● Verband Deutscher
switchgear and control Elektrotechniker 2
gear Part 1: circuit breakers (Association of German
● Canadian Standards
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
2
Association (CSA) Standard voltage switchgear and
C22.2 No. 5, service control gear, circuit 2
entrance and branch circuit breakers
breakers 2
● International
Electrotechnical
Commission
2
Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Quick Reference
2
2
2 G-Frame
Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
2 Circuit
Breaker
Ampere
Rating No. of Type
Federal
Specification
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC of Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 3 250 Number
2 GHB 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 11a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-230
2 GHB 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b — — 65 — — — — 14 V4-T2-230

GHB 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12b, 14b — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-230
2 GHB 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 15b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-230
HGHB 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a, 13b 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-230
2 GHBS 15–30 1, 2 480Y/277 — — — 65 65 — 14 — — — — V4-T1-34
GBHS 15–20 1, 2 600Y/347 — N.I.T.U. — — — — — — 10 — — V4-T1-34
2 GDB 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-228
2 GDB 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-228

GD 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-227
2 GD 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 22 — — 10 V4-T2-227
GHC 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-235
2 GHC 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — — — 1 V4-T2-235
GHC 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-235
2
GHC 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-235
2 HGHC 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-235
Notes
2 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
2 3 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
F-Frame
2
Circuit Ampere Federal AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Breaker
Type
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles AC DC
Type
of Trip 1
Specification
W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
Page
Number
2
EDB 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 22 — — — 10 — V4-T2-239 2
EDS 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 42 — — — 10 — V4-T2-239
ED 15–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 12b — — 65 — — — 10 — V4-T2-239 2
EDH 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 100 — — — 10 — V4-T2-239
EDC 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 1 — — 200 — — — 10 — V4-T2-239
2
EHD 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 14 — — 10 — V4-T2-239
2
EHD 15–100 2, 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 18 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-239
FDB 15–150 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 18a — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-239 2
3
FDB 15–150 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-239
FD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 35 — — 10 — V4-T2-239 2
FD 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-239
FD 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3
— — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-239
2
FDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 65 — 35 18 — — V4-T2-239 2
HFD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 65 — — 10 — V4-T2-239
HFD 15–225 2,3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-239 2
3
HFD 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-239
HFDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 100 — 65 25 — — V4-T2-239
2
FDC 4 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 24a
3
— — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-239
2
FDC 4 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-239
FDCE 45 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 200 — 100 25 — — V4-T2-239 2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2
3 Not defined in W-C-375b.
4 Current limiting.
2
5 Check with Eaton for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
J-Frame
2 Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Ampere Type Federal AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
2 Breaker
Type
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles AC DC
of
Trip 1
Specification
W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
Page
Number
2 JDB 70–250 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-260

JD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-259
2 HJD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-259
JDC 3 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-259
2
2 K-Frame
2 Circuit Ampere Type Federal AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
2 Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
DK 250–400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 65 — — — — 10 V4-T2-271
2 KDB 100–400 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-271
KD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-268, V4-T2-269,
2 V4-T2-273, V4-T2-276
CKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-270, V4-T2-279,
2 V4-T2-281
HKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 22 V4-T2-268, V4-T2-269,
2 V4-T2-273, V4-T2-276
CHKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-270, V4-T2-279,
2 V4-T2-281
KDC 3 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 65 — 22 V4-T2-268, V4-T2-269,
2 V4-T2-273, V4-T2-276
2
L-Frame
2 Circuit
Continuous
Ampere
Volts
Type Federal
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
2 Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
LDB 300–600 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-294
2 LD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-292, V4-T2-293,
V4-T2-298
2 CLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-294, V4-T2-304
HLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-292, V4-T2-293,
2 V4-T2-298
CHLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-294, V4-T2-304
2 LDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-292, V4-T2-293,
V4-T2-300
2 CLDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-294, V4-T2-306
2
M-Frame
2 Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Ampere Type Federal
2 Breaker Rating No. of of Specification
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
2 MDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — 22 V4-T2-317, V4-T2-319
CMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — — V4-T2-319
2 HMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-317, V4-T2-319
2 CHMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-319
Notes
2 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
3 Current limiting.
2

Series C
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Contents
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-221
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
V4-T2-222 2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-289 2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-326
V4-T2-341
2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-371 2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . V4-T2-373
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-374 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-377
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410 2
2
2
2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All two- and three-pole
2
circuit breakers are of the
common trip type. On all 2
three-phase delta (240 V)
Grounded B phase 2
applications, refer to Eaton
● Single-pole circuit 2
breakers, 15 and 20
amperes. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for
2
fluorescent lighting
applications 2
● All G-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for 2
reverse feed use
● HACR rated 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
Circuit Breaker/Frame
2
GD 3 100 K
2
Circuit Breaker Type Suffix
2 GD HGHB Number of Poles Trip Amperes K = Molded case switch J01= Fungus proofed
GDB HGHC 1 = 1 pole 015 035 070 D = Ring type terminals R01= Shock tested
2 GHB
GHC
GHBGFEP
GHCGFEP
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
020
024
040
045
080
090
C = Steel collars F01= Freeze tester
V = 122 °F (50 °C) HID= High intensity discharge 1
GHQ 030 050 100
2 060
2
2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2 Circuit Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Breaker Type of Poles 120 240 277 480 480Y/277 125 2 250 34
2 GDB 2, 3 — — — 14 — — 10
2 GD 2 — 65 — 14 — — 10
GD 3 — 65 — 22 — — 10
2 GHQ — 65 — 14 — — — —
GHB 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
2 GHB 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 —
HGHB 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —
2 GHC 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
2 GHC 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 —
HGHC 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —
2 Terminal Types
2 For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below.
2 Terminal Types
Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) 5
2 Standard
15–20 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al 14–10 2.5–4
2 25–100 Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10–1/0 4–50
2 Optional—GD, GHB, GHC

15–100 Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu 14–3 —
2 Notes
1 HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20 A circuit breakers.
2 2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A.

3 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
2 4 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.

5 Not UL listed sizes.
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326 2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
2
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes) 2
Product Description Standards and Certifications 2
● Cable in, cable out ● UL/CSA
● Includes mounting 2
hardware and BMHE
2
Product Selection 2
2
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
2
Includes Binding
14 kAIC at 480 Vac 22 kAIC at 480 Vac
Includes Line and Load Terminals
Head Screws and Clamps
10–32 x 0.312 2
Maximum
Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
at 40 °C Number Number Number
15 GD2015 GD3015 GD3015D 2
20 GD2020 GD3020 GD3020D
25 GD2025 GD3025 GD3025D
2
30 GD2030 GD3030 GD3030D 2
35 GD2035 GD3035 GD3035D
40 GD2040 GD3040 GD3040D 2
45 GD2045 GD3045 GD3045D
50 GD2050 GD3050 GD3050D
2
60 — GD3060 GD3060D
2
70 — GD3070 GD3070D
80 — GD3080 GD3080D 2
90 — GD3090 GD3090D
100 — GD3100 GD3100D 2
2
2
2

Series C
Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 Includes Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 Continuous
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number
2 15 GDB2015 GDB3015
20 GDB2020 GDB3020
2 25 GDB2025 GDB3025
2 30 GDB2030 GDB3030
35 GDB2035 GDB3035
2 40 GDB2040 GDB3040
45 GDB2045 GDB3045
2 50 GDB2050 GDB3050
2 60 — GDB3060
70 — GDB3070
2 80 — GDB3080
90 — GDB3090
2 100 — GDB3100
2 Type GD Molded Case Switches
2 Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole

2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Number
Ampere Rating at 40 °C (Includes Line and Load Terminals)
2 60 GD3060K
60 GD3060KC 1
2 100 GD3100K
100 GD3100KD 2
2
Notes
2 1 Includes line and load steel terminals.
2 Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312.
2 Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Dimensions
2
GD-Frame, Three-Pole
Front View Side View

2
2
2
2
2
4.88
(123.8)
2
Off
2
2
2
2
2.63
3.00
(76.2) (66.7) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Typical GHB Contents

2 Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-221
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-289
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-373
2 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-374
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-377
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
2
2 Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2 Standards and Certifications
These breakers meet the
2 requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-375b as
follows:
2
● Type GHB, 120 and 240 V:
2 ● Single-pole: Class 11a
● Two-, three-pole:
2 Classes 10b, 11b, 12b,
14b, 15b
2 ● UL/CSA
● Type GHB, 277 and
2 480Y/277V:
● Single-pole:
2 Classes 12c, 13a
2 Class 13b
● Type HGHB 277V
2 ● Type GHQ 277V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Typical GHB Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with 2
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
277/480 Vac Maximum, 277/480 Vac Maximum, 277/480 Vac Maximum, 2
125 Vdc Maximum 2 125/250 Vdc Maximum 125/250 Vdc Maximum 3
Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2
15 GHB1015 45 GHB2015 4 GHB3015 4
20 GHB1020 45 GHB2020 4 GHB3020 4 2
25 GHB1025 GHB2025 GHB3025
30 GHB1030 GHB2030 GHB3030
2
35 GHB1035 GHB2035 GHB3035
2
40 GHB1040 GHB2040 GHB3040
45 GHB1045 GHB2045 GHB3045 2
50 GHB1050 GHB2050 GHB3050
60 GHB1060 GHB2060 GHB3060 2
70 GHB1070 GHB2070 GHB3070
80 GHB1080 GHB2080 GHB3080
2
90 GHB1090 GHB2090 GHB3090
2
100 GHB1100 GHB2100 GHB3100
2
Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 2
Continuous Single-Pole
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
2
15 HGHB1015 6 2
20 HGHB1020 6
25 HGHB1025 2
30 HGHB1030
Notes
2
1 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V).
2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices
2
are not suitable for DC application.
3 Use two outside poles.
4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals.
2
5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Dimensions
2
GDB-Frame, Three-Pole
2 Front View
2 Side View
2
2
2
2 4.00
(101.6)
2
2
2
2 3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
Max.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Single-Phase (requires two poles) Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
2
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes) 2
● 15–60 amperes, 277 V, These circuit breakers meet
50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489 2
● Operational voltage and UL 1053.
240 V to 305 V 2
2
Product Selection 2
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground
2
Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles)
2
Continuous 277 Vac, 30 mA
Ampere Rating Catalog 2
at 40 °C Number
15 GHBGFEP1015 2
20 GHBGFEP1020
30 GHBGFEP1030
2
40 GHBGFEP1040
2
50 GHBGFEP1050
60 GHBGFEP1060 2
2
2
Circuit Breaker Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 2
Type of Poles 277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
GHBGFEP 1 14,000
2
2
2
2

Series C
Dimensions
2
GHB-Frame, Three-Pole
2 Front View
2 Side View
2
2
2
2 4.00
(101.6)
2
2
2
2 3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical GHC Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
2
Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes) 2
● 15–100 amperes These breakers meet the
● 120, 240, 277, 480Y/277V, requirements of Federal 2
50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc Specification W-C-37b as
follows:
● Single-, two- and 2
three-pole ● Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/
● Cable in, cable out 277V: 2
● Does not include mounting ● Single-pole:
hardware Classes 12c, 13a 2
Class 13b 2
● UL/CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
2 Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
2 277 Vac Maximum, 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 1 125/250 Vdc Maximum 125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
2 Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number
15 GHC1015 34 GHC2015 3 GHC3015 3
2 20 GHC1020 34 GHC2020 3 GHC3020 3
25 GHC1025 GHC2025 GHC3025
2 30 GHC1030 GHC2030 GHC3030
2 35 GHC1035 GHC2035 GHC3035

40 GHC1040 GHC2040 GHC3040
2 45 GHC1045 GHC2045 GHC3045
50 GHC1050 GHC2050 GHC3050
2 60 GHC1060 GHC2060 GHC3060
70 GHC1070 GHC2070 GHC3070
2 80 GHC1080 GHC2080 GHC3080
2 90 GHC1090 GHC2090 GHC3090

100 GHC1100 GHC2100 GHC3100
2
2 Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
Continuous Single-Pole
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
2 15 HGHC1015 5
20 HGHC1020 5
2 25 HGHC1025
30 HGHC1030
2 Notes
1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
2 2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 ampere; 80 through 100 ampere devices are
not suitable for DC application.

2 3 Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals.
4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2 5 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces) Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
2
Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes) 2
● 15–60 amperes, 277 V, These circuit breakers meet
50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489 2
● Operational voltage and UL 1053.
240–305 V 2
2
Product Selection 2
Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit
Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
Continuous
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277V, 30 mA 2
Ampere Rating Catalog
at 40 °C Number 2
15 GHCGFEP1015
20 GHCGFEP1020 2
30 GHCGFEP1030
40 GHCGFEP1040
2
50 GHCGFEP1050
2
60 GHCGFEP1060
2
Technical Data and Specifications 2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Breaker Number
Type of Poles 277 Vac (50/60 Hz) 2
GHCGFEP 1 14,000
2
2
2
2

Series C
Special Purpose Circuit Breakers Contents

2 Description Page
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-225
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-371
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-373
2
2 Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2 Product Description Product Selection
Eaton’s Type GHC circuit
2 breakers have binding head Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
screw-type terminals on line
2 and load side. These circuit 277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 1
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
breakers with screw-type
terminals (0.190–32) will be Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 marked “Special purpose
Continuous
breaker not for general use.” at 40 °C Number Number Number
2 To order this special breaker, 25 GHC1025D GHC2025D GHC3025D
use the catalog number from
30 GHC1030D GHC2030D GHC3030D
2 the tables on this page.
2 40 GHC1040D GHC2040D GHC3040D

2 50 GHC1050D GHC2050D GHC3050D
2 70 GHC1070D GHC2070D GHC3070D
2 80 GHC1080D GHC2080D GHC3080D

2 100 GHC1100D GHC2100D GHC3100D
2
Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
2 Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications
277 Vac Maximum
2 Continuous Single-Pole
2 Type at 40 °C Number
Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID
2 20 GHC1020HID
Bolt-on 15 GHB1015HID
2 20 GHB1020HID
2 Notes
1 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices are not suitable
for DC application.
2 2 Use two outside poles.

Series C
2.4
Typical F-Frame Breaker Contents
F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222 2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-225
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-253
2
2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265 2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-289
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315 2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341 2
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit
2
breakers are HACR rated
● All circuit breakers 10
2
through 30 amperes are
suitable for HID (high 2
intensity discharge) use
● All F-Frame circuit breakers 2
are suitable for reverse
feed use 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2 FDC 3 100 L
2 Circuit Breaker Suffix
Type Number of Trip Amperes E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole
2 EHD
FDB
Poles
1 = 1 pole
010
015
EH = 50% protected (four-pole only)
K = High magnetic molded case switch
FD 2 = 2 poles 020 L = Line and load terminals
2 HFD
FDC
3 = 3 poles 025 S = Stainless steel terminals
V = 50 °C calibration
4 = 4 poles 030
035 W = Without terminals
2 040 Y = Line terminals only
045 Z = Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes)
2 050
060
070
2 080
090
100
2 110
125
2 150
175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
2 225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
2
EDC 3 200 L
2
2 Circuit Breaker
Type Number of Trip
Suffix
L = Line and load terminals
EDB Poles Amperes W = Without terminals
2 EDS 2 = 2 poles 100 Y = Line terminals only
ED 3 = 3 poles 125 Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes)
EDH
2 EDC
150
175
200
2 225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 210+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
2
HFDE 3 225 22 L 2
2
Performance at Trip Unit Features
480 Vac
FDE= 35 kAIC
Number of
Poles 100
Trip Units 21 = 210+ LI
22 = 210+ LSI
W= Without terminals
L= Line and load terminals
2
HFDE= 65 kAIC 3 = 3 poles 150 Blank= Load side terminals only
FDCE= 100 kAIC 225 2
2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 2
HFDE 3 225 32 ZG W 2
Performance at Features 2
480 Vac Number of W= Without terminals
FDE= 35 kAIC
HFDE= 65 kAIC
Poles
3 = 3 poles 080
Trip Units
Trip Unit Trip Unit Features
L= Line and load terminals
Blank= Load side terminals only
2
FDCE= 100 kAIC 160 ZG= Zone
225
32 = 310+ LSI
33 = 310+ LS selective 2
35 = 310+ LSG interlocking
36 = 310+ LSIG Blank= No option 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
2 Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2 65 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number
2 15 ED2015 ED3015
20 ED2020 ED3020
2 25 ED2025 ED3025
30 ED2030 ED3030
2 35 ED2035 ED3035
2 40 ED2040 ED3040
50 ED2050 ED3050
2 60 ED2060 ED3060
100 ED2100 ED3100
2 125 ED2125 ED3125
150 ED2150 ED3150
2 175 ED2175 ED3175
2 200 ED2200 ED3200

225 ED2225 ED3225
2
2 Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed

Two-Pole Three-Pole
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 15 — —
20 — —
2 25 — —
30 — —
2 35 — —
40 — —
2 50 — —
2 60 — —
100 EDH2100 EDH3100
2 125 EDH2125 EDH3125
150 EDH2150 EDH3150
2 175 EDH2175 EDH3175
200 EDH2200 EDH3200
2
225 EDH2225 EDH3225
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2
200 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog
2
15 — —
20 — — 2
25 — —
30 — —
2
35 — —
2
40 — —
50 — — 2
60 — —
100 EDC2100 EDC3100 2
125 EDC2125 EDC3125
150 EDC2150 EDC3150
2
175 EDC2175 EDC3175
2
200 EDC2200 EDC3200
225 EDC2225 EDC3225 2
2
Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2
22 kAIC at 240 Vac
2
Maximum Continuous
Two-Pole
Catalog
Three-Pole
Catalog
2
100 EDB2100 EDB3100
2
110 EDB2110 EDB3110 2
125 EDB2125 EDB3125
150 EDB2150 EDB3150 2
175 EDB2175 EDB3175
200 EDB2200 EDB3200
2
225 EDB2225 EDB3225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable

2 Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2 (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
42 kAIC at 240 Vac
2 Two-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog
2 Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number
100 EDS2100 EDS3100
2 110 EDS2110 EDS3110
125 EDS2125 EDS3125
2 150 EDS2150 EDS3150
175 EDS2175 EDS3175
2
200 EDS2200 EDS3200
2 225 EDS2225 EDS3225
2
Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
2 Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
2 14 kAIC at 277 Vac 14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 10 1 EHD1010 EHD2010 EHD3010

15 EHD1015 2 EHD2015 EHD3015
2 20 EHD1020 2 EHD2020 EHD3020
25 EHD1025 EHD2025 EHD3025
2 30 EHD1030 EHD2030 EHD3030
2 35 EHD1035 EHD2035 EHD3035

40 EHD1040 EHD2040 EHD3040
2 45 EHD1045 EHD2045 EHD3045

50 EHD1050 EHD2050 EHD3050
2 60 EHD1060 EHD2060 EHD3060
70 EHD1070 EHD2070 EHD3070
2 80 EHD1080 EHD2080 EHD3080
2 90 EHD1090 EHD2090 EHD3090

100 EHD1100 EHD2100 EHD3100
2 Notes
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
14 kAIC at 600 Vac 2
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number
10 1 FDB2010 FDB3010 FDB4010 2
15 FDB2015 FDB3015 FDB4015
20 FDB2020 FDB3020 FDB4020
2
25 FDB2025 FDB3025 FDB4025
2
30 FDB2030 FDB3030 FDB4030
35 FDB2035 FDB3035 FDB4035 2
40 FDB2040 FDB3040 FDB4040
45 FDB2045 FDB3045 FDB4045 2
50 FDB2050 FDB3050 FDB4050
60 FDB2060 FDB3060 FDB4060
2
70 FDB2070 FDB3070 FDB4070 2
80 FDB2080 FDB3080 FDB4080
90 FDB2090 FDB3090 FDB4090 2
100 FDB2100 FDB3100 FDB4100
110 FDB2110 FDB3110 FDB4110
2
125 FDB2125 FDB3125 FDB4125
150 FDB2150 FDB3150 FDB4150
2
Note 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 35 kAIC at 277 Vac 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2 10 1 FD1010 — — —
15 FD1015 2 FD2015 FD3015 FD4015
2 20 FD1020 2 FD2020 FD3020 FD4020
2 25 FD1025 FD2025 FD3025 FD4025

30 FD1030 FD2030 FD3030 FD4030
2 35 FD1035 FD2035 FD3035 FD4035
40 FD1040 FD2040 FD3040 FD4040
2 45 FD1045 FD2045 FD3045 FD4045
50 FD1050 FD2050 FD3050 FD4050
2 60 FD1060 FD2060 FD3060 FD4060
2 70 FD1070 FD2070 FD3070 FD4070

80 FD1080 FD2080 FD3080 FD4080
2 90 FD1090 FD2090 FD3090 FD4090
100 FD1100 FD2100 FD3100 FD4100
2 110 FD1110 FD2110 FD3110 FD4110
125 FD1125 FD2125 FD3125 FD4125
2
150 FD1150 FD2150 FD3150 FD4150
2 175 — FD2175 FD3175 FD4175

200 — FD2200 FD3200 FD4200
2 225 — FD2225 FD3225 FD4225
2 Notes
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
65 kAIC at 277 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
15 HFD1015 1 HFD2015 HFD3015 HFD4015 2
20 HFD1020 1 HFD2020 HFD3020 HFD4020
25 HFD1025 HFD2025 HFD3025 HFD4025
2
30 HFD1030 HFD2030 HFD3030 HFD4030
2
35 HFD1035 HFD2035 HFD3035 HFD4035
40 HFD1040 HFD2040 HFD3040 HFD4040 2
45 HFD1045 HFD2045 HFD3045 HFD4045
50 HFD1050 HFD2050 HFD3050 HFD4050 2
60 HFD1060 HFD2060 HFD3060 HFD4060
70 HFD1070 HFD2070 HFD3070 HFD4070
2
80 HFD1080 HFD2080 HFD3080 HFD4080 2
90 HFD1090 HFD2090 HFD3090 HFD4090
100 HFD1100 HFD2100 HFD3100 HFD4100 2
110 HFD1110 HFD2110 HFD3110 HFD4110
125 HFD1125 HFD2125 HFD3125 HFD4125
2
150 HFD1150 HFD2150 HFD3150 HFD4150
175 — HFD2175 HFD3175 HFD4175
2
200 — HFD2200 HFD3200 HFD4200 2
225 — HFD2225 HFD3225 HFD4225
Note
2
1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 15 FDC2015 FDC3015 FDC4015
20 FDC2020 FDC3020 FDC4020
2 25 FDC2025 FDC3025 FDC4025
2 30 FDC2030 FDC3030 FDC4030

35 FDC2035 FDC3035 FDC4035
2 40 FDC2040 FDC3040 FDC4040
45 FDC2045 FDC3045 FDC4045
2 50 FDC2050 FDC3050 FDC4050
60 FDC2060 FDC3060 FDC4060
2 70 FDC2070 FDC3070 FDC4070
2 80 FDC2080 FDC3080 FDC4080

90 FDC2090 FDC3090 FDC4090
2 100 FDC2100 FDC3100 FDC4100
110 FDC2110 FDC3110 FDC4110
2 125 FDC2125 FDC3125 FDC4125
150 FDC215 FDC3150 FDC4150
2
175 FDC2175 FDC3175 FDC4175
2 200 FDC2200 FDC3200 FDC4200

225 FDC2225 FDC3225 FDC4225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 2
Standard Optional
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short Independently Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Neutral 2
Time Pickup with I2t Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Short Time Pickup and CT for LSG
Maximum
Ampere Short Delay Ramp Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Protection and LSIG
2
Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number
35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac 2
80 FDE308033 FDE308032 FDE308035 FDE308036 CTF080
2
2
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80 HFDE308033 HFDE308032 HFDE308035 HFDE308036 CTF080 2
160 HFDE316033 HFDE316032 HFDE316035 HFDE316036 CTF160
225 HFDE322533 HFDE322532 HFDE322535 HFDE322536 CTF225 2
80 FDCE308033 FDCE308032 FDCE308035 FDCE308036 CTF080
2
160 FDCE316033 FDCE316032 FDCE316035 FDCE316036 CTF160 2
225 FDCE322533 FDCE322532 FDCE322535 FDCE322536 CTF225
2
Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 210+ Electronic Circuit Breakers FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective
with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Interlocking 2
Digitrip RMS 210+ Trip Unit Only Ampere LSI w/ZSI LSIG w/ZSI
Standard Optional Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
LI LSI 35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
Adjustable
Instantaneous
Adjustable Short Time Pickup
and Delay 80 FDE308032ZG FDE308036ZG
2
Maximum Catalog Catalog 160 FDE316032ZG FDE316036ZG
Ampere Rating Number Number 2
225 FDE322532ZG FDE322536ZG
100 FDE310021 FDE310022
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac 2
80 HFDE308032ZG HFDE308036ZG
150 FDE315021 1
160 HFDE316032ZG HFDE316036ZG 2
225 FDE322521 FDE322522
225 HFDE322532ZG HFDE322536ZG
2
100 HFDE310021 HFDE310022
150 HFDE315021 1
80 FDCE308032ZG FDCE308036ZG
2
160 FDCE316032ZG FDCE316036ZG
225 HFDE322521 HFDE322522
225 FDCE322532ZG FDCE322536ZG 2
210+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings 2
Circuit
Breaker Circuit
Type Frame Ratings Breaker 2
Type Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE 150 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225 2
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
FDE, HFDE 100 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 2
Note
1 For 210+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and
2
225 A frames.
2
2
2
2

Series C
Molded Case Switches

2 Eaton’s molded case components and are of the
switches are used as high instantaneous automatic
2 compact switches in type. Molded case switches
applications requiring high are listed in accordance with
2 current switching capabilities. Underwriters Laboratories
Molded case switches are Standard UL 489.
constructed of circuit breaker
2
2 Molded Case Switches
2 Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side
Terminals Only
2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Two-Pole
100 EHD2100K FD2100K HFD2100K
2
150 — FD2150K HFD2150K
2 225 — FD2225K HFD2225K

Three-Pole
2 100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K
150 — FD3150K HFD3150K
2 225 — FD3225K HFD3225K
2 Four-Pole
100 — FD4100K HFD4100K
2 150 — FD4150K HFD4150K
225 — FD4225K HFD4225K
2 Note
Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information
Line and load terminals provide F-Frame circuit breakers and 2
wire connecting capabilities for molded case switches have
specific ranges of continuous load terminals only as 2
current ratings and wire types. standard equipment. When
Except as noted, terminals standard line-end terminals 2
comply with Underwriters (same as standard load-end
Laboratories Standards UL terminals) are required, add
486A and UL 486B. Unless Suffix L to the circuit breaker 2
otherwise specified, F-Frame catalog number. When non-
circuit breakers are factory standard or optional line and/ 2
equipped with load or load terminals are required,
terminals only. order by style number. 2
Specify if factory installation
is required.
2
2
Maximum
Package of Three
Terminals 2
Breaker Terminal Body AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
Amperes Material Wire Type Range Range mm2 Number 2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI 14–10 2.5–4 3T20FB 1
2
100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB
2
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD
Optional Pressure Terminals 2
50 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–4 2.5–25 3TA50FB 1
100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3TA100FD 2
200 Stainless steel Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T150FB
225 Copper Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T225FD
2
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK3 2 2
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK 2 3
Notes 2
1 Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
2 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only. 2
3 Replacement use only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2
Collar
Collar
2 Screw
Nut
2 Clip
Conductor
2 Conductor
Washer
Conductor
Wire Clamp Screw
2 3T20FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA225FD
Extrusion
2 Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of
conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar.
Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around
Caution: Collar must surround conductor. bottom of collar.
2
2
2 Collar
2 Conductor
Collar
2 Washer Washer
Conductor
2 Screw
Screw
3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK3 (Up to 150 mm2)

2 Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
with screw and washer. and lockwasher. with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with
2 this collar.
Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1.
Same illustration for 3TA225FDK
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
FD Frame Accessories 2
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 Four-Pole
Description
Reference
Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2
Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
2
Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T2-379 ■
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-379 ■ ❏ ❏ ■ 2
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-379 ■ ❏ ❏ ■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-381 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-381 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-383 ■ ❏ ❏ ■ 2
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-385 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-389 ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-391 ■ ■ ■ ■
External Accessories 2
End cap kit V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Keeper nut V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Terminal shields V4-T2-418 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal end covers V4-T2-419 ● ● ●
2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interphase barriers
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-420 ■ ■ ■ ■
2
■ ■ ■ ■
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-420
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-421 ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Cylinder lock V4-T2-421 ■ 2
Key interlock kit V4-T2-422 ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423 ● ● ● 2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators V4-T2-424 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-425 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-427 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-508 ● ● ● 2
LFD current limiter V4-T2-430 ● ● ●
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-430 ● ● ● ● ● 2
Cause of trip display V4-T2-431 ● ●
Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T2-431 ● ●
2
● ●
Cause of trip LED V4-T2-431
2
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-220 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Legend 2
● Accessory available/modification available
2
Note 2
1 Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation.
They are not listed with UL for field installation.
2

Series C

2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
2 Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 277 480 600 125 250 23
2 EDB
EDS
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
2 ED
EDH
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 —
2 EHD 1 — 4 — — 10 —
2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10
2 FDB 2, 3, 4 18 — 14 14 — 10
FD 1 — 35 — — 10 —
2 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 18 — 10
FDE 4 3 65 — 35 18 — —
2 HFD 1 — 65 — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 100 — 65 25 — 22
2 HFDE 4 3 100 — 65 25 — —
FDC 5 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 35 — 22
2 FDCE 456 3 200 — 100 25 — —
2 IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1)

2 Circuit Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
Type of Poles 220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125 250 23
2 EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 —
EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 —
2 ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 —
EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 —
2 EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 —
EHD 1 — 14 — — 10 —
2 2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10
FDB 2, 3, 4 18 14 14 14 — 10
2 FD 1 35 — — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 65 35 35 18 — 10
2 HFD 1 65 — — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 100 65 65 25 — 22
2 FDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 — 22
2 210+ and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories UL 489 Current Limiting Data
Catalog Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2 Description 210+ 310+ number
FDC 240 V/200 kA 41.4 1.41
Electronic portable test kit ■ ■ MTST230V
2 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal ■ ■ 5108A03H01
FDC 480 V/100 kA 38.9 2.50
FDC 600 V/35 kA 29.0 3.00
External neutral sensor (80 A) 7 ■
2 CTF080
Notes
External neutral sensor (160 A) 7 ■ CTF160 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 External neutral sensor (225 A) 7 ■ CTF225 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Compact external neutral sensor (80 A) 7 ■ CTFD080
2 Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7 ■ CTFD160
4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE.
5 Current limiting.
Compact external neutral sensor (225 A) 7 ■ CTFD225 6 Check with Eaton for availability.
2 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication ■ TRIP-LED
7 Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately.
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module ■ DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module ■ DIGIVIEWR06
2
2

Series C
2.4
FDE 210+ and 310+ Specifications FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Description Digitrip RMS 210+ Digitrip RMS 310+ FD Frame
2
310+ Settings 80 A 160 A 225 A
Breaker type
Frame designation FD FD Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
2
(All 310+)
Frames available 100 A, 150 A, 225 A 80 A, 160 A, 225 A A 15 60 100 2
Continuous current range (A) 40–225 A 15–225 A B 20 70 110
Ground fault pickup (A) N/A 16–225 A
C 30 80 125 2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100 35, 65, 100
D 40 90 150
Protection
E 50 100 160
2
Ordering options LI, LSI LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ No No
F 60 125 175
2
(or Maintenance Mode) G 70 150 200
Interchangeable trip unit No No H (= In) 80 160 225 2
High load alarm (suffix B20) No No tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) No No (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4 2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) No No
Position 3 7 7 7
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) No LSI, LSIG
Position 4 10 10 10
2
Cause of trip indication No Yes
Thru-cover accessories No No
Position 5 12 12 12 2
Test kit available Yes Yes Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20 2
FDE 210+ Adjustability Specifications Position 8 24 24 24
FD Frame Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2
210+ settings 100 A 150 A 225 A (All 310+)
Position 2 3x 3x 3x
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup Ir Position 3 4x 4x 4x
2
(amperes) A 40 70 100
(all 210+)
B 50 80 110
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
C
D
60
70
90
100
125
150
Position 7 8x 8x 8x
E 80 110 175
Position 8 10x 10x 10x
2
F 90 125 200
G (= In) 100 150 225 Position 9 12x 12x 12x
2
Ii (x In)= Instantaneous pickup Ii 100 150 225 tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 67 67
(210+ LI version) (LS, LSG) at10x at10x at10x
J–2x 200 300 450
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
2
K–2.5x 250 375 565
(LSI, LSIG)
L–3x 300 450 675 Position 2 120 120 120 2
M–3.5x 350 525 790 Position 3 300 300 300
N–4x 400 600 900 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 16 32 45 2
O–5x 500 750 1125 (LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 24 48 67
P–6x 600 900 1350 Position 3 32 64 90
2
Q–8x 800 1200 1800
R–10x 1000 1500 2250
Position 4 48 96 135
2
Position 5 64 128 180
S–12x 1 1200 1800 2400
Fixed instantaneous override (all 210+) 2400 2400 2400
Position 6 80 160 225 2
“Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile 2 Isd / tsd 100 150 225 tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
(210+ LSI version) J 2x / 150 N/A 2x / 150
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 2
K 2x / 300 N/A 2x / 300 Position 3 300 300 300
L 2x / I2t N/A 2x / I2t Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1
2
M 4x / Inst N/A 4x / Inst
N 4x / 150 N/A 4x / 150
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2
2
Notes
4x / I2t 4x / I2t
O N/A 1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and
i 2
P 6x / Inst N/A 6x / Inst RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG
Q 6x / 300 N/A 6x / 300
and RG. 2
R 10x / 150 N/A 10x / 150
S 10x / 300 N/A 10x / 300 2
2

Series C

2 FD Frame
2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth

1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2
FD Frame, Three-Pole
2 Front View Side View
2
2
2
On
2 Off
2 6.00
(152.4)
2
2
2
2 4.13 3.38
(104.9) (85.7)
2
2 Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
2 FD Frame
Number of Poles
2 Breaker Type 1 2 3 4
2 ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC — 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) —

EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 2 (0.9) 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) 6 (2.7)
2 FDE, HFDE, FDCE — — 4.5 (2.0) —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical J-Frame Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239 2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-262
2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265 2
2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit
2
● J-Frame circuit breakers are
2
available as individual
components (frame, trip 2
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete 2
breakers
● J-Frame circuit breakers 2
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 Circuit Breaker/Frame
2 JD 3 250 F
2 Circuit Breaker/ Suffix
Frame Type Number of Circuit Breaker/Frame C = Non-aluminum terminals
2 JDB
JD
Poles Ampere Rating F = Frame only
K = High magnetic molded case switch
2 = 2 poles 070
HJD 3 = 3 poles 090 V = 50 °C calibration
2 JDC 4 = 4 poles 100 W = Without terminals
125 X = Load side terminals only
2 150
175
Y = Line side terminals only
200
2 225
250
2
Trip Unit
2
JT 3 250 T
2
2 Trip Unit Type
JT = Thermal-magnetic Number Trip Unit Rating/ T =Trip unit
Suffix
of Poles Plug Ampere Rating thermal-magnetic

2 2 = 2 poles 070 fixed thermal
3 = 3 poles 090 adj. magnetic
2 4 = 4 poles 100
125
V =50 °C calibration
(thermal-magnetic
150 trip units only)
2 175
200
225
2 250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units 2
Ultra High Interrupting
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Capacity Current Limiting Standard 2
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated Thermal-Magnetic Terminals Only
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Trip Unit Only 1
See Page 2
Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting For Use with Standard or V4-T2-261
Maximum of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
for Optional
Terminals
2
Continuous and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Two-Pole 2
70 JD2070 HJD2070 JDC2070 JT2070T TA250KB 2
90 JD2090 HJD2090 JDC2090 JT2090T 2
100 JD2100 HJD2100 JDC2100 JT2100T
125 JD2125 HJD2125 JDC2125 JT2125T 2
150 JD2150 HJD2150 JDC2150 JT2150T
175 JD2175 HJD2175 JDC2175 JT2175T
2
200 JD2200 HJD2200 JDC2200 JT2200T
2
225 JD2225 HJD2225 JDC2225 JT2225T
250 JD2250 HJD2250 JDC2250 JT2250T 2
Three-Pole
70 JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T TA250KB 2 2
90 JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T
100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T
2
125 JD3125 HJD3125 JDC3125 JT3125T
2
150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T
175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T 2
200 JD3200 HJD3200 JDC3200 JT3200T
225 JD3225 HJD3225 JDC3225 JT3225T 2
250 JD3250 HJD3250 JDC3250 JT3250T
Four-Pole 34
2
125 JD4125 HJD4125 JDC4125 JT3125T TA250KB 2
2
150 JD4150 HJD4150 JDC4150 JT3150T
175 JD4175 HJD4175 JDC4175 JT3175T 2
200 JD4200 HJD4200 JDC4200 JT3200T
225 JD4225 HJD4225 JDC4225 JT3225T 2
250 JD4250 HJD4250 JDC4250 JT3250T
2
Notes
1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed.
2
3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.
4 Neutral is in right pole. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers— Molded Case Switches
2 Frame Only Eaton’s molded case components and are of the
Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting switches are used as high instantaneous automatic
2 Capacity Capacity Capacity Current Limiting compact switches in type. Molded case switches
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated applications requiring high are listed in accordance with
35 kAIC at 480 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
current switching capabilities. Underwriters Laboratories
Number Number Number
2 Two-Pole
2 JD2250F HJD2250F JDC2250F

Three-Pole
2 JD3250F HJD3250F JDC3250F 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without
Standard
Four-Pole Terminals Only
2 JD4250F HJD4250F JDC4250F
Maximum
Continuous Suitable for See PageV4-T2-261
Ampere Reverse Feed Use for Optional Terminals
2 Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-
2 Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Two-Pole
Reverse Feed Application 250 JD2250KW JDB2250KW TA250KB 1
2 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc HJD2250KW HJDB2250KW —
Complete Circuit Breaker
2 Maximum Without Line and With Standard Line and
Three-Pole
Continuous Load Terminals Load Terminals Only 250 JD3250KW JDB3250KW TA250KB 1
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
HJD3250KW HJDB3250KW —
Four-Pole
2 Two-Pole
250 JD4250KW JDB4250KW TA250KB 1
70 JDB2070W JDB2070
HJD4250KW HJDB4250KW —
2 90 JDB2090W JDB2090
Notes
100 JDB2100W JDB2100
2 125 JDB2125W JDB2125
Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes.

150 JDB2150W JDB2150
2
175 JDB2175W JDB2175
2 200 JDB2200W JDB2200

225 JDB2225W JDB2225
2 250 JDB2250W JDB2250
Three-Pole
2 70 JDB3070W JDB3070
2 90 JDB3090W JDB3090
100 JDB3100W JDB3100
2 125 JDB3125W JDB3125
150 JDB3150W JDB3150
2 175 JDB3175W JDB3175
200 JDB3200W JDB3200
2 225 JDB3225W JDB3225
2 250 JDB3250W JDB3250
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Line and Load Terminals Unless otherwise specified, J- Ordering Information
Eaton’s line and load terminals Frame circuit breaker line and J-Frame circuit breakers use 2
provide wire connecting load terminals are shipped Cu/AI terminals as standard.
capabilities for specific ranges separately for field installation. When optional copper-only 2
of continuous current ratings The bottom of the standard terminals are required, order
and wire types. All terminals TA250KB terminal contains a by catalog number. Specify if 2
comply with Underwriters recess that is positioned over factory installation is required.
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
the J-Frame circuit breaker
terminal conductor.
2
Standard C22.2 No. 65, or
Electrical Bulletin 1165. 2
2
Collar 2
Collar
2
2
Slotted Nut
Slotted
2
Screw Screw
T250KB Terminal TA250KB Terminal (Standard) 2

2
Maximum Terminal 2
Breaker Body Wire AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog
Amperes Material Type No. Conductors Range mm2 Number 2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
250 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB 2
Optional Cu Pressure Terminals
250 Stainless Steel Cu 4–350 kcmil 25–185 T250KB
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Accessories
2
2
2 JD Frame Accessories
Reference Two-, Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-379 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-381 ■ ■ ■ ■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-381 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-383 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-386 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-389 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-393 ■ ■ ■ ■

2 End cap kit V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug nut V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Base mounting hardware V4-T2-417 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Terminal shields V4-T2-418 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Padlockable handle block V4-T2-420 ■ ■

2 Cylinder lock V4-T2-421 ❏ ❏
2 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-425 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle extension V4-T2-522 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-430 ● ● ●
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
2 ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Circuit
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 480 600 125 250 12
2
JDB 2, 3 65 35 18 — 10
2
JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 18 — 10
HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 25 — 22 2
JDC 3 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 — 22
2
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Circuit
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 2
Type of Poles 240 380 415 600 125 250 12
JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 35 — — 10
2
HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — 22
2
JDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — 22
2
JDC 240 V/200 kA 42.6 1.36 2
JDC 480 V/100 kA 40.0 3.00
JDC 600 V/35 kA 31.9 3.10
2
Notes 2
1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2 JD Frame
2 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1)
4 5.50 (139.7) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1)
2
2 JD-Frame, Three-Pole
Front View
2
Side View
Front View Cutout 4.13
2 (104.8)
1.56
2 0.34 R
(39.7)
0.78
(8.7 R) (19.8)
2
CL Handle
2.92
3.94
2 (100.0)
(74.2)
10.00 ON
0.88
2 CL Breaker
(22.2) (254.0)
3.33
0.19 R
2 0.72 (4.8) R (84.5)
OFF
(18.2)
1.38
2 0.50 (12.7)
Diameter 2.75 (34.9)
3 Megger Holes (69.9)
1.75
2 if Required 3.50
(88.9)
(44.5)
2 4.06
(103.2)
2
JD Frame
2
Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2 Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
JDB 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) — — — — — — —
2 JD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
HJD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
2 JDC 12.25 (5.6) 13.50 (6.1) 14.25 (6.5) 10.00 (4.5) 11.00 (5.0) 11.50 (5.2) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-284
2
2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All Eaton K-Frame circuit
2
● K-Frame circuit breakers are
2
breakers
● K-Frame circuit breakers 2
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1
2
KD 3 400 F
2
2 Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type Number Circuit Breaker/ C= Copper terminals
Suffix
DK of Poles Frame Ampere E= 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip
2 KD 2 = Two-pole Rating unit circuit breaker only)
KDB 3 = Three-pole 100 F= Frame only (400 A only)
HKD K= High-magnetic molded-case switch
2 KDC
4 = Four-pole 125
150 V= 50 ° calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
175 W= Without terminals
2 200
225
X= Load terminals only
Y= Line side terminals only
250 Blank= Standard load and line side terminals
2 300
350
400
2
2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2 KT 3 400 F
2 Trip Unit Type Suffix
KT = Thermal-magnetic Number Circuit Breaker/ T = Trip unit only
2 of Poles Frame Ampere
2 = Two-pole Rating
2 3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
100
125
150
2 175
200
225
2 250
300
2 350
400
2 Notes
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F.
2 Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 1
2
310+ Circuit Breakers 2
2
KDB 3 400 F T36 ZG W 2
Performance at
480 Vac
Terminals 2
Number Feature W = No terminals
KDB= 35 kAIC of Poles L = Line and load
HKDB= 65 kAIC 3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
125 Frame Designation
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
2
CKDB= 35 kAIC 250 B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
F
100% rated
CHKDB= 65 kAIC
400 B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
2
100% rated
Trip Unit 2
T33=310+ Electronic LS
T32=310+ Electronic LSI
T35=310+ Electronic LSG
2
T36=310+ Electronic LSIG
T38=310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode
T39=310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 3
2
KES 3 400 LSIG ZG
2
Trip Unit Type
KES Number
Feature
Blank= No feature
2
of Poles Ampere Rating B20 = High load alarm
3 = Three-pole 125 Trip Unit B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 2 2
4 = Four-pole 250 B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
LS= 310+ Electronic LS
400 LSI=310+ Electronic LSI
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
2
LSG=310+ Electronic LSG 2
LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG 2
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
2
ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2
2
2
K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology
2
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
2
KD 3 125 T5 7 W
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
Suffix 2
Number Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Model Trip Type W = Without terminals
KD of Poles Ampere Rating
HKD 3 = Three-pole 125
T5= Model 550
T10= Model 1050
2 = LSI
6 = LSIG
2
KDC 250 7 = LSIA
CKD
CHKD
400 2
2
Notes 2
1 Cannot combine ‘B2X’ suffixes with ‘B2X’ suffixes.
2 Not available in four-pole configurations.
3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc.
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting
2 Capacity Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated Thermal-Magnetic
Factory Assembled
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Terminals Only
Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting For Use with Standard
2 Maximum of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit or High or Ultra High See Page V4-T2-283 for
Continuous and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 Interrupting Frames Optional Terminals
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 Two-Pole
100 KD2100 HKD2100 KDC2100 KT2100T TA300K 2
2 125 KD2125 HKD2125 KDC2125 KT2125T TA300K 2
150 KD2150 HKD2150 KDC2150 KT2150T TA300K 2
2 175 KD2175 HKD2175 KDC2175 KT2175T TA300K 2
2 200 KD2200 HKD2200 KDC2200 KT2200T TA300K 2

225 KD2225 HKD2225 KDC2225 KT2225T TA300K 2
2 250 KD2250 HKD2250 KDC2250 KT2250T TA350K 2
300 KD2300 HKD2300 KDC2300 KT2300T TA350K 2
2 350 KD2350 HKD2350 KDC2350 KT2350T TA350K 2
400 KD2400 HKD2400 KDC2400 KT2400T 2TA400K 3
2 Three-Pole
2 100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 2

125 KD3125 HKD3125 KDC3125 KT3125T TA300K 2
2 150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 2
175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 2
2 200 KD3200 HKD3200 KDC3200 KT3200T TA300K 2
225 KD3225 HKD3225 KDC3225 KT3225T TA300K 2
2 250 KD3250 HKD3250 KDC3250 KT3250T TA350K 2
2 300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 2

350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 2
2 400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3
Four-Pole
2 100 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 2
2 125 KD4125 HKD4125 KDC4125 KT3125T TA300K 2

175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 2
2 200 KD4200 HKD4200 KDC4200 KT3200T TA300K 2
225 KD4225 HKD4225 KDC4225 KT3225T TA300K 2
2 250 KD4250 HKD4250 KDC4250 KT3250T TA350K 2
300 KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 2
2 350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 2
2 400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3
Notes
2 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 3 2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
Ultra High Interrupting
2
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Two-Pole
2
KD2400F HKD2400F KDC2400F
Three-Pole 2
Four-Pole 2
2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 2
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-286.
2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 2
Standard Options
Ultra High
Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG 2
Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently
Interrupting
Capacity
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting Adjustable Independently
Short Time
Pickup with
Adjustable
Short Time
2
600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac Short Time Adjustable I2t Short Pickup and
Max.
Cont. Rated Rated Rated Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and 2
Ampere 35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at 100 kAIC I2t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Rating
at 40 °C
480 Vac
Catalog Number
480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
2
125 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-283
2
250 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
400 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400 2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Four-Pole 45 2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Options 2
Ultra High
Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG
Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently 2
Interrupting Interrupting Current Short Time Adjustable
Capacity
600 Vac
Capacity
600 Vac
Limiting
600 Vac
Adjustable
Short Time
Independently
Adjustable
Pickup with
I2t Short
Short Time
Pickup and
2
Max.
Cont. Rated Rated Rated Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and
Ampere 35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at 100 kAIC I2t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for 2
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2
125 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4125LS KES4125LSI — — — See Page
250 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4250LS KES4250LSI — — —
V4-T2-283
2
400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI — — —
Notes
2
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 2
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. 2
5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number.
2
2
2
2

Series C
Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
2 Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Standard Optional
LS LSI LSG LSIG
2 Adjustable Short Time
Maximum
Continuous Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable
2 Ampere Pickup with I2t Short Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for
Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
2 at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
125 3 KDB3125FT33W KDB3125FT32W KDB3125FT35W KDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page
2 250 3 KDB3250FT33W KDB3250FT32W KDB3250FT35W KDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
V4-T2-284
400 3 KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT32W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W LGFCT400

2
2 Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
2 Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
2 Maximum
Continuous Adjustable Short Time
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable
Ampere Pickup with I2t Short Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for
2 Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2 125 3 HKDB3125FT33W HKDB3125FT32W HKDB3125FT35W HKDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-284
250 3 HKDB3250FT33W HKDB3250FT32W HKDB3250FT35W HKDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
2 400 3 HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT32W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W LGFCT400
2
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers
2 The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.
2
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three-Pole
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Standard Options
2 Standard High
Adjustable
Short Time
Independently
Adjustable
Interrupting Interrupting Adjustable Independently Pickup with Short Time
2 Maximum Capacity Capacity Short Time Adjustable I2t Short Pickup and
Continuous Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and
35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at I2t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2 Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
2 125 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-283
2 250 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
400 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400
2 Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.

2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Suitable for reverse feed application. 2
2
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
2
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
Maximum
Continuous Without Line and With Line With Standard Line and Without Line and With Standard Line 2
Ampere Load Terminals Terminals Only Load Terminals Only Load Terminals and Load Terminals
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number
Two-Pole 2
100 — — — KDB2100W KDB2100
125 — — — KDB2125W KDB2125
2
150 — — — KDB2150W KDB2150
175 — — — KDB2175W KDB2175
2
200 — — — KDB2200W KDB2200 2
225 — — — KDB2225W KDB2225
250 DK2250W DK2250Y DK2250 KDB2250W KDB2250 2
300 DK2300W DK2300Y DK2300 KDB2300W KDB2300
2
2
Three-Pole
100 — — — KDB3100W KDB3100 2
125 — — — KDB3125W KDB3125
150 — — — KDB3150W KDB3150 2
175 — — — KDB3175W KDB3175
200 — — — KDB3200W KDB3200
2
225 — — — KDB3225W KDB3225 2
300 DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB3300 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2
2 240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
2 Maximum
Continuous
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals. Suitable for
Ampere Load Terminals Load Terminals Reverse Feed Use
2 Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Two-Pole
400 DK2400K KD2400K KDB2400K
2 — HKD2400K HKDB2400K
2 Three-Pole
400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K
2 — HKD3400K HKDB3400K
Four-Pole
2 400 — KD4400K KDB4400K
— HKD4400K HKDB4400K
2
Note
2 Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug 2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KD3125T52W KD3125T56W KD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T52W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
2
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400
Notes
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
2 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2 A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2 Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 125 HKD3125T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 HKD3250T52W HKD3250T56W HKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
2 175 ORPK025A175
2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T52W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
2 300 ORPK40A300
2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KDC3125T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T52W KDC3250T56W KDC3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
2
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400
Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2 G
Maximum OPTIM 1050 2
2 Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number
2 125 KD3125T106W KD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 KD3250T106W KD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
2 175 ORPK025A175
2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A22
250 ORPK40A250
2 300 ORPK40A300
2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
2 2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug 2
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
125 HKD3125T106W HKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T106W HKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
2
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400
Notes
2
2 Factory sealed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2 G
2 Continuous
2 125 KDC3125T106W KDC3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 KDC3250T106W KDC3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
2 175 ORPK025A175
2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
2 300 ORPK40A300
2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
2 2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2
2
G
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W CKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
2
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400
Notes
2
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number 2
(refer to Page V4-T2-397).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 G
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2 Continuous
2 125 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 CHKD3250T52W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
2 175 ORPK025A175
2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T52W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
2 300 ORPK40A300
2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
G
Continuous
125 CKD3125T106W CKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T106W CKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
2
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400
Notes
2
2 Factory sealed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 G
2 Continuous
2 125 CHKD3125T106W CHKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 CHKD3250T106W CHKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
2 175 ORPK025A175
2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
2 300 ORPK40A300
2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
2 2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide
2
Line and Load Terminals UL 486A and UL 486B and Ordering Information
Eaton’s line and load CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, K-Frame circuit breakers use 2
terminals provide wire or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Cu/AI terminals as standard.
connecting capabilities for Unless otherwise specified,
K-Frame circuit breaker line
When optional copper or Cu/ 2
specific ranges of continuous AI terminals are required,
current ratings and wire and load terminals are order by catalog number.
types. All terminals comply shipped separately for field Specify if factory installation
2
with Underwriters installation. is required.
Laboratories Standards 2
2
2
2
2
Tab is 1/4 x.032
2
TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA402K, T402K
TA401KCW 2
Terminals with
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire
Terminal Control Wire Termination
2
Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Metric Wire Catalog Catalog
Range mm2
Amperes Material Type Conductors Number Number
2
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 3–350 (1) 35–185 TA300K 1 — 2
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 250–500 (1) 120–240 TA350K 1 —
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 2TA400K 23 2TA400KCW 23
2
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 2
225 Copper Cu 3–350 (1) 35–185 T300K1 —
400 Copper Cu 250–500 (1) 120–240 T350K 1 — 2
400 Copper Cu 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 2T400K 3 2T400KCW 23
3T400K 4 3T400KCW 24
2
4T400K 5 4T400KCW 56
2
or
2/0–500 (1)
70–240 3TA401K 24 3TA401KCW 24 2
70–240 4TA401K 56 4TA401KCW 56
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 300–400 2TA402K 23 — 2
3TA402K 24 —
4TA402K 56 —
2
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) — 2T402K 23 — 2
3T402K 24 —
4T402K 56 — 2
Notes
1 Individually packed. 2
2 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
3 Two-pole kit. 2
4 Three-pole kit.
5 Four-pole kit.
6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
2
2

Series C
Accessories
2 Allowable Accessory Combinations
2 KD Frame Accessories
Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Description Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ❏ ❏ ■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-380 ❏ ❏ ■
2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-382 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-383 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Shunt trip—standard 2 V4-T2-386 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy 2 V4-T2-389 ■ ■ ■
2 Undervoltage release mechanism 2 V4-T2-394 ■ ■ ■ ■
PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-397 ■
End cap kit V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Keeper nut V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal adapter V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-417 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal shields V4-T2-419 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Interphase barriers V4-T2-419 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-420 ■ ■ ■
2 Padlockable handle block V4-T2-420 ■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-421 ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Cylinder lock V4-T2-421 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Key Interlock kit V4-T2-422 ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-424 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-425 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-427 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle mechanisms
Handle extension
V4-T2-508
V4-T2-522 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 IQ Energy Sentinel
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit
V4-T2-430
V4-T2-430 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
2 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-431
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-431
2 Auxiliary power module V4-T2-431
2 Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-220 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
2 Notes
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM
ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory
installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole.
2

Series C
2.4
2
Electronic portable test kit
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
MTST230V 1
5108A03H01
2
External neutral sensor, 400 A LGFCT400 2
2
External neutral sensor, 250 A LGFCT250 2
External neutral sensor, 125 A LGFCT125 2 2
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW 2
2
NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Circuit
Type of Poles 4 240 277 480 600 250 56
DK 2, 3 65 — — — 10 2
KDB 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10
KD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10 2
HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 22
KDC 7 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 22
2
CKD 3 65 — 35 25 —
CHKD 3 100 — 65 35 —
2
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Circuit
2
Breaker Number
Type of Poles 4 240 380 415 440 500 600 250 56
2
DK 2, 3 65 — — — — — 10
KDB 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10 2
KD 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10
HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — — 22 2
KDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — — 22
2
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S) 2
KDC 240 V/200 kA 56.00 2.30
KDC 480 V/100 kA 53.30 5.60
2
KDC 600 V/50 kA 43.40 5.40
2
Notes
1 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
2
3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
2
5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 2
7 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ K-Frame
2 Breaker Type 310+ Settings 125A 250 A 400 A

Frame K Ir = continuous current or Ir \ In
2 Frames available 125 A, 250 A, 400 A long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
A (=Ir) 55 100 160
Continuous current range (A) 55–400 A B (=Ir) 60 125 200
2 Ground fault pickup (A) 50–400 A C (=Ir) 70 150 225
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100
2 100% rated Yes
D (=Ir) 80 160 250
E (=Ir) 90 175 300
2 Protection F (=Ir) 100 200 315

Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G (=Ir) 110 225 350
2 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (=Ir=In) 125 250 400
Interchangeable trip unit Yes tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2 2 2
2 High load alarm, trip (suffix B20) 1 Yes (All 310+)
4 4 4 4
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1
2 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 7 7 7 7
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 10 10 10 10
2 Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1 LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 12 12 12 12
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 15 15 15 15
2 Thru-cover accessories No 20 20 20 20
24 24 24 24
2 Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (amperes) Position 1 2 2x 2x
(All 310+)
2 Position 2 3 3x 3x
Position 3 4 4x 4x
Position 5 6 6x 6x
Position 8 10 10x 10x

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 @10x
2 (LS and LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
2 (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
2 Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 25 50 80
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
2 Position 2 37.5 75 120
Position 3 50 100 160
2 Position 4 75 150 240

Position 5 100 200 320
2 Position 6 125 250 400
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
2 Position 3
2
300
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
2 Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 312 625 1000
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
2 Notes
2 2 Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and
ALSIG trip units.

i
2
2

Series C
2.4
Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing
Breaker Type
Yes Yes
2
Frame
Ampere range
K
125–400 A
K
125–400 A
2
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
2
Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes
2
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
2
Adjustable rating plug (In) No No
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm 0.5–1.0 x Ir 0.5–1.0 x Ir
2
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
2
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
2
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes
2
Instantaneous override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
2
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) 2
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes 2
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes 2
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes 2
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included 2
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 2 Yes 2 2
Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes 2
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
Power factor No Yes 2
Communications
PowerNet Yes 3 Yes 2
Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
2
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug 2
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes 2
1 Zone interlock kit.
2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
2
2

Series C

2 KD Frame
Number
2 of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 5.50 (149.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
2 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
2 KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole

2 Side View
Front View
2 Front Cover Cutout 5.49

4.31
(109.6)
(139.4)
2 0.34 R
(8.7 R)
2
3.75
(95.3)
2 CL Handle
0.83
2 0.19 R
(4.8 R)
(21.0) 1.64
(41.7)
ON
1.25 10.13
2 1.31
(31.8) (257.2)
OFF
(33.3)
2 2.63
(66.7)
2.39
2 4.78
(121.5)
(60.7)
2
2
2 Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
KD Frame
2
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1
2 Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 DK 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — —

KDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — —
2 KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
2 KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
2 Note
1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
2
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-308
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) 2
● All Eaton L-Frame circuit ● CE marked
2
● L-Frame circuit breakers are
2
breakers
● L-Frame circuit breakers 2
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2 Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
2 LD 3 600 F
2
Circuit Breaker/ Suffix
Frame Type
2 LDB
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
C = Copper terminals
F = Frame only (600 A only)
LD 2 = Two-pole Rating K = High magnetic molded case switch
2 HLD 3 = Three-pole 300 V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
LDC 4 = Four-pole 350 W = Without terminals
CLD 400 X = Load side terminals only
2 CHLD 450 Y = Line side terminals only
CLDC 500
2 600
2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2 LT 3 400 T
2 Trip Unit Type Suffix
LT = Thermal-magnetic Number Trip Unit Rating/Plug T =Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable
2 of Poles Ampere Rating magnetic
V =50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
2 = Two-pole 300
3 = Three-pole 350
2 4 = Four-pole 400
450
2 500
600
2 Note
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
310+ Circuit Breakers
2
LDB 3 600 F T36 B22ZG W 2

2
Performance at 480 Vac
LDB=35 kAIC
Number
of Poles
Terminals
W = No terminals
2
HLDB=65 kAIC 3 = Three-pole
LDCB=100 kAIC 4 = Four-pole 2
CLDB=35 kAIC, 100% rated Trip Unit Features
CHLDB=65 kAIC, 100% rated
CLDCB=100 kAIC, 100% rated Amperes
T33=310+ Electronic LS
T32=310+ Electronic LSI
Blank=No feature
B20=High load alarm
2
600 T35=310+ Electronic LSG 1 B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
T36=310+ Electronic LSIG 1 B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 2
T38=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ZG= Zone selective interlocking
Designation T39=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
F
2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 2 2
LES 3 600 LSIG B22ZG 2
2
Trip Unit Type Features
LES Number Trip Unit Blank=No feature 2
of Poles LS= 310+ Electronic LS B20=High load alarm
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Amperes LSI=310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
2
600 LSG=310+ Electronic LSG 1
LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG 1 ZG= Zone selective interlocking
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode 2
ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
2
LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology 2
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
2
LD 3 125 T5 7 W
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type Number Trip Type
Suffix
2
LD of Poles Circuit Breaker/ 2 = LSI (550 only)
HLD 3 = Three-pole Frame Ampere Rating 6 = LSIG 2
LDC 125 (Available on Model 1050 only) 7 = LSIA
CLD
CHLD
250 (Available on Model 1050 only)
400 Trip Model
2
CLDC 600
T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050 2
Notes
1 Not available in four-pole configurations.
2
2 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
2 600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
Factory Assembled Standard Terminals Only
2 Maximum Circuit Consisting of Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit For Use with Standard
Continuous Frame, Trip Unit and Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, or High or Ultra High See Page V4-T2-307 for
2 Ampere
Rating
Terminals
Catalog
Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Interrupting Frames
Catalog
Optional Terminals
Catalog
at 40 °C 1 Number Number Number Number Number
2 Two-Pole
2 300 LD2300 HLD2300 LDC2300 LT2300T TA602LD 2

350 LD2350 HLD2350 LDC2350 LT2350T TA602LD 2
2TA603LDK 3
2 600 LD2600 HLD2600 LDC2600 LT2600T
Three-Pole

2 600 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3

Four-Pole 4
2 600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
2 Ultra High Interrupting
Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
Capacity 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated
2 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Number Number Number
Two-Pole
2 LD2600F HLD2600F LDC2600F
Three-Pole
2 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F
2 Four-Pole
LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F
2 Notes
1 Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 2 Individually packed.
2 4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2

Series C
2.4
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-286. 2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 2
Ultra High Standard Optional 2
Standard Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG
Interrupting High Capacity
Capacity Interrupting Current Adjustable Adjustable Short Independently 2
Maximum 600 Vac Capacity Limiting Short Time Independently Time Pickup with Adjustable Short
Continuous Rated
35 kAIC at
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at
Pickup with I2t
Short Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2
Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac 480 Vac Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Information 2
Three-Pole
600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
2
V4-T2-284
Four-Pole 4
2
600 LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI — — — See Page
V4-T2-284
2
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Standard Optional 2
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Maximum
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable
2
Continuous
Ampere Pickup with I2t Short Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for
Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal 2
at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
600 3 LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT32W LDB3600FT35W LDB3600FT36W LGFCT600 See Page 2
V4-T2-284
600 3 HLDB3600FT33W HLDB3600FT32W HLDB3600FT35W HLDB3600FT36W
600 3 LDCB3600FT33W LDCB3600FT32W LDCB3600FT35W LDCB3600FT36W
2
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
2
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-286.
2
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units
Standard Optional
Ultra High LS LSI LSG LSIG 2
Standard Interrupting Adjustable Short Independently
Maximum
Continuous
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity Current
Capacity 600 Vac Limiting 600 Vac
Adjustable Short Independently Time Pickup with
Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I2t Short Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
2
Rated 35 kAIC at Rated 65 kAIC at Rated 100 kAIC 2
I t Short Delay Time Pickup and and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal 2
Three-Pole 2
600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-284 2
Notes
1 For AC use only. 2
4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2
2

Series C
Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Molded Case Switches

2 Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Eaton’s molded case components and are of the
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc switches are used as high instantaneous automatic
2 Complete Circuit Breaker compact switches in type. Molded case switches
Without Line and With Standard Line and applications requiring high are listed in accordance with
Maximum
2 Continuous Load Terminals Load Terminals Only current switching capabilities. Underwriters Laboratories
Ampere Catalog Catalog Molded case switches are Standard UL 489.
2 Rating Number Number
Two-Pole
2 300 LDB2300W LDB2300
350 LDB2350W LDB2350
2 400 LDB2400W LDB2400
Circuit Breaker Only
Standard Terminals Only
Maximum
without Line and Load See Page V4-T2-307 for
2 450 LDB2450W LDB2450 Continuous
Ampere Terminals Optional Terminals
500 LDB2500W LDB2500
Rating Catalog Catalog
2 600 LDB2600W LDB2600 at 40 °C Number Number
Three-Pole Two-Pole
2 300 LDB3300W LDB3300 600 LD2600WK 2TA603LDK
350 LDB3350W LDB3350 600 LDB2600WK 1 2TA603LDK
2 400 LDB3400W LDB3400 600 HLD2600WK 2TA603LDK
2 450 LDB3450W LDB3450 Three-Pole

500 LDB3500W LDB3500 600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK
2 600 LDB3600W LDB3600 600 LDB3600WK 1 3TA603LDK
600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK
2 Four-Pole
600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK
2
600 LDB4600WK 1 4TA603LDK
2 600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK
Notes
2 1 Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application.
Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug 2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 2
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 550 2 2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog 2
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
125 LD3125T52W LD3125T56W LD3125T57W — ORPL125A070
— ORPL125A090
2
— ORPL125A100
— ORPL125A110
2
— ORPL125A125 2
250 LD3250T52W LD3250T56W LD3250T57W — ORPL025A125
— ORPL025A150 2
— ORPL025A175
— ORPL025A200
2
— ORPL025A225
2
— ORPL025A250
400 LD3400T52W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200 2
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250 2
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
2
400 ORPL40A400 2
600 LD3600T52W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350 2
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500 2
600 ORPL60A600
2
Notes
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2 Continuous
2 125 HLD3125T52W HLD3125T56W HLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
150 ORPL025A150
2 175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 HLD3400T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
2 300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
350 ORPL60A350
2 400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
125 LDC3125T52W LDC3125T56W LDC3125T57W — ORPL125A070
2
— ORPL125A090
2
— ORPL125A100
— ORPL125A110 2
— ORPL125A125
250 LDC3250T52W LDC3250T56W LDC3250T57W — ORPL025A125 2
— ORPL025A150
— ORPL025A175
2
— ORPL025A200
2
— ORPL025A225
— ORPL025A250 2
400 LDC3400T52W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 LDC3600T52W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600
Notes 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

2 Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
2 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
2 I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 1050 23
2 Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number
2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LD3125T106W LD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2
110 ORPL125A110
2 125 ORPL125A125
250 LD3250T106W LD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
2 150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
2 225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
2 400 LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
2 250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350
2 400 ORPL40A400
600 LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
2 350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2
Notes
2 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Continuous
125 HLD3125T106W HLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 HLD3250T106W HLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
2
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600
Notes 2
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2 G
2 Continuous
2 125 LDC3125T106W LDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
150 ORPL025A150
2 175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
2 300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
350 ORPL60A350
2 400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
2 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2
G
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
125 CLD3125T52W CLD3125T56W CLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLD3250T52W CLD3250T56W CLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
2
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 CLD3400T52W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLD3600T52W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600
Notes 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 G
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2 Continuous
2 125 CHLD3125T52W CHLD3125T56W CHLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A125
125 ORPL125A125
2 250 CHLD3250T52W CHLD3250T56W CHLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
2 175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
2 350 ORPL40A350
2 400 ORPL40A400
600 CHLD3600T52W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
2 350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
2 600 ORPL60A600
Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
125 CLDC3125T52W CLDC3125T56W CLDC3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLDC3250T52W CLDC3250T56W CLDC3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
2
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 CLDC3400T52W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLDC3600T52W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600
Notes 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 G
2 Continuous
2 125 CLD3125T106W CLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
150 ORPL025A150
2 175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
2 300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
350 ORPL60A350
2 400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 1050 23
2
Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
125 CHLD3125T106W CHLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090 2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
2
125 ORPL125A125
2
150 ORPL025A150 2
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200 2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
2
2
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250 2
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
2
350 ORPL60A350 2
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500 2
600 ORPL60A600
2
Notes
2
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 G
2 Continuous
2 125 CLDC3125T106W CLDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
150 ORPL025A150
2 175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
2 300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
350 ORPL60A350
2 400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Line and Load Terminals L-Frame circuit breaker line breaker before installation of Ordering Information
Eaton’s line and load and load terminals are the conductors. (Applies to all L-Frame circuit breakers use 2
terminals provide wire shipped separately for field styles.) The circuit breaker Cu/AI terminals as standard.
connecting capabilities for installation. line/load terminal conductors
are positioned in the
When optional copper 2
specific ranges of continuous The wire connecting terminal terminals are required, order
current ratings and wire conducting holes in the wire by catalog Number. Specify if
types. All terminals comply
is secured with two pan- connecting terminal and are factory installation is required.
2
head, slotted screws and secured with recessed socket
with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
lockwashers that can be
checked for the correct
screws that are tightened to 2
486A and UL 486B and CSA the correct torque loading
torque loading or retightened
Standard C22.2 No. 65M. from the front of the circuit
from the front of the circuit 2
Unless otherwise specified, breaker.
2
Terminals
TA401LD or TA603LD 2
Terminal (Step-Type
Pan-Head Screws and
Terminal Requires
Terminal Cover and Pan-Head Screws Lockwashers (Installed 2
Warning Label. and Lockwashers TA450LD or TA602LD or before Cable Clamping
See Inset.) T602LD Terminal Screws) 2
Terminal Cover
2
2
2
2
Warning Label
2
Retainer 2
Screws
2
Circuit Breaker
Line Terminal Cover 2
2
Terminals with
2
Terminal Control Wire Termination
Maximum
Breaker
Terminal
Body Wire
AWG Wire
Range/Number Metric Wire Catalog Catalog 2
Amperes Material Type of Conductors Range mm2 Poles Number Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 2
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Two-pole kit 1 2TA401LDK —
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Three-pole kit 1 3TA401LDK —
2
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Four-pole kit 1 4TA401LDK — 2
2
450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 (2) 25–95 TA450LD —
500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–350 (2) 95–150 2
TA602LD TA602LDCW 2
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Two-pole kit 1 2TA603LDK 2TA603LDKCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Three-pole kit 1 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW
2
Four-pole kit 1
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600 Copper Cu 250–350 (2) 120–250 2
T602LD T602LDCW 2
Notes
1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2

Series C
Accessories
2
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
2
LD Frame Accessories
2 Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
2 Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3
■ ■ ■ ■
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-380
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-384
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-384 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Shunt trip—standard 4 V4-T2-386 ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy 4 V4-T2-389 ■ ■ ■ ■
■
2 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-397
2 End cap kit V4-T2-414 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-415 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Terminal shields V4-T2-419
2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-422 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
● ● ●
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423
2 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-424 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428
2 Handle extension V4-T2-522 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-430 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
2 Notes
1
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories.
2 4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units.
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
LD Frame Accessories, continued
Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
OPTIM System Components Three Poles

2
Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-430 2
Potential transformer module V4-T2-430
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-431 2
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-431
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-431
2
2
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-220 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
Legend 2
2
2
2
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 3 2
External neutral sensor LGFCT600 4 2
2
2
Notes
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
2
4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2 Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 277 480 600 125 250 23
2 LDB 2, 3 65 — 35 25 — 22
LD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — 22
2 CLD 4 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — —
HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — 25
2 CHLD 4 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — —
LDC, LDCB 5 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — 30
2 CLDC 45 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — —
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

Circuit
2 Breaker Number 240 415 690 250 23
Type of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
2 LDB 2, 3 85 85 45 45 20 10 20 10
LD 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 10 20 10
2 CLD 4 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 10 — —
HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 25 13 20 10
2
CHLD 4 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 25 13 — —
2 LDC, LDCB 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 20 10

CLDC 4 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 — —
2
LDC 240 V/200 kA 64.80 6.80
2 LDC 480 V/100 kA 66.90 9.33
2 LDC 600 V/50 kA 54.30 8.92
Notes
2 L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
2 3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
4 100% rated breakers.
5 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Description Specification LD Frame
2
310+ settings 600 A
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation LD
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
2
A 250
Frames available 600 A
Continuous current range (A) 250–600 A
B 300 2
C 315
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100
D 350 2
E 400
100% rated Yes
F 450
2
Protection
G 500
2
H (= In) 600
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
(or Maintenance Mode) tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2 2
(All 310+)
Interchangeable trip unit Yes 4 4
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1 Yes 7 7 2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 10 10
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 12 12
2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 15 15 2
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 20 20
Thru-cover accessories No 24 24 2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x
2
Position 3 4x
2
Position 4 5x
Position 5 6x 2
Position 6 7x
Position 7 8x 2
Position 8 8x
Position 9 8x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
2
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300 2
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 120
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 180 2
Position 3 240
Position 4 360
2
Position 5 480
2
Position 6 600
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst 2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
Position 3 300 2
2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 1500
2
2
Notes
2 Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and
2
ALSIG trip units.
2
2

Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications

2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2 rms sensing Yes Yes

Breaker Type
2 Frame L L
Ampere range 200–600 A 200–600 A
2 Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
2 Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes

2 Long Delay Protection (L)
2 Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t
2 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm 0.5–1.0 x Ir 0.5–1.0 x Ir
2 Short Delay Protection (S)
2 Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms

Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2 Instantaneous Protection (I)
2 Discriminator Yes Yes
2 Ground Fault Protection (G)
2 Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)

Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
2 Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2 Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
Legend
2 BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
2 In = Rating Plug
2 Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued
2
System Diagnostics
2
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes 2
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes 2
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
System Monitoring
2
Digital display Yes 2 Yes 2 2
Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes 2
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
Power factor No Yes
2
Communications
2
PowerNet Yes 3 Yes
Testing 2
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
Legend
2
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
2
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2
Notes
1 Zone interlock kit. 2
2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2 Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 LD Frame
2 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
2
2 LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Side View
2
Front Cover Cutout Front View
2 3.81
(96.8)
3.44
2 (87.3)
1.72
(43.7)
2
CL Breaker
3.28
CL Handle
2 1.33
(83.3)
(33.7)2.29
2 0.25 (6.4) R (58.2)
10.75 8.21
(273.1) (208.6)
1.50
2 (38.1)
3.64
(92.5) 0.19 R
2 7.28
(184.9) (4.8) R
2
2 8.25
(209.6)
2
2 Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
LD Frame
2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2 Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 20 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3)
LDB 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) — — — — — —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-322 2
2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) 2
● All Eaton M-Frame circuit ● CE marked
2
● MDL-Frame circuit
2
individual components 2
(frame, trip unit, terminals),
or factory assembled 2
complete breakers
● MDLB, HMDLB-Frame 2
circuit breakers with non-
interchangeable trip units
are suitable for reverse
2
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2 Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
2 MDL 3 800 F
Frame Type Number Circuit Breaker/
2 MDL, MDLB of Poles Frame Ampere Rating
F
K
=Frame only (800 A only)
=High magnetic molded case switch
HMDL, HMDLB 2 = Two-pole 300 1 500 V =50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
2 3 = Three-pole 350 1 600
700
W
X
=Without terminals
=Load side terminals only
400
450 800 Y =Line side terminals only
2
2
MT 3 800 T
2
2 Trip Unit Type
MT Number Trip Unit Rating/ T = Thermal-magnetic
Suffix
of Poles Plug Ampere Rating V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)

2 2 = Two-pole 300 1 500
3 = Three-pole 350 1 600
2 400
450
700
800
2 MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
2 310+ Circuit Breaker
2 MDLB 3 800 F T36 B21 W

2
Performance at 480 Vac Number Terminals
of Poles
2 MDLB=50 kAIC
HMDLB=65 kAIC 3 = Three-pole
W = No terminals
CMDLB=50 kAIC, 100% rated

2 CHMDLB=65 kAIC, 100% rated
Amperes
Trip Unit Features
T33=310+ Electronic LS Blank=No feature
800
2 T32=310+ Electronic LSI
T35=310+ Electronic LSG
B20=High load alarm
T36=310+ Electronic LSIG B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
2 F
Designation T38=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
T39=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1
2
2 MES 3 800 ALSIG B21
2 Trip Unit Type Features
MES Number Trip Unit Blank=No feature
2 of Poles LS= 310+ Electronic LS B20=High load alarm
3 = Three-pole Amperes LSI=310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
2 800 LSG=310+ Electronic LSG
LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
2 ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
2 Note
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc.

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic 2
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard

2
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames Standard
Terminals
2
Magnetic Trip Range Only 1
Factory Assembled Factory Assembled is 5–10 Up Through 2
Maximum Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting 600 A; 4–8 on 700 and See Page
Continuous
Ampere
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
V4-T2-321 for
Optional Terminals
2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
300 MDL2300 MDL2800F HMDL2300 HMDL2800F MT2300T TA700MA1
350 MDL2350 HMDL2350 MT2350T TA700MA1
2
400 MDL2400 HMDL2400 MT2400T TA700MA1
2
450 MDL2450 HMDL2450 MT2450T TA700MA1
500 MDL2500 HMDL2500 MT2500T TA700MA1 2
600 MDL2600 HMDL2600 MT2600T TA700MA1
700 MDL2700 HMDL2700 MT2700T TA700MA1 2
800 MDL2800 HMDL2800 MT2800T TA800MA2
2
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole
2
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only 2
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
2
Interrupting Frames Standard
Terminals 2
Magnetic Trip Range Only 1
Factory Assembled Factory Assembled is 5–10 Up Through
Maximum Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting 600 A; 4–8 on 700 and See Page 2
Continuous of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit 800 A x Continuous V4-T2-321 for
Ampere and Terminals Frame Only and Terminals Frame Only Ampere Rating Optional Terminals 2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number Number
2
300 MDL3300 MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1 2
400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1
450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1 2
500 MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1
600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1
2
700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1
2
800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA2
Note 2
1 Two terminals are required per pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1
2 Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Standard Terminals Only 2
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 Maximum
Continuous Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting See Page V4-T2-321 for
Ampere of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Optional Terminals
2 Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 300 MDLB2300 HMDLB2300 TA700MA1

350 MDLB2350 HMDLB2350 TA700MA1
2 400 MDLB2400 HMDLB2400 TA700MA1
2 500 MDLB2500 HMDLB2500 TA700MA1
2 600 MDLB2600 HMDLB2600 TA700MA1

2 800 MDLB2800 HMDLB2800 TA800MA2
2
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1
2 Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Standard Terminals Only 2
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Maximum
2 Continuous Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
See Page V4-T2-321 for
Optional Terminals
Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2
2 400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1

2 500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1
2 700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1
2 800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA2
Notes
2 1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application.
2 Two terminals are required per pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. 2
2
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Standard Optional
LS LSI LSG LSIG 2
Standard Adjustable Short Independently
Time Pickup with I2t
Maximum
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac Adjustable Short
Independently
Adjustable Short Short Delay and
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
2
Continuous Rated 50 kAIC at Rated 65 kAIC at Time Pickup with I2t Time Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Ampere 480 Vac 480 Vac Short Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 2
Rating Catalog Catalog Terminal
at 40 °C Number Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2
800 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-322
2
Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 4
2
Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals
LS LSI LSG LSIG
2
Maximum
Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable
Continuous
Ampere Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable with I2t Short Delay and Short Time Pickup and Ground Neutral CT for 2
Rating with I2t Short Delay Ramp Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
800 MDLB3800FT33W MDLB3800FT32W MDLB3800FT35W MDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600 2
800 HMDLB3800FT33W HMDLB3800FT32W HMDLB3800FT35W HMDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600
2
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and 2
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-324.
2
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Standard Options
Standard High LS LSI LSG LSIG 2
Interrupting Interrupting Adjustable Short Independently
Maximum
Continuous
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
Capacity
600 Vac Rated Adjustable Short
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
2
50 kAIC at 65 kAIC at 2
Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac Short Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal 2
800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T2-322 2
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers. 2
4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Only without
2 at 40 °C Number
Two-Pole
2 800 MDL2800WK
2 MDLB2800WK 1
HMDL2800WK
2 Three-Pole
800 MDL3800WK
2 MDLB3800WK 1
HMDL3800WK
2
Notes
2 1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
M-Frame circuit breakers use 2
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/ 2
AI terminals are required,
order by catalog number. 2
Specify if factory installation
is required.
2
2
2
2
2
TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA
2
Terminals with Control
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Terminal Wire Termination 2
Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Catalog Catalog
Amperes Material Type Conductors Number Number
2
700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) TA700MA1 TA700MA1CWT 2
800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT
800 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (2) TA801MA TA801MACWT
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
2
600 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) T600MA1 —
800 Copper Cu 3/0–300 kcmil (3) T800MA1 — 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Accessories
2
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
2
MD Frame Accessories
2 Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole
Description Page Left Right Left Center Right
2 Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ■ ■ ■

2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-384 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Shunt trip—standard 2 V4-T2-387 ■ ■ ■ ■

Shunt trip—low energy 2 V4-T2-389 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Rear fed terminals V4-T2-416 ● ● ● ● ●
●
2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-417
Terminal shields V4-T2-419 ●
2 Interphase barriers V4-T2-419 ●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-420 ■
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-421 ❏ ❏ ❏
2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-422 ❏ ❏ ❏

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423 ● ● ● ● ●
2 Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423 ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-424 ● ● ● ● ●
2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-426 ● ● ● ● ●
2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-427 ● ● ● ● ●

Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428 ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-508 ● ● ● ● ●
Handle extension V4-T2-522 ● ● ● ● ●
2 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-430 ● ● ● ● ●

Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ●
2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-220 ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ●
2 Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
2 Notes
2 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 1
2
External neutral sensor LGFCT600 2 2
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW 2
2
2
2
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4

2
Circuit
Type of Poles 240 480 600 250 2
MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65 50 25 22
2
CMDL 2, 3 65 50 25 —
HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100 65 35 25 2
CHMDL 2, 3 100 65 35 —
2
Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) I CU ≠ I CS 2
Circuit
Type of Poles 240 415 690 250 2
MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 20/10
CMDL 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 —
2
HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 20/10 2
CHMDL 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 —
Notes 2
2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 2
4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
2
6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2 Description Specification MDL Frame
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
310+ settings 800 A
Breaker Type
2 Frame designation MDL
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 320
Frames available 800 A
2 Continuous current range (A) 320–800 A
B 400
C 450
2 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 50, 65
D 500
E 600
2 100% rated Yes
F 630
Protection
2 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
G 700
H (= In) 800
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
2 (or Maintenance Mode) tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2
(All 310+)
Interchangeable trip unit Yes 4 4
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 1 Yes 7 7
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 10 10
2 Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 12 12
2 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 15 15

Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 20 20
2 Thru-cover accessories No 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 3x
2 Position 3 4x
Position 4 5x
2 Position 5 6x
Position 6 7x
2 Position 7 8x
Position 8 8x
2 Position 9 8x
2 tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
2 tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)

(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
2 Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 160
2 (310+ w/ ground fault)
Position 2 240
Position 3 320
2 Position 4 480
2 Position 5 640
Position 6 800
2 tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
2 Position 3 300
2
2 Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 2000
2
Notes
2 1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI
and ALSIG trip units.

2
2

Series C
2.4
Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
MD Frame 2
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) 2
2
MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Drilling Plan
2
3.44
2
1.72 (87.3)
(43.7) 2
R 0.25
CL Breaker
(6.4) 2
2
3.28 16.00
2
R 0.19 CL Handle 1.33 (83.3) (406.4)
(4.8) (33.7)
2
1.50
(38.1)
0.97 2
(24.6)
2
3.64
(92.5)
7.28 8.25 4.06
2
(184.9) (209.6) (103.2)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
MD Frame 2
Breaker Type
Complete Breaker
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Frame Only
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Trip Unit 1
Two-Pole Three-Pole
2
MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 26.5 (12.0) 29.0 (13.2) 24.5 (11.1) 26.0 (11.8) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) 2
MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) — 30.0 (13.6) — 26.0 (11.8) — 4.0 (1.8)
Note
2
1 Thermal-magnetic only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Typical N-Frame Breaker Contents

2 Description Page
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-225
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-336
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-340
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-371
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
2
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
Product Description
2 ● All Eaton N-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
2 reverse feed use
● All N-Frame circuit
2 breakers are HACR rated
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame 2
ND 3 12 T3 2 W 2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
Suffix 2
Number Trip Type E = 100% R.P. protected (four-pole)
ND of Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Model EH = 50% R.P. protected (four-pole)
HND 2 = Two-pole Ampere Rating T3= Model 310
2 = LSI
3 = LS K = High magnetic molded case switch 2
NDC 3 = Three-pole 800= 800 amperes T5 = Model 550 5 = LSG W = Without terminals
NDU
CND
4 = Four-pole 12 = 1200 amperes T7= Model 750
T10 = Model 1050
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
X
Y
=
=
Load only terminals
Line only terminals
2
CHND
CNDC 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2 A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum OPTIM 550 2 Fixed
2 Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug
2 800 ND3800T52W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
2 500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 ND312T52W ND312T56W ND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
2 800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 HND3800T52W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
2 500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
2 600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
2 800 ORPN80A800
1200 HND312T52W HND312T56W HND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
2 700 ORPN12A700
2 800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
2 1200 ORPN12A120
Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
2
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 NDC3800T52W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800 ORPN80A800
1200 NDC312T52W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
Notes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
2 S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2 A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2 Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA
Fixed
Rating Plug
2 800 ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 ND312T106W ND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
800 HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
2 500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
2 600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
2 800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 HND312T106W HND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600

700 ORPN12A700
2 800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
2 1200 ORPN12A120
2 800 NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 NDC312T106W NDC312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2
Notes
2 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.

Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
G
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug 2
800 CND3800T52W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800 ORPN80A800
1200 3 CND312T52W CND312T56W CND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
800 CHND3800T52W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500 2
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600 2
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2
1200 3 CHND312T52W CHND312T56W CHND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800 2
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120 2
Notes
2
3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
2 G
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2 Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA
Fixed
Rating Plug
2 800 CNDC3800T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 3 CNDC312T52W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Notes
3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2
2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Rating Plug 2
800 CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800 ORPN80A800
1200 CND312T106W CND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
2
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800 ORPN80A800
1200 CHND312T106W CHND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
Notes
2
2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 2
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
2 G
2 Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA
Fixed
Rating Plug
2 800 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2 1200 CNDC312T106W 4 CNDC312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2
Type ND Molded Case Switches
2
Type ND High Instantaneous (K)
2 Continuous Three-Pole Four-Pole 5
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number
800 ND3800WK ND4800WK
2 HND3800WK HND4800WK
1200 ND312WK ND412WK
2 HND312WK HND412WK
2 Notes
2 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
2 5 Neutral is in right pole.
Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.

2 For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information
N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog 2
number. Specify if factory installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 2
2
Maximum Breaker Terminal Body Wire AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog 2
Amperes Material Type No. Conductors Range mm2 Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 2
700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–240 TA700NB1
1000 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1 1
2
1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 TA1200NB1 1
1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (3) 300–400 TA1201NB1 2

2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 2
700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) 70–240 T700NB1
1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 kcmil (3) 95–240 T1000NB1 2
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 kcmil (4) 95–185 T1200NB3
2
Notes
1 Terminal rating is AL9CU.
2 Terminal rating is AL7CU.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Accessories
2
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
2
ND Frame Accessories
2 Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2 Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1
■ ■ ■ ■
2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-380
V4-T2-380 ■ ■ ■ ■

2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-384 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-389 ■ ■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-396 ■ ■
2 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-397 ■
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-417 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Interphase barriers V4-T2-419 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal shield V4-T2-419 ■ ■ ■
2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-422 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
● ● ●
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-423
2 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-425 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-428 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle extension V4-T2-522
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-431 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-430
2 Potential transformer module V4-T2-430
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-431
2 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-431
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-431
2 Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend
2 Note
1 OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories.
2

Series C
2.4
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 2
Circuit
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2
Type of Poles 240 277 480 600
ND 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25
2
CND 2 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25 2
HND 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35
CHND 2 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 2
NDC 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65
CNDC 2 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65
2
NDU 3 300 4 75 5
3 — 150
2
2
Circuit
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 2
Type of Poles 240 415 690
2
ND
Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20 2
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10
CND 2
2
Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20
2
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10
HND 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13 2
CHND 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25
2
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13
2
NDC
Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 2
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18
CNDC 2 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18
2
Notes 2
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
3 800 amperes maximum rating.
2
4 Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
5 Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame Digitrip
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2 rms sensing Yes Yes

Breaker Type
2 Frame N N
Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A
2 Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
2 Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG
2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes

2 Long Delay Protection (L)
2 Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t
2 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm No 0.5–1.0 x Ir
2 Short Delay Protection (S)
2 Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms

Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes
2 Instantaneous Protection (I)
2 Discriminator Yes Yes
2 Ground Fault Protection (G)
2 Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)

Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
2 Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2 Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes

System Diagnostics
2 Status LEDs Yes Yes

Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
2 Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes
2 Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
2 Legend
(A) = GF Alarm
2 Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
2 Note
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
N-Frame Digitrip, continued
2
System Monitoring
2
Digital display Yes 1 Yes 1
Current Yes Yes 2
Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes 2
Power factor No Yes
Communications
2
Eaton PowerNet No 2 Yes 2
Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, OPTIMizer, BIM, 2
PowerNet PowerNet
Legend 2
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
2
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2
Notes
1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
ND Frame
2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
2
ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2
2 Front Cover Cutout
2 3.44
(87.3)
2 1.72
(43.6)
0.25 R
2 (6.4 R)
1.91
CL Handle
(48.4)
2 CL Handle
16.00
(406.4) ON/I
2 3.68 0.19 R
(4.8 R)
(93.2) OFF/O
2 1.50
(38.1)
2 3.19
(80.9) 6.38
(161.9)
2 8.25 5.50
(209.6) (139.7)
2
2 ND Frame
Complete Breaker
2 Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Typical R-Frame Breaker Contents
Description Page
2
2
2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-342 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-355 2
2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● Eaton R-Frame circuit
2
frame (which includes trip 2
unit), rating plug and
terminals 2
● All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse 2
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 Circuit Breaker/Frame
2 RD 3 16 T53 W
Frame Type Number W =Without terminals
2 RD of Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Type 1 P =100% protected neutral pole
RDC 3 = Three-pole Ampere Rating T53= Digitrip RMS 510 LS R =Ground fault remote (310 only)
CRD 2 4 = Four-pole K =Molded case switch
2 CRDC 2
16 = 1600 amperes
20 = 2000 amperes
T65= Digitrip RMS 610 LSG
T86= Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG
25 = 2500 amperes T96= Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG
2 T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG
T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA
2 Notes
1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-343 to V4-T2-352.
2 2 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only 2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
Maximum
S
I
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Continuous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Rated
Current
Fixed
Rating Plug
2
at 40 °C Catalog Number (In) Catalog Number
2
1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080 2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T51W RD320T53W RD320T52W RD320T54W RD320T55W RD320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
2
1200 RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100 2
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers

2 The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2 Continuous
I
G
Ampere Rated Fixed
LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Rating Plug
2 Rating
at 40 °C Catalog Number
Current
(In) Catalog Number
1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T52W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1 CRD320T51W CRD320T53W CRD320T52W CRD320T54W CRD320T55W CRD320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
2 1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
1600 — CRDC316T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2 2000 1 CRDC320T51W CRDC320T53W CRDC320T52W CRDC320T54W CRDC320T55W CRDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2
Note
2 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum
Continuous – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
G
LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Rated Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Rating Current
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200
2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
Maximum
2 Continuous
I
G
Ampere Rated Fixed
2 Rating
Current
(In) Catalog Number
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2 1600 RP6R16A160
2 1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2
Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) 2
Ampere
G
Rated Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Rating Current
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200
2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
Maximum
2 Continuous
I
G
Ampere Rated Fixed
2 Rating
Current
(In) Catalog Number
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2 1600 RP6R16A160
2 1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2 1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2
Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) 2
Ampere
G
Rated Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Rating Current
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200
2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120 2
1600 RP6R16A160
2
1200 RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200 2
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2 Continuous
I
G
Ampere Rated Fixed
2 Rating
Current
(In) Catalog Number
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2 1600 RP6R16A160
2 1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2 1000 RP6R16A100
2 1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1200 RP6R20A120
2 1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2
Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
2
Maximum
G
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Fixed
2
Continuous
Ampere LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
2
1200 ORPR16A120 2
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 RD320T107W RD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100 2
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2
2000 ORPR20A200
2
2500 RD325T107W RD325T106W 1600 ORPR25A160
2000 ORPR25A200 2
2500 ORPR25A250
1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
2
1200 ORPR16A120
2
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 RDC320T107W RDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100 2
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160 2
2000 ORPR20A200
2500 RDC325T107W RDC325T106W 1600 ORPR25A160
2
2000 ORPR25A200 2
2500 ORPR25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Maximum
G
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Fixed
Continuous
LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Rating Plug
2 Ampere
1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
2 1000 ORPR16A100
2 1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2 2000 1 CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
2 1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200
2
2 1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A080

1000 ORPR16A100
2 1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2 2000 1 CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
2 1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2 2000 ORPR20A200

Refer to Eaton for UL listed,
2 series tested Molded Case
Switch application data.
2 Type RD—High Instantaneous (K)
2 Continuous
Complete without Terminals
Ampere Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 1600 RD316WK RD416WK

2000 RD320WK RD420WK
2 Notes
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2 Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information
Line and load terminals R-Frame circuit breakers have 2
provide wire connecting Cu/AI terminals as standard
capabilities for specific and Cu only terminals as an 2
ranges of continuous current option. Specify if factory
ratings and wire types. All installation is required. 2
terminals comply with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standards UL 486A and UL 2
486B and CSA C22.2 No.
65M. Unless otherwise 2
specified, R-Frame circuit
breaker line load terminals are 2
shipped separately for field
installation.
2
2
Maximum
Breaker
Terminal
Body Wire
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog 2
Amperes Material Type Hardware No. Conductors Range mm2 Number
Wire Terminals 2
1600 Aluminum Cu/AI English 500–1000 (4) 300–500 TA1600RD
1600 Copper Cu English 1–600 (4) 50–300 T1600RD
2
2000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RD 1 2
Rear Connectors
2000 Copper — English — — B2016RD 2
2000 Copper — English — — B2016RDL 2
2500 Copper — English — — B2500RD 3

2
Notes
1 Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker.
2
2 For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when
100% rated device is ordered.

2
3 For use with 2500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A breaker is ordered.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Mounting Hardware
2
Breaker Line/Load
2 Conductors
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 TA2000RD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
2
RD Frame Accessories 2
Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. 2
Internal Accessories 1
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ■
2
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-380 ■ ■ 2
Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T2-380 ■ ■ 2
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-389 ■ ■
2
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-396 ■ ■ 2
Accessory terminal block 2 V4-T2-397 ■ ■
External Accessories 2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-417
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-420 ● ●
2
Key interlock kit V4-T2-422 ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
Walking beam interlock V4-T2-423
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-425 ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-508 ■ ■ ■ ■
Handle extension 3 V4-T2-522 ■ ■
2
OPTIM System Components
2
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-431 ● ● ●
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-431 ● ● ● 2
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-431 ● ● ●
2
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Special calibration —
2
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Legend
2
2
Notes
1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2
2 Mounts outside breaker.
3 Included with breaker. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

2 Circuit
Type of Poles 240 277 480 600
2 RD 3, 4 125 — 65 50
2 CRD 2 3 125 — 65 50
RDC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
2 CRDC 2 3 200 — 100 65
2

Circuit
2 Type of Poles 240 415 690
RD
2 Icu 3, 4 135 70 25
2 Ics 3, 4 100 50 13
RDC
2 Icu 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 3, 4 100 50 18
2
Notes

See Page V4-T2-357 for Trip Unit Specifications.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Specifications
2
R-Frame Digitrip 2
Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
Trip Unit Type RMS 510 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050 2
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
2
Frame R R R R R
2
Ampere range 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 2
Protection
Ordering options LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSI(A), LISG 2
LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG
Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
2
Adjustable rating plug (In) No No No No No
2
Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5 –1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2
Long delay time I4t No No No No 1–5 Seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
High load alarm No 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.5-1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S)
2
Short delay pickup 200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150-800% x (Ir) 12 2
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup 200–600% 200–600% 200–600% 200–600% 200–800% x (In) 2 2
M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In)
Discriminator Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 2
Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
2
Ground fault alarm 4
4
No No No No 25–100% x (In)
2
Ground fault pickup 25–100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (In)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100 –500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Legend
(A) = GF Alarm 2
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In 2
Notes
1 Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%. 2
2 Varies by frame.
3 LS/LSG only. 2
4 Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
2
2
2

Series C
R-Frame Digitrip, continued

2 Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
Trip Unit Type RMS 510 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050
2 Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 System Monitoring
Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1
2 Current No Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Voltage No No No Yes No
Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes
2 Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Yes
Power factor No No Yes (over Yes Yes
2 Eaton PowerNet only)
Communications
2 Eaton PowerNet No No Yes Yes Yes
Testing
2 Testing method Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
2 Legend
2 BIM = Breaker Interface Module

(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
2 Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In
Note
2 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
RD Frame 2
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth 2
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 2
RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes
2
Front View 2
11.13 (0.4) Dia. 15.50
Side View 2
14.50 (4 Holes) Use 4, (393.7)
7.25
(184.2)
(368.3) 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts
for Mounting Breaker
9.00
(228.6)
2
C
L Breaker 2
5.09 7.75
(129.4)
C
L Handle
(196.9) 2
9.69
(246.1) 15.00
(381.0)
16.00
(406.4)
2
Push
To
Trip
2
6.65 0.16
(166.7) 12.91 (4.0) 2
(327.8) R Typ.
2
2
RD Frame 2
Breaker Type
Complete Breaker
2
1600 Amperes 2
RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2000 Amperes 2
RD, RDC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4)
2
2500 Amperes
2
RD, RDC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
Note 2
1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Motor Circuit Protectors Contents

2 Description Page
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-363
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-371
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-373
2
2
2
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
2 Designated as Eaton’s Types The MCP is designed to
GMCP and HMCP, the comply with the applicable
2 instantaneous-only motor requirements of Underwriters
circuit protector (MCP) is Laboratories Standard UL
2 available in ratings from 3 A 489, Canadian Standards
to 1200 A for motor starter Association Standard C22.2
2 sizes 0 through 8. No. 5.1, and International
Electrotechnical Commission
An innovative design of Recommendations
2 internal components allows IEC 157-1.
higher MCP-starter
2 combination interrupting The MCP is a recognized
ratings. The MCP is marked component (UL File E7819)
2 to permit proper electrical
application within the
and complies with the
applicable requirements of
assigned equipment ratings. Underwriters Laboratories
2 Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the
2 applicable requirements of
Canadian Standards
2 Association Standard C22.2
No. 5.1, International
Electrotechnical Commission
2 Recommendations IEC 157-1,
and nameplates bear the CE
2 marking.
2
2
Note: Interrupting ratings are
2 dependent on starter it is used
with.
2

Series C
2.4
2
Motor Circuit Protector 2
HMCP 003 A0 C 2
Motor Circuit Suffix 2
Protective Type Continuous Ampere Magnetic Trip Range/ C =Non-aluminum terminals
Rating NEMA Starter Size
HMCP = Three-pole
HM2P = Two-pole 1 003 A0=9–30/0
W =Without terminals
X =Load terminals only
2
HMCPS = Three-pole 007 C0=21–70/0 Y =Line terminals only
015 E0=45–150/0 S =Stainless steel terminals
(150A frame only)
2
025 D0=40–60/0
030 H1=90–300/1 No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load
050 G2=80–120/2 2
K2=50–500/2
070 J2=115–170/2
M2=210–700/2
2
100 L3 =160–240/3
150
R3=300–1000/3
T4=450–1500/4
2
U4=750–2500/4
250 A5=350–700/5 2
C5=450–900/5
400 D5=500–1000/5
F5 =625–1250/5 2
G5=750–1500/5
J5=875–1750/5
K5=1000–2000/5
2
L5 =1125–2250/5
W5=1250–2500/5 2
N5=1500–3000/5
R5=1750–3500/5
X5=2000–4000/5 2
Y5=2250–4500/5
600 L6 =1800–6000/6 (electronic)
X6=500–2500/6 (electronic)
2
Y6=1000–4000/6 (electronic)
800 X7=1600–6400/7 (electronic) 2
1200 Y8=2400–9600/8 (electronic)
2
Motor Circuit Protector
2
GMCP 003 A0 C
2
Motor Circuit
Protective Device Continuous Magnetic Trip
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
2
GMCP = Three-pole Ampere Range/NEMA
Rating Starter Size 2
003 A0= 15–30/0
007
015
C0= 35–70/0
E0= 75–150/0
2
030 H1= 150–300/1
050
060
K2= 250–500/2
J2= 300–600/2
2
063 M2=320–630/2
2
Note
1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. 2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
G-Frame
2
480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac
2 NEMA Continuous Motor Full Load MCP MCP
Starter Size Amperes Cam Setting Current Amperes (FLA) 1 Trip Setting Catalog Number
2 0 3 A 1.1–1.2 15 GMCP003A0C
B 1.3–1.5 18
2 C 1.6–1.7 21
2 D 1.8–1.9 24
E 2.0–2.2 27
2 F 2.3–2.5 30
0 7 A 2.6–3.1 35 GMCP007C0C
2 B 3.2–3.6 42
C 3.7–3.9 49
2 D 4.3–4.7 56
2 E 4.8–5.2 63
F 5.3–5.7 70
2 0 15 A 5.7–6.8 75 GMCP015E0C
B 6.9–7.9 90
2 C 8.0–9.1 105
D 9.2–10.3 120
2 E 10.4–11.4 135
2 F 11.5–12.6 150
1 30 A 11.5–13.7 150 GMCP030H1C
2 B 13.8–16.0 180
C 16.1–18.3 210
2 D 18.4–20.6 240
2 E 20.7–22.9 270
F 23.0–25.2 300
2 2 50 A 19.3–22.9 250 GMCP050K2C
B 23.0–26.8 300
2 C 26.9–30.6 350
D 30.7–34.5 400
2 E 34.6–38.3 450
2 F 38.4–42.1 500
3 60 A 23.1–27.5 300 GMCP060J2C
2 B 27.7–32.2 360
C 32.3–36.7 420
2 D 36.9–41.4 480
E 41.5–46.0 540
2 F 46.2–50.5 600
2 3 63 A 24.2–32.1 320 GMCP063M2C

B 29.1–34.8 380
2 D 38.8–46.4 500
E 43.6–48.9 570
2 F 48.5–53.7 630
2 Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.

2 All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-226 under Optional Terminal Types.
UL recognized and CSA approved.
2

Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Modifications for GMCP
Internal accessories must be factory installed. 2
Internal Accessories 1 2
Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Style
Type Accessory Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number 2
Shunt trip 2 120 50/60 Hz 1.1 — S5 1373D62G18
Shunt trip 2 240 50/60 Hz 2.1 — S6 1373D62G19 2
Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 1288C74G03
Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 2A/2B A6 1288C73G03 2
Alarm switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3 1288C75G03
Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 1288C76G09
2
2
External Mounted Accessories
Description
Number Units
in Package
Style
Number
2
Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 1294C01H01 2
Mounting hardware 1 624B375G23
DIN rail adapter 4 10 1225C79G02 2
Modifications for HMCP
See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-377.
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames 2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GMCP-Frame 2
Rating Type GMCP-Frame
Catalog 2
Description NEMA IP Number
S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05 2
12-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
2
S01 Red Handle S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
12-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08 2
2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
G Direct 5
2
Black Handle Yellow Handle 2
With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 2
Notes
1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. 2
2 LH only.
3 RH only.
4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.
2
5 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
No UVR available on GMCP.

2
2
2
2
2

Series C
F-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
2 Motor Motor
Full Load MCP Full Load MCP
2 NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number
2 0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCP003A0C 2 70 A 16.1–21.4 210 HMCP070M2C
2 B 0.92–1.0 12 B 21.5 –26.8 280

C 1.1–1.2 15 C 26.9 –32.2 350
2 D 1.3–1.5 18 D 32.3–37.5 420
E 1.6–1.7 21 E 37.6–42.9 490
2 F 1.8–1.9 24 F 43.0–48.3 560
G 2.0–2.2 27 G 48.4–53.7 630
2 H 2.3–2.5 30 H 53.8–59.1 700
2 0 7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCP007C0C 3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCP100R3C

B 2.1–2.5 28 B 30.7–38.3 400
2 C 2.6–3.1 35 C 38.4–46.0 500
D 3.2–3.6 42 D 46.1–53.7 600
2 E 3.7–3.9 49 E 53.8 –61.4 700
2 F 4.3–4.7 56 F 61.5 –69.1 800

G 4.8–5.2 63 G 69.2–76.8 900
2 H 5.3–5.7 70 H 76.9–84.5 1000
0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCP015E0C 4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCP150T4C
2 B 4.6–5.6 60 B 46.1–57.5 600
C 5.7–6.8 75 C 57.6–69.1 750
2 D 6.9–7.9 90 D 69.2–80.6 900
2 E 8.0–9.1 105 D 69.2–80.6 900

F 9.2–10.3 120 E 80.7–92.2 1050
2 G 10.4–11.4 135 F 92.3–103.7 1200
H 11.5 –12.6 150 G 103.8–115.2 1350
2 1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCP030H1C H 115.3–126.7 1500
B 9.2–11.4 120 4 150 A 57.0 –75.0 750 HMCP150U4C
2 C 11.5–13.7 150 B 76.0–95.0 1000
2 D 13.8–16.0 180 C 96.0–114.0 1250

E 16.1–18.3 210 D 115.0–130.7 1500
2 F 18.4–20.6 240 E 3 1750
G 20.7–22.9 270 F 3 2000
2 H 23.0–25.2 300 G 3 2250
2 2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCP050K2C H 3 2500

B 15.3–19.1 200 Notes
2 C 19.2–22.9 250 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam
D 23.0–26.8 300
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 E 26.9–30.6 350 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
F 30.7–4.5 400
2 G 34.6–38.3 450
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
2 H 38.4–42.1 500 HMCP 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with
line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
MCP MCP 2
Cont. Cam Trip Catalog
Amps Setting Setting 1 Number 2
25 A 40 HMCP025D0C
B 43 2
D 49
E 52
2
F 55
2
G 58
H 60 2
50 A 80 HMCP050G2C
B 87 2
C 93
D 98
2
E 103 2
F 109
G 115 2
H 120
70 A 115 HMCP070J2C
2
B 122
2
C 130
D 139 2
E 145
F 153 2
G 160
H 170
2
100 A 160 HMCP100L3C
2
B 174
C 185 2
D 196
E 207 2
F 218
G 229
2
H 240 2
Notes
1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 2
HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays
2
2 Motor Full MCP Motor Full MCP
NEMA Load Current Trip MCP NEMA Load Current Trip MCP
2 Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Amperes
(FLA) 1
Setting
2
Catalog
Number
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Amperes
(FLA) 1
Setting
2
Catalog
Number
2 0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCPS003A0C 3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPS100R3C

B 0.92–1.0 12 B 30.7–38.3 400
2 C 1.1–1.2 15 C 38.4–46.0 500
D 1.3–1.5 18 D 46.1–53.7 600
2 E 1.6–1.7 21 E 53.8–61.4 700
2 F 1.8–1.9 24 F 61.5–69.1 800

G 2.0–2.2 27 G 69.2–76.8 900
2 H 2.3–2.5 30 H 76.9–84.5 1000
0 7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPS007C0C 4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCPS150T4C
2 B 2.1–2.5 28 B 46.1–57.5 600
C 2.6–3.1 35 C 57.6–69.1 750
2 D 3.2–3.6 42 D 69.2–80.6 900
2 E 3.7–3.9 49 E 80.7–92.2 1050

F 4.3–4.7 56 F 92.3–103.7 1200
2 G 4.8–5.2 63 G 103.8–115.2 1350
H 5.3–5.7 70 H 115.3–126.7 1500
2 0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPS015E0C 4 150 A 57.0–75.0 750 HMCPS150U4C
B 4.6–5.6 60 B 76.0–95.0 1000
2 C 5.7–6.8 75 C 96.0–114.0 1250
2 D 6.9–7.9 90 D 115.0–130.7 1500

E 8.0–9.1 105 E 3 1750
2 F 9.2–10.3 120 F 3 2000
G 10.4–11.4 135 G 3 2250
2 H 11.5–12.6 150 H 3 2500
2 1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCPS030H1C Notes

B 9.2–11.4 120 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
2 C 11.5–13.7 150
D 13.8–16.0 180 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
2 E 16.1–18.3 210
3 Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
F 18.4–20.6 240 ampere rating.
2 G 20.7–22.9 270 HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
HMCPS 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come
2 H 23.0–25.2 300 with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPS050K2C
2 B 15.3–19.1 200
C 19.2–22.9 250
2 D 23.0–26.8 300
E 26.9–30.6 350
2 F 30.7–34.5 400
2 G 34.6–38.3 450
H 38.4–42.1 500
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
J-Frame
2
Motor Motor 2
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
2
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3 Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3
4 250 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP250A5C 5 250 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP250J5C
2
B 30.8–33.8 400 B 75.4–83.8 980
2
C 33.9–36.9 440 C 83.9–92.3 1090
5 250 D 37.0–40.3 480 D 92.4–100.7 1200 2
E 40.4–43.8 525 E 100.8–109.2 1310
F 43.9–46.9 570 F 109.3–117.6 1420 2
G 47.0–50.7 610 G 117.7–126.1 1530
H 47.0–50.7 660 H 126.2–134.6 1640
2
I 47.0–50.7 700 I 134.7–142.8 1750 2
5 250 A 34.7–38.8 450 HMCP250C5C 5 250 A 77.0–86.6 1000 HMCP250K5C
B 38.9–43.4 505 B 86.6–96.1 1125 2
C 43.5–47.6 565 C 96.2–105.7 1250
D 47.7–52.2 620 D 105.8–115.3 1375
2
E 52.3–56.5 680 E 115.4–124.9 1500
2
F 56.6–60.7 735 F 125.0–134.6 1625
G 60.8–64.9 790 G 134.7–144.2 1750 2
H 65.0–69.2 845 H 144.3–153.8 1875
I 69.3–73.5 900 I 153.9–163.3 2000 2
5 250 A 38.5–43.4 500 HMCP250D5C 5 250 A 86.6–97.3 1125 HMCP250L5C
B 43.5–48.0 565 B 97.4–108.4 1265
2
C 48.1–53.0 625 C 108.5–118.8 1410
2
D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545
E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690 2
F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830
G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970 2
H 72.0–76.9 935 H 162.4–173.0 2110
I 77.0–81.6 1000 I 173.1–183.6 2250
2
5 250 A 48.1–53.8 625 HMCP250F5C 5 250 A 96.2–108.0 1250 HMCP250W5C 2
B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405
C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560 2
D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720
E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875
2
F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030
2
G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185
H 90.0–96.1 1170 H 180.0–192.3 2340 2
I 96.2–102.0 1250 I 192.4–204.0 2500
5 250 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP250G5C Notes
2
B 64.7–71.9 840 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA
C 72.0–79.2 935
value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate 2
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
D 79.3–86.5 1030 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
2
E 86.6–93.8 1125
of HMCP.
F 93.9–101.1 1220 All HMCP and HM2P 250A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix 2
G 101.2–108.4 1315 “C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.)
H 108.5–115.3 1410 2
I 115.4–122.4 1500
2

Series C
K-Frame
2
2 Motor Motor
2 NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3 Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3
2 4 400 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP400A5C 5 400 A 77.0–86.5 1000 HMCP400K5C
2 B 30.8–33.8 400 B 86.6–96.1 1125

C 33.9–36.9 440 C 96.2–105.7 1250
2 5 400 D 37.0–40.3 480 HMCP400A5C D 105.8–115.3 1375
E 40.4–43.8 525 E 115.4–124.9 1500
2 F 43.9–46.9 570 F 125.0–134.6 1625
G 47.0–50.7 610 G 134.7–144.2 1750
2 H 50.8–53.8 660 H 144.3–153.8 1875
2 I 53.9–57.2 700 I 153.9–163.3 2000

5 400 A 38.5–43.4 500 HMCP400D5C 5 400 A 86.6–97.3 1125 HMCP400L5C
2 B 43.5–48.0 565 B 97.4–108.4 1265
C 48.1–53.0 626 C 108.5–118.8 1410
2 D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545
2 E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690

F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830
2 G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970
H 72.0–76.9 935 H 162.4–173.0 2110
2 I 77.0–81.6 1000 I 173.1–183.6 2250
5 400 A 48.1–53.8 625 HMCP400F5C 5 400 A 96.2–108.0 1250 HMCP400W5C
2 B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405
2 C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560

D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720
2 E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875
F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030
2 G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185
H 90.0–96.1 1170 H 180.0–192.3 2340
2 I 96.2–102.0 1250 I 192.4–204.0 2500
2 5 400 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP400G5C 5 400 A 115.4–129.9 1500 HMCP400N5C

B 64.7–71.9 840 B 130.0–144.2 1690
2 C 72.0–79.2 935 C 144.3–158.4 1875
D 79.3–86.5 1030 D 158.5–173.0 2060
2 E 86.6–93.8 1125 E 173.1–187.6 2250
2 F 93.9–101.1 1220 F 187.7–201.9 2440

G 101.2–108.4 1315 G 202.0–216.1 2625
2 H 108.5–115.3 1410 H 216.2–230.7 2810
I 115.4–122.4 1500 I 230.8–244.9 3000
2 5 400 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP400J5C Notes
B 75.4–83.8 980 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
2 C 83.9–92.3 1090
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
2 D 92.4–100.7 1200 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
E 100.8–109.2 1310
of HMCP.
2 F 109.3–117.6 1420 All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
G 117.7–126.1 1530 with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
2 H 126.2–134.6 1640
I 134.7–142.8 1750
2

Series C
2.4
L-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued 600 Vac Maximum 4
Motor Motor 2
Full Load MCP Full Load
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
MCP
Trip
MCP
Catalog
2
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3 Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 Setting Number
5 400 A 134.7–151.5 1750 HMCP400R5C 6 600 A 138.5–184.5 1800 HMCP600L6W
2
B 151.6–168.4 1970 B 184.6–230.7 2400
2
C 168.5–185.3 2190 C 230.8–276.8 3000
D 185.4–201.9 2410 D 276.9–323.0 3600 2
E 202.0–218.8 2625 E 323.1–369.1 4200
F 218.9–235.7 2845 F 369.2–415.3 4800 2
G 235.8–252.6 3065 G 415.4–461.4 5400
H 252.7–269.2 3285 H 461.5–507.7 6000
2
I 269.3–285.7 3500 6 600 A 38.5–46.1 500 HMCP600X6W 2
5 400 A 153.9–173.0 2000 HMCP400X5C B 46.2–61.4 600
B 173.1–192.3 2250 C 61.5–76.8 800 2
C 192.4–211.5 2500 D 76.9–96.1 1000
D 211.6–230.7 2750 E 96.2–115.3 1250
2
E 230.8–249.9 3000 F 115.4–153.7 1500
2
F 250.0–269.2 3250 G 153.8–192.2 2000
G 269.3–288.4 3500 H 192.3–230.7 2500 2
H 288.5–307.6 3750 6 600 A 76.9–96.1 1000 HMCP600Y6W
I 307.7–326.9 4000 B 96.2–115.3 1250 2
5 400 A 173.1–194.5 2250 HMCP400Y5C C 115.4–153.7 1500
B 194.6–216.1 2530 D 153.8–192.2 2000
2
C 216.2–237.6 2810 E 192.3–230.7 2500
2
D 237.7–259.5 3090 F 230.8–269.1 3000
E 259.6–281.1 3375 G 269.2–307.6 3500 2
F 281.2–302.6 3655 H 307.7–346.1 4000
G 302.7–324.1 3935 Notes
2
H 324.2–346.1 4215 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
I 346.2–368.1 4500
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam 2
2
of HMCP.
4 Equipped with electronic trip device. 2
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. 2
All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-321.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum 1
2 NEMA Motor Full MCP MCP

Starter Cont. Cam Load Current Trip Catalog
2 Size Amps Setting Amperes (FLA) 2 Setting Number
7 800 A 123.1–184.5 1600 HMCP800X7W
2 B 184.6–246.1 2400
C 246.2–307.6 3200
2 D 307.7–369.1 4000
2 E 369.2–430.7 4800
F 430.8–492.2 5600
2 G 492.3–553.7 6400
8 1200 A 184.6–276.8 2400 HMCP12Y8W
2 B 276.9–369.1 3600
C 369.2–461.4 4800
2
D 461.5–553.7 6000
2 E 553.8–646.1 7200
F 646.2–738.4 8400
2 G 738.5–830.7 9600
Notes
2 1 Equipped with electronic trip device.
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The
2 corresponding trip setting is at 13X the

minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X
setting is required for an intermediate
2 FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
V4-T2-360 2
2
2
2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) 2
Product Description
Motor protection circuit The electronic trip unit ● Phase loss protection The MPCB is based on
2
breakers (MPCBs) provide provides typical motor Active when the the Series C F-Frame.
UL 489 branch circuit overload relay functionality
●
maximum phase current Accessories for standard 2

protection, UL 508 and and short-circuit protection is greater than 50% of Series C breakers apply to the
CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor against potential phase-to- FLA setting MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit 2
protection, and meet IEC phase or phase-to-ground ● Breaker will trip when Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs
60947-2 and 50947-4 faults. minimum phase current are UL 489 listed with 35 kA 2
requirements. Typical branch is 25% or less than the and 65 kA interruption
motor loads are protected by
● Disconnecting means ratings.
three-component starters, ● Branch circuit short-circuit maximum phase current 2
consisting of breaker, protection ● Time delay of 1 or
contactor and overload ● Overload protection 2 seconds before 2
relay, or fuse, contactor and breaker trips
● Class 5, 10, 15 and 20
overload relay. The MPCB ● Phase unbalance
● Thermal memory to 2
application-specific protection prevent immediate restart
protection after overload trip to allow
eliminates the need for motor
overload relay found in the
● FDMP breaker trips motor to cool down
2
traditional three-component when there is a 40%
starter assembly. The branch difference between any 2
motor load protection is phase compared to the
simplified to an MPCB and calculated three-phase 2
contactor, reducing both average
space requirements and 2
heat generation in customer
panels. Protection is provided
by application-specific
2
electronic trip units.
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
FDMP and HFDMP
2 35 kA With Phase 65 kA With Phase
35 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Unbalance and Adjustable 65 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Unbalance and Adjustable
2 Continuous Amperes Class 10 Motor Protection Only Motor Class Protection Class 10 Motor Protection Only Motor Class Protection
80 FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL
2 100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL
2 160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL

205 FDMP3205L FDMP3205JL HFDMP3205L HFDMP3205JL
2
FLA le Dial Setting
2 Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
80 40 50 60 70 80 — — —
2 100 80 — 90 — 100 — — —
160 100 115 130 145 160 — — —
2
205 160 170 180 195 205 — — —
2
2 Specifications
Feature FDMP HFDMP
2 Interruption rating at 240 V 65 kA 100 kA
Interruption rating at 480 V 35 kA 65 kA
2 Interruption rating at 600 V 18 kA 25 kA
2 Icu/Ics at 240 V 65 kA/33 kA 1
1
100 kA/50 kA 1
Icu/Ics at 415 V 35 kA/18 kA 65 kA/33 kA 1
2 100% rated No No
FLA range (A) 40–205 40–205
2 Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20
Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
2 >0.5 FLA setting
Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current Min. phase 0.25 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase 0.25 max. phase for 1 second
2 >0.5 FLA setting
Thermal memory protection Yes Yes
2 High load indicator — —
Pre-detection relays — —
2
Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed
2 Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR
Notes
2 1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP.
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-193.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Contents
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
2
2
2
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) 2
Product Description Product Selection
Eaton’s Type ELC current Limiters are coordinated with 2
limiter attachment for the the MCP so that normal fault Type ELC Current ELC Current Limiter Attachment
MCP is designed to provide currents are interrupted Limiter Attachment MCP Rating Catalog 2
increased interrupting automatically by the MCP (Amperes) Number
capacity. The combination without any damage to the 3 ELC3003R 2
may be used for the limiter. Only the rare very 7 ELC3007R
application up to 200,000 A high fault is opened by 2
15 ELC3015R
symmetrical at 600 Vac, the limiter. Faults that are
making the MCP suitable for interrupted by the limiter 30 ELC3030R
use in network distribution also magnetically trip the 50 ELC3050R 2
systems or other applications MCP, opening all three 100 ELC3100R
where unusually high fault poles, preventing single- 150 ELC3150R 2
currents are available. The phase operation.
current limiter connects to
Each of the three poles of the 2
the load end of the MCP and Technical Data and Specifications
is provided with terminals Type ELC limiter is equipped
suitable for copper or with an indicator that extends Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1 2
aluminum conductors. when a fault is interrupted by
Type ELC Current Wire Range Metric
(See table at right.) the limiter.
Limiter Maximum Amperes AWG (mm2) 2
Standard Aluminum Terminals
50 14–2 2.5–35
2
100 1–4/0 50–95
2
150 1–4/0 50–95
Non-Standard Terminals (Steel) 2
50 14–2 2 2.5–35
100 — — 2
150 — —
Notes
2
1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in
UL 486A or UL 486B. 2
2 Optional on special order for copper cable only.
All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-321. 2

Series C
Contents
Description Page
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-376
2
2
2
Product Overview Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
2 Power demand continues to The current limiting breaker Superior system protection: ● UL 489
grow in new and existing modules use a unique contact CSA C22.2
2 facilities. To meet increased design to enhance the
● Auto reset improves
●
demand, larger utility system protection similar to system uptime and

2 supplies, spot networks and that of the circuit breaker. eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
large facility transformers are When high short-circuit
2 installed. The increased current is flowing through the ● No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
capacity of the electrical contacts of these modules,
source results in increased the design results in very high ownership and the waste
2 fault currents in excess of interrupting capacities and created by fuses
100 kA short-circuit improved current limiting ● Overloads, by using inverse
2 protection. Eaton characteristics. time current tripping
manufactures non-fused characteristics of the
2 current limiting modules with Application Description molded-case circuit
interrupting capacities up to High-performance breakers breaker
2 200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike
fused current limiters with a
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
● Low-level short circuits, by
using instantaneous and/or
one-time use, a current are available and with
2 limiter module provides an applications where the
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
automatic reset of the current limiting capability is molded-case circuit
2 module after a short-circuit used upstream of the final breaker
event. Resetting the molded- load to limit current. Typical ● High-level short circuits, by
2 case circuit breaker is the loads include lighting, power
using ultra-high-speed,
only action required to restore distribution, and motor
blow-apart contacts of the
control applications.
2 critical power to the system;
there is no time wasted
current limiting module in
series with the circuit
with sourcing the correct
2 replacement fuses or
breaker contacts
module to bring the system
● Let-through currents, by
2 back online. improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage
2 introduces impedance into
the system
2

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Series C High Performance Ratings 2
Type Product Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL)
FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–225 100 35
2
With limiter 40–200 200 200 2
2
FD Frame FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1
Ampere Breaker with Line Side Breaker with Load Side 2
Rating Mounted Current Limiter 2 Mounted Current Limiter 3
Thermal-Magnetic
2
40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040YQ02
2
45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045YQ02
50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050YQ02 2
60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060YQ02
70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070YQ02 2
80 FDC3080Q01 FDC3080YQ02
90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090YQ02
2
100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100YQ02
2
110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110YQ02
125 FDC3125Q01 FDC3125YQ02 2
150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150YQ02
175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175YQ02 2
200 FDC3200Q01 FDC3200YQ02
2
Limiter Terminals
2
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Catalog
Number 2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 4
2
Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only) 2
Package of
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Three Terminals
Catalog Number
2
100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 2
Notes
1 Line and load terminal included.
2
2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK.
3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 2
4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters.
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
2 LDC 240 V/200 kA 64.80 6.80

LDC 480 V/100 kA 66.90 9.33
2 LDC 600 V/50 kA 54.30 8.92
2

2 FD + limiter 12.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86)
2
FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
2 4.12 4.13
(104.6) (104.9)
2
2
2
2
12.06
2 (306.3)
2
2 3.96
(100.5)
3.34
2 (84.8) 3.39
(86.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Contents
Series C Internal Accessories
Description Page
2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
2
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2
Internal Accessories
2
2
2
Internal Accessories 2
Product Overview
2
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Select shunt trip catalog When a 100 microfarad
For remote indication of Switch Combination number for the voltage within capacitor charged to 28 Vdc 2
automatic trip operation. Each catalog number listed in the indicated voltage range. is discharged through the
Does not function with tables on Pages V4-T2-382 Shunt trip coils are designed shunt trip coil, the resultant 2
manual switching; however, and V4-T2-383 includes one to be applied at specific AC or flux opposes the permanent
DC voltages within the voltage magnet flux field, which
it will operate when either a
shunt trip or undervoltage
auxiliary switch and one alarm
switch. In an auxiliary switch range shown. Electrical ratings releases the stored energy
2
release is operated. A ASL switch combination, the are also shown on applicable in the spring to trip the
“make” contact closes and a auxiliary switch is always circuit breaker accessory circuit breaker. As the circuit 2
“break” contact opens when mounted on the side of the nameplates. breaker resets, the shunt
the alarm/lockout switch plug-in module next to the trip reset arm is actuated by 2
operates. The switch center pole of the circuit Low Energy Shunt Trip the circuit breaker handle,
automatically resets when breaker. Low energy shunt trip resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted
2
the circuit breaker is reset. devices are designed to
Shunt Trip operate from low energy in retaining slots in the
Auxiliary Switch The shunt trip provides output signals from dedicated top of the trip unit. Coil is 2
The auxiliary switch provides remote controlled tripping of current sensors typically intermittent-rated only.
circuit breaker contact status the circuit breaker. The shunt applied in ground fault Cutoff provisions required 2
information by monitoring the trip consists of an intermittent protection schemes. in control circuit.
position of the molded cross rated solenoid with a tripping However, with a proper 2
bar that contains the moving plunger and a cutoff switch control voltage source, they
contact arms. The auxiliary assembled to a plug-in may be applied in place of 2
switch is used for remote module. When required conventional trip devices for
special applications. Flux
indication and interlock
system verification, and
for ground fault protection
applications, certain AC rated paths surrounding permanent
2
consists of one or two SPDT shunt trips, as noted in the magnets used in the shunt
switches housed in a plug-in electrical rating table, are trip assembly hold a charged 2
module. Each SPDT switch suitable for operation at spring poised in readiness to
has one “a” and one “b” 55 percent of rated voltage. operate the circuit breaker 2
contact. When the circuit trip mechanism.
breaker contacts are open, 2
the “a” contact is open and
the “b” contact is closed. 2

Series C
Undervoltage Release Accessory Terminal Block PowerNet and Zone Interlock

2 Mechanism (R-Frame) Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and
The undervoltage release (For fixed-mounted N-Frames
2 mechanism monitors a configuration.) Eaton’s PowerNet
voltage (typically a line Internal accessory wiring Communications Kit can be
2 voltage) and trips the circuit
breaker when the voltage
leads are normally supplied ordered to add PowerNet
communications to an
with pigtail leads (18 AWG)
falls to between 70 and 35 existing OPTIM 550 breaker
2 percent of the solenoid coil
that exit from the right side of
the circuit breaker. Where in the field. An 18-inch (457.2
rating. specified, fixed-mounted mm) wiring pigtail is routed to
2 accessory terminal blocks are the rear of the breaker: two
The undervoltage release wires for PowerNet and two
mechanism consists of a available. A maximum of one
2 continuous rated solenoid 24-point terminal block can be wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA
installed on the right side of load). It is recommended that
with a plunger and tripping the power supply be an
2 lever mounted in a plug-in the circuit breaker for the
“isolated high quality” unit.
module. The tab on the internal accessories.
2 tripping lever resets the For convenience in
undervoltage release determining the appropriate
2 mechanism when normal
voltage has been restored
number of terminal block
points required, refer
and the circuit breaker handle
2 is moved to the reset (or OFF)
to Page V4-T2-378.
position. With less than

2 pickup voltage applied to the
undervoltage release
2 mechanism, the circuit
breaker contacts will not
2 touch when a closing
operation is attempted.
2 Note: Undervoltage release
mechanism accessories are not
designed for, and should not be
2 used as, circuit interlocks.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Alarm Switch
2
Alarm Switch G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1
Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Catalog
2
Make Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number 234
Alarm Switch 2
Break 240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 1288C75G03
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination
2
240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B13 1288C76G09 2
F-Frame Alarm Switch 1 2
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5
Connection Type and Location 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side 2
(Make and Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Break) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK 2
2 Left 7 B09 B10 — B11 A2L1LPK A2L1LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L1RPK A2L1RTK
2
1 Single-pole B15 8 — — — — — 2
F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1 2
Number of
(Make and Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Break) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK 2
2 Left 7 B09 B10 — B11 MA2L1LPK MA2L1LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 MA2L1RPK MA2L1RTK
2
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9
Number of
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 7 Opposite Side Same Side
(Make and
Break)
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1 Left j B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L2LPK A1L2LTK 2
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L2RPK A1L2RTK 6
Notes
2
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for
factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not 2
recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010).
3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
2
4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 2
6 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
7 Standard mounting location.
8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker.
2
9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
j Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 2

Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch

2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
2 Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(1M and 1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 1 Left 3 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK
Right 4 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L3RPK A1L3RTK
2 2 Left 3 B09 B10 — B11 A2L3LPK A2L3LTK
2 Right 4 B12 B13 — B14 A2L3RPK A2L3RTK
2 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch

Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2 Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
2 Number of
Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (1M and 1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left 3 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK
2 Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK
2 Left 3 B09 B10 — B11 A2L4LPK A2L4LTK
2 Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L4RPK A2L4RTK
2
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch
2 Number of
Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
2 Contacts
(1M and 1B)
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 1 Left B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK

Right 3 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK
2 2 Left B09 B10 — B11 A2L5LPK A2L5LTK
Right 3 B12 B13 — B14 A2L5RPK A2L5RTK
2
R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only)
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
2 Number of Contacts
(Make and Break)
Suffix
Number 6
Catalog
Number 6
2 1 B05 A1L6RPK
2 B12 A2L6RPK
2 Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
2 2 Standard mounting location.

3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
2 4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
6 A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Auxiliary Switch
2
Auxiliary Switch G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Catalog
2
a Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number 12
240 50/60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 1288C74G03
2
b
240 50/60 Hz 6 2a/2b A6 1288C73G03
2
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch 2
Number of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
Same Side
Suffix
Rear 3
Suffix
Opposite Side
Suffix
Same Side
Suffix Catalog Catalog
2
A and B (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left 5 A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X1PK A1X1LTK
2
Left 5 A15 7 A16 7 A17 7 — E1X1PK —
2
Right or Neutral 6 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8
Right or Neutral 6 A18 7 A19 7 A20 7 — — — 2
2 Left 5 A09 A10 — A11 A2X1LPK A2X1LTK
Left 5 A21 7 A22 7 — — E2X1LPK — 2
Right or Neutral 6 A12 A13 — A14 A2X1RPK A2X1RTK 8
Right or Neutral 6 A23 7 A24 7 — — E2X1RPK —

2
F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9
2
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Factory Installation Kit 4
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Same Side Rear Opposite Side
Terminal Block
Same Side
Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2
Number of Mounting
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
A and B (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
Trip Unit Type 310+
1 Right A30 A31 A32 — — —
2
Trip Unit Type 210+
2
1 Right A33 A34 A35 — — —
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side
Contacts
A and B
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X2PK A1X2LTK
2
Right k A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X2PK A1X2RTK 4
2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X2PK A2X2LTK 2
Right k A12 A13 — A14 A2X2PK A2X2RTK 4
Notes
2
1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 2
4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
2
6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit.
7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 2
8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at 2
breaker factory.
j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
k Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
2

Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch

Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
2 Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK
Right 23 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4
2 2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X3PK A2X3LTK
Right 23 A2X3RTK 4
2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X3PK
Right A21 A22 — — 1482D28G10 67 —
2 3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK
Right 3 A17 — — A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4
2
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
2 Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Right 2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4
2 2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X4PK A2X4LTK
Right 2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X4PK A2X4RTK 4
2 3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK
2 Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4
2 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch

2 Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
2 Number of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
Same Side
Suffix
Rear 2
Suffix
Opposite Side
Suffix
Same Side
Suffix Catalog Catalog
Right 2 A1X5RTK 4
2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X5PK
2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X5PK A2X5LTK
2 Right 2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X5PK A2X5RTK 4

3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK
2 Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4
2 R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)

Number of 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
2 Contacts Suffix Catalog
A and B Number 5 Number 5
2 2 A12 A2X6RPK
4 A19 A4X6RPK
2 Notes
2 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.

5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
6 This option is not field installable.
2 7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.

Series C
2.4
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
Auxiliary Switch and F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1
Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 2 2
Combination
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
a Same Side Rear 3 Same Side
Mounting
b
Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog 2
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number
Left 3 C01 C02 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK 2
Right C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 4
2
F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2
Same Side Rear 3 Same Side
Mounting
Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number
Left 4 C01 C02 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK
2
Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 2
Number of
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 2
Sets of
(1A and 1B) Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(1M–1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2
1 Left C01 C02 — C03 AAL2LPK AAL2LTK
Right 4 C04 C05 — C06 AAL2RPK AAL2RTK 4 2
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 2
Number of 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Sets of
(1A and 1B) Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(1M–1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
1 Left C01 C02 — C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK
Right 67 C04 C05 — C06 AAL3RPK 8 AAL3RTK 2
Right C07 C08 — — 1482D28G09 9j —
2
Notes
1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both
features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A32).
2
2 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation.
3 Standard mounting location. 2
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers
5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
2
8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). 2
9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.
j This option is not field installable.
2
2
2
2

Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Number of
Sets of
Mounting
Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Contacts (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 1A, 1B and Left C01 C02 — C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK
1 Make/1 Break
Right 2 C04 C05 — C06 AA114RPK AA114RTK 3
2 2A, 2B and Left C07 C08 — C12 AA214LPK AA214LTK
1 Make/1 Break
2 Right 2 C10 C11 — C13 AA214RPK AA214RTK 3
3A, 3B and Left C14 — — — AA314LPK —
2 1 Make/1 Break
Right 2 C15 — — — AA314RPK —
2 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2 Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Sets of Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 Contacts (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1A, 1B and Left C01 C02 — C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK
2 1 Make/1 Break
2A, 2B and Left C07 C08 — C12 AA215LPK AA215LTK
2 1 Make/1 Break
2 Notes

3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Shunt Trip
2
Shunt Trip G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only) 2
Electrical Ratings Suffix Catalog
Volts Frequency Amperes Number Number 2
ST
120 50/60 Hz 1.1 S1 1373D62G01
a 240 50/60 Hz 2.1 S2 1373D62G02
2
12 DC 2.8 S3 1373D62G15 2
24 DC 5.7 S4 1373D62G16
24 60 Hz — S7 1373D62G20 2
2
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog 2
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K
2
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT1LP12K SNT1LT12K
2
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K 6
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K 6 2
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT1RP12K SNT1RT12K 6
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT1RP18K SNT1RT18K 6
2
Notes 2
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2
4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices.
5 Standard mounting location. 2
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. 2
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed.
Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip

2 Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
2 12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K

48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K
2 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K
2 480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
2 12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K 4

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 4
2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K 4
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 4
2
2 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip
2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
2 12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K
48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K
2
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K
2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K
2 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56
12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K 4
2 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K 4
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K 4
2 480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4
Notes
2 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element.

2 5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.

2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog 2
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 2
48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT4LP05K SNT4LT05K
2
48–60 Vdc S85 S86 S87 — SNT4LP23K SNT4LT23K 2
110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT4LP26K SNT4LT26K 2
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3
2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K
48–60 Vac S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K 2
48–60 Vdc S88 S89 S90 — SNT4RP23K SNT4RT23K
110–240 Vac S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K 2
110–125 Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP26K SNT4RT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K
2
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2
3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip

2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
2 48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K
2 110–240 Vac 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K

110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT5LP26K SNT5LT26K
2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K
2 48–60 Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K
2
R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only)
Field Installation Kits 1
2 Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating Suffix Catalog
2 (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number 4 Number 4
24 Vac or Vdc S21 SNT6P03K
2 48–60 Vac S25 SNT6P05K
2 110–240 Vac S29 SNT6P11K

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K
2 480–600 Vac S37 SNT6P18K
48–60 Vdc S88 SNT6P23K
2 110–125 Vdc S45 SNT6P26K
2 Notes

3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Ordering Information 2
Select shunt trip catalog
number for the voltage within
2
the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed 2
to be applied at specific AC or
DC voltages within the 2
voltage range shown.
Electrical ratings are also 2
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
nameplates.
2
F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1
2
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Field Installation Kits 2
2
UV
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Opposite
Terminal Block
2
Same Side Rear 3 Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Mounting
Positions Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog 2
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
F-Frame 2
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 NO4 LST1LPK 4 LST1LTK 4
Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 NO8 LST1RPK 4 LST1RTK 4

2
J-Frame 2
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST2LPK —
Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST2RPK — 2
K-Frame
Left 3 NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST3LPK —
2
Right 56 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST3RPK —
2
L- and M-Frames
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST4LPK — 2
Right NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST4RPK —
N-Frame 2
Left 3 NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST5LPK —
R-Frame
2
Right NO1 — — — LST6RPK —
2
Notes
1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.
2
4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only,
2
not UL listed for field installation.
5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2 Ordering Information
2 Select handle reset

undervoltage release
mechanism catalog number
2 for the voltage within the
indicated voltage range.
2 Undervoltage release
mechanism coils are
2 designed to be applied at
specific AC or DC voltages
2 within the voltage range
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
2 nameplates.
2 G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only)

Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
2 Electrical Ratings
Volts (AC Only) Frequency (Hz) Amperes Style Numbers 123
Factory
Suffix
2 UV
120 50/60 0.05 1373D62G03 T1
24 50/60 0.22 1373D62G04 T2
2 48 50/60 0.11 1373D62G05 T3
60 50/60 0.10 1373D62G06 T4
2 110 50 0.049 1373D62G07 T5
2 208 60 0.026 1373D62G08 T6

220 50 0.025 1373D62G09 T7
2 240 50/60 0.024 1373D62G10 T8
380 50 0.015 1373D62G11 T9
2 415 50 0.013 1373D62G12 T10
440 50 0.012 1373D62G13 T11
2 480 60 0.01 1373D62G14 T12
2 Notes
1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.

3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker.
2 G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation
2 should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP)
Undervoltage Release Mechanism 2
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 2
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac U01 U02 U03 U04
24 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08
2
48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40
2
60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U100
110–127 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 2
208–240 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20
380–480 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 2
525–600 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
2
12 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 2
24 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56
48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88 2
60 Vac U101 U102 U103 U104
110–127 Vac U61 U62 U63 U64
2
208–240 Vac U65 U66 U67 U68
380–480 Vac U69 U70 U71 U72
2
525–600 Vac U73 U74 U75 U76 2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
12 Vdc U29 U30 U31 U32 2
24 Vdc U33 U34 U35 U36
48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40
2
60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U100
2
110–127 Vdc U41 U42 U43 U44
220–250 Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48 2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80 2
24 Vdc U81 U82 U83 U84
48 Vdc U85 U86 U87 U88
2
60 Vdc U101 U102 U103 U104 2
110–127 Vdc U89 U90 U91 U92
220–250 Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96 2
Notes
1 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 2
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 2
F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. 2
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP
Factory Installation Kits 1
2 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
2 12 Vac UVH1LP02K UVH1LT02K MUVH1LP02K MUVH1LT02K

48 Vac UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K
110–127 Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K
2 208–240 Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K
380–480 Vac UVH1LP15K UVH1LT15K MUVH1LP15K MUVH1LT15K
2 525–600 Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K
2 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
12 Vac UVH1RP02K UVH1RT02K MUVH1RP02K MUVH1RT02K

2 24 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K
48 Vac UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
2 60 Vac UVH1RP24K UVH1RT24K MUVH1RP24K MUVH1RT24K
110–127 Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K
2
2 380–480 Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K

2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
12 Vdc UVH1LP20K UVH1LT20K MUVH1LP20K MUVH1LT20K
2 24 Vdc UVH1LP21K UVH1LT21K MUVH1LP21K MUVH1LT21K
2 48 Vdc UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K

60 Vdc UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K
2 110–127 Vdc UVH1LP26K UVH1LT26K MUVH1LP26K MUVH1LT26K
220–250 Vdc UVH1LP28K UVH1LT28K MUVH1LP28K MUVH1LT28K
2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc UVH1RP20K UVH1RT20K MUVH1RP20K MUVH1RT20K

2 24 Vdc UVH1RP21K UVH1RT21K MUVH1RP21K MUVH1RT21K
2 48 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K

60 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
2 110–127 Vdc UVH1RP26K UVH1RT26K MUVH1RP26K MUVH1RT26K
220–250 Vdc UVH1RP28K UVH1RT28K MUVH1RP28K MUVH1RT28K
2 Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2 2 Standard mounting location.
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
Terminal
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block 1
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3 2
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH2LP02K UVH2LT02K 2
24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH2LP03K UVH2LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH2LP05K UVH2LT05K
2
2
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH2LP15K UVH2LT15K 2
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH2RP02K UVH2RT02K 2
24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH2RP03K UVH2RT03K
48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH2RP05K UVH2RT05K
2
110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH2RP08K UVH2RT08K 2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4
12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH2LP20K UVH2LT20K

2
2
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH2LP23K UVH2LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH2LP26K UVH2LT26K 2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 2
12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH2RP20K UVH2RT20K
2
48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH2RP23K UVH2RT23K
2
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH2RP28K UVH2RT28K 2
Notes
1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. 2
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 Terminal
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block
2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP02K UVH3LT02K
2 48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K

2 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP02K UVH3RT02K
2 48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH3RP05K UVH3RT05K

2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH3LP20K UVH3LT20K

2 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP26K UVH3LT26K
2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345

2 24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH3RP21K UVH3RT21K
2 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH3RP23K UVH3RT23K

2 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP28K UVH3RT28K
Notes
2 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2 3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.

2 5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
Terminal
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP02K UVH4LT02K 2
2
2
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K 2
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP02K UVH4RT02K 2
2

2
2
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP26K UVH4LT26K 2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34 2
2
2
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP28K UVH4RT28K 2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2
3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
2 24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH5LP03K UVH5LT03K

2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2

2
R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)
2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating Suffix Catalog
2 (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number 4 Number 4
12 Vac U37 UVH6RP02K
2 24 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K
48–60 Vac U45 UVH6RP05K
2 110–127 Vac U49 UVH6RP08K
2 208–240 Vac U53 UVH6RP11K

380–500 Vac U57 UVH6RP29K
2 12 Vdc T21 UVH6RP20K
24 Vdc T25 UVH6RP21K
2 48–60 Vdc T29 UVH6RP23K
110–125 Vdc T33 UVH6RP26K
2 220–250 Vdc T37 UVH6RP28K
2 Notes

3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame)
2
Accessory Terminal R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1
Block (R-Frame)
Factory Installed Field Mounted
2
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number 2
Q01 TBRDK
2
2
Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory 2
Number of Contacts Required Number
Type of Accessory per Single Accessory of Wires 2
Auxiliary switch 2a/2b 6
4a/4b 12 2
Alarm (Signal)/ 1m/1b 6
Lockout switch 2m/2b 12 2
Shunt trip N/A 2
Low energy shunt N/A 2 2
Undervoltage release mechanism N/A 2
2
PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)
K-, L- and N-Frames
2
PowerNet Interlock Kit 2
2
PowerNet and Zone
Interlock Kits Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
2
K-Frame PN ICK550K
2
L-Frame PN ICK550L
N-Frame PN ICK550N 2
2
Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
2
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
2
K-Frame ZG ZGK550K
2
L-Frame ZG ZGK550L
N-Frame ZG ZGK550N 2
2
PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
Circuit Factory Install Catalog 2
Breaker Suffix Number
K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K 2
L-Frame ZGP ZGPK550L
N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N
2
Notes
1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped
2
from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram
(IL 29C714). 2
2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole.
3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU).
2
2
2

Series C

2
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
2 Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
2 Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers 125 3 50/60 Hz 1 2500

600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 4 2500
250 DC 0.25 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 4 2500
2 Single-Pole Circuit Breakers
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
2 125/250 50/60 Hz 63 2000
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
28 DC 33 2000
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
2 28 DC 5 4 2000
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 56 125 DC 0.50 4 2500

250 DC 0.25 4 2500
2 Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum Maximum Dielectric
250 DC 0.25 3 2500
2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 67 125 DC 0.50 4 2500

2 250 DC 0.25 4 2500
2 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
250 DC 0.25 3 2500
2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 4 2500
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67
2 Maximum Maximum Dielectric 250 DC 0.25 4 2500
2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum Maximum Dielectric
2 250 DC 0.25 3 2500
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 125 DC 0.50 4 2500
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 8
250 DC 0.25 4 2500

2 Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78
2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum Maximum
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes
2 250 DC 0.25 3 2500
600 50/60 Hz 6
2 R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j 125 DC 0.50 4
250 DC 0.25 4
2 Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
Notes
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500
3 Non-inductive load.
2 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.026).

2 7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2 i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.

j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.

Series C
2.4
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 25
Maximum Maximum Dielectric Maximum Maximum Dielectric 2
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 2
125 DC 0.50 3 2200 125 DC 0.50 3 2500
250 DC 0.25 3 2200 250 DC 0.25 3 2500
2
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data N-Frame Electrical Rating Data
24 26
2
Maximum Maximum Dielectric Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 2
250 DC 0.25 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500
Notes
2
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 2
3 Non-inductive load.
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage 4 Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 3 2500
2
0.25 3
250 DC 2500
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Shunt Trip
2 F-Frame and HMCP Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2 Application Ratings
Voltage Frequency
Electrical Operating Ratings
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Ip Irms at Irms at One Minute Dielectric
Catalog Number (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.25 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V)
2 SNT1LP03K or SNT1LT03K 12–24 50/60 9 6.3 6.1 4.3 40 1048
12 8.5 6 75
2 24 17 12 300
2 12–24 DC 12 9 8 100
24 16 400
2 SNT1LP08K or SNT1LT08K 48–127 50/60 48 33.6 2.7 1.9 92 1254

60 3.4 2.4 140
2 110 6.2 4.4 480
120 6.8 4.8 570
2 127 7.2 5.1 640
48–60 DC 48 33.6 2.1 100
2 60 2.6 160
SNT1LP12K or SNT1LT12K 208–380 50/60 208 146 1.2 0.25 180 1760
2 220 1.3 0.27 200
240 1.4 0.29 240
2 380 2.3 0.31 610
110–125 DC 110 77 0.5 55
2 120 0.55 66
125 0.57 71
2 SNT1LP18K or SNT1LT18K 415–600 50/60 400 280 1.1 0.77 310 2200
2 415
440
1.1
1.2
0.8
0.85
330
380
2 480 1.3 0.93 450

525 1.4 1.02 530
2 550 1.5 1.06 590
600 1.6 1.16 700
2 220–250 DC 220 154 0.48 110
250 0.55 140
2 Notes
1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
2
Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)
2
SNT2P04K or SNT2T04K 12–24 50/60 12 9 17.7 12.6 164 1048
2
24 38.3 27.4 631
12–24 DC 12 9 7.3 87 2
24 16.9 405
SNT2P06K or SNT2T06K 48–60 50/60 48 36 24.4 17.3 830 1120 2
60 30.1 21.3 1280
48–60 DC 48 36 14.8 710
2
60 18.4 1105 2
SNT2P11K or SNT2T11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 0.9 0.6 66 1480
120 1 0.7 84 2
127 1.1 0.8 102
208 2.4 1.7 354
2
220 2.6 1.8 396
2
240 2.6 1.8 432
110–125 DC 110 60 1 112 2
120 1.1 138
125 1.2 150 2
SNT2P14K or SNT2T14K 380–440 50/60 380 285 0.34 0.25 127 1880
400 0.38 0.27 150
2
415 0.4 0.29 163
2
440 0.44 0.31 188
220–250 DC 220 165 0.19 40 2
250 0.22 58
SNT2P18K or SNT2T18K 480–600 50/60 480 360 0.13 0.07 34 2200 2
525 0.13 0.08 42
550 0.13 0.09 50
2
600 0.14 0.1 60 2
Notes
1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
2 Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
2 SNT3P04K or SNT3T04K 12–24 50/60 12 9 17.7 12.6 164 1048

24 38.3 27.4 631
2 12–24 DC 12 9 7.3 87
24 16.9 405
2 SNT3P06K or SNT3T06K 48–60 50/60 48 36 24.4 17.3 830 1120
60 30.1 21.3 1280
2 48–60 DC 48 36 14.8 710
2 60 18.4 1105
SNT3P11K or SNT3T11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 1.3 0.9 100 1480
2 120 1.4 1 120
127 1.5 1.1 140
2 208 2.8 2 420
2 220 3 2.1 470

240 3.2 2.3 550
2 110–125 DC 110 82 1 110

120 1.1 130
2 125 1.2 140
SNT3P14K or SNT3T14K 380–440 50/60 380 285 0.37 0.25 95 1880
2 400 0.39 0.27 108
2 415 0.42 0.29 120

440 0.44 0.31 136
2 220–250 DC 220 165 0.19 41
250 0.22 54
2 SNT3P18K or SNT3T18K 480–600 50/60 480 360 0.11 0.08 40 2200
525 0.13 0.09 50
2 550 0.13 0.09 50
2 600 0.16 0.12 70
Notes
2 1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
L-Frame and HMCP (L) and M-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2
Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
2
SNT4P03K or SNT4T03K 12–24 50/60 9 6.3 7.2 5.1 46 1048
2
12 11.6 8.2 98
24 28.6 20.2 485 2
12–24 DC 9 6.3 8.5 75
12 8.6 103 2
24 17.4 418
SNT4P05K SNT4T05K 48–60 50/60 48 34 0.72 0.51 82 1120
2
60 1.2 0.84 126 2
SNT4P11K or SNT4T11K 110–240 50/60 110 77 0.89 0.63 69 1480
120 1.03 0.73 88 2
127 1.1 0.8 102
208 2.3 1.6 333
2
220 2.4 1.7 374
2
240 2.6 1.8 432
SNT4P14K or SNT4T14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 0.3 0.21 80 1880 2
400 0.34 0.24 96
415 0.35 0.25 104 2
440 0.38 0.27 119
220–250 DC 220 154 0.34 75
2
250 0.34 85
2
SNT4P18K or SNT4T18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.07 0.05 24 2200
525 0.08 0.06 32 2
550 0.09 0.07 39
600 0.11 0.08 48 2
SNT4P23K SNT4T23K 48–60 DC 48 34 0.76 36 1120
60 0.95 57
2
SNT4P26K or SNT4T26K 110–125 DC 110 77 0.42 46 1250 2
120 0.43 52
125 0.44 55 2
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2
3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
2 Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
2 SNT5LP03K or SNT5LT03K 9–24 50/60 9 6.3 7.2 5.1 46 1048

12 11.6 8.2 98
2 24 28 19.8 475
9–24 DC 9 7.2 8.8 79
2 12 12.1 145
24 25.4 610
2 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K 48–60 50/60 48 34 2.4 1.7 82 1120
2 60 3 2.1 126
SNT5LP11K or SNT5LT11K 110–240 50/60 110 77 0.86 0.61 67 1480
2 120 0.98 0.69 83
127 1.1 0.75 95
2 208 2.3 1.6 333
2 220 2.4 1.7 374

240 2.6 1.8 432
2 SNT5LP14K or SNT5LT14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 0.28 0.2 76 1880

400 0.31 0.22 88
2 415 0.33 0.23 95
440 0.35 0.25 110
2 220–250 DC 220 154 0.21 46
2 250 0.22 55
SNT5LP18K or SNT5LT18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.06 0.04 19 2200
2 525 0.08 0.06 32
550 0.08 0.06 33
2 600 0.1 0.07 42
SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K 48–60 DC 48 34 1.4 67 1120
2 60 1.7 102
2 SNT5LP26K or SNT5LT26K 110–125 DC 110 77 1.1 121 1250

120 1.2 144
2 125 1.2 150
Notes
2 1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
R-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123456
2
Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
2
SNT6P03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 36.1 25.5 612 1050
2
24 DC 24 16.8 16.5 396
SNT6P05K 48–60 50/60 48 34 11.9 8.4 403 1120 2
60 15.7 11.1 666
SNT6P11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 5.09 3.6 396 1480 2
120 5.66 4 480
127 5.94 4.2 533
2
208 10.2 7.2 1498 2
220 10.5 7.4 1628
240 11.2 7.9 1896 2
SNT6P14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 5.94 4.2 1596 2200
400 6.23 4.4 1760
2
415 6.51 4.6 1909
2
440 6.93 4.9 2156
220–250 DC 220 154 1.7 374 1500 2
250 1.9 475
SNT6P18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.68 0.48 230 2200 2
525 0.78 0.55 289
550 0.79 0.56 308
2
600 0.91 0.64 384
2
SNT6P23K 48–60 DC 48 34 7.1 341 1120
60 8.8 258 2
SNT6P26K 110–125 DC 110 77 2.4 264 1250
120 2.6 312 2
125 2.8 350
2
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage.
2
3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations.
4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. 2
5 Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating.
6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C

2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
2 50/60 Hz DC
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
2 Supply
Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA
Supply
2 12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8

12 4.2 6.3 7.6 2.5 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8
2 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3
2 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.9 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
2 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.3 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7
2 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 2.6
2 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.4 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.4
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.9 — — — — —
2 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9 — — — — —
2 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.5 — — — — —

440 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.9 — — — — —
2 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
525 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3 — — — — —
2 550 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.8 — — — — —
600 210.0 367.0 446.0 5.8 — — — — —
2
2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23
2 50/60 Hz
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
DC
Supply Supply
2 Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
2 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
2 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
2 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
2 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
2 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
2
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
2 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —

440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
2 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
2 Notes
2 3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz DC
2
Supply
Supply
2
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 2
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 2
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
2
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
2
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 2
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — — 2
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
2
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 2
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
2
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1 2
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Supply
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage 2
Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
2
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 2
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1 2
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
2
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
2
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0 2
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — — 2
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
2
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
2
Note
1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1

2 50/60 Hz DC
2 Supply
Supply
2 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
2 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
2 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 —
2 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 250 — — — 4.0
380 175.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
2 415 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
2 480 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —

500 175.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
2 Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
Application
2
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric 2
Catalog Voltage Voltage Voltage UVR Circuit Breaker Breaker Withstand
Suffix (V) (V) Minimum Maximum (V) Max. VA Response 3 Contact Separation 4 Contact Opening Voltage (V) 5
2
02/02K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024
03/03K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048 2
05/05K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 3.4 5 46 77 1120
60 21.0 33.5 40.8 6.0 5 46 77 1120 2
08/08K 110–127 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1254
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1254
2
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1254 2
11/11K 208–240 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2 5 46 77 1480
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 6.6 5 46 77 1480 2
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 7.2 5 46 77 1480
29/29K 380–500 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8 5 46 77 2000
2
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.3 5 46 77 2000
2
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.8 5 46 77 2000
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 9.6 5 46 77 2000 2
500 168.0 266.0 323.0 10.0 5 46 77 2000
2
R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12 2
Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms) 2
Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric
Catalog
Suffix
Voltage
(V)
Voltage
(V) Minimum Maximum
Voltage
(V) Max. VA
UVR
Response 3
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Breaker
Contact Opening
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5
2
20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024
2
21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048
23/23K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8 5 46 77 1120 2
60 21.0 33.5 40.8 7.2 5 46 77 1120
26/26K 110–127 110 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1250 2
120 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1250
125 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1250
2
28/28K 220–250 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6 5 46 77 1500 2
250 87.5 154.0 187.0 7.5 5 46 77 1500
Notes 2
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown. 2
3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown.
4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.
5 For 1 minute.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Series C External Accessories Contents

2 Description Page
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-225
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-371
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-432
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-434
2
2
Product Overview
2
End Cap Kit J-Frame Plug Nut Multiwire Connectors Rear Fed Terminals.
2 The end cap kit slides onto The plug nut is used in Eaton’s field-installed Rear fed terminals allow
the line or load conductor of applications where screw- multiwire connectors for the the cable to connect to the
2 the circuit breaker and acts as connected ring-type terminals load side (OFF) end terminals breaker from the back instead
a threaded adapter for the are preferred to connect are used to distribute the load of the top. Terminal shields or
2 conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
cables to circuit breaker
conductors. The plug nut is
from the circuit breaker to
multiple devices without the
interphase barriers are
included with each rear fed
connector. The end cap kit press-fit into the opening in use of separate distribution terminal kit (depending on
2 is available with English and the circuit breaker terminal terminal blocks. frame size). When catalog
metric thread sizes. (Field conductor. Screws and number starts with a 3, it
2 installation only.) Listed per washers are supplied by Multiwire lug kits include indicates a kit with three
UL File E7819. customer. mounting hardware, terminals in each kit. Catalog
insulators and tin-plated
2 aluminum connectors to
number beginning with a TA
Keeper Nut Terminal Adapter indicates one terminal.
replace three mechanical
2 The keeper nut slides onto
Control Wire Terminal Kit load lugs. UL listed as used
the line or load conductor of
The control wire terminal kit on the load side (OFF) end.
the circuit breaker and acts as
2 a threaded adapter for the provides a means to tap off
control power from a main Terminal Shields
conductor to accept a ring
2 terminal or other bolt-on disconnect, using the Terminal shields provide
connector. The keeper nut provided male end of a quick protection against accidental
2 is available with English and disconnect. contact with live line side
terminations. Terminal
metric thread sizes. Screws
For use with steel or stainless shields are fabricated from
2 and washers are supplied by
customer. (Field installation
steel terminals only. high dielectric insulating
only.) Listed per UL File Note: Terminal Kits contain one
material and fasten over
2 E7819. terminal for each pole and one the front terminal access
terminal cover. openings. Small openings in
2 L-, M-, N-Frames the shields provide limited
access to the terminals for
Not required. Terminals are tightening connectors.
2 threaded. (Field installation only.)
2

Series C
2.4
Terminal End Covers handle block holds the circuit Cylinder Lock Walking Beam Interlock
The terminal end covers are breaker handle in the ON The cylinder lock internally The walking beam Interlock 2
designed for use in motor position.) The device is blocks the trip bar in the provides mechanical
control center applications positioned over the circuit tripped position to prevent interlocking between two 2
where, because of confined breaker handle and secured the circuit breaker from adjacent circuit breakers of
spaces, line side conductors by a setscrew to deter
accidental operation of the
being switched to ON. the same pole configuration. 2
are normally custom fitted. The cylinder lock is factory The walking beam interlock
The molded end covers are circuit breaker handle. Listed installed in the left pole only mounts on a bracket behind
made of high dielectric glass- per UL File E7819. (Field of the circuit breaker cover. and between the circuit
2
polyester and slide over the installation only.) Other internally mounted breakers. A plunger on each
line ends of the circuit accessories cannot be end of the beam is inserted 2
breaker. Close fitting Padlockable Handle installed in the same through an access hole in the
conductor openings are
Padlockable Handle Lock
pole as the cylinder lock. back plate and base of each 2
molded into the end covers. (Factory installation only.) circuit breaker. The walking
The device is positioned in
The end cover and circuit
breaker case fit together to the cover opening to prevent Key Interlock Kit
beam interlock prevents both
circuit breakers from being
2
form terminal compartments handle movement. Will (Lock Not Included) switched ON at the same
that isolate discharged accommodate one 5/16-inch The key interlock is used to time. If a walking beam 2
ionizing gases during circuit (8 mm) padlock. externally lock the circuit interlock is installed, the
breaker tripping. Terminal end breaker handle in the OFF wiring troughs in the back 2
covers are available with two Snap-on Padlockable Handle position. When the key of the circuit breaker case
Lock Hasp
conductor opening diameters, interlock is locked, an are blocked by the plungers 2
0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41- The snap-on padlockable extended deadbolt blocks and cannot be used for cross
handle lock allows the handle
inch (10.4 mm), and are listed
per UL File E7819. (Field to be locked in the OFF or ON
movement of the circuit
breaker handle. Uniquely
wiring. Factory modified
circuit breakers are required
2
installation only.) position. (Trip-free operation coded keys are removable for this application. UL
allows the circuit breaker to only with the deadbolt File E38116. 2
Interphase Barriers trip when the handle lock extended. Each coded key
The interphase barriers holds the circuit breaker controls a group of circuit Electrical Operator 2
provide additional electrical handle in the ON position.) breakers for a given specific The electrical (solenoid)
clearance between circuit This device was designed
for use on the single-pole
customer installation. operator is a single solenoid 2
breaker poles for special mechanism that enables local
circuit breaker, but may be The key interlock assembly is
termination applications. The
barriers are high dielectric used on one-, two-, three- Underwriters Laboratories
and remote circuit breaker
ON, OFF, and reset
2
and four-pole styles. The listed for field installation
insulating plates that are switching. The electrical
installed in the molded slots handle lock snaps onto the under UL File E7819 and
operator is mounted on the 2
escutcheon area of the consists of a mounting kit
between the terminals. (Field circuit breaker cover within
installation only.) Two per handle with an optional and a purchaser supplied
deadbolt lock. The mounting
the trimline of the circuit 2
package. retaining screw for added breaker. The electrical
secureness. The handle kit comprises a mounting
lock will accommodate plate, which is secured to the
operator uses a unique 2
Base Mounting Plate bi-stable latch that allows
one padlock with a 1/4-inch circuit breaker cover in either
Suitable for mounting six
(6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per the left- or right-pole position,
the device to operate using
one solenoid. The accessory
2
single-pole circuit breakers. key interlock mounting
UL File E7819. (Field provides high-speed
DIN Rail Adapter installation only.) screws, and a wire seal.
switching with a maximum 2
Specific mounting kits are
For use with standard 35 mm operating time of 5 cycles
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp required for individual key 2
DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or (80 mS), making it suitable
The padlockable handle lock interlock types.
35 x 15 mm per DIN for generator synchronizing
EN50022.
hasp allows the handle to
be locked in the ON or OFF Sliding Bar Interlock
applications. 2
Adapter mounting screws position. (Trip-free operation The sliding bar interlock Means are provided for
included are for use with two- allows the circuit breaker to provides mechanical remote electrical operation 2
and three-pole circuit trip when the handle lock interlocking between two and for local manual
breakers. Adapters for single- holds the circuit breaker adjacent three-pole circuit operation. A special slide 2
pole circuit breakers clip into handle in the ON position.) breakers. It is installed on the includes provisions for
the base molding. The hasp mounts on the enclosure cover between the
circuit breakers. When the
padlocking the circuit breaker
handle in the OFF position.
2
circuit breaker cover within
Key Operated Attachment the trimline. The cover is sliding bar interlock handle The slide will accept three
predrilled on both sides of the is moved from one side to the padlock shackles with a 2
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) operating handle so that the other, a bar extends to maximum diameter of
hasp can be mounted on alternately block movement 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. 2
Non-Padlockable Handle Block either side of the handle. of the circuit breaker handles An interlock electrically
The non-padlockable handle The hasp will accommodate and prevents both circuit disconnects the solenoid 2
block secures the circuit up to three padlocks with breakers from being switched when the electrical operator
to ON at the same time. cover is removed. The rating
breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles,
one per circuit breaker. Sliding bar interlocks are data tables provide electrical
2
operation allows the circuit Listed per UL File E7819. not UL listed. (Field rating data for the electrical
breaker to trip when the (Field installation only.) installation only.) (solenoid) operator. 2

Series C
The electrical (motor) operator Panelboard Connecting Straps IQ Energy Sentinel Potential Transformer Module
2 allows the circuit’s breaker to Panelboard connecting straps The IQ Energy Sentinel The potential transformer
be opened, closed or reset are used to connect the is a highly accurate, module is required for the
2 remotely. It also has a lock-off circuit breaker terminals to microprocessor-based, Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to
capability and provisions for the panelboard bus. The breaker-mounted device provide a voltage input to
2 manual operation. panelboard connecting straps designed to monitor power allow the trip unit to monitor
The electrical (motor) are available with various and energy readings. It power and energy as well as
ratings for outside and center represents an alternative to power factor. The potential
2 operator contains a reversible
poles. (Field installation only.) watt meters, watt-hour transformer module is a 6 VA
motor connected to a ball
meters, and watt demand transformer with a primary
2 screw. The ball screw drives
the circuit breaker handle.
Panelboard connecting straps meters. Key advantages voltage input of up to 600 volt
are available to meet the include savings in space, line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
Limit switches and relays are
2 used to control the motor.
needs of most standard
panelboard applications.
lower installation costs, and fuses are provided on the
remote monitoring capability. primary of the transformer
Style numbers for mounting
2 Plug-In Adapters brackets for CDP panelboard The IQ Energy Sentinel
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
Plug-in adapters simplify installations are also included. mounts on the load side testing. The device is
2 installation and front removal
Note: Not UL listed. Refer to
of a Series C F-Frame normally panel mounted
of circuit breakers. Individual (150 ampere) circuit breaker. and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
panelboard manufacturer for
2 line and load plug-in compatibility. It can be applied on three- trip units.
adapters are available for phase, four-wire systems,
rear connection applications or single-phase, three-wire
2 on two-, three-, and four-pole
Type LFD Current Limiter
systems with voltage
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable
The LFD current limiter is an Test Kit
circuit breakers. Common connected through
2 mounting plates for line-
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
Phases A and C.
The solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit provides
and load-end adapters
FD thermal-magnetic circuit verification of performance
2 are available.
breaker, providing 200,000 A
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178. of all ratings of Digitrip 310
One plug-in adapter kit is interrupting capacity at up to electronic trip units installed
2 required for line-end and 600 Vac. LFD current limiters in circuit breakers while in
one for load-end. for thermal-magnetic and service under varying load
2 Plug-in adapters are
electronic circuit breakers and/or phase imbalance. The
are listed with Underwriters test kit operates on 120-volt,
UL approved unless
2 otherwise noted.
Laboratories under File
E47239.
50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and test
times for testing long time,
2 Rear Connecting Studs Ground Fault Alarm Unit short time/instantaneous
Rear connecting studs are The ground fault alarm unit is operation and optional
2 available in several sizes to a remotely mounted device ground fault operation of
accommodate specific fixed- with a combination indicating the circuit breaker.
2 mounted circuit breaker
applications.
light/test button that will light
when the breaker trips or
2 Each rear connecting stud alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
assembly consists of one stud
requires a separate 120 Vac
2 and one tube. To maintain
power source to power the
proper clearances between
poles, select alternate long light and the internal relay,
2 and short stud assemblies for which has 1NO and 1NC
circuit breakers with more contacts for remote indication.
2 than one pole. One assembly The ground fault alarm unit
is required for line-end and can be panel mounted for
2 one for load-end of each pole. ordering with an optional face
mounting bracket. For use on
Tubes must be ordered
Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-
2 separately. Connecting studs
are available only with English Frame.
thread sizes.
2
Note: Not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer Cause of Trip Display/Remote
The Breaker Interface Module The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a Mount Cause of Trip Display 2
(BIM) is a panel mounted hand-held programmer that The Cause of Trip Display
user interface device that is is used to access, configure, can be field-installed on any 2
mounted on the front of an test and display information Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
electrical assembly or at a from OPTIM trip units. The The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
2
remote location. The BIM is OPTIMizer plugs into the
used to access, configure, front of an OPTIM trip unit via screen, such as cause of trip,
test and display information an eight-pin telephone jack phrase current, ground current 2
for OPTIM trip units and other and is powered by a nine-volt and low loads. The display
devices. The BIM consists of battery or the auxiliary power is ideal for troubleshooting 2
four display windows, eight module. One highlighted common trips such as
function buttons, 18 LEDs, feature is the “Copy” and ground fault, long delay, and 2
and a graphical time/current “Download” commands. instantaneous/short delay.
curve to provide breaker
status, operational Setting up multiple OPTIM
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
2
information, protection trips can be finished in breaker without additional
status and energy monitoring. minutes and with no errors. wiring by connecting directly 2
A 24 Vdc power supply is An Auxiliary Power Module onto the trip unit. The
required to provide power connection provides a trip test DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 2
to the BIM. This is supplied when control power is not 6 foot cable that allows users
present at the breaker. The
by the switchboard builder
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
to mount the display on the 2
to Eaton’s specifications. outside of an enclosure door
standard package to include and connect to the trip unit
The BIM is a member of
Eaton’s PowerNet family of the programmer, the eight- that is contained inside
2
communicating devices that pin connection cord, battery the enclosure.
connects OPTIM trip units, and carrying case. The 2
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip auxiliary power module Cause of Trip LED Module
units and energy sentinels is optional. The Cause of Trip LED 2
as a subnetwork system. Module can be field-installed
Auxiliary Power Module
The BIM can also be
The auxiliary power module
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip 2
connected to a main unit. The device provides a
network via a PONI module is a power supply requiring
to PowerNet software. 120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
2
that provides a 32 Vdc output. Module connects directly
The auxiliary power module onto the trip unit. When the 2
provides control power for breaker trips, the module
testing an OPTIM trip unit indicates the cause of trip 2
when other means of control (long delay, short delay,
power is not available or
for continuous OPTIMizer
instantaneous and ground) 2
via LED indication. The
operation versus temporary module is reset after the
with a battery. The auxiliary breaker is reset.
2
power module connects
into the top of the Digitrip Note: The OPTIMizer can work
off of 32 Vdc control power,
2
OPTIMizer via a keyed
although 24 Vdc is the standard
receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
on OPTIM breakers. 2
power module would be for
the testing of a standalone 2
non-communicating OPTIM
breaker that ordinarily would 2
not have control power.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Product Selection
2
Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit
2
End Cap Kit End Cap Kit
2 Thread Thread Catalog
Type Size Number
2 Two-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK12
2 Metric M–5 KPEKM12
Three-Pole F-Frame (225A)
2 Imperial 10–32 KPEK1

Four-Pole F-Frame (225A)
2 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14
Metric M–5 KPEKM14
2 Three-Pole J-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK2
Four-Pole J-Frame
2 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK24

Three-Pole K-Frame
Metric M–8 KPEKM3
2 Four-Pole K-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34
2 Three-Pole L-Frame
Imperial 0.312-18 KPEK4
2 Metric M-8 KPEKM4

Four-Pole L-Frame
Metric M–8 KPEKM44
2
2 Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut
2 F-Frame Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut

Catalog Number
2 Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Package of 12
(Priced Individually)
2 Imperial 10–32 KPR1A

Metric M–5 KPR1AM
2
2 K-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut
Thread Thread Line/Load Catalog Number
2 Type Size End Package of 3
Imperial 0.375–16 Line KPR3A
2 Load KPR3B
Metric M–8 Line KPR3AM
2 Load KPR3BM
2 Note
L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded.
2

Series C
2.4
Termination Hardware
2
J-Frame Plug Nut J-Frame Plug Nut
Thread Thread Catalog Number 2
Type Size Package of 6
Imperial 0.250–20 PLN2 2
Metric M–6 PLN2M
2
K-Frame Terminal K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1 2
Adapter Catalog
Line/Load End Number 2
Line and load TAD3
2
2
2
F-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
2
F-Frame Kit F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2
Maximum Catalog 2
Description Amperes Number
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. 150 FCWTK 2
225 FCWTK225
2
2
J- and K-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. 2
J- and K-Frame Kit J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2
Catalog
Description Number
2
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. KCWTK
2
2
2
L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
2
Range/Number Conductors Range mm2 Number
Al/Cu 95–150 TA602LDCW 3
2
3/0–350 kcmil (2)
Cu 120–250 T602LDCW 3 2
250–350 kcmil (2)
Al/Cu 185–240 2TA603LDKCW 45 2
400–500 kcmil (2)
Al/Cu 185–240 3TA603LDKCW 46 2
400–500 kcmil (2)
Al/Cu 185–240 4TA603LDKCW 47 2
400–500 kcmil (2)
Notes 2
1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers.
2 Not for use with T250KB terminals.
2
5 Two-pole kit. 2
6 Three-pole kit.
7 Four-pole kit. 2

Series C
Termination Hardware
2
G-Frame Control Wire Terminal
2 Catalog Catalog
Description Number Number
2 Control wire terminal (kit of 12) 5652B38G01 GCWTK
2
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
2 Multiwire Connectors
Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number 1
2 G-Frame 2
2 100 3 14–2 3TA100G3K

6 14–6 3TA100G6K
2 F-Frame
225 3 14–2 3TA150F3K
2 6 14–6 3TA150F6K
J-Frame
2 250 3 14–2 3TA250J3K
2 6 14–6 3TA250J6K
K-Frame
2 400 3 14–2/0 3TA400K3K
6 14–3 3TA400K6K
2
2 Rear Fed Terminals
Maximum Wire Size Catalog
2 Frame Amperes Range AWG Cu Number 1
FD 150 14–4/0 TA150FDRF
2 150 14–4/0 3TA150FDRF
2 225 6–300 kcmil TA225FDRF

225 6–300 kcmil 3TA225FDRF
2 KD 400 250–500 kcmil TA350KRF
400 250–500 kcmil 3TA350KRF
2 MDL 800 3/0 MAX (3) TA800MDLRF
800 3/0 MAX (3) 3TA800MDLRF
2
Ordering Information
2 Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of
mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required.
2
Mounting Hardware
2 Catalog
Screw Length in Inches (mm) Number
2 G-Frame
0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 624B375G23
2 0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm) 8703C80G05
2 Notes
1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit.
Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.

2 2 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars.
2
2

Series C
2.4
Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware
Number Type of Catalog
2
of Poles Description Mounting Number
F-Frame
2
1 0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 624B375G01
2
Group 1 624B375G02
2 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G01 2
3, 4 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1
J-Frame 2
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2
K-Frame
2
2
L-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4 2
M-Frame
2, 3 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5 2
N-Frame
2
R-Frame 2
Supplied by customer
2
Metric Thread Mounting Hardware 2
Number Type of Catalog
of Poles Description Mounting Number 2
F-Frame
1 M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 4218B80G09 2
Group 1 4218B80G10
2 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G11
2
3, 4 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M 2
J-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2M 2
K-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M 2
L-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH4M
2
M-Frame 2
N-Frame 2
R-Frame
2
Supplied by customer
2
Note
1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Terminal Shields
2
G-Frame Terminal Shield
2 Catalog
Number Units in Package Number
2 10 GTSK3
2
F-Frame Terminal Shield
2 F-Frame
Standard (Package of 10) Special—For Use When Electrical
(Priced Individually) Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker
2 Number Catalog Catalog
of Poles Location Number Number
2 1 Line 625B229G06 —
2 Line 625B229G07 —
2 3 Line 625B229G08 4210B95G01
2 4 Line 625B229G09 4210B95G02
2
J-Frame J-Frame Terminal Shield
2 Number Catalog Number
of Poles Location (Package of 10)
2 2, 3 Line End 1266C07G01
4 Line End 6631C01G01
2 2, 3 Load End 6641C16G01
2 4 Load End 6641C16G02
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
K-Frame K-Frame Terminal Shield Interphase Barriers
Number Catalog Number Ordering Information 2
of Poles Location (Package of 10) Two per package.
2, 3 Line TS33LN
2
Interphase Barrier Interphase Barriers
4 Line TS34LN
Catalog 2
3 Load TS33LD
Frame Number
F IPB1 2
J, K IPB3
L IPB4
2
L-Frame Terminal Shield
M IPB4 2
N IPB5
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
2
314C420G05 2
2
Base Mounting Plate
Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC

2
Base Mounting Plate
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
2
M-Frame Terminal Shield 1 207B513G01 2
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
2
208B966G01
DIN Rail Adapter
2
DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC
DIN Rail Adapter
Number Number of Units Catalog
2
of Poles in Package Number
1, 2 10 1225C79G01
2
3 10 1225C79G02 1
2
N-Frame Terminal Shield
Catalog Number All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC 2
(Package of 1) Number Number of Units Catalog
NTS3K
of Poles in Package Number
2
3 1 EGGDDIN
2
Key Operated Attachment
2
Terminal End Covers Key Operated Attachment
Ordering Information
Key Operated
Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC 2
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers Number of Units Catalog
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity in Package Number 2
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering. 10 GKOA
2
Note
F-Frame F-Frame Terminal End Covers
Conductor Opening Catalog
1 For use on three-pole breakers only.
2
Diameter in Inches (mm) Number
0.25 (6.35 mm) TEC1 2
0.41 (10.41 mm) TEC2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Lock

2
Lock Dog (Non- Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock
2 Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP Lock Catalog
Number of Units Catalog Frame Number
2 in Package Number
G GPHBOFF
1 1294C01H01 J, K PHB3
2
2
2 Handle Ties Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
2 Handle Tie—Series C, F-Frame

Snap-On Padlockable Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Number Number of Units Catalog Handle Lock Hasp Catalog
2 of Poles in Package Number Frame Number
2 10 HTBFD2P F PHL1
2 3 10 HTBFD3P
2 Handle Tie—Series C, G-Frame

Number Number of Units Catalog
2 of Poles in Package Number
2 10 HTBGD2P Notes
2 3 10 HTBGD3P
1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank.
2 Padlockable in the OFF position only.
2
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
2
Non-Padlockable Non-Padlockable Handle Block
2 Handle Block Catalog
Frame Number
2 F LKD1
J, K LKD3
2 L, M, N LKD4
2
2 Padlockable Handle
2 Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB
Padlockable Handle
2 Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number 1
2 10 1223C77G03
10 1223C77G05 2
2 10 1223C77G06 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
2
Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Lock Hasp Catalog 2
Description Number
F-Frame 2
Single-pole breakers PHL1
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK1
2
For left side mounting PLK1LOFF 2
For right side mounting PLK1ROFF
J, K-Frames 2
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK3
For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1
2
PLK3ROFF 1
For right side mounting
2
L-Frame (Side Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF HLK4 2
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1
L-Frame (Top Mounted) 2
Lock ON or OFF HLK4S
Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1
2
M-Frame
2
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 2
M-Frame (Vertical Mounting)
Lock ON/OFF HLK4S 2
Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF
N-Frame
2
Side mounted PLK5 2
Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S
Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1 2
R-Frame
Lock ON/OFF HLK6
2
Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1
2
Cylinder Lock 2
Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock 2
Catalog
Frame Number 2
F, J, K Order by description
2
2
Note
1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF
position only, order either catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Key Interlock Kit

2 Ordering Information
Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers.
2 Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or
through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match
2 the type of lock used.
2 Key Interlock Kit Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock)

Bolt Projection in Kit
2 Lock
Manufacturer
Lock
Type
Withdrawn Position
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
2 F-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK1
2 Kirk® F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1
Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1
2 J, K-Frames
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
2
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
2 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3

L-, M-, N-Frames
2 Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK4
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4
2 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK4
2 R-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
2 Kirk F 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
Castell 1 K or QK 1.0 (25.4) CTK6
2 JG-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG
2 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG
2 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKJG

LG-Frame
2 Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG
2 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG
2 Note
1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be
10 mm in diameter
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Sliding Bar Interlock
The sliding bar interlock is spacing as indicated in table
available for mounting and enclosure front panel 2
between two adjacent three- thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch
pole circuit breakers with (3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field 2
circuit breakers centerline installation only.)
2
Sliding Bar Interlock Sliding Bar Interlock
Frame
Centerline Spacing
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
2
F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1 2
J 4.38 (111.3) SBK2
K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3 2
L, M 8.50 (215.9) SBK4
N 8.50 (215.9) SBK5
2
2
Walking Beam Interlock
The walking beam interlock is With properly modified circuit
available for mounting
between two adjacent circuit
breakers, the walking beam
interlock is suitable for field
2
breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 installation. Order circuit
mm) apart and having the breakers specifying 2
same pole configuration. The modification for walking beam
two circuit breakers must be (20% price adder) and select 2
factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock from
walking beam interlock table below. Circuit breakers 2
assembly (suitable for use and walking beam interlock
with either two-, three- or
four-pole circuit breakers).
are boxed and shipped
separately.
2
Walking Beam Interlock
2
Walking Beam
Interlock
Frame
Catalog
Number
2
F WBL1
2
K WBL3
L, M WBL4A 2
N WBL5
R1 WBL6 2
Note
1 Three-pole only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Electrical Operator
2
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
2 Terminal Block 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalog Catalog
2 Voltage Frequency Number Number
120 AC EOP1T07 EOP1P07
2 240 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11
2
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1
2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalog
2 Voltage Frequency Number
120 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD120C
2 24 DC MOPFD24D
125 DC MOPFD120C
2
208–240 50/60 Hz MOPFD240C
2 220–250 DC MOPFD240C
2 J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator

2 Operating
Terminal Block
Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number
2 120 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T07
2 240 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T11
2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
2 Terminal Block
Operating Catalog
120 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT07
2 240 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT11
2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit
2 Catalog
Frame Number
2 K BBMK3
2
2
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM)
2 Terminal Block
Operating Catalog
120 50/60 Hz EOP4MT07
2 208 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11
240 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11A
2 480 50/60 Hz EOP4MT15
2 125 DC EOP4MT26
24 DC EOP4MT21
2 Note
1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD
2 motor operators listed in table.

Series C
2.4
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
Pigtail Leads
2
Operating Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number 2
120 50/60 Hz EOP5T07
208 50/60 Hz EOP5T09
2
240 50/60 Hz EOP5T11
2
480 50/60 Hz EOP5T15
24 DC EOP5T21 2
48 DC EOP5T22
125 DC EOP5T26 2
2
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
Factory-Installed Terminal Block
2
Operating Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number 2
120 50/60 Hz EOP6T08K
240 50/60 Hz EOP6T11K
2
48 DC EOP6T21K 2
Plug-In Adapters 2
F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) 2
Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Current Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
(Amperes) Number Number Number
100–225 1480D13G01 1480D13G02 1480D13G07 1 2
Mounting plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 —
2
J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) 2
Continuous
Current Rating Terminal Catalog Catalog Catalog
2
(Amperes) End Number Number Number
250 Line 1260C86G05 1260C86G06 1231C67G01
2
Load 1260C86G07 1260C86G08 1231C67G02
2
One line and one load 506C144G27 506C144G28 —
Mounting plate — 2 PMP23 — 2
2
K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Continuous Current Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating (Amperes) Number Number Number 2
400 PAD32 PAD33 —
Mounting plate 2 PMP33 — 2
Notes
1 100 ampere maximum.
2
2 Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2

Series C
L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type)

2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Continuous Current Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating (Amperes) Number Number Number
600 (threaded stud type) 506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD44
2 600 (flat bar type) 1288C19G01 1288C19G02 6636C55H01
2 Mounting plate 504C824H01 504C824H01 —
2
M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
2 Two-Pole Three-Pole
Continuous Current Catalog Catalog
2 Rating (Amperes) Number Number
800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06
2 Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
2
2 N-Frame (Flat Bar Type)
Two-Pole Three-Pole
2 Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04

Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
2
2 Plug-In Adapters
2 Frame
Number of
Poles
Standard
Certification
Catalog
Number
2 FD 3 IEC PAD3F
FD 4 IEC PAD4F
2 JD 3 IEC PAD3JD
KD 3 IEC PAD3K
2 LD 3 IEC PAD3LD
LD 4 IEC PAD4LD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Rear Connecting Studs
2
F-Frame 1 L-Frame Ordering Information
Stud Stud Tube Stud Catalog 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Number
Rating Number Number
314C960G07 2
For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers
314C960G08
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H20
314C960G09
2
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H21
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H22
2
M-Frame Ordering Information
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H23 1
2
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H24 Stud Stud
Ampere Catalog
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H25 Rating Number 2
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H26
225 314C960G01
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H27
400 314C960G04
2
For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H06
400 314C960G05 2
400 314C960G06
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H07
600 314C960G07 2
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H08
600 314C960G08
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H09
600 314C960G09
2
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H10
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H11
800 314C960G10
2
800 314C960G11
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H12
800 314C960G12 2
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H13
2
N-Frame Ordering Information 1
J-Frame 1 Stud Stud 2
Stud Stud Tube Ampere Catalog
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Rating Number
2
800 623B222G01
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H05
800 623B222G02 2
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H06
800 623B222G03
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H07
1200 373B375G04 2
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H05
1200 373B375G03
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H06 2
Note
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H07 1 Not UL listed.
2
K-Frame 1 2
Stud
Ampere
Stud
Catalog
Standard Tube
Catalog 2
Rating Number Number
400 A short 6642C14G02 313C909H17 2
400 A short 6642C14G04 313C909H18
400 A short 6642C14G06 313C909H19
2
400 A long 6642C14G03 313C909H20 2
400 A long 6642C14G05 313C909H21
400 A long 6642C14G07 313C909H22 2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Panelboard Connecting Straps

2
F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
2 Pole Connector Type
Bus Continuous
Spacing Current Center Outside
2 in Inches Rating Catalog Catalog
(mm) (Amperes) Number Number
2 2.75 (69.9) 50 673B142G02 673B142G09
2.75 (69.9) 100 673B142G02 673B142G10
2 2.75 (69.9) 150 673B142G04 673B142G03
2 3.50 (88.9) 50 1253C72G01 1253C72G03

3.50 (88.9) 100 1253C73G03 1253C73G06
2 3.50 (88.9) 150 1253C73G01 1253C73G05
2
F-Frame Mounting Bracket
2 Catalog
Number of Poles Number
2 2 624B600H02
3 624B600H01
2
2 J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Pole Connector Type
2 Bus Continuous
Center Outside
Spacing Current
in Inches Rating Catalog Catalog
2 (mm) (Amperes) Number Number
3.50 (88.9) 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02
2
2 K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
2 Bus Continuous
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
Spacing Current
2 in Inches
(mm)
Rating
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 3.50 (88.9) 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01
2 K-Frame Mounting Bracket

2 Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2 2, 3 208B264H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Pole Connector Type
2
Continuous
Center Outside
Current
Rating Catalog Catalog
2
(Amperes) Number Number
600 624B609G01 506C052G01
2
2
L-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog
2
Number of Poles Number
2, 3 208B297H01
2
2
M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus Continuous
2
Pole Connector Type
Spacing Current
in Inches Rating Connector Catalog 2
(mm) (Amperes) Type Number
3.50 (88.9) 800 Short 314C996G01 2
Medium 314C996G02
Long 314C996G03
2
2
M-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog
2
Number
315C270H01
2
2
N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
2
Bus Continuous Pole Connector Type
Spacing Current
in Inches Rating Connector Catalog 2
(mm) (Amperes) Type Number
3.50 (88.9) 1200 Short 505C606G04 2
Medium 505C606G05
Long 505C606G06
2
2
N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required)
2
Catalog
Number
2
315C270H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
Type LFD Current Limiter Potential Transformer Module

2 The LFD current limiter is an interrupting capacity at up to The potential transformer line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
accessory that bolts to the 600 Vac. LFD current limiters module is required for the fuses are provided on the
2 load end of a standard FDB or for thermal-magnetic circuit Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to primary of the transformer
FD thermal-magnetic and breakers are listed with provide a voltage input to and can be used for isolation
2 electronic circuit breaker, Underwriters Laboratories allow the trip unit to monitor purposes during dielectric
providing 200,000 A under File E47239. power and energy as well as testing. The device is
power factor. The potential normally panel mounted
2 transformer module is a 6 VA and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
Type LFD Current Type LFD Current Limiter
transformer with a primary trip units.
2 Limiter Circuit Breaker
Rating Amperes
Catalog
Number
voltage input of up to 600 volt
2 15–70 LFD3070R
Potential Transformer Potential Transformer Module
80–160 LFD3150R Module Catalog
Potential transformer module DOPTMLN
2 Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The ground fault alarm unit is light and the internal relay,
2 a remotely mounted device which has 1NO and 1NC
with a combination indicating contacts for remote
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit
2 light/test button that will light indication. The ground fault
when the breaker trips or alarm unit can be panel The solid-state (electronic) 50/60 Hz power; it includes
portable test kit provides complete instructions and
2 alarms on ground fault. The mounted for ordering with an
verification of performance of test times for testing long
ground fault alarm unit optional face mounting
requires a separate 120 Vac bracket. For use on Digitrip all ratings of Digitrip 310 time, short time/
2 power source to power the 310 only, K- through N-Frame. electronic trip units installed instantaneous operation
in circuit breakers while in and optional ground fault
2 GF Alarm Unit
service under varying load operation of the circuit
Ground Fault Alarm and/or phase imbalance. The breaker.
Unit
2 Description
Catalog
Number
test kit operates on 120-volt,
2 Ground fault alarm unit GFAU Portable Test Kit

Face mounting bracket 1264C67G01 Catalog
Solid-state (electronic) STK2
2 IQ Energy Sentinel
portable test kit
The IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel

2 is a highly accurate, mounts on the load side of a
microprocessor-based, Series C F-Frame (150
2 breaker-mounted device ampere) circuit breaker. It can
designed to monitor power be applied on three-phase,
2 and energy readings. It
represents an alternative to
four-wire systems, or single-
phase, three-wire systems
watt meters, watt-hour with voltage connected
2 meters, and watt demand through Phases A and C.
meters. Key advantages
2 include savings in space, For more information, see
lower installation costs, and Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
2 remote monitoring capability.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Auxiliary Power Module
The Breaker Interface Module Vdc power supply is required The auxiliary power module is power module connects into 2
(BIM) is a panel mounted to provide power to the BIM. a power supply requiring 120 the top of the Digitrip
user interface device that is This is supplied by the Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that OPTIMizer via a keyed 2
mounted on the front of an switchboard builder to provides a 32 Vdc output. The receptacle. The main
electrical assembly or at a Eaton’s specifications. The auxiliary power module application for the auxiliary 2
remote location. The BIM is BIM is a member of Eaton’s provides control power for power module would be for
used to access, configure, PowerNet family of testing an OPTIM trip unit the testing of a standalone
test and display information communicating devices that when other means of control non-communicating OPTIM
2
for OPTIM trip units and other connects OPTIM trip units, power is not available or for breaker that ordinarily would
devices. The BIM consists of Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip continuous OPTIMizer not have control power. 2
four display windows, eight units and energy sentinels as operation versus temporary
function buttons, 18 LEDs, a subnetwork system. The with a battery. The auxiliary 2
and a graphical time/current BIM can also be connected to
curve to provide breaker
status, operational
a main network via a PONI
module to PowerNet Auxiliary Power Auxiliary Power Module 2
Module Catalog
information, protection status software.
and energy monitoring. A 24
Number 2
PRTBAPMDV
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 2
Breaker Interface
Module (BIM) Catalog
Number Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display 2
The Cause of Trip Display can The DIGIVIEW version will
BIMII
be field-installed on any provide a local display at the 2
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. breaker without additional
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
2
screen, such as cause of trip, DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
Digitrip OPTIMizer phrase current, ground 6 foot cable that allows users 2
current and low loads. The to mount the display on the
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a
hand-held programmer that is
the programmer, the eight-
pin connection cord, battery
display is ideal for outside of an enclosure door 2
troubleshooting common and connect to the trip unit
used to access, configure, and carrying case. The
test and display information auxiliary power module is
trips such as ground fault, that is contained inside the 2
long delay, and enclosure.
from OPTIM trip units. The optional.
OPTIMizer plugs into the
Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply
instantaneous/short delay. 2
front of an OPTIM trip unit via A 24 Vdc power supply is
an eight-pin telephone jack Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount 2
required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip Cause of Trip Display
and is powered by a nine-volt units that are required to
battery or the auxiliary power
module. One highlighted
communicate either on the main
Eaton PowerNet network or as a
Catalog
Number
2
feature is the “Copy” and subnetwork to a BIM. The
“Download” commands. breaker’s load is 45 mA of current.
DIGIVIEW
2
Typically one power supply is DIGIVIEWR06
Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in
required per switchboard and can
provide control power to a BIM
2
minutes and with no errors. and the OPTIM trip units. The 24 Cause of Trip LED Module
An Auxiliary Power Module Vdc power supply should be an
The Cause of Trip LED breaker trips, the module 2
“isolated high quality” power
connection provides a trip test Module can be field-installed indicates the cause of trip
when control power is not
supply with a “CE” label, and is
normally provided by the on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip (long delay, short delay, 2
present at the breaker. The switchboard manufacturer to unit. The device provides a instantaneous and ground) via
OPTIMizer is supplied as a Eaton’s recommendations. cause of trip indication via LED indication. The module is 2
standard package to include LED. The Cause of Trip LED reset after the breaker is
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
reset. 2
Digitrip OPTIMizer Digitrip OPTIMizer
Catalog
Number Cause of Trip LED Module
2
OPTIMizer—standard package Catalog
Number
2
TRIP-LED
2
2
2
2

Series C
Accessories
2
2 Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to
2 NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1 prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed.
Handle Length Catalog
in Inches (mm) Number 2
2 Wire Seal
4 (101.6) C361KJ4 Catalog
2 6 (152.4) C361KJ6
Description Number
Roller Latch 3 C361KR Wire seal 5108A03H01

2 Notes
Series C Rotary Accessories 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
2 As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker.
with these kits.
2 This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and 3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is
comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. required.

2
Series C Auxiliary Switch
2 Catalog
Number
2 5108A61G01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
Electrical Operator
2
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12 L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
Inrush Current Maximum Fuse
168j
2
Voltage 3 Frequency Amperes Operating Time Amperes 4 Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes
120 50/60 Hz AC 10 5 cycles (80 ms) 3 120 AC 31 2
240 50/60 Hz AC 5 5 cycles (80 ms) 2 208 AC 13
240 AC 12
2
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567
125 DC 21
2
24 DC 50
Inrush Current
Voltage 3 Frequency Amperes 2
120 AC 2
24 DC 5
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl 2
Operating Inrush Current Fuse
48 DC 3 Voltage 3 Frequency Amperes Amperes 2
125 DC 2 120 50/60 Hz 31 6
208 50/60 Hz 21 — 2
240 50/60 Hz 19 4
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689
480 50/60 Hz — —
2
Inrush Current Fuse
Voltage 3 Amperes Amperes 24 DC 50 —
2
120 30 6 48 DC 80 —
240 16 4 125 DC 21 — 2
2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop
Operating Inrush Current Fuse Operating Motor Inrush Current 2
Voltage 3 Amperes Amperes Voltage q Frequency Amperes
120 30 6 120 50/60 Hz 40 2

240 16 4 240 50/60 Hz 27
48 DC 53
2
24 DC 58
2
Notes
1 UL listed under UL File E64983.
2 The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations.
2
3 Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required.
2
5 UL listed under UL File E64124.
6 Frequency: 50/60 Hz. 2
7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations.
2
9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS).
j Maximum operating time: 12 cycles. 2
k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations.
l Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
2
m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not
exceed one per minute. 2

n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn
breaker OFF–1/2 second max.

o Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply.
2
p A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation.
q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage. 2
For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required.
2
2
2

Series C
Dimensions
2 Rear Connecting Studs
2 F-Frame 1
Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube Dimensions
2 Ampere Catalog Catalog
Rating Number A B C Number D E F
2 For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers

100 A short 451D874G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 32B9446H20 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
2 100 A short 451D874G01 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 32B9446H21 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short 451D874G01 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 32B9446H22 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
2 100 A short 451D874G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 32B9446H23 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
2 100 A long 451D874G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 32B9446H24 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 32B9446H25 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
2 100 A long 451D874G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 32B9446H26 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 32B9446H27 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
2 For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
225A short 374D883G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 374D883H06 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 225A short 374D883G01 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 374D883H07 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 225A short 374D883G01 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 374D883H08 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short 374D883G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 374D883H09 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 225A long 374D883G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 374D883H10 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long 374D883G02 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 374D883H11 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 225A long 374D883G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 374D883H12 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 225A long 374D883G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 374D883H13 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
2 F-Frame
2 B
E
Mounting Panel
2
2 “F” Thread
Breaker Mounting
Surface
2
2 .06
(1.5) A C
.75 D
2 (19.1)
Note
2 1 Not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Series C
2.4
2
J-Frame
Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube
2
Rating Number A B C Number 2
250A short 5010D23G01 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.4) — 456D983H05
250A short 5010D23G01 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) 1.09 (27.7) — 456D983H06 2
250A short 5010D23G01 0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7) 1.03 (26.2) — 456D983H07
250A long 5010D23G02 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) — 3.88 (98.6) 5010D23H05
2
250A long 5010D23G02 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) — 4.13 (104.9) 5010D23H06 2
250A long 5010D23G02 0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7) — 4.38 (111.3) 5010D23H07
2
1.59 6.66 2
(40.4) (169.2)
0.59
(15.0)
A C 2
0.03
0.06
(1.5)
(0.7)
2
0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread
2
Do Not Use More
Than 10 Ft Lbs 2
Torque to Tighten Nuts
0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread
Breaker
2
Mounting Panel
B 2
3.63
(92.2)
2
2
K-Frame 1
Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Standard Tube Dimensions 2
Rating Number A B C Number D E F 2
400 A short 6642C14G02 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.3) — 313C909H17 — 3.66 (93.0) 0.75–16 (19.1–406.4)
400 A short 6642C14G04 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) 1.09 (27.69) — 313C909H18 — — — 2
400 A short 6642C14G06 0.25–0.5 (6.35–12.7) 1.03 (26.16) — 313C909H19 — — —
400 A long 6642C14G03 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) — 3.78 (96.0) 313C909H20 — — —
2
400 A long 6642C14G05 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) — 4.03 (102.4) 313C909H21 6.58 (167.1) — —
2
400 A long 6642C14G07 0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7) — 4.28 (108.7) 313C909H22 — — —
2
E 2
B
Mounting Panel
2
“F” Thread 2
Breaker Mounting
Surface 2
2
0.06 A C
(1.5)
1.67
2
D
(42.4)
2
Note
1 Not UL listed. 2

Series C

2
L-Frame
2 Stud Catalog
Stud Length (A) Number
2 5.47 (138.9) 314C960G07
2 7.97 (202.4) 314C960G08

10.47 (265.9) 314C960G09
2
2 .44
(11.2) A
Insulators
2
Washer
2 Nut
2
2 Circuit Breaker Rear
Connecting
Stud
2 Insulating Panel
2
M-Frame
2 Stud Diameter Extension Stud
Ampere and Back of Catalog
2 Rating Thread Breaker Number
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01
2 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05
2 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G06
2 600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07

600 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08
2 600 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G09
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G10
2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G12
2
2 N-Frame
2 Stud
Ampere
Diameter
and
Extension
Back of
Stud
Catalog
Rating Thread Breaker Number
2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.5 (139.7) 623B222G01
2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.0 (203.2) 623B222G02

800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.5 (266.7) 623B222G03
2 1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.5 (139.7) 373B375G04
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 10.5 (266.7) 373B375G03
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Contents
Description Page
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-439 2
Accessories Selection Guide and
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-441 2
Options and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-441
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-442
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-443 2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-457 2
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-470
Learn Drawings
2
Online Online
2
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers 2
Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications 2
Eaton’s engine generator Engine generator circuit Engine generator molded
molded case circuit breakers breakers are suitable for case circuit breakers are 2
are designed specifically for reverse feed application. designed to conform with the
application on diesel engine following standards:
powered standby generators
2
where high interrupting
● Underwriters Laboratories
circuit breakers are not Standard UL 489, Molded 2
required. The JG through NG Case Circuit Breakers and
breakers are equipped with a Circuit Breaker Enclosures
File E7819
2
special trip unit, that includes
standard thermal (overload) ● Canadian Standards 2
protection and special low Association Standard
magnetic pickup range (FG C22.2 No. 5, Service
includes a fixed thermal- Entrance and Branch Circuit 2
magnetic pickup). The Breakers
standard thermal trip unit ● International 2
provides overload protection Electrotechnical
for conductors per the Commission 2
National Electrical Code®. The Recommendations IEC
low magnetic pickup range is
approximately two to five
947-2, Circuit Breakers 2
times the continuous rating
and provides closer low-level 2
short-circuit protection when
applied on generators that 2
have very low short-circuit Conformance with these
capacity. This combination standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
2
allows the user to customize
the breaker to the generator assuming user acceptability
output. and simplified application. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers

2 This information is presented ● JG, KG, LG and NG ● Contact Eaton for
only as an aid to breakers with W catalog additional ratings and
2 understanding catalog number suffix do not internal/external accessories
numbers. It is not to be used include any terminals ● Reverse feed
2 to build catalog numbers for ● JG, KG, LG and NG
circuit breakers. breakers without W catalog
2 ● FG breakers include both number suffix include both
line and load side terminals line and load terminals
2
Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG
2
FG 3 100 W
2
2 Frame
FG Number of Poles Trip Amperes
Suffix
3 = Three-pole 015
2 020
025
2 030
035
040
2 045
050
060
2 070
080
2 090
100
125
2 150
175
200
2 225
JG
175
2 200
225
2 KG
250
300
2 350
400
LG
2 450
500
2 NG
600
700
2 800
900
1000
2 1200
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Product Selection
The following table lists FG generator full load current 2
through NG engine generator rating (FLA). The maximum
breakers with the maximum kW rating is based on three- 2
generator kVA and kW rating. phase generators at 80%
Engine generator breakers power factor. 2
are applied at 115% of the
2
Thermal-Magnetic 2
Engine Generator
Breaker 3
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
2
Magnetic Catalog
Pickup Range kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Number
2
Fixed 5 4 11 9 14 11 FG3015 4
Fixed 7 6 14 12 18 14 FG3020 4 2
Fixed 9 7 18 14 23 18 FG3025 4
Fixed 11 9 22 17 27 22 FG3030 4 2
Fixed 13 10 25 20 32 25 FG3035 4
Fixed 14 12 29 23 36 29 FG3040 4
2
Fixed 16 13 32 26 41 32 FG3045 4 2
Fixed 18 14 36 29 45 36 FG3050 4
Fixed 22 17 43 35 54 43 FG3060 4 2
Fixed 25 20 51 40 63 51 FG3070 4
Fixed 29 23 58 46 72 58 FG3080 4
2
Fixed 32 26 65 52 81 65 FG3090 4
Fixed 36 29 72 58 90 72 FG3100 4
2
Fixed 40 32 79 64 99 79 FG3110 4 2
Fixed 45 36 90 72 113 90 FG3125 4
Fixed 54 43 108 87 135 108 FG3150 4 2
Fixed 63 51 126 101 158 126 FG3175 4
Fixed 72 58 144 116 181 144 FG3200 4
2
Fixed 81 65 162 130 203 162 FG3225 4
2
350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175W 5
350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175 4 2
350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200W 5
350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200 4 2
350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225W 5
350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225 4
2
350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250W 5 2
350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250 4
500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300W 5 2
500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300 4
500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350W 5 2
500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350 4
1000–2000 144 116 289 231 361 289 KG3400 4
2
Notes 2
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
2
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.
5 Without terminals. 2
The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Electronic
2 Engine Generator
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Breaker 3
2 Magnetic 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Catalog
Pickup Range kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Number
2 500–2500 162 130 325 260 406 325 LG3450 4
500–2500 181 144 361 289 451 361 LG3500 4
2
500–2500 217 173 433 347 542 433 LG3600 4
2 500–2500 253 202 505 404 632 505 NG3700 4

500–2500 289 231 578 462 722 578 NG3800 4
2 1250–5000 325 260 650 520 812 650 NG3900 4
1250–5000 361 289 722 578 903 722 NG31000 4
2 1250–5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867 NG31200 4
2 Notes
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.

3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.
2 The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Options and Accessories
2
Enclosures Standard Terminals
Type 1 General Purpose as a main disconnect and
Breaker Max. Amp AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
2
protective device for feeder Frame Rating Range Range mm2 Number
● Surface or flush mounting
● 15–1200 ampere range
circuits. Ratings through
FG 100 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 1
2
1200 amperes are listed by
● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc Underwriters Laboratories as FG 150 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 1
2
suitable for service entrance JG 250 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB
Type 1 enclosed breakers application.
are designed for use in KG 350 250–500 kcmil 120–240 TA350K 2
commercial buildings, Type 12 Dustproof Surface KG 400 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 3TA400K 1
apartment buildings and
other areas where a general
Mounting
LG 600 250–500 kcmil (2) 120–240 3TA603LDK 2
purpose enclosure is
● No knockouts or other NG 700 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–300 TA700NB1
applicable. The breaker is openings
NG 1000 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1
2
front operable and is capable ● 15–1200 ampere range
of being padlocked in either ● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc NG 1200 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–300 TA1200NB1 2
the ON or OFF position.
The Type 12 enclosure is
Ratings through 1200
designed in line with Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable 2
amperes are listed with
specifications for special Max. Enclosure Main Lug Number Ground Lug Catalog
Underwriters Laboratories as
approved for service entrance industry applications where Rating (Amperes) Size Cu/Al Size Cu/Al Number 2
application. Both surface and unusually severe conditions 100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0 INK100
flush mounted enclosures are involving oil, coolant, dust and
250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250
2
available. other foreign materials exist
Type 3R Rainproof Surface

in the operating atmosphere.
The handle padlocks in the
400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or
(2) 1/0–250 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil INK400
2
Mounting OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle
600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600
2
● Interchangeable hubs 1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) 6–250 kcmil INK1200
mechanism to prevent (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
(through 400 amperes) opening the cover with the 2
● 15–1200 ampere range circuit breaker in the ON
● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc position. Ratings through Internal Accessories 2
1200 amperes are listed by
This general purpose outdoor
service center employs a
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
Auxiliary Switch 2 2
circuit breaker inside a application. 1A-1B 2A-2B
weatherproof sheet steel Breaker Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit 2
breaker enclosure to serve Frame Mounted Catalog Number Mounted Catalog Number
FG 3 A06 A1X1PK A13 A2X1RPK 2
Enclosure Selection Data JG A06 A1X2PK A13 A2X2PK
Breaker KG A06 A1X3PK A13 A2X3PK
2
Frame Enclosure Catalog
Amperes Type Class Number
LG A06 A1X4PK A13 A2X4PK
2
NG A06 A1X5PK A13 A2X5PK
FG Type 1 SFDN225
15–225
Type 3R RFDN225 2
Type 12 JFDN225 Shunt Trip 2
JG Type 1 SJDN250 Breaker Factory Field Kit 2
175–250 Frame Rating Mounted Catalog Number
Type 3R RJDN250
FG 3 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K 2
Type 12 JJDN250
JG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT2P04K
KG Type 1 SKDN400
KG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT3P04K
2
300–400
Type 3R RKDN400
Type 12 JKDN400
LG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT4LP03K 2
NG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT5LP03K
LG
450–600
Type 1 SLDN600
Notes
2
Type 3R RLDN600
1 Package of three terminals.
Type 12 JLDN600 2 Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers. 2
3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed.
NG Type 1 SNDN1200
700–1200
Type 3R RNDN1200 2
Type 12 JNDN1200
2
2

Specialty Breakers

2
2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC Interrupting Capacity
2 (50/60 Hz) (Symmetrical Amperes)
240 18,000
2 480 14,000
600 10,000
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2 Volts AC Interrupting Capacity
(50/60 Hz) (Symmetrical Amperes)
2 220, 240 18,000/ 9,000
2 380, 415 14,000/ 7,000

660, 690 18,000/ 9,000
14,000/ 7,000
2 10,000/5,000
2
2 Enclosure Selection Data

Breaker
2 Frame Enclosure Approx. Weight Conduit Sizes, Catalog
Amperes Type Class A B C D E Lbs (kg) Inches Number
2 FG Type 1 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.6) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.3) 1.20 (30.5) 15 (7) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225
15–225
Type 3R 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 19 (9) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225
2 Type 12 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 18 (8) — JFDN225
JG Type 1 34.70 (881.4) 10.92 (277.4) 7.20 (182.9) 30.00 (762.0) 1.88 (47.8) 31 (14) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 SJDN250
2 175–250
Type 3R 37.50 (952.5) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 40 (18) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 RJDN250
2 Type 12 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 37 (17) — JJDN250
KG Type 1 38.81 (985.8) 11.06 (280.9) 10.94 (277.9) 34.00 (863.6) 2.28 (57.9) 53 (24) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400
2 300–400
Type 3R 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 60 (27) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50 RKDN400
Type 12 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 53 (24) — JKDN400
2 LG Type 1 45.88 (1165.4) 14.31 (363.5) 12.38 (314.5) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.91 (48.5) 81 (37) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 SLDN600
450–600
2 Type 3R 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 84 (38) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 RLDN600
Type 12 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 81 (37) — JLDN600
2 NG
700–1200
Type 1 61.22 (1555.0) 21.44 (544.6) 15.41 (391.4) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 178 (81) — SNDN1200
Type 3R 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 175 (79) — RNDN1200
2 Type 12 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 170 (77) — JNDN1200
2 Type 1 Surface Mounted Type 3R Rainproof Type 12, 12K Dustproof

2 E E
C
E C
B C
2
2 ON
D ON
D A
2 A OFF OFF
D A
2
2 B
B

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Direct Current Circuit Breakers Contents
Description Page
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437 2
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-445 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-453 2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-456 2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-457 2
2
2
2
2
Direct Current Circuit Breakers 2
Product Description 2
DC (direct current) Current ratings are available All DC breakers use the
systems and applications from 15 to 3000 A, with same internal and external 2
are becoming commonplace a full scale of voltage and accessories as their
as alternative energy sources interrupting ratings to address corresponding Series C
have expanded and the needs ranging from standard and Series G AC frame
2
number of DC devices to the highest performance. equivalents, except for the
and data centers using DC Optional internal accessories NBDC breaker, which uses 2
power has swelled. provide remote tripping and the same internal and
Eaton offers molded case
indication of breaker status. external accessories as 2
the standard NB frame.
circuit breakers and switches The DC breaker family is
to meet circuit protection and UL 489 listed and exceeds The HFDDC through 2
switching requirements for a the requirements in UL 489 HMDLDC and EG to RG
host of different DC end user Supplement SC for UPS DC breakers use the same 2
requirements. Applications applications. Eaton breakers internal and external
include UPS battery supply may be applied in both accessories as their 2
circuits, solar systems and ungrounded and select corresponding Series C
electric vehicle charging, as grounded applications, with and Series G AC Frame
well as commercial and poles connected in series equivalents. NBDC uses the
2
industrial distribution. to operate at the maximum same internal and external
voltages shown on Page accessories as standard 2
V4-T2-444. To use DC circuit NB breakers.
breakers on 600 V grounded
Many of the Eaton AC
2
systems, three poles in series
molded case circuit breakers
must be connected on the
ungrounded leg. carry 250 Vdc ratings for 2
ungrounded systems. Refer
to Pages V4-T2-113 and 2
V4-T2-222 for these
interrupting tables. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers

2
2 Interrupting Capacity (kA)
Volts DC 1
2 Circuit Breaker Maximum Poles in Poles in Poles in Poles in
Type Amperes 125 Series 250 2 Series 500 600 Series 750 2 Series
2 EGEDC 100 10 1 35 2 35 — 3 — —
EGSDC 100 35 1 42 2 50 — 3 — —
2 EGHDC 100 42 1 50 2 65 — 3 — —
2 HFDDC 225 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 42 4
JGEDC 250 35 1 35 2 — 35 3 — —
2 JGSDC 250 42 1 42 2 — 50 3 — —
JGHDC 250 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
2 HJDDC 250 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — —
HKDDC 400 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — —
2 LGEDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 35 3 — —
2 LGSDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 50 3 — —
LGHDC 600 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
2 HLDDC 600 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — —
HLDDC 3 1200 42 1 50 2 — — — — —
2 HMDLDC 800 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — —
NBDC 1200 42 1 50 2 — 50 3 — —
2 RGHDC 3000 42 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
2
IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2 Circuit Breaker Maximum 125 Volts DC Poles in 250 Volts DC Poles in 600 Volts DC Poles in
Type Amperes Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series
2 EGEDC 100 10 10 1 10 10 2 — — —
EGSDC 100 35 35 1 35 35 2 — — —
2 EGHDC 100 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
JGEDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
2
JGSDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
2 JGHDC 250 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
HJDDC 250 — — — — — — 20 10 3
2 LGEDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGSDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
2 LGHDC 600 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
2 HLDDC 600 — — — — — — 20 10 3
HMDLDC 800 — — — — — — 20 10 3
2 Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489.
2 2 EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications.
HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings.
3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel.
2 See Page V4-T2-455 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
2
DC Circuit Breaker 2
HFDDC 3 150 W 2
Frame Suffix 2
EGEDC=Series G—E (100 A max.) Number of Poles Trip Unit Ampere Rating Series C, NB Frames
EGSDC=Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGHDC=Series G—E (100 A max.)
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
015 = 15 A
020 = 20 A
K = Molded case switch
L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame
2
HFDDC=Series C—F (225 A max.) 3 = Three-pole 025 = 25 A MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals
JGEDC=Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGSDC=Series G—J (250 A max.)
4 = Four-pole 030 = 30 A W = Without terminals
Series G Frames
2
035 = 35 A
JGHDC=Series G—J (250 A max.) 040 = 40 A FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals
HJDDC=Series C—J (250 A max.) 045 = 45 A FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals 2
HKDDC=Series C—K (400 A max.) 050 = 50 A FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals
LGEDC=Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGSDC=Series G—L (600 A max.)
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals 2
LGHDC=Series G—L (600 A max.) 080 = 80 A KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals
HLDDC=Series C—L (1200 A max.)
HMDLDC=Series C—M (800 A max.)
090 = 90 A
100 = 100 A
2
NBDC=NB (1200 A max.) 110 = 110 A
RGHDC=Series G—R (3000 A max.) 125 = 125 A 2
150 = 150 A
175 = 175 A
200 = 200 A 2
225 = 225 A
250 = 250 A
300 = 300 A
2
350 = 350 A
400 = 400 A 2
450 = 450 A
500 = 500 A
600 = 600 A 2
700 = 700 A
800 = 800 A
900 = 900 A
2
1000=1000 A
1200=1200 A 2
1600=1600 A
2000=2000 A
2500=2500 A 2
3000=3000 A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
2
Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
2 Continuous with Terminals without Terminals Continuous with Terminals without Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number at 40 °C Number Number
25 EGEDC3025FFG EGEDC3025FFW 25 EGHDC3025FFG EGHDC3025FFW
2 30 EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW 30 EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW

2 Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc
2 Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
Continuous with Terminals without Terminals
2 Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number
2 25 EGSDC3025FFG EGSDC3025FFW
30 EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
HFDDC Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1
Maximum
Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number 2
15 HFDDC1015L HFDDC2015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L
20 HFDDC1020L HFDDC2020L HFDDC3020L HFDDC4020L 2
2
2
2
2
175 — HFDDC2175L HFDDC3175L —
2
200 — HFDDC2200L HFDDC3200L —
225 — HFDDC2225L HFDDC3225L — 2
2
Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 2 Trip Unit Terminals 2
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2
70 JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 2
2
2
Notes
1 For breaker without terminals, replace “L” with “W” at end of catalog number. 2
2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—

2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2 Continuous Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
70 JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
2 90 JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ

2
JGHDC3250NN Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
2 90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ


2
HJDDC3250 Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Maximum Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
2 Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
70 HJDDC3250F JT3070T TA250KB
2 90 HJDDC3250F JT3090T TA250KB
2

2 Note
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
HKDDC3400 Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
2
100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K
125 HKDDC3400F KT3125T TA300K 2
2
2
250 HKDDC3400F KT3250T TA350K 2
350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K 2
400 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K 2
2
LGEDC3630NN Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— 2

2
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
250 LGEDC3250FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK 2
300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
2
2
500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2 2
2
Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Breaker
Catalog
Frame Only 1
Catalog
Trip Unit
Catalog
Terminals
Catalog
2
250 LGSDC3250FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
2
300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 2
350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 2
500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2
2
Notes
2
2 Three-pole kit.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—

250 LGHDC3250FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
2 300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
2 400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
2 500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2

600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2
2
2 HLDDC Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
2 Maximum Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Continuous
300 HLDDC3600F LT3300T TA602LD
2 350 HLDDC3600F LT3350T TA602LD

450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA602LD
600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK 2
2
2 Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34
2 Maximum Complete
Continuous Breaker
2 Ampere Rating Catalog
at 40 °C Number
2 600 HLDDC20600
700 HLDDC20700
2 800 HLDDC20800
900 HLDDC20900
2 1000 HLDDC21000
2 1200 HLDDC21200
Notes
2 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2 Three-pole kit.
2 3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.

4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
HMDLDC3800F Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
2
300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1 2
2
2
700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1 2
2
Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers— 2
Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Standard 2
Continuous Assembled without Terminals 2 Terminals
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number
2
700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1 2
800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1
900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB1 2
2
2
Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
RGHDC3300FFWM
Factory Assembled 2 2
Maximum Imperial Termination Metric Termination
Continuous Threading Threading Includes Magnetic 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Trip Unit Calibrated
at 40 °C Number Number at 135%
2
1600 RGHDC3160FFWE RGHDC3160FFWM Included
2000 RGHDC3200FFWE RGHDC3200FFWM Included 2
2500 RGHDC3250FFWE RGHDC3250FFWM Included
3000 RGHDC3300FFWE RGHDC3300FFWM Included 2
Notes
1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately.
2
2 Six rear connectors included as standard that match terminal threading.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges

2 Breaker Maximum Breaker Terminal Body AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Number of Standard Terminal
Frame Ampacity Material Wire Type Number of Conductors Range mm2 Terminals Included Catalog Number
2 EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14–1/0 2.5–50 3 3TA125EF
HFDDC 20 Steel Cu/Al 14–10 (1) 2.5–4 (1) 3 3T20FB
2 100 Steel Cu/Al 14–1/0 (1) 2.5–50 (1) 3 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3TA225FD
2 JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 250 Stainless steel Cu 4–350 (1) 25–185 (1) 1 T250FJ
2 HJDDC
HKDDC
250
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
4–350 kcmil (1)
3–350 kcmil (1)
25–185 (1)
35–185 (1)
1
1
TA250KB
TA300K
2 350 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K

400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 3 3TA400K
2 LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK
HLDDC 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD
2 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK
HMDLDC 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2
NBDC 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
2 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 (4) 1 TA1200NB1
2
Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard.
2
2 Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and
have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
2 Maximum
Continuous
With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals
Ampere Rating Interrupting Capacity Poles in Catalog Catalog

2 at 40 °C (Volts DC) Series Number Number
600 Vdc Maximum

2 100 42 3 HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW
150 42 3 HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW
250 65 3 JGKDC3250KSG JGKDC3250KSW
2 250 42 3 HJDDC3250K HJDDC3250KW
400 35 3 HKDDC3400K HKDDC3400KW
2 65 3 LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3400KSW
600 65 3 LGKDC3630KSG LGKDC3630KSW
2 35 3 HLDDC3600K HLDDC3600WK
2 800 35 3 HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK

500 Vdc Maximum
2 100 65 3 EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW
250 Vdc Maximum
150 50 2 HFDDC2150KL HFDDC2150KW
1
1200 50 HLDDC21200K 1 HLDDC21200WK 1
2 Note
1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories
2
Field Installation Kits
2
JGEDC,
JGSDC, 2
JGHDC
Factory EGEDC, LGEDC,

2
Installation EGSDC, LGSDC,
Description (HFDDC) HFDDC 1 EGHDC LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC RGHDC 2
Right-Pole Mounting
Auxiliary switch 2
1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1X2PK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 —
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK AUX2A2BPK AUX2A2BPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2X4PK 4980D16G06 A2X6RPK 2
Alarm switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1L2RPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK — A1L6RPK 2
Auxiliary and alarm combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AAL2RPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK — —
2
Left-Pole Mounting
Shunt trip
2
12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT012CPK SNT012CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G14 —
2
24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT024CPK SNT024CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G13 SNT6P03K 2
48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G12 SNT6P23K 2 2
60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G11 SNT6P23K 2
125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP26K 2606D58G10 SNT6P23K 2 2
250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K — — SNT2P14K SNT3P14K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP14K 2606D58G09 SNT6P14K
120 Vac S06 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP11K 2060D58G05 SNT6P11K 2
2
Undervoltage release
2
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K UVR012DPK UVR012DPK UVH2LP20K UVH3LP20K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP20K 372D032G06 UVH6RP20K 2
24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K UVR024DPK UVR024DPK UVH2LP21K UVH3LP21K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP21K 372D032G07 UVH6RP21K 2 2
125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K UVR125DPK UVR125DPK UVH2LP26K UVH3LP26K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP26K 372D032G09 UVH6RP26K 2 2
120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR120APK UVR120APK UVH2LP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D632G05 UVH6RP08K 2
2
Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
2
under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker
is mounted and connected. 2
2 Right-pole mounted.
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Jumpers
2 Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
2 HFDDC Frame
Maximum Catalog
2 Description Amperes Number
Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060 1
2 100 DC1F100 1
125 DC1F125 1
2
225 DC1F225 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 100 DC2FD100A

Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 100 DC3FD100A
2
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC Frames
2 Maximum Catalog
2 Single aluminum jumper 250 DC1JG250A 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 250 DC2JG250A 1

Package of 20 aluminum jumpers 250 DC20JG250A 1
2
HKDDC Frame
2 Maximum Catalog
2 Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2KD400A 1

Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3KD400A 1
2
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC Frames
2 Maximum Catalog
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2LG400A

Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A
2 Note
1 Not UL Listed; Non UL listed jumpers used in a UL application may need to be qualified by the OEM in their assembly.
2 This may take place with UL or another certified testing agency.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Wiring Diagrams
2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
2
250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series 2
2
2
2
Load 2
Load
(A) 2
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2
500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
2
Load 2
2
2
2
Load
(A)
2
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2
2
2
750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series
2
2
2
2
Load 2
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. 2
Notes
2
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. 2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
2 DC Breaker Dimensions
2 Frame
Number
2 EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

HFDDC 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
2 HJDDC 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.1)
2 HKDDC 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)

LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
2 600 A Max. HLDDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
1200 A Max. HLDDC 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
2 HMDLDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
NBDC 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
2 RGHDC 3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers Contents
Description Page
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437 2
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-443
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole 2
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-458 2
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-458
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-458 2
600 Vdc Per-Pole 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-461 2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-468 2
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-469
2
2
2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series 2
Product Overview Product Description 2
● Two PVGard lineups Photovoltaic (PV) systems There are two PVGard lineups PVGard 1000 Vdc
● 600 Vdc per-pole breaker convert the energy of the sun to choose from: the industry- Poles-in-Series Lineup 2
and switch. Each pole into electrical power that is exclusive, 600 Vdc per-pole This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
fed directly into the electric breakers and switches
rated 600 Vdc
grid. Within the balance of designed for residential and
lineup provides reliable and
safe disconnect means and
2
● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
system (BOS), direct current light commercial applications overcurrent protection in
breaker and switch.
Requires poles in series (DC) circuit breakers protect and 1000 Vdc poles-in-series a single, compact device for 2
connection the wiring connected from breakers and switches for commercial and utility scale
● Both options UL 489B
the PV modules to the commercial and utility scale PV systems. This solution 2
combiner or the inverter, applications. does not require jumpers
listed for solar photovoltaic
circuit protection
while also behaving as
a disconnect. PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Lineup
with the breaker/switch to 2
be a UL 489B listed device,
● 50 °C calibration providing reliability and
● Offers both 100% and Eaton is a global leader in
Only Eaton can offer this
breakthrough breaker that will flexibility in design without
2
80% rated breakers circuit protection and brings
save significant space, time limitation on implementation
● Handle bi-directional
this expertise to bear in the
and cost. As a single-circuit- of the breaker/switch. If 2
photovoltaic market. PVGard
current flow per-pole device, it allows needed, cost-effective Eaton
solar circuit breakers are part
of a product family that
space savings of up to 66% jumpers can be included. 2
when compared to traditional
combines a disconnect with
circuit protection in a single,
poles-in-series disconnects, 2
switches and breakers. In
compact, resettable device
addition, it eliminates the
to protect and isolate DC
need for jumpers for poles-in-
2
circuits as needed in
series connection—saving on
photovoltaic systems.
PVGard breakers can replace
installation time, labor and 2
even inventory.
fuses, fuse holders and
disconnects in combiner box
2
and inverter applications—
saving space, streamlining 2
design, purchasing and
receiving, and reducing spare 2
parts requirements.
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Application Description Features Standards and Certifications

2 Photovoltaic (PV) systems PVGard breakers are uniquely Designed specifically for ● Designed to meet UL 489B
convert the energy of the sun designed with these features: high- and low-temperature for solar photovoltaic circuit
2 into electrical power that is demands of PV installations, protection
fed directly into the electric
● Meets the higher voltage PVGard circuit breakers
and lower fault current
● UL File E350638, Category
2 grid. PVGard circuit breakers
levels of solar systems
undergo extreme ambient Control Number DIUR
are used to protect the wiring cycling tests, and carry a
● Tested to extreme ambient
2 from the modules to the
combiner box or inverter from conditions from –40ºC to
robust operating temperature
range. Trip units calibrate at
overcurrents, and to provide +90ºC 100% and 80% of nameplate
2 an isolation mechanism. ● Full complement of current in a 50ºC ambient,
accessories for status, ensuring continuous
2 Eaton offers a complete line of signalling, and on/off operation in higher
UL 489 Listed multi-purpose operation remotely temperature environments
600 Vdc poles-in-series
2 breakers and switches, as
● Can handle bi-directional typical to solar.
well as protection for the flow of current Rigorous third-party testing
2 AC side of the inverter. ● Can be applied in includes limited and standard
Refer to Page V4-T2-443 grounded, ungrounded fault current tests, electrical
2 for 600 Vdc breakers and or bi-polar systems and mechanical endurance,
Page V4-T2-110 for AC ● Meets and exceeds the di-electric voltage withstand
2 breaker selection. standards of UL 489B for
photovoltaic molded case
and temperature tests.
Eaton’s PVGard products are
circuit breakers and stand-alone devices without
2 molded case switches requiring jumpers to be
● Available both standard UL 489B listed devices.
2 (80%-rated) and 100%- PVGard breakers are available
rated breakers with a full complement of
2 ● 50ºC calibration accessories to provide string
● Ability to open on signal status, enable remote trip,
2 from DC arc or ground fault on/off operation, and can
detector be customized to site
2 ● Wide range of current requirements.
ratings increases options
2 for matching incoming
strings
2 ● Eliminates fuse stocking
costs and matching issues
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Product Selection
Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-463. 2
For complete internal and external accessories, see accessory section of each frame.
2
JG PVS Frame JG PVS Frame, 250 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 1.2 kA 1
2
Number Poles/ 80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes 600 Vdc Circuits Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
90 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3090W CJGPVS3090W
100 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3100W CJGPVS3100W 2
150 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3150W CJGPVS3150W 2
2
2
2
KD PVS Frame KD PVS Frame, 400 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 3 kA 1
Number Poles/ 80% Rated 100% Rated 2

Current Rating Amperes 600 Vdc Circuits Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
100 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3100W CKDPVS3100W
2
2
175 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3175W CKDPVS3175W 2
2
Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2 Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-463.
2
FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1
2 FD PV Frame
80% Rated 100% Rated
2 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
30 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4030W CFDPV4030W
2 40 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4040W CFDPV4040W

2
2 KD PV Frame KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
2 80% Rated 100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 125 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4125W CKDPV4125W
150 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4150W CKDPV4150W
2

2
LG PV Frame LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
2
250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4250W CLGPV4250W
2 300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4300W CLGPV4300W
350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4350W CLGPV4350W
2 400 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4400W CLGPV4400W
2
MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1
2 MDL PV Frame
300 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3300W CMDLPV3300W
2 350 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3350W CMDLPV3350W

2 Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories
2
Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40ºC 4
Available Accessories
Frame Modification Code
2
● Auxiliary switch ● End cap kits
● Shunt trip ● Rotary handle mechanisms FD PV
JG PVS
F01
F01
2
● Electrical operator ● Flexible shaft handle
● Alarm lockout mechanisms KD PV and KD PVS
LG PV
F01
F01
2
● Undervoltage release
Optional modifications
● Terminals ● Freeze testing
MDL PV F01
Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability
2
● Lock-off devices
2
For complete internal and external accessories, see the
accessory section of each frame.
Eaton’s DC molded case MCS are UL 489B listed and 2
switches (MCS) are used in have automatic instantaneous
applications requiring a
compact, high capacity
current protection. These
devices do not provide
2
disconnect. PVGard 1000 Vdc overload protection.
Description Frame
Catalog
Number
2
Imperial Base Mounting Hardware
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1 Maximum Continuous Interrupting Poles in Catalog
2
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV BMH3 Ampere Rating at 50 °C Capacity Vdc Series Number
KD PVS
1000 Vdc Maximum
2
— JG PVS N/A
— LG PV N/A
100
200
3000
5000
4
4
FDPV4100KW
KDPV4200KW
2
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and MDL PV BMH5
lockwashers and flat washers
250
350
5000
5000
4
4
KDPV4250KW
KDPV4350KW
2
Metric Base Mounting Hardware
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1M
400
600
5000
7500
4
3
LGPV4400KSW
MDLPV3600KSW
2
M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV BMH3M
KD PVS Notes 2
— JG PVS Included 1 1 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch
— LG PV Included 1 (included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A2546G02.

2 Individually priced. 2
M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers MDL PV BMH5M 3 Locks in ON and OFF position.
Interphase Barriers 4 Add 20% to list price. 2
FD PV IPB1
KD PV
KD PVS
IPB3 2
JG PVS FJIPBK 2
LG PV IPB3
2
MDL PV IPB4
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
2
FD PV LKD1
KD PV LKD3
2
KD PVS
JG PVS N/A 2
LG PV N/A
MDL PV LKD4 2
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 3
FD PV PLK1 2
KD PV PLK3
KD PVS 2
JG PVS FJPHL
LG PV LPHL 2
MDL PV HLK4
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting

2 KD PV
FD PV 1 JG PVS KD PVS LG PV MDL PV
2 Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit
Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog
2 Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number
Auxiliary Switch
2 1A-1B A06 A1X1PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X3PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X4PK
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X3PK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X4PK
2 Alarm Switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPKL B06 A1L3RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPK B06 A1L4RPK
2 Auxiliary and Alarm Combo
2 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK B2w AUXALRMJPK C05 AAL3RPK B2 AUXALRMJPK C05 AA114RPK
2 Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting

KD PV
2 FD PV 1 JG PVS KD PVS LG PV MDL PV
Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit
Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog
2 Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number
Shunt Trip
2 12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S4 SNT012CPK S42 SNT3P04K S4 SNT012CPK S02 SNT4LP03K

48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S7 SNT4860CPK S50 SNT3P06K S7 SNT4860CPK S86 SNT4LP23K
125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K S5 SNT125DPK S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S42 SNT4LP26K
2 250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K — — S14 SNT3P14K — — S14 SNT4LP14K
2 120 Vac S10 SNT1LP12K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT4LP11K
Undervoltage Release
2 12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K — — T02 UVH3LP20K U1 UVR012DPK T02 UVH4LP20K
24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K U2 UVR024CPK T02 UVH3LP21K U2 UVR024DPK T06 UVH4LP21K
2 48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH3LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH4LP22K
60 Vdc — — U4 UVR048DPK — — — — — —
120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K U5 UVR120APK U18 UVH3LP08K U5 UVR120APK U18 UVH4LP08K
2 Notes
1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
2 under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering
Standard
2
Maximum Number of Terminal
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number Comments
2
FD PV 50 Steel Cu/Al 14–4 (1) 2.5–25 (1) 3 3TA50FB 2
100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK3 Includes 3P terminal cover
100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK Includes 3P terminal cover 2
Replacement use only
100 Copper Cu 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3T225FD 2
JG PVS 250 Aluminum Cu/Al #8–350 kcmil (1) — — TA250FJ
250 Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 — 1
3TA251FJK1
2
2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 — 3TA251FJK2
2
250 Copper Cu #4–350 kcmil (1) — — T250FJ
KD PV
KD PVS
225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K 2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4TA400K Contains interphase barriers 2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1) 70–240 (2) 4 4TA401K
300 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
2
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
2
225 Copper Cu 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 T300K
250 Copper Cu 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 T350K 2
250 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4T400K Contains interphase barriers
300 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers 2
350 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
LG PV 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK Includes 4P terminal cover
2
250 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK 2
400 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK Includes 4P terminal cover
MDL PV 300 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1 2
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2
2
Endcap Kits
Breaker Frame Number of Poles Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number
2
FD PV 4 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14 2
JG PVS 3 Imperial — FJ3RTDK 2
3 Metric — FJ3RTWK
KD PV 4 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34
2
2
KD PVS 3 Imperial — KPEK3
3 Metric — KPEKM3 2
LG PV 4 Imperial — N/A
4 Metric M-10 L4RTWK 2
MDL PV 3 Imperial — —
3 Metric — —
2
Notes
1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2
2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Jumpers
2 Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
2 FD PV Frame
Maximum Catalog
2 Description Amperes Number
Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060 1
2 100 DC1F100 1
125 DC1F125 1
2
225 DC1F225 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 100 DC2FD100A

Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 100 DC3FD100A
2
JG PVM, JG PVMD Frames
2 Maximum Catalog
2 Single aluminum jumper 250 DC1JG250A 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 250 DC2JG250A 1

Package of 20 aluminum jumpers 250 DC20JG250A 1
2
KD PV, KD PVM, KD PVMD Frames
2 Maximum Catalog
2 Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400 1
2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2KD400A 1

Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3KD400A 1
2
LG PV Frame
2 Maximum Catalog

Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A
2 Note
1 Not UL Listed; Non UL listed jumpers used in a UL application may need to be qualified by the OEM in their assembly.
2 This may take place with UL or another certified testing agency.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
● Thermal-magnetic circuit ● Two PVGard lineups 2
breakers ● UL File EE350638,
● Designed to meet UL 489B Category Control 2
for solar photovoltaic circuit Number DIUR
protection ● 600 Vdc per-pole breaker 2
● 100% rated of the and switch
continuous current rating – Each pole rated 2
● 50 °C calibrated 600 Vdc
● Can be applied in ● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series 2
grounded, ungrounded or breaker and switch
bi-polar systems – Requires poles in 2
● Ability to open on signal series connection
from DC arc or ground fault 2
detector
2
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
600 Vdc Per-Pole 2
PVGard 600 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 600 Vdc Per-Pole 2
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
Maximum
Amperes kA Rating 2
JG PVS 90 250 1.2
2
KD PVS 100 400 3
2
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc 2
Circuit Minimum Maximum Poles in
Breaker Type Amperes Amperes kA Rating Series 2
FD PV 30 100 3 4
KD PV 125 350 5 4
2
LG PV 250 400 5 4 2
MDL PV 300 600 7.5 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
2 JG PVS KD PVS
2 Number of 600 Vdc circuits 3 3

Maximum voltage rating 600 Vdc 600 Vdc
2 Ampere range 90–250 A 100–400 A

Interrupting capacity at 600 Vdc 1.2 kA 3 kA
2 Time constant 1 ms 1 ms
Trip unit type Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
2 Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths 8 kV 8 kV
2 Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV
Endurance
2 Mechanical operations
Electrical operations
10,000
400
6000
400
Maximum switching frequency 240 per hour 240 per hour
2 Third-party certification UL 489B UL 489B
Environment
2 Design ambient temperature 50 °C 50 °C
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current 93% 93%
2 Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current 85% 85%
Operating temperature range –20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +50 °C
2 Storage temperature range
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
Relative humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing
2 Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes
Mounting—permissible mounting position
2
2
º
90
90
2
º
2
2 Connection diagrams
Terminations
2 Al/Cu wire TA250FJ: (1) #8–350 kcmil TA300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
3TA251FJK1: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 1 TA350K: (1) 250–500 kcmil
2 3TA251FJK2: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 2 TA403K: (2) 1/0–400 kcmil
2 3TA402K: (1) 500–750 kcmil 3

Cu wire T250FJ: (1) #4–350 kcmil T300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
2 Dimensions in inches (mm)

Height 7.00 (177.8) 10.13 (257.3)
Width 4.13 (104.9) 5.50 (139.7)
2 Depth 3.57 (90.7) 4.10 (104.1)
Weight in lbs 6.6 11.42
2 Notes
1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2 2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
3 Not UL 489B recognized size for maximum of 400 A breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
FD PV KD PV LG PV MDL PV
2
Number of poles 4 4 4 3
2
Maximum voltage rating 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc
Maximum current rating 100 A 350 A 400 A 600 A 2
Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 7.5 kA
Time constant 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2
Ampere range 15–100 A 125–350 A 250–400 A 300–600 A
Trip unit type Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
2
Rated impulse withstand voltage 2
Main conducting paths 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
2
Endurance
Mechanical operations 10,000 10,000 8000 8000 2
Electrical operations 1000 400 400 400
Maximum switching frequency 300 per hour 240 per hour 240 per hour 240 per hour
Third-party certification UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B
2
Environment 2
Design ambient temperature 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
91%
88%
91%
88%
93%
88%
93%
88%
2
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C 2
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C Option Option Option Option
Relative humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing 2
Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mounting—permissible mounting position 2
2
2
º
º
90
90
90
90
º
º
2
2
Connection diagrams 1 2
2
2
2
Load
Load
(A)
2
Terminations 2
Al/Cu wire #6–300 kcmil (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–400 kcmil
Cu wire #4–4/0 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–300 kcmil
2
Dimensions in inches (mm)
2
Height 6.00 (152.4) 10.13 (257.3) 10.13 (257.3) 16.00 (406.4)
Width 5.50 (139.7) 7.22 (183.4) 7.22 (183.4) 8.25 (209.5)
Depth 3.38 (85.9) 4.09 (103.9) 4.09 (103.9) 4.06 (103.1) 2
Weight in lbs 6 20 20 29
2
Notes
1 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
2 Number of
Circuits in
Frame a Frame Width Height Depth
2 JG PVS 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.44 (87.4)
KD PVS 3 5.49 (139.4) 10.13 (257.2) 4.31 (109.6)
2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
Number
Frame of Poles Width Height Depth
2
FD PV 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 KD PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)

LG PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
2 MDL PV 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Wiring Diagrams
2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
2
JF PVS, KD PVS—600 Vdc Per-Pole
2
2
2
Load
2
Suitable for grounded or ungrounded systems. 2
Suitable for quantity (3) 600 Vdc circuits.
2
FD PV, KD PV, LG PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles-in-Series
2
2
2
2
Load
Load
2
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2
2
MDL PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series 2
Load
2
2
2
2
Load
(A) 2
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
Notes 2
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers Contents

2 Description Page
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-443
2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-457
2 E2 Mining Service Breakers
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-487
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-490
2
2
2
2
2 E2 Mining Service Breakers
2 Product Overview
600 Vac Mining Breaker 1000 Vac Mining Breaker
State-of-the-art E2 mining E2 electronic trip units are the Replacement Chart Replacement Chart
2 service breakers incorporate first to provide the mining
Classic Series C E2 Classic Series C E2M
the rigid specifications and industry with true rms
testing procedures developed sensing, made possible by E2F E2FM
2 by a focus group led by the custom ASIC
FBM FDBM HFM —
HFBM FDM E2F — JDCM E2JM
engineers from several microprocessor in each
2 large coal companies and electronic trip unit. HFDM (mag. only) E2F HKAM KDCM E2KM
Eaton design engineers. — JDM E2J HLAM LDCM E2LM
2 Additionally, the performance E2 breakers are designed to
KAM KDM E2K HLCM LDCM E2LM
of these breakers was proven be physically and electrically
interchangeable with Classic KAMH KDM E2K HMAM — E2MM
2 and verified during hundreds
of hours of field testing in Mining Service Breakers and LAM LDM E2L HMCM — E2MM
harsh mine environments. supersede Series C® Mining
2 Service Breakers. The table to LAMH LDM E2L HNBM — E2NM
E2 mining breakers are the right outlines direct LCM LDM E2L HNBMH — E2NM
2 available in 600 Vac, l000Y/ replacements. LCMH LDM E2L HNCM — E2NM
577 Vac and 1200 Vac.
MAM — E2M HLCLM — E2NM
Interchangeable trip units can
2 be used on either 600 or 1000 MAMH — E2M HPBM — E2RM 1
Vac frames. MCM — E2M
2
The E2 mining breaker family MCMH — E2M
2 is designed especially for

trailing cable application per
NBM — E2N
NBMH — E2N
MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field
2 interchangeable electronic NCM — E2N
rms sensing trip units are NCMH — E2N
2 available from 150 to 2000
amperes with instantaneous
2 pickup settings conforming
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
to the code of Federal
Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. Source Description
2 Electromechanical trip units TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
are also available with a
2 wide range of magnetic BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
pickup ranges. TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
2 www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals
2 Note
1 E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Eaton’s mining service circuit E2 225/400 A K frame and The tables below list the
breakers provide short-circuit 400/600 A L frame electronic conductor size maximum 2
protection as specified in the trip units feature specifically allowable circuit breaker
code of Federal Regulations designed instantaneous instantaneous setting and 2
30 CFR 75.601-2. pickup settings to conform the E2 breaker that meets
exactly with the code of that setting. 2
Federal Regulations 30 CFR
75.601-2. Electromechanical
trip units are also available 2
with a wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges. 2
Interrupting Capacity Rating Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75
2
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
1
Maximum
Breaker
Maximum
Ampere E2/E2M/E2W
2
Circuit Vac (50/60 Hz) Vdc Conductor Instantaneous 75 °C Insulated Instantaneous
Breaker Type 240 480 600 1000Y/577 1200 250 Size Setting Conductor Only Setting 2
E2F 65 35 18 — — 10 14 50 15 E2K 150 A A
E2J 65 35 18 — — 10 12 75 20 E2K 150 A B 2
E2K 65 35 25 — — 10 10 150 30 E2K 150 A C
E2LME 100 65 35 — — 42 8 200 50 E2K 225 A A
2
E2L 65 35 25 — — 22 E2K 225 A
E2M
6 300 65 B
2
65 35 25 — — 22 4 500 85 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A C/A
E2N 65 50 25 — — — 3 600 100 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A D/B 2
E2R 125 65 50 — — — 2 800 115 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A E/C
E2FM 65 25 18 10 — 10 1 1000 130 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A F/D 2
E2JM 65 35 18 10 — 22 1/0 1250 150 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A G/E
E2KM 65 35 25 14 — 10 2/0 1500 175 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A H/F 2
E2LMZ 100 65 35 10 — 42 3/0 2000 200 E2L 400 A G
E2LM — 35 25 18 — 22 4/0 2500 230 E2L 400 A H
2
E2MM E2L 400 A
— 35 25 18 — 22 250 2500 255 H
2
E2NM 2 — 50 25 25 — — 300 2500 285 E2L 400 A H
E2RM — 65 50 25 — — 350 2500 310 E2L 400 A H 2
E2KW — — — 10 10 — 400 2500 335 E2L 400 A H
E2LW — — — 10 10 — 500 2500 380 E2L 400 A H 2
E2MW — — — 12 12 —
2
Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data
Maximum Maximum Current 2
Voltage Frequency Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6.0 2
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
2
2
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data
2
Maximum Maximum Current
Voltage Frequency Amperes
2
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 2
Notes
2
1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit.
Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated. 2

2 Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers.
2
2

Specialty Breakers

2
2 E2 Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
2 E2K E M 3 400 38 2 B20 W

2 Frame Size Terminal
E2K Electronic Trip Optional Features W= No terminals
2 E2L
E2M
E 1 = Electronic trip Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
B20 2= High load alarm Blank= Standard terminals
E2N Blank= Standard mag.

2 E2R Voltage Current Ampere
Rating 2= High mag.
Blank= 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max. 100–2000
2 Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
Number
2 of Poles
(magnetic only)
Blank= 310+ Electronic LSI
3 = Three-pole 38= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
2 maintenance mode
2
E2 Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2 K E M 3 400 38 T 2 B20
2
Frame Size Optional Features
2 K Electronic Trip Magnetic Rating B20 1= High load alarm
L E = Electronic trip Trip Unit (If Applicable)
2 M T Blank= Standard mag.
2= High mag.
Voltage Current Ampere
Rating
2 M = 600 V and 1000 V
interchangeable 100–2000
Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
2 Number
Blank= 310+ Electronic LSI
38= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
of Poles
2 3 = Three-pole
maintenance mode
2 Notes
1 All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No “E” suffix required.
2 2 Not available with instantaneous only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
E2 Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1
2
E2K M 3 400 F
2
Frame Size
E2J Voltage Current Ampere
Frame
Designation
2
E2K Blank= 600 Vac max. Number Rating F
E2L M= 1000Y/577 Vac max. of Poles 70–800 2
E2M 3 = Three-pole
2
E2 Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 2
E2K M 3 400 M K W 2
Frame Size Terminal 2
E2F Voltage Magnetic Trip Range W= No terminals
E2J
E2K
Blank= 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
Number
of Poles
Trip Unit Function Suffix
See catalog
Blank= Standard terminals 2
M= Magnetic only
E2L W 2= 1200 Vac max. 3 = Three-pole Blank= Thermal-magnetic
E2M 2
Current Ampere
Rating 2
3–800
2
E2 Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2
E2K 3 400 T M A
2
Frame Size Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
2
E2J Number Trip Unit Function
E2K of Poles Trip Unit
E2L 3 = Three-pole
Current Ampere
Rating T
M= Magnetic only
Blank= Thermal-magnetic
See catalog
2
E2M 70–800
2
Notes
1 Does not apply to E2LME/LMZ.
2 Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data

2 Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
2 Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA

E2F/E2FM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.3
2 120 Vac 1.5
127 Vac 1.7
2 110 Vdc 1.5
2 120 Vdc 1.7

125 Vdc 1.9
2 E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
2 127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
2
120 Vdc 1.9
2 125 Vdc 2.2

E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
2 120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
2 110 Vdc 1.6
2 120 Vdc 1.9

125 Vdc 2.2
2 E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 0.96
120 Vac 1.13
2 127 Vac 1.25
2 110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 0.94

120 Vdc 1.12
2 125 Vdc 1.21
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
2 E2MM/E2MW
120 Vac 2.1
2 127 Vac 2.4

110 Vdc 1.6
2 120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
2 E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
2 127 Vac 2.4
2 110 Vdc 1.6

120 Vdc 1.9
2 125 Vdc 2.2
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 3.3
2 120 Vac 3.6
2 127 Vac 3.8

110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 3.3
2 120 Vdc 3.6
125 Vdc 3.8
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data
Operating Voltage Operating Voltage
2
Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA
E2F/E2FM 48 Vac 33.6 92 E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 48 Vac 34 830
2
E2MM/E2MW
60 Vac 140 60 Vac 1280 2
110 Vac 480 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 570 120 Vac 120 2
127 Vac 640 127 Vac 140
208 Vac 146 180 48 Vdc 34 710
2
220 Vac 200 60 Vdc 1105 2
230 Vac 240 110 Vdc 77 110
48 Vdc 33.6 100 120 Vdc 130 2
60 Vdc 160 125 Vdc 140
110 Vdc 77 55 E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 60 100
2
120 Vdc 66 120 Vac 120
2
125 Vdc 71 127 Vac 140
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 60.5 66 110 Vdc 77 110 2
120 Vac 84 120 Vdc 130
127 Vac 102 125 Vdc 140
2
110 Vdc 77 112 E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 60.5 330
2
120 Vdc 138 120 Vac 390
125 Vdc 150 127 Vac 430 2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 60 100 110 Vdc 77 370
120 Vac 120 120 Vdc 440 2
127 Vac 140 125 Vdc 480
110 Vdc 77 110
2
120 Vdc 130 2
125 Vdc 140
24 Vac 41 2
48 Vac 18 139
60 Vac 210
2
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 60 83
2
120 Vac 92
127 Vac 117 2
24 Vdc 120
48 Vdc 18 475
2
60 Vdc 720
2
110 Vdc 82 99
120 Vdc 120 2
125 Vdc 121
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
2
3 A–150 A
2 E2F/E2FM
2
Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units 1
2 E2F/E2FM
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc 250 Vdc
2 35 kA at 480 Vac 10 kA at 1000 Vac
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
2 Thermal-Magnetic
15 — — E2F3015 —
2 20 — — E2F3020 E2FM3020
25 — — E2F3025 E2FM3025
2 30 — — E2F3030 —
2 35 — — E2F3035 —
40 — — E2F3040 E2FM3040
2 45 — — E2F3045 —
50 — — E2F3050 E2FM3050
2 60 — — E2F3060 E2FM3060
70 — — E2F3070 E2FM3070
2 80 — — E2F3080 E2FM3080
2 90 — — E2F3090 E2FM3090
100 — — E2F3100 E2FM3100
2 125 — — E2F3125 E2FM3125
150 — — E2F3150 E2FM3150
2 Magnetic Only
3 9–30 — E2F003AM —
2 7 21–70 — E2F007CM —
2 15 45–150 — E2F015EM —
30 90–300 — E2F030HM —
2 50–150 — E2F030EM —
50 150–500 — E2F050KM E2FM050KM
2 66–190 — E2F050YM E2FM050YM
2 70 210–700 — E2F070MM E2FM070MM

100 150–500 — E2F100KM E2FM100KM
2 300–1000 — E2F100RM E2FM100RM

150 450–1500 — E2F150TM E2FM150TM
2 750–2500 — E2F150UM E2FM150UM
2 Note
1 For two-pole application, use outer poles.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
70 A–250 A
2
E2J/E2JM
2
E2J/E2JM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
2
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic 2
70 300–650 E2J3070T E2J3070W E2JM3070W
90 450–900 E2J3090T E2J3090W E2JM3090W
2
100 500–1000 E2J3100T E2J3100W E2JM3100W
2
125 625–1250 E2J3125T E2J3125W E2JM3125W
150 750–1500 E2J3150T E2J3150W E2JM3150W 2
175 875–1750 E2J3175T E2J3175W E2JM3175W
200 1000–2000 E2J3200T E2J3200W E2JM3200W 2
225 300–650 E2J3225TA E2J3225AW E2JM3225AW
500–1000 E2J3225TD E2J3225DW E2JM3225DW
2
1125–2250 E2J3225T E2J3225W E2JM3225W 2
250 1250–2500 E2J3250T E2J3250W E2JM3250W
Magnetic Only 2
250 300–650 E2J3250TMA E2J3250MAW E2JM3250MAW
450–900 E2J3250TMC E2J3250MCW E2JM250MCW
2
500–1000 E2J3250TMD E2J3250MDW E2JM3250MDW
2
625–1250 E2J3250TMF E2J3250MFW E2JM3250MFW
750–1500 E2J3250TMG E2J3250MGW E2JM3250MGW 2
875–1750 E2J3250TMJ E2J3250MJW E2JM3250MJW
1000–2000 E2J3250TMK E2J3250MKW E2JM3250MKW 2
1125–2250 E2J3250TML E2J3250MLW E2JM3250MLW
1250–2500 E2J3250TM E2J3250MW E2JM3250MW
2
Notes 2
1 Frame only: E2J3250F.
2 Frame only: E2JM3250F.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
100 A–400 A
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
2
2 E2K/E2KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 1200 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac 10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2 Three-Pole 34
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 Thermal-Magnetic
100 500–1000 E2K3100T E2K3100W E2KM3100W E2KW3100W
2 125 625–1250 E2K3125T E2K3125W E2KM3125W E2KW3125W
2 150 750–1500 E2K3150T E2K3150W E2KM3150W E2KW3150W

175 875–1750 E2K3175T E2K3175W E2KM3175W E2KW3175W
2 200 1000–2000 E2K3200T E2K3200W E2KM3200W E2KW3200W
225 300–650 E2K3225TA E2K3225AW E2KM3225AW E2KW3225AW
2 500–1000 E2K3225TD E2K3225DW E2KM3225DW E2KW3225DW
1125–2250 E2K3225T E2K3225W E2KM3225W E2KW3225W
2 250 1250–2500 E2K3250T E2K3250W E2KM3250W E2KW3250W
2 300 1500–3000 E2K3300T E2K3300W E2KM3300W E2KW3300W

320 1600–3200 — — — E2KW3320W
2 350 1750–3500 E2K3350T E2K3350W E2KM3350W E2KW3350W
400 2000–4000 E2K3400T E2K3400W E2KM3400W —
2 Magnetic Only
2 400 300–650 E2K3400TMA E2K3400MAW E2KM3250MAW E2KW3250MAW

500–1000 E2K3400TMD E2K3400MDW E2KM3400MDW E2KW3350MDW
2 625–1250 E2K3400TMF E2K3400MFW E2KM3400MFW E2KW3350MFW
750–1500 E2K3400TMG E2K3400MGW E2KM3400MGW E2KW3350MGW
2 875–1750 E2K3400TMJ E2K3400MJW E2KM3400MJW E2KW3350MJW
1000–2000 E2K3400TMK E2K3400MKW E2KM3400MKW E2KW3350MKW
2 1125–2250 E2K3400TML E2K3400MLW E2KM3400MLW E2KW3350MLW
2 1250–2500 E2K3400TMW E2K3400MWW E2KM3400MWW E2KW3350MWW

1500–3000 E2K3400TMN E2K3400MNW E2KM3400MNW E2KW3350MNW
2 1600–3200 — — — E2KW3350MVW
1750–3500 E2K3400TMR E2K3400MRW E2KM3400MRW E2KW3350MRW
2 2000–4000 E2K3400TM E2K3400MW E2KM3400MW —
2 Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
2 3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
100 A–400 A
2
E2KE/E2KEM
2
E2KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units 2
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
2
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only 2
150 50–800 KEM3150TM E2KE3150MW E2KEM3150MW
2
500–2500 KEM3225TM2 E2KE3225M2W E2KEM3225M2W
2
500–2500 KEM3400TM2 E2KE3400M2W E2KEM3400M2W 2
310+ Electronic LSI 3
100 50–800 KEM3100T E2KE3100W E2KEM3100W 2
125 50–800 KEM3125T E2KE3125W E2KEM3125W
150 50–800 KEM3150T E2KE3150W E2KEM3150W 2
200 200–1500 KEM3200T E2KE3200W E2KEM3200W
225 200–1500 KEM3225T E2KE3225W E2KEM3225
2
500–2500 KEM3225T2 E2KE32252W E2KEM32252W
2
400 200–1500 KEM3400T E2KE3400W E2KEM3400W
500–2500 KEM3400T2 E2KE34002W E2KEM34002W 2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
100 50–800 KEM310038T E2KE310038W E2KEM310038W 2
125 50–800 KEM312538T E2KE312538W E2KEM312538W
150 50–800 KEM315038T E2KE315038W E2KEM315038W 2
200 200–1500 KEM320038T E2KE320038W E2KEM320038W
225 200–1500 KEM322538T E2KE322538W E2KEM322538
2
500–2500 KEM322538T2 E2KE3225238W E2KEM3225238W
2
400 200–1500 KEM340038T E2KE340038W E2KEM340038W
500–2500 KEM340038T2 E2KE3400238W E2KEM3400238W 2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F. 2
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2KE340038B20W, KEM3400TB20.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
160 A–400 A
2
E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)
2
2 Circuit Breakers
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
2 Magnetic Only
400 3600–4400 LT3400KM E2LME3400KMW E2LMZ3400KMW
2 Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit
2 160 320–1920 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W

200 400–2400 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 225 450–2700 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
250 500–3000 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 300 600–3600 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
315 630–3780 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 350 700–4200 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 400 800–4800 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
Notes
2 1 Frame only: E2LME3400NN.
2 Frame only: E2LMZ3400NN.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
300 A–600 A
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
2
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Thermal-Magnetic 2
300 1500–3000 E2L3300T E2L3300W E2LM3300W E2LW3300W
320 2250–4500 E2L3450T E2L3450W E2LM3450W E2LW3320W
2
350 1600–3200 — — — E2LW3350W
2
400 1750–3500 E2L3350T E2L3350W E2LM3350W E2LW3400W
450 2000–4000 E2L3400T E2L3400W E2LM3400W E2LW3450W 2
500 2500–5000 E2L3500T E2L3500W E2LM3500W —
600 3000–6000 E2L3600T E2L3600W E2LM3600W — 2
1125–2250 E2L3600TL 4 — — —
Magnetic Only
2
450 1600–3200 — — — E2LW3450MVW 2
1125–2250 — — — E2LW3450MLW
1500–3000 — — — E2LW3450MNW 2
1750–3500 — — — E2LW3450MRW
2000–4000 — — — E2LW3450MXW
2
2250–4500 — — — E2LW3450MYW
2
600 1125–2250 E2L3600TML E2L3600MLW E2LM3600MLW —
1500–3000 E2L3600TMN E2L3600MNW E2LM3600MNW — 2
1750–3500 E2L3600TMR E2L3600MRW E2LM3600MRW —
2000–4000 E2L3600TMX E2L3600MXW E2LM3600MXW — 2
2250–4500 E2L3600TMY E2L3600MYW E2LM3600MYW —
2500–5000 E2L3600TMP E2L3600MPW E2LM3600MPW —
2
3000–6000 E2L3600TM E2L3600MW E2LM3600MW —
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
2
4 600 A thermal 1125–2250 T.A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
300 A–600 A
2
E2LE/E2LEM
2
2 E2LM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
2 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
400 500–2500 LEM3400TM E2LE3400MW E2LEM3400MW
2 1000–4000 LEM3400TM2 E2LE3400M2W E2LEM3400M2W
2 600 500–2500 LEM3600TM E2LE3600MW E2LEM3600MW

2500–5000 LEM3600TM2 E2LE3600M2W E2LEM3600M2W
2 310+ Electronic LSI 3
300 500–2500 LEM3300T E2LE3300W E2LEM3300W
2 350 500–2500 LEM3350T E2LE3350W E2LEM3350W
400 500–2500 LEM3400T E2LE3400W E2LEM3400W
2 1000–4000 LEM3400T2 E2LE34002W E2LEM34002W
2 600 500–2500 LEM3600T E2LE3600W E2LEM3600W

2500–5000 LEM3600T2 E2LE36002W E2LEM36002W
2 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
300 500–2500 LEM330038T E2LE330038W E2LEM330038W
2 350 500–2500 LEM335038T E2LE335038W E2LEM335038W
2 400 500–2500 LEM340038T E2LE340038W E2LEM340038W

1000–4000 LEM340038T2 E2LE3400238W E2LEM3400238W
2 600 500–2500 LEM360038T E2LE360038W E2LEM360038W
2500–5000 LEM360038T2 E2LE3600238W E2LEM3600238W
2 Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2LE360038B20W, LEM3600TB20.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
300 A— 800 A
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
2
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Thermal-Magnetic 2
400 1000–2000 — — — E2MW3400W
500 1250–2500 — — — E2MW3500W
2
600 1500–3000 E2M3600TN E2M3600W E2MM3600W E2MW3600W
2
630 1600–3200 — — — E2MW3630W
800 2000–4000 E2M3800TX E2M3800W E2MM3800W E2MW3800W 2
Magnetic Only
800 1500–3000 E2M3800TMN E2M3800MNW E2MM3800MNW E2MW3800MNW 2
1600–3200 — — — E2MW3800MVW
2000–4000 E2M3800TMX E2M3800MXW E2MM3800MXW E2MW3800MXW
2
2500–5000 E2M3800TMP E2M3800MPW E2MM3800MPW — 2
3000–6000 E2M3800TMW E2M3800MWW E2MM3800MWW —
Notes
2
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F. 2
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
800 A
2
E2ME/E2MEM
2
2 E2MN Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
2 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
800 500–2500 MEM3800TM E2ME3800MW E2MEM3800MW
2 1000–4000 MEM3800TM2 E2ME3800M2W E2MEM3800M2W

800 500–2500 MEM3800T E2ME3800W E2MEM3800W
2 1000–4000 MEM3800T2 E2ME38002W E2MEM38002W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
2 800 500–2500 MEM380038T E2ME380038W E2MEM380038W
1000–4000 MEM380038T2 E2ME3800382W E2MEM3800382W
2
Notes
2 1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2ME380038B20W, MEM3800TB20.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
400 A–1200 A
2
E2N/E2NM
2
E2NM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units 2
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
2
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only 2
800 500–2500 — E2N3800MW E2NM3800MW
1200 1250–5000 — E2N312MW E2NM312MW
2
310+ Electronic LSI 1
2
400 500–2500 — E2N3400W E2NM3400W
500 500–2500 — E2N3500W E2N3M500W 2
600 500–2500 — E2N3600W E2NM3600W
700 500–2500 — E2N3700W E2NM3700W 2
800 500–2500 — E2N3800W E2NM3800W
900 1250–5000 — E2N3900W E2NM3900W
2
1000 1250–5000 — E2N310W E2NM310W 2
1200 1250–5000 — E2N312W E2NM312W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1 2
400 500–2500 — E2N340038W E2NM340038W
500 500–2500 — E2N350038W E2NM350038W
2
600 500–2500 — E2N360038W E2NM360038W
2
700 500–2500 — E2N370038W E2NM370038W
800 500–2500 — E2N380038W E2NM380038W 2
900 1250–5000 — E2N390038W E2NM390038W
1000 1250–5000 — E2N31038W E2NM31038W 2
1200 1250–5000 — E2N31238W E2NM31238W
2
Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2N380038B20W.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
1600 A–2000 A
2
E2R/E2RM
2
2 E2RM Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
1600 2–8 x In — E2R316W E2RM316W
2 2000 2–8 x In — E2R320W E2RM320W
2 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1

1600 2–8 x In — E2R31638W E2RM31638W
2 2000 2–8 x In — E2R32038W E2RM32038W
Notes
2 1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2R1638B20W.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories
2
Breaker Maximum Wire AWG Wire Range Catalog
2
Type Breaker Amperes Type (No. Conductors) Number
E2F/E2FM 100 Cu/AI #14–1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three)
2
150 Cu #4–4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three)
2
E2J/E2JM 250 Cu #4–350 (1) T250KB
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 225 Cu #3–350 (1) T300K 2
350 Cu 250–500 (1) T350K
400 Cu 2/0–250 (2) 3T400K (three-pole kit) 2
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 3TA631LK
E2L/E2LM/E2LW 400 Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
2
600 Cu 250–350 (2) T602LD 2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW 600 Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1
600 Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 2
800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2
800 Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA
2
800 Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1
2
E2N/E2NM 700 Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1
1000 Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 2
1200 Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3
1600 Cu/AI 500–1000 (4) TA1600RD 2
2000 Cu/AI 2–600 (6) TA2000RD
2
End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals 2
Metric
Breaker Maximum Catalog Catalog 2
Type Breaker Amperes Number Number Imperial
E2F/E2FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 — 2
E2J/E2JM 250 KPEK2 KPEMK2 —
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 —
2
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 — L3RTWK —
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 —
2
Padlockable Handle 2
Lock Hasp
Catalog 2
Breaker Type Number
E2F/E2FM PLK1 2
E2J/E2JM PLK3
E2K/E2KM/E2KW PLK3 2
E2LME/E2LMZ LPHL
E2L/E2LM/E2LW HLK4
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW HLK4 2
E2N/E2NM PLK5
E2R/E2RM HLK6 2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2
Undervoltage Release 1
2 Breaker UVR Voltage Mounting Catalog Factory
Type Type Rating Location Number Modification Code
2 E2F/E2FM Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2 U18
Handle reset 110–127 Vdc Left pole UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) 2 U42
2
E2J/E2JM Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH2LP08K 2 U18
2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH2LP11K 2 U22

Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH2LP26K 2 T14
2 E2K/E2KM/E2KW 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K 23 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08KT 24 U68

2 E2LME/E2LMZ Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVR120APK U5
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVR125DPK U6
2 E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/E2MM/ 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K 23 U66
E2MW
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08KT 24 U68

2 E2N/E2NM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K 3 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K 4 U68
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K 2 U22
2
2 E2R/E2RM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K 35 U58
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K 5 U49
2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K 5 U53
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Right pole UVH6RP26K 5 T33
2
Notes
2 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.

2 LH (RH also available).
3 Pigtail leads.
2 4 Terminal blocks.
5 RH only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
Shunt Trip 1 Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)
Factory Number of Sets
2
Breaker Voltage Mounting Catalog Modification of Contacts Factory
Type Rating Location Number Code Breaker
Type
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Modification
Code
2
E2F/E2FM 48–127 Vac or Left pole SNT1LP08K 2 S06
48–60 Vdc E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06 2
208–230 Vac or Left pole SNT1LP12K 2 S10 2 Right A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13
110–127 Vdc
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06 2
E2J/E2JM 110–240 Vac or Left pole SNT2P11K 3 S10
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06
110–125 Vdc
2 Right A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110–240 Vac or Left pole SNT3P11K 3 S10
110–125 Vdc E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1
2
E2LME/E2LMZ 24 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT024CPK S6 2 Right ALM2M2BJPK B3
48–60 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT4860CPK S7 E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 Right A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06 2
E2MM/E2MW
110–240 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT120CPK S2 2 Right A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 48–60 Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K 2 S06 E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06 2
E2MM/E2MW 2
48–60 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP23K S86 2 Right A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13
110–240 Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K 2 S10 E2R/E2RM 1 Right A1L6RPK B05
2
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP26K 2 S42 2 Right A2L6RPK B12 2
E2N/E2NM 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K 2 S10
Notes
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT5LP26K 2 S42 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2
2 LH (RH also available).
E2R/E2RM 110–240 Vac Right pole SNT6P11K 4 S29
110–125 Vdc Right pole SNT6P26K 4 S45
3 LH or RH.
4 RH only.
2
2
Auxiliary Switch
Number of Sets Factory
2
Breaker of Contacts Mounting Catalog Modification
Type (1A and 1B) Location Number Code 2
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06
2 Right A2X1RPK A13
2
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1X2PK A06
2
2 Right A2X2PK A13
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1X3PK A06 2
2 Right A2X3PK A13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1 2
2 Right AUX2A2BPK A2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 Right A1X4PK A06
2
E2MM/E2MW
2 Right A2X4PK A13
2
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06
2 Right A2X5PK A13 2
E2R/E2RM 2 Right A2X6RPK A12
4 Right A4X6RPK A19 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
Dimensions

3 A–150 A 70 A–250 A
2
E2F/E2FM E2J/E2JM
2 Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
2 A C A C
2
2 On
Off
2 B
2 B
ON/
2
2
OFF/
D
2 Front View Side View
2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 A 4.13 (104.9)
B 6.00 (152.4)
2 C 3.38 (85.9)
D
D 3.50 (88.9)
2
2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 4.13 (104.9)
2 B 10.00 (254.0)
C 4.06 (103.1)
2 D 4.31 (109.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
2
100 A–400 A 100 A–400 A 2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW E2KE/E2KEM 2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic
Trip Units Trip Units
2
A C A C
2
2
2
2
B B
ON ON
2
2
OFF OFF
2
2
2
2
D D
Front View Side View Front View Side View
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
A 5.49 (139.4) A 5.49 (139.4) 2
B 10.13 (257.3) B 10.13 (257.3)
C 4.06 (103.1) C 4.06 (103.1) 2
D 4.31 (109.5) D 4.31 (109.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers

2
2 160 A–400 A 300 A–600 A
2 E2LME/E2LMZ E2L/E2LM/E2LW
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2 A C A C
2
2
2
On/I On/I On/I On/I
2 B B
2 Off/O Off/O Off/O Off/O
2 Trip Unit May Be Trip Unit May Be

Either Thermal/Magnetic Either Thermal/Magnetic
2 or Electronic or Electronic
2
D D
2 Front View Side View Front View Side View
2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 A 5.48 (139.2) A 8.25 (209.6)

B 10.13 (257.3) B 10.75 (273.1)
2 C 4.00 (101.6) C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.22 (107.1) D 4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
2
2
300 A–600 A 300 A–800 A
E2LE/E2LEM E2M/E2MM/E2MW 2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
A C
Trip Units 2
A C
2
2
2
On/I On/I
2
B
Off/O Off/O
2
On/I On/I
2
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
B 2
Off/O Off/O 2
D
2
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6) 2
B 10.75 (273.1)
C 4.06 (103.1)
2
D 4.38 (111.3)
D
2
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4) 2
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers

2
2
800 A 400 A–1200 A
2 E2ME/E2MEM E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2
A C A C
2
2
2
2
B
2
2 On/I On/I
ON/I
B
2
Off/O Off/O
2 OFF/O
2
2
2
2 Front View
D
Side View
2 D
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 A 8.25 (209.6) A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4) B 16.00 (406.4)
2 C 4.06 (103.1) C 5.50 (139.7)
2 D 4.38 (111.3) D 6.00 (152.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Specialty Breakers
2.5
2
2
1600 A–2000 A
E2R/ E2RM 2
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
A C
2
2
2
2
2
B
2
2
2
2
D
Front View Side View 2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
A 15.50 (393.7)
B 16.00 (406.4)
2
C 9.00 (228.6) 2
D 10.00 (254.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms Contents

2 Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-497
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-510
2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-516
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-518
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2 Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522
2
2
2
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G
2 Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used Through-the-Door Handle mechanisms are used
2 to operate molded case ● High-Performance Rotary on enclosed circuit breakers,
circuit breakers, molded case ● Universal Rotary control panels and motor
switches and motor circuit control centers in many
2 protectors. They are available different applications. Eaton
Direct (Close-Coupled)
in three basic configurations— has a handle mechanism for
2 Flange Mounted, Through-
● Universal Direct virtually any need.
the-Door and Direct (Close-
Flange Mounted
2 Coupled)—providing safe,
● Flex Shaft™
dependable operation and
2 ease of installation.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Description Page
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496 2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-498 2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-501
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-502 2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-504
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-510
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514 2
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-516
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-518 2
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522 2
2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms 2
Product Description Features 2
The high-performance rotary In addition to its robust ● NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) ● Same handle can be used
handle mechanism uses a design features, the handle and NEMA Type 4/4X on multiple frame sizes, 2
simple, yet robust design mechanism has stand-off (IP65) ratings reducing the number of
to make installation and support that allows for easy parts needed
operation easy. The external operation with a gloved hand.
● Black/Blue or Red/Yellow 2
external handle colors ● Red and yellow handles to
handle’s key functional With a shallow profile, the designate emergency
components are all metallic, handle can easily be used in
● Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can disconnecting means
2
ensuring reliability. The metal- applications where an internal be cut to size to match ● All handle mechanisms can
on-metal interface between or double door is required. enclosure depth accept padlocks or multi- 2
the handle and shaft prevents hasp locks for added
The high-performance ● Conveniently packaged as
contaminant buildup that
could impede operation, external handle can accept kit containing handle, shaft flexibility 2
while UV and chemical agent padlocks or multi-hasp locks. and mechanism ● Fast, easy installation
resistant materials protect The door is interlocked when ● Replacement parts are (see video on website for 2
the handle from heat and padlocked and cannot be available separately step-by-step instructions)
fading in direct sunlight, as bypassed. ● Metallic functional Standards and Certifications
2
well as chemicals that may components ensure
The mechanisms for EG, JG
be introduced in harsh reliability
and LG breakers have an
2
environments. ● Metal-on-metal interface internal handle that can be
between handle and shaft operated independent of 2
● UV and chemical agent- door position, and locked-out
resistant materials protect to meet one of the key NFPA 2
the handle requirements (NFPA® 79)
● Shallow profile and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
2
● Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
● NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54 2
● NEMA 4/4X, IP65
breakers and molded case
switch platforms 2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
2 Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—EG-, JG- and LG-Frame
Rating Type EG-Frame JG-Frame LG-Frame
Description NEMA IP Number Number Number
2 S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G25 JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13 —
6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G28 JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16 —
2 S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B0 / 68C6040G26 JGHMVD12B0 / 68C6041G14 —
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6040G29 JGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6041G17 —
2 S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24B0 / 68C6040G27 JGHMVD24B0 / 68C6041G15 —
24-inch shaft 1
2 4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6040G30 JGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6041G18 —
S01 Red Handle S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31 JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19 —
2 6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34 JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G22 —
S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12R0 / 68C6040G32 JGHMVD12R0 / 68C6041G20 —
2 12-inch shaft
2 S01 red handle,

24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24R0 / 68C6040G33 JGHMVD24R0 / 68C6041G21 —
2 S2 Blue Handle S2 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13 JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01 LGHMVD06B / 68C6042G01
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16 JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04 LGHMVD06BX / 68C6042G04
2 S2 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B / 68C6040G14 JGHMVD12B / 68C6041G02 LGHMVD12B / 68C6042G02
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12BX / 68C6040G17 JGHMVD12BX / 68C6041G05 LGHMVD12BX / 68C6042G05
2 S2 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24B / 68C6040G15 JGHMVD24B / 68C6041G03 LGHMVD24B / 68C6042G03
24-inch shaft 1
2 4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX / 68C6040G18 JGHMVD24BX / 68C6041G06 LGHMVD24BX / 68C6042G06
S2 Red Handle S2 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19 JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07 LGHMVD06R / 68C6042G07
2 6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G22 JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10 LGHMVD06RX / 68C6042G10
S2 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12R / 68C6040G20 JGHMVD12R / 68C6041G08 LGHMVD12R / 68C6042G08
2 12-inch shaft
S2 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24R / 68C6040G21 JGHMVD24R / 68C6041G09 LGHMVD24R / 68C6042G09
2 24-inch shaft 1
2 Notes
1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.
2 Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—NG- and RG-Frame
Rating Type NG-Frame RG-Frame
2
Catalog Catalog
Description NEMA IP Number Number 2
S3 Blue Handle S3 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01 —
10-inch shaft
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03 —
2
2
2
S3 Red Handle S3 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G02 — 2
10-inch shaft
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04 —
2
2
S4 Blue Handle S4 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05 RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01 2
10-inch shaft
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07 RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03
2
2
2
S4 Red Handle S4 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06 RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G02 2
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08 RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04
2
2
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Separate Components for Series G Frames

2
Series G Components—Shafts and Mechanisms
2 Shaft Shaft Length Mechanism
Frame Width 6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch 24-Inch 1 Only
2 EG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G97 1498D66G17
2 JG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G98 69D6025G17

LG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G99 69D6051G30
2 NG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G30
RG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G31
2
2 Series G Components—Handles Only
Rating Type Handles Only
2 S01 S01 S2 S2 S3 S3 S4 S4
Frame NEMA IP Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow
2 EG 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
2 JG 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
2 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —

LG 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
NG 1/3R/12 54 — — — — 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
2 4/4X 65 — — — — 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
2 RG 1/3R/12 54 — — — — — — 68C6048G09 68C6048G10

4/4X 65 — — — — — — 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
2
2 Series G Components—Optional Caps
As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available.
2 Catalog Number
S01 66A6032H01 Black handle cap HPHC0DGX
2 S2 66A6032H02 Black handle cap HPHC2DGX
S3 66A6032H03 Black handle cap HPHC3DGX
2
2 Series G Replacement Hardware
This kit provides replacement parts for
2 Series G high performance handle only.
Catalog Number
2
High-performance handle 66A6029G01
replacement parts kit
2
Notes
2 1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) 2
2
Front Operation
2
Handle Type Direction of Operation Door Drilling
2
Type S01
2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496
2 Universal Rotary
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-503
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-510
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-516
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-518
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522
2
2
2
2 Universal Rotary
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is The Universal Rotary Universal Rotary is UL listed
2 suitable for use with Type 1 mechanisms for EG-, JG- and and meets CSA requirements.
or 12 enclosure types. All LG-Frame MCCBs can be Universal Rotary also meets
rotary handle mechanisms operated by hand with the IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
2 include a handle “lock off” to door open or “locked off” to for international compliance.
prevent turning the breaker prevent operation with the Rotary UL File Number is
2 ON while in the OFF position, door open. E64983.
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
2 Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
2 added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
2 made of molded material.
2
2 Features
2 Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

NEMA Enclosure Type International Available Shaft
2 Number Handle Handle Indication: Markings Handle Handle Handle Lengths
Rotary of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Material Colors Rotation (Inches)
2 Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ — ■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
2 Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Universal Rotary Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms 2
Handle UL Shaft Length Complete
Color Rating in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 1 2
EG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24R
2
JG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24R
2
LG-Frame
2
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24R
2
NG-Frame 2
Black 1 6.00 (152.4) HMVD5B
RG-Frame 2
Black 1 9.00 (228.6) HMVD6B
2
Series G Rotary Series G Rotary Ordering Information 2
Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number
Shaft
Length
Complete
Catalog Standard Breaker 2
Inches (mm) Number 2 Handle 3 Mechanism 4 Shaft 5 IEC IP65 67 IEC IP66 67
N-Frame (ND and NG) 2
6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X
2
16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X 2
Notes
2
1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware.
2 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 2
3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.

4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
2
5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 2
7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
V4-T2-502
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505

Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications
Direct (close-coupled) handle The Universal Direct handle Direct (close-coupled) handle The Universal Direct handle
2 mechanisms mount directly mechanisms are rated Type 1 mechanisms are typically mechanism is UL listed,
to the circuit breaker. and Type 12. used for applications where IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
They are used in shallow high volume, standardized compliant, and meets CSA
2 enclosures where the The Universal Direct handle enclosures are being requirements.
standard variable depth mechanism is available as fabricated.
2 Through-the-door type standard with a door interlock
mechanism is not practical to prevent opening the
2 or cannot be used. enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
It is also available without a
2 door interlock.
2
Product Selection
2
2 Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms
Universal Direct
(EG–LG)
2 Black Handle Color
With Interlock Without Interlock
Red Handle Color
With Interlock Without Interlock
2 Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCRI EHMCCR

JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCRI JHMCCR
2 LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB LHMCCRI LHMCCR
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Description Page
2
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
2
Flex Shaft
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-506 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-507
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-507
2
2
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-516 2
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519 2
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522
2
2
Flex Shaft 2
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
Flange-Mounted Handle Flex Shaft comes preset from File E64983 and meets CSA 2
Mechanisms the factory, requiring only requirements.
Flange-mounted handle minor field adjustments on
mechanisms mount on the installation, which takes 2
flange of an enclosure door. about 10 minutes—a
The Flex Shaft is an extra significant time savings 2
heavy-duty mechanism that compared to installation of
includes a flexible shaft in other types of flange handle 2
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
through 10 feet (3m) for use mechanism also takes up less 2
with various size enclosures. interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
The Flex Shaft handle will handle fits standard flange 2
accept up to three padlock cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
can be remotely mounted 2
from breaker, where an
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
operator can use it by 2
“funneling” the cable
enclosures. An optional through conduit.
handle is available for Flex 2
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
2 Note: Type 4X handle Note: When selecting the length Note: The standard method
mechanisms are available. of shaft, ensure minimum of shipment includes the
2 Add Suffix X to the complete bending radius of 4 inches mechanism preset at the factory;
Catalog Number. (101.6 mm) is maintained to however, minor field adjustments
operate properly. may be required.
2
Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12
2 Flex Shaft
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 Breaker
2 (0.6)
Catalog
3 (0.9)
Catalog
4 (1.2)
Catalog
5 (1.3)
Catalog
6 (1.8)
Catalog
Frame Number Number Number Number Number
2 EG EHMFS02 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06
2 JG N/A JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06

LG N/A — LHMFS04 — —
2 NG N/A N/A F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C
RG N/A N/A F6S04 F6S05 F6S06
2
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1)
Breaker Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Frame Number Number Number Number
EG EHMFS07 EHMFS08 EHMFS09 EHMFS10
2 JG JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10
LG LHMFS07 — — LHMFS10
2
NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10C
2 RG N/A N/A N/A N/A
2
High-Performance
High-Performance Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanism 12
2 Flex Shaft Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8)
2 Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 EG EGFS02HP EGFS03HP EGFS04HP EGFS05HP EGFS06HP

JG N/A JGFS03HP JGFS04HP JGFS05HP JGFS06HP
2 LG N/A N/A LGFS04HP N/A N/A
NG N/A N/A F5S04HP F5S05HP F5S06HP
2 RG N/A N/A F6S04HP F6S05HP F6S06HP
2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 Breaker
7 (2.1)
Catalog
8 (2.4)
Catalog
9 (2.7)
Catalog
10 (3.1)
Catalog
Frame Number Number Number Number
2 EG EGFS07HP EGFS08HP EGFS09HP EGFS10HP
2 JG JGFS07HP JGFS08HP JGFS09HP JGFS10HP

LG LGFS07HP N/A N/A LGFS10HP
2 NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10HP
RG N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 Notes
1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame.
2 2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted.
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Accessories
2
Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design, Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 2
Breaker Catalog Catalog
Frame Number Number 2 2
EG AUX1EBFSEG C361KJ4
JG AUX1EBFSJG C361KJ6
2
LG AUX1EBFSLG C361KR
2
Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker
contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted 2
on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring.
2
2
Dimensions 2
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft 2
(E- through R-Frame) 1
Catalog Handle Length 2
Number 2 in Inches (mm)
C361KJ4 4.00 (101.6) 2
C361KJ6 6.00 (152.4)
C361KR Roller latch 3
2
Notes
1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
2
required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied 2
with these kits.
3 Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point
latching is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2
2 Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used Through-the-Door Handle mechanisms are used
2 to operate molded case ● High-Performance Rotary on enclosed circuit breakers,
circuit breakers, molded case ● Series C Rotary control panels and motor
switches and motor circuit control centers in many
2 protectors. They are available
● Universal Rotary different applications. Eaton
in three basic configurations— has a handle mechanism for
2 Flange Mounted, Through- Direct (Close-Coupled) virtually any need.
the-Door and Direct (Close- ● Universal Direct
2 Coupled)—providing safe, ● Euro IEC
dependable operation and ● G Direct
2 ease of installation.
Flange Mounted
2 ● Flex Shaft
● C371
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Type C371 is UL Listed under 2
Through-the-Door Handle Universal Rotary F-Frame Flange-Mounted Handle File E62635.
Mechanisms Mechanisms 2
Eaton’s through-the-door Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Flange-mounted handle Flex Shaft is UL Listed under
Mechanisms File E64983 and meets
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount on the
CSA requirements.
2
flange of an enclosure door.
or cabinet door and externally mechanisms mount directly The Flex Shaft is an extra
operate the circuit breaker via to the circuit breaker. They are heavy-duty mechanism that
Series C Rotary and Universal 2
used in shallow enclosures Rotary, are UL Listed and
a variable depth shaft or a includes a flexible shaft in
linear operator (Type MC). where the standard variable various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
meet CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
2
Each rotary type handle depth Through-the-door type through 10 feet (3m) for use IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
mechanism includes a mechanism is not practical with various size enclosures. for international compliance. 2
handle, base operating or cannot be used. They are
typically for applications The Flex Shaft handle will Rotary UL File Number is
mechanism and shaft that
can be cut to various lengths. where high volume, accept up to three padlock E64983. 2
standardized enclosures shackles, each with a The Universal Direct handle
Series C Rotary and Universal are being fabricated. maximum diameter of mechanism is UL 489 Listed, 2
Rotary handle mechanisms 3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2,
are for use with molded case The Euro IEC Direct handle used with NEMA 1, 3R and 2
mechanism can be used on and meets CSA requirements.
circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L, 12 fabricated enclosures. An The Euro IEC Direct handle
MDL), molded case switches F- through R-Frames. optional handle is available for
and motor circuit protectors. Flex Shaft that is suitable for
mechanism is IEC-240-1. G 2
The G Direct is available with Direct is UL Listed and meets
use with NEMA 4 and 4X
Type 4/4X handles are similar a black or the yellow handle,
and with or without a shroud.
environments. Flex Shaft
CSA requirements. 2
to standard handles except comes preset from the
they include an internal It is suitable for use with
neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for
factory, requiring only minor 2
field adjustments on
handle style number is use only with the G-Frame
6648C22G03. Due to (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP).
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
2
gasketing effect between significant time savings
An escutcheon ring and
the handle and the housing,
interlock clip are provided as compared to installation of 2
the handle may not indicate other types of flange handle
standard. The standard design
a tripped position.
includes a lock-off feature. mechanisms. The Flex Shaft 2
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than 2
competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange 2
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an 2
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable 2
through conduit.
The Type C371 circuit breaker 2
operating mechanisms are
designed for installation in 2
control enclosures where
main or branch circuit 2
protective devices are
required. All circuit breaker 2
mechanisms are suitable for
right-hand mounting.
2
Auxiliary contacts are not
available for mounting on
operating mechanisms.
2
Where required, have them
installed in circuit breaker. 2
Handle Extension 2
Handle extension is not
included with J, K, L, M and 2
N-Frame breakers. It must be
purchased separately. 2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
2 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-511
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-513
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Features
The high-performance rotary In addition to its robust ● NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) ● Same handle can be used
2 handle mechanism uses a design features, the handle and NEMA Type 4/4X on multiple frames sizes
simple, yet robust design mechanism has stand-off (IP65) ratings reducing the number of
to make installation and support that allows for easy parts needed
2 operation easy. The external operation with a gloved hand.
● Black/Blue or Red/Yellow
external handle colors ● Red and yellow handles to
handle’s key functional With a shallow profile, the designate emergency
2 components are all metallic, handle can easily be used in
● Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can disconnecting means
ensuring reliability. The metal- applications where an internal be cut to size to match ● All handle mechanisms can
2 on-metal interface between or double door is required. enclosure depth accept padlocks or multi-
the handle and shaft prevents hasp locks for added
The high-performance ● Conveniently packaged as
2 contaminant buildup that
could impede operation, external handle can accept kit containing handle, shaft flexibility
while UV and chemical agent padlocks or multi-hasp locks. and mechanism ● Fast, easy installation
2 resistant materials protect The door is interlocked when ● Replacement parts are (see video on website for
the handle from heat and padlocked and cannot be available separately step-by-step instructions)
2 fading in direct sunlight, as bypassed. ● Metallic functional Standards and Certifications
well as chemicals that may components ensure
The mechanisms for EG, JG
2 be introduced in harsh reliability
and LG breakers have an
environments. ● Metal-on-metal interface internal handle that can be
2 between handle and shaft operated independent of
● UV and chemical agent- door position, and locked-out
2 resistant materials protect to meet one of the key NFPA
the handle requirements (NFPA® 79)
2 ● Shallow profile and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
● Compatible with both
2 Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
● NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
● NEMA 4/4X, IP65
breakers and molded case
2 switch platforms
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame 2
Rating Type GC/GD-Frame GMCP-Frame
Catalog Catalog 2
Description NEMA IP Number Number
S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12B / 68C6039G01 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05 2
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12BX / 68C6039G03 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
2
S01 Red Handle S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12R / 68C6039G02 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06 2
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12RX / 68C6039G04 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
2
2
Separate Components for Series C Frames
2
Series C Components—Shaft and Mechanism 2
Shaft Shaft Length Mechanism
Frame Width 6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch Only 2
GC/GD 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GCHMVD / 2A92095G15
GMCP 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GMHMVD / 2A92095G16 2
GD 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 1498D34G90
FD 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 1498D34G91
2
JD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G92 2
KD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G93
LD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G94 2
MDL 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G95
ND 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G30
2
RD 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G31
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Series C Components—Handles Only

2 Rating Type Handles Only
S01 S01 S2 S2 S3 S3 S4 S4
2 Frame NEMA IP Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow
GC/GD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 — — — — — —
2 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 — — — — — —
2 GMCP 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 — — — — — —

4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 — — — — — —
2 GD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
2 FD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
2 JD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —

KD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
LD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
2 MDL 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —

4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
2 ND 1/3R/12 54 — — — — 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
2 RD 1/3R/12 54 — — — — — — 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — — — 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
2
Note
2 Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) 2
2
Front Operation
2
Handle Type Direction of Operation Door Drilling
2
Type S01
2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
2 Universal Rotary
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522
2
2
2
2 Series C Rotary
Eaton’s through-the-door These rotary handles are Series C Rotary is UL listed and
2 handle mechanisms mount robust and durable, made meets CSA requirements.
on the front of an enclosure entirely of metal parts. It also
or a cabinet door and has a lock-out tag-out level at
2 externally operate the circuit the tip of the handle for
breaker via a variable depth padlocking.
2 shaft or a linear operator
(Type MC). Each rotary type NEMA Type 4/4X handles are
2 handle mechanism includes a similar to standard handles
except they include an
handle, a base operating
internal neoprene gasket.
2 mechanism and a shaft that
can be cut to various lengths. NEMA Type 4/4X handle style
number is 6648C22G03. Due
2 Series C Rotary handle to gasketing effect between
mechanisms are used with the handle and the housing,
2 molded case circuit breakers the handle may not indicate a
(F, J, K, L, MDL), molded tripped position.
case switches and motor
2 circuit protectors.
2
Features
2
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 NEMA Enclosure Type International Available Shaft
Number Handle Handle Indication: Markings Handle Handle Handle Lengths
2 Rotary of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Material Colors Rotation (Inches)
Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
2 Universal rotary — ■ — ■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
Notes
2 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
2
Series C Rotary Series C Rotary Ordering Information
Shaft Complete Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
Length Catalog Standard Breaker
Inches (mm) Number 1 Handle 2 Mechanism 3 Shaft 4 IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56 2
F-Frame
2
J-Frame
K-Frame
2
L- and MDL-Frame
2
2
MD/MDS 2
6.00 (152.4) HM7R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G08 — —
12.00 (304.8) HM7R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G05 — —
2
16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G06 — —
2
24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G07 — —
N-Frame (ND and NG) 2
2
Notes 2
1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.

2
3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 2
5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
2 Universal Rotary
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505
2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-510
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2 Universal Rotary
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is The Universal Rotary Universal Rotary is UL listed
2 suitable for use with Type 1 mechanisms for EG-, JG- and and meets CSA requirements.
or 12 enclosure types. All LG-Frame MCCBs can be Universal Rotary also meets
rotary handle mechanisms operated by hand with the IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
2 include a handle “lock off” to door open or “locked off” to for international compliance.
prevent turning the breaker prevent operation with the Rotary UL File Number is
2 ON while in the OFF position, door open. E64983.
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
2 Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
2 added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
2 made of molded material.
2
2 Features
2 Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

NEMA Enclosure Type International Available Shaft
2 Number Handle Handle Indication: Markings Handle Handle Handle Lengths
Rotary of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Material Colors Rotation (Inches)
2 Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ — ■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
2 Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Universal Rotary F-Frame
2
Universal Rotary Series C Universal Rotary 1 2
F-Frame Handle Shaft Length Complete
Color in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 2
G-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) GHMVD06B 2
12.00 (304.8) GHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) GHMVD06R
2
12.00 (304.8) GHMVD12R
2
F-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) FHMVD06B 2
12.00 (304.8) FHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) FHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8) FHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) FHMVD24R
2
J-Frame 2
Black 6.00 (152.4) JHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) JHMVD12B 2
Red 6.00 (152.4) JHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) JHMVD12R
2
K-Frame
2
Black 6.00 (152.4) KHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) KHMVD12B 2
Red 6.00 (152.4) KHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) KHMVD12R 2
L-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) LHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8) LHMVD12B
2
Red 6.00 (152.4) LHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) LHMVD12R 2
Note
1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms

2 Description Page
V4-T2-502
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505

2 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-518
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Application Description Product Selection
Direct (close-coupled) handle Direct (close-coupled) handle
2 mechanisms mount directly mechanisms are typically Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
to the circuit breaker. used for applications where Euro IEC Direct
They are used in shallow high volume, standardized
2 enclosures where the enclosures are being Black Handle
standard variable depth fabricated. Catalog
2 Through-the-door type
Frame Number
mechanism is not practical F HMCC1B

2 or cannot be used. Standards and Certifications J HMCC2B
The Universal Direct handle The Universal Direct handle K HMCC3B
2 mechanisms are rated Type 1 mechanism is IEC 60947-1 L and M HMCC4B
and Type 12. and IEC 60947-2 compliant.
2 The Universal Direct handle
N HMVD5B
R HMVD6B
mechanism is available as
2 standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
2 enclosure while the circuit G Direct 1
breaker is in the ON position. Black Handle Yellow Handle
2 It is also available without a With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
door interlock. Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Frame Number Number Number Number
GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30
2 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30
Note
2 1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Description Page
2
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
2
Flex Shaft
Handle Mechanisms—Series C 2
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-514 2
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-520
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-522 2
2
2
2
Flex Shaft 2
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
Flange-Mounted Handle Flex Shaft comes preset from File E64983 and meets CSA 2
Mechanisms the factory, requiring only requirements.
Flange-mounted handle minor field adjustments on
mechanisms mount on the installation, which takes 2
flange of an enclosure door. about 10 minutes—a
The Flex Shaft is an extra significant time savings 2
heavy-duty mechanism that compared to installation of
includes a flexible shaft in other types of flange handle 2
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
through 10 feet (3m) for use mechanism also takes up less 2
with various size enclosures. interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
The Flex Shaft handle will handle fits standard flange 2
accept up to three padlock cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
can be remotely mounted 2
from breaker, where an
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
operator can use it by 2
“funneling” the cable
enclosures. An optional through conduit.
handle is available for Flex 2
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms
2
Flex Shaft 12
3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.5) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.0)
2 Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2 G1 F0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — —

F F1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C
2 F (dual) F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD
J F2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C
2 K F3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C
2 L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C

N — F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C
2 R — F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — —
MD, MDS (old) — F7S04 F7S05 F7S06 — — — F7S10C
2
High Performance Flex Shaft 12
3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1)
2 Breaker Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Frame Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 G F0S03HP F0S04HP F0S05HP F0S06HP N/A N/A N/A N/A
F F1S03HP F1S04HP F1S05HP F1S06HP F1S07HP F1S08HP F1S09HP F1S10HP
2 F (dual) F1S03HPD F1S04HPD F1S05HPD F1S06HPD F1S07HPD F1S08HPD F1S09HPD F1S10HPD
2 J F2S03HP F2S04HP F2S05HP F2S06HP F2S07HP F2S08HP F2S09HP F2S10HP

K F3S03HP F3S04HP F3S05HP F3S06HP F3S07HP F3S08HP F3S09HP F3S10HP
2 L and MDL N/A F4S04HP F4S05HP F4S06HP N/A N/A N/A F4S10HP
N N/A F5S04HP F5S05HP F5S06HP N/A N/A N/A F5S10HP
2 R N/A F6S04HP F6S05HP F6S06HP N/A N/A N/A N/A
2
Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms
2 Type C371
2 Operating
Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle
For NEMA 1–12 For NEMA 4/4X
Variable Depth Mechanism Only 4 Enclosure Enclosure
2 Circuit Breaker or Frame Mounting Range Catalog Catalog Catalog
Motor Circuit Protector Size Min./Max. 23 Number Number Number
2 HMCP and Series C—EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED 150 6.50–16 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2
HMCP and Series C—HJD, JD, JDB, JDC 250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6
2 HMCP and Series C—DK, HKD, KD, KDB 400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6
2 Series C—HLD, LD, LDC 600 8.50–22 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6
Series C MD, MDS—(No MDL) 800 8.75–22 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6
2 Series C—HND, ND, NDC 1200 9.75–22 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6
Notes
2 1 Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. When selecting the length of shaft,
for GMCP. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches
2 2 For increased maximum allowable Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for
IEC handle. Original narrow handle design
(101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and
R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly.
depth, see connecting rods on (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from The standard method of shipment includes
Page V4-T2-521.
2 3 Dimensions shown are from panel
catalog number. the mechanism preset at the factory;
however, minor field adjustments may
flange surface. be required.
2 4 Does not include handle. Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame
only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and
RH all other RH only.
2

Handle Mechanisms
2.6
2
Handle Only
Circuit Breaker 2
Frame Size NEMA Operating Catalog
(Amperes) Enclosure Type Handle Length Number
2
150 1/3R/3/12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1
4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2 2
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H3
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H4 2
250–1200 1/3R/3/12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5
4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6
2
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H7 2
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H8
2
Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) 2
For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting
surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is 2
mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure.
Amperes Catalog Number 2

600–1200 C371CS6
2
Connecting Rods 1
2
Application Catalog Number 2
Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200 A sizes) C371CS1
Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400 A sizes) C371CS1 2
Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200 A sizes) C371CS2
2
Note
1 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Handle Mechanisms
Handle Extension Contents

2 Description Page
V4-T2-502
V4-T2-504
Flex Shaft
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-519
2
2
2
2 Handle Extension
● Suitable for use on two- or
2 three-pole G-Frame
● Not included with J, K, L,
2 M and N-Frame breakers;
it must be purchased
separately
2 ● Included with R-Frame
breakers
2
2 Product Selection
2 Handle Extension 12
Handle Extension
2 Frame
Style
Number
2 J, K HEX3
L, M HEX4
2 N HEX5
R HEX6
2 Notes
1 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame
2 breakers. It must be purchased separately.
2 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Breakers, Contactors 3.1 Power Circuit Breakers

and Fuses Family
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2
3
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6 3
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . V4-T3-15 3
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-23
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33
3
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers with PXR . . . . . . . . V4-T3-35 3
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers with Digitrip . . . . . . V4-T3-47
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-55 3
3.2 Medium Voltage Power Contactors 3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-72
SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-74 3
SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-83
3
SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-87
3.3 Fuses General

3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-91 3
Power Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-91
Power vs. Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-91 3
Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-91
Expulsion vs. Current Limiting (Definitions per ANSI C47.40-1993). . . V4-T3-92
3
Fuse Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-92 3
General Fuse Component Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-92
3
3.4 Expulsion Fuses
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-94 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-94
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-95 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-96
3
3.5 Current Limiting Fuses
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-115
3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-116 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers
Power Circuit Breaker Contents

3 Description Page
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-3
3 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6
3 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case
3 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T3-23
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage
3 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit
3 Breakers with PXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-35
3 Breakers with Digitrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-47
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-55
3
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
3 Product Overview
3 Magnum Low Voltage Power Four Product Families

Circuit Breakers for Global Magnum consists of four Magnum DS Low Voltage Magnum IEC Air Circuit
Application product families; each Power Circuit Breakers for Breakers for IEC Rated
3 Magnum® low voltage provides specific ratings, ANSI Rated Switchgear Switchboards
power circuit breakers enable features and approvals to Applications
3 comprehensive solutions to optimize performance when
● Up to 690 Vac
meet and exceed the unique applied in power distribution
● Up to 635 Vac ● 200 to 6300 A continuous
3 and wide-ranging equipment and custom ● 200 to 5000 A continuous ● 40 to 105 kA Icu/Ics
requirements of today’s enclosures. ● 42 to 200 kA interrupting
global power distribution
3 systems. This powerful
circuit breaker offering is
3 designed for ultimate custom
configuration and application
3 flexibility, with the needs of
the power distribution
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit
3 equipment user and the
electrical equipment
Breaker Family ANSI Rated for
Switchgear Applications
Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit
manufacturer in mind.
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage
Breaker Family
Insulated Case Circuit Magnum DC Switches for

3 Breakers for Switchboard Direct Current Applications
Applications
3 ● Up to 635 Vac
● Up to 1000 Vdc
● 800 to 3200 A continuous
3 ● 200 to 5000 A continuous ● 50 to 65 kA withstand
● 50 to 150 kA interrupting rating
3
3
3
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated
3 Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated
for Switchboard Applications
Magnum DC Switch Family
3
3
3.1
Features, Benefits and Functions
● 200 kA interruption ● Two-step stored energy ● Field-installable 3
ratings with current mechanism for manually accessories (UL® listed)
limiting performance and and electrical operated common across the 3
low current let-through to breakers breaker frames and
reduce damaging energy ● Digitrip™ RMS Trip Unit designed to be easily 3
to downstream equipment family protection with installed in the field to
at high fault levels four models each providing service or modify the
breaker at the point of use
3
● Withstand ratings up to increasing levels of
100 kA to maximize protection and feature ● Secondary terminal 3
system coordination and options for coordination, contacts mounted at the
selectivity information and top front of the breaker and
● Four physical frame sizes diagnostics: away from the primary 3
(Narrow, Standard, Double ● Microprocessor-based voltage areas for improved
Narrow and Double) rms sensing safety and access. Finger- 3
to promote breaker ● Basic to programmable safe terminal blocks
application in compact overcurrent protection accommodate ring-tongue 3
modular enclosures and and alarms or spade type terminals as
standard
improve enclosure density ● Local display for ● Arcflash Reduction
Through-the-Door Design for Human 3
● Continuous current information, status Interface with the Breaker
Maintenance System Compartment Door Closed
ratings from 800 to
6300A with 100% rating
and diagnostics
Eaton’s patented Arcflash 3
● Ampere, voltage and Reduction Maintenance
at 104 ºF (40 ºC) and no
derating on most ratings
power metering System technology 3
up to 122 ºF (50 ºC)
● Power quality, provides maintenance staff
● Fixed breaker mounting
harmonics and
waveform capture
with improved safety of 3
configurations with downstream maintenance
horizontal and optional
● Communications with locations using a simple 3
vertical and front translators to common and reliable method to
protocols reduce fault clearing times
connected terminal
connections ● Zone selective and energy during an arc 3
interlocking for flash event (radiation,
● Drawout breaker
mounting configurations improved coordination sound, pressure, 3
temperature). Arcflash
with cassette and optional ● Integral Arcflash
safety shutters Reduction Maintenance
Reduction Maintenance 3
System uses a separate
● Three- and four-pole System™
analog trip circuit, providing
breaker configurations ● Breaker health faster signal processing High Technology Microprocessor- 3
● Through-the-door design monitoring and interruption times than Based Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units are
for human interface with the standard (digital)

Available With Advanced Features Like
Programmable Overcurrent Settings, 3
the breaker compartment “instantaneous” protection. Power Metering, Power Quality
and Communications
door closed The Arcflash Reduction 3
● DC rated switches for Maintenance System
direct current applications function is activated either
directly on the circuit
3
breaker through a local
switch or remotely through 3
communications or a
digital input 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Breaker Features on Front Cover Magnum DS Drawout Breaker

3 The controls and indicators 3 1 2
are functionally grouped on
3 the breaker faceplate to
optimize the human
3 interface, visibility and ease
of use. For maximum safety,
a modern, through-the-door
3 design permits access to the
4
breaker levering system, trip 5

3 unit, controls and indicators 6
with the door closed.
3 1 Red Mechanical Trip Flag
7
Pop-out Indicator
3 (Optional)—Interlocked 8
Indicator Requiring
3 Manual Reset is also
Available
3 2 Accessory Viewing
9
Windows for: j
3 ● Shunt Trip Attachment
(STA) k
3 ● Spring Release Device
(SR) l
3 ● Undervoltage Release
(UVR) Device or Second

3 STA
3 3 Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

(Model 520M Shown)
Protected by Clear Cover
3
4 Contact Status Indicators:
3 ● OPEN—Green
● CLOSED—Red
3
5 Spring Status Indicators:
3 ● Charged—Yellow Accessory Viewing Windows Visibly
Confirm the Breaker Shunt Trip, Spring
● Discharged—White
3 6
Release, and UVR Installation and Their
Control Voltage Rating
Push OFF (Open) Drawout Breaker Levering Can be
Accomplished With the Compartment
3 Pushbutton—Red Door Closed Without the Need for a
Special Levering Tool
7 Push ON (Close) Through-the-Door Design for Human
3 Pushbutton—Green Interface with the Breaker
Compartment Door Closed, for Example,
8 Manual Spring Charging Manually Charging the Stored
3 Handle for Manually Energy Springs
Charging the Stored
3 Energy Springs
9 Mechanical Operations
3 Counter (Optional)
3 j Key Off Lock (Optional)
k
Padlockable Levering
3 Device Shutter for
Drawout Breakers
3 l
Color-Coded Position
Indicator for Drawout
3 Breakers:
3 ● CONNECT—Red
● TEST—Yellow
3 ● DISCONNECT—Green

3.1
Breaker Internal Features
Magnum is designed for ease 6 Padlockable Levering 3 1 3
of access for inspection, Device Shutter for
modification and Drawout Breakers 3
maintenance at the point of 7 2
Color-Coded Position
use. The breaker front cover
Indicator for Drawout 3
is easily removed with four
captive bolts, revealing the Breakers:
modular internal breaker
3
● CONNECT—Red
features.
1
● TEST—Yellow
3
Secondary Terminal ● DISCONNECT—Green
Points for Internal Breaker

Wiring Connections
8 Secondary Contact Blocks 3
for Connection to External
2 Breaker Accessory Cell Control Wiring 3
Mounting Deck with Three 9 Removable Arc Chute 5
Positions for Mounting:
Covers for Easy Access to 3
● Shunt Trip Attachment Breaker Main Contacts
(STA) j Primary Finger Cluster
3
● Spring Release Device
Disconnecting Contacts
(SR)
for Drawout Breaker are
4
3
● Undervoltage Release
Mounted on the Breaker 7
(UVR) Device or Second Element (Not in the 3
STA Breaker Compartment) 6
3 Digitrip RMS Trip Unit for Ease of Access for 3
(Model 1150+ Shown) Inspection and Magnum Drawout Breaker Front View With Front Cover Removed
Showing Easy Access to the Breaker Internal Devices
4 Spring Charging Motor
Maintenance 3
Note: Some competitors mount 8
(Optional) for Electrically
Charging the Stored
the primary finger clusters inside
the cell, requiring shutdown of
3
Energy Springs the switchgear for inspection and
5 Manual Spring Charging
maintenance. 3
Handle for Manually
Charging the Stored
k Current Sensor Viewing 3
Windows to View and
Energy Springs Confirm Breaker Sensor
Rating
9
3
l Rigid Frame Housing 3
(Thermoset Composite
Resin) Providing
Increased Strength and
3
Durability
3
3
3
3
3
j k l 3
Magnum Drawout Breaker Rear View Showing Primary Disconnecting
Finger Clusters Mounted on the Breaker for Ease of Inspection 3
3
3
3
3
Magnum DS, MDSX and MDSL Circuit Breakers Contents

3 Description Page
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
3 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-10
3 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case
3 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33
3
3 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Magnum DS is a true
3 UL 1066 listed low voltage UL and ANSI Test Certifications Comprehensive Enclosure
power circuit breaker family, Magnum DS meets or Solutions
designed for the highest exceeds the applicable ANSI, Magnum DS has proven
3 performance requirements NEMA®, UL and CSA® performance in Eaton
of switchgear and specialty standards, including: manufactured switchgear
3 enclosure applications. with the following test
● ANSI C37.13 (Low Voltage certifications:
3 ● Magnum DS low voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers
power circuit breakers have Used in Enclosures) ● UL 1558 (Certified
The Magnum MDSL current
interruption ratings ANSI C37.16 (Preferred Magnum DS Low Voltage
3 up to 200 kA at 480 Vac,
limiting power circuit breakers have
integral current limiters to provide
●
Ratings, Related Metal-Enclosed

interruption ratings of 200 kA at Switchgear)
and short-time withstand 600 Vac. Requirements, and
3 ratings up to 100 kA at Application ● UL 1008 Standard for
635 Vac with continuous Recommendations for Transfer Switch Equipment
3 current ratings up to 5000 A Low Voltage Power Circuit ● UL, CSA 22.2.31 Low
to maximize system Breakers and AC Power Voltage Assemblies
coordination and selectivity
3 Circuit Breakers)
● Magnum MDSX current ● ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices Approvals and Marks
limiting power circuit
3 breakers have 200 kA
for AC and General
Purpose DC Low Voltage
● UL listed: Magnum DS
Breaker UL File No.
interruption ratings at Power Circuit Breakers) E52096 and Cassette
3 480 Vac with continuous ● ANSI C37.50 (Test UL File No. E204565
current ratings up to 5000 A Procedures for Low ● ABS (American Bureau
3 ● Magnum MDSL current Voltage AC Power Circuit of Shipping) Type Listed
limiting power circuit Breakers Used in Certificate Number
3 breakers have 200 kA
The Magnum MDSX current limiting
Enclosures) 04-HS422844A-DUB
interruption ratings at power circuit breakers have fast ● UL 1066 (Standard for Low ● Additional Magnum DS
3 600 Vac with continuous
current ratings up to 2000 A
opening contacts to provide
interruption ratings up to 200 kA at
Voltage AC and DC Power approvals and certificates
480 Vac without fuses. Circuit Breakers Used in can be found on
3 Enclosures) www.eaton.com
● NEMA SG3 (This standard
3 adopts ANSI C37.16 in
its entirety)
3
Product Selection
3 Contact Eaton for pricing.
3
3.1
3
Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family
3
MD S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU 3
Breaker Type Trip Unit and Protection, 3
MD = Magnum DS and External Control Voltage
When Required
Current Limiter Selection
A = Non-DSL (no limiter) NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit)
3
Frame Type
D = MA250 52 = 520 LSI
S = Standard or double
N = Narrow or double Mounting Configuration E = MA300 5G = 520 LSIG
M2 = 520M LSI
3
and Load Terminals Nameplate F = MA400
narrow MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc)
G = MA600
D = MDDX only
E = High endurance
H = Fixed horizontal
V = Fixed vertical
Language
E = English H = MA800 MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) 3
K = MB1200 MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac)
L = Drawout (MDN) A = Spanish
Interrupting/
W = Drawout (MDS) L = MB1600
M = MB2000
MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vdc)
MG = 520M LSIG 3
Withstand Rating N = MD2500 MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
4 = 42
Poles and Neutral
(Facing Front of Breaker)
P = MD3000 MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac)
MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac)
3
5 = 50
3 = Three MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vdc)
6 = 65
8 = 85 4 = Four (neutral left)
Sensor and Rating Plug Rating
NN = None
ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc) 3
C = 100 MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac)
01 = 100 13 = 1250 MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac)
H = 130 (DSH)
E = 150 (DSE)
02 = 200 16 = 1600 MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vdc) 3
05 = 250 20 = 2000 CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc)
X = 200 (DSX/DDX)
L = 200 (DSL)
03 = 300
04 = 400
25 = 2500
30 = 3000
CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac)
CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac)
3
06 = 600 32 = 3200 CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vdc)
Continuous Amperes and
Phasing (Facing Front of
08 = 800
10 = 1000
40 = 4000
50 = 5000
CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc) 3
CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac)
Breaker) 12 = 1200 CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac)
08 = 800 ABC CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vdc) 3
12 = 1200 ABC CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
16 = 1600 ABC
20 = 2000 ABC
CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac)
CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac)
3
25 = 2500 ABC CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vdc)
30 = 3000 ABC
32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC
1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc)
1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac)
3
3N = 3200 AABBCC 1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac)
4N = 4000 AABBCC 1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vdc) 3
5N = 5000 AABBCC 1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
40 = 4000 ABCABC
50 = 5000 ABCABC
1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac)
1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac) 3
1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vdc)
1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac)
3
1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac)
1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vdc) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family, continued

3
A W C H N E H K L A X
3
3 Shunt Trip (ST)
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
3 R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc Undervoltage
C = 24 Vdc Release (UVR) or Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close
3 H = 48 Vdc
B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
2nd Shunt Trip (ST) Auxiliary Switch and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons
N = None N = None N = None
(100% duty) A = UVR (110–127 Vac)
3 S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc R = UVR (208–240 Vac)
2 = 2A/2B
4 = 4A/4B
M = Metal (block close and open)
P = Plastic (block close and open)
(100% duty) C = UVR (24 Vdc) 6 = 6A/6B C = Metal (block close only)
D = 24 Vdc (100% duty)
3 K = 48 Vdc (100% duty)
H
D
= UVR (48 Vdc)
= UVR (60 Vdc)
H = Plastic (block close only)
S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close,
J = 60 Vdc (100% duty) E = UVR (110–125 Vdc) Bell Alarms Switch (OTS)
depress open)
3 6 = 60 Vdc F
G
= UVR (220–250 Vdc)
= UVR (32 Vdc)
with 2a/2b Contacts and/or
Mechanical Trip Indicator
Mech. Mech. OTS Operations Counter and/or
Motor Operator X = UVR (380–415 Vac)
3 M = Manual operated J = UVR (480 Vac) Trip Interlock Switch Keylock Provisions
K = UVR (600 Vac) Indicator for with Two Counter Keylock
N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec)
Manual Form C Provisions
3 W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec)
T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec)
1
2
= 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc)
= 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc) Reset Contacts N = No counter No locks
P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec) 3 = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) E = No — No K = No counter Kirk lock
3 L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) 4
6
= 2nd ST (48 Vdc)
= 2nd ST (60 Vdc)
N =
Y =
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
C
R
=
=
No counter Castell lock
No counter Ronis lock
K = 48 Vdc (5-sec)
S = 60 Vdc (5-sec) B = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc M= Yes Yes No S = No counter CES lock
3 1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 100% duty) L = Yes Yes Yes A = Counter No lock
2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec) O = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc F = Yes No Yes with Y = Counter Kirk lock
3 4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec)
8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) I
100% duty)
= 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty) G = Yes No
24 V reset
Yes with
L
H
=
=
Counter
Counter
Castell lock
Ronis lock indicator
5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec) Q = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) 120 V reset E = Counter CES lock
3 9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec) 9 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty) H = Yes No Yes with
240 V reset Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit Metering
I = Yes Yes Yes with Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit
3 Spring Release
Device (SRD)
24 V reset
Latch Check 1150 Voltage
J = Yes Yes Yes with
N = None Switch Connection
120 V reset
3 A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc K = Yes Yes Yes with N= None Upper terminals
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc 240 V reset M = None Lower terminals
3 C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
L =
Y=
LCS wired to SRD
LCS Wired to SRD
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
S = 60 Vdc C= LCS Wired External Upper terminals
3 D= LCS Wired External Lower terminals
3 Breaker Shipping Options and Instructions

A = Fixed breaker alone with door kit
B = Fixed breaker alone with door kit and pre-wired
3 F = Fixed breaker alone without door kit
A = Drawout breaker alone without door frame kit
C = Drawout breaker in cassette (un-wired)
3 P = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters)
S = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters)
3 W = Drawout breaker in cassette (pre-wired and shutters)
Double frame drawout breakers ship without cassette
drawout. ACBs ship in narrow and universal cassettes only.
3
Frame Use
3 X = All breakers
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Cassette Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family
3
M E 32 3 C A DN N NNN W C
3
Cassette Family
M = Standard or double frame
Cassette Shipping
C = Cassette only
3
L = Narrow or double narrow B = Breaker shipped in cassette
frame 3
Cassette Wiring
Interrupt Type Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals
P = Basic cassette
N = Un-wired 3
N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA) W = Cassette wired
L = MDSL cassettes (200 kA) (without vertical bus stabs)
X = MDSX cassettes (200 kA) C = Basic cassette with stabs
Future Use
3
D = MDDX cassettes (200 kA) (with vertical bus stab kit)
NNN = All cassettes
H = Narrow frame cassette
(with horizontal terminal pads) 3
Continuous Amperes U = Universal cassette Shutters
16 = Up to 1600 A
20 = Up to 2000 A
(with universal terminal pads)
N = No shutters 3
S = Shutters installed
32 = 2500 to 3200 A
40 = 1600 to 4000 A
Arc Hood
A = Arc hood installed
3
50 = 2000 to 5000 A
D = Dual baffled arc hood for ATS
Poles
and DC applications 1 3
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Door Frame and Gasket Kit 3
DN = Door frame and gasket kit included
XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included
3
Note
1 The arc hood option ‘D’ is recommended for use for ATS applications as well as on Magnum ANSI DC breakers, ‘DAS’ and ‘DBS’ configurations. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
3 rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1
Breaker Type Interruption Interruption Interruption Available Current Sensor and
3 Frame Catalog Frame Rating Rating Rating Short-Time Fixed Internal Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
Amperes Position 1–6 Type at 254 Vac at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating Instantaneous Trip (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
3 800 MDN-408 Narrow 42 42 42 42 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
MDN-508 Narrow 50 50 50 50 —
3 MDN-608 Narrow 65 65 65 65 —
MDN-C08 Narrow 100 100 65 20 18 x In
3 MDS-408 Standard 42 42 42 42 —
MDS-508 Standard 50 50 50 50 —
3 MDS-608 Standard 65 65 65 65 —
MDS-808 Standard 85 85 85 85 —
3 MDS-C08 Standard 100 100 100 85 85
MDS-H08 Standard 130 130 130 85 85
3 MDS-L08 2 Standard 200 200 200 — —
MDS-X08 3 Standard 200 200 65 30 30
3 1200 MDN-412 Narrow 42 42 42 42 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
MDN-512 Narrow 50 50 50 50 —
3 MDN-612 Narrow 65 65 65 65 —
3 MDN-C12
MDS-X12
Narrow
Standard
100
200
100
200
65
65
25
30
18 x In
30
3 MDS-512
MDS-612
Standard
Standard
50
65
50
65
50
65
50
65
—
—
3 MDS-812 Standard 85 85 85 85 —
MDS-C12 Standard 100 100 100 85 —
3 MDS-H12 Standard 130 130 130 85 85

1600 MDN-416 Narrow 42 42 42 42 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000,
1200, 1600
3 MDN-516 Narrow 50 50 50 50 —
MDN-616 Narrow 65 65 65 65 —
3 MDN-C16 Narrow 100 100 65 30 18 x In
MDS-516 Standard 50 50 50 50 —
3 MDS-616 Standard 65 65 65 65 —
MDS-816 Standard 85 85 85 85 —
3 MDS-C16 Standard 100 100 100 85 85
MDS-H16 Standard 130 130 130 85 85
3 MDS-L16 2 Standard 200 200 200 — —
MDS-X16 3 Standard 200 200 65 30 30
3 2000 MDN-620 Narrow 65 65 65 65 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200,
MDN-C20 Narrow 100 100 65 35 18 x In 1600, 2000
3 MDS-620 Standard 65 65 65 65 —
MDS-820 Standard 85 85 85 85 —
3 MDS-C20 Standard 100 100 100 85 85
MDS-H20 Standard 130 130 130 85 85
3 MDS-L20 2 Standard 200 200 200 — —
MDS-X20 3 Standard 200 200 65 30 30
3 Notes
1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating.
3 These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of
short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
3 the two periods.
2 Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current Limiter selected determines short-time and fixed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating
is 600 Vac.
3 3 Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
3
3
3.1
3
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers, continued
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1
3
Breaker Type Interruption Interruption Interruption Available Current Sensor and
Frame Catalog Frame Rating Rating Rating Short-Time Fixed Internal Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 3
Amperes Position 1–6 Type at 254 Vac at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating Instantaneous Trip (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
2500 MDS-625 Standard 65 65 65 65 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 3
1600, 2000, 2500
MDS-825 Standard 85 85 85 85 —
MDS-C25 Standard 100 100 100 100 2 85
3
MDS-H25 Standard 130 130 130 85 85
3
3200 MDS-632 Standard 65 65 65 65 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200,
1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200
MDS-832 Standard 85 85 85 85 — 3
MDS-C32 Standard 100 100 100 85 85
MDS-H32 Standard 130 130 130
4
85 85 3
MDS-X32 3 Double 200 200 50 50
4000 MDN-640 Double narrow 65 65 65 65 — 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000 3
MDN-840 Double narrow 85 85 65 85 —
MDN-C40 Double narrow 100 100 65 100 — 3
MDS-840 Double 85 85 85 85 —
MDS-C40 Double 100 100 100 100 — 3
MDS-H40 Double 130 130 130 130 —
MDS-X40 3 Double 200 200 5
50 50 3
MDD-X40 Double 200 200 100 100 —
5000 MDS-850 Double 85 85 85 85 — 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000 3
MDS-C50 Double 100 100 100 100 —
MDS-H50 Double 130 130 130 130 — 3
4
MDS-X50 35 Double 200 200 50 50
MDD-X50 Double 200 200 100 100 — 3
Notes
1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. 3
These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of
the two periods.
3
2 Short-time withstand for MDSC at 2500A for 600 Vac is 85 kA.
3 Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 3
4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
5 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker Contents

3 Description Page
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power
3 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker
3 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-13
3 Trip Curve Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case
V4-T3-14

3 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33
3
3 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker
The following curves illustrate the available system fault Limiter Selection
3 the ratings, melting time- current is below the The selection of a suitable
current characteristics and “threshold” current of that limiter rating for a given
current limiting, or let-through limiter, and it will offer no
3 characteristics, of limiters for current limiting effect.
application is generally
governed by a choice of
Magnum low voltage power the following types of
3 circuit breakers. The current limiting principle
protection:
is illustrated below:
3 The let-through current for a
given limiter application is la= The Available Peak Fault A. Maximum protection of
Current “downstream”
readily determined by components. Type
3 extending a vertical line from tm=The Melting Time MDSL breakers are often
the applicable maximum used for this purpose
3 available symmetrical fault Ip= The Peak Let-Through even when the
amperes at the bottom Current maximum available fault
3 margin to the characteristic
ta= The Arcing Time currents are within the
line for the particular limiter, interruption rating of the
and from this intersection
3 extending a horizontal line to
tc= The Total Interrupting
(Clearing)Time
corresponding unfused
Magnum breakers.
the left margin and reading
3 the peak current. The Current Limiting B. Protection of the circuit
withstand rating of any circuit breaker only.
3 elements protected by the
Case A would tend to use the
limiters should be at least Ia smallest available limiter;
3 equal to this peak current.
Ip Case B the largest. When
It will be noted that the let- downstream protection is
3 through current increases tm
tc
ta required, the selection is
with the limiter size or usually a compromise, since
3 ampere rating; in other certain small limiters cannot
be coordinated with the
words, the maximum current
limiting effect is obtained breaker to avoid nuisance
3 with the smallest size. This blowing on overloads or small
effect is to be expected, and moderate short circuits.
3 since the resistance
Minimum, recommended
decreases as the rating
and maximum limiter sizes
3 increases. If the vertical line
for Magnum MDSL breakers
from the bottom margin as
are given in the table on
3 described in the previous
paragraph does not intersect
Page V4-T3-13.
the limiter characteristic line,
3
3.1
Product Selection
3
Magnum MDSL Sensor/Rating Plug vs. Current Limiter Selection 1
Sensor and MDSL Current Limiter Selection Chart 2

3
Rating Plug In
200 MA250 MA300 MA400 MA600 3 MA800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000
3
250 MA400 MA600 MA800 3 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000
3
300 MA400 MA600 MA800 3 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000
400 MA600 MA800 MB1200 3 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000 3
600 MA800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 3 MD2500 MD3000
800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 3 MD3000 3
1000 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 3 MD3000
1200 MB2000 MD2500 3 MD3000
3
1600 MD3000 3
3
2000 MD3000 3
3
Magnum MDSL Ratings 3
Catalog Available Sensor/
Frame Number Rating Plug (Amperes) 3
800 MDSL08 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
1600 MDSL16 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 3
2000 MDSC20 1600, 2000
3
Notes
1 Select the current limiter based on the Magnum breaker frame and current sensor and rating
plug as shown.
3
2 Refer to MDSL current limiter curves for let-through and time characteristics.
3 The recommended ratings shown as shaded provide for reduced current let-through and 3
breaker coordination within the trip unit settings. Selection of current limiters below the
recommended ratings shown provides lower current let-through, however, trip unit settings
must be considered to avoid nuisance operation.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Trip Curve Charts

3
Type Magnum DSL Limiters, Peak Let-Through Current Type Magnum DSL Limiters Average Melting Time-Current
3 Characteristics Characteristics
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Available Current, rms Symmetrical Amperes x 10 Scale x 100 = Current in Amperes
3 Note
For Time/Current Curves, see www.eaton.com/electrical
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
3
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2 3
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6 3
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
3
Circuit Breakers
3
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T3-23 3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 3
Breakers with PXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-35 3
Breakers with Digitrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-47 3
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-55
3
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers 3
Magnum SB is a low voltage
downstream circuits at the UL and ANSI Test Certifications Comprehensive Enclosure
insulated case circuit breaker
maximum instantaneous Solutions
3
family designed for the Magnum SB meets or
performance and economic trip point and to facilitate exceeds the applicable ANSI, Magnum SB has proven
requirements of UL 891 feeder circuit breaker NEMA, UL and CSA performance in Eaton 3
switchboards. protection in UL 891 standards, including: manufactured switchboards
switchboards with 3-cycle with the following test 3
● Magnum SB insulated case bus bracing ● ANSI C37.13 (Low Voltage certifications:
circuit breakers have ● Magnum SBSE current AC Power Circuit Breakers 3
interruption ratings up to limiting power circuit Used in Enclosures) ● UL 891 (Certified
130 kA at 635 Vac with ANSI C37.16 (Preferred Pow-R-Line C Low Voltage
continuous current ratings
breakers have 150 kA
interruption ratings at
●
Ratings, Related Switchboards) 3

up to 5000 A 480 Vac with continuous Requirements, and ● UL, CSA 22.2.31 Low
● Magnum SB insulated case current ratings up to 5000 A. Application Voltage Assemblies 3
circuit breakers have The short-time withstand Recommendations for
lighter-duty short-time rating is 30 kA for standard Low Voltage Power Circuit Approvals and Marks 3
withstand ratings and fixed frame and 50 kA for double Breakers and AC Power UL listed: Magnum DS
internal instantaneous trips frame breakers Circuit Breakers) Breaker UL File E52096 and 3
on most ratings, which is ● ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices Cassette UL File E204565
characteristic of UL 489
molded case breakers
for AC and General
Purpose DC Low Voltage
3
commonly used in UL 891 Power Circuit Breakers)
switchboards. This ● ANSI C37.50 (Test
3
provides for greater Procedures for Low Product Selection
economy and excellent Voltage AC Power Circuit Contact Eaton for pricing.
3
coordination and selectivity Breakers Used in
for most commercial
applications
Enclosures) 3
● UL 1066 (Standard for Low
● Fixed internal
instantaneous trips will
Voltage AC and DC Power 3
Circuit Breakers Used in
be phased in on all
Magnum SB insulated
Enclosures) 3
case circuit breakers rated
● NEMA SG3 (This standard
3200 A and below to adopts ANSI C37.16 in
its entirety)
3
provide an extra safety
factor by reducing the 3
energy let-through to Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage
Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
Nameplate 3
3

3
Magnum SB Breaker Product Family
3
3 SB S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU
3 Breaker Type Trip Unit and Protection,
SB = Magnum switchboard and External Control Voltage
When Required
3 Current Limiter Selection
A = Non-DSL (no limiter) NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit)
Frame Type
D = MA250 52 = 520 LSI
3 S = Standard or double
N = Narrow or double Mounting Configuration E = MA300 5G = 520 LSIG
M2 = 520M LSI
and Load Terminals Nameplate F = MA400
narrow MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc)
3 D = MDDX only
E = High endurance
H = Fixed horizontal
V = Fixed vertical
Language
E = English
G = MA600
H = MA800 MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac)
K = MB1200 MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac)
L = Drawout (MDN) A = Spanish
3 Interrupting/
W = Drawout (MDS) L = MB1600
M = MB2000
MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vdc)
MG = 520M LSIG
Withstand Rating N = MD2500 MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
3 4 = 42
Poles and Neutral
P = MD3000 MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac)
MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac)
5 = 50
3 = Three MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vdc)
3 6 = 65
8 = 85 4 = Four (neutral left)
Sensor and Rating Plug Rating
NN = None
ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
C = 100 MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac)
01 = 100 13 = 1250 MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac)
3 H = 130 (DSH)
E = 150 (DSE)
02 = 200 16 = 1600 MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vdc)
05 = 250 20 = 2000 CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc)
X = 200 (DSX/DDX)
3 L = 200 (DSL)
03 = 300
04 = 400
25 = 2500
30 = 3000
CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac)
CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac)
06 = 600 32 = 3200 CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vdc)
3 Continuous Amperes and
Phasing (Facing Front of
08 = 800
10 = 1000
40 = 4000
50 = 5000
CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac)
Breaker) 12 = 1200 CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac)
3 08 = 800 ABC CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vdc)
12 = 1200 ABC CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
3 16 = 1600 ABC
20 = 2000 ABC
CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac)
CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac)
25 = 2500 ABC CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vdc)
3 30 = 3000 ABC
32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC
1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc)
1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac)
3N = 3200 AABBCC 1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac)
3 4N = 4000 AABBCC 1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vdc)
5N = 5000 AABBCC 1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
3 40 = 4000 ABCABC
50 = 5000 ABCABC
1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac)
1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac)
1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vdc)
3 1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac)
1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac)
3 1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vdc)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum SB Breaker Product Family, continued
3
A W C H N E H K L A X 3
Shunt Trip (ST) 3
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc Undervoltage 3
C = 24 Vdc Release (UVR) or Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close
H = 48 Vdc
B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
2nd Shunt Trip (ST) Auxiliary Switch and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons 3
N = None N = None N = None
(100% duty) A = UVR (110–127 Vac) M = Metal (block close and open)
S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc
(100% duty)
R = UVR (208–240 Vac)
2 = 2A/2B
4 = 4A/4B P = Plastic (block close and open) 3
C = UVR (24 Vdc) 6 = 6A/6B C = Metal (block close only)
D = 24 Vdc (100% duty)
K = 48 Vdc (100% duty)
H
D
= UVR (48 Vdc)
= UVR (60 Vdc)
S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close,
3
J = 60 Vdc (100% duty) E = UVR (110–125 Vdc) Bell Alarms Switch (OTS)
depress open)
6 = 60 Vdc F
G
= UVR (220–250 Vdc)
= UVR (32 Vdc)
with 2a/2b Contacts and/or
Mechanical Trip Indicator 3
Mech. Mech. OTS Operations Counter and/or
Motor Operator X = UVR (380–415 Vac)
M = Manual operated J = UVR (480 Vac) Trip Interlock Switch Keylock Provisions 3
K = UVR (600 Vac) Indicator for with Two Counter Keylock
N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec)
Manual Form C Provisions
W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec)
T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec)
1
2
= 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc)
= 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc) Reset Contacts N = No counter No locks
3
P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec) 3 = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) E = No — No K = No counter Kirk lock
L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) 4
6
= 2nd ST (48 Vdc)
= 2nd ST (60 Vdc)
N =
Y =
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
C
R
=
=
No counter Castell lock
3
K = 48 Vdc (5-sec)
S = 60 Vdc (5-sec) B = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc M= Yes Yes No S = No counter CES lock
1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 100% duty) L = Yes Yes Yes A = Counter No lock 3
2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec) O = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc F = Yes No Yes with Y = Counter Kirk lock
100% duty) L = Counter Castell lock
4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec)
8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) I = 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty) G = Yes No
24 V reset
Yes with H = Counter Ronis lock indicator 3
5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec) Q = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) 120 V reset E = Counter CES lock
9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec) 9 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty) H = Yes No Yes with
240 V reset
3
Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit Metering
I = Yes Yes Yes with Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit
Spring Release
Device (SRD)
24 V reset
Latch Check 1150 Voltage
3
N = None Switch Connection
120 V reset
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc K = Yes Yes Yes with N= None Upper terminals 3
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc 240 V reset M = None Lower terminals
C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
L =
Y=
LCS wired to SRD
LCS Wired to SRD
Upper terminals
Lower terminals 3
S = 60 Vdc C= LCS Wired External Upper terminals
D= LCS Wired External Lower terminals 3
Breaker Shipping Options and Instructions
A = Fixed breaker alone with door kit
3
B = Fixed breaker alone with door kit and pre-wired
F = Fixed breaker alone without door kit 3
A = Drawout breaker alone without door frame kit
C = Drawout breaker in cassette (un-wired)
P = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) 3
S = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters)
W = Drawout breaker in cassette (pre-wired and shutters)
Double frame drawout breakers ship without cassette
3
drawout. ACBs ship in narrow and universal cassettes only.
3
Frame Use
X = All breakers 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Cassette Magnum SB Breaker Product Family

3
M E 32 3 C A DN N NNN W C
3
3 Cassette Family
M = Standard or double frame
Cassette Shipping
C = Cassette only
L = Narrow frame only B = Breaker shipped in cassette
3
Cassette Wiring
3 Interrupt Type Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals
P = Basic cassette
N = Un-wired
E = SB cassette (150 kAIC) W = Cassette wired
(without vertical bus stabs)
3 N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA)
C = Basic cassette with stabs
Future Use
(with vertical bus stab kit)
NNN = All cassettes
3 Continuous Amperes
H = Narrow frame cassette
(with horizontal terminal pads)
16 = Up to 1600 A U = Universal cassette Shutters
3 20 = Up to 2000 A
32 = 2500 to 3200 A
(with universal terminal pads)
N = No shutters
40 = 4000 to 1600 A S = Shutters installed
3 50 = 5000 to 2000 A
Arc Hood
A = Arc hood installed
3 Poles
3 = Three-pole Door Frame and Gasket Kit
4 = Four-pole DN = Door frame and gasket kit included
3 XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
3
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1
3
Breaker Type Interruption Interruption Interruption Fixed Internal Available Current Sensor and
Frame Catalog Frame Rating Rating Rating Short-Time Instantaneous Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 3
Amperes Position 1–6 Type at 254 Vac at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating Trip (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
800 SBN-508 Narrow 50 50 35 20 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800 3
SBN-608 Narrow 65 65 42 20 18 x In
SBN-C08 Narrow 100 100 65 20 18 x In 3
SBS-608 Standard 65 65 65 20 18 x In
SBS-808 Standard 85 85 85 20 18 x In 3
SBS-C08 Standard 100 100 85 20 18 x In
SBS-H08 Standard 130 130 130 20 18 x In 3
SBS-E08 23 Standard 200 150 65 30 30
1200 SBN-512 Narrow 50 50 35 25 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
3
SBN-612 Narrow 65 65 42 25 18 x In
SBN-C12 Narrow 100 100 65 25 18 x In
3
SBS-612 Standard 65 65 65 25 18 x In
SBS-812 Standard 85 85 85 25 18 x In
3
SBS-H12 Standard 130 130 130 25 18 x In
3
SBS-E12 2 Standard 200 150 65 30 30
1600 SBN-516 Narrow 50 50 35 30 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600
3
SBN-616
SBN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
42
65
30
30
18 x In
18 x In
3
SBS-616 Standard 65 65 65 30 18 x In
3
SBS-816 Standard 85 85 85 30 18 x In
SBS-C16 Standard 100 100 85 30 18 x In 3
SBS-E16 2 Standard 200 150 65 30 30 3
2000 SBN-620 Narrow 65 65 65 35 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
SBN-C20 Narrow 100 100 65 35 18 x In 3
SBS-620 Standard 65 65 65 35 18 x In
SBS-820 Standard 85 85 85 35 18 x In 3
SBS-H20 Standard 130 130 130 35 18 x In 3
SBS-E20 2 Standard 200 150 65 30 30
Notes 3
1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating.
These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of 3
the two periods.
2 Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 3
3 Not released.
Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. 3

Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, continued
3 rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1
Breaker Type Interruption Interruption Interruption Fixed Internal Available Current Sensor and
3 Frame Catalog Frame Rating Rating Rating Short-Time Instantaneous Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
Amperes Position 1–6 Type at 254 Vac at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating Trip (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
3 2500 SBS-625 Standard 65 65 65 45 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
SBS-825 Standard 85 85 85 45 18 x In 2000, 2500
3 SBS-C25 Standard 100 100 85 45 18 x In
3 SBS-E25 2 Double 200 150 4
50 50
3000 SBS-630 Standard 65 65 65 50 18 x In 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
3 SBS-830 Standard 85 85 85 50 18 x In 2500, 3000

3 SBS-H30 Standard 130 130 130 50 18 x In
4
SBS-E30 2 Double 200 150 50 50
3 4000 SBS-840 Double 85 85 85 72 18 x In 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
SBS-C40 Double 100 100 100 72 18 x In
3 SBS-H40 Double 130 130 130 72 18 x In
SBN-840 Double 85 85 65 72/65 18 x In
3 Narrow
SBN-C40 Double 100 100 65 72/65 18 x In
3 Narrow
4
SBS-E40 2 Double 200 150 50 50
3 5000 SBS-850 Double 85 85 85 85 18 x In 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
SBS-C50 Double 100 100 100 90 18 x In
3 SBS-H50 Double 130 130 130 90 18 x In
4
SBS-E50 23 Double 200 150 50 50
3 Notes
1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating.
3 These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of
3 the two periods.
2 Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
3 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
3 4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
3
3
3
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+ 1 3
Interruption rating at 480 V 42–200 kA 42–200 kA 42–200 kA 42–200 kA
3
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
Protection and Coordination
Protection Ordering options LI, LSI, LSIG, LSIA LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIA 3
Fixed rating plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
Long delay Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
protection 3
Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir 2–24 sec 2–24 sec 2–24 sec 2–24 sec
(L)
Long delay time I4t No No No 1–5 sec 3
IEEE curves No No No Yes
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
High load alarm No No No 0.5–1.0 x (Ir)
Short delay Short delay pickup 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1
3
protection
Short delay time I2t at 8 x I
(S) r 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
3
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time ZSI Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
Instantaneous Instantaneous pickup 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1
protection
(I)
Making current release Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
Off position Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault Ground fault alarm No Yes Yes Yes
3
protection
(G) 2
Ground fault pickup 25–100% x (In) 25–100% x (In) 25–100% x (In) 24–100% x (In) 3
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Disable ground fault protection No No No No 3
Neutral protection (N) Model LSI only Model LSI only Model LSI only Model LSI only
System Diagnostics
3
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes
Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes 3
Programmable contacts No No No Yes
Electronic operations counter No No No Yes 3
Notes
1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included.
3
2 1200 A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.
In = Rating plug and sensor rating.

3
Ir = Long delay pickup setting.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers, continued
3
3
3
3 Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+ 1
System Monitoring
3 Digital display No 4-Character LCD 4-Character LCD 24-Character LED
3 Current (%) full scale sensor No Yes +/– 2% Yes +/– 2% Yes +/– 1%
Voltage (%) L to L No No No Yes +/– 1%
3 Power and energy (%) No No No Yes +/– 2%
Apparent power kVA and demand No No No Yes
3 Reactive power kVAR No No No Yes
3 Power factor No No No Yes

Crest factor No No No Yes
3 System Communications
Type — — INCOM/PowerNet/Modbus 2/ INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink/
3 PROFIBUS 2 Modbus 2/PROFIBUS 2
Power supply in breaker N/A Optional Standard Standard
3 Additional Features
Trip log (three events) No No No Yes
3 Electronic operations counter No No No Yes
Testing method 3
3 Test set Test set Test set Integral and test set
Waveform capture No No No Yes
3 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Mode No No Yes Yes 4

Breaker health monitor No No No Yes
3 Programmable relay functions No No No Yes 1
3 Notes
2 Requires externally mounted MMINT or PMINT module.
3 3 Test set for secondary injection.
4 Contact Eaton for availability.
3 In = Rating plug and sensor rating.

Ir = Long delay pickup setting.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum IEC Double Narrow Frame Drawout Air Circuit Breaker, With Cassette Contents
Description Page
3
3
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case 3
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers 3
Magnum Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30
3
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-32
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage 3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit 3
Breakers with PXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-35
3
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers 3
Magnum air circuit breakers
are designed to enable global IEC Test Certifications ● Eaton Tabula Low ● American Bureau of 3
power distribution solutions Magnum air circuit breakers Voltage Switchboard Shipping (ABS)
in IEC switchboards and other meet or exceed the Systems (global) for ● Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
custom enclosures. applicable IEC standards, Low Voltage Systems ● Lloyds of London
3
including: Builders
● Magnum IEC air circuit ● Eaton Elatis (Germany)
● South African Bureau of
Standards (SABS)
3
breakers have interruption ● EN/IEC 60947-2 Low Voltage
ratings up to 100 kA at ● KEMA third-party witness Switchboards
● For a complete and 3
690 Vac with continuous and follow-up testing comprehensive listing of all
● Eaton Xenergy and low voltage power
current ratings up to 6300 A
● Magnum IEC air circuit Comprehensive Enclosure
Modan switchboard breakers, please visit 3
systems (global) for www.eaton.com
breaker continuous current Solutions
frames are 100% rated. Magnum air circuit breakers
low voltage systems
builders
3
No thermal de-rating is have proven performance in
required when applying the IEC switchboards and custom Approvals and Marks 3
breaker in the low voltage enclosures manufactured by
Magnum air circuit breakers
systems enclosure at Eaton and Low Voltage
carry the following approvals
Note: The KEMA Keur Mark on
the Magnum ACB Label Confirms
3
ambient temperatures Systems Builders (OEMs) to
and approval marks: Third-Party Witness and Follow-
of 104 ºF (40 °C) the following standards:
● Magnum IEC breakers ● CE
up Testing 3
● EN/IEC 60947-1
carry the KEMA Keur Mark, KEMA Keur mark
which requires periodic
● EN/IEC 60439-1
●
● ABS (American Bureau of

3
follow-up testing, ● Eaton manufactured IEC
Shipping) Type Listed
witnessed by KEMA, to Low Voltage Switchboard
Certificate Number
3
demonstrate our product solutions include:
04-HS422844B-PDA-DUB
performs to its published ● Eaton MEM M-Form ● CCC (Certificate for China 3
nameplate ratings. This (UK) Low Voltage
Compulsory Product
differentiates Magnum
air circuit breakers from the
Switchboards
Certification) to 3
● Eaton Holec® Capitole GB14048.2-2001,
competition, where in 40 and Capitole 20
general, self-certification (Holland) Low Voltage
Certificate Numbers: 3
testing is performed on ● 2005010307139381
Switchboards
products when initially ● 2003010307094561 3
introduced with no binding ● 2003010307094558
commitments to perform 3
subsequent follow-up
third-party testing
3
3

3
Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family 1
3
MW N 5 12 4 V E A 03 MT 6 M C J 2 Y C N M W X
3
3 Breaker Frame Trip Unit and Protection,
(and External Control
I = Standard Interrupting Icu Sensor and
Rating Plug Voltage When Required)
3 or double
N = Narrow or
4
5
= 40 kV
= 50 kV Mounting Configuration
Nameplate Language
E = English
Rating NN= Non-automatic (no trip unit)
double NN = None 22= 520 LI
6 = 65 kV and Load Terminals A = Spanish
3 narrow
K = Special
8 = 85 kV H = Fixed horizontal
02 = 200
05 = 250
52= 520 LSI
5W= 520i LSIG
C = 100 kV V = Fixed vertical
1100 Vac ACB 03 = 300 M2= 520M LSI
3 Z = 25 kV
(1100 Vac MWK)
L = Drawout horizontal 04 = 400 MT= 520M LSI (24–48 Vdc)
MU= 520M LSI (120 Vac)
06 = 600
MV= 520M LSI (240 Vac)
3 Poles and Neutral
07 = 630
08 = 800 MW= 520Mi LSIG
10 = 1000 MJ= 520Mi LSIG (24–48 Vdc)
3 = Three
3 4 = Four (neutral left) 12 = 1200
13 = 1250
MK= 520Mi LSIG (120 Vac)
ML= 520Mi LSIG (240 Vac)
R = Four (reserved for neutral right) ME= 520M LSIA (24–48 Vdc)
16 = 1600
3 20 = 2000 MC= 520M LSIA (120 Vac)
MF= 520M LSIA (240 Vac)
Continuous Amperes 25 = 2500
and Phasing (Facing 30 = 3000 CT= 520MC LSI (24–48 Vdc)
3 Front of Breaker) 32 = 3200 CU= 520MC LSI (120 Vac)
08 = 800 ABC 40 = 4000 CV= 520MC LSI (240 Vac)
CE= 520MC LSIA (24–48 Vdc)
3 10 = 1000 ABC
12 = 1250 ABC
50 = 5000
63 = 6300 CC= 520MC LSIA (120 Vac)
16 = 1600 ABC CF= 520MC LSIA (240 Vac)
3 20 = 2000 ABC CJ= 520MCi LSIG (24–48 Vdc)
CK= 520MCi LSIG (120 Vac)
25 = 2500 ABC
CF= 520MCi LSIG (240 Vac)
3 32 = 3200 ABC
41 = 4000 ABC (standard C1= 520MC Arcflash Reduction
drawout only) Maintenance System LSI
(24–48 Vdc)
3 4N = 4000 AABBCC
5N = 5000 AABBCC C2= 520MC Arcflash Reduction
6N = 6300 AABBCC Maintenance System LSI
3 40 = 4000 ABCABC (120 Vac)
C3= 520MC Arcflash Reduction
50 = 5000 ABCABC
60 = 6300 ABCABC Maintenance System LSI
3 (240 Vac)
Maintenance System LSIA
3 (24–48 Vdc)
3 Maintenance System LSIA
(120 Vac)
3 Maintenance System LSIA
(240 Vac)
3 Maintenance System LSIG
(24–48 Vdc)
3 C8= 520MC Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System LSIG
(120 Vac)
3 C9= 520MC Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System LSIG
(240 Vac)
3 1W= 1150i LSI (24–48 Vdc)
1N= 1150i LSI (120 Vac)
1P= 1150i LSI (240 Vac)
3 1R= 1150i LSIG/A (24–48 Vdc)
1S= 1150i LSIG/A (120 Vac)
3 1T= 1150i LSIG/A (240 Vac)
Note
3 1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family, continued 1
3
MW N 5 12 4 V E A 03 MT 6 M C J 2 Y C N M W X
3
Shunt Trip
Attachment (STA)
Future Use 3
X = All ACBs
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
Spring Release
Device (SRD) 3
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc ACB Shipping Instructions
N = None Auxiliary Switch
C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc N = None
A = Fixed ACB with door kit
B = Fixed breaker alone with 3
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc 2 = 2A/2B
B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc door kit and pre-wired
C = 24 Vdc
(100% duty)
S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
4 = 2A/2B
6 = 2A/2B
F = Fixed ACB without door kit
A = D/O ACB only without
3
S = 60 Vdc
(100% duty) door kit
D = 24 Vdc (100% duty) Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) C = D/O ACB in cassette 3
K = 48 Vdc (100% duty) Undervoltage Release (UVR) or with 2a/2b Contacts and/or (un-wired)
P = D/O ACB in cassette
J = 60 Vdc (100% duty)
6 = 60 Vdc
2nd Shunt Trip (ST)
N = None
(pre-wired) 3
Mech. Mech. OTS S = D/O ACB in cassette
A = UVR (110–127 Vac) Trip Interlock Switch
Motor Operator R = UVR (208–240 Vac) Indicator for with Two
(shutters)
W = D/O ACB in cassette
3
C = UVR (24 Vdc) Manual Form C
M = Manual operated (pre-wired and shutters)
H = UVR (48 Vdc)
N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec)
W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec)
D = UVR (60 Vdc)
E = No —
Reset Contacts
No
Double frame D/O ACBs ship 3
E = UVR (110–125 Vdc) without cassette
T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec) N = Yes No No
P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec)
F = UVR (220–250 Vdc)
G = UVR (32 Vdc)
Y = Yes No Yes
Latch Checking Switch/Trip Unit
3
L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) M= Yes Yes No
X = UVR (380–415 Vac) Metering Voltage Connection
L = Yes
K = 48 Vdc (5-sec)
S = 60 Vdc (5-sec)
J = UVR (480 Vac)
K = UVR (600 Vac)
F = Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes with for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit 3
1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 24 V reset Latch Check 1150 Voltage
1 = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc)
2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec)
4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec)
2 = 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc)
G = Yes No Yes with
120 V reset
Switch Connection 3
3 = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) N = None Upper terminals
8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) H = Yes No Yes with M = None Lower terminals
5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec)
4 = 2nd ST (48 Vdc)
6 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc)
240 V reset L = LCS wired to SRD Upper terminals 3
9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec) I = Yes Yes Yes with Y = LCS wired to SRD Lower terminals
B = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc
24 V reset
100% duty)
O = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc
C = LCS wired external Upper terminals
D = LCS wired external Lower terminals
3
120 V reset
100% duty)
I = 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty)
K = Yes Yes Yes with
240 V reset Operations Counter and/or 3
Q = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) Keylock Provisions
9 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty)
Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close
Counter Keylock 3
Provisions
and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons
N = None
N
K
=
=
No counter No locks
No counter Kirk lock
3
M = Metal (block close and open)
C = No counter Castell lock
P = Plastic (block close and open)
C = Metal (block close only)
R
S
=
=
No counter CES lock
3
A = Counter No lock
Y = Counter Kirk lock 3
L = Counter Castell lock
H = Counter Ronis lock indicator
E = Counter CES lock 3
Note
3
1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Cassette Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family 1

3
E N 32 4 H K N N S NNN W C
3
3 Cassette Family
E = Standard or double frame IEC
Cassette Shipping
C = Cassette only
N = Narrow frame IEC
3 Cassette Wiring
Interrupt Type N = Un-wired
3 N = All cassettes W = Cassette wired
3 Continuous Amperes Future Use

20 = Up to 2000 A N = All cassettes
32 = 2500–3000 A
3 41 = 4000 A standard frame Shutters
40 = 4000 A
N = No shutters
3 63 = 5000–6000 A
S = Shutters installed
Poles
3 3 = Three-pole
Future Use
N = All cassettes
4 = Four-pole
3 Door Frame and Gasket Kit
Rear Terminals
N = All cassettes
3 H = Horizontal stabs (upper
and lower terminals)
3 Arc Hood
A = Arc hood for 690 Vac
3 K = Arc hood for 1100 Vac
3 Note
1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
3
Magnum IEC 60947-2 Rated Air Circuit Breakers
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 1
3
Available Current Sensor
Breaker Type Interruption Interruption Interruption and Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Frame Catalog Frame Rating at Rating at Rating at Withstand Rating Fixed Internal RMS Trip Unit 3
Amperes Position 1–6 Type 240 Vac Icu = Ics 440 Vac Icu = Ics 690 Vac Icu = Ics Icw 1-Sec / 3-Sec Instantaneous Trip (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
800 MWN-508 Narrow 50 50 50 50/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800 3
MWN-608 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 —
MWI-608 Standard 65 65 65 65/— — 3
MWI-808 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C08 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 3
1000 MWN-410 Narrow 40 40 40 40/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000
MWN-510 Narrow 50 50 50 50/— —
3
MWN-610 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 —
MWI-610 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
3
MWI-810
MWI-C10
Standard
Standard
85
100
85
100
85
85
85/65
85/65
—
85
3
1250 MWN-412 Narrow 40 40 40 40/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800,
1000, 1250
3
MWN-512 Narrow 50 50 50 50/— —
MWN-612 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 — 3
MWI-612 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-812 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 — 3
MWI-C12 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
1600 MWN-516 Narrow 50 50 50 50/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000,
1250, 1600
3
MWN-616 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 —
MWI-616 Standard 65 65 65 65/— — 3
MWI-816 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C16 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 3
2000 MWN-520 Narrow 50 50 50 50/30 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000,
MWN-620 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 — 1250, 1600, 2000 3
MWI-620 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 —
MWI-820 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 — 3
MWI-C20 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
2500 MWI-625 Standard 65 65 65 65/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000,
3
MWI-825 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 — 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
MWI-C25 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85

3
MWI-H25 Standard 125 125 125 85/65 —
3200 MWI-632 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000,
3
1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200
MWI-832 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
3
MWI-C32 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
MWI-H32 Standard — — 125 — — 3
4000 MWI-641 2 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 — 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
MWI-841 2 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 — 3
MWI-C41 2 Standard 105 105 85 85/65 —
MWN-64N Double narrow 65 65 65 65/— — 3
MWN-84N Double narrow 85 85 65 85/— —
MWN-C4N Double narrow 100 100 65 100/— — 3
MWI-64N Double 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-84N Double 85 85 85 85/— — 3
MWI-C4N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
5000 MWI-85N Double 85 85 85 85/— — 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000 3
MWI-C5N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
6300 MWI-86N Double 85 85 85 85/— — 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300 3
MWI-C6N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
Notes
3
1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published breaker I
2 Magnum IEC standard frame breakers rated for 4000 A continuous current are available in drawout configuration only.
cw rating.
3
Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers
3
3
3
3 Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520i Digitrip 520Mi Digitrip 520MCi Digitrip 1150i+ 1
3
Interruption rating at 690 V 40–100 kA 40–100 kA 40–100 kA 40–100 kA
3 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes

Protection and Coordination
3 Protection Ordering options LI, LSI, LSIG, LSIA LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Fixed rating plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Long delay
protection
Long delay setting 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir 2–24 sec 2–24 sec 2–24 sec 2–24 sec
(L)
3 Long delay time I4t No No No 1–5 sec
IEC Type A, B, C curves No No No Yes
3 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
High load alarm No No No 0.7–1.0 x Ir
3 Short delay Short delay pickup 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 200–1000% x (Ir) and M1 150–1000% x (Ir) and M1
protection
3 (S)
Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
3 Short delay time ZSI Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Instantaneous pickup 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1 200–1000% x (In) and M1
3 protection
Making current release Yes Yes Yes Yes
(I)
Off position Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
Earth fault Earth fault alarm No Yes Yes Yes
protection
3 (G)
Earth fault pickup 25–100% x (In) 25–100% x (In) 25–100% x (In) 24–100% x (In)
Earth fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
3 Earth fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Earth fault ZSI Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Earth fault memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Disable ground fault protection No No No Yes

Neutral protection (N) Model LSI only Model LSI only Model LSI only Model LSI only
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Magnitude of trip information No No No Yes
Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes
3 Programmable contacts No No No 2
3 Notes
3 In = Rating plug rating.

Ir = LDPU setting.
i Trip units are only used on IEC breakers with earth fault.
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers, continued
3
3
3
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520i Digitrip 520Mi Digitrip 520MCi Digitrip 1150i+ 1 3
System Monitoring
3
Digital display No 4-Character LCD 4-Character LCD 24-Character LED
Current (%) full scale sensor No Yes +/– 2% Yes +/– 2% Yes +/– 1% 3
Voltage (%) L to L No No No Yes +/– 1%
Power and energy (%) No No No Yes +/– 2% 3
Apparent power kVA and demand No No No Yes
Reactive power kVAR No No No Yes
3
Power factor No No No Yes
3
Crest factor No No No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes 3
% THD No No No Yes
System Communications 3
Type — — INCOM/PowerNet/Modbus 2/ INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink/
PROFIBUS 2 Modbus 2/PROFIBUS 2 3
Power supply in breaker N/A Optional Standard Standard
Additional Features
3
Trip log (three events) No No No Yes
3
Electronic operations counter No No No Yes
Testing method 3 Test set Test set Test set Integral and test set 3
Waveform capture No No No Yes
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Mode No No Yes Yes 4 3
Breaker health monitor No No No Yes
Programmable relay functions No No No Yes 1
3
Notes 3
2 Requires externally mounted MMINT or PMINT module.
3 Test set for secondary injection.
3
4 Contact Eaton for availability.
In = Rating plug rating.

3
Ir = LDPU setting.
i Trip units are only used on IEC breakers with earth fault. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Power Circuit Breaker
Magnum Options and Accessories

3
Breaker-Mounted Options ● Undervoltage Release ● Mechanical Operations
3 and Accessories (UVR). Trips the breaker Counter. Records
Magnum breakers are when an existing voltage mechanical operations
3 available with a signal is lost or falls below
an established threshold
of the breaker over its
installed life
comprehensive array of
factory-installed breaker
3 options to enable configured-
● Auxiliary Switch. Up to
6a/6b auxiliary individual
● Key Off Lock Provisions.
Enables mounting of a
to-order solutions for dedicated contacts are single cylinder Kirk®,
3 specified customer available for customer use Castell or Ronis key lock
requirements. Field option to indicate if the breaker is to lock the breaker in the
3 kits are available to provide in the OPEN or CLOSE OPEN position
easy service, modification position ● Latch Check Switch.
3 and customization of the
breaker at the point of use.
● Mechanical Trip Indicator Provides 1 Form C
Flag. The red trip indicator (changeover contact) that Shunt Trip, Spring Release and
Undervoltage Release Device Installed
3 ● Shunt Trip device (ST). flag pops out to provide
local visual indication when
changes state when the
breaker is ready to close.
on Accessory Deck
Provides for remote
the Digitrip RMS trip unit Can be wired to the Spring
3 electrically controlled
acts to trip the breaker on Release Device for fast
breaker opening when
energized by a rated an overcurrent condition. transfer applications
3 voltage input Available in two options: or wired for external
an interlocked version that ready-to-close indication
● Spring Charge Motor
3 (MOT). Charges the
mechanically locks out the
breaker until the indicator
breaker closing springs
3 automatically, facilitating
is manually reset and a
non-interlocked version for
remote or local closing.
indication only.
3 The motor assembly
● Bell Alarm/Overcurrent
Auxiliary Switches Come in Modular
2a/2b Contact Stages Providing up to
includes its own cut-off
Trip Switch (OTS). 6a/6b Dedicated Contacts
3 switch that changes state
at the end of the charging Provides 2 Form C
cycle. This contact can be (changeover) contacts that
3 wired out for external change state when the
indication Digitrip RMS trip unit acts
3 ● Spring Release device
to trip the breaker on an
overcurrent condition. The Arc Chutes are Easily Removable
(SR). Provides for remote for Inspection and Access to
contacts are available for
3 electrically controlled
external indication or Breaker Contacts
breaker closing when its
customer use and are
3 coils are energized by a
rated voltage input
manually reset by the
3 ● Padlockable Pushbutton
Cover. Permits padlocking
3 hinged cover plates to
block access to the PUSH
3 ON and PUSH OFF buttons
on the breaker faceplate Heel-Toe Contact Design Provides
Demonstrated Long Life and Includes Mechanical Trip Indicator With Bell
3 Wear Indicator for Visual Inspection Alarm (OTS) Switches Mounted
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum Breaker Control Device Application Guide—Vdc
Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage 24 Vdc 32 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
3
Shunt Trip (ST)—Trip Circuit
3
Operational voltage range 70–110% 17–26 Vdc — 34–53 Vdc 42–66 Vdc 77–138 Vdc 154–275 Vdc
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 35 ms 1 250 W — 250 W 250 W 450 W 450 W 3
Opening time Seconds 35 ms — 35 ms 35 ms 35 ms 35 ms
Spring Release (SR)—Close Circuit 3
Operational voltage range 70–110% 17–26 Vdc — 34–53 Vdc 42–66 Vdc 77–138 Vdc 154–275 Vdc
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 200 ms 250 W — 250 W 250 W 450 W 450 W
3
Closing time Seconds 40 ms — 40 ms 40 ms 40 ms 40 ms 3
Spring Charge Motor (MOT)
Operational voltage range 85–110% voltage 20–26 Vdc — 41–53 Vdc 51–66 Vdc 94–138 Vdc 187–225 Vdc 3
Amperes (running) Running 12.0 A — 5.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A
Amperes (inrush) % of running 300% — 500% 500% 600% 600%
3
Power consumption — 300 W — 250 W 250 W 250 W 250 W
3
Charging time Seconds 5 sec — 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec
Undervoltage Release (UVR) 3
Operational voltage range 85–110% voltage 20–26 Vdc 27–35 Vdc 41–53 Vdc 51–66 Vdc 94–138 Vdc 187–275 Vdc
Dropout voltage range 30–60% voltage 7–14 Vdc 10–19 Vdc 14–29 Vdc 18–36 Vdc 33–75 Vdc 66–150 Vdc 3
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 200 ms 250 W 275 W 275 W 275 W 450 W 450 W
Power consumption (continuous) Required for 400 ms 18 W 15 W 18 W 18 W 10 W 10 W
3
Opening time Seconds 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms
3
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load contact rating Inductive load 0.5 A — 0.5 A — 0.5 A 0.25 A 3
3
Magnum Breaker Control Device Application Guide—Vac
Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage 120 Vac 240 Vac 415 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 3
Shunt Trip (ST)—Trip Circuit
Operational voltage range 70 –110% 77–140 Vac 146–264 Vac — — —
3
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 35 ms 450 VA 450 VA — — —
3
Opening time Seconds 35 ms 35 ms — — —
Spring Release (SR)—close circuit 3
Operational voltage range 70–110% 77–140 Vac 146–264 Vac — — —
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 200 ms 450 VA 450 VA — — — 3
Closing time Seconds 40 ms 40 ms — — —
Spring Charge Motor (MOT)
3
Operational voltage range 85–110% voltage 93–140 Vdc 177–305 Vdc — — — 3
Amperes (running) Running 2.0 A 1.0 A — — —
Amperes (inrush) % of running 600% 600% — — — 3
Power consumption — 250 VA 250 VA — — —
Charging time Seconds 5 sec 5 sec — — —
3
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
3
Operational voltage range 85–110% voltage 94–140 Vac 177–264 Vac 323–457 Vac 408–528 Vac 510–660 Vac
Dropout voltage range 30–60% voltage 33–76 Vac 62–144 Vac 114–249 Vac 144–288 Vac 180–360 Vac 3
Power consumption (inrush) Required for 200 ms 450 VA 400 VA 480 VA 400 VA 400 VA
Power consumption (continuous) Required for 400 ms 10 VA 10 VA 10 VA 10 VA 10 VA 3
Opening time Seconds 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms
Auxiliary Switches
3
Minimum load contact rating Inductive load 10 A 10 A — — —
3
Note
1 100% duty shunt trips require power consumption (inrush) for 200 ms. 3
Wiring Diagrams
3
3 Typical Magnum Breaker Control Circuit
3 Legend:
LS Limit Switch for Closing Spring
MOT Motor for Spring Charging
3 ST Shunt Trip 1
SR Spring Release Close Open G Open R
3 UVR Undervoltage Release
OTS Overcurrent Trip Switch
3 Description of Operation: B12 B15 B26 B10 B24 A7 A1 A2 A3
1 — Motor is energized through
3 LS contact. Lever
in Door
2 — Motor runs and charges closing Switch
3 spring.
3 — When closing spring is fully charged, Control
(Draw-
out Only)
a.
LS contacts change state. Power OTS 1*

3 4 — Close contacts energize SR coil. SR L.S. b. ST a. UVR OTS 2*
5 — When breaker closes, “b” opens.
3 6 — LS contacts change state and motor
recharges closing springs.
MOT
3
B13 B14 B27 B11 B25 A8 A4 A5 A6
Notes
3 * Contacts shown for breaker open (not fully charged),
not tripped.
3 – – – – Dotted line denotes Magnum Breaker.
1 Not needed with 100% duty rated shunt.
3
3 MDSEOBKR
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches Contents
Description Page
3
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12 3
Circuit Breakers 3
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T3-23
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage 3
Switches
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-34 3
3
Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches 3
Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 3
Eaton Magnum DC switches The new DC switch in the UL and ANSI Test Certifications Approvals and Marks
are a comprehensive offering industry-proven Magnum Magnum DC switches meet ● UL listed: Magnum DS 3
of third-party and globally platform provides DC or exceed the applicable Breaker UL File No.
certified DC switches that are
designed to provide excellent
technology in a common
power breaker platform.
ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA E52096 and Cassette 3
standards, including: UL File No. E204565
safety with a high level of
performance that meets the
● The DC switch provides ● ANSI C37.14 (Low Voltage
● ABS (American Bureau of 3
disconnect and switching DC Power Circuit Breakers Shipping) Type Approval
demands of a global market.
to meet demanding Used in Enclosures) ● CE 3
Applications industry standards: ● ANSI C37.16 (Preferred ● CCC (Certificate for China
The new line of Magnum DC ● UL1066—300 Vdc,
50 kA withstand and
Ratings, Related Compulsory Product
Certification) to
3
switches covers a wide range Requirements, and
industry applications. interruption, up to 3200 A GB14048.2-2001
continuous current
Application Recommendations
for Low Voltage Power ● Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
3
● Utility companies ● UL 489—600 Vdc, Circuit Breakers and AC Lloyds of London
incorporating DC facility
50 kA withstand and and DC Power Circuit
●
3
power and control for ● South African Bureau of
interruption, up to 3200 A Breakers) Standards (SABS)
emergency or redundant
power
continuous current ● ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices ● For a complete and
3
● IEC 60947-2—1000 Vdc, for AC and General comprehensive listing of all
Backup UPS power
●
systems requiring means

25 kA interruption and Purpose DC Low Voltage low voltage power 3
65 kA withstand, up to Power Circuit Breakers) breakers, please visit
to disconnect the battery
for isolation and
3200 A ● UL 1066 (Standard for Low www.eaton.com 3
maintenance ● Common accessories with Voltage AC and DC Power
● SCR and drive isolation the Magnum AC line of Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures)
3
switches for maintenance power circuit breakers
and emergency disconnect reduces inventory and ● UL 489 Molded Case
Switches
3
integration time
Product Selection
● Fixed and drawout versions
IEC Test Certification Contact Eaton for pricing. 3
address important design
criteria, balancing cost, size Magnum Air Circuit Breakers
and serviceability meet or exceed the 3
applicable IEC standards
● Internationally approved
factory-installed and field- ● EN/IEC 60947-2
3
installable accessories
identical to the Magnum air 3
circuit breaker offering
3
3

3
Ratings for Magnum DC Switches
3 Number Frame DC Voltage/ For Use in
Catalog Frame of Ampere Interrupt Rating/ Load Grounded Connection Fixed/
3 Type/standard Type Poles Rating Withstand Rating Switching Systems Type Drawout Certification
ANSI/UL 1066 ratings at 300 Vdc
3 DAS Standard 3 1600 300 V / 50 kA / 50 kA Yes Yes Two-pole in series Drawout UL 1066
DAS Standard 3 2000 300 V / 50 kA / 50 kA Yes Yes Two-pole in series Drawout UL 1066
3 DAS Standard 3 3200 300 V / 50 kA / 50 kA Yes Yes Two-pole in series Drawout UL 1066
3 UL 489 ratings at 600 Vdc

DBS Standard 3 3200 600 V / 50 kA / 50 kA Yes Yes Three-pole in series Both UL 489
3 IEC ratings at 1000 Vdc 1
DEM/DGM Narrow 3 800 1000 V / 25 kA / 65 kA Yes No/yes 1 Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
3 DEM/DGM Narrow 3 1000 1000 V / 25 kA / 65 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
DEM/DGM Narrow 3 1250 1000 V / 25 kA / 65 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
DEK/DGK Standard 3 2500 1000 V / 25 kA / 85 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
3 DEK/DGK Standard 3 3200 1000 V / 25 kA / 85 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
DEM/DGM Double narrow 6 4000 1000 V / 25 kA / 100 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
3 DEM/DGM Double narrow 6 5000 1000 V / 25 kA / 100 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
DEK/DGK Double standard 6 4000 1000 V / 25 kA / 100 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
3 DEK/DGK Double standard 6 5000 1000 V / 25 kA / 100 kA Yes No/yes Three-pole in series Both IEC 60947-2
3 Note
1 DE is for use in ungrounded applications; DG is for use in grounded applications.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Contents
with Power Xpert Release Trip Unit (PXR)
Description Page
3
3
3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 3
Breakers with PXR 3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-38
Series NRX with Series NRX with Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit
PXR NF Drawout Breaker PXR RF Fixed Breaker Breakers with Digitrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-47 3
3
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers with PXR 3
Product Description Application Description 3
Series NRX is a low voltage The compact sizes of the two The Series NRX circuit
power circuit breaker suitable Series NRX circuit breakers, breaker provides all the 3
for UL 1558, UL 891, NF and RF frames, help capabilities of a power circuit
and IEC switchgear and reduce non-revenue breaker in the compact size
switchboards. The compact generating floor space, and of a molded case breaker.
3
size and weight of three-pole the modular design and It offers you the same
drawout with cassette Series common accessories allow protection and performance 3
NRX, see Pages V4-T3-39 for easy panel and —along with increased
and V4-T3-41, allows for a switchboard integration. flexibility—at half the size 3
24.00 (609.6 mm) switchgear The Series NRX circuit of a typical power circuit
enclosure. Series NRX with
Power Release Xpert (PXR)
breakers combine high
interruption and short time
breaker. 3
trip unit is available with a withstand ratings with easy Eaton’s new PXR electronic
variety of cable and bus to integrate communications. trip units provide advanced 3
connection options: rear NF Frame is rated for 800 A metering, communication and
fixed, front fixed, fixed hybrid (UL 1066), 800 A and 1200 A diagnostic features with an 3
and drawout. (UL 489) and 630–1600 A easy-to-use interface. The
(IEC 60947-2) with an Power Xpert® Protection 3
The breaker ratings are: interrupting capacity of 65 kA Manager (PXPM) software for
the PXR trip units can provide
NF Frame with short time withstand at
42 kA at the 440/480 Vac and perform secondary 3
● 800–1200 A for UL 489 injection and test reporting
level. RF Frame is rated for
● 630–1600 A IEC 60947-2 800–3000 A (UL 489) and through a PC to simplify 3
800–4000 A (IEC 60947-2) testing, serviceability and
RF Frame
● 800–3000 A for UL 489
with an interrupting capacity customization. 3
of 100 kA with short time
800–4000 A for IEC 60947-2
●
withstand at 65 kA (or 85 kA 3
for IEC 60947-2) at the
440/480 Vac level.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Features, Benefits and ● “Direct Drive” ● Arcflash Reduction Standards and Certifications
3 Functions mechanism— Maintenance System— ● UL 489 (molded case
Series NRX utilizes several symmetrically loaded Eaton’s patented circuit breakers, molded
3 innovative technologies: forces of the two-staged technology provides case switches and circuit
stored energy mechanism maintenance staff with breaker enclosures)
3 ● Rogowski coil—does not
saturate like iron core
improves robustness,
reliability, and achieves
improved safety of
downstream maintenance
● IEC 60947-1 (low voltage
switchgear and controlgear
sensors, and one sensor improved breaker locations using a simple
3 accommodates 200–1600 life ratings and reliable method to
—Part 1 general rules)
ampere range for NF and reduce fault clearing times ● IEC 60947-2 (low voltage
● Fold-up cassette—with this
3 800–4000 for RF. You never simple design, all items in and energy during an arc switchgear and controlgear
have to change a sensor flash event (radiation, —Part 2 circuit breakers)
a cassette are replaceable
3 and CTs are not required without removing the sound, pressure, ● CSA 22.2 (molded case
circuit breakers, molded
● Tension clamp secondary cassette from the cell temperature). Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance case switches and circuit
3 terminals—10 A continuous ● “Arc chute” design
System uses a separate breaker enclosures)
rating at 600 V meets UL/ ● Breaker-mounted racking
CSA/RoHS and UL-94 V0. analog trip circuit, providing ● UL 891 (deadfront
3 Mounted directly to fixed
or levering-in device— faster signal processing switchboard)
Racking device is mounted and interruption times than
breaker or drawout ● UL 1558 (metal-enclosed
3 cassette, they reduce
on the breaker, decreasing
the width of the cassette,
the standard (digital) low voltage power circuit
wiring throughout “instantaneous” protection. breaker switchgear)
because the cassette is not
3 enclosure and provide burdened with the cost or
The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
clean, organized wiring parts of the lev-in function is activated either
3 schemes ● Plug-n-Play accessories— directly on the circuit
● A Modbus® communication No special tools needed. breaker through a local
3 port is standard in the
PXR 25 trip units and is
Accessory comes with switch or remotely through
plug and wires ready to communications or a digital
available as an option on
3 PXR 20 trip units. This
install input
native Modbus RTU Note: UL 489: For In ≤ 2500 A,
3 capability gives access to mechanical ops =2500. For In
breaker status and metering < 2500, mechanical ops = 1500.
3 information. Additional For In ≤ 2500 A, mechanical ops =
3000. For In >2500, mechanical
PCAM, MCAM or ECAM
ops = 2000.
modules can be installed
3 externally for PXR to expand
the communication
3 capability and simplify
integration into existing
3 electrical system design and
protocols
3
Reference Information—Series NRX with PXR Publications
3
List of Instruction Leaflets and Manuals
3 Description
Publication
Number
Frame
Number
3 NF Frames
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Operation Counter IL01301011E NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Cassette IP20 Safety Shutters IL01301013E NF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed Breaker Arc Hood IL01301014E NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Breaker Primary Adapters IL01301016E NF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Breaker and Cassette Interphase Barriers IL01301021E NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Pushbutton Cover Kit IL01301041E NF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Circuit Breaker 2-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301069E NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Circuit Breaker 3-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301070E NF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed Circuit Breaker 2-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301071E NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed Circuit Breaker 3-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301072E NF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Cassette Door Interlock IL01301073E NF
3 Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Neutral Current Sensor—Type NF IL0131090EN NF
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Cassette Cell Switch—Type NF IL0131097EN NF
3 Series NRX—Fixed Breaker Rear Connect and Front Connect Configurations IL0131123EN NF
Series NRX with PXR, Type NF low voltage power (air) circuit breakers instruction manual MN013001EN NF
3 Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Pop-Out Mechanical Trip Indicator IL01301019E NF

3.1
List of Instruction Leaflets and Manuals, continued
Publication Frame 3
Description Number Number
RF Frames 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Cassette IP20 Safety Shutters IL01301044E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Breaker and Cassette Interphase Barrier IL01301048E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Rear Primary Adapters IL01301053E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Operation Counter IL01301055E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Front Connect Adapters IL01301056E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Pop-Out Mechanical Trip Indicator IL01301058E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Circuit Breaker 2-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301059E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Drawout Circuit Breaker 3-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301060E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed Circuit Breaker 2-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301061E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed Circuit Breaker 3-Way Cable Interlock Kit IL01301062E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Lev-in Key Interlocks IL01301063E RF
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Pushbutton Cover Kit IL01301065E RF 3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Cassette Door Interlock IL01301066E RF
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Neutral Current Sensor—Type RF IL0131094EN RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Cassette Cell Switch—Type RF IL0131095EN RF
Series NRX with PXR, Type RF low voltage power (air) circuit breakers instruction manual MN013002EN RF
3
NF and RF Frames
Series NRX NF & RF Circuit Breakers with PXR 20/25 Trip Units - Time Current Curves AD013001EN NF and RF
3
Series NRX Drawout Circuit Breaker and Cassette Rejection Interlocks
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Fixed and Drawout Breaker Door Escutcheon
IL01301006E
IL01301012E
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for IP55 Dust and Water-Resistant Cover
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Kirk Key Interlock Kit
IL01301038E
IL01301039E
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Ronis Key Lock Kit
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for CES Key Lock Kit
IL01301040E
IL01301049E
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX—Installation Instructions for Castell Key Lock Kit
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for PT Module
IL01301050E
IL01301074E
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Undervoltage Release, Shunt Trip, and Overcurrent Trip Switch
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Spring Release, Latch Check Switch, and Motor Operator
IL0131087EN
IL0131088EN
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Source Ground and Zero Sequence Ground Sensor
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Modbus Communications Adapter Module (MCAM)
IL0131089EN
IL0131091EN
NF and RF
NF and RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for PROFIBUS DP Communications Adaptor Module (PCAM) IL0131092EN NF and RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Secondary Terminal Blocks IL0131093EN NF and RF
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for Auxiliary Switch IL0131096EN NF and RF
3
Series NRX with PXR—Instructions for INCOM Communications Adapter Module IL0131124EN NF and RF
Series NRX with PXR—Installation Instructions for Ethernet Communications Adapter Module IL0131125EN NF and RF 3
PXR 20/25 Trip Unit for Series NRX Screen Navigation Guide IL0131128EN NF and RF
Time Delay Undervoltage Module for use with Undervoltage Release in Eaton Circuit Breakers IL5721B33 NF and RF 3
PXR 20/25 Trip Unit for Series NRX User Manual MN013003EN NF and RF
Series NRX with PXR Circuit Breaker Wiring Diagrams TD013001EN NF and RF 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release NF Frame Circuit Breaker (exclusionary rules apply)
3
N G S6 08 3 W 2A 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
Breaker Frame Size Spring Release,
3 N = NF-frame for UL 489 Motor Operator Latch Check Switch
or IEC M = Manually operated N = No spring release, no LCS
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
3 B = 110–125 Vac/Vdc
W = 110–125 Vdc B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
T = 208–250 Vac/Vdc C = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external
3 Standard, Mechanism, Device
G = IEC 60947-2, stored energy,
P = 220–250 Vdc
L = 24 Vdc
R
S
=
=
208–250 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
208–250 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
air breaker Continuous Rating H = 48 Vdc T = 208–250 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external
3 Y = UL 489, stored energy, (In in Amperes) S = 60 Vdc L = 24 Vdc, no LCS
insulated case breaker 0 = Non-auto P = 24 Vdc, spring release LCS
Q = 24 Vdc, LCS wired external
3 switch
1 = 200 Shunt Trip H = 48 Vdc, no LCS
Fault Current Rating 2 = 250 J = 48 Vdc, spring release LCS
N = No shunt trip
3 R4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only) 3 = 300
4 = 400
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
K
1
=
=
48 Vdc, LCS wired external
60 Vdc, no LCS
R5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only) R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc
R6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only) 5 = 500 2 = 60 Vdc, spring release LCS
L = 24 Vdc
3 S4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489) 6 = 600 H = 48 Vdc
3 = 60 Vdc, LCS wired external
or 415 Vac IEC 7 = 630 (IEC only) S = 60 Vdc
8 = 800
3 S5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489)
or 415 Vac IEC A = 1000 (IEC only)
S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489 only), B = 1200 (UL only)
3 66 kA at 415 Vac IEC C = 1250 (IEC only)
D = 1600 (IEC only)
3
Frame Rating (Amperes) Trip Unit, Power Supply
3 07
08
= 630 (IEC only)
= 800
SW = Non-automatic switch, available only for fault current rating configuration S4
2A = PXR20 LSI
10 = 1000 (IEC only) 2B = PXR20 LSI with Modbus
3 12
13
= 1200 (UL only)
= 1250 (IEC only)
2H = PXR20 LSI with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
2K = PXR20 LSI with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
16 = 1600 (IEC only) 2C = PXR20 LSIG
3 2D = PXR20 LSIG with Modbus
2E = PXR20 LSIG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
2F = PXR20 LSIG with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 Poles, Phasing
2P = PXR25 LSI with Modbus
3 = Three-pole, ABC
2Q = PXR25 LSI with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
4 = Four-pole, NABC
3 2R = PXR25 LSIG with Modbus
2S = PXR25 LSIG with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 Mounting Configuration
W = Drawout
3 B = Fixed mount rear connected with side mounting brackets
F = Front connected, fixed mount, for bus or cable connections with
side mounting brackets 1
3 H = Fixed hybrid breaker, top rear connect and bottom front connect 2
J = Fixed hybrid breaker, top front connect and bottom rear connect 2
3
Notes
3 1 Four-pole cable kit only available up to 50 kA, 65 kA cable kit not available at this time.
2 UL 489 three-pole only.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release NF Frame Circuit Breaker (exclusionary rules apply), continued
3
N G S6 08 3 W 2A 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
N
UVR, Second Shunt Trip
= None
3
A = 110–125 Vac/Vdc UVR Trip Indicator and Secondary Remote
R = 220–250 Vac/Vdc UVR Bell Alarm 1 OTS Terminal Blocks Reset Drawout Breaker Shipping, Fixed Breaker 3
L = 24 Vdc UVR N None None Per breaker options None Terminals (Door frame kit ships as standard
H = 48 Vdc UVR
S = 60 Vdc UVR
X
Z
Trip indicator
Trip indicator
None
2 Form C
Per breaker options
Per breaker options
None
None
unless noted otherwise)
D = Drawout breaker shipping alone, without door
3
1 = 110–127 Vac/Vdc M Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options None frame kit
2
second shunt trip
= 208–240 Vac/Vdc
Y
1
Interlock trip indicator
None
2 Form C
None
Per breaker options
Full complement
None
None
C = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette, 3
no shutters, no terminals
second shunt trip 2 Trip indicator None Full complement None 1 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
4
8
= 24 Vdc second shunt trip
3 Trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement None no shutters, short vertical/horizontal 3
4 Interlock trip indicator None Full complement None 2 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
9 = 60 Vdc second shunt trip 5 Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement None no shutters, long vertical/horizontal
4 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
3
with shutters, short vertical/horizontal
5 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette, 3
Auxiliary Switches, Pushbutton Safe OFF Operations with shutters, long vertical/horizontal
Label Language Padlock Cover Feature Counter 9 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
E = No auxiliary switches, English N No None No with shutters, no terminals 3
2 = 2 Form C, English A No — Provided K = Rear connect, fixed breaker, no terminal
4 = 4 Form C, English B
J
Yes (plastic/plastic)
—
—
No
Provided
adapters
F = Fixed breaker, rear connect, with mounting
3
K Yes (metal/metal) — No feet and short terminal adapters
L Yes (metal/metal) — Provided H = Fixed breaker, rear connect, with mounting
feet and long terminal adapters
3
1 Yes (metal/metal) Yes No
J = Front connect, fixed breaker, with no terminal
2 Yes (metal/metal) Yes Provided
adapters 3
Q = Fixed hybrid, no rear terminals, TA1200NB1M
front cable terminals
T = Fixed hybrid, no rear terminals, TA1201NB1M
3
front cable terminals
3
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release NF Frame Cassette 3
NY 12 3 F A B N S N N N C 3
Cassette Family and
Breaker Frame
Cassette Shipping
C = Cassette only
3
NY = UL 489 NF Frame B = Breaker shipped in cassette
NG = IEC NF Frame 3
Future
Continuous Ampere Range Arc Hood N = None 3
12 = 800–1200 (UL 489) A = Arc hood installed (default)
16 = 630–1600 (IEC) Future 3
N = None
Door Frame Gasket
Poles and Phasing and Rejection Kits 3
(Facing front of breaker) Second Contact Terminals Installed
B = Door kit included (default),
3 = Three-pole ABC
4 = Four-pole NABC
with rejection kit N = None 3
B = Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette
F = Full complement
Cell Switch Options 3
Load Terminal Connections N = Not included
A = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit
(long style)
Shutters 3
N = Not included (default)
F = With flat tapped pads only S = Included
G = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit 3
(short style)
3
Note
1 Two Form C contacts except on NF with Power Xpert Release and OTS and RRTI, where only one Form C OTS contact will be provided.
3
3
3
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release RF Frame Circuit Breaker (exclusionary rules apply)
3
R G S6 08 3 W 2A 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
Breaker Frame Size Spring Release,
3 R = RF frame for UL 489 Motor Operator Latch Check Switch
or IEC M = Manually operated N = No spring release, no LCS
3 B = 110–125 Vac
T = 208–250 Vac
A
B
=
=
110–127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
110–127 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
L = 24 Vdc C = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external
3 Standard, Mechanism, Device H = 48 Vdc R = 208–250 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
G = IEC 60947-2, stored energy, S = 60 Vdc S = 208–250 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
air breaker Continuous Rating T = 208–250 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external
3 Y = UL 489, stored energy, (In in Amperes) L = 24 Vdc, no LCS
insulated case breaker 0 = Non-auto P = 24 Vdc, spring release LCS
3 switch
8 = 800 Shunt Trip
Q
H
=
=
48 Vdc, no LCS
Fault Current Rating A = 1000 (IEC only) J = 48 Vdc, spring release LCS
N = No shunt trip
3 R6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only) B = 1200 (UL only) A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
K
1
=
=
60 Vdc, no LCS
R8 = 85 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only) C = 1250 (IEC only) R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc
D = 1600 2 = 60 Vdc, spring release LCS
3 RC
S5
=
=
100 kA at 480 Vac (UL 489 only)
55 kA at 415 Vac (IEC only) M = 2000
L
H
=
=
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489 only), N = 2500 S = 60 Vdc
3 S8 =
66 kA at 415 Vac IEC
85 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489 only)
P = 3000 (UL only)
Q = 3200 (IEC only)
SC = 100 kA at 480 Vac (30 cycle, UL 489 only), R = 4000 (IEC only)
3 105 kA at 415 Vac IEC
3
Frame Rating (Amperes) Trip Unit, Power Supply
3 08
10
=
=
800
1000 (IEC only)
20 = 2000
25 = 2500
SW = Non-automatic switch, available only for fault current rating configurations S6 and S8
2A = PXR20 LSI
12 = 1200 (UL only) 30 = 3000 (UL only) 2B = PXR20 LSI with Modbus
3 13 = 1250 (IEC only) 32 = 3200 (IEC only) 2H = PXR20 LSI with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
16 = 1600 40 = 4000 (IEC only) 2K = PXR20 LSI with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
2C = PXR20 LSIG
3 2D = PXR20 LSIG with Modbus
2E = PXR20 LSIG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 Poles, Phasing 2F = PXR20 LSIG with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
2P = PXR25 LSI with Modbus
3 = Three-pole, ABC
2Q = PXR25 LSI with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 4 = Four-pole, NABC
2R = PXR25 LSIG with Modbus
2S = PXR25 LSIG with Modbus and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 Mounting Configuration
W = Drawout with universal pads
3 B = Fixed mount rear connected with side mounting brackets
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release RF Frame Circuit Breaker (exclusionary rules apply), continued
3
R G S6 08 3 W 2A 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
N
UVR, Second Shunt Trip
= None X = Default
Options
3
A = 110–125 Vac/Vdc UVR Trip Indicator and Secondary Remote W = Low temperature applications (–57 °C)
R = 220–250 Vac/Vdc UVR Bell Alarm OTS Terminal Blocks Reset 3
L = 24 Vdc UVR N None None Per breaker options None
H = 48 Vdc UVR
S = 60 Vdc UVR
X
Z
Trip indicator
Trip indicator
None
2 Form C
Per breaker options
Per breaker options
None
None
Drawout Breaker Shipping, Fixed Breaker 3
1 = 110–127 Vac/Vdc second Terminals (Door frame kit ships as standard
M Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options None
unless noted otherwise)
2
shunt trip
= 208–240 Vac/Vdc second
A
6
None
None
Per breaker options
Per breaker options
24 Vdc RR
48 Vdc RR D = Drawout breaker shipping alone, without
3
shunt trip 7 Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options 60 Vdc RR door frame kit
4
8
B Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options 120 Vdc RR C = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
3
C Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options 240 Vdc RR
9 = 60 Vdc second shunt trip Y Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Per breaker options None 1 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
D Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Per breaker options 24 Vdc RR no shutters, vertical adapters 3
8 Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Per breaker options 48 Vdc RR 2 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
no shutters, horizontal adapters
Auxiliary Switches,
Label Language
9
E
2 Form C
2 Form C
Per breaker options
Per breaker options
60 Vdc RR
120 Vdc RR 4 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette, 3
F Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Per breaker options 240 Vdc RR with shutters, vertical adapters
E = No auxiliary switches, English
2 = 2 Form C, English 1 None None Full complement None 5 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
with shutters, horizontal mounting
3
4 = 4 Form C, English 2 Trip indicator None Full complement None
3 Trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement None 9 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
6 =
8 =
6 Form C, English
8 Form C, English 4 Interlock trip indicator None Full complement None with shutters, no terminals 3
J Interlock trip indicator None Full complement 24 Vdc RR K = Rear connect, fixed breaker, no terminal
A = 10 Form C, English adapters
W= 12 Form C, English G
H
None
None
Full complement
Full complement
48 Vdc RR
60 Vdc RR F = Fixed breaker, rear connect with vertical 3
K Interlock trip indicator None Full complement 120 Vdc RR adapters
L
5
None
2 Form C
Full complement
Full complement
240 Vdc RR
None
H = Fixed breaker, rear connect with horizontal
adapters
3
R Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement 24 Vdc RR
U Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement 48 Vdc RR 3
V Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement 60 Vdc RR
S
T
2 Form C
2 Form C
Full complement
Full complement
120 Vdc RR
240 Vdc RR 3
Pushbutton Safe OFF Operations 3
Padlock Cover Feature Counter
N
A
No
No
None
—
No
Provided
3
B Yes (plastic/plastic) — No
J
K
Yes (metal/metal)
—
—
Provided
No
3
L Yes (metal/metal) — Provided
1 Yes (metal/metal) Yes No 3
2 Yes (metal/metal) Yes Provided
Series NRX with Power Xpert Release RF Frame Cassette

3
3
RY 12 3 F A B N S N N N C
Cassette Family and Cassette Shipping
3
Breaker Frame C = Cassette only
RY = UL 489 NF Frame B = Breaker shipped in cassette 3
RG = IEC NF Frame
Continuous Ampere Range Arc Hood

Future 3
N = None
30 = 3000 A (UL only) A = Arc hood installed (default)
40 = 3200–4000 A (IEC only) Future
3
Door Frame Gasket N = None
Poles and Phasing
(Facing front of breaker)
and Rejection Kits 3
B = Door kit included (default), Second Contact Terminals Installed
3 = Three-pole ABC
4 = Four-pole NABC
with rejection kit
N = None 3
B = Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette
Cell Switch Options F = Full complement
Load Terminal Connections (Available on breaker + 3
F = With flat tapped pads only (no terminals) cassette or cassette only) Shutters
G = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (short style)
A = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (long style)
N = Not included
3 = Cell switch assembly with 3
N = Not included (default) 3
S = Included
Form C contacts
3

3 UL 489 Ratings
3 Breaker Type
1 rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz
30 Cycle Short- Instantaneous Override Available Trip Rating
Frame Catalog Frame Interrupting at Interrupting at Interrupting at Time Withstand (Equivalent Symmetrical Poles (Establishes Breaker In
3 Amperes Number Type 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Rating 1 rms, kA) 2 Available Rating) 3
NF Frame—UL 489
3 800 NYR4-08 NF-R 50 42 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
NYR5-08 NF-R 65 50 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 600, 800
3 NYR6-08 NF-R 85 65 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
1200 NYR4-12 NF-R 50 42 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
3 NYR5-12 NF-R 65 50 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 600, 800, 1200
NYR6-12 NF-R 85 65 42 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 NF Frame—UL 489 with high short-time (30 cycle) withstand capabilities
800 NYS4-08 NF-S 50 42 42 42 42 3, 4 200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
3 NYS5-08
NYS6-08
NF-S
NF-S
65
85
50
65
42
42
42
42
42
42
3, 4
3, 4
600, 800
1200 NYS4-12 NF-S 50 42 42 42 42 3, 4

3 NYS5-12 NF-S 65 50 42 42 42 3, 4
200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
600, 800, 1200
NYS6-12 NF-S 85 65 42 42 42 3, 4
3 RF Frame—UL 489
800 RYR5-08 RF–R 65 65 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 800
3 RYR8-08 RF–R 85 85 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
RYRC-08 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 1200 RYR5-12 RF–R 65 65 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 800, 1200
RYR8-12 RF–R 85 85 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 RYRC-12 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
1600 RYR5-16 RF–R 65 65 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600
3 RYR8-16 RF–R 85 85 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
RYRC-16 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 2000 RYR5-20
RYR8-20
RF–R
RF–R
65
85
65
85
—
—
16 x In
16 x In
16 x In
16 x In
3, 4
3, 4
800, 1200, 1600, 2000
RYRC-20 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4

3 2500 RYR5-25 RF–R 65 65 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
RYR8-25 RF–R 85 85 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 RYRC-25 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3000 RYR5-30 RF–R 65 65 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600, 2000,
3 RYR8-30 RF–R 85 85 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4 2500, 3000
RYRC-30 RF–R 100 100 — 16 x In 16 x In 3, 4
3 RF Frame—UL 489 with high short-time (30 cycle) withstand capabilities
800 RYS6-08 RF-S 65 65 — 65 — 3, 4 800
3 RYS8-08 RF-S 85 85 — 65 65 3, 4
RYSC-08 RF-S 100 100 — 65 65 3, 4
3 1200 RYS6-12
RYS8-12
RF-S
RF-S
65
85
65
85
—
—
65
65
—
65
3, 4
3, 4
800, 1200
RYSC-12 RF-S 100 100 — 65 65 3, 4

3 1600 RYS6-16 RF-S 65 65 — 65 — 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600
RYS8-16 RF-S 85 85 — 65 65 3, 4
3 RYSC-16 RF-S 100 100 — 65 65 3, 4
2000 RYS6-20 RF-S 65 65 — 65 — 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600, 2000
3 RYS8-20 RF-S 85 85 — 65 65 3, 4
RYSC-20 RF-S 100 100 — 65 65 3, 4
3 2500 RYS6-25 RF-S 65 65 — 65 — 3, 4 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
RYS8-25 RF-S 85 85 — 65 65 3, 4
3 3000
RYSC-25
RYS6-30
RF-S
RF-S
100
65
100
65
—
—
65
65
65
—
3, 4
3, 4 800, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000
3 RYS8-30
RYSC-30
RF-S
RF-S
85
100
85
100
—
—
65
65
65
65
3, 4
3, 4
3 Notes
1 UL 489 does not require a short-time withstand rating for breakers. The UL 489 Series NRX breakers have instantaneous override fixed at 22.5 x I (asymmetrical peak value).
n
An equivalent symmetrical rms value would roughly equate to 16 x In.
3 2 A 30-cycle withstand option is available for Series NRX breakers to provide better selectivity.
3 No change of hardware is required, trip rating can be programmed using I Programming Tool Kit.
n
3
3.1
Mounting and Load Connection Configurations—NF Frame
Rear-Connect Horizontal/ Fixed Front Connect 3
Vertical Adapter Kit Breaker Hybrid Connect Breaker: Hybrid Connect Breaker:
Breaker
Type
Breaker
Mechanism
Standard Bus
Connection Provisions
with and without Cover
(Kits shipped unassembled)
Cable-Connected
Cable Terminals
Rear Connect Top— Cable Connect Top—
Cable Connect Bottom Rear Connect Bottom
3
Drawout Breaker Stored energy Finger clusters — — — —
3
3
3
Cassette — Rear-connected — — —
pre-drilled bus pads
3
3
Fixed Stored energy Rear-connected — —
3
3
3
3
Mounting and Load Connection Configurations—RF Frame 3
Rear-Connect Horizontal/
Breaker Breaker Standard Bus

Vertical Adapter Kit
with and without Cover
3
Type Mechanism Connection Provisions (Kits shipped unassembled)
Drawout Breaker Stored energy Finger clusters — 3
3
3
Cassette — Rear-connected
3
3
3
Fixed Stored energy Rear-connected —
pre-drilled bus pads 3
3
3
Circuit Breaker Dimensions in Inches (mm) and Weights in lb (kg)
3
Description
Frame
Height
NF RF
Width
NF RF
Depth
NF RF
Weight
NF RF
3
Fixed—Rear Connect 3
Three-pole 13.31 (338.1) 15.65 (397.6) 8.25 (209.6) 13.22 (335.8) 7.15 (181.8) 11.51 (292.4) 45 (20) 120 (55)
Four-pole 13.31 (338.1) 15.65 (397.6) 11.00 (279.4) 19.41 (492.9) 7.15 (181.6) 11.51 (292.4) 62 (28) 155 (71) 3
Fixed—Front Connect
Three-pole 15.99 (406.3) — 8.25 (209.6) — 7.16 (181.8) — 45 (20) 120 (55) 3
Four-pole 15.99 (406.3) — 11.00 (279.4) — 7.15 (181.6) — 62 (28) 155 (71)
Drawout 3
Three-pole 14.17 (359.9) 17.96 (456.1) 10.00 (254.0) 15.67 (397.9) 10.50 (266.7) 14.48 (367.8) 87 (40) 211 (96)
Four-pole 14.17 (359.9) 17.96 (456.1) 12.75 (323.9) 18.06 (458.7) 10.50 (266.7) 14.48 (367.8) 109 (50) 258 (117) 3
3
Available Front Connect Cable Terminals

3 List Catalog
Number Connector Ratings (kA) To Breaker? Number (Three-Pole)
3 1 Bus conductor extension (42 kA and below) 42 — NRXBUSEXT
3 Bus conductor extension (50 kA and below) 50 — NRXBUSEXT

Bus conductor extension (65 kA and below) 65 — NRXBUSEXT653
3 2 Cable terminals (two holes) 65 Yes TA700NB1M
With control wire provisions 65 Yes TA700NB1MCWT
3
3 Cable terminals (three holes) 65 Yes TA1000NB1M
3 With control wire provisions 65 Yes TA1000NB1MCWT
3 4 Cable terminals (four holes) 65 Load side only 1 TA1200NB1M

With control wire provisions 65 Load side only 1 TA1200NB1MCWT
3
3 5 Cable terminals (three holes for 750 kcmil) 65 Load side only 1 TA1201NB1M
3
3
Available Rear Connectors for Fixed Breakers or Cassettes (NF-Frame)
3 List
Number Connector
Number of
Poles
Catalog
Number
3 1 Universal bus adapter—short 3 SADP316

4 SADP416
3
2 Universal bus adapter—long 3 LADP316
3 4 LADP416
3
3 Rear connect adapter extensions—short (horizontal holes) 3 SBADPI316
3 4 SBADPI416
3
4 Rear connect adapter extensions—long (horizontal holes) 3 LBADPU316
3 4 LBADPU416
3
5 Front connect 3 CASADP316
3 4 CASADP416
3 Available Rear Connectors for Fixed Breakers or Cassettes (RF-Frame)

List Number of Catalog
3 Number Connector Poles Number
1 Horizontal/vertical kit 3 RFADP3PU32
3 4 RFADP4PU32
3 2 Vertical kit 3 RFADP3PV40

4 RFADP4PV40
3
3 Horizontal/vertical 4000A kit 3 RFADP3PH40
3 4 RFADP4PH40
3
3
Note
3 1 For use on line side, user must use catalog number NRXBUSEXT503 for 50 kA, or NRXBUSEXT653 for 65 kA.

3.1
3
Maximum Terminal (Number of Catalog Metric Wire Catalog
Breaker Amperes Body Material Wire Type Conductors) Number 1 Range mm2 Number 1 3
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
700 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 (2) TA700NB1 50–240 TA700NB1M 3
3
3
Accessory Ratings
3
Undervoltage Release Ratings 3
Operational
Control Voltage Range Dropout Voltage Inrush/Continuous Opening Opening 3
Voltages Frequency 85%–110% Range 35%–60% Power Consumption (VA) Time (ms) -NF Time (ms) -RF
24 DC 20–26 8–14 425/2 25 37
3
48 DC 41–53 17–29 750/3 25 37
60 DC 51–66 21–36 825/4 25 37 3
110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 44–66 1150/8 25 37
110–125 DC 94–138 44–66 1150/8 25 37 3
208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 84–125 1200/8 25 37
220–250 DC 187–275 88–132 1200/8 25 37 3
Shunt Trip Ratings 3
Operational Inrush/
Control Voltage Range Continuous Power Opening Opening 3
Voltages Frequency 70%–110% Consumption (VA) Time (ms) -NF Time (ms) -RF
24 DC 17–26 400/2 15 22 3
48 DC 34–53 500/3 15 22
60 DC 42–66 500/4 15 22 3
110–127 50–60 Hz 77–140 800/8 15 22
110–125 DC 77–138 800/8 15 22 3
208–240 50–60 Hz 146–264 850/8 15 22
3
Spring Release Ratings
Operational 3
Control Voltage Range Inrush Power Closing Closing
Voltages Frequency 85%–110% Consumption (VA) Time (ms) -NF Time (ms) -RF 3
24 DC 20–26 400 20 35
48 DC 41–53 500 20 35 3
60 DC 51–66 500 20 35
110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 750 20 35 3
110–125 DC 94–138 750 20 35
208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 800 20 35 3
Note
1 Single terminals individually packed. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Motor Operator
3 Control Operational Voltage Running Typical Inrush Power Maximum
Voltages Frequency Range 85%–110% Current (A) Current Consumption (VA) Charging Time (sec)
3 NF
24 DC 20–26 6 325% 160 4
3 48 DC 41–53 3 500% 150 3
60 DC 51–66 2 350% 150 4
3 110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 2 300% 280 3
110–125 DC 94–138 1 500% 150 3
3 208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 1 1000% 280 4
220–250 DC 187–275 1 1000% 280 4
3 RF
24 DC 20–26 7 350% 200 6
3 48 DC 41–53 3 450% 175 6
60 DC 51–66 2 450% 225 6
3 110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 3 300% 425 6
110–125 DC 94–138 2 375% 275 6
3 208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 1.5 300% 400 6
220–250 DC 187–275 1 400% 250 6
3
Control Voltages and Currents
3 Control Voltages 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 110–125 Vdc 110–127 Vac 220–250 Vdc 208–240 Vac
Current
3 Close current (inrush) 14 10 8 7 7 4 4
3 Shunt trip current (ST)—(inrush/continuous)

NF—Charge motor current (inrush/continuous)
16/0.08
20/6
10/0.06
15/3
8/0.07
7/2
7/0.07
5/1
7/0.07
6/2
4/0.04
10/1
4/0.04
10/1
3 RF—Charge motor current (inrush/continuous)

Operating Voltage Rating
23/7 14/3 14/3 8/2 9/3 4/1 5/1.5
3 Close 20–26 41–53 51–66 94–138 94–140 187–275 177–264

Open 17–26 34–53 42–66 77–138 77–140 154–275 146–264
3 Charge—NF 20–26 41–53 51–66 94–138 94–140 187–275 177–264
Charge—RF 26–26 41–53 51–66 94–138 94–140 187–275 177–264
3
Overcurrent Trip Switch Breaker Position/Continuity—NF Frame
3 Control Voltages Frequency Contact Rating (Amperes) Breaker Continuity Between Continuity Between
250 50–60 Hz 10 Position Red and Black Lead Pairs Blue and Black Lead Pairs
3 125 DC 0.5 Open No 47 and 45; 48 and 49
250 DC 0.25 No 53 and 51; 54 and 55
3 Closed 46 and 45; 50 and 49 No
52 and 51; 56 and 55 No
3 Auxiliary Switch
Control Voltages Frequency Contact Rating (Amperes)
Breaker Position/Continuity—RF Frame
3 250 50–60 Hz 10
Breaker Continuity Between Continuity Between
125 DC 0.5
Position Red and Black Lead Pairs Blue and Black Lead Pairs
3 250 DC 0.25
Open No 59 and 57; 60 and 61
No 65 and 63; 66 and 67
3 No 71 and 69; 72 and 73
No 77 and 75; 78 and 79
3 No 83 and 81; 84 and 85
No 89 and 87; 90 and 91
3 Closed 58 and 57; 62 and 61 No
64 and 63; 68 and 67 No
3 70 and 69; 74 and 73 No
76 and 75; 80 and 79 No
3 82 and 81; 86 and 85 No
88 and 87; 92 and 91 No
3
3
3.1
Series NRX with Digitrip Contents
Description Page
3
3
3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 3
Breakers with Digitrip 3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-49
Series NRX NF Drawout Breaker Series NRX Fixed Front Connect
Breaker with Bus Extensions (Optional) Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-55
3
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers with Digitrip 3
Product Description The dimensions and design of ● Breaker-mounted ● Arcflash Reduction 3
Series NRX is a low voltage Series NRX allows up to eight communication modules Maintenance System—
power circuit breaker suitable UL 1066 or UL 489 breakers —communication modules Eaton’s patented 3
for UL 1558, UL 891, in a 24-inch (600 mm) wide for INCOM™, Modbus® technology provides
structure. The one frame size, and PROFIBUS mount maintenance staff with
and IEC switchgear and
regardless of ampere rating, directly to the cassette, improved safety of
3
switchboards. The compact
reduces drawing conversion, reducing the space and downstream maintenance
size and weight of three-pole
drawout with cassette Series structure integration time and room required in gear for locations using a simple 3
NRX, see Page V4-T3-51, parts inventory for several communication capability and reliable method to
allows for a 24.00 (609.6 mm) board, gear and machinery ● “Direct Drive” reduce fault clearing times 3
switchgear enclosure. applications. mechanism— and energy during an arc
The breaker ratings are: Features, Benefits and symmetrically loaded flash event (radiation,
sound, pressure,
3
forces of the two-staged
● 800 A for UL 1066 Functions temperature). Arcflash
● 800 A, 1200 A for UL 489 Series NRX utilizes several
stored energy mechanism
improves robustness, Reduction Maintenance
3
● 630–1600 A IEC 60947-2 innovative technologies: reliability, and achieves System uses a separate
from a voltage range of improved breaker analog trip circuit, providing 3
● Rogowski coil—does not faster signal processing
220–725 Vac life ratings
saturate like iron core
sensors, and one sensor ● Fold-up cassette—with this and interruption times than 3
Application Description simple design, all items in the standard (digital)
accommodates 200–1600
The Series NRX is a compact
ampere range. You never a cassette are replaceable “instantaneous” protection.
The Arcflash Reduction
3
globally certified low voltage without removing the
have to change a sensor Maintenance System
power (air) circuit breaker. It cassette from the cell 3
and CTs are not required function is activated either
is rated for 800 A (UL 1066), ● “Arc chute” design
800 A and 1200 A (UL 489)
● Tension clamp secondary directly on the circuit
and 630–1600 A (IEC 60947-2) terminals—10 A continuous ● Breaker-mounted racking breaker through a local 3
with an interrupting capacity rating at 600 V meets UL/ or levering-in device— switch or remotely through
of 65 kA with short time CSA/RoHS and UL-94 V0.
Mounted directly to fixed
Racking device is mounted
on the breaker, decreasing
communications or a digital 3
withstand at 42 kA at the input
breaker or drawout the width of the cassette,
440/480 Vac level.
cassette, they reduce because the cassette is not The use of these 3
The Series NRX circuit breaker wiring throughout burdened with the cost or technologies allows Series
provides all the capabilities of enclosure and provide parts of the lev-in NRX to offer a life of 20,000 3
a power circuit breaker in the clean, organized wiring mechanical operations and
● Plug-N-Play accessories—
compact size of a molded
case breaker. It offers you the
schemes No special tools needed. 10,000 electrical operations
with a high degree of
3
Accessory comes with
same protection and reliability.
performance—along with
plug and wires ready to 3
install
increased flexibility—at half
the size of a typical power 3
circuit breaker.
3

3 ● UL 1066 (low voltage AC ● IEC 60947-3 (switches, ● ANSI C37.60 (requirements ● ANSI C37.13 (IEEE®
power circuit breakers disconnectors, switch- for overhead, pad-mounted standard for low voltage
3 used in enclosures) disconnectors and dry-type and submersible AC power circuit breakers
● UL 489 (molded case fuse-combination units) automatic reclosers and used in enclosures)
3 circuit breakers, molded ● CSA 22.2 (molded case fault interrupters for ● CCC—China
case switches and circuit circuit breakers, molded AC systems) ● KEMA (&CB)
3 breaker enclosures) case switches and circuit ● ANSI C37.50 (low voltage ● UL 891 (deadfront
● EN 45011 breaker enclosures) AC power circuit breakers switchboard)
3 ● CEI EN 60947 ● ANSI C37.51 (metal- used in enclosures—test
procedures)
● UL 1558 (metal-enclosed
● BS EN 60439-1 Form 4b enclosed low voltage low voltage power circuit
AC power circuit breaker ANSI C37.17 (for trip
3 ● IEC 60439-1 (low voltage switchgear assemblies—
●
devices for AC and general

breaker switchgear)
switchgear and controlgear conformance test purpose DC low voltage
3 assemblies) procedures) power circuit breakers)
● IEC 60947-1 (low voltage ● ANSI C37.20.1 (metal- ● ANSI C37.16 (low voltage
3 switchgear and controlgear enclosed low voltage power circuit breakers
—Part 1 general rules) power circuit breaker and AC power circuit
3 ● IEC 60947-2 (low voltage switchgear) protectors—preferred
switchgear and controlgear ratings, related
—Part 2 circuit breakers)
3 requirements,
and application
recommendations)
3
3
3
3 Reference Information
3 List of Instruction Leaflets and Manuals
Publication
Instruction Book for Fixed and Drawout Breaker/Cassette MN01301001E
3 IL Drawout Circuit Breaker and Cassette Rejection Interlocks IL01301006E
IL Auxiliary Switch in Right Accessory Tray IL01301007E
3 IL UVR/ST/OTS in Left Accessory Tray IL01301008E
IL Motor Operator IL01301010E
3 IL Spring Release Device and Latch Check Switch
(Numbers 5 and 6 are Combining into one Document)
IL01301010E
3 IL Door Escutcheon and Gasket Kit

IL Drawout Cassette IP 20 Shutters
IL01301012E
IL01301013E
3 IL Fixed Breaker Arc Hood Kit

IL Fixed Breaker Front/Rear/Cable Connectors
IL01301014E
IL01301015E
3 IL Drawout Cassette Front/Rear/Cable Connectors

IL Racking Device Levering Device
IL01301016E
IL01301018E
3 IL Mechanical Pop-Out Indicator and Interlocked Indicator

IL Breaker and Cassette Phase Barriers
IL01301019E
IL01301021E
3 IL Cassette Rails IL01301025E

IL Mounting Feet IL01301030E
3 IL Surface Mount IL01301036E

IL Terminal Blocks IL01301037E
3 IL Modbus Communication Adapter Module IL01301034E

IL INCOM Communication Adapter Module IL01301033E
3 IL Digitrip 520 and 520M Manual IL70C1619H01

IL IP55 Cover IL01301038E
3 PROFIBUS Communication Module IL01301035E

IL Kirk Key Lock IL01301039E
3 IL Ronis Key Lock IL01301040E
IL Pushbutton Covers IL01301041E
3
3.1
3
Series NRX Type NF-Frame Circuit Breaker (Exclusionary Rules Apply)
3
N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
Breaker Frame Size
N = Type NF, 630–1600 A, Motor Operator
Spring Release,
Latch Check Switch 3
(70 mm pole spacing) M = Manually operated N = No spring release, no LCS
B = 110–125 Vac E = No spring release, LCS wired external 3
Standard, Mechanism, Device W = 110–125 Vdc A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
S = UL 1066, stored energy,
T = 208–250 Vac
P = 220–250 Vdc C = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external 3
power breaker R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
L = 24 Vdc
X = UL 489, stored energy, Rating Plug
insulated case breaker (Amperes)
H = 48 Vdc
S = 60 Vdc
S
T
= 208–240 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS
= 208–240 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external
3
E = IEC 60947-2, stored 1 = 200 L = 24 Vdc, no LCS
energy, air breaker 2 = 250
3 = 300
Shunt Trip P = 24 Vdc, spring release LCS 3
Q = 24 Vdc, LCS wired external
Fault Current Rating 4 = 400 N = No shunt trip
H = 48 Vdc, no LCS
S4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC 5 = 500 A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc
J = 48 Vdc, spring release LCS 3
S5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC 6 = 600 K = 48 Vdc, LCS wired external
7 = 630 L = 24 Vdc
S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC
8 = 800 H = 48 Vdc
1
2
= 60 Vdc, no LCS
= 60 Vdc, spring release LCS
3
A = 1000 S = 60 Vdc
Frame Rating (Amperes)
07 = 630 (IEC only)
B = 1200
C = 1250
3
08 = 800 D = 1600
10 = 1000 (IEC only) 3
12 = 1200 (UL only) Trip Unit, Power Supply
13 = 1250 (IEC only)
16 = 1600 (On NF: IEC only) SW = Switch—no MCR—42 kA
for IEC and UL 1066 (non-auto)
13 = 1150i LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 3
1E = 1150 LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
22 = 520 LI, no ZSI 1F = 1150 LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
Poles, Phasing 52 = 520 LSI, no ZSI 1L = 1150 LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 3
3 = Three-pole, ABC 53 = 520 LSI, with ZSI 1M = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
4 = Four-pole, NABC 5G = 520 LSIG, no ZSI
5H = 520 LSIG, with ZSI
14 = 1150 LSIGA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
15 = 1150 LSIGA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
3
Mounting Configuration M2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 1C = 1150 LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
W = Drawout
M3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
MA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
Reduction Maintenance System
1D = 1150 LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
3
B = Fixed mount rear connected with side MB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc Reduction Maintenance System
R
mounting brackets
= Fixed mount rear connected without side
MG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 16 = 1150i LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 3
MH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc Reduction Maintenance System
mounting brackets
F = Front connected, fixed mount, for bus or cable
R2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
17 = 1150i LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System 3
connections with side mounting brackets R3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 1J = 1150 LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
RA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
1K = 1150 LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
3
Reduction Maintenance System Reduction Maintenance System
RB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 1R = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 3
Reduction Maintenance System Reduction Maintenance System
RG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 1S = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System Reduction Maintenance System 3
RH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash 18 = 1150i LSIGA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash
1A = 1150 LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
19 = 1150i LSIGA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
3
1B = 150 LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
12 = 1150i LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Series NRX Type NF-Frame Circuit Breaker (Exclusionary Rules Apply), continued
3
N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
3
3 UVR, Second Shunt Trip Future Use
N = None X = All product
A = 110–125 Vac/Vdc UVR Trip Indicator OTS Secondary
3 R = 220–250 Vac/Vdc UVR and Bell Alarm Terminal Blocks Drawout Breaker Shipping,
L = 24 Vdc UVR N None None Per breaker options Fixed Breaker Terminals (Door Frame Kit
3 H = 48 Vdc UVR
S = 60 Vdc UVR
X Trip indicator
Z Trip indicator
None
2 Form C
Per breaker options
Per breaker options
ships as standard unless noted otherwise)
G = 32 Vdc UVR D = Drawout breaker shipping
M Interlock trip indicator None Per breaker options
3 1 = 110–127 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip
2 = 208–240 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip
Y Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Per breaker options
alone, without door frame kit
C = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
1 None None Full complement no shutters, no terminals
4 = 24 Vdc second shunt trip 2 Trip indicator None Full complement
3 8 = 48 Vdc second shunt trip
9 = 60 Vdc second shunt trip
3 Trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement
no shutters, short vertical/horizontal
4 Interlock trip indicator None Full complement 2 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
3 Auxiliary, Switches,
5 Interlock trip indicator 2 Form C Full complement no shutters, long vertical/horizontal
Label Language Padlock Key Lock Operations with shutters, short vertical/horizontal
3 E = No auxiliary switches, Provisions Provisions Counter 5 = Drawout breaker shipping in cassette,
no label (parent) N No None No with shutters, long vertical/horizontal
2 = 2 Form C, English
3 4 = 4 Form C, English
A
B
No
—
—
Provided
No
C Yes (plastic/plastic) — Provided F = Fixed terminal adapters for rear
3 connect, with mounting feet, short
vertical/horizontal adapter kit
H = Rear connect, fixed breaker, with long
3 vertical/horizontal adapters
J = Front connect fixed breaker, with no
3 terminal adapters
K = Rear connect, fixed breaker, no terminal
adapters
3
3
3 Series NRX Type NF-Frame Cassette
3 NX 12 3 F A B Z S N N N C
3
Cassette Family and Breaker Frame Cassette Shipping
3 NS = UL 1066 N-Frame C = Cassette only
NX = UL 489 N-Frame B = Breaker shipped in cassette
NE = IEC N-Frame
3 Future
Continuous Ampere Range N = None
3 08 = 800 (UL 1066) Arc Hood
12 = 800–1200 (UL 489) A = Arc hood installed (default) Future
3 16 = 630–1600 (IEC)
N = None
Door Frame Gasket and Rejection Kits
Poles and Phasing
3 (Facing Front of Breaker)
B = Door kit included (default), with rejection kit
D = Door kit included, no rejection kit
Secondary Contact Terminals Installed
3 = Three-pole ABC N = None
R = Not included, with rejection kit
3 4 = Four-pole NABC N = Not included, with rejection kit
B
F
= Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette
= Full complement
C = Common options when cassette ships alone
3 F
Load Terminal Connections
= With flat tapped pads only
Cell Switch Options
(available on Breaker +
Shutters
G = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (short style) Cassette or Cassette Only)
3 H = With front-connected kit W = None
N = Not included (default)
S = Included
N = No cassette stabs (interunit only) Z = Cell switch installed
3
3
3
3
3.1
3
UL 1066 Ratings UL 489 Ratings 3
Description Rating Description Rating Rating
Continuous current rating (amperes) 800 Continuous current rating (amperes) 800 1200
3
Short-Circuit Rating (kA) Short-Circuit Rating (kA)
254 Vac 85 240 Vac 85 85
3
508 Vac 65 480 Vac 65 65
635 Vac 35 600 Vac 42 42
3
Short-time withstand (kA) 1 42 Short-time withstand (kA) 42 42
3
IEC 60947-2 Ratings 3
Description Rating Rating Rating
Continuous current rating (amperes) 630 and 800 1000 and 1250 1600
3
Short-circuit rating (kA) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
240/254 Vac 85 50 85 50 85 50
3
415/435 Vac 65 50 65 50 65 50
690/725 Vac 42 42 42 42 42 42
3
Short-time withstand = Icw (kA) 42 42 42 42 42 42
3
Series NRX Three-Pole Drawout with Cassette Rear Fixed Circuit Breaker and Drawout with Cassette 3
Height Width Depth Lb (kg) Breaker Type Height Width Depth Lb (kg)
3
14.18 (360.2) 10.02 (254.5) 10.68 (271.3) 85.00 (38.59) Fixed
Three-pole 13.18 (334.8) 8.25 (209.6) 7.15 (181.6) 33.58 (15.23) 3
Series NRX Three-Pole Front Connect Fixed Breaker Four-pole 13.18 (334.8) 11.00 (279.4) 7.15 (181.6) 44.40 (20.14)
Height Width Depth Lb (kg) Drawout with Cassette 3
16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.6) 7.15 (181.6) — Three-pole 14.18 (360.2) 10.02 (254.5) 10.69 (271.5) 85.20 (38.65)
Four-pole 14.18 (360.2) 12.69 (322.3) 10.69 (271.5) 104.00 (47.17)
3
3
Mounting and Load Connection Configurations 3
Rear-Connect Rear Connect Breaker Front-Connect
Standard Bus Horizontal/Vertical Adapter Kit Horizontal/Vertical Adapter Kit Fixed Front Connect Breaker
Breaker Breaker Connection With and Without Cover With and Without Cover Cable-Connected 3
Type Mechanism Provisions (Kits Shipped Unassembled) (Kits Shipped Separately) Cable Terminals
Drawout Breaker Stored energy Finger clusters — — — 3
3
3
Cassette — Rear-connected — —
3
3
Fixed Stored energy Rear-connected
3
3
3
Note
1 35 kAIC short-time withstand at 635 V level only. All other voltages 42 kAIC short-time withstand.
3
3
Available Front Connect Cable Terminals

3 List Catalog
Number Connector Ratings (kA) To Breaker? Number (Three-Pole)
3 1 Bus conductor extension (42 kA and below) 42 -- NRXBUSEXT
3 Bus conductor extension (50 kA and below) 50 -- NRXBUSEXT

Bus conductor extension (65 kA and below) 65 -- NRXBUSEXT653
3 2 Cable terminals (two holes) 65 Yes TA700NB1M
With control wire provisions 65 Yes TA700NB1MCWT
3
3 Cable terminals (three holes) 65 Yes TA1000NB1M
3 With control wire provisions 65 Yes TA1000NB1MCWT
3 4 Cable terminals (four holes) 65 Load side only 1 TA1200NB1M
3 With control wire provisions 65 Load side only 1 TA1200NB1MCWT
3
5 Cable terminals (three holes for 750 kcmil) 65 Load side only 1 TA1201NB1M
3
3
3 Available Rear Connectors for Fixed Breakers or Cassettes
List Catalog
3 Number Connector Number
1 Universal bus adapter—short SADP316
3 SADP416
3
2 Universal bus adapter—long LADP316
3 LADP416
3
3
3 Rear connect adapter extensions—short SBADPI316
3 (horizontal holes)
SBADPI416
3
4 Rear connect adapter extensions—long LBADPU316
3 (horizontal holes)
LBADPU416
3
3
3 Line and Load Terminals
3 Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
(Number of
Conductors)
Catalog
Number 2
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number 2
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
3
3 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 (3) TA1000NB1 95–185 TA1000NB1M

3 1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (3) TA1201NB1 300–400 TA1201NB1M
Notes
3 1 For use on line side, user must use catalog number NRXBUSEXT503 for 50 kA, or NRXBUSEXT653 for 65 kA.
2 Single terminals individually packed.
3
3.1
Accessory Ratings
3
Shunt Trip
Control Operational Voltage Inrush/Continuous Power Opening Time
3
Voltages Frequency Range 70–110% Consumption (VA) (ms)
24 DC 17–26 500/5 25
3
48 DC 34–53 530/5 25
110–127 50–60 Hz 77–140 540/5 25
3
110–125 DC 77–138 540/5 25 3
208–240 50–60 Hz 146–264 500/5 25
220–250 DC 154–275 515/5 25 3
3
UVR
Control Operational Voltage Dropout Volts Inrush/Continuous Power Opening Time 3
Voltages Frequency Range 85–110% 35–60% Consumption (VA) (ms)
24 DC 20–26 8–14 500/5 50 3
32 DC 27–35 11–19 620/5 50
48 DC 41–53 17–29 850/5 50
3
110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 44–94 890/5 50 3
110–125 DC 94–138 44–94 890/5 50
208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 84–125 910/5 50 3
220–250 DC 187–275 88–132 910/5 50
380–415 AC 323–457 145–228 960/5 50
3
480 AC 408–528 168–288 800/8 50
600 AC 510–660 210–360 800/12 50
3
3
Spring Release 3
Control Operational Voltage Inrush Power Closing Time
Voltages Frequency Range 70–110% Consumption (VA) (ms)
3
24 DC 17–26 500 25
48 DC 34–53 530 25 3
110–127 50–60 Hz 77–140 540 25
110–125 DC 77–138 540 25 3
208–240 50–60 Hz 146–264 500 25
220–250 DC 154–275 515 25
3
3
OCT/OTS
3
Control Contact Rating
Voltages Frequency (Amperes)
3
250 50–60 Hz 10
125 DC 0.5 3
250 DC 0.25
3
Auxiliary Switch 3
Control Contact Rating
Voltages Frequency (Amperes) 3
250 50–60 Hz 10
125 DC 0.5
3
250 DC 0.25
3
3
Breaker Position/Continuity
3 Breaker Continuity Between Continuity Between
Position Red and Black Lead Pairs Blue and Black Lead Pairs
3 Open NO 45 and 43
3 NO 46 and 47
NO 51 and 49
3 NO 52 and 53
Closed 44 and 43 NO
3 48 and 47 NO
50 and 49 NO
3 54 and 53 NO
3
Motor Operator
3
Control Operational Voltage Running Current Typical Inrush Power Consumption Maximum Charging
Voltages Frequency Range 85–110% (A) Current (VA) Time (Sec)
3
24 DC 20–26 5 500% 150 3
3 48 DC 41–53 3 500% 150 3

110–127 50–60 Hz 94–140 2 300% 280 3
3 110–125 DC 94–138 1 500% 150 3
208–240 50–60 Hz 177–264 1 1000% 280 4
3 220–250 DC 187–275 1 1000% 280 4
3
Control Voltages and Currents
3 Control Voltages 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110–125 Vdc 110–127 Vac 220–250 Vdc 208–240 Vac
3 Current
Close current (inrush) 21 11 5 5 2 2
3 Shunt trip current (ST)—(inrush/continuous) 21 / .2 11 / .1 5 / .04 5 / .04 2 / .02 2 / .02
Charge motor current—(inrush/continuous) TBD TBD 5/1 6/2 10 / 1 10 / 1
3 Operating Voltage Rating
3 Close 17–26 34–53 77–138 77–140 154–275 146–264

Trip 17–26 34–53 77–138 77–140 154–275 146–264
3 Charge 20–26 41–53 94–138 94–140 187–275 177–264
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Type VCP-W/VCP-T Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker Contents
Description Page
3
3
3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 3
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-56 3
3
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers 3
Product Description Application Description 3
Breakers and structures for IEC Eaton's medium voltage
switchgear assemblies: ● T-VAC medium voltage circuit breakers offer the 3
circuit breakers latest in vacuum technology,
ANSI providing superior control and
● VCP-W medium voltage
● 5/15 kV VCP-T (capacitor
protection of medium voltage
3
switching circuit
circuit breakers power equipment in utility,
● 5/15 kV VCP-W (K>1,
breakers available)
industrial, commercial, mining 3
● Ground and test devices and marine installations. Built
K=1, narrow design,
extra-capability and
● Dummy elements in a state-of-the-art ISO® 3
generator circuit 9002 certified facility, they
● VCP-W IEC medium
breakers available) voltage circuit breakers
meet and exceed all ANSI
and IEC requirements.
3
● 27 kV and 38 kV (extra- ● 3.6/7.2/12/17.5 kV Available in drawout
capability circuit ● 24 kV configurations, Eaton’s
3
breakers available) vacuum circuit breakers
● Ground and test devices OEM Structures are a result of our ongoing 3
● Dummy elements ● Metal-clad, commitment to research and
● VCP-T medium voltage
compartmented design development, which have 3
● Barebones resulted in significant
circuit breakers
● 5/15 kV VCP-T (capacitor
● Power modules
breakthrough technologies.
Each breaker is provided with
3
switching and magnetic ● Mini modules its unique Quality Assurance
actuated circuit breakers ● Breaker compartment kits Certificate that documents all 3
available) tests and inspections
● Ground and test devices performed. 3
● Dummy elements
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Features, Benefits and Functions

3
VCP-W Standard Features VCP-T Standard Features Standards and Certifications
3 ● Eaton’s maintenance-free ● Small without ● Designed, tested and
vacuum interrupters with compromise—significantly certified in accordance
3 visual contact erosion smaller and lighter than with ANSI and IEC
indicator comparable breakers standards
3 ● Non-sliding/non-rolling ● Grounded steel barrier ● Applicable ANSI standards
V-Flex™ current transfer between mechanism and C37.04-1979 or 1999,
system primary conductors
3 C37.09-1979 or 1999,
C37.06-2000 and C37.013
● Glass polyester insulation ● Spring loaded, silver-plated
primary disconnects Internal arc resistance
3 ● Cycloaliphatic epoxy
insulation (optional with (drawout breaker)
●
tested to IEC 298,

Type VCPW-SE breakers) for ● Silver-plated primary Appendix AA,
3 27 kV and 38 kV breakers connections (fixed 25 kA for 1 second
● Front-accessible operating circuit breaker) ● Drawout circuit breaker
3 mechanism ● Manual charging of fully qualified to IEC 56 by
● Electrically operated closing springs (includes testing inside the IEC 298
3 trip-free, spring stored shunt trip) switchgear cubicle
energy mechanism ● Integral spring charging ● IEEE C37.013 and
3 ● Interlocks that prevent handle amendment C37.013a-2007
moving a closed circuit ● Auxiliary switch (5a and
3 breaker into or out of the 5b contacts)
connected position ● Mechanical operations
3 ● Closing springs counter
automatically discharge ● 24, 48, 125 and 250 Vdc,
3 before moving the circuit
breaker into or out of the
120 and 240 Vac control
● Shunt trip
enclosure
3 ● Provisions for manual
● ON and OFF pushbuttons
charging of closing springs
● Integral lifting hooks
3 ● Manual close and trip
● Through- or behind-door
pushbuttons operation
3 ● Operations counter
● Identified/dedicated
secondaries
● Closing spring charged/
3 discharged indicator
● Secondary umbilical cord
(drawout circuit breaker)
● Circuit breaker Open/
3 Closed indicator
● Secondary disconnect
block (fixed circuit breaker)
● Auxiliary switch with 2A/3B
3 for DC and 1A/3B for AC
● Two-step stored energy
spare contacts mechanism
3 ● Spring charging motor, close
● O–0.3s–CO–15s–CO
coil, trip coil, latch check ● Anti-pump
3 switch and anti-pump relay ● Trip free
● Latch check switch
3 ● Visible contact erosion
indicator
3 ● Visible contact wipe
indicator
3 ● Disconnect, Test and
Connect (drawout circuit
3 breaker)
● Integral levering
3 mechanism (drawout
circuit breaker)
3 ● Field-installable accessories
3
3
3
3.1
Product Selection
Please contact your Eaton sales representative for additional product information and to review your specific application and required 3
product configuration.
3
3
ANSI Standards
3
ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis—
Standard Circuit Breakers 1
3
Circuit Breaker Type
Description 50 VCP-WND250 50 VCP-W250 50 VCP-W350

50 VCP-W500
(63 kA) 75 VCP-W500
150 VCP-W1500
150 VCP-W500 150 VCP-W750 150 VCP-W1000 (63 kA)
3
Identification
3
Nominal voltage class kV 4.16 4.16 4.16 4.16 7.2 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8
Nominal three-phase 250 250 350 — 500 500 750 1000 — 3
MVA class
Rated Values 3
Voltage
Maximum voltage E
kV rms
4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 15 15 15 15 3
Voltage range factor K 2 1.24 1.24 1.19 1.00 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.00
3
Insulation Level
Withstand test voltage
3
Power frequency (1 min.) 19 19 19 19 36 36 36 36 36
kV rms
Impulse kV peak 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95
3
Current
Continuous current at 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
3
60 Hz amperes
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
3
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Short-circuit current (at 29 29 41 63 33 18 28 37 63 3
rated max. kV) I kA rms
Interrupting time cycles 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3
Permissible tripping delay 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y seconds 3
Maximum voltage divided 3.85 3.85 4.0 4.76 6.6 11.5 11.5 11.5 15.0
by K E/K kV rms 2
3
Current Values
Maximum symmetrical
interrupting capability 36 36 49 63 41 23 36 48 63 3
Short-time current K x 1
kA rms 2 3
Closing and latching 97 97 132 170 111 62 97 130 170
capability kA peak 3
Closing and latching 58 58 78 101 66 37 58 77 101
momentary capability
3
Weight Lb (kg)
1200 A 345 (157) 350 (159) 460 (209) 525 (238) 375 (170) 350 (159) 350 (159) 460 (209) 525 (238)
2000 A 345 (157) 410 (186) 490 (223) 530 (241) 410 (186) 410 (186) 410 (186) 490 (223) 530 (241)
3
3000 A 345 (157) 525 (238) 525 (238) 550 (250) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 550 (250) 3
Notes
1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), and C37.09-1999. 3
2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information.
3
3
3
3
3 Extra Capability Breakers 1
3 Description 50 VCP-W25C 50 VCP-W40C 50 VCP-W50C 50 VCP-W63C 75 VCP-W50C 150 VCP-W25C 150 VCP-W40C 150 VCP-W50C 150 VCP-W63C
Identification
3 Nominal voltage class kV 4.16 4.16 4.16 4.16 7.2 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8
3 Nominal three-phase
MVA class
— — — — — — — — —
3 Rated Values
Voltage
3 Maximum voltage E
kV rms 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 10.3 17.5 17.5 17.5 15.0
Voltage range factor K 2 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
3 Insulation Level
3 Power frequency (1 min.)
kV rms 24 24 24 24 42 42 42 42 42
3 Impulse kV peak 75 75 75 75 95 95 95 95 95
3 Current
Continuous current at 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
60 Hz amperes
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
3 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
3 Short-circuit current (at

rated max. kV) I kA rms 25 40 50 63 50 25 40 50 63
3 Interrupting time cycles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Permissible tripping delay
3 Y seconds 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
Maximum voltage divided
by K E/K kV rms 2 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 10.3 17.5 17.5 17.5 15.0
3
Current Values
Maximum symmetrical
3 interrupting capability
Short-time current K x 1
3 kA rms 2 25 40 50 63 50 25 40 50 63
Closing and latching
capability kA peak 97 139 139 175 139 97 139 139 175
3
momentary capability 58 83 83 104 83 58 83 83 104
3 Weight Lb (kg)
1200 A 350 (159) 460 (209) 525 (238) 350 (159) 460 (209) 350 (159) 350 (159) 460 (209) 525 (238)
3 2000 A 410 (186) 490 (223) 530 (241) 410 (186) 490 (223) 410 (186) 410 (186) 490 (223) 530 (241)
3 3000 A 525 (238) 525 (238) 550 (250) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 550 (250)
Notes
3 1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), and C37.09-1999.
2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information.
3 3 Tested for 3 seconds.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Generator Breakers (to ANSI C37.013) 1 3
Description 50 VCP-WG50 50 VCP-WG63 50 VCP-WG75 150 VCP-WG50 150 VCP-WG63 150 VCP-WG75 3
Identification
Nominal voltage class kV 4.16 4.16 4.16 13.8 13.8 13.8
3
Nominal three-phase MVA class — — — — — — 3
Rated Values
Voltage 3
Maximum voltage E kV rms 4.76 4.76 4.76 15.0 15.0 15.0
Voltage range factor K 2 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 3
Insulation Level
Withstand test voltage 3
Power frequency (1 min.) kV rms 19 19 19 36 36 36
Impulse kV peak 60 60 60 95 95 95 3
Current
Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 3
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
3
4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3
Short-circuit current (at rated max. kV) kA rms 50 63 75 50 63 75
Interrupting time cycles
1200 A 3 3 3 3 3 3
3
2000 A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3000 A 3 3 3 3 3 3
4000 A 5 5 5 5 5 5 3
Permissible tripping delay Y seconds
1200 A 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 3
2000 A 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3
3000 A 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 1 and 3 3
4000 A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum voltage divided by K E/K kV rms 2 4.76 4.76 4.76 15.0 15.0 15.0
3
Current Values
Maximum symmetrical interrupting capability
3
Short-time current K x 1 kA rms 2 50 63 75 50 63 75
Closing and latching capability kA peak 137 173 206 137 173 206
3
Closing and latching momentary capability 82 103 123 82 103 123
3
Weight Lb (kg)
1200 A 525 (238) 525 (238) 926 (419) 525 (238) 525 (238) 926 (419)
2000 A 530 (241) 530 (241) 936 (424) 530 (241) 530 (241) 936 (424)
3
3000 A 550 (250) 550 (250) 946 (429) 550 (250) 550 (250) 946 (429) 3
4000 A 956 (433) 956 (433) 956 (433) 956 (433) 956 (433) 956 (433)
Notes
3
1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), C37.09-1999 and C37.013 (including C37.013a-2007).
2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1)
3 Drawout Circuit Breaker Type
Identification 50 VCP-W25 50 VCP-W40 50 VCP-W50 50 VCP-W63 75 VCP-W40 75 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W25 150 VCP-W40 150 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W63
3 Rated Values
3 Maximum voltage (V)

kV rms 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 8.25 15 15 15
15
3 Power frequency Hz 1 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Insulation Level
3 Power frequency
withstand voltage (1 min.)
kV rms 19 19 19 19 36 36 36 36 36 36
3 Lightning impulse
withstand voltage
3 (1.2 x 50 μs) kV peak 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 95
Continuous current A rms 2 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 j 1200 1200 1200 j
3 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 j
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 j
3 Short-Circuit Ratings
(Reference C37.04-1999
3 and C37.06-2009 except
as noted j)
Symmetrical interrupting
3 current (I) kA rms sym 3 25 40 50 63 40 50 25 40 50 63
DC component (% DC) 4 50 50 44 55 50 44 50 50 44 55
3 Asymmetrical interrupting
current (It) kA rms asym
3 total 5 31 49 59 80 49 59 31 49 59 80
3 current (2.6 x I) kA peak 65 104 130 164 104 130 65 104 130 164
Short-time withstand
3 current rms 6 25 40 50 63 40 50 25 40 50 63
Transient Recovery
3 Voltage parameters
are based on TD-4
Peak voltage
3 (E2) = (uc) (kV peak) 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 14 14 28 j, 25.7 25.7 25.7 28 j
Time to peak
3 (T2 = t3 x 1.137) (μsec) 50 50 50 50 59 59 75 75 75 75
TRV rise time (t3) (μsec) 44 44 44 44 52 52 66 66 66 66
3 RRRV = uc/t3 (kV/μsec) 7 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.27 0.27 0.42, 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.42
Interrupting time
3 ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Cycles (60 Hz) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 Operating duty (duty cycle) O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s– O–0.3s–
CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO CO–3m–CO
3 Mechanical endurance
no-load operations 89 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
3 Notes
1 All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz, however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no de-rating.
3 2 4000 A fan cooled rating is available for 3000 A circuit breakers.

3 Because the voltage range factor K=1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated symmetrical interrupting current.
3 4 Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from the minimum opening time plus the assumed
minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz).

5 The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (I ) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asym total.
t
3 6 Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009.
7 RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E /T .
2 2
3 8 Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.
9 All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
j These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000.
3
3
3
3.1
Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1), continued
Drawout Circuit Breaker Type
3
Identification 50 VCP-W25 50 VCP-W40 50 VCP-W50 50 VCP-W63 75 VCP-W40 75 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W25 150 VCP-W40 150 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W63
Capacitance Current
3
Switching Capability
(Reference C37.04a-2003, 3
C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-
2005)
Cable-charging current 3
Class C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2
A rms 3–10 3–10 3–10 7.5–25 7.5–25 7.5–25 7.5–25 7.5–25 7.5–25 7.5–25 3
Isolated shunt capacitor
bank current 3
Class C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2, C2, C1 C2, C2, C1 C2, C2, C1 C2
A rms 3
1200 A 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630
2000 A 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 3
3000 A 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600
Back-to-Back 3
Capacitor Switching
Capacitor bank current
Class C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2, C2, C1 C2, C2, C1 C2, C2, C1 C2
3
A rms
1200 A 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630 75–630
3
2000 A 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000
3
3000 A 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600
Inrush current kA peak 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3
Inrush frequency kHz
1200 A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 3
2000 A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
3000 A 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 3
Out-of-Phase Switching
Voltage = 1.44 x V (kV rms) 7 7 7 7 12 12 22 22 22 22 3
Current = 0.25 x I (kA rms) 6.3 10 12.5 15.8 10 12.5 6.3 10 12.5 15.8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
VCP-W Vacuum Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 1

3 Circuit Breaker Type
270 VCP-W750 270 VCP-W1000 270 VCP-W1250 270 VCP-W1600 270 VCP-W2000 270 VCP-W25C 270 VCP-W32C 270 VCP-W40C
3 Identification
3 Nominal voltage class kV 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27

Nominal three-phase MVA class 750 1000 1250 1600 2000 — — —
3 Rated Values
Voltage
3 Maximum voltage E kV rms 27 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 27 27 27
Voltage range factor K 3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
3 Insulation Level
3 Power frequency (1 min.) kV rms 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Impulse kV peak 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
3 Current
Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
3 1200 1200 1200 2000 2000 1600 1600 1600
3 2000 2000 2000 — — — — —

Short-circuit current (at rated 16 22 25 25 40 25 7 31.5 8 40 9
maximum kV) 45
3 Interrupting time ms (cycles) 83 (5) 6 83 (5) 6 83 (5) 6 83 (5) 6 83 (5) 6 50 (3) 50 (3) 50 (3)
3 Maximum permissible tripping delay

Y seconds
2 2 2 2 2 2.5 1.6 1.0
3 Transient recovery voltage

E2 kV peak 51 51 51 51 51 50 50 50
3 T2 μs 105 105 105 105 105 50 50 50

Current Values
Closing and latching capability 43 60 68 85 106 85 100 112
3 (2.6 K times rated short-circuit current)
kA peak
3 Capacitor switching cable 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
charging amperes
3 Weight Lb (kg)
600 A 460 (209) 460 (209) 460 (209) 545 (247) 545 (247) 545 (247) 545 (247) 545 (247)
3 1200 A 480 (218) 480 (218) 480 (218) 560 (254) 600 (272) 560 (254) 560 (254) 560 (254)
2000 A 500 (227) 500 (227) 500 (227) — — — — —
3
Notes
3 1 CESI tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04, C37.09 and C37.06. Consult Eaton for CESI copies of test reports on file. Operating duty cycle CO-15 seconds-CO.
Operating time values: Opening 33–55 ms, closing 50–60 ms and reclosing 18 cycles (300 ms).
2 Tested at 28.5 kV.
3 3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI.

4 Also maximum interruption rating and short-time current rating.
3 5 Duration of short-time current = 3 seconds, except as noted in footnotes 7, 8 and 9.

6 Optional interrupting time of 50 ms (3 cycles) is available.
7 Duration of short-time current = 2.5 seconds.
3 8 Duration of short-time current = 1.6 seconds.
9 Duration of short-time current = 1 second.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings
3
Type VCP-W Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 12
Circuit Breaker Type 3
380 VCP-W 6 and 380 VCP-W 25 and 380 VCP-W 32 and 380 VCP-W 21 and 380 VCP-W 40 and
Identification 380 VCP-WR 16 380 VCP-WR 25 380 VCP-WR 32 380 VCP-WR 21 380 VCP-WR 40 3
Rated Values
Voltage
3
Nominal voltage class kV rms 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5
Maximum voltage V kV rms 38 38 38 38 38 3
Voltage range factor K3 1 1 1 1.65 8 1
V/K 3 kV rms 38 38 38 23 8 38
3
Insulation Level Withstand Test
Power frequency (1 minute) kV rms 80 80 80 80 80
3
Lightning impulse 1.2 x 50 4 kV peak 170 170 170 170 170
3
Current
Continuous current at 60 Hz 5 A rms 600 600 600 1200 1200
3
1200 1200 1200 2000 2000
1600 1600 1600 3000FC 3000FC 3
2000 2000 2000 2500 2500
— — 3000FC — — 3
— — 2500 — —
Short-Circuit Current
3
Sym. interrupting at V (Isc) kA rms 16 25 31.5 21 40
% DC component (Idc) 47 47 47 47 47
3
Asym. factor S (ref.) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
3
Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms total 19.2 30.0 37.8 39.5 48.0
Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (Kxlsc) 3 kA rms 16 25 31.5 35 8 40 3
Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (SxKxlsc) 3 kA rms total 19.3 30.0 37.8 42.0 48.0
Closing and latching capability kA peak 43 68 85 95 107 3
Momentary current withstand capability kA rms total 26 40 50 56 63
Short-time current kA rms 16 25 31.5 35 40
3
Duration of short-time current s 3 3 3 3 3
3
Operating duty (duty cycle) 9j 9j 9j (2500 only 9k) 9j (2500 only 9k) 9k
Rated reclosing factor (R) % 100 100 100 (2500 only 0%) 100 (2500 only 0%) 100 3
Interrupting time 6
rms 83 83 83 83 83 3
Cycle 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum permissible tripping delay sec. 2 2 2 2 2 3
Transient recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Mechanical endurance 7 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
3
Notes 3
1 KEMA tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04-1979, C37.09-1979 and C37.06-1979 (operating duty sequence CO–15s–CO). Typical operating time values: operating 45 ms, closing 75 ms
and reclosing 300 ms (18 cycles).

2 The standard breaker is not rated for capacitor switching. If you require capacitor switching, please refer to the “C” breakers.
3
3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI. Refer to the Consulting Application Guide for more information.
4 The ANSI C37.06 standard requires 150 kV BIL. If higher BIL levels are required, please refer to the “C” breakers. 3
5 For forced air cooled fixed breaker applications, consult Eaton.
6 If you require 50 ms (3 cycle) interrupting time, please refer to the “C” breakers.
7 No-load operations.
3
8 At 23 kV rms (rated maximum voltage/K). Rated maximum symmetrical interrupting capability = 35 kA rms (K x 1).
9 CO–15s–CO. 3
j Rated and tested also for rapid reclosing capability O–0.3s–CO.
k Not rated for rapid reclosing.
3
3
3
Type VCP-WC Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings

3
Type VCP-WC Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 12
3 Drawout Circuit Breaker Type
380 VCP-W 16C and 380 VCP-W 25C and 380 VCP-W 32C and 380 VCP-W 21C and 380 VCP-W 40C and
3 Identification 380 VCP-WR 16C 380 VCP-WR 25C 380 VCP-WR 32C 380 VCP-WR 21C 380 VCP-WR 40C
Rated Values
3 Voltage
Nominal voltage class kV rms 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5
3 Maximum voltage V kV rms 38 38 38 38 38
Voltage range factor K 3 1 1 1 1.65 8 1
3 V/K 3 kV rms 38 38 38 23 8 38
3 Insulation Level Withstand Test

Power frequency (1 minute) kV rms 80 80 80 80 80
3 Lightning impulse 1.2 x 50 μs 4 kV peak 170 170 170 170 170

Current
3 Continuous current at 60 Hz 5 A rms 600 600 600 1200 1200
1200 1200 1200 2000 2000
3 1600 1600 1600 3000FC 3000FC
2000 2000 2000 2500 2500
3 — — 3000FC — —
— — 2500 — —
3 Short-Circuit Current
Sym. interrupting at V (Isc) kA rms 16 25 33.1 21 40
3 % DC component (Idc) 75 65 57 52 63
Asym. factor S (ref.) 1.46 1.36 1.3 1.24 1.34
3 Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms total 23.3 34.0 42.5 26.1 53.5
3 Maximum sym. interrupting at V/K (Kxlsc) 3 kA rms

3
16 25 33.1 35 8 40
Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (SxKxlsc) kA rms total 23.3 34.0 42.5 43.4 53.5
3 Closing and latching capability kA peak 50 75 91 102 107
Momentary current withstand capability kA rms total 30 44 54 60 65
3 Short-time current kA rms 16 25 31.5 35 40
Duration of short-time current s 3.09 3.09 3.09 3.21 3.04
3 Operating duty (duty cycle) 9j 9j 9j (2500 A k) 9j (2500 A k) 9k
Rapid reclosing factor (R) % 100 100 100 (2500 A N/A) 100 (2500 A N/A) —
3 Interrupting time 6
rms 50 50 50 50 50
3 Cycles 3 3 3 3 3
Maximum permissible tripping delay sec. 2 2 2 2 2
3 Transient recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 —
3 1.3 1.3 0.7 1.3 —

— — 0.7 1.3 —
3 — — 1.3 0.7 —
— — 1.3 — —
3 — — 0.7 — —
Notes
3 1 KEMA tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04-1979, C37.09-1979 and C37.06-1979 (operating duty sequence CO–15s–CO).
Typical operating time values: operating 45 ms, closing 75 ms and reclosing 300 ms (18 cycles).
3 2 The standard breaker is not rated for capacitor switching. If you require capacitor switching, please refer to the “C” breakers.
3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI. Refer to the Consulting Application Guide for more information.
3 4 The ANSI C37.06 standard requires 150 kV BIL. If higher BIL levels are required, please refer to the “C” breakers.
5 For forced air cooled fixed breaker applications, consult Eaton.
6 If you require 50 ms (3 cycle) interrupting time, please refer to the “C” breakers.
3 7 At 23 kV rms (rated maximum voltage/K). Rated maximum symmetrical interrupting capability = 35 kA rms (K x 1).
8 CO–15s–CO.
3 9 Rated and tested also for rapid reclosing capability O–0.3s–CO.

j Not rated for rapid reclosing.
No-load operations.
3
3.1
Type VCP-WC Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings
3
Type VCP-WC Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, continued12
Drawout Circuit Breaker Type 3
380 VCP-W 16C and 380 VCP-W 25C and 380 VCP-W 32C and 380 VCP-W 21C and 380 VCP-W 40C and
Identification 380 VCP-WR 16C 380 VCP-WR 25C 380 VCP-WR 32C 380 VCP-WR 21C 380 VCP-WR 40C 3
Capacitor Switching Ratings
Definite Purpose
3
Overhead line current A rms 5 5 5 (2500 A N/A) 5 (2500 A N/A) —
Isolated shunt capacitor bank current A rms 250 250 250 250 — 3
250 and 1000 (2000 A) 250 and 1000 (2000 A) 250 and 1000 (2000 A 250 and 1000 (2000 A —
and 3000FC) and 3000FC) 3
(2500 N/A) (2500 N/A)
Definite Purpose—Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching 3
Cable charging current A rms 56 56 53 53 53
Capacitor bank current A rms 250 250 250 250 — 3
250 and 1000 (200 A) 250 and 1000 (200 A) 250 and 1000 (2000 A 250 and 1000 (2000 A —
and 3000FC)
(2500 N/A)
and 3000FC)
(2500 N/A)
3
Inrush current kA peak 20 20 20 20 — 3
20 and 20 (2000 A) 20 and 20 (2000 A) 20 and 20 (2000 A and 20 and 20 (2000 A —
3000FC)
(2500 N/A)
and 3000FC)
(2500 N/A)
3
Inrush frequency kHz 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 —
3
5 and 5 (2000 A) 5 and 5 (2000 A) 5 and 5 (2000 A and 5 and 5 (2000 A —
3000FC) and 3000FC)
(2500 N/A) (2500 N/A) 3
Mechanical endurance (no-load operations) 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

CA08100005E Vol04 Ibook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CA08100005E Vol04 Ibook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 4 Circuit Protection

© 2010 Eaton Corporation

Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection 5

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Terms and Conditions

Technical and Descriptive Publications

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Copyright ©2019 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

Using the Eaton Catalog Library

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com i

ii Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Contents

1 Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out

1 QHPX P 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — V4-T1-7

1 QPGFT P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — — V4-T1-9

V4-T1-2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-3

Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out, continued

1 QCHW C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 62.5 14a — 22,000 — 5000 3

1 QCHGFT C, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — — — 22,000 — — — — V4-T1-28

V4-T1-4 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-5

V4-T1-6 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-7

QUICKLAG Type QPGFT Single-Pole Contents

● Built and listed to UL 1053

V4-T1-8 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-9

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity

V4-T1-10 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-11

1 2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order BAB1015L1 or BAB1020L1.

V4-T1-12 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-13

V4-T1-14 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-15

QUICKLAG Type QBGFT Single-Pole Contents

V4-T1-16 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-17

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type:

1 Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

V4-T1-18 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-19

1 10 QC1010 QC2010 QC2010H 1 QC3010H 1 —

1 35 QC1035 QC2035 QC2035H QC3035H QC4035H

1 70 — QC2080 QC2080H QC3080H QC4080H

1 100 QC1100N — QC2100N QC3100N —

V4-T1-20 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-21

QUICKLAG Type QCD Miniature Circuit Breakers

1 30 QCD1030 QCD2030 QCD2030H QCD3030H

1 70 — QCD2070 QCD2070H QCD3070H

V4-T1-22 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com

● CSA File No. LR48907

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V4-T1-23

1 30 QCR1030 QCR2030 QCR2030H QCR3030H

1 (#10–32 plus/minus terminal screw provided).

phase on breaker load side.

Contact the Customer Support Center at 1-800-356-1243.

V4-T1-24 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2019 www.eaton.com